





^ "^ 






i-* 



% **' 



* 



'♦% 






^ 









V<^ 



,0o, 



^ ^ 






^ 



**> 






<A 



J> " 




V""! ■?. . -:■' ■ 










«- 



■ s ,0'' 



% *v 






-s $ % 






^ v* 







\ ^ 



^ ,^ v 



% **" 



.T r 






















«5 "^ ' 




V tf 



«5 " 7 U- 









6 'U ' ^ 






OLLENDORFF'S 

NEW METHOD 



OF LEARNING TO 



READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 



GERMAN LANGUAGE 



TO WHICH IS ADDED 



A SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 

OF 

GERMAN GRAMMAR, 

BY 

G. J. ADLER, A.M., 

ERATI 
ORK. 

9 



PROFESSOR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN THE UNIVERSITY 
OF THE CITY OF NEW-YORK 



EIGHTH EDITION. 



NEW- YORK: 
D. APPLETON & CO., 200 BROADWAY. 

PHILADELPHIA: 
GEORGE S. APPLETON, 148 CHE S NU T- STREET 

18 5 0. 






T 



\0*\ 



* 



^SO <~ 



Entirkd according to Act of Congress, in the year 1845, by 

D. APPLETON & CO., 

ji the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New-Yoifc 



QrtAA.Q. OA/-Q'. 

8 191? 



NOTICE. 



k Key to the exercises of this Grammar is published in a separate volume 



PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION. 



In presenting to the American Public a new and improved edi- 
tion of Ollendorff's New Method, it would seem to be only 
necessary to state what alterations or additions have been 
made. To say anything in commendation of the book itself 
appears almost gratuitous ; for the extensive circulation which 
it now enjoys in England, and the increasing demand for it in 
this country, its costliness notwithstanding, constitute the strong, 
est evidence in its favour. The fact that Ollendorff has been 
sought after with avidity, whilst many other Grammars of high 
merit have met with but a slow and cold reception, justifies the 
inference that, as a book of instruction, it presents facilities 
which in similar works were either entirely wanting or but 
imperfectly afforded. 

Even the excellent and highly scientific Grammar, written 
for the use of Englishmen by the genial Becker himself, who 
by his £)rgam£m, his Seutfcfye 2Bortbtlbtmg, and subsequently 
by his £)eutfcfye ©rammctttf, has made such valuable contribu- 
tions to the Philosophy of Language, and has almost revolu- 
tionized the terminology of Grammar in his own country, has, 
in the space of fifteen years, not even undergone a second edi- 
tion, and is now entirely out of print. Surely, Becker has de- 
served a better fate among scholars at least ! 



IV 

The success of Ollendorff is unquestionably due to his 
method, by which he has made the German, heretofore noto- 
riously difficult to foreigners, accessible to the capacity of all, 
young or old, learned or unlearned. Instead of pre-supposing 
a familiarity with English Grammar in the pupil, and then 
presenting a synthetic view of the principles of the language, 
as is commonly done, he begins apparently without any system, 
with the simplest phrases, from which he deduces the rules, 
until gradually and almost imperceptibly he makes the pupil 
master of the etymology and syntax of every part of speech. 
The rules are, as it were, concealed amid the multitude of 
exercises which are added to each lesson, and which serve to 
fortify the learner in the princip es he has already acquired. 
Another characteristic feature of the book, and one in which 
its practical merit chiefly consists is, that the examples on 
which the rules are based, and those which are intended to 
illustrate the rules, are not derived from the German Classics ; 
they are neither the ideal language of Poetry, nor the rigorous 
language of Science, but of life, — short sentences, such as one 
would be most likely to use in conversing in a circle of friends, 
or in writing a letter. 

Special prominence is given from the beginning to the end 
of the book to the idioms of the language, as it were the Ger- 
man side of the German — a most important element in the 
acquisition of any language. In the beginning of the book 
the exercises are of necessity very brief and simple, and the 
Author, according to his own confession (page 351), has of- 
ten sacrificed logical accuracy to his eagerness for thoroughly 
grounding the pupil in the principles of inflection and construc- 
tion previously laid down. As the pupil advances the exer- 



cises become longer and more complicated. The same phrases 
are often repeated and thrown into new combinations, and 
constant reference is made to previous parts of the work. It 
is thus that Ollendorff gradually introduces at once the ety- 
mology and syntax of German Grammar. His method is so 
lucid, that no one can go through with the exercises — provided 
he be guided by a competent master — without acquiring such 
a familiarity with the principles of the language, and such a 
stock of words and idioms as will enable him to speak and to 
write it with considerable facility. 

The book, as it is now presented to the public, is from the 
Frankfort edition, which, in accuracy of expression, as far as 
the English is concerned, in the wording of the rules as well 
as in typographical arrangement, is so far superior to the Lon- 
don edition, that it seems to be the work of a different author. 
So striking was found to be the difference between the two edi- 
tions that the Editor, who at first was not in possession of a 
German copy, and had already put into the hands of the printer 
a considerable portion of the London copy revised, deemed it 
afterwards his duty to recommence the stereotyping of the book 
on the basis of the German. 

The Editor has ventured to make such alterations as he 
thought would give additional value to the book. Instead of 
devoting two lessons to a mere mechanical explanation of Ger- 
man writing, as was done in the other editions, he simply pre- 
fixed' to the book, on one page, an improved form of the 
alphabet, and a specimen of German current hand, from which 
the learner can at once perceive how the different letters are 
made and united into words. The orthography of the German, 
which in some cases was antiquated, has been conformed to 



VI 

the most recent and best authorities, chiefly to Heyse, whose 
grammars are at present, perhaps, more extensively used in 
Germany than any others. In some instances, where perspi- 
cuity would otherwise have suffered^ the phraseology of rules 
has been amended. Wherever the English was crabbed or in- 
correct in the exercises it has been revised and altered. Great 
care has been taken to present an edition free from typographi- 
cal errors, which often, in works of this kind, are the cause of 
needless and most discouraging perplexity to beginners. In 
this connection the Editor would make special mention ot 
Mr. Edw. Stohlmann, corrector of the press, whose fidelity is 
worthy of all confidence and commendation. 

By the addition of the Systematic Outline, the Editor 
has had a twofold object in view. In a work like Ollendorff's, 
in which each lesson contains a variety of exercises, which 
have no necessary connection with each other, and in which 
the different parts of speech are not systematically classified, 
but scattered in every part of the book, a comprehensive index 
would have been indispensable. Without it, the book would 
have been useless for the purposes of reference, and a complete 
and connected view of the laws which govern the inflection 
of any one part of speech would have been equally impossible. 
It seemed to him, that an attempt at a complete index to the mat- 
ter contained in the book would be a difficult task, and unsatis- 
factory in the end. He has therefore subjoined, as a substitute, 
an outline of Grammar, in which the inflection of words is 
treated briefly, but yet with completeness, and where the learner 
may find in different language perhaps, and in rigorously sys- 
tematic connection, the principles which he met with in the 



Vll 

previous part of the work, besides much that will be new to 
him. 

The second and principal object of making such large addi- 
tions to the book was to adapt it to the use of those who aim, 
not at a practical knowledge of the language, but desire it for 
scientific or literary purposes only. As persons of this descrip- 
tion are commonly men of liberal culture, habituated to the 
terminology of Grammar, and the study of language, they are 
generally impatient of beginning at once the reading of some 
favourite author, and they are aware too, that for them the 
shortest road to reach the goal is to master at once the elements 
of Grammar. As the Author himself has had considerable 
experience in guiding such to a knowledge of the German, he 
has endeavoured to meet their wants by bringing within the 
compass of about one hundred and thirty pages a concise ana- 
lysis of the different parts of speech, with copious paradigms to 
the declensions and conjugations. Though the Outline is brief, 
it will be found that the inflection of the declinable parts oi 
speech, as well as the gender of substantives, is unfolded 
more fully than in Grammars of much larger size. The 
materials are from the best sources, chiefly from the works oi 
Becker and Heyse. Since it was impossible to add a separate 
Syntax without greatly increasing the bulk of the book, the use 
and government of each part of speech has been briefly point- 
ed out in connection with its etymology. 

The " Table of Classification of the Irregular Verbs," and 
also the "■ Government of Verbs," have, after a thorough revi- 
sion and some additions to the list, been adopted from the Lon- 
don edition. The Author regrets that the limits of the work 
would not admit of a more extended treatment of the Parti- 



Vlll 

cles. A clear and thorough analysis of the Adverbs, the Pre- 
positions, and Conjunctions, in which the Greek-like power of 
the German chiefly resides, with a sufficient number of exam- 
ples to make it intelligible, has never yet been given to the 
English student. It is believed, however, that no one will 
suffer any practical inconvenience from this deficiency, as par- 
ticular attention is paid to the use of the particles in other 
parts of the book. 

With respect to his " Systematic Outline," the Editor would 
in conclusion say, that he feels confident that it possesses every 
desirable condition of a complete introduction to the reading of 
the German. May it contribute to spread the study of a lan- 
guage, which in richness and flexibility is the acknowledged 
superior of all its modern sisters — which in creations of Art 
and in works of Science yields precedence to none — of a 
language which contains in itself the germs of its own repro- 
duction, and of an endless development — which still is, as it 
ever has been, r,gefonfcert, ungemtfcfyt iinb nut ftdf) felbergfetcfc!" 



G. J. A* 

September, 1845. 



New-York University, "> 
5. 5 



CONTENTS 



SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 



Pag* 

Parts of Speech, $ 1 . . . 377 

Cases, §2 . 377 

# 
ARTICLES. 

Declension of the articles, § 3. . . . . . . . . 378 

The article, before proper names, § 5 '. . . 379 

" before abstract substantives and names of materials, § 6. 379 
" before common nouns, § 7. ...... 380 

" " idiomatic use of, § 8 380 

" in sentences, § 9. 381 

" contracted with prepositions, § 10 381 

SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS. 

Classification of nouns, §11 382 

I. Their Gender, determined by their signification, § 13 and § 14. . 383 
" determined by their termination, § 15— § 20. . 383 

Gender of compound substantives, § 20 *. 386 

of foreign substantives, § 21. . . . . . . 387 

II. Number. Rules for the formation of the plural, § 22, § 23 and § 24. 388 

Nouns employed in the plural only, § 27 390 

Nouns with two forms of the plural, § 28 390 

HI. Inflection. Declension of common and abstract nouns, § 30. . 391 

Earlier Declension, § 31-§ 38 . - . . 391 

Later Declension, § 38-§ 42. ..... .397 

Declension of foreign substantives, § 42 400 

Declension of proper names of persons, % 43-§ 48. . . 401 

" " " of places, § 48. . 404 

IV. Government of substantives, § 49-§ 52 405 

ADJECTIVES. 
Classification of adjectives, § 52-§ 55. ...... 406 



h 



# 



Page 

I. Inflection, § 55. First declension, § 56. . . . 408 

" Second declension, § 57 and § 58. . 410 

" Third declension, § 59 411 

Observations on the three declensions, § 60 and § 61. . . .412 

II. Comparison, terminational and compound, § 62-$ 66. . . . 414 

" irregular and defective, § 66 and § 67. . . .415 

of adverbs, § 68 416 

III. Use and Government of Adjectives, $ 70. . . 417 

Adjectives with the infinitive, § 72 ; with the genitive, §73 ; with 
the dative, § 74 ; with the accusative, § 74. iii. . . .418 

NUMERALS. 

Classification of numerals, § 75 .419 

List o£ Cardinals and 0#dinals, § 76. .... . . 420 

Observations on their inflection and use, § 77-§ 80. . . . 421 

Compound Numerals: Distributives, Iteratives, &c, Dimidiatives, 

&c, §80 and §81 423 

Indefinite Numerals, § 82 ; implying number, § 83 ; quantity, § 84 ; 

number and quantity both, § 85 424 

The use of numerals, § 86 and § 87. ... 426 

PRONOUNS. 

Classification of pronouns, § 88. 427 

I. Personal Pronouns, § 89 ; including reflexive, § 90, Obs. 3, and 

reciprocal pronouns, § 90, Obs. 4 427 

Indefinite personal pronouns, § 92. • 429 

II. Possessive Pronouns, § 93; conjunctive, § 94. . . . 430 

Absolute possessive pronouns, § 95 431 

HI. Demonstrative Pronouns, their inflection and use, § 97-§ 99. 433 

IV. Determinative Pronouns, § 100-§ 103 434 

V. Relative Pronouns, § 103-§ 106 435 

VI. Interrogative Pronouns, § 106-§ 109. . . . 437 

VERBS. ' k 

Classification of Verbs — Transitive, § 109; Intransitive, § 110; 

Reflexive, § 113; Impersonal, § 114; Auxiliary, § 115. . . . 439 
Personal terminations, § 117; moods, § 118; tenses, § 119. . . .442 
The infinitives, § 120 ; participles, their formation and signification, § 121. 442 
The omission of the prefix g ? in the perfect participle, § 122. . 443 

Auxiliary Verbs of Tenses, their use in the formation of compound 

tenses, § 123 .... 443 ' 

Rules for the formation of compound tenses, § 124 444 



xl 

Paga 
Conditionals, § 126. . . 444 

Conjugation of the auxiliary verbs : fyibcn, § 127 ; fettt, § 128 ; tuerbett, 

§ 129 445 

Intransitive verbs which assume the auxiliary f)aBett, § 131. . . 454 
Intransitive verbs which assume the auxiliary fettt, § 132. . . . 454 
Conjugation of Verbs, § 134; regular and irregular mode of conju- 
gation, § 137. 455 

Table of terminations, § 140 .457 

Formation of the tenses of the passive voice, § 142. . . . 458 

Conjugation of Transitive Verbs, § 143. 459 

" Reflexive Verbs, § 144 463 

" " Intransitive Verbs, § 145. ..... 464 

" " Impersonal Verbs, § 146 466 

Compound Verbs — separable and inseparable, § 148— § 155. . . 467 

Conjugation of compound verbs, 469 

Syntax of the Verb — agreement, § 156-§ 159 470 

Use of the tenses and moods, § 159— § 165 471 

The infinitive without % it, § 167 and § 168 472 

The infinitive with % it, § 169-§ 172 473 

Use of the participles, § 172-§ 178 475 

ADVERBS. 

Definition and classification of adverbs, § 178. . . . . . 477 

Adverbs of Place and of Time, § 179 477 

" Modality, of Quantity, of Quality or Manner, 

of Intensity, 478 

I Signification of the adverbs J) t it and fj e r, § 180 478 

The pronominal adverbs b a and tt) o$$nd their compounds, . . . 479 
Comparison of adverbs, see § 68. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

Definition, § 181 ; list of German prepositions, . . . . . 480 

Prepositions which govern the genitive, § 184. 480 

"* -the dative, § 185 481 

" " " the accusative, § 186. . . . . .481 

Prepositions governing both the dative and accusative, § 187. . .' 482 

Three prepositions which govern the genitive and dative both, § 188. . 482 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

Classification of conjunctions — copulative, disjunctive, Siversative, con- 
ditional, concessive, &c, § 191 483 



XII 
INTERJECTIONS. 

Paga 

A list of German interjections, § 193 . 484 

Observations on their use, . 485 

Classification of the Irregular Verbs, . . 486 

A Table of the Sixteen Verbs which are Irregulap only in 

part, ' . . 489 

Table of Irregular Verbs, . . .... 490-506 

The government of verbs, . ... 506-510 



OLLENDORFF'S 

GEEIAI GEAMMAR. 



FIRST LESSON.— ffirste Cation. 

OF READING. 

In German every letter is pronounced. Hence it fol- 
lows, that foreigners are able to read the language 
with greater facility : reading may be acquired in one 
lesson. 

PRINTED LETTERS OF THE GERMAN ALPHABET. 

There are in German, as in English, twenty-six let- 
ters, of which we give : 



The Figures, 


The Pronunciation^ 


The Power. 




A 










r- 






-\ 




CAPITALS. 


SMALL LETTERS. 






% 




«, 




ah, 


a, 


f&, 




*, 




bay, 


b, 


e, 




c, 




tsay, 


c, 


2V 




t>, 




day, 


d, 


fc 




*/ 




a, 


e, 


% 




f, 




ef, 


f, 


% 




0/ 




gay, 


g> 


$ 




*, 




hah, 


h, 


% 




»/ 




e, 


i, 


%* 




i, 




yot, 


j» 


% 




f, 




kah, 


k, 


8/ 




*, 




el, 


1, 


m, 




m, 




em, 


m, 


% 




«/ 




en, 


n, 


©, 




o, 




o, 


o, 



* I** print, the Germans have but one capital letter for the rowel i and th« 

consonant j. 
1 



The Figures. The Pronunciation, The Power 



r 


"N 






CAPITALS. 


SMALL LETTERS. 






% 


fr 


pay, 


P> 


&, 


q/ 


koo, 


q> 


% 


r, 


err, 


r, 


© 


f<*>/ 


ess, 


s, 


K 


t, 


tay, 


t, 


u, 


«/ 


oo, 


u, 


as, 


*v 


fow, 


v, 


SB, 


*v 


vay, 


w, 


xK,f 


r, 


iks, 


x, 


% 


9/ 


ypsilon, 


y> 


3, 


3, 


tset, 


z. 



Most of the German letters being pronounced as in 
English, we shall only present those that follow a dif- 
ferent pronunciation. 

TABLE OF THOSE VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS, THE PRONUNCIATION 
OF WHICH IS NOT THE SAME AS IN ENGLISH. 

Are In 

Figures Name pronounced the English German Examples. 

words : 

made, SBqter, fathers. 

0, o-a, i, bird,* S6ft>p, lion, 

it, oo-a, f @tild>happiness. 

k,% e-a, ie, field, SfBiefe, meadow. 




ei, a-e, \ C SOBetfe, manner, 

ei), a-ypsilon, > I, I, < fe*)tt, to be. 

at, ah-e, ; ( rSaifer, emperor. 

an, ah-a-oo, ) k n 5 SSfaime, trees. 



boy,|| { 



eu, a-oo, $ U J> uu - y ' !l I Scute, people 



* The English word bird does not quite answer to the sound of this vowel ; 
it has rather the sound of eu in the French words : feu, coeur, fieur, jeune, 
peu. 

t There is no sound corresponding to this vowel in English, and, in order to 
learn it well, the pupils must hear it pronounced; it answers to the sound of u 
in the French words : bat, nil, vertu. 

$ The method which we have adopted, of placing analagous sounds to^ 
gether, will facilitate to learners the study of the pronunciation. There are 
even some provinces in Germany, where (i and 5 are hoth pronounced a ; ik 
and ie, e; et or et), eu and <iu, /. 

|J We have only been able to indicate the sound* oi' the two diphthongs Cttl 



Figures. 


Name Are pronounced 


In the English 


German Examples 




as : 


words : 




an, 


ah-oo, ou, 


house, 


Qaug, house 


»/ 


oo, oo, 


boot, 


gut, good. 



Of the simple and compound consonants the follow- 
ing differ in their pronunciation from the English con- 
sonants : 

& 

@, before a, 0, It, before a consonant, or at the end 
of a syllable, has the sound of k. Ex. Sato, Cato ; 
@onrob, Conrad ; @ur, cure ; grebtt, credit ; ©pectaM, 
noise. Before the other vowels, the letter c is pro- 
nounced like ts. Ex. (Safar, dtesar; gtcero, 0icero; 
@ere$, Ceres. 

(Sf), which is called tsay-hah, is pronounced like k : 
1. when at the beginning of a word. Ex. (Sfyor, choir ; 
Sfyromf, chronicle ; @f)rijl> christian ; 2. when followed 
by f or g. Ex. SSiirfjfe, box ; SOBadfyS, wax. In words 
derived from the French, it preserves the French 
sound. Ex. Sfyarlatmt, quack. This consonant, when 
preceded by a, 0, U, is pronounced from the throat. 
Ex. 33ad), rivulet ; £ocfy, hole ; SSudE), book ; ©pracfye, 
language. Placed any where else, it is articulated 
with a less guttural sound. Ex. SSiicfyer, books ; SSIerf), 
iron plate ; tcfy, I ; ©ejTcfyt, face. 

©♦ 

©, at the beginning of a syllable, has a hard sound, 
as in the English word go, Ex. ©abe, gift ; ©Ott, God ; 
gut, good ; ©tft, poison. When at the end of a syl- 
lable, it has a medium sound between those of the gut- 
tural d) and f . Ex. Stag, day ; ntogltrf), possible ; flug, 
prudent ; @fjTg, vinegar ; ettug, eternal. In words bor- 
rowed from the French, g is pronounced as in French. 
Ex. ?oge, box (in a theatre) ; ©erne, genius. 

and eu approximative^ ; their pronunciation is not quite the same, and in of 
der to become familiar with them, the pupils must hear their master pro- 
nounce them. 



The pronunciation of g cannot be properly acquired, 
unless from the instructor's own lips ; he must there- 
fore make his pupils pronounce the following words : 

©age, tradition. ^utnggancjer, idler. 

%a[Q, tallow. SogUnq, pupil. 

SBetg, mountain. Unoft, anguish. 

3nxtg, dwarf. Ca'nQC, length, 

ga'ucjnen, to deny. 9}?enge, quantity 

(Sieg, victory. dh'fang, singing, 

gfa'btgfrtt, capacity. JUang, sound. 

9)?6g(id)?ett, possibility. Sfang, ring. 

Sfflcigfc, maid-servant. Sungfrou, virgin. 

20?agt>e, maid-servants. Sunc^cfell, bachelor. 

$. 

The letter f) is aspirated at the beginning of a sylla- 
ble. Ex. $)CMt>, hand ; jjefc, hero ; £at, hat. It is 
mute in the middle and at the end of a syllable, and 
then it lengthens the vowel that precedes or follows it. 
Ex. 33af)tt, road ; §of)tt, mockery ; ?ofytt, reward ; lefyren, 
to teach ; .St baler, crown (coin) ; Slut), cow ; Zijvane, 
tear ; tfyittt, to do. 

3 (yot) has the sound of y in the English word you. 
Ex. 3<*gtV chase ; S&ger, hunter ; jeber, each ; jefy, at 
present. 

D. 
D is always followed by u, and in combination with 
that letter pronounced like kv in English. Ex. Dual, 
torment ; Duefle, source. 

©. 
©, when initial, has the pronunciation of z in Eng- 
lish. Ex. ©ante, seed ; ©eele, soul. 

©df) is pronounced like sh in English. Ex. ©cfyaf, 
sheep ; ©cfyife, shield. 

©$♦ 
f is pronounced like 55 in English Ex. $a£, hatred ; 



!t)et#, white. This double consonant is compounded of 

f and J, and is called ess-tset. 

% 

% is compounded of t and J, and has the sound of 
these two consonants combined. Ex. ©djag, treasure ; 
spu£, finery. 

8* 

S3 is sounded like /. Ex. Setter, father ; 23owtanb, 
tutor ; Self, people. 

28* 

9B is pronounced like an English v and not like w. 
Ex. 28atb, forest ; Sffitefe, meadow. 

3* 

3 has the pronunciation of ts. Ex. 3 a fy*V tooth ; %&t f 
tent. 

EXPLANATION OF SOME SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOK. 

Expressions which vary either in their construction 
or idiom from the English are marked thus : j\ 

A hand (H8F"") denotes a rule of syntax or construction. 



SECOND LESSON— Zmitt Section.* 









Masculine. 


Neuter. 


Nominative, 


the. 


Nom. 


ber* 


ba$. 


Genitive, 


of the. 


Gen. 


beg* 


ie6. 


Dative, 


to the. 


Dat. 


bem* 


bent. 


Accusative, 


the. 


Ace. 


beru 


bag. 



* To Instructors. — Each lesson should be dictated to the pupils, who 
should pronounce each word as soon as dictated. The instructor should also 
exercise his pupils bj r putting the questions to them in various ways. Each 
lesson, except the second, includes three operations : the teacher, in the first 
place, looks over the exercises of the most, attentive of his pupils, putting to 
them the questions contained in the printed exercises ; he then dictates 
to them the next lesson ; and lastly puts fresh questions to them on all the 
preceding lessons. The teacher may divide one lesson into two, or tw.o into 
three, or even make two into one, according to the degree of intelligence of 
his pupils. 



Have you ? 

Yes, Sir, I have. 
Have you the hat 1 
Yes, Sir, I have the hat. 
The ribbon, 
the salt, 
the table, 
the sugar, 
the paper, 



£aben (Ste ? 

3a, mctn fycxt, id) babe. 

£aben @te ben £ttt ? 

3a, mctn Jpert, id) fyafrc ben Jput. 

bae> 2*anb ; 

bc\$ (Sa($ ; 

ben Stfd) ; 

ben 3ucfcr ; 

t>a£ Ropier. 



Obs. The Germans begin all substantives with a 
capital letter. 



Nom. 


my 


Gen. 


of my 


Dat. 


to my. 


Ace. 


my. 



%fyx,your,is declined 

Nom. your. 

Gen. of your. 

Dat. to your. 

Ace. your. 

Have you my hat 1 
Yes, Sir, I have your hat. 
Have you my ribbon 1 
I have your ribbon. 





Masculine. 


Neuter. 


Nom. 


titettt. 


me in. 


Gen. 


metne3. 


memeg. 


Dat. 


meuiem« 


metnem. 


Ace. 


nteinen. 


tnein. 


like mem 


♦ Example : 




Masculine. 


Neuter. 


Nom. 


3br. 


3br.* 


Gen. 


SbreS, 


3tpg* 


Dat. 


3brem. 


TsbrenK 


Ace. 


Stum 


3*. 


.Dab en & 


e metnen . 


but ? 



3a, mctn &err, tcb babe Sfyren £ut. 
£oOen @te mctn ^anb ? 
3d) babe 3br iBank 



EXERCISE 1. 

Ha^e you the salt? — Yes, Sir, I have the salt. — Have you your 
salt? — I have my salt. — Have you the table? — I have the table. — 
Have you my table ] — I have your table. — Have you the sugar]-— 
I have the sugar. — Have you your sugar ? — I have my sugar.— 
Have you the paper? — I have the paper. — Have you my paper 1 ?— 
I have your paper. j" 



* 31)t with a small lettei signifies their, and has the same declension as 
3l>r, your. £, 

f Pupils desirous of making rapid progress, may cofj^ose a great many- 
phrases in addition to those we have given them in the exercises ; but they 
must pronounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make 
separate lists of such substantives, adjectives, pronouns and verbs, as they 
meet with in the course of the lessons, in order to be able to find those words 
more easily, when they have occasion to refer to them in writing their lessons. 



THIRD LESSON.— SDritte Section, 



SBefdjer, which, has the same declension as bet* 
Which. 



Nom. 
Ace. 



Masc. Neut. 

n>etrf)em voei<kje$. 



DECLENSION OF AN ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE 
ARTICLE, OR A WORD WHICH HAS THE SAME TERMINATION.* 



NOM. 

Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



the good, 
of the good. 
to the good. 

the good. 



Masc. 

Nom. ber gute* 
Gen. be£ gutett* 
Dat. bem guten* 
Ace. ben gutem 



Neut. 

ba3 gttte* 
be3 guterr. 
bent gutem 
ba$ gate. 



f/pservation. Adjectives vary in their declensior 
when preceded by : mem, my ; %)v f your ; or by one o\ 
the following words : em, a ; fern, no, none ; bem, thy 
fein, his ; tbr, her ; mtfer, our ; vgtter, your. Example : 



Masc. 



Neut. 



Nom. my good. 

Gen. of my good. 

Dat. to my good. 

Ace. my good. 



N. mem gufer* mem gute£* 

G. meineg gutett* m&tte$ gutem 

D. memem gutem melnem gutett- 

A. memen gutett. mem gute& 



Good, 

bad, 

beautiful or fine, 

ugly, 

great, big or large, 
Have you the good sugar 1 ? 
Yes, Sir, I have the good sugar 

Have you the fine ribbon] ' 
I have the fine ribbon. 
Which hat have you ? 
I have my ugly hat. 
Which ribbon have you 1 
I have your fine ribbon. 



out ; 
febioebt ; 
febctv; 

£'cibvn ©te ben guten Surfer ? 

So, metn £crt, id) bobc t)cn gutcn 

Surfer, 
&obcn (Sic bo? febone 23onb ? 
Sd) babe bo$ febone SBanb. 
835 etcbert £ut baben &e ? 
Set) babe metnen bajjlicben #ut 
SBeEc&tf SBanb baben (Sic ? 
3d) ^bc Sbr fdjitacS £ont>. 



4s btefer, this ; jener, that, &c 



EXERCISE 2. 

Have you the fine nat ] — Yes, Sir, I have the fine hat. — Have 
you my bad hat] — I have your bad hat. — Have you the "bad salt ?-J- 
I have the bad salt. — Have you your good salt] — I have my good 
salt. — Which salt have you] — I have your good salt. — Which su- 
gar have you ] — I have my gooo^ sugar. — Have you my good su- 
gar] — I have your good sugar. — Which -table have you] — I have 
the fine table. — Have youmy fine table] — I have your fine table. — 
Which paper have you] — I have the bad paper. — Have you my 
ugly paper ] — I have your ugly paper. — Which bad hat have you ] 
— I have my bad hat. — Which fine ribbon have you] — I have your 
fine ribbon. 



FOURTH LESSON.— foierU faction. 



Not. 
I have not. 
No, Sir. 

Have you the table ? 
No, Sir, I have it not. 
Have you the paper ] 
No, Sir, I have it not. 



The stone, 
the cloth, 
the wood, 
the leather, 
the lead, 
the gold, 



it. 





Masc. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


et\ 


e$. 


Ace. 


ifyin 


egg 



Bijftt. 

3d) fjabc n t cb t . 
SRetn, mcin &etr. 
£aben Bu ben Stfcb ? 
Sflctn, mcin £>err, id) babe ir)n n t d) t 
£aben @tc bas papier ? 
Sftctn, mem £err, id) \)abt e$ 
nicbt. 

bet (BU'xn ; 

bag Sucb ; 

bat £>ot$ ; 

t>a$ Sebcr ; 

$a$ SBUi ; 

bag ®clb. •-*" 



Obs. The terminations en and ertt are used to form 
adjectives and denote the materials of anything. 



v. 



Of, 


Don; 


golden or of gold, 
leaden — of lead, 
stone — of stone, 
pretty, 


geiben ; 
bleicrn ; 
ftetnern ; 
biibfcb (orttcj). 



JJave you the paper hat ] 
I have it not. 



£aben @te ben paptete 1 
3cb babe i&tt n i cb t 






The wooden table, 
the horse of stone, 
the coat, 
the horse, 
the dog", 
the shoe, 
the thread, 
the stocking', 
the candlestick, 
the golden ribbon,. 



t>cn botytncn Stfdj ; 

bag ftetnerne §)ferb ; 

ten 3?ocf (ba6 JUetb) ; 

ba6 spfetb ; 

fctMi jpunt) ; 

ten ©cbub ; 

ben gaben ; 

ten (Strumpf ; 

ben Ccucbtcr ; 

bas gelbene S3cmb. 



EXERCISE 3. 

lave you the wooden table ] — No, Sir, I have it not. — Which 
table have you] — I have the stone table. — Have you my golden 
candlestick ] — I have it not. — Which stocking have you 1 — I have 
the thread (faben) stocking. — Have -you my thread stocking 1 — 1 
nave not your thread stocking. — Which coat have you 1 — 1 have 
my cloth (tucben) coat. — Which horse have you 1 — I have the wood- 
en horse. — Have you my leathern shoe] — I have it not. — Have 
you the leaden horse] — I have it not. — Have you your good 
wooden horse] — I have it not. — Which wood have you ] — I have 
your good wood. — Have you my good gold ] — I have it not. — 
Which g-old have you] — I have the good gold. — Which stone have 
you] — I have your fine stone. — Which ribbon have you ] — I have 
your golden ribbon. — Have you my fine dog] — I have it. — Have 
you my ugly horse ] — I have it not. 



FIFTH LESSON.— Junfte £atiott. 



The chest, the trunk, 
the button, 
the money, 

Anything, something, 
Not anything, nothing, 

Have you anything ] 

I have nothing. 
The cheese, 
the old bread, 
the pretty dog-, 
the silver (metal), 
the silver ribbon, 

Are you hujMcry ] 



ujMcn 



ben Coffer ; 
ben .ftncpf ; 
U* ©elb. 

© t to a t . 

£okn <Ste rtwa$ ] 

3d) hoik ntd)ts. 

ben .£ofe ; 

bas nftc SBrob ; 

ben arttgen (r)ubfdr>cn) £unb ; 

t)a$ (Silber ; 

t>a$ ftfterne 33anb. 

C <Stnb <Ste fjunqtig ? 
(. f £aben 6ie £una,ct ?* 



* A.s in French : avez-vous fm 

i* 



10 



I am hungry. 
Are you thirsty 1 

I am thirsty. 

Are you sleepy ] 
I am sleepy. 
Are you tired 1 
I am not tired. 

Of the (genitive). 



C 3d) tun foungrig* • 
C t 3* Ijabc hunger. 
C<Stnt> (Sic tmrfttg? 
£ 1 £abcn <Sie £>urft I* 
5 3d) bin tmrfttg. 
J t 3d) fabe 3)urft. 
(Sinb (Sic fdjlafmg ? 
3d) bin (d)(dfctig. 
(Stub Sic miibc ? 
3d) bin mct)t miibc. 






beS- 



OBs. Nouns of the masculine and neuter gender 
take g or e3 in the genitive case singular. 



The tailor's, or of the tailor, 
the dog's, or of the dog, 
the baker's, or of the baker, 
the neighbour's, or of the neigh- 
bour, 
of the salt, 

The baker's dog. 
The tailor's coat. 



bcS Sd)ncibcr6 ; 
fci'8 £unbc$ ; 
bes J8acfcr$ ; 
bc$ 9ftad)bar$ ; 

fces &al^$. 

C bet >*ounb bc$ 23acfcr$, 
(_ beg 2ba#ev$ £unb. 
C bcr SKecf t>c$ <Sd)nctber$, 
t bc$ <Sd)ncit>cr$ ^ocf.f 



EXERCISE 4. 

Have you the leathern trunk ] — I have not the leathern trunk.— 
Have you my pretty trunk 1 — I have not your pretty trunk. — 
Which trunk have you ? — I have the wooden trunk. — Have you 
my old button 1 — I have it not. — Which money have you 1 — I have 
the good money. — W T hich cheese have you 1 — I have the old cheese. 
— Have you anything? — I have something. — Have you my large 
dog ? — I have it not. — Have you your good gold ? — I have it.— 
W 7 hich dog have -you? — I have the tailor's dog. — Have you the 
neighbour's large dog] — I have it not. — Have you the dog's golden 
ribbon ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Which coat have you 1 — I have 
the tailor's good coat. — Have you the neighbour's good bread? — 
I have it not. — Have you my tailor's golden ribbon ? — I have it. — 
Have you my pretty dog's ribbon 1 — I have it not. — Have you the 
good backer's good horse ? — I have it.^-Have you the good tailor's 

* As in French: avez-vous soif? 

f The first of these two expressions is more usual, the latter is preferred 
in poetry. * 



11 



horse 1 — I have it not. — Are you hungry ?- 
you sleepy? — I am not sleepy. — Which cane 



-I am hungry. — Are 
™ndlestick have you ? — I 
have the golden candlestick of my good baker. 



SIXTH LESSON.— 0ed)ste Cedion. 



Anything or something good. 
Nothing or not anything bad. 

Have you anything good ? 
I have nothing bad. 

What ? 

What have you ? 
What have you good ? 
I have the good bread. 

That or the one. 



$td)t$ Scbtcchtc^. 

j&cikn gj.tc ctroaS (55utc^ ? 
3d) babe md)t5 0crj(ect)te& 

2Ba$? 

2£aS f)aben (gtc? 
3Bas fjaben (gie (SHttcS ? 
3d) Ijajbe bos cnife 93rcb. 






ben* 

ba£. 



The neighbour's, or that of the ben fccS Sftadbfrarg. 

i neighbour. 

The tailor's, or that of the tailor, bag be$ <Sd)nctber$. 



Or. 



Dticv. 



The book, bml 23ud). 

Have you my book or that of the jpaben (Sic mcttt ffiucl) cber ba^ be$ 

neighbour? , Sftatf)f>ar6? 

I have that of the neighbour. 3d) rjabe bo* bi'S 97cid)t»ar^. 

Have you your hat or the £>abcn @>te 3f)rcn .put obec ben bc$ 

baker's ? SB&fertf ? 



EXERCISE 5. 

Have you my book ? — I have it not. — Which book have you? — 
[ have my good book. — Have you anything ugly? — I have nothing 
ugly. — I have something pretty. — Which table have you ? — I have 
the baker's. — Have you the baker's dog or the neighbour's? — I 
have the neighbour's. — What have you ? — I have nothing. — Have 
you the good or bad sugar? — I have the good. — Have you fche 
neighbour's good or bad horse? — I have the good (one*). — Have 
you the golden or the silver candlestick ? — I have the silver can- 
dlestick. — Have you my neighbour's paper or that of my tailor ? — 
I have that of your tailor. — Are you hungry or thirsty ? — I am 
hungry. — Are you sleepy or tired ? — I am tired. — What have you 

* Words in the exercises between parentheses,, are not to be translated 



12 

pretty? — I have nothing pretty. — Have you the leather shoe !— 1 
have it not. 



SEVENTH LESSON.— giehente Action. 

Have you my coat or the tailor's 1 £akn @te mctnen $Kecf ober ben be$ 

@cbnctbcr$ ? 
I have yours. 3d) r)afre ben Sfjrtgcn. 

Masculine. Neuter. 

f AT S 

Mine. 



Yours. 



Masculine. IN enter. 

N. ber tnetmge. ba^ tnetmge* 

A. ten metmgett* ba3 nteimge* 

N. ber Sfyrtge. ba3 Sfyrige* 

A. ben Sfyrtgen* bag 3fynge* 



Absolute possessive pronouns, as : ber metmge, mine ; 
ber Sfyrtge, yours ; ber feimge, his, &c, are declined like 
adjectives preceded by the definite article. (See Les- 
son in.) 

Obs. When the conjunctive possessive pronouns : 
mem, my ; 3fyr, your ; fern, his, &c, are used for the 
absolute possessive pronouns : ber metmge, mine ; ber 
Sfyrtge, yours, &c, they terminate in the masculine in 
er and in the neuter in eS* — Ex. : 

Is this your hat 1 3ft bat Sfjt £ut ? 

No, Sir, it is not mine, but yours. Sfltin, metn £>err, e$ tft ntcf>t metner, 

fenbern Sfyter. 
Is this my book ] 3ft baS metn S3ud) ? 

No, it is not yours, but mine. 9?ein, c$ ift md)t S^rc^, fenbern 

nietneS. 

Tllo _„_„ C ber 9J?cmn (vir) ; 

ine man, £ ^ ^^ feen> ^ homo) . 

the stick, ber (Stecf ; 

my brother, metn ^Brubcr ; 

the shoemaker, ber <Sd)ur)mad)cr ; 

the merchant, ber .ftciufmann ; 

the friend, ber $reunb. 
Have you th^ merchant's stick £aben ^ c ben ©tocf be$ .ftauf* 
or yours 1 mannS ober ben Sbrigcn ? 

Neither. 5B e b e r. 

I have neither tne merchant's 3$ fjafcc weber ben @tccf beS jtauf* 
stick nor mine. mannS nod) ben roemigen. 



IS 

Are you hungry or thirsty 1 f |f « j?",*""^ ** ^f ? , 

I am neither hungry nor thirsty. S g* ;> nt ' c *f « *««.f r ^SF 

° J J £ Set) bin webet fyunancj nod) burfttcj 

EXERCISE 6. 

Have you your cloth or mine ] — I have neither yours nor mine. 
— I have neither my bread nor the tailor's. — Have you my stick or 
yours 1 — 1 have mine. — Have you the shoemaker's shoe or the 
merchant's ] — I have neither the shoemaker's nor the merchant's 
— Have you my brother's coat 1 — I have it not. — Which paper 
have you ] — I have your friend's. — Have you my dog- or my 
friend's ] — I have your friend's. — Have you my thread stocking 1 or 
my brothe*is.1 — I have neither yours nor your brother's. — Have 
you my good baker's good bread or that of my friend ] — I have 
neither your good baker's nor that of your friend. — Which bread 
have you 1 — I have mine. — W^hich ribbon have you 1 — I have 
yours. — Have you the good or the bad cheese 1 — I have neither 
the good nor the bad.— Have you anything'?— I have nothing.— 
Have you my pretty or my ugly dog ?— I have neither your pretty 
nor your ugly dog.— /Have you my friend's stick 1—1 have it not. 
— Are you sleepy or hungry 1 — I am neither sleepy nor hungry. — 
Have you the good or the bad salt 1 — I have neither the good nor 
the bad. — Have you my horse or the man's 1 — I have neither yours 
nor the man's. — What have you! — 1 have nothing fine. — Are you 
tired ] — I am not tired. 



EIGHTH LESSON.— &cl)fe Section. 

The cork, bet $)ftepf (pftepfen) ; 

the corkscrew, t>et spftepf$tef)et OPtepfcnjicFjct) ; 

the umbrella, fcer 9?c#enfcfyttm ; 

the boy, t>a Rxiabi (gen. n). 

Obs. Masculine substantives ending in e, take tt 
in the genitive case singular, and keep this termina- 
tion in all the cases of the singular and plural. 

The Frenchman, fcer Jrangefc (gen. n) ; 

the carpenter, bet Bmimctmann ; 

the hammer, bet £amnu'v ; 

the iron, bag (Sifen ; 

iron or of iron, etfetn (adjective) ; 

the nail, bet Stoijcl ; 

the pencil, bet 23Cci|itft ; 



14 

the thimble ber Jtngetljut ; 

the coffee, ter Coffee ; 

the honey, ber ^>cmg ; 

the biscuit, ber Snuebacf. 

Havell £a(>eicf)? 

You have. @te fyaOen. 

What have I ] %£a$ f)at>c td) ] 
Y ou have the carpenter's ham- <Ste baben ben jammer be$ Simmers 
mer. mannS. 

Have I the nail ] Sbabc id) ben 9?acjcl ? 

You have it. ®& Ijaben ibn. 

Have I the bread 1 £cibc id) baS SBrob ? 

You have it. (Sic Men eg. 

I am right. t 3d) bci&c $cd>t. 

I am wrong". j 3d) fyabc Unrcd)t. 

Am I right? j £abc id) 3?ecl)t? 

EXERCISE 7. 

I have neither the baker's dog nor that of my friend. — Are you 
sleepy ] — I am not sleepy. — I am hungry. — You are not hungry. — 
Have I the cork ] — No, Sir, you have it not. — Have I the carpen- 
ter's wood ]— - You have it not. — Have I the Frenchman's good um- 
brella ] — You have it. — Have I the carpenter's iron nail or yours 1 
— You have mine. — You have neither the carpenter's nor mine. — 
Which pencil have I ] — You have that of the Frenchman. — Have 
I your thimble or that of the tailor ] — You have neither mine nor 
that of the tailor. — Which umbrella have 1 ] — You have my good 
umbrella. — Have I the Frenchman's good honey 1 — You have it 
not. — Which biscuit have 1 1 — You have that of my good neigh- 
bour. — Have you my coffee or that of my boy 1 — I have that of 
your good boy. — Have you your cork or mine 1 — I have neither 
yours nor mine. — What have you ] — I have my gfood brother's good 
pencil.- — Am I right? — You are right. — Am I wrong? — You are 
not wrong. — Am I right or wrong 1 — You are neither right nor 
wrong. — You are hungry. — You are not sleepy. — You are neither 
hungry nor thirsty. — You have neither the good coffee nor the good 
sugar. — Wliat have 1 1 — You have nothing. 



NINTH LESSON.— Neunte tztixon. 

Have I the iron or the golden &abc id) ben eifcrnen cber ben <jo(bc* 

nail? nen Sfaqet? 

You have neither the iron nor (Sic baben roeber ben eifcrnen nod) 

the golden nail bm gelbcncn 9togeL 



The sheep, 

the ram, 

the chicken (the hen), 

the ship, 

the bag (the sack), 

the young man, 

the youth, 

Who? 
Who has ? 

Who has the trunk! 
The man has the trunk. 
The man has not the trunk. 
Who has it 1 
The young man has it. 
The young man has it not* 

He has. 
He has the knife. 
He has not the knife. 
He has it. 
Has the man 1 
Has the painter 1 
Has the friend ] 
Has the boy the carpenter's 

hammer 1 
He has it. 
Has the youth it? 
Is he thirsty ] 
He is thirsty. 
Is he tired 1 
He is not tired. 



15 

$>a$ ©cfiaf; 

bet #ammel (bet ©cfiops) ; 

ba£ &ufin ; 

bat ©Aiff; 

bet <Sacf ; 

t>ct junge 9}?enfcfi (gen. en) ; 

bet 3iin$(tng. 

2Bet fyatl 

££et fiat ben Jtoffet ? 

2)cr Sttann fiat ten goffer. 

£)ct Sftann fiat ten Coffer n t d) t. 

S5$er fiat tfin ? 

£)et iungc SJienfcfi fiat tfin. 

*Dct iunge SDienfd) fiat tfjn n i d) t. 

(St ^at. 

(St fiat bo6 9)*cflcr. 

(St fiat bag defter n i d) t ♦ 

(St fiat e& 

£at bet 9}?ann ? 

£at ber 9Met ? 

£at bet gteunb ? 

|>at t)er jlnafce ben jammer be$ 

StmmcrmannS ? 
(St fiat tfin. 

£attfin bet Sunajtna,? 
3ft et fcurfttg? (£at ct SDurft?) 
(St tjt butjita,. ((St fiat Dutji) 
3ft et miibe ? 
(gt ift n i cfi t nutbe. 



EXERCISES. 8. 

Is he thirsty or hungry 1 — He is neither thirsty nor hungry. — 
Has the friend my hat 1 — He has it. — He has it not. — Who has 
my sheep] — Your friend has it. — Who has my large sack] — The 
baker has it. — Has the youth my book ? — He has it not. — W T hat has 
he ] — He has nothing. — Has he the hammer or the nail 1 — He has 
neither the hammer nor the nail. — Has he my umbrella or my 
stick ] — He has neither your umbrella nor your stick. — Has he my 
coffee or my sugar ] — He has neither your coffee nor your sugar ; 
he has your honey.— Has he my brother's biscuit or that of the 
Frenchman 1 — He has neither your brother's nor that of the French- 
man ; he has that of the good boy. — Which ship has he ] — He has 
my good ship.- — Has he the old sheep or the ram ] 



Has the young man my knife or that of the painter ] — He has 
neither yours nor that of the painter. — Who has my brother's fine 



16 



dog] — Your friend has it. — What has my friend? — He has the 
baker's good bread. — He has the good neighbour's good chicken. — 
What have you ] — I have nothing. — Have you my bag or yours ] — 
I have that of your friend.-— Have I your good knife 1 ? — You have 
it. — You have it not. — Has the youth it (.'pat e$) 1 — He has it not. 
— What has he? — He has something good. — He has nothing bad. 
— Has he anything] — He has nothing. — Is he sleepy] — He is not 
sleepy. — He is hungry. — Who is hungry] — The young man is 
hungry. — Your friend is hungry. — Your brother's boy is hungry. — 
My shoemaker's brother is hungry. — My good tailor's boy is 
thirsty. — Which man has my book ] — The big (t}tef?) man has it. — 
Which man has my horse ] — Your friend has it. — He has your 
good cheese. — Has he it ]— r Yes, Sir, he has it. 



TENTH LESSON.— jgeljnte Uttiotl. 



The peasant, 
the ox, 
the cook, 
the bird, 



His. 



fcet S^aucr (gen. n) 5 
bet DAfe ; 

bet £ecl) ; 
fcer 2Scge(. 



Masc. 



Neut. 



Nom. fern, few. 
Ace. fetnen, fern* 



Obs. A. The conjunctive possessive pronoun fern is 
declined like mem and Sfyr* (See Lessons II. and III.) 



The servant, 

the broom, 
Has the servant his broom ] 

His eye, 

his foot, 

his rice, 
Has the cook his chicken or 

that of the peasant ] 
He has his own. 

His or his own (absolute 
possessive pronoun). 

Has the servant his trunk or 

mine ] 
He has his own. 
Have you )^our shoe or his 1 

[ have his. 



bet 23ebtente ; 

bet S3efen. 

£mt bet 23cbiente fetnen 25efen ] 

feitt 2(uge ; 

fetnen jug ; 

fetnen $et$. 

£nt tct jtocf) fein £ufyn obet i>a$ be$ 

^pattern ] 
(St fjat bag fetntge. 



Masc. 



Neut. 



N. ber fetntge* ba3 fetntge* 
A. ben fetmgen* ba$ fetntge* 

$at bac SBebtente fetnen Jtoffet obet 

ben metntgen ? 
(St bat ben feintgen. 
£aOcn ©te Sfyten <Sd)uF) obet ben 

feintgen ? 
Set) fyafce ben feintgen. 



17 

Somebody or anybody, some I Gen> 3€manbe g. 

one or any one (indefi- <^ Dat< 3emanbem , . 

nite pronoun). ^ 3emattben . 

Has anybody my hat? $>at Snncmtnnetnen Jput? 
Somebody has it. |@8 M^n Semont. 

Who has my stick ? SQBov feat mctncn (Stccf ? 

Nobody has it. Sfttcmcint) r)ctt il)n. 

No one, nobody or wo* anybody. $1 1 c m a n fc>. 

O65. B. 9itemcmt> is declined exactly like Sewattb* 

Who has my ribbon ? 28et hat mctn 53cmt) ? 

Nobody has it. 9?tcmanb f)at e£. 

Nobody has his broom. SJjicmcmt> r)at fcincn SBcfen. 

EXERCISES. 10. 

Have you the ox of the peasant or that of the cook ? — I have 
neither that of the peasant nor that of the cook. — Has the peasant 
his rice? — He has it. — Have you it? — I have it not. — Has his boy 
the servant's broom ? — He has it. — Who has the boy's pencil ? — 
Nobody has it. — Has your brother my stick or that of the painter ? 
— He has neither yours nor that of the painter ; he has his own. — 
Has he the good or bad money 1 — He has neither the good nor the 
bad. — Has he the wooden or the leaden horse ? — He has neither 
the wooden nor the leaden horse. — What has he good 1 — He has 
my good honey. — Has my neighbour's boy my book ? — He has it 
not. — Which book has he ? — He has his fine book. — Has he my 
book or his own? — He has his own. — Who has my gold button? 
— Nobody has it. — Has anybody my thread stocking ? — Nobody 
has it. 

11. 

Which ship has the merchant? — He has his own. — Which 
horse has my friend? — He has mine. — Has he his dog? — He has 
it not. — Who has his dog ?— Nobody has it. — Who has my bro- 
ther's umbrella ? — Somebody has it. — Which broom has the ser- 
vant? — He has his own. — Is anybody hungry? — Nobody is hun- 
gry. — Is anybody sleepy? — Nobody is sleepy. — Is any one tired ? — 
No one is tired. — Who is right? — Nobody is right. — Have I his 
biscuit ? — You have it not. — Have I his good brother's ox ? — 
You have it not. — Which chicken have I ? — You have his. — Is 
anybody wrong? — Nobody is wrong. 



18 



ELEVENTH 


LESSON.— ffilfte Uttion. 


The sailor, 


bcr Watrtfe, ber SBectsfnccbt 


the chair, 


bet ©tuhl; 


the looking-glass, 


ber ©piegrf ; 


the candle, 


t>d^ eicbt ; 


the tree, 


ber ^aum ; 


the garden, 


t>cr ©arten ; 


the foreigner, 


let $rembc ; 


the glove, 


ber £anb|cbuf). 


This ass, 


btcfer (gfd ; 


that hay, 


btefes (bieg) £eu. 


The grain, 


bag .^crn ; 


the corn, 


bag ©etrc^c. 


This man, 


btefer Sflann ; 


that man, 


jener tfflann ; 


this book, 


btefeS (bie£ a ) 33 ucb ; 


that book, 


" jeneS $5ud). 




N. G. D. 


This or this one. 


Masc. btcfer — e$ — em— 


That or that one 


iVettJ. jene3 — eg — em- 



A. 

-en* 
-e^ 

Obs. It will be perceived that btefer and jener are 
declined exactly like the definite article. (See Lesson 
II.) The English almost always use that, when the 
Germans use btefeg. In German jener is only em- 
ployed when it relates to a person or a thing spoken 
of before, or to make an immediate comparison be- 
tween two things or persons. Therefore, whenever 
this is not the case, the English that must be translated 
by btefer* 

Have you this hat or that one 1 #at>cn Sie btefen ebet jenen #ut ? 
But. 2Cbcr, fonbern. 

Obs. 2l6er is used after affirmative and negative 
propositions ; fonbern is only used after negative propo- 
sitions. 



I have not this, but that one. 
Has the neighbour this book or 
that one 1 



Sob Me ntcbt btcfnt, fonbern jenen. 
jpat ber ^aebbett btefeS cber jcncS 



&ud(> 1 



a £)te£ is often used for btefe§ in the nominative and accusative neu- 
ter, particularly when it is not followed by a substantive, and when it re- 
presents a whole sentence, as will be seen hereafter. 



19 

He has this, but not that one. (St fjcit t>tcfc$, after ntcbt jeneS. 

Have you this looking-glass or £aben (gtc fctefen ofcet jcncn (Spies 

that one ? ge(? 

I have neither this nor that one. 3d) fyabe roefcet btcfen nod) iencn. 

That ox, btefi't Dcbfe ; 

the letter, bet Sricf; 

the note, bet Settfl (tag SBUIct) ; 

the he rse-shoe, bag £ufeifen. 

exercise 12. 

Which hay has the foreigner ? — He has that of the peasant. — Has 
the sailor my looking-glass ? — He has it not. — Have you this can- 
dle or that one? — I have this one. — Have you the hay of my gar- 
den or that of yours ? — I have neither that of your garden nor that 
of mine, but that of the foreigner. — Which glove have you? — I 
have his glove. — Which chair has the foreigner ? — He has his 
own. — Who has my good candle ? — This man has it. — Who has 
that looking-glass ? — That foreigner has it. — What has your ser- 
vant (Shr 5sBct)tentcr) ? — He has the tree of this garden. — Has he 
that man's book ? — He has not the book of that man, but that ot 
this -boy. — Which ox has this peasant? — He has that of your 
neighbour. — Havel your letter or his? — You have* neither* mine 
nor his, but that of your friend. — Have you this horse's hay ? — I 
have not its hay, but its shoe. — Has your brother my note or his 
own ? — He has that of the sailor. — Has this foreigner my glove 
or his own ? — He has neither yours nor his own, but that of his 
friend. — Are you hungry or thirsty ? — I am neither hungry nor 
thirsty, but sleepy. — Is he sleepy or hungry ? — He is neither slee- 
py nor hungry, but tired. — Ami right or wrong? — You are neither 
right nor wrong, but your good boy is wrong. — Have 1 the good 
or the bad knife ?-— You have neither the good nor the bad, but the 
ugly (one). — What have I ? — You have nothing good, but some- 
thing bad. — Who has my ass ? — The peasant has it. 



TWELFTH LESSON.— £w5Ifte Section. 

N. G. D. A. 

That or which (relaUve ( Masc. teefdjer — e£— em — en. 
pronoun). ) Neut. tt>e(d)e$ — e$ — em — e£. 

Obs. A. It will be perceived that the relative pro- 
noun tt>e(d)er is declined like the definite article, which 
may be substituted for it ; but then the masculine and 
neuter of the genitive case is fceffett instead of i>e& 
SBBetcfyer is never used in the genitive case. 



20 

Have you the hat, which my £cben (Sic ben £ut, rc>e(cl)cn mem 

brother has ] SBrubct bat ? 

1 have not the hat, which your 3cb bcibc ntcfet ben £ut, nxkben 3f)t 

brother has. 95rut)Ct bat. 

Have you the horse, which I £>oben (Ste t>aj *Pferb, redebe* id) 

have] babe ? 

I have the horse, which you have. 2>cb babe bns s Pferb, ive(d)ee 8te 

bnben. 

Masc. Neut. 

f Nom. bcrjentge. ba^jem'ge. 
T%a£ or ^Ae one (determi- J Gen. be^jenigen. fce^jentflcn. 
native pronoun). ] Dat. bemjenigen. bemjemgen. 

[Ace. benjenigett. ba^jemge. 

Obs. B. ©erjentge is always used with a rela- 
tive pronoun, to determine the person or thing to which 
that pronoun relates. It is compounded of the definite 
article and jentg, and declined like an adjective, pre- 
ceded by this article. The article alone may also be 
substituted in its stead, but must then undergo the 
modification pointed out in the foregoing observation, 
as will be seen hereafter. 

I have that, or the one which J 3 * ft" ^ m[ ^' »«*>™ ® ie 
i s baben. 

you nave * C 3d) babe ben, rcekben (gte baben. 

C<Stc baben basienige, nxkbeS id) 

You have that which I have. < babe. 

C Cic baben ba$, roetdbcS id) babe. 

Masculine. 

Nom. berjemge, toetcfyer. 



That which or the one which. <( 



Ace. benjentgen, n>elrf)en. 

Neuter. 

Nom. baSjemge, wefefyeg. 
Ace. baSjemge, n>elrf)e3. 

Which carriage have you SBddbcn SG&agcn bciben ©tc ? 

I have that which your friend 3d) babe ben (benjentgen), tt>eld)en 
has. 3br -Jrcunb bat. 

The carriage, ber SBagen ; 

the house, ba$ Jg>au£. 

rpn { Masc. berfetbe (ber ndmltcfie). 

i ne same. j NfuL fca ^ e(6e (ba ^ n4m ^ e ) # 






21 



Obs. C. ©erfelbe, the same, is compounded of 
the definite article and fe!6, and is declined like berje* 
tttge* It is frequently used instead of the personal pro- 
noun of the third person to avoid repetition and to 
make the sentence more perspicuous. 

Have you the same stick, which £aben €>ie bcnfelben (ben namftz 

I have 1 dben) Stecf, ben tcb babe ? 

i have the same. 3d) ()a(>e benjetben (ben namltdfecn). 

Has that man the same cloth, jg>at btefer 9)?ann tasfelbe (t>a$ nams 

which you have 1 lt$c} Sud), tvelcfye* (t)a$) ©ic 

baben ? 

He has not the same. (Sr bat nid)t ba*fe(be (ba$ nain(td)e). 

Has he (that is, has the same $ai fcerfetbe metnen Jpanbfcfyufy ? 
man) my glove 1 

He has it not. (5*t fyat ifyn (benfetben) md)t. 

exercise 13. 

Have you the garden, which 1 have 1 — I have not the one that 
you have. — Which looking-glass have you 1 — I have the one 
which your brother has. — Has he the hook that your friend has 1 — 
He has not the one which my friend has. — Which candle has he 1 

— He has that of his neighbour. — He has the one that I have. 

Has he this tree or that one] — He has neither this nor that, but 
the one which I have. — Which ass has the man ] — He has the 
one that his boy has. — Has the stranger your chair or mine 1 — He 
has neither yours nor mine ; but he has his friend's good chair. — 
Have you the glove which I have, or the one that my tailor has ] — 
1 have neither the one which you have, nor the one which your 
tailor has, but my own. — Has your shoemaker my fine shoe, or 
that of his boy 1 — He has neither yours nor that of his boy, but 
that of the good stranger. — Which house has the baker 1 — He has 
neither yours nor mine, but that of his good brother. — Which car- 
riage have 1 1 — Have I mine or that of the peasant 1 — You have 
neither yours nor that of the peasant ; you have the one which 1 
have. — Have you my fine carriage ] — I have it not ; but the 
Frenchman has it. — What has the Frenchman 1 — He has nothing. 
— What has the shoemaker] — He has something fine. — What has 
he fine ] — He has his fine shoe. — Is the shoemaker right ] — He is 
not wrong ; but this neighbour, the baker, is right. — Is your horse 
hungry ] — It ((56) is not hungry, but thirsty. — Have you my ass's 
hay or yours ] — I have that which my brother has. — Has your 
friend the same horse that my brother has 1 — He has not the same 
horse, but the same coat. — Has he (£at betfelbe) my umbrella 1 — He 
has it not. 



22 

I THIRTEENTH LESSON.— EDrd^nte Section. 

DECLENSION OF MASCULINE AND NEUTER SUBSTANTIVES. 

I. Singular. 

Rules. — 1. Substantives of the masculine and neu- 
ter gender take e3 or $ in the genitive case singular : 
those ending in £, $, 3, £, take e3 ; all others, particu- 
larly those ending in el, en, er, (hen and lettt, take 3. 

2. Masculine substantives which end in e in 
the nominative singular, take tt in the other cases of 
the singular and plural, a and do not soften the radical 
vowel. 

II. Plural. 

Rules. — 1. All substantives, without exception, 
take n in the dative case of the plural, if they have 
not one in the nominative. 

2. All masculine and neuter substantives ending in 
el, en, er, as also diminutives in cfyen and lent, have the 
same termination in the plural as in the singular. 

3. In all cases of the plural masculine substan- 
tives take e, and neuter substantives er ; and soften the 
radical vowels a, 0, U, into a, 6, it. 

4. In words of the neuter gender ending in el, ett, 
er, the radical vowel is not softened in the plural, ex- 
cept in : bag Softer, the convent ; plur. bie diopter. b 

The hats, fcte &utc ; 

the buttons, tic .knepfc ; 

the tables, bie &ifd)e ; 

the houses, bie £aufct ; c 

the ribbons, t>te 23cint)cr. 

8 Except ber jtcife, the cheese ; gen. be§ $afe3 ; plur. bie $dfe. 

t> The declension of those substantives which deviate from these rules 
will be separately noted *. 

c It must be observed that in the diphthong CM, a is softened. In the diph- 
thong eu, U is not softened, as : bev ^mmb, the friend ; plur. bte Sreutlbe, th« 
friends. 



23 



The threads 
the tailors, 
the notes, 

The hoys, 

the Frenchmen, 

men or the men, 



trie <^d>netber ; 

tie Sethi, tic Sittetfe. 

t>te £naben ; 
t>te gran$efcn ; 
tie $ien|ct)en. 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE 
ARTICLE IN THE PLURAL. 



Nom. the good. 

Gen. of the good. 

Dat. to the good. 

Ace. the good. 

The good boys. 
The ugly dogs. 



For all genders. 

Nom. bte gutetu 
Gen. ber Quten. 
Dat. ben Qixten. 
Ace. bie gutetu 

£)te guten jtna&cn. 
2)te tyafjttcfycn £>unt)e. d 



Obs. Adjectives preceded in the plural by a posses- 
sive pronoun, have the same declension as with the 
definite article. 

For all genders. 

f Nom. meine gutert. 

lyr v / t n J Gen. nteuter quteru 

My good (plural). <> Dat ^^ ^ 

I^Acc. meine guten* 



Have you my good books ] 
I have your good books. 



£atu'ti (Sic meine guten ^ttcber ? 
3d) habc 3b« guten 58iid)er. 



A TABLE 

OF THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 



Subst. Masculine. 



Subst. Feminine. 



< 
o3 



G. 
D. 
A. 



§ or e£* 
or e* 



NO 
G 
D 
AJ 



;> inv 



ariable. 



Subst. Neuter. 

N. 



G. 
D. 
A. 



3 or c»3 
or c. 



* The word •gunb, dog, does not soften the vowel u in the plural 



< 
Ph 



G. 

D. 

V.A. 



Subst. Masculine, 



en or it. 



G. 
D. 
A. 



24 

Subst. Feminine. 

> en or it. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



Subst. Neuter. 

er* 



et\ 
erm 



EXERCISE. 14. 

Have you the tables ] — Yes, Sir, I have the tables. — Have you 
my tables ?-— . No, Sir, I have not your tables. — Have I your but- 
tons 1 — You have my buttons. — Havel your fine houses'? — You 
have my fine houses. — Has the tailor the buttons 1 — He has not 
the buttons, but the threads. — Has your tailor my good buttons 1 — 
My tailor has your good gold buttons. — What has the boy ] — He 
has the gold threads. — Has he my gold or my silver threads] — 
He has neither your gold nor your silver threads. — Has the 
Frenchman the fine houses or the good notes ] — He has neither the 
fine houses nor the good notes. — What has he 1 — He has his good 
friends. — Has this man my fine umbrellas ] — He has not your fine 
umbrellas, but your good coats. — Has any one my good letters ] — 
No one has your good letters. — Has the tailor's son (bet <Sel)n) my 
good knives or my good thimbles 1 — He has neither your good 
knives nor your good thimbles, but the ugly coats of the stranger's 
big ($ro6) boys. — Have I your friend's good ribbons'? — You have 
not my friend's good ribbons, but my neighbour's fine carriage. — 
Has your friend the shoemaker's pretty sticks, or my good tailor's 
pretty dogs ] — My friend has my good shoemaker's fine books ; 
but he has neither the shoemaker's pretty sticks nor your good 
tailor's pretty dogs. — Is your neighbour right or wrong] — He is 
neither right nor wrong. — Is he thirsty or hungry 1 — He is neithei 
ihirsty nor hungry. 



FOURTEENTH LESSON.— bittpt)tlt* faction 



The Englishman, 
the German, 
the Turk, 
the small books, 
the large horses, 

Have the English the fine hats 
of the French ] 



fcet (Sncjlcmbet ; 
fcer £)eutfd)e ; 
bet ZiixU ; 
tic ftetnen SMdbet ; 
t>tc gropm 9)fetfee. 

£akn tie (Srtgtanbet Me fcfyonen £ft* 
te bet gtcmjofen ? 



2d 

For all gei.de rs. 

TNom. btejetttgett or bie* 
rpy I Gen. berjemgen — berer* 

i nose. <, Dat> fcen j en {g en _ fcenem 

(^Acc. btejetttgett — bte* 

Obs. A. When the definite article is substituted 
for berjemge, its genitive plural is berer, and its dative 
plur. bettett* (See also Lesson XII. Obs. B.) 

Have you the books which the £abcn <Ste tie 93ud)er, roeld)C tie 
men have 1 SWannet: foafcen ? 

I have not those which the men 3d) fyabe md)t tteienicjen (tie), nxfc 
have ; but I have those which d)e bte banner l)aOcn ; abcr id) 
you have. (jo be tie (tieienicjen), rcclcfye <Ste 

f;aben. 

For all genders. 

The same ®tefefben a (bte namKdjem 

l/ie same. gee Legs()n XIL ^ C) 

Have you the same books, which $aben @ic ticfelben SBuc^ct:, tie td| 

I have ] ftabe ? 

I have the same. 3d) fjabe tiefelbem 

The Italian, the Italians, tec Stalienet, tie StaUcncr ; 

the Spaniard, the Spaniards, tcr (Spamet, tie ©panier.b 

For all genders. 

TNom. toefefye or bie. 

jxru • i, > t x J Gen. toefefyer — beretn 

WW (plur.) ^ Dat we ^ m _ benelt4 

Obs. B. When the definite article stands for toetcfyer, 
its genitive case plural is not berer, but berett* (See 
Lesson XII. Obs. A.) The genitives befiett, berett, are 
preferable to the genitives tt>elcf)e$, tt>elcf)er, being more 
easily distinguished from the nominative. 

For all genders. 

N. G. D. A. 

These. btefe, btefer, btefett, btefe* 

Those. jette, jetter, jenen, jette* 

•• $)tefetben is declined like bieienfgen. 

•> Nouns derived from foreign languages do not soften the radical vow«l ia 
the plural. 

2 



26 

Obs. C. The definite article may be used instead 
of these pronouns. Before a noun it follows the regu- 
lar declension ; but when alone, it undergoes the same 
changes as when substituted for fcerjemge (See Obs. A. 
above). The pronoun ber, ba£> is distinguished from 
the article fcer, ba£, by a stress in the pronunciation. 
As an article, it throws the principal accent on the 
word which immediately follows. 

Which books have you ? SSMcbe SBfidKt bc\Un ©e 1 

Have you these books or those ? £>abcn (Sic fciefe et>cr jcnc i8itd>cr ] 
I have neither these nor those. J 

I have neither the one nor the > 3d) f)ci&e rocbcr btcfc nod) [cm* 

others y 

I have neither those of the Span- 3A fyflfrc rucfccr bic bcr ©panUr ncd) 

iards nor those of the Turks. tic t>cr Surfcn. 

exercises. 15. 

Have you these horses or those 1 — I have not these, but those. — 
Have you the coats of the French or those of the English 1 — I have 
not those of the French, but those of the English. — Have you the 
pretty sheep (fcaS (Sd)af takes c, and is not softened in the plural) 
of the Turks or those of the Spaniards 1 — I have neither those of 
teh Turks nor those of the Spaniards, but those of my brother. — 
Has your brother the fine asses of the Spaniards or those of the 
Italians ] — He has neither those of the Spaniards nor those of the 
Italians, but he has the fine asses of the French. — Which oxen has 
youi brother ] — He has those of the Germans. — Has your friend my 
large letters or those of the Germans 1 — He has neither the one nor 
the other (See Note c , Lesson XIV.). — Which letters has he ] — 
He has the small letters which you have. — -Have I these houses or 
those 1 — You have neither these nor those. — ^Vhich houses have 
1 1 — You have those of the English. — Has any one the tall tailor's 
gold buttons ] — Nobody has the tailor's gold buttons, but somebody 
has those of your friend. 

16. 

Have I the notes of the foreigners or tbose of my boy? — Yon 
have neither those of the foreigners nor those of your boy, but those 
of the great Turks. — Has the Turk my fine horse 1 — He has it 
not. — Which horse has he 1 — He has his own. — Has your neigh- 
bour my chicken or my sheep 1 — My neighbour has neither your 
chicken nor your sheep.-- What has he ? — He has nothing good. — 
Have you nothing fine 1 — I have nothing fine. — Are you tired ] — I 

c The English phrases the former and the latter, the one and the other y are 
generally expressed in German bv btefet, plur. biefe, and jetter, plur. jeite, but 
m an inverted order, btefer referring to the latter and jener to the former. 



27 



am not tired. — Which rice has your friend ] — He has that of his 
merchant. — Which sugar has he ] — He has that which I have.— 
Has he your merchant's good coffee or that of mine'? — He has nei- 
ther that of yours nor that of mine ; he has his own. — Which ships 
(la$ ^cbtff forms its plural in e) has the Frenchman ?— -He has -the 
ships of the English. — Which houses has the Spaniard '? — He has 
the same which you have. — Has he my good knives?— He has your 
good knives. — Has he the thread stockings which I have 1 — He has 
not the same that you have, but those of his brother. 



FIFTEENTH LESSON.— iTftn^ljttte Cation. 



The glass, 
the comb, 

Have you my small combs ? 
I have them. 

Them, 



My (plural), 
Your, — 
His, — 
Their, — 

Have you my fine glass ] 
Has he my fine glasses 1 
He has them. 
The man has them. 
He has them not. 
The men have them. 
Have the men them 1 

Have you my chairs or his ] 

I have neither yours nor his 

Which chairs have you 1 
I have mine. 

Some sugar, 
some bread, 
some salt, 



tas ®(a$ ; 
ter Jlairmu 

£abcn ©te metric ftetnen $tfmme? 
3d) fya&e fie. 

fie (after the verb). 

Plural for all genders. 

N. G. D. A. 
meme-memer-memen-meme, 
3f)te -3f)rer -Sfyren -Sfyre, 
feme -femer -fetnert -feme* 
tfyre -tfyrer -tfyren -ifyre* 

£a6en ©te ntetn fd)b'ne3 ®(aS 1 

£at ct mctne fefyonen ©(afer 1 

dr hat fie. 

£)cr $ftann r)at fte. 

(5r fjat fie ntd)t. 

iDic banner foafcen fte* 

£a&cn fte tie banner 1 

£afcen (gte metrte (StitWe ctet tte 
fetm$en 1 (See Lesson VII.) 

3d) r)abe roetet tie Sfettgen nod) tie 
fetmgen. 

SBcldbe ©ttfljle fjaben ©te 1 

3d) t^abe tie metntgen. 

Sucfet ; 
SBrot ; 

Rule. Some or any before a noun is not expressed 
in German. 



28 

EXERCISE. 17. 

Have you my good combs? — I have them. — Have you tl o good 
horses of the English? — 1 have them not. — Which brooms have 
you ? — I have those of the foreigners. — Have you my coats or 
those of my friends? — I have neither yours nor those of your 
friends. — Have you mine or his? — I have his — Has the Italian 
the good cheeses which you have? — He has not those which I 
have, but those which you have. — Has your boy my good pencils] 
He has them. — Has he the carpenter's nails ? — He has them not. 
— What has he ? — He has his iron nails. — Has anybody the thim- 
bles of the tailors ? — Nobody has them. — Who has the ships of 
the Spaniards? — The English have them. — Have the English 
these ships or those ? — The English have their ships. — Have youi 
brothers my knives or theirs ? — My brothers have neither youi 
knives nor theirs. — Have I your chickens or those of your cooks 1 
— You have neither mine nor those of my cooks. — Which chick- 
ens have I? — You have those of the good peasant. — Who has 
my oxen ? — Your servants have them. — Have the Germans them ? 
— The Germans have them not, but the Turks have them. — Who 
has my wooden table ? — Your boys have it. — Who has my good 
bread ? — Your friends have it. 



SIXTEENTH LESSON.— 0*d)?el)nte Utlion. 

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES WITHOUT AN ARTICLE. 

Rule. An adjective, not preceded by an arti61e, 
takes the same termination as the definite article, ex- 
cept in the genitive singular, masculine and neuter, 
which then ends in en instead of e£* 

Masculine. Neuter. 

r N. guter SESetm gute$ (Scrfj, 

r~r.A ^rs«l ™ c^w,^ „^a G - flutett SBeineS* g«ten ©af-H 
ijooa wine or some good » *?& 

wine, &c. S D gute^efn,,, gutem © a tje< 

^ A. guten SGBeuu guteg ©alj* 

Plural for all genders. 

Good or some good, &c. ( N. G. D. A. 
(plural.) \ gute, guter, guten, gute* 

Some good cheese, guter itafe ; 

gome good bread, gute$ SBroD. 









29 



Singular. 



Some of it anvofit of it \ M ' "*"' befl " e "' be ^ ef6e «- 
Some of it, any oj it, of it. j K ^^ b( ^ ^elben. 

Plural for all genders. 

: Some of them, any of them, ( t <* . , r , c 

of them. \ mld)C ' imn > ber f ef6em 

Obs. The pronoun some or any, when taken in a 
partitive sense, is expressed by tt)eldf). Of him, of it, of 
them, &c., when governed by a substantive, an adjec- 
I tive, or a verb requiring in German the genitive, are 
i expressed by the genitive of the personal pronouns, if 
relating to a person, and if to a thing, by the genitives 
be|Ten, fce^felbett, beren, berfelben, which may sometimes 
be omitted. 

Have you any wine ? ftabcn (Stc 58ctn ? 

I have some. 3d) babe tvc(d)cn. 

Have you any water ] £abcn @te SBaffet ? 

I have some. 3d) \)abc ivctcbc^ 

Have you any good wine ? .ftaben ©ie gutcn 2Betn ? 

I have some. 3d) babe tuefcften. 

Have I any good cloth 1 jpabe id) gutc* Sud) ? 

You have some. Sic baben nxlcbc^ 

Have you any shoes 1 £abcn (Sic (Sd)iibe ? 

I have some. 3d) babe tvekbe. 

Have you good or bad horses 1 £aben (Sic gute efcer fd)(ed)te ^fcrbe? 

I have some good ones. 3d) babe cuitc. 

Have you good or bad wine 1 £a(HMt <Ste guten ot>et fc^tcd^ten 

ffiktn? 

I have some good. 3cb babe guten. 

Have you good or bad water? ioaben (Sic guteS ofcet fd)(cd)te$ SSafs 

' fcr? 

I have some good. 3d) babe guteS. 

exercise. 18. 

Have you any sugar 1 — I have some. — Have you any good cof- 
fee 1 — I have some. — Have you any salt 1 — I have some. — Have I 
any good salt 1 — You have some. — Have I any shoes ] — You have 
some. — Have I any pretty dogs? — You have some. — Has the man 
any good honey ] — He has some. — What has the man 1 — He has 
some good bread. — What has the shoemaker ] — He has some 
pretty shoes. — Has the sailor any biscuits (3roicbcicf does not soften 
in the plural) i — He has some. — Has your friend any good pencils 1 
— He has some. — Have you good or bad coffee? — I have some 
good. — Have you good or bad wood ] — I have some good. — Havfe 



30 

I good or bad oxen 1 — You have some bad (ones). — Hr*s you* 
brother good or bad cheese 1 — He has neither good nor bad. — What 
has he good 1 — He has some good friends. — Who has some cloth 1 
— My neighbour has some. — Who has some money 1 — The French 
have some. — Who has some gold 1 — The English have some. — 
Who has some good horses'? — The Germans have some. — Who 
has some good hay ] — This ass has some. — Who has some good 
bread ]— That Spaniard has some. — Who has some good bocks'? — 
These Frenchmen have some. — Who has some good ships] — 
Those Englishmen have some] — Has anybody wine] — Nobody 
has any. — Has the Italian fine or ugly horses ] — He has some ugly 
(ones). — Have you wooden or stone tables'? — I have neither wood- 
en nor stone (ones). — Has your boy the fine books of mine '? — He 
has not those of your boy, but his own. — Has he any good thread 
stockings '? — He has some. — What has the Turk] — He has nothing. 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON.— Sieb^eljnte Certion. 

Singular. 

( N. G. D. A. 
No, none, not a, or not < M. fetn, fritted, feiwm, fetnen. 
any. ( N. fetn, fetne£, fetnem, Fetn. 

Obs. A. The word fetn has this declension when, 
like no in English, it is followed by a substantive ; 
but when the substantive is understood as with none 
in English, it forms its nominative masculine in er, and 
its nominative and accusative neuter in e£ or $♦ 

Have you any wine 1 vfraften (Sic 2£etn ? 

I have none. 3d) fyabc fetnen. 

Have you no bread 1 £ciben <Ste fetn SBreb ? 

I have not any. 3d) fycibe fetneS (fetn*). 

Obs. B. It will be observed that any is expressed 
oy fetn, w r hen accompanied by a negation. 

Plural for all genders. 

No, none, or not any (plu- $ N. G. D. A. 



ral). ) feme, fewer, fetnen, feme 

Have you no shoes 1 £>aben <§u feme (^cbul)C ? 

I have none. 3d) fyabc feine. 

Have you any ] £aben <&\c xvckhc ? 

1 have not any. 3d) habi feine. 

Has the man any 1 £at fcet SMcmn roetcfyc ? 




31 

lie has none. (£r bat Feme* 

Has he any good books 45at cr gutc SBiicfecr ? 

He has some. (Sr f)at weld)?. 

The American, bcr 2Cnicrt£ctncr ; 

the Irishman, fcet 3t(dnt)Ct ; 

the Scotchman, tec ©d)Otttdtibct (©cfjette) ; 

the Dutchman, tct £etlanfc)et ; 

the Russian, fcer D^uffc- - 

Rule. Compound words in mattlt form their plural 
by changing this termination into kute* Ex. 

The merchants, fcue jtemfteute ; 

the carpenters, t>tc Sinmtctleute* 

EXERCISE. 19. 

Has the American good money] — He has some. — Have the 
Dutch good cheese ] — Yes, Sir, the Dutch have some. — Has the 
Russian no cheese i — He has none. — Have you good stockings 1 — 
I have some. — Have you good or bad honey 1 — I have some good. 
— Have you some good coffee ] — I have none. — Have you some bad 
coffee ] — I have some. — Has the Irishman good wine ] — He has 
none. — Has he good water ] — He has some. — Has the Scotchman 
some good salt] — He has none. — What has the Dutchman ] — He 
has good ships. — Have I some bread ] — You have none. — Have I 
some good friends] — You have none. — Who has good friends] — 
The Frenchman has some. — Has your servant (3r)t SBcfctenter) any 
coats or brooms ] — He has some good brooms, but no coats. — Has 
any one hay ] — Some one has some. — Who has some ] — My ser- 
vant has some. — Has this man any bread ] — He has none. — Who 
has good shoes] — My good shoemaker has some. — Have you the 
good hats of the Russians, or those of the Dutch ] — I have neither 
those of the Russians nor tiiose of the Dutch, I have those of the 
Irish. — Which sacks has your friend ] — He has the good sacks of 
the merchants. — Has your boy the good hammers of the carpen- 
ters ] — No, Sir, he has them not. — Has this little boy some sugar ] 
— He has none. — Has the brother of your friend good combs ] — 
The brother of my friend has none, but I have some. — Who has 
good wooden chairs ] — Nobody has any. 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON.— Steatite Section. 

The hatter, t)ct &utmad)et ; 

the joiner, bet £t[d)(er (®d)tcmer). 



82 



Masculine. 


Neuter. 


' Nom. tin. 


em* 


Gen. eute& 


eineg* 


Dat. etnetm 


einent 


Ace. etnem 


eitu 



A or an (one). 



Obs. A. When a substantive is understood, tin like 
feut, takes e r in the nominative masculine, and e 3 or & 
in the nominative and accusative neuter. (See pre- 
ceding Lesson.) 



Have yoa a looking-glass ? 

I have one. 

Have you a book 1 

I have one. 

I have none. 



£aften ©ie etnen (Spiegel ? 
3d) fyabe etnen. 
£aben <Sic ein S3ud) ? 
3d) babe ctn$ (etnc$). 
3d) fyabe feins (fctnc$> 



Obs. B. Neither the indefinite article nor ttin 
ever accompanied by tt>etd)* 



is 



And. 



Unfc. 



DECLENSION OF AN ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE INDEFINITE 
ARTICLE OR A POSSESSIVE PRONOUN IN THE SINGULAR. 

(See Obs. in Lessons III. and XIII.) 



A good. 



Have you a good round hat . 

I have one. 

Has he a beautiful house 1 

He has one. 

He has none. 

I have two of them. 

He has three. 
You have four. 
Have you five good horses ? 
I have six. 

I have six good and seven bad 
ones. 



Masculine. 



Neuter. 



N. em guter* tin gute& 

G. etneS guten. etneg guten* 

D. etnem guten* einem guten. 

A. etnen guten* ein gute& 

&abcn (Sic etnen guten runfcen £ut? 

3d) fyaOe etnen. 

£at cr ein fcftencS $a\x$ ? 

(St f)at ctnS (cincs). 

(£r fjat fcinS (feineS). 

3d) f)flt>e fceren gn>ei. (See Obs. 

Lesson XVI.) 
(Sr l}at fceren fcret. 
©te batcn fceren mcr. 
£at>cn @ic funf gutc g)ferbc ? 
3d) fyabc bcrcn fccl)6. 
3d) bcibe fed)$ gute unb fie&en 

fd)ted)te. 



33 



KECAPITULATION OF THE RULES RELATIVE TO THE DECLENSION 
OF ADJECTIVES. 

We have shown in the foregoing lessons that in 
German as in English, the adjective always precedes 
the substantive. When two or more adjectives are 
before the same noun, they all follow the same declen- 
sion. Adjectives are not declined when they are not 
accompanied by a substantive expressed or understood, 
i. e., when they form the predicate of a proposition. 
Ex. 5tyv Qui ift fd) on, your hat is beautiful ; mem 25anb 
ift fd)cn, my ribbon is beautiful; Sfyre §itfe jmt> fd) on, 
your hats are beautiful. 

When followed by a substantive expressed or under- 
stood, the adjective is declined, and assumes three dif- 
ferent forms, viz : 

1st, Before a substantive without an article pre- 
ceding, it takes the same termination as the definite 
article, except in the genitive case singular masculine 
and neuter, in which it adds e n instead of e $♦ 

2d, When it follows the definite article, or a word 
of the same termination, it adds en in all cases, except 
in the nominative singular of all genders, and the ac- 
cusative singular feminine and neuter, in which it 
adds e* 

3d, When preceded by the indefinite article, or a 
possessive or personal pronoun, it adds er in the nomi- 
native masculine, e in the nominative and accusative 
feminine, e £ in the nominative and accusative neuter, 
and e n in the other cases. 

All participles partake of the nature of adjectives, 
and are subject to the same laws. 

2* 



34 



A TABLE 

OF THE DECLENSION OF GERMAN ADJECTIVES. 






< 



I. The adject> 

without an article 

a substantive. 


ire 
before 


1 II- The adjective 
preceded by the defi- 
j nite article. 


I III. The adjective 
preceded by the indefi- 
nite article. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


! 
Jfasc. 


Fern. 


JVeut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut 


Nom. er 


e 


e<3 


ie 


e 


e 


er 


e 


eg 


Gen. en 


er 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


Dat. em 


er 


em 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


Ace. en 


e I 


e^ 


en i 


e 


e 


en 


e 


eg 


'Nom. e 




en 










Gen. er 


For all 


en 


For all 








Dat. en 


genders. 


en 


genders. 








Ace. e 






en 











Obs. A. The adjective is declined in the same 
manner when taken substantively. 

B. Adjectives preceded by the words : ctCe, all ; 
etmge, etftcfye, some, sundry ; gettriffe, certain ; feme, none ; 
tnmtche, several ; mefyrere, many, several ; folcfye, such ; 
fcerfefyiebene, various ; tnefe, many ; tt>elrf)e, which ; tt>emge ; 
few, lose the letter n in the nominative and accusa- 
tive plural ; but they keep that termination when pre- 
ceded by a possessive or personal pronoun in the 
plural. a 

C. Adjectives ending in ef, en, er, for the sake ot 
euphony often reject the letter e which precedes those 
three consonants. Ex. instead of ebefer, golbener, fyeM' 
rer, we say : ebfer, golbner, tfyenrer* 

EXERCISE. 20. 

Have you a good servant ] — I have one. — Has your hatmaker a 
beautiful house] — He has two of them. — Have I a pretty gold rib- 
bon'? — You have one. — What has the joiner] — He has beautiful 



a Most modern authors frequently reject this distinction, and form all the 
cases of the plural in en. 



35 



tables. — Has he a beautiful round (runb) table? — He has one.— 
Has the baker a large looking-glass ] — He has one. — Has the 
Scotchman the friends that I have 1 — He has not the same that you 
have, but he has good friends.— Has he your good books ] — He has 
them. — Have I their good hammers 1 — You have them not, but you 
have your good iron nails. — Has that hatter my good hat 1 — He has 
not yours, but his own. — Have:! my good shoes 1 — You have not 
yours; you have his. — Who has mine 1 ? — Somebody has them.— - 
Has any body two letters ]- r The brother of my neighbour has 
three. — Has your cook two sheep (plur. @d)ofc.) ? — He has four. — 
Has he six good chickens 1 — -He has three good and seven bad. — 
Has the merchant good wine ]— He has some. — Has the tailor good 
coats ] — He has none. — Has the baker good bread ] — He lias some. 
— What has the carpenter 1 — He has good nails.— -What has your 
merchant] — He has good pencils, good coffee, good honey, and 
good biscuits (plur. Snuebpcfe). — Who has good iron ]— My good 
friend has some. — Am I right or wrong ] — You are wrong. — Is any 
body sleepy 7 — The shoemaker is sleepy and thirsty. — Is he tired 1 
— He is not tired. — Has your servant the glasses of our (imfcrer, 
see the next Lesson) friends ] — He has not those of your friends, 
but those of his great merchants. — Has he my wooden chair 1 — He 
has- not yours, but that of his boy. — Are you thirsty] — I am not 
thirsty, but very hungry (atopen hunger). 



NINETEENTH LESSON.— Nemtjeljttte tztixoxi. 



How much ? How many ? 

How many hats 1 
How many knives ? 
How T much bread 1 



2Btet)tcn a 

33ttcme( £nitc ? 
Sffiittid SKctTcr 1 
mmd 25tot> ? 



Only, but. 

How many tables have you 1 
I have only two. 

How many knives have you 
I have but one good one. 

Eight, 
nine, 
* ten, 



afttcmct Stfcf)e fatten ®ie ? 
3d) babe fccren nut $nxu. (See 

Ohs. Lesson XVI.) 
S&te&ttt SKcflcr hafccn ©tc ? 
3d) babe nur etn gates. 

n*t; 
ticun ; 



a Cardinal numbers are used to answer the question tine&ted how 
many ? 



36 



T^dtf (designating the na- 
ture or kind of a thing) ? 



Masc. Neut. 

N. ti>a$ fiir em, tt>a$ fitr em. 
A. tva# fur etneiu tt>a£ fiir em. 

Plural for all genders. 



What table have you 1 
I have a wooden table. b 
What tables has he ] 
He has stone tables. 
What book has your friend 1 
He has a pretty book. 
What paper have you % 
I have some fine paper. 
What sugar has he 1 
He has some good sugar. 



Our. 




Our (plural). 



2Ba$ fiir. 

2Bas fiir ctncn Stfdb babm <Bu ? 

3d) f)abe etncn f)o($erncn Stfd). 

2Bas fur Sifcbc (jot cr ? 

(Sr f)at ftetncrne StfcfK. 

S55a5 fur cm 25ud) ftot Sfa $reunt> ? 

(Sr &at ctn f)ubfcf)C* 95ud). 

£Ba£ fiir c papier babcn ©ie ? 

3d) M>c fd)8nc$ papier. 

£Ba$ fur 3uclcr f>at cr 1 

(S*r fjat Quten 3uc!cr. 

Masc. Neut. 

unfer* tmfer. 

unfereS. uufereg* 

mtferem* unferem. 

imfereru uufer* 

Plural for all genders. 

N. G. D. A. 

wtfere, imferer, wnferen, mt* 
( fere* 

Ours (singular and plural). £)et (ba$) unfertge ; btc unfcttgcn. 

Obs. When a consonant, t,ni,Tt or r, stands between 
two e's, one of them is omitted to avoid too soft a pronun- 
ciation (see Lesson XXL, Obs. C), except when this 
letter is necessary to the termination of the word or 
the indication of the case. Thus we frequently say, 
mtferS, unferm, mtfre, (SureS/ @urem, (Sure, &c, instead of 
anfere^, unferem, unfere, (Suereg, Querent, (Suere, &c. 

EXERCISES 21. 

How many friends have you 1 — I have two good friends. — Have 
you eight gv * d trunks 1 — I have nine. — Has your friend ten good 

. b The pupils will take care not to answer here with the definite article. 

c The indefinite article is never placed before collective words, such as : 
$P<tpter, paper ; 2Bem, wine ; %udzx, sugar, &c. 

d (Suer, your, is in fact the second person of the possessive pronoun. 3fyr is 
the third person, used generally out of politeness, and for that reason written 
with a capital letter. (See Lessons II. and XV.) 

I 



37 

brooms ]— He has only three. — Has he two good ships ]— He has 
only one. — How many hammers has the carpenter] — He has only 
f our . — How many shoes has the shoemaker ] — He has ten. — Has 
the young man ten good books ] — He has only five. — Has the 
painter seven good umbrellas ]— He has not seven, but one.— How 
many corks (>)>repfcn does not soften in the plur.) have I ]— You 
have only three.— Has your neighbour our good bread ]— He has 
not ours, but that of his brother.— Has our horse any hay ]— It (®$) 
has some.— Has the friend of our tailor good buttons ]— He has 
some.— Has he gold buttons ]— He has no gold (buttons), but sil- 
ver (ones). — How many oxen has our brother] — He has no oxen. 
— How many coats has the young man of our neighbours (plur. 
sftcubbarn) ? — The young man of our neighbours has only one good 
coat, but that of your friends has three of them.— Has he our good 
rams ]— He has them.— Have I his ]— You have not his, but ours. 
— How many good rams have 1 1 — You have nine 

22. 
Who has our silver candlesticks ] — Our merchant's boy has 
them. — Has he our large birds ]— He has not ours, but those of the 
great Irishman. — Has the Italian great eyes (bog Hucjc takes n in 
the plur. and is not softened) ]— He has great eyes and great feet. 
—Who has great thread stockings ]— The Spaniard has some. — 
Has he any cheese 1— He has none.— Has he corn 1— He has some. 
—What kind of corn has he 1— He has good corn.— What kind ot 
rice has our cook ]— He has good rice.— What kind of pencils has 
our merchant ] — He has good pencils. — Has our baker good bread 1 
— He has good bread and good wine. 

23. 

Who is thirsty ]— Nobody is thirsty; but the friend of our 
neighbour is sleepy. — Who has our iron knives 1 — The Scotch- 
man has them.— Has he them ]— He has them.— What kind of 
friends have you] — I have good friends. — Is the friend of our 
Englishmen right ]— He is neither right nor wrong.— Has he good 
littfe birds, and good little sheep (plur. (gcbafc) ]— He has neither 
birds nor sheep.— What has the Italian ]— He has nothing.— Has 
our tailor's boy anything beautiful ]— He has nothing beautiful, but 
something ugly. — What has he ugly ]— He has an ugly dog.— 
Has he an ugly horse ]— He has no horse.— What has our young 
friend ]— HeTias nothing.— Has he a good book ] — He has one.— 
Has he good salt ] — He has none. 



TWENTIETH LESSON.— groarcjigste Action. 

Much, many, a good deal of. SS t c ( . 

Much wine. 93tcl SBetn 

Much money. SSicl ©dt>. 



38 

Obs. A. When tuet is preceded by an article, pro- 
noun, or preposition, or when it stands alone and is 
used substantively, it is declined like an adjective ; 
otherwise it is indeclinable. 

Have you much good wine ] £aften @tc ml gutcn SBctn ? 

I have a good deal. 3d) fyabe t) often mcf. (See Ota. 

Lesson XVI. 
Have you much money 1 £ctben @te met ©e(b ? 

I have a good deal. 3d) tyabe bcften met. 

Too rawcA. 3 u & t c (. 

You have too much wine. <Sie fyaben $u t>icl 3Betn. 

We. SB t r. 

We have. 2Btt fja&en. 

We have not. £Btt fya&cn ntd)t. 

We have little or not much money. £Btt fya&en nid)t t>tel (5>ctb. 

Enough. © e n u g. 

Enough money. (3k(t> gcnug. 

Knives enough. SJieftet gcnug. 

O&s. 2?. ©emtg is never put before the substantive. 

Little. SBetug. 

O&s. C. Our remark on tuel applies equally to tt)enig* 
But these two words are declined, when they relate to 
several distinct things, or anything that may be coun- 
ted, as will be seen hereafter. 

But little, only a little {not much). %l u r tt> e n t cj (ntd)t met)* 

Have you enough wine 1 $a&en & K £Brin cjcnucj? 

I have only a little, but enough. 3d) bcibc bcften nur nx'tttg, after $e; 

nuQ. (See Ota. Lesson XVI.) 

A little. ©-in n> e n t cj. 

A little wine. (Sin roentg S^ctn. 

A little salt. (Sin men 19 @a($. 

Courage. bet 301 u t f). 

You have but little courage. (Sic bafccn ntcbt Diet 9J2utf). 

We have few friends. 2£tt baben nxmg gteunt>e. 

Of them (relative to persons). 3 h r e t (gen. of the personal pro- 
noun fte, they; see Ota. Les- 
son XVI.) 



39 

Have you many friends ? £afcen (Sic Ml greunbe ? 

We have but few. ££tr faben tf)rer nut roeut^e (Se 

Ofo. C. above). 
You have but little money. @tc (jaben ntcbt t>te( ©e(b. 

Has the foreigner much mone) ? £at bcr gretttbe Met ®ctt) ? 
He has but little. @r l)at beffen nur rocntg. 

exercises. 24. 

Have you much coffee ] — I have only a little. — Has your friend 
much water ? — He has a great deal. — Has the foreigner much 
corn 1 — He has not much. — What has the American ] — He has 
much sugar. — What has the Russian] — He has much salt. — Have 
we much rice? — We have but little. — What have we? — We have 
much wine, much water and many friends. — Have we much gold ] 
■ — We have only a little, but enough. — Have you many boys ?—- 
We have only a few. — Has our neighbour much hay ] — He has 
enough. — Has the Dutchman much cheese] — He has a great deal. 
— Has this man courage ] — He has none. — Has that foreigner 
money 1 — He has not a great deal, but enough. — Has the painter's 
boy candles (plur. £td)te) 1 — He has some. 

25. 

Have we good letters'? — We have some. — We have none. — 
Has the joiner good bread] — He has some. — He has none. — Has 
he good honey ] — He has none. — Has ttie Englishman a good 
horse ] — He has one. — What have we ] — We have good horses. — 
Who has a beautiful house ] — The German has one. — Has the Ita- 
lian many pretty looking-glasses ] — He has a great many ; but he 
has only a little corn. — Has my good neighbour the same horse 
which you have ] — He has not the same horse, but the same car- 
riage. — Has the Turk the same ships that we have ] — He has not 
the same, he has those of the Russians. 

26. 

How many servants have we ] — We have only one, but our bro- 
thers have three of them. — What knives have you] — We have 
iron knives. — What bag has the peasant ] — He has a thread bag. 
— Has the young man our long (gtoj}) letters] — He has them not. 
— Who has our pretty notes ] — The father (bet 3§atcr) of the sailor 
has them. — Has the carpenter his nails ] — The carpenter has his 
iron nails, and the hatmaker his paper hats. — Has the painter beau- 
tiful gardens ] — He has some, but his brother has none. — Have you 
many glasses ] — We have only a few. — Have you enough wine ] 
— We have enough of it. — Has anybody my brooms ] — Nobody 
has them. — Has the friend of your hatmaker our combs or yours ] 
— He has neither yours nor ours ; he has riis. — Has your boy my 
note or yours ] — He has that of his brother. — Have you my stick 1 
— I have not yours, but that of the merchant. — Have you my 
gloves (plur. £artb[d)ube) ] — I have not yours, but those of my 
orond neighbour. 



40 



TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.— (gin xtrib }ttmn?ig0te 
Section. 



The pepper, 
the meat, 
the vinegar, 
the beer, 


ber ?)fcffcr ; 
bag gie tjcl) ; 
ber gff|g ; 
bae SQter. 


A few books. 

• 


'N. etmge (etltcfye) 95itd)et\ 
G. etntger (etltcfyer) SBitcfyer* 
D. eintgen (etltcfyen) SBudjeiu 
A. etmge (etlictje) 33iid)er» 


A few* 

Have you a few books 1 

I have a few. 

He has a few. 

I have only a few knives. 

You have only a few. 


(S i n t g c, e t ( i cb c. 

£aOcn (Sic ctniqc 93uct>cr ? 

3d) babe etnta,e. 

(Sr [)at et(td)c. 

3d) f)afa nur etnigc 9J?cf|cr. 

(Sic fyaben nur etntcje. 


The florin, 

the kreutzer (a coin), 


bet ©ulben (is not softened in the 

plur.) ; 
bcr .£ reiser. 


Other. 


2£nbet (is declined like an ad- 
jective). 




Singular. 
Masc. Neut. 


The other. 


r N. ber cmbere* bag anbere* 
G. be$ cmberm beS cmberm 
D. bem anberm bent anbern* 
A. ben anberm ba$ anbere* 


The others. < 


Plural for all genders. 

N. bte anbenu D. ben cmbern. 

G. ber anbenu A. bte artbenu 

(See Obs. Lesson XIX.) 


Another, 
another horse 
other horses, 


em 2(nbercr ; 

ein anbcreS spfcrb ; 

anberc $)ferbe. 


Have you another horse ? 
I have another. 


£akn <§\c ctn anbereS $)fetb ? 
3d) tjabc ctn anberc*. 


No other. 


" Masc. fetnen anberm 
Neut. kin anbereS* 



41 

&etne anberc (See Lesson XVIII. 
Obs, B. 

3cb babe Fein anbercS $pfctb. 
Scb babe fan anbeteS. 
£aben Sic anbetc gpfcrt>c ? 
3d) babe anbere. 
3d) babe !etne ant)ere. 

t>a^ £emt> (plur. en) ; 

bas SSetn (plur. e) ; 

tcr £epf ; 

ber 2(tm (is not softened in the 

plur.); 
fc>a$ £et$ ; a 
bet ^cnat (is not softened in the 

plur.) ; 
fca6 >Betf (plur. c) ; 
t)cr !^cmb ; 
fcet Sfjatcr (is not softened in the 

plur.). 

What day of the month ? bet (t>a$) n> t e &i elft e'1 

O&s. Ordinal numbers are used in replying to the 
question ber or ba$ ttne&telfte ? what day of the month ? 
These numbers are declined like adjectives. They are 
formed of the cardinal numbers by adding t as far as 
twenty, and (i from twenty to the last, with the excep- 
tion of erfi, first, and bxitt, third, which are irregular. 
Ex. 



No others 

I have no other horse. 
I have no other. 
Have you other horses ? 
I have some others. 
I have no others. 

The shirt, 
the leg, 
the head, 
the arm, 

the heart, 
the month, 

the work, 

the volume, 

the crown (money), 



The first, 


bet or 


la$ crfte; 


the second, 


bet 


$weitc ; 


the third, 


bet 


britte ; 


the fourth, 


lev 


ttierte ; 


the fifth, 


bet 


ftinfte ; 


the sixth, 


bet 


feebste ; 


the seventh, 


bet 


ftebente ; 


the eighth, 


bet 


ocbte ; 


the ninth, 


bet 


neuntc ; 


the tenth, 


bet 


$ebnte ; 


the eleventh, 


bet 


etftc ; 


the twentieth, 


bet 


$wan$tgjle ; 


the twenty-first, &c 


bet 


etn unb sroanjiajte, K. b 



^ ° $)a§ ^erj, the heart, takes C tt § in the genitive and en in the dative case 
singular ; in the plural it takes e n in all the cases. 

b Henceforth the learners should write the date before their task. Ex. Sons 
bon, ben erfien 2Jki, tin taufenb afyt Jjunbetf unt> afyt unb bmj&ia, London, 1st 
May, 1838. 



42 

Have you the first or second £abcn Sic t>as etjic oter bag gwctte 

book ] Wud) ? 

I have the third. 3d) fjabc bag tritte. 

Which volume have you ] SMcben SRanb babcrt Sic ? 

I have the fifth. 3d) fyabc ten fiinftcn. 

exercises. 27. 

Have you a few knives ] — I have a few. — Have you many 
rams ] — I have only a few. — Has the friend of the great painter 
many looking-glasses ] — He has only a few. — Have you a few 
florins ] — 1 have a few. — How many florins have you 1 — I have 
ten. — How many kreutzers has your servant ] — He has not many, 
he has only two. — Have the men the beautiful glasses of the Ita- 
lians ] — The men have them not, but we have them.— What have 
we 1 — We have much money. — Have you the carriage of the 
Dutchman or that of the German ] — 1 have neither the one nor the 
other. — Has the peasant's boy the fine or the ugly letter ] — He has 
neither the one nor the other. — Has he the gloves of the merchant 
or those of his brother] — He has neither the one nor the other. — 
Which gloves has he 1 — He has his own. — Have we the horses of 
the English or those of the Germans ] — We have neither the one 
nor the other. — Have we the umbrellas of the Spaniards ] — We 
have them not; the Americans have them. — Have you much pep- 
per ] — I have only a little, but enough. — Have you much vinegar ] 
— I have only a little. — Have the Russians much meat] — The 
Russians have a great deal, but the Turks have only a little. — 
Have you no other pepper ] — I have no other. — Have I no other 
beer ] — You have no other. — Have we no other good friends ] — 
We have no others. — Has the sailor many shirts ] — He has not 
many ; he has only two. — Have you a wooden leg ] — I have not a 
(fctn) wooden leg, but a good heart. — Has this man a good head 1 
— He has a good head and a good heart. — How many arms has that 
boy ] — He has only one ; the other is of wood (oon £ot$).— -What 
kind of head has your boy 1 — He has a good head. 

28. 

Which volume have you V — I have the first. — Have you the se- 
cond volume of my work] — I have it. — Have you the third or the 
fourth book ] — I have neither the one nor the other. — Have we the 
fifth or sixth volume ] — We have neither the one nor the other.^- 
Which volumes have we ]~-We have the seventh. — What day 
(£)en rmcMCtfren) of the month is it (fyaben roir) ? — It is (2Btt babon) 
the eighth. — Is it not (jpabcn nut nicbt) the eleventh ] — No, Sir, it is 
the tenth. — Have the Spaniards many crowns ] — The Spaniards 
have only a few ; but the English have a great many. — Who has 
our crowns ] — The French have them. — Has the /outh much head ] 
— He has not much head, but much courage.-— How many arms 
has the man ] — He has two. 



43 



ay. 



Have you the crowns of the French or those of the English 1— - 
I have neither those of the French nor those of the English, but 
those of the Americans. — Has the German a few kreutzers 1 — He 
has a few. — Has he a few florins ?— He has six of them. — Have you 
another stick 1 — I have another. — What other stick have you ] — 
I have another iron stick. — Have you a few gold candlesticks] — 
We have a few. — Have these men vinegar] — These men have 
none, but their friends have some. — Have our boys candles ] — 
Our boys have none, but the friends of our boys have some. — Have 
you some other bags ] — I have no others. — Have you any other 
cheeses ] — I have some others. — Have you other meat ] — I have 
no other. (See note f , Lesson II. > 



TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. — %mi ntlb ^at^igste 

Cation. 

The tome (volume), fret Sfjett. 

Have you the first or third tome v£>a(>cn @te ten etften obet Written 
of my work ] &t)eU metnes SOScrfs ] 

Both. 25 e t b e (is declined like an ad- 

jective). t 

I have both. 3d) t)abc bribe. 

Obs. The singular of b e t b e is used only in the no- 
minative and accusative neuter. The plural bcibe is 
employed when two substantives express the same 
thing, and the singular neuter b e i b e 3 , when they ex- 
press two different things : as, 

Have you my book or my stick 1 Shaken @tc mem 23ud) ebet meinen 

ptcd ? 
I have both. 3d) l)aOe fcetbeS. 

Still, yet, some or any more. %l d). 

Some more wine. £?erf) 3Betn. 

Some more money. JSHed) ©elfc. 

Some more buttons. Stfod) .ftnopfe. 

Have you any more wine ! £>at)en <&u nod) SBctn ? 

c We have hitherto intentionally, and in perfect hatmony with this system, 
refrained from speaking of feminine nouns. They will be touched upon here 
lifter. (See Lesson LXXVIII.) 



44 



I have some more. 
Has he any more bread ] 
He has some more. 
Have I any more books'? 
You have some more. 



3d) babe nod) roefcben. 
£at er nod) 2'ret) ? 
C£r bat nod) roelcbeS. 
&abc id) nod) iMcber ? 
@ic babcn nocb nxlcfye. 



iVo£ am/ more, wo more. $ c t n — nufir, 



I have no more wine. 

Have you any more vinegar 1 

I have no more. 

Has he any more bread ] 

He has no more. 

I have no more dogs. 

I have no more. 

Not much more. 

Have you much more wine 1 
I have not much more. 
Have you many more books ? 
I have not many more. 

One more book. 

One more good book. 

A few books more. 
Have we a few hats more ? 
We have a few* more. 



3d) babe fctncn 2Bein mebr* 

£aben @te nocb @fit'9 ? 

3d) babe fctncn mebr. 

£at cr nocb 25rot> ? 

@r b^t fans mebr. 

3d) babe Mne £unt>c mebr. 

3cb babe fetne mebr. 

$1 t cb t t) i e I mebr. 

£abcn 8te nod) met &Bctn ? 
3cb W* t>cffen ntcbt trie, mebr. 
£aben ©ie nod) triel $ucbcr ? 
3d) babe bcren ntcbt triel mebr. 

9?od) ctn 23ud). 
9?ocb ctn entree; 2$ud% 
9?ocb etntcje SBttcber. 
£>aben nrit nod) etnige £ure ? 
£Btr baben nocb etnige. 



Has he a few good knives more 1 $c\t cr nocb ctntqe cjute33?efTer? 1 (See 

Lesson XVIII. Obs. B.) 

He has a few more. (£r bat nocb etntae. (See O&s 

Lesson XVI.) 



EXERCISES. 30. 

Which volume of his work have you ? — I have the second.— 
How many tomes has this work ] — It has three. — Have you my 
work, or that of my brother 1 — 1 have both (betfce). — Has the for 
eigner my comb or my knife 1 — He has both (betfces). — Have you 
our bread or our cheese ] — I have both. — Have you my glass or 
that of my friend 1 — I have neither the one nor the other. — Have 
we any more hay ] — We have some more. — Has our merchant any 
more pepper 1 — He has some more. — Has he any more candles 1 — 
He has some more. — Have you any more coffee 1 — We have no 
more coffee ; but we have some more vinegar. — Has the German 
any more water 1 — He has no more water ; but he has some more 
meat. — Have we any more gold ribbons 1 — We have no more gold 
(Lesson XVIII. Obs. B.) ribbons ; but we have some more silver 
(ribbons). — Has our friend any more sugar] — He bas no more. — 
Have I any more beer ? — You have no more. — Has your young 
man any more friends 1 — He has no more. 



; 



45 



31. 

Has your brother one more horse 1 — He has one more. — Have 
Y on one more 1 — I have one more. — Has the peasant one more ox ? 
— He has one more. — Have you a few more gardens ! — We have 
a few more. — What have you more 1 — We have a few good ships 
(plur. @d)tffc) and a few good sailors more. — Has our brother a few 
more friends ] — He has a few more. — Have I a little more money ? 
•—You have a little more. — Have you any more courage 1 — I have 
no more. — Have you much more money ] — I have much more, but 
my brother has no more. — Has he enough salt? — He has not 
enough. — Have we buttons enough ] — We have not enough. — Has 
the good son of your good tailor buttons enough ] — He has not 
enough. 



TWENTY-THIRD LESSON.— Him unir ^an^igstJ^ 

OBerfdfjtebene (is declined like 
• an adjective, and hardly ever- * 



Several. '< 



The father, 
the son, 
the child, 
the captain, 
the tea, 
tile cake, 



Several children. 



used in the singular.) {See 
Lesson XVIIL, Obs. B.j 

For all genders. 

N. fcerfcfytebette* D. t>erfd)tebettem 
G. fcerfcfytebener* A. fcerfcfyiebene* 

fcer QSatet ; 
fcet (Sobn ; 
bag £int> ; 

t>et £auptmann (plur. #auptteute) ; 
bet Sfjee ; 

fcet &ud)en (is not softened in the 
plur.). , 



i P ilir 



As much, as many. 

As much — as, as many — as 



)tet?cne jtinbet. 



@o tuel. 

(So t>tet— -rote. 



<So met 93teb rote 2Betn. 
@o met banner rote $tnbet» 



As much bread as wine. 
As many men as children. 

Have you as much gold as sil- £afcen ®* c ft ti& ®olb rote @U6ct ? 
ver ] 



Of. 



9$ o n (preposition governing the 
dative). 



46 



I have as much of this as of 3* fjctfce fo met t?on fciefcm rote tJOtt 

that. jenem. 

Have you as many hats as coats 1 .frciben @tc fo t>ict fyiitc nrie $K6cfe ? 
I have as many of these as of 3d) fjci&e fo Dtcl t>on fctejcn lute ttOtt 

those. jenen. 

As many of the one as of the (So wel son ten etnen wit tton fc>cn 

other. anfcern. 

Obs. A. When e t tt is used as an indefinite numer- 
al adjective, it is declined like other adjectives. 

Quite (or just) as much. @ b C tt fo t) t C (♦ 

I have quite as much of this as 3d) f)cibc cfcen fo t)tc( t>on fciefem HHC 

»on [cncm. 

fcet $ctnt> ; 
t»cr §iftgcr ; 
fcer; (Sttefct. 

9tt c r) t (comparative adverb). 

9)cd)r 95tob. 
SWcfyt banner. 

2CU. 



of that. 

The enemy, 
the finger, 
the boot, 

More. I 

More bread. 
More men, 

Than. 



Obs. B. 31 1 g answers to ZAarc in English, as tt) t c 

ISWPTS tO •/.?- 



Sit 

answers to as 

More bread than wine. 
More men than children. 
More of this than of that. 
More of the one than of the other. 

More of these than of those. 
I have more of your sugar than 
of mine. 

Less. 

Less water than wine. 

Less than I. 

— *than he. 

— than you. 

They. 
Than they. 

As much as you. 
As much as he. 
As much as they. 



sffie&t SBtob ate SG&cin. 
90?ef)r fanner ate Winter. 
9)2cf)t t>en btcfcm ate »on jenem. 
SJfefyr Don t>em einen alg t>on tern 

anbcrn.a 
sjftef)r »on fetcfcn ate t>on jencn. 
3d) 'r)obc mcr)r t>on 3t)tm\ Sucfet a($ 

t>en t>em mctnigen. | 

SBcniger (comparative of memo,) 
SBemget gBafict ate £Bctn. 

SBemget ate icr). 

— alS er. 

— ate <Ste. 

(Sic. 
2CI* ftc. 

(So w«i itne <Ste. 
<So mcl rote er, 
* @o met rote ftc. 



* When collective or plural nouns, as : 28 e t tt, wine ; 33 r C b, bread, <fcc. 
are to be represented by the pronouns, biefer and jener must be used 
and not ein and anbet 



47 

EXERCISES. 32. 

Have you a coat 1 — 1 have several. — Has he a looking-glass ? — 
He has several. — What kind of looking-glasses has he ] — He has 
beautiful looking-glasses. — Who has my good cakes] — Several 
men have them. — Has your brother a child ] — He has (tfyrcr, Les- 
son XVI.) several. — Have you as much coffee as honey] — I have 
as much of the one as of the other. — Has he as much tea as beer ] 
—He has as much of the one as of the other. — Has this man as 
many friends as enemies ] — He has as many of the one as of the 
other. — Has the son of your friend as many coats as shirts ] — He 
has as many of the one as of the other. — Have we as many boots 
as shoes ] — W T e have as many of the one as of the other. 

33. 

Has your father as much gold as silver] — He has more of the 
latter than of the former. — Has he as much tea as coffee 1 — He 
las more of the latter than of the former. — Has the captain as ma- 
ny sailors as ships ] — He has more of the one than of the other. — 
Have you as many rams as I ] — I have just as many.— Has the 
foreigner as much courage as we ] — He has quite as much.— Have 
we as much good as bad paper] — We have as much of the one as 
of the other. — Have we as much cheese as bread ] — We have more 
of the latter than of the former. — Has your son as many cakes as 
books ] — He has more of the latter than of the former ; more of 
the one than of the other. 

34. 

How many children have you ] — I have only one, but my bro- 
ther has more than I ; he has five.— Has your son as much head as 
mine ] — He has less head than yours, but he has more courage. — 
My children have more courage than yours. — Have I as much 
money as you ] — You have less than I. — Have you as many books 
as I ] — I have less than you. — Have I as many enemies as your 
father ] — You have fewer than he. — Have the Americans more 
children than we ] — They have fewer than we. — Have we as many 
ships as the English ] — We have less than they. — Have we fewer 
knives than the children of our friends ] — We have fewer than 
they. 

35. 

Who has fewer friends than we ] — Nobody has fewer. — Have 
you as much of my tea as of yours] — I have as much of yours as 
of mine. — Have I as many of your books as of mine] — You have 
fewer of mine than of yours. — Has the Spaniard as much of your 
money as of his own ] — He has less of his own than of ours. — 
Has your baker less bread than money] — He has less of the latter 
lhan of the former. — Has our merchant fewer dogs than horses 1— 



48 

He has fewer of the latter than of the former ; he has fewer of the 
one than of the other. — He has fewer horses than we, and we 
have less hread than he. — Have our neighbours as many carriages 
as we ] — We have fewer than they. — We have less corn and less 
meat than they. — We have but little corn, but meat enough. 



TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. — bier unit }tt)au?ig$ts 

Action. 

OF THE INFINITIVE. 

All German verbs form their infinitive in en. This 
termination in verbs, the root of which ends in e 1 or e r, a 
is contracted by throwing out the letter e, as buibem, 
to prevent ; fammeht, to collect, &c. The verbs marked 
with an asterisk ( # ) are irregular. 

A wish, a mind, a desire, £ U ft ; 
time, 3 c i t ; b 
to, i u . 

Obs. The preposition $U,to, always stands before 
the infinitive. In compound verbs it is placed between 
the separable particle and the infinitive, as will be 
exemplified in future lessons. 

To work. 2Ct(>etten. 

To speak. @ p t e cl) e n*, t e t> e n. c 

Have you a mind to work 1 £afcen (Ste 2uft $u atbctten ? 

I have a mind to work. 3d) fyabe £uft $u arbcitcn. 

He has not the courage to speak, Get fyat t>en 9#utf) nicfyt, $u fpredjen. 

To cut. © d) n e i t> e n*. 

To cut them, fie fd)ncit>cn*. 

a By the root we understand that part of a verb which precedes the termi- 
nation e It of the infinitive ; e. g. in the verb {often, to praise, I ft is the root. 

b The two substantives Sttft and 3ett are feminine. If they are required 
in a negative sense, feme £aft, and tttcfyt %rit must be used. Ex. 3$ fycibt 
hint £ufl &u fpredjett, I have no mind to speak: er f)Ctt nifyt j&tit %u arfcettett, 
he has no time to work. 

c ©prec^ert is derived from fcte ®pra$e, the language, and signifies to pro- 
duce or emit sounds in a physical manner ; tebett means to express ideas by 
words, from bie 3$ebe, th© discourse. 



49 



To cut some. 



Has he time to cut trees 1 
He has time to cut some. 



(Masc. 
Neut. 



tt>e(d)e, 
ben 



wefcfyett, bejfm, 
batten 

tvid)e$, befien, 
ivxtton 

' ! jral for all genders. 

■)mn, batton 









frfjnetV 



4bat cc 3 it SSa'ume. gu fcfjnetbcn ? 
(£r fyat 3cit roetdK $u fd)tmt>cm 



To buy. 
To buy some more. 



To buy one. 

To buy two. 
To buy one more. 

To buy two more. 



faufem 



faufem 



&auf etu 

Stod) faufen. 

J ilfasc. etnen 

3n?et faufem 
( Masc. nocf) etnen 
{ iVew*. nod) em£ 

SfZccr) $roa faufetu 

DCf 3 The infinitive is always placed at the end of 
the phrase whether preceded by JU or not. 

Have you a mind to buy one $ahm ©tc Cuffc nocf) ein $fetb $u 

more horse ? frutfen ? 

I have a mind to buy one more. 3d) Ijabe Sufi nod) etnS gu faufen* 
Have you a mind to buy some $abcn @tc Suft SBucfyct §u faufen 1 

books 1 
I have a mind to buy some, but 3d) fya&c Cuft weldje $U faufett, 

I have no time. abet left fyabc ntd)t»3eit« 

Has he time to wort 1 $at ct Sett gu atbettyn ? 

fte has time, but no mind to (St bat 3dt, abet feine £uft $U at* 

work. betten. 

exercises. 36. 

Have you still a mind to buy the house of my friend 1 — I have 
still a mind to buy it, but I have no more money. — Have you time 
to work % — I have time, but no mind to work. — Has he time to cut 
some sticks ? — He has time to cut some.— Have you a mind to cut 
some bread 1 — 1 have a mind to cut some, but I have no knife. — 
Have you time to cut some cheese 1 — I have time to cut some.— - 
Has he a desire to cut the tree 1 — He has a desire to cut it, but he 
has no time. — Has he time to cut the cloth! — He has time to cut it. 
— Have 1 time to cut the trees 1 — You have time to cut them.^ 
Has the painter a mind to buy a horse 1 — He has a mind to buy 
-two. — Has your captain of the navy (@d)tff$capitan) time to speak 1 
—He has time, but no desire to speak, 
3 



50 



37. 



Have you a mind to buy a carriage 1 — I have a mmd to buy one. 
—Have I a mind to buy a house 1 — You have a mind to buy one. 
—Has your brother a mind to buy a great ox 1 — He has a mind to 
buy a little one. — We have a mind to buy little oxen. — How many 
horses have you a mind to buy ] — 1 have a mind to buy four.-— Has 
any one a mind to buy a broom] — This man has a mind to buy 
one. — What has that man a mind to buy 1 — He has a mind to 
buy a beautiful carriage, three beautiful horses, good tea, and good 
meat. 

38. 

ffave you a desire to speak ] — I have a desire, but no time to 
speak. — Have you the courage to cut your arm ] — I have not the 
courage to cut it. — Am I right in speaking ($u fprcdjcn) ? — You are 
not wrong in speaking, but you are. wrong in cutting ($u fcfynrifcen) 
my trees.— Has the son of your friend a desire to buy one more 
bird] — He has a desire to buy one more 1 — Have you a mind to 
buy one more beautiful coat ]— I have a mind to buy one more.— 
Have we a mind to buy a few more horses 1 — We have a mind to 
buy a few more, but we have no more money. (See Lesson XXII.) 

39. 

What have you a mind to buy 1 — We have a mind to buy some- 
thing good, and our neighbours have a mind to buy something beau- 
tiful. — Have their children a desire to buy any birds 1 — Their 
children have no desire to buy any. — Have you the courage to buy 
the trunk of the captain ! — I have a desire to buy it, but I have no 
more money. — Who has a mind to buy my beautiful dog?— Nobo- 
dy has a mind to buy it. — Have you a mind to buy my beautiful 
birds, or those of the Frenchman ] — I have a mind to buy those of 
the Frenchman. — Which book -has he a mind to buy 1 — He has a 
mind to buy that which you have, that which your son has, and 
that which mine has. — Have you two horses ! — I have only one, 
but I have a wish to buy one more. 



TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. — jfuttf ntib WHTOjififite 

' Nation. 



OF COMPOUND VERBS. 



There are in German two kinds of compound verbs : 
one kind consists of a simple verb and a particle 
which is inseparable from it ; the other of a simple 
verb and a particle which can be separated, either to 



51 

give place to the syllable g e of the participle past, or 
to j U, or to be itself placed after the verb or even at 
the end of the phrase. We shall distinguish the separ- 
able verbs by placing g u between the verb and the 
particle. a Examples : 

To break. Bcrbrecfien*. 

To keep (to take care). 2Cufbcnxibren (auftutwafjren)* 

To pick up. 2(ufbebcn* (auftubebcn). 

To mend. % 2fu$befl*etn (au^ubeffetn). 

To make a fire. gcuet cinmad)cn (an$umad)cn). 

Has the tailor time to mend my #at t>ct ©cbtieibev " 3cit mcinen $otf 
coat ? au$gu6cfiern ] 

He has time to mend it. (St fyat Sett ir)n au^uOcfi"etn. b 

To wash. SBoidbcn *. 

i SBrcnncn V 
To burn, < 2krbtenncn (to destroy by burn- 

( ing)- 
To seek, to look for. <Sud>en (governs the accusative). 
To warm. SBtfrmen. 

To make. \ 93?ad)cn (physically). 

To do. £&un * (morally"). 

Has the shoemaker time to make $at bet @d)itfjmad)et Sett metne@tte* 

my boots 1 fet $u macron 1 

He has time to make them. (St fyat 3ctt fte $u macfyett. 

To be willing, to wish. £B ( U n ** 

Will you ] ) 

Are you willing 1 > Snellen <&K ? 

Do you wish 1 y 
I will, I am willing", I wish. 3>cr) rottl. 

Will he 1 is he willing 1 does > ^ ;fY _ „ 

he wish? J-ibtuct/ 

a These verbs may likewise be distinguished by the principal accent, which 
is placed on the root of the verb when the particle is inseparable, and when 
separable on the particle itself. 

b These examples show how the separable particle gives way in the infini- 
tive to $ U . 

c The verb fctennen (as well as its compounds, serbretmen, &c.) is regu- 
lar when used in an active or transitive, but irregular when in a neuter or in- 
transitive sense. We denote such verbs by the following abbreviations : v. 
ac. and neut. irreg. 

d The verb ma$en always relates to a determinate action, and is em- 
ployed nearly as the English verb to make, in the sense of producing anything ; 
the verb t ■§ U n * on the contrary always, like the English verb to do, relates to 
an indeterminate action, as : (kin $letb mad)Ctt, to make a coat ; f$euer ma- 
c&en, to make a fire; emen ©efallett tfyun, to do a favour; feine (Sdjulbtgfett 
t()im, to do one's duty. 



rootlet* 



5£ 

He will, he is willing, he wish- > g c ^.^ 

es. J 

We will, we are willing, we 5 ^ mm 

wish. j 

You will, you are willing, ?~, 

you wish. 5 

They will, they are willing, 2 @ien)0(lcn# 

they wish. 3 

O&s. J.. The particle J it does not precede the in 
finitive added to the verb XO U e tt, to be willing. Ex. 

Do you wish to make my fire 1 SQBollcn ©ie mein geucr emmeu 

d)cn? 
I am willing to make it. 3d) null e$ emmacftcn. 

I do not wish to make it. 3d) will es ntcbt anmacften. 

Does he wish to buy your horse 1 SEBttl et 3fa >Pfctt> fcmfen ? 
He wishes to buy it. (St will eg fciufctl. 

A TABLE OF COMPOUND VERBS/ 

I. Inseparable Verbs. 2 

These verbs are formed by prefixing one of the fol- 
lowing unaccented particles to simple verbs: be, emp, 
exit, er, ge, Winter, tter, wiber, jer* 

«3 C — fcebenfen *, to reflect. winter — ^tntcrgeben *, to deceive. 

@mp— cmpfcljlcn *, to recommend.. 23er — wrfptccfyen *, to promise. 

@ n t — entfftcben *, to run away. SBtber — rotuerlegen % to refute. 

(St — ertjatten *, to receive. 3« — $erOtecr;en *, to break. ■ 
©e — gefWn*/ to confess. 

II. Separable Verbs. 

2C() — afcfdbretben '*, to copy. 33d — beiflefjen *, to assist. 

2(n — anfangen *, to begin. 3)ar — borfUtten, to exhibit. 

2Cuf — aufbeben *, to pick up. ©arimter — baruntetmtfefyen, to in- 
2Cus — auSgetjen *, to go out. termingle. 

* 3 5, r > you* i s the real second person plural ; but the Germans generally 
use © t e , which is the third. 

f Our intention in giving tables of the most complicated grammatical parts, 
is not that the learners should make an immediate application of them ; we 
only wish to give them a clear and general idea of those parts, in order to en- 
able them to find them out more easily, as they will be in want of them in ad- 
vancing by degrees. They must in their exercises employ only the words and 
expressions made use of in the lessons. 

g We call verbs inseparable when they cannot, and separable when they 
can be separated. 



53 

£)ason — fcat-onfommen*, to escape. 9?acb — nacljmaebcri, to imitate. 

£>urd) — t)itrd)tctj"cn / to travel Uebet — libcrfltcgcn *, to overflow 

through. Urn — umwcrfcn *, to overturn. 

(Sin — ctnfcbtafcn *, to fall asleep. itntcr — unterjtnfcn *, to go to thw 
gcrt — fertfabreu .*, to continue. bottom. 

$eim — bcinigcbcn *, to go home. 9? ell — oettgupen *, to fill up. 

4?crau? — bcrausfbmnn'n * / to come s8et — gorgeben *, to pretend. 

out. SSerau* — perauSfagen, to foretell. 

jtaunter — (jcruut^rbrtngcn *, to SBcrbet — aetbetgebeti*, to pass by. 

bring down. Berber — t>orbcvfcr)en % to foresee. 

$er$u — bequnaben, to draw near. SBftrftber — ttorftberfafyrcn*, to pass 
.pin — bingi'bi'n *, to go thither. by in a coach. 

|>tnauf — btnauffrctaai*, to ascend. 35$cg — megejeben *, to go away. 

Jjtnaui — fytnauswerfen *, to throw SSu'fcer — nnebcvEonunen *, to come 

out. again. 

Jnnctn — btncingcnen *, to go in. 3u — $urcben, to persuade. 

Snnc-t-tnticMtcn *, to stop. Buriicf — $utMUfyxm, to return. 

jQJit — nrittbetlcn, to communicate. Sufcmmicn — aufammenfegen, to put 
£Riet>C£ — ruefcerlcgcn, to lay down. together. 

Obs. B. Some compound verbs are either insepar- 
able or separable, according to their signification. We 
shall speak of them hereafter. 

EXERCISES. 40. 

Have you a desire to keep my letter ] — I have a desire to keep 
it. — Am I right in keeping (cuifeuberoafyrcn) your money 1 — You are 
right in keeping it. — Has the tailor a desire to make my coat ] — 
He has a desire to make it, but he has no time. — Has your tailor 
time to mend my coats 1 — He has time to mend them. — Have you 
the courage to burn my hat ] — I have not the courage to burn it ; I 
have a mind to keep it. — Has the shoemaker's boy a mind to mend 
my boots 1 — He has no time to mend them. — What has our 
friend's tailor to mend 1 — He has to mend our old coats. — Who has 
to mend our boots ] — Our shoemaker has to mend them. — What 
has our hatmaker to do ] — He has to mend your great hats. — Has 
your brother's joiner anything to do ] — He has to mend our great 
tables and our little chairs. 

* 41. 

Do you wish to keep my twenty-seven crowns 1 — I wish to keep 
them. Will you pick up that crown or that florin 1 — I will pick up 
both. — Do you wish to cut his finger ] — I do not wish to cut it. — 
Does the painter wish to burn vinegar ] — He wishes to burn 
some. — Is the peasant willing to burn his bread 1 — He is not wil- 
ling to burn his own, but that of his neighbour. — Have you any- 
thing to do 1 — I have nothing to do. — Have we anything to do ?— . 
We have to warm our coffee. — Do you wish to speak 1 — I wish to 
speak. — Is your son willing to work ] — He is not willing to work. 



54 



42,. 



Do you wish to buy anything? — I wish to buy something.— 
What do you wish to buy? — I wish to buy some good books.— 
What has he to huy 1 — He has to buy a good horse. — Will you buy 
this or that table 1 — I will buy (put the infinitive always to the end 
of the phrase) neither this nor that. — Which house does your friend 
wish to buy ] — He wishes to buy your brother's great house. — Is 
your servant willing to make my tire l— He is willing to make it. — 
Will your father buy these rams or these oxen ] — He will buy 
neither the one nor the other. — Does he wish to buy my umbrella 
or my cane ] — He wishes to buy both. 

43. 

Do you wish to make a fire'? — We do not wish to make any. — - 
What do you wish to make ] — I wish to make vinegar. — Will you 
seek my knife] — I will seek it. — Have you to look for anything ] — 
1 have nothing to look for. — Has he time to seek my son ] — He has 
time, but he will not seek him. — What has he to do ] — He has to 
make a fire, to wash my thread stockings, to buy good coffee, good 
sugar, good water, and good meat. — Will he buy your good trunk 1 
— He will buy it. — Will you buy my great or my little house 1 — 
I will buy neither your great nor your little house ; I wish to buy 
that of our- friend. — Will you buy my beautiful horses ] — I will not 
buy them. 

44. 

How many rarns will you buy ] — I will buy twenty-two. — Does 
the foreigner wish to buy much corn] — He wishes to buy but 
little. — Do you wish to buy a great many gloves ] — We wish to 
buy only a few ; but our children wish to buy a great many. — Will 
they seek the same boots that we have ] — They will not seek those 
which you have, but those which my father has. — Will you look 
for my coats or for those of the good Frenchman ] — I will look for 
neither yours nor those of the good Frenchman; I will look for 
mine, and for those of my good son. 



TWENTY.SIXTH LESSON. — 0<>rt)0 tmb ^tmjigoU 

To tear. 3 e r r c t fi e n *. 

To go. © c \) e n *. 

At. 33 e i , > prepositions governing 

To. 3 u , \ the dative case. 

To he. ©cin *. 

Rule. The preposition 6 e t signifies with or at the 
house of, the preposition j u, to or to the house of. 



55 

To be with the man or at the <8ei frem 9#anne fein*. 

man's house. 
To go to the man or to the 3u t>em 9)tanne gefjen** 

man's house. 
To be with his (one's) friend or 23et fetttcm $teunt>e fein*. 

at his (one's) friend's house. 
To go to my father or to my 3u metnem SSater geljen*. 

father's house. 

To be at home. 3u £ctufe fein** 

To go home. Maty £aufe geljem 

To be with me or at my house. S3et nut fein*. 

To go to me or to my house. 3u mic gefyen** 

To be with him or at his house. Set tr)m fein*. 

To go to him or to his house. 3u ifym gefyen** 

To be with us or at our house. S3ei un£ fcin*. 

To go to us or to our house. 3u un$ gel)en*» 

To be with you or at your house, { SBet Sbnen fein*, fret (Sud) fern*. 

To go to you or to your house. ( 3u 3f)nen gef)en*, $U (Sud) gefjm* 

To be with them or at their house. 33et tfynen fcin** 

To go to them or to their house. 3u tfjnen gefjen*. 

To be with some one or at some *8et Semanfcem fein** 

one's house. 
To go to some one or to some 3u Semantem gefjen*. 

one's house. 
To be with no one or at no one's 23ei Stfiemanfcem fettt** 

house. 
To go to no one or to no one's 3u £fttemant>em gcr)cn*. 

house. 

At whose house ? With whom ? 23 c t to e m ? 
To whose house 1 To whom ? 3 u to e m ? 

To whom (to whose house) do 3u roem rootfen @ie ger)cn ? 

you wish to go ] 
I wish to go to no one (to no 3d) ttrifl $u Sfltemanfcem gefyen.* 

one's house). 
At whose house (with whom) is 23et roem tft 3^r 23rut>ec ? 

your brother? 
He is at ours (with us). (Sr tft 6ct un$. 

Is he at home ? 3ft et $u £cmfe ? 

He is not at home. (St i(l ntdr>t $U £cwfe. 

To drink. Srittfen*. 

To carry (to take). Sragen*. 

To bring (to carry). SBrtngcn** 

* In German, as in English, no more than one negative is ever exprebectt 
as has already been seen in many instances. 



56 

EXERCISES. 45. 

Do you wish to tear my coat ? — T do not wish to tear it.— Does 
your brother wish to tear my beautiful book ? — He does not wish 
to tear it. — What does he wish to tear ? — He wishes to tear your 
heart. — With whom is our father? — He is with his friend. — To 
whom do you wish to go ? — I wish to go to you. — Will you go to 
my house ? — I will not go to your's, but to my tailor's.— Does your 
father wish to go to his friend ? — He wishes to go to him. — At 
whose house is your son ? — He is at our house. — Do your children 
wish to go to our friends ? — They wish to go to them. — Is the 
foreigner at our brother's? — He is there (bet if) m). — At whose 
house is the Englishman ? — He is at yours. — Is the American at 
our house? — No, Sir, he is not at our house; he is at his friend's. 
—Is the Italian at his friends' ? — He is at their house. 

46. 

Do you wish to go home ? — I do not wish to go home ; I wish 
to go to the son of my neighbour. — Is your father at home ? — No, 
Sir, he is not at home. — With whom is he 1 — He is with the good 
children of our old neighbour. — Will you go to any one's house ? 
— I will go to no one's house. — At whose house is your son ? — 
He is at no one's house; he is at home* — What will he do at 
home ? — He will drink good wine. — Will you carry my letters 
home] — 1 will carry them to my father's.: — Who will carry my 
notes ? — The young man will carry them. — Will he carry them to 
my house? — No, he will carry them to his brother's. — Is his 
father at home ? — He is not at home ; he is at the foreigner's. 

47. 

What have you to drink ? — I have nothing to drink. — Has your 
son anything to drink? — He has good wine and good water to 
drink. — Will your servant carry my books to my brothers' ? — He 
will carry them to their house. — What will you carry to my 
house ? — I will carry to your house two chickens, three birds, good 
bread, and good wine (always put the infinitive to the end, and do 
not separate it from "to your house"). — Will you carry these 
chairs to my house ? — I will not carry these, but those. — What 
will the German do at home ? — He will work and drink good wine. 

48. 

What have you at home ? — I have nothing at home. — Have you 
anything good to drink at home ? — I have nothing good to drink ; 
I have only bad water. — Has the captain as much coffee as sugar 
at home? — He has as much of the one as of the other at home. — 
Will you carry as many crowns as buttons to my brother's ? — I 
will carry to his house as many of the one as of the other. — Will 
you carry great glasses to my house ? — I will carry some to your 
house. — Has the merchant a desire to buy as many oxen as rams ? 
—He wishes to buy as many of the one as of the other. 



57 

49. 

Has the shoemaker as many shoes as boots to mend? — He has 
as many of the one as of the Other to mend. — Has he as much 
wine as water to drink 1 — He has as much to drink of the one as 
of the other. — Has the Turk a desire to break some glasses 1 — He 
has a, desire to break some. — Has he a mind to drink some wine ? 
— He has no mind to drink any.— Will you buy anything of (fret) 
me] — I will buy nothing of you. — Of whom (SBci rocm) will you 
buy your corn ] — I will buy it of the great merchant. — Of whom 
will the English buy their oxen] — They will buy them of the 
Dutch. — Will the Spaniards buy anything] — They will buy 
nothing. 



TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Qicbttt tmir 
?to<W}igste Ceaion. 

w , ? C 95$ o ? (an adverb of place with- 

vvnere * \ out motion.) 

Whither ? where to t £ ® * ? i n ? (an adverb of place 
vv miner, unere 10 . £ with motion.) 

Rules. 

1. The question tt>0? indicates rest in a place, or 
with any person or object whatsoever ; the preposition 
which answers this question always governs the da- 
tive. 

2. The question VD t) i tt ? denotes motion or direc- 
tion towards some place or object ; when answered 
by one of the prepositions a n, to ; an f, upon ; f) t it t e r, 
behind; nebert, by the side; liber, above; unter, 
under; jrotfdjen, between; ttor, before; tit, in or 
into, it always requires the accusative.* 

There. *D a (rest, repose). 

Thither. & t n or t> a f) t n (motion or direc- 

tion). 

To carry thither. £tn or fcafytn tracjen*. 

To earrv it thither \ Masc - ^ n ] ^ in or ba ^' n 
lo carry it tnitner. j NeuL ^ j tragen*, 

» The same prepositions govern the dative when they answer the question 
too? 



58 



rv ±u'^ i Masc. toelcfyen } bin or bahin 

To carry some thither. j ^ ^ j tragm# / 

To carry them thither, fte t)ttt or batjiu tragen** 

06s. Jl. The adverb b a, £Aere, is always joined to 
a verb of rest, and the abverb t) t n or t> a t) i tt, thither, 
to a verb of motion. ^ t U is used to express motion 
from, and t) e r motion towards the person that speaks. 
Ex. dv tfi t>a, he is there ; tcf) tt)ttt and) fyfct (bafytn) gefyen, 
I will also go thither ; tt>oltett ©ie fyerf ommen ? will you 
come hither ? 



To send. 

To come. 
To lead. 
I will send him (it) to you. 


C @enbctu* 
I ©d)tcfen. b 

$ufjren« 

3d) will tfyn (eg) $u 3fynen fd>tdfcn 


When ? 


SQ&cmn ? 


To-morrow. 
To-day. 


9#or$en. 
£eut& 



Some where, any where* 3rC|ent)tt)0 (rest). 

Some whither, any whither. SfQCnbroorjin (direction). 

No where, not any where. 9? 1 1 Q c n b or n i t g c n b S. 

Do you wish to go any whither I Gotten <Sic irgcnbruof)itt 9cr)en ? 
I do not wish to go any whither. 3* will nirgcnbS f)tngef)en. 

The physician, ber 2fr^t. 

To write.- ©cfyreiben*. 

Have you to write as many let- Jpcikn <Sie fo Mel SBvtcfc ^u fc^rctOett^ 
ters as my father ] rote mein $citct ? 

Obs. B. Where the verb stands at the end of a 
phrase, the word XO t e , as, or a I £ f than, is placed with 
its nominative after the verb. 

I have to write more (i. e. /let- 3d) fjabc beren niefyr $u fcfyrei&en, a($ 
ters) than he. ( cr. 

exercises. 50. 

Where is your brother 1 — He is at home. — Whither do you wish 
to go? — I wish to go home. — Whither does your father wish to 

b <S rf) i (f e n is used when a person is sent without any object, or with one 
of little importance, fen ben, on the contrary, always denotes amission of 
importance, whence bet ©efanbte, the ambassador. 



59 

g<> I — He wishes to go to your housed — Whither will you carry 
this letter ? — I w ill carry it to my neighbour's. — Is your son at 
home ? — He is there. — Whither will the shoemaker carry my boots ? 
■ — He will carry them to your house. — Will he carry them home ? 
— He will carry them thither. — Will you send good sugar home? 
—I will send some thither. — Will the baker send good bread home ? 
— He will send some thither. — -W T ill you come to me ? — I will come 
to you. — Whither do you wish to go? — I wish to go to the good 
Frenchmen. — W T ill the good Italians go to our house ? — They will 
go no whither. — Will you take (fufjrcn) your son to my house ? — I 
will not take him to your house, but to the captain's. — When will 
you take him to the captain's ? — I will take him there ($u tfym) to- 
morrow. 

51. 

Will you go ewry-whither (any where) ? — I will go no whithei 
(no where). — Will your good son go to any one? — He will go to 
no one. — When will you take (ftibren) your young man to the pain- 
ter ? — I will take him there ($u tf)m) to-day. — Where will he carry 
these birds to? — He will carry them no whither. — Will you take 
the physflfian to this man? — I will take Mm there (gu ibm). — When 
will you take him there? — I will take him there to-day. — Will the 
physicians come to your good brother? — They will not come to him. 
— Will you send me a servant? — I will send you none. — Will you 
send a child to the physician! — I will send one to him. — With whom 
is the physician? — He is with nobody. — Do you wish to go any 
whither? — I wish to go to the good Americans. — Has he time to come 
to my house? — He has no time to come there. — Will the captain 
write one more letter ? — He will write one more. — Will you write 
a note ? — I will write one. — Has your friend a mind to write as 
many letters as I ? — He has a mind to write quite as many. 

52. 

Have you many letters to write I- — I have only a few to write. — 
How many letters has our old neighbour to write ? — He has as 
many to write as you. — Who has long letters to write? — The youth 
has some to write. — How many more letters has he to write ? — He 
has six more to write. — How many has he to send ? — He has twen- 
ty to send. — Has he as many letters to send as his father ? — He 
has few^er to send. — Has the hatmaker some more hats to send ? — 
He has no more to send. — Has your son the courage to w r rite a 
long letter? — He has the courage to write one. — Will he write as 
many letters as mine ? — He will write quite as many. — Will you 
buy as many carriages as horses ? — I will buy more of the latter 
than of the former. 



60 



TWENTY-EIGHTH 



LESSON.— &cl)t nnb ixoanfyztt 
Nation. 



In order to (conjunction). 11 m — ■ 5m 
To see. @ e f) e n * 

O&s. .A. The conjunctive expression 2*71 order to pre- 
ceding the infinitive is translated into German by a m 
g U. When the sentence is short, U nt, iti orrfer, may be 
left out. 

I will go to ray brother in order 3$ rcutt $u meincm 53rut>er §cf)en, 

to see him. urn tf)n $n fefyen. 

1 have no money (in order) to 3d) fjabe fctn (Mt>, (urn) S3rct> $u 



buy bread. 

Has your brother a knife (in or- 
der) to cut his bread 1 

He has one to cut it. 

To sweep. 
To kill. 
To slaughter. 
To saltl 
To he able. 



fern fen. 
£at 3bt 93rufcet em SReffer, (urn) 

fetn S3rcb $u fcfytmben % 
@r fyat etn$, urn ee 511 fcfynetben. 

2C u $ ! e f) r c n (au^ufefjten). 
Sob ten 
<S d) ( a cf) t e n 
@ a ( .3 e n . 
it 6 n n e n *. 



I can (am able) — he can (is 3c& frwn — er fann. 

able). 
We can (are able) — they can ££tr fonnen — fie fonnen. 

(are able). 
You can (are able). 3fa bonnet (@te fonnen). 

Obs. B. The particle 3 it does not precede the infini- 
tive added to the verb fonnen, to be able. (See Les- 
son XL.) Ex. 



Can you write a letter 1 
I can write one. 
He is able to work. 



fonnen <£)te etnen 93rtcf fcfyrctben? 
3d) fann etnen fcfyrctkn. 
(St farm ar&eiten. 



Singular. 

Dat. Aco. 



To me. 

To him. 



me. 
him. 



1st person. 
3d person. 



mtt% 



mid). 



* £5bten means to deprive any one of life ; fdjladjfett, to slaughter, is used 
in speaking of animals, the flesh of which is eaten. Ex. ©etnen $etnb fobten 
to kill his enemy ; Dcfcfen utti> <&4)afe fdjtacfcten, to slaughter oxen and sheep 



61 



To us. 
To you. 

To them. 



us. 

you. 

them. 



Plural. 

Dat. Acc. 

mtg* ttrtg* 

dud), dud). 

(3t)tten) (@te b ). 

3d person, tbnetu fie* 



1st person, 
2d person. 



To kill me. 
To see me. 
To speak to me. 

To speak to him. 



SOftct) tb'fctcn. 
m&) febcn*. 
SDZtcf) (mit mir or $u mtr) fpre* 

d)en*. 
3f)n (mit i&n or $u tt)m) [pre* 
cfeen*. 

To send to him. Sfym fd)tcfen. 

To send to his house. 3u tfjm fc&tcfen. 

To send him to me. 3bn mir (m mtr) fcWdfen* 

To send him to me to-morrow. Sfyn mit tnetgen fcbtcfcn (tr)n met? 

gen $u mtr fd)tcfcn). 

XtJ 3 In German the dative precedes the accusative ; 
but when the accusative is a personal pronoun it pre- 
cedes the dative. 



Plural. 



It to me — them to me. 
It to him - — them to him. 
It to us — them to us. 

It to you — them to you. 

It to them — them to them. 



r 

Masc. 

tbm 
ifytu 
tf)m 



Neut. 

eg mir — jte mtr. 
eg ifym — fte tt)m\ 
eg ung — fie wig* 

m * (eg pbnen)pe(3bnen). 
ifytu eg ifyrtett — fte ibnm 



When will you sen 


d me the hat 


1 Statin gotten ©ie mtr t) e n &ut 




febtcfen ? 


I will send it to you to-morrow 


. 3* witt i&n 3()ncn nicrgen 




fdjtcfen. 




Masc. Neut. Plural. 


Some to me. 


t mtr 


n>elchett. ttetcfyeg. mtr tt>elcf)e. 


Some to him. 


t tym 


n>elcf)en. welcfyeg. tfym tt>e(rf)e. 


Some to us. 


t Kttg 


toelcfyem wetcfyeg* ung n>etcf)e* 


Some to you. 




-*t»«*«(-.|S*Sai: 


Some to them. 


t tfynen 


toelcfyett. K>eW)eg* tfyrten n>e(cf)e* 



. 



*> See note a , Lesson XXXJ 



62 



To give* 
To lend. 

To give me. 
To lend me. 



(& e 6 e n *. 
2 e i f) c n *. 

5CBir Qebcn*. 
£fttt letfyen*. 

Are you willing to lend me £M!en <Ste mit (Mb (ctfjen ? 

some money ? - 
I am willing to lend you some. 3d) rcttl Sfynen nxtcfyeS tetfyetu 

A TABLE 

OF THE DECLENSION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 






Oh 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
.Ace. 

'Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 



FIRST PERSON. 

tcf), I. 

nteiner (ntem c ), of me. 



mtr, 
mtdf), 

nrir, 

unfer, 

mt£, 



to me. 
me. 



SECOND PERSON. 

btt, thou, 

bemer (bem), of thee. 



bir, 
bt<% 



to thee, 
thee. 



we. 


m 


you. 


of us. 


euev, 


of you. 


to us. 


eucfy, 


to you. 


us. 


end), 


you. 



THIRD PERSON. 
A 



Masculine. 



CO 



NoM.er, he. 

Gen. feuter (feitt), of him 



m, 



Feminine. 



Neuter. 



Dat. tfim, 

i 

.Ace tfytt, 



to him. 
him. 



she. 



e£, it. 

tfyrer, of her. feiner (fern), of it. 
tfyr, to her. mm, to it. 



ffe, 



her.'e^, 



it. 






'Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 
.Ace. 



For all genders. 

ffe, 

tfyrer, 
tfynett, 



they, 
of them, 
to them. 

them. 



« SWetn, betrt, fetit, as genitives singular, for memer, betner, femer, are used 
only in familiar discourse and in poetry. Ex. 33ergt.fi mettt tttdjt, forget mo 
mat. 



83 

EXERCISES. 53. 

Has the carpenter money to buy a hammer ] — He has some t( 
buy one. — Has the captain money to buy a ship ] — He has some 
to buy one. — Has the peasant money to buy sheep (t>d$ @d)af adds 
C and is not softened in the plural) 1 — He has none to buy any. — 
Have you time to see my father 1 — I have no time to see him. — 
Does your father wish to see me 1 ? — He does not wish to see you. 
—Has the servant a broom to sweep the house ] — He has one to 
sweep it. — Is he willing to sweep it ] — He is willing" to sweep it. 
— Have I salt enough to salt my meat ] — You have not enough of 
it to salt it. — Will your friend come to my house in order to see 
me 1— He will neither come to your house nor see you. — Has our 
neighbour a desire to kill his horse ] — He has no desire to kill it. — 
Will you kill your friends ] — I will kill only my enemies. 

54. 

Can you cut me some bread 1 — I can cut you some. — Have you 
a knife to cut me some ] — I have one. — Can you wash your 
gloves ] — I can wash them, but I have no wish to do it. — Can the 
tailor make me a coat ] — He can make you one. — Will you speak 
to the physician ] — I will speak to him. — Does your son wish to 
see me in order to speak to me ] — He wishes to see you, in order 
to give you a crown. — Does he wish to kill me] — He does not 
wish to kill you ; he only wishes to see you. — Does the son of our 
old friend w T ish to kill an ox ] — He wishes to kill two. — How 
much money can you send me 1 — I can send you thirty crowns.— 
Will you send me my letter ] — I will send it to you. — Will you 
send the shoemaker anything ] — I will send him my boots. — Will 
you send him your coats ] — No, I will send them to my tailor. — 
Can the tailor send me my coat] — He cannot send it you. — Are 
your children able to write letters ] — They are able to write some. 

55. 

Have you a glass to drink your wine ] — I have one, but I have 
no wine ; I have only water. — Will you give me money to buy 
some ] — I will give you some, but I have only a little. — Will you 
give me that which you have ] — I will give it you. — Can you 
drink as much wine as water ] — I can drink as much of the one as 
of the other. — Has our poor neighbour any wood to make a fire ] — - 
He has some to make one, but he has no money to buy bread and 
n:eat. — Are you willing to lend him some ] — I am willing to lend 
him some. — Do you wish to speak to the German ] — I wish to 
speak to him. — Where is he ] — He is with the son of the captain. 
—-Does the German wish to speak to me ] — He wishes to speak to 
you. — Does he wish to speak to my brother or to yours] — He 
wishes to speak to both — Can the children of our tailor work ] — 
They can work, but they will not. 



64 



56. 

Do you wish to speak to the children of your shoemaker 1 — I 
wish to speak to them. — What will you give them ] — 1 will give 
them great cakes. — Will you lend them anything ] — I have nothing 
to lend them. — Has the^etfbk some more salt to salt the meat 1 — 
He has a little more. — Has he some more rice 1 — He has a great 
deal more. — Will he give me some 1 — He will give you some- 
Will he give some to my poor children] — He will give them 
some. — Will he kill this or that hen 1 — He will kill neither this 
.nor that. — Which ram will he kill 1 — He will kill that of the good 
peasant. — Will he kill this or that ox ] — He will kill both. — Who 
will send us biscuits] — The baker will send you some. — Have 
you anything good to give me ] — I have nothing good to give you. 



TWENTY-NINTH LESSON.— Nemt nub flaatqigste 
JUrtion. 



2Be m ? (A question followed by 

the dative.) 
For persons: £Ben?} (Questions 
>. followed by 
For things : SB a $ ? J the accus.). 



To whom ? 
Whom ? 
What ? 

DECLENSION OF THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN 2B C X ? WHO ? 

Masc. and Fem. Neut. 

what ? 



Nom. Who ? 
Gen. whose? 

Dat. to whom ? to what ? 

Ace. whom ? what 1 



N. vt>er ? n>a£ ? 
G. roefien ? 

r> v™™ 9 I an wag ? tooran ? 
) roorauf ? mojtt ? 
A. tt>en ? tv>a$ ? 

9GB er, who, has no plural, and relates only to per- 
sons, without distinction of sex, as who in English. It 
may be used instead of fcerjcntge, rt)efcf)er, he who. 

355 a 8, which, has no plural, and always relates to a 
thing. It often stands for ba^jenige, \veld)e$ or bag, tveU 
d)e£, that which. 



To answer. 
To answer the man. 



% n t rc> c r t c n, a 

£>cm <0tonnc antrcertcru 



a The verb cmttoortett is inseparable, although the accent rests upon the 
particle ant; it governs the accusative with the preposition auf, to. ^Beatlt- 
toovten, to answer, governs the accusative without a preposition. 




65 

To answer the men. 3)cn Sttannern antwerten. 

To answer a letter. 2(uf etnen 3?rtcf antroorftit or etnctt 

SBrief beantiwrten. 

To i*. © a r a it f. 

To answer it. SDatauf antivorten or ir)n (e$) fceants? 

nwrtciu 

O&s. ji. The demonstrative local adverbs, bet, there ; 
fyter, here ; WO, where ; are usually employed instead 
of demonstrative pronouns, and connected with the 
preposition which, the verb requires. If the preposi- 
tion begins with a vowel, the letter r is added to the 
words ba and tt>0 for the sake of euphony. 

In. Sn (governs the dat. and ace). 

In the. 3 n b e m (tm, rest 1 *)* 

Into the. 3 n ten (motion). 

In the. 3n ten (rest). 

Into the. 3n t)te (motion). 

To go into the garden. 3n ben (fatten gefjen*. 

To be in the garden. 3n bem (tm) (fatten fetn*. 

To go into the gardens. 3n bte ©atten gefyen*. 

To be in the gardens. 3n ben ©drten fein*. 

Obs. B. The rapidity of pronunciation has led to a 
contraction of the last letter of the definite article with 
certain prepositions which precede it ; thus 6etm is of- 
ten said instead of bet bem, tm instead of in bem, irt$ in 
the accusative neuter instead of in bctS* 

According to this contraction we may say or write : 

2Cm, near the, for cm beau $ux$, for the, for fur tia$. 

2(n$, to the, against 3m, in the, — in bem. 

the, — cm bct& 3n£, into the, — in bctS, 

tfufo upon the, — auf bas. SScm, from the, — t>on bem. 

23etm, at the, — bet bem. Sum, to the, — $u bem. 

iDurd)S, through the, — burdfybaS. 3ur, to the, — $u bet. 

The theatre, bag Sweater ; 

the forest, the wood, bet 2Mb (plur. bte 2Sd(bet) ; 
the warehouse, bos SSciareritctcjet (is not softened in 

the plur.) ; 

*> The preposition t tt is used when the place in which a person is, or to- 
wards which the motion is directed, is closed, or conceived to be so. ■ It is 
followed by the dative to the question ft o , and the accusative to the question 



66 

the storehouse, 006 $etrotr)$r;ou$ ;« 

the magazine, tog $)?oqo$in (plur. c) ; 

the provision, store, tor s I>errotf) ; 

the room, the chamber, tog Simmer ; 

the batcher, tcr Jlctfcbcr (ter Sfliegcjet:). 

To go into. Jo t n c t n q e f) c n *. 

To be m the. Sarin f c t n # . 

Bo you wish to go to the thea- SGSctlcn (Sic tng Scoter Qttjcn ? 

tre? 
I wish to go thither. 3d) nntl fnnctn gefyen. 

Is your brother in the theatre ? 3ft 3(jt Sruter im Sweater ? 
He is there. (§t tft tortn. 

Obs. C. The above examples show how b a r t tt 
expresses rest in, and f) i n e t it motion towards, the 
interior of a closed place. 

EXERCISES. 57. 

Will you answer your friend ? — [ will answer him. — But whom 
will you answer? — I will answer my good father. — Will you not 
answer your good friends ? — I will answer them. — Who will 
answer me] — The Russian wishes to answer you, but he cannot. — 
Will the Russian write me a letter ] — He will write you one. — Can 
the Spaniards answer us ] — They cannot answer us, but we can 
ariswer them. — What has the Englishman to do 1 — He has to 
answer a letter. — Which letter has he to answer 1 — He has to 
answer that of the good Frenchman ] — Have I to answer a letter 1 
— You have not to answer a letter, but a note. — Which note have I 
to answer ] — You have to answer that of the great captain. 

58. 

Have we to answer the letters of the great merchants 1 — We 
have to answer them. — Will you answer the note of your tailor?— 
I will answer it. — Will any one answer my great letter 1 — No one 
will answer it. — Will your father answer this or that note 1 — He 
will answer neither this nor that. — Which notes will he answer 1 — 
He will answer only those of his good friends. — Will he answer 
me my letter 1 — He will answer it you. — Will your father go any- 
whither 1 — He will go nowhither. — Where is your brother 1 — He is 
in the garden of our friend. — Where is the Englishman ? — He is in 
his little garden. — Where do we wish^te go to? — We wish to go 
into the garden of the French. — Where is your son ? — He is in his 
room. — Will he go to the magazine 7 — He will go thither. — Will 
you go to the great theatre ? — I will not go thither, but my son has 
a mind to go thither. — Where is the Irishman ? — He is in the the- 
atre. — Is the American in the forest ? — He is there. 

c In compound words the last only is softened. Ex. i>Ct§ SBortCltljSfjaUf, 
the storehouse ; plur. fcte ^orrat^^aufer. 



87 

59. 

(Vill you come to me in order to go to the forest 1 — I have no 
v«sh to go to the forest. — To which theatre do you wish to go ]— 
I wish to go to the great theatre.; — Will you go into my garden, or 
into that of the Dutchman? — I will go neither into yours nor into 
that of the Dutchman; I will go into the gardens pf the French. — 
Will you go into those of the Germans ! — I will not go thither ([)tns 
cm). — Have the Americans great warehouses 1 — They have some. — 
Have the English great stores ] — They have some. — Have the Ger- 
mans as many warehouses as stores ] — They have as many of the 
latter as of the former. — Will you see our great stores ] — I will go 
into your warehouses in order to see them. — Have you much hay 
in your storehouses ] — We have a great deal, but we have not 
enough corn. — Do you wish to buy some] — We wish to buy some. 
— Have we as much corn as wine in our storehouses 1 — W T e have 
as much of the one as of the other. — Have the English as much 
cloth as paper in their warehouses 1 — They have more of the one 
than of the other in them (fcartn). — Has your father time to write 
me a letter ] — He wishes to write you one, but he has no time to- 
day. — When will he answer that of my brother ] — He will answer 
it to-morrow. — Will you come to my house in order to see my 
great warehouses 1 — I cannot come to your house to-day ; I have 
letters to write. 



THIRTIETH LESSON.— JDmssigste £*Ctiott. 

Upon. 2Cu f (governs the dat. and ace), 

Uvon the C 2C u f t> e m (repose*). 

Upon the. 1 2C u f t) c n, t) a 8 (action). 

The market, bet sjflatft ; 

the ball, t>et 9MI ; 

the country, baS 2cmb ; 

the place (the square), Dot $)(a§ ; 

the field, ta* gelt). 

To be at the market. 2Cuf bem 9}?atfte b fan*. 

To go to the market. 2Cuf ben 93fcirft gerjen*. 

To be at the ball. 2Cuf tan SMk fcin*. 

To go to the ball. "2Cuf ben &all cjcficn*. 

To be in the country. ?Cuf bem £anbe fetn*. 

To go into the country. 2Cuf ba$ £anb gefyen*. 

» The preposition (Utf, upon, is used when the place is not closed, but open. 

b The genitive singular of masculine and neuter nouns sometimes termi- 
nates in s, and sometimes in e 6 (except those in el, en, e r , c^ett and I tin 
which always take s). These forms are equally good ; but the former is 
more frequently used in conversation, and the latter in composition. The 
same distinction ought to be observed with regard to the dative singular of 
masculine and neuter nouns, which takes e when the genitive takes e 3 






68 

To be at '(he place (in the square). 2(uf bem $pta§c fcin*. 
To go to the place. 2fuf ben 5>(a6 gcben*. 

To be in the field. 2(uf from ft-elbe fein*. 

To go into the field. 2Cuf ba* gelt) gefyen*. 

At. 2( n (dat. and ace). 

At the. 2£ n tern (repose ,: ). 

To the. 21 n ben, b a £ (action) 

The window, t)a$ genftet. 

To go to the window. 2(n t)ae geufret ejeben*. 

To stand, (£tebcn*. 

To stand at the window. 2Cn tern genfter ftcben*. 

m .. . ii C2tn Semanben fd)rctben*. 

lo write to somebody. < ^ ~: •„, n '; , ,* 

J £ ^semanrem |cbrctben** 

A .„. .. . , C2Mkn (Sic an micb febreiben? 

Are you willing to write to me * £ mm ^ mh ^^ ? 

T .-,!. .. . C 3d) will an @te fcfrrciben. 

I am willing to write to you. J ^ ^ ^ mn ^ rcibfn . 

I wish to write to the man. 3d) will an ben £)?ann fcfom&ctt. 

To whom ? 2C n w c n ? 

To whom do you wish to write 1 2(n wen wetten @ie fcbrctOcn ? 

To me, to him. 71 n mid), an t r) n • 

To the man. 2Cn ben $ftann« 

I will write to him. 3d) will tr)m fd)tcU>ctu 

To ivhom ? SB c m ? 

To me, to Mm. %Jl t r , ib m. 

To whom do you wish to write ? 2£>em weUen (Sic fcbretOen ? 
To the man. £>em 9ftanne. 

The nobleman, ber (Sbebuann ; d 

the boatman, ber ©cb iff ma tin ; 

the bailiff, ber ?(mtmann ; 

people, Scute (plur.). 

exercises. 60. 

Whither do you wish to go ? — I wish to go to the market. — 
Where is your cook 1 — He is at the market. — Where is my brother? 
— He is at the ball. — Will you come to me in order to go to the 
ball] — I will come to you in order to go thither. — Is your father in 
the country ] — He is there. — Do you wish to go to the country 1 — » 
I do not wish to go there. — Whither does your son wish to go ?— 
He wishes to go to the great place. — Is your friend at the great 
place] —He is there. — Does the Englishman wish to go into the 
country in order to see the fields ? — He does not wish to go into 

c 5ttt, at, by, near, points out proximity to a person or a place, 
* For substantives terminating in matttt, see Lesson XVII. 









69 



the country in order to see the fields, but to see the forests, the 
birds, the water, and to drink tea. — Where is the son of the 
peasant] — He is in the field to cut some corn (cutting- corn).-— • 
Does the son of the nobleman wish to go any whither ] — He does not 
wish to go any whither ; he is tired. — Whither does the son of the 
bailiff wish to carry corn ] — He wishes to carry some to the store- 
house of your brother. — Does he wish to carry thither the wine 
and the meat 1 — He wishes to carry both thither. 

61. 

Is the friend of the Spaniard able to carry provisions 1 — He is 
able te carry some. — Whither does he wish to carry provisions ] — 
He wishes to carry some to our storehouses. — Do you wish to buy 
provisions in order to carry them to our storehouses 1 — I wish to 
buy some in order to take them into the country. — Do you wish to 
go to the window in order to see the youth 1 — I have no time to go 
to the window. — Have you anything - to do 1 — I have a letter to 
write. — To whom have you a letter to write 1 — I have to write one to 
my friend. — Do you wish to write to the bailiff] — I wish to write 
to him. — What do you wish to write to him ] — I wish to answer 
him his letter. — x\re you able to write as many letters as 1 ] — I am 
able to write more of them than you. — Can you^write to the (cm 
t)tc) noblemen ] — I can write to them. — Have you pap?r to write ] — I 
have some. — Is the bailiff able to wiite to anybody 1—He is not 
able to write to anybody. 

62. 

Have you time to stand at the window] — I have no time to 
stand at the window. — Is your brother at home ] — He is not at 
home. — W T here is he ] — He is in the country. — Has he anything to 
do in the country ] — He has nothing to do there. — W hither do you 
wish to go ] — I wish to go to the theatre. — Is the Turk in the 
theatre ] — He is there. — Who is in the garden ] — The children of 
the English and those of the Germans are there. — Where does your 
father wish to speak to me ] — He wishes to speak to you in his 
room. — To whom does your brother wish to speak ] — He wishes to 
speak to the Irishman.^*-Does he not wish to speak to the Scotch- 
man ] — He wishes to speak to him. — Where will he speak to him ? 
— He will speak to him at (in) the theatre. — Does the Italian wish 
to speak to anybody ] — He wishes to speak to the physician.— 
Where will he speak to him] — He will speak to him at the ball. 

63. 

Can you send me some money ] — I can send you some. — How 
much money can you send me ] — I can send you thirty-two 
crowns. — When will you send me that money ] — I will send it to 
you to-day. — Will you send it to me into the country T — I will send 
it to you thither. — Will you send your servant to the market ] — I will 
send him thither. — Have you anything to buy at the market ?— 
1 have to buy good cloth, good boots, and good shoes. — What does 





70 

the butcher wish to do in the country 1 — He wishes to buy there 
oxen and rams in order to kill them. — Do you wish to buy a chick- 
en in order to kill it? — I wish to buy one; but I have not the 
courage to kill it. — Does the boatman wish to kill any one 1 — He 
does not wish to kill any one. — Have you a desire to burn my let- 
ters 1—1 have not the courage to do it. — Will the servant seek my 
knife or my paper ] — He will seek both. — Which knife do you 
wish (to have) ] — I wish (to have) my large knife. — What oxen 
does the butcher wish to kill ] — He wishes to kill large oxen.— 
What provisions does the merchant wish to buy ] — He wishes to 
buy good provisions. — Where does he wish to buy them] — He 
wishes to buy them at the market. — To whom does he wish to send 
them ] — He wishes to send them to our enemies. — Will you send 
me one more book ] — I will send you several more. — Are you able 
to drink as much as your neighbour ] — I am able to drink as much 
as he ; but our friend, the Russian, is able to drink more than both 
of us (ttur beibe). — Is the Russian able to drink as much of this 
wine as of that ] — He is able to drink as much of the one as of the 
other. — Have you anything good to drink 1 — I have nothing to 
drink. 



THIRT^fTrst LESSON— (Rn mxb bmssigste 
Action. 

The corner, fc>er 2£tnM ; 

the fountain (well), t>er 23runnen (is not softened in 

the plur.) ; 
the hole, fcctS god). 

To leave, to let. 2 a f f c n *. 

To go for, to fetch. $ o ( e n. 

To send for. |)den I a f f e n *. 

I leave — he leaves. 3d) to fie — er (apt. 

We leave— they leave. 2Btt fofiVn — fte foflen. 

You leave. 3(jt foffet (@ic foflen). 

Obs. A. The particle j u , does not precede the infi- 
nitive joined to the verb fojfett. See Lesson XL. Ex. 

We send for bread. £Btr (ciflfcn SBrcb f)c(en. 

We wish to send for wine. 2Btt roellen 2£cm fyolen fofien. 

To go for it, to fetch it. 3bn or e$ fyotcn. 

To go for some, to fetch some. SOBetcfyen, roetcrjeS fjolen. 

Thou 3) tt a 

a In addressing one another, the Germans use the second person singular 
and third person plural. The second person singular £Du, thou, is used : 1. 
in addressing the Supreme Being ; 2. in sublime or serious style and in poetry; 



71 

Thou hast — thou art. £)u fjaft — £)u tuft. 

Art thou fatigued 7 S$ijt £<u mtibc ? 

I am not fatigued. 3d) bin ntd)t mube. 

Thou wilt (wishest), — thou art £)u will ft — £>u femnjt. 

able (canst). 
Art thou willing- to make my fireT SBtllft £)u mein £euer anmncben ? 
I am willing to make it, but I 3d) will e$ onmadjen, abcr id) fcmn 

cannot. nid)t. 

Thou leavest. SDu Iffffejl 

7%. Sing. 5) e t n. Plur. & e in c b . 

To be obliged (must). 9JI u f f e n *. 

I must — he must. 3d) mu(5 — cr nwp. 

We must — they must. SBit niitffen — fte muffen. 

Thou must — you must. Du mujjt — 3f)t ma" fiet or tnuj}| 

(<Sic mtiffen). 

Obs. B. The infinitive joined to the verb ntufiett is 
not preceded by the particle gtt. (See Lesson XL.) 
Ex. 

We must work. ££ir nuiffen atktten. 

Must you write a letter to your SWuffen @te Sforcm SBtuber einen 

brother 1 S3rtcf fdbreiben ? 

Is he obliged to go to the market ? gtfufj cr auf ben 9)?atft ejefyen ? 

He is obliged to go thither. (St mup babin ejeben. 

What hast thou to do ] ££a$ r)afi Du $u tfyun ? 

I have nothing to do. 3d) fycibe ntd)t6 $u tfyun. 

What hast thou to drink 1 2Bas baft £>u *u trinf en ? 

I have nothing to drink. 3d) fjabe ntd)t6 $u trinfen. 

What has the man to do 1 $£a0> bat bcr 93tann $u tbun ? 

He is obliged to go into the (Sr mup in ben ££alb gefyen. 

wood. 

This evening (to-night). J f ^^"T^ 
In the evening. J } gj »«M (genitive). 

This morning. [f&S^^^ 

Interning. { { »-ggp (genitive). 

3. it is a mark of intimacy among friends, and is employed by parents and 
children, brothers and sisters, husbands and wives, towards one another : in 
general it implies familiarity founded on affection and fondness. In polite 
conversation, persons always address each other in the third person plural. 
The third person singular and second person plural also, especially the former, 
are frequently used towards inferiors, as servants, &c. In writing, the pro- 
nouns of address : £>U, £?te and 3f)t, have a capital initial letter. 
*> 2>em and 2)eme, thy, are declined exactly as mein and metne, my. 



72 

EXERCISES. 64. 

Will you go for some sugar ] — I will gc for some.-— Son (#ftein 
©cfin), wilt thou go for some water ] — Yes, father (mctn &>atcr), I 
will go for some. — Whither wilt thou go ] — I will go to the well 
in order to fetch some water. — Where is thy brother 1 — He is at 
the well. — Will you send for my son? — I will send for him. — ' 
Will the captain send for my child] — He will send for him (cS).— < 
Where is he ] — He is in a corner of the ship. — Can you make a 
f hole in the (with accusative) table ] — I can make one. — Art thou- 
able to write a letter to me] — I am able to write one to you. — 
Must I go anywhither] — Thou must go into the garden. — -Must I 
send for anything ] — Thou must send for good wine, good cheese, 
and good bread. — What must I do ] — You must write a long letter. 
— To whom must I write a long letter ] — You must write one to 
your friend. 

65. 

What must we do ] — You must go into the forest in order to 
cut some wood. — What has the Englishman to do] — He has 
nothing to do. — Has the Spaniard anything to do ] — He has to 
work. — Where can he work ] — He can work in his room and in 
mine. — When will you give me some money ] — I will give you 
some this evening. — Must I come to your house ] — You must come 
to my house. — When must I come to your house ] — This morning. 
— Must I come to your house in the morning or in the evening] — 
You must come in the morning and in the evening. — Whither 
must I go ] — You must go to the great square in order to speak to 
the merchants. — Where must the peasant go to ] — He must go into 
the field in order to cut some hay. — Must I keep anything (for) 
you (Sfynen) ] — You must keep (for) me (nut) my good gold and 
my good works. — Must the children of our friends do anything] — 
They must work in the morning and in the evening. — What must 
the tailor mend (for) you ] — He must mend my old coat (for) me. 
— Which chicken must the cook kill] — He must kill this and 
that. — Must I send you these or those books ] — You must send 
me (both) these and those. 



THIRTY-SECOND LESS0N.-2am unit breismgst* 
JUctiou. 

As far as. 9Bt $ (an adverb of place). 

How far? 23t£ wot)trt ? (See Lesson XXVII, 

Rule 2.) 
As far as the corner. S3t$ in ben £Btnfe(. 

As far as the end of the road. 33U an bag <&nfo lit &Bege& 



73 



t>a$ Wbe (has no plural) ; 
i^oS (Snbc (plur. tie (Snbcn) ; 
bcr m§. 

5*t$ auf ben <8ebcn bc$ gaffes. 
3^t6 ouf ben ®ruub be* !&runncn$< 
$) is auf ben @runb bet: &3runnen. 

bcr Jsftebcn ; 
bcr 2^obcn ; 
bcr ©runb ; 

t)a§ ga& ; 
bcr SBcutel. 

3d) gefje — cr ejefyet or gefyt. 
££ir gefjen — fte gc^cn. 



The end, 

the end (the extremity), 

the road, the way, 

To the bottom of the cask. 
To the bottom of the well. 
To the bottom of the wells. 

The bottom, 
the garret, 
the ground, 
the cask, 
the purse, 

I go, am going— he goes, is 

going. 
We go, are going — they go, are 

going. 
Thou goest, art going — you go, £)u gefyeft or gcf)ft — 3fyt <jer)ct oi 

are going. gcl)t (<Ste gefjen). 

All, ever y. 1i I L 

21 { I, is declined like the definite article. It is never 
preceded or followed by an article, but may be so by 
a pronoun. 

f 2Me Sage, 
t 2Cttc Bergen. 



Every day. 
Every morning. 
Every evening. 

At. 

At what o'clock ? 
At what time ] 
At one o'clock. 

Half. 

At half past three. 
At a quarter past one. 
At a quarter past eleven. 
At a quarter to one. 
At twelve o'clock. 

At twelve o'clock at night (mid- Um 9)ittternad)t 
night). 

The quarter, bag SUcrtef. 

At present, now. 

To go out. 

To remain, to stay. 



t OTc tfbenb. 

Unn 

Um tvtcmef Ufjr ? 

Um lveldbe Sett ? 

Um cms or um cin Ufjr.* 

£al6. 

t Um f)a(b trier. 
t Um cin 33terte( auf $n?et. 
t Um cin 93tertel auf gro^f* 
j Um brct 23tertel auf etn& 
Um groolf or um ^rootf Uf)C 



Segt. 

2C u $ g e f) e n * (au$$ugeFjen) 

S3 ( c t b c n *. 



» Ufjr signifies clock, watch, and not hour, which is translated by ©tuitfcf; 
When we say: QBteotet Ufyr tft eg? it means: SBteotel tfl e$ auf fcer U$r? 
How much is it upon the clock ? For this reason we may leave out the word 
U\)X, when r r e say : um tin$, um &t»olf, as above. 
4 



74 



When d<> you wish to go oil? 

I wish to go out now. 

To remain (to stay) at home. 



2£cnn rceflen &t au£cjcf)cn ? 
3d) null »c|t auftjebcn. 

3u .paufc HciOcn*. 



Here. 


.pier. 


To remain here. 


.put Mciben* 


There. 


£ a. 


To remain there. 


£a fclci&cn*. 



Are you going to your brother ? 
I am going to him. 
We are — they are. 
You are. 

We have — they have. 
You have. 

Are your brothers at home 1 
They are at home. 
They are not at home. 
Are the men thirsty 1 

Have your friends my books? 

They have them not. 
Have they time to write T 

To thee. 
Thee. 



©cben @tc jti Sbrcm Bcubcv? 
3d) gefoe 511 thru 
SSit ftnfc — fie finb. 
S^t fctt (Sic (int>). 

S5? 1 1 b a b c n — ft t b a b c n . 

abet or babt (£tc faben). 

(Stub Sfc« fritter ju £aufc? 
Sic f;nt ?u .paufc. ^ 

2'w (into mebt m fxmfe. 
<Sinb tic banner turfttcj? 

&aben Sfac greunoe mcinc 23iid)cr? 
6Jtc foaben ftc ntcbt, 
£abcn (ic 3ctt $u fcfyrctfren ? 

3>it (dative). 

£> X d) (accusative). 



Obs. Do and am, when used as auxiliaries, are nevei 
expressed in German. Ex. 

Do vou wish to take me to my Snellen Sic mid) $u metnem $citct 

father ! 
I wish to take thee to him. 
Are vou willing to give me 

knife ! 
I am willing to give thee one. 
Am I D-oingr to him ? 



fiibrcn ? 
3;b trill ©id) m tb,m fiibrcn. 
S&etten Sic mir cm Steffier ge&en ? 

3d) rcifl 3>tt etn* ejeben. 
; id) §u tbm ? 



Thou art not going to him. but 2)u gebeft ntcbt $u tbm, fertbetn $u 
to me. mir. 



exercises. 66. 

How far do you wish to go 1 — I wish to go as far as the end of 
the forest. — How for does your brother wish to go ? — He wishes 
to go as far as the end of that road. — How far does the wine go ? 
— It goes to the bottom of the cask. — How far does the water go 1 
— I: goes to the bottom of the well, — Whither art thou going ? — 
i am going to the market. — Whither are we going? — We are going 
into the country. — Are you going as far as the square 1 — -I am 



75 

going as far as the fountain. — When does your cook go to the 
market ? — He goes there every morning-. — Can you speak to the 
nobleman ] — I can speak to him every day. — Can 1 see your 
father ? — You can see him every evening". — At what o'clock can I 
see him ? — You can See him every evening at eight o'clock. — Will 
you come to me to-day ] — I cannot come to you to-day, but to-mor- 
row.— At what o'clock will you come to-morrow 1 — 1 will come at 
half past eight. — Can you not come at a quarter past eight 1 — I 
cannot. — At what o'clock does your son go to the captain 1 — He 
goes to him at a quarter before one. — At what o'clock is your 
friend at home '< — At midnight. 

67. 

Have you a mind to go out? — I have no mind to go out. — When 
will you go out ] — I will go out at half past three. — Does your 
father wish to go out ] — He does not wish to go out ; he wishes to 
remain at home. — Are you willing to remain here, my dear (ftcb) 
friend 1 — I cannot remain here, I must go to the warehouse. — Must 
you go to your brother ] — I must go to him. — At what o'clock must 
you write your letters 1 — I must write them at midnight. — Do you 
go to your neighbour in the evening or in the morning? — I go to 
him (both) in the evening and in the morning. — W T here are you 
going to now 1 — I am going to the play — Where are you going to 
to-night ] — I am going nowhither ; I must remain at home in order 
io write letters. — Are your brothers at home ] — They are not there. 
— Where are they] — They are in the country. — Where are your 
friends going to ] — They are going home. — Has your tailor as 
many children as your shoemaker "? — He has quite as many of them 
(tfyret). — Have the sons of your shoemaker as many boots as their 
rather 1 — They have (ocren) more than he. — Have the children of 
)ur hatter as much bread as wine 1 — They have more of the one 
than of the other. — Has our carpenter one more son 1 — He has 
several more. — -Are the Italians thirsty ] — They are thirsty and 
hungry. — Have they anything to do ] — They have nothing to do.— 
Are the children of the Irish hungry or thirsty 1 — They are neither 
hungry nor thirsty, but fatigued. 

68. 

Have you time to go out ] — I have no time to go out. — What 
have you to do at home 1 — I must write letters to my friends. — 
Must you sweep your room 1 — I must sweep it. — Are you obliged 
to lend your brothers money .} — I am obliged to lend them some. — ■ 
Must you go into the garden ?•*-! must go thither. — At what o'clock 
must you go thither ? — I must gajhither at a quarter past twelve. 
—Are you obliged to go to my father at eleven o'clock at night 
(2£bent>6) 1 — I am obliged to go to him at midnight. — Where are 
the brothers of our bailiff? — They are in the great forest in order 
o cut great trees.— Have they money to buy bread and wine?-— 
They have some. — Are our children wrong in going (511 get)cn) to 



76 

the English 1 — They are not wrong in going ($u gcljen) to them.-— 
Must the children of the French goto the children of the English? 
— They must go to them. — Is the Russian right in remaining ($u 
bleitvn) with the Turk ] — He is not wrong in remaining with him. 
— Will you send for some wine and glasses ] — 1 will neither send 
for wine nor for glasses ; I am not thirsty. — Is thy father thirsty 1 
— He is not thirsty.- — Are you willing to give me some money in 
order to go for some bread ] — I am willing to give you some in 
order to go for some bread and beer. 



THIRTY.THIRD LESSON.— SDrei ntib iruissigste 
ftectiott. 

To sell. SSerfaufen. 

To tell, to say. <& a $ e n. 

To tell a man. (Stnem Marine fagcru 

The word, ta$ 2Bert ; 

the favour, t>er (befallen ; 

the pleasure, t>a$ ^ergniigen. 

To give pleasure. 53enniucjen mad)Cn. 

To do a favour. (Stnen (befallen tt)un*. 

Will you tell the servant to SBotlen &k fccm 2*etuenten f^en, 
make the fire 1 Das ^eucr cinjunmdKn ? 

T will tell him to make it. 3d) will tbm fagen, c6 an$umacben. 

Will you tell the servant to buy Snellen @te beat S3etiienten fagen, 
a broom 1 etnen J^cfcn $u faufen ? 

I will tell him to buy one. 3* null tfym fa^etx, etnen 311 faufen. 

It is. <£ $ iff. 

Late. @ p a t. 

What o'clock is it 1 $ J I" W -l 7 , , 

It is three o'clock. @g tjt fcret Uhr. 

It is twelve o'clock. (5'6 t|l $ivo(f (w>otf Uhr). 

It is a quarter past twelve. + (£g tit ein 3$tertef cuif ctn$. 

It wants a quarter to six. f @$ if! tret sBtertel cmf fed)$. 

It is half past one. f <S$ tj| (jalb $n>et. 

To oe acquainted with (to know). .Kcnncn (governs the accus.) 

To be acquainted with (to know) ©inert SRenfcfyen fennen** 

a man. 
Do you know (are you acquainted jlenncn <Ste btefen 902ann ? 

with) this man ! 
I know him (am acquainted with 3c!) fenne i^n* 

him). 






77 

Tnnant C&otrjtg Fjaben* (governs the 

j.u «/««*. ^ accusative). 

rr h '„»„„„* „r 5 9^ i*»t (it b tat fc in* (governs the 
To be m want of . ^ yimtivef. 

I want it. 3d) babe c? nothtg* 

I am in want of it. 3d) tun t>efjVn beuot()icu\ (See Les- 
son XVI.) 

Do you want this hat] Jpaktn ©** t)tcfen £ut notfjtg? 

Are you in want of this hat? @tnt> @tc tiffed £utes bcnfltfjtgt?' 

I want it. 3d) fyabe tbn notbtq. 

I am in want of it. 3cb bin t>effcn benfltfjtgt. 

Do you want this money 1 Jpabm (&'u tnefes ©elt> nctr)iq ? 
Are you in want of this money 1 (£tnf> (Sic fciefVs ©elfrcS benctr)t<)t ? 

I want it. 3d) babe es nb'thig. 

I am in want of it. 3'cb bin tH'ffiMt bniotbtqt. 

I do not want it. ^d) hcibe c* ntcbt nctbtq. 

I am not in want of it. 3d) bin fceffen ntd)t benotfytgt 

I do not want anything*. ) ^* t < ."« ■ „ kf . 

I am not in want of anything. J & ^ m * tS »*&* 

Do you want money 1 J . . ( 

Are you in want of money 5 J ^ ; J 

I want some. ) r*> i t < , r , *.*• 

| I am in want of some. } ^ cI > M,e TOC(cI ' C » "^ 

I do not want any. ) ^ Y , • * • a »„.(.• 

I am not in want of any. } 3 * t)aU f ™* not ^' 

Obs. A. S3enotl)xgt fern*, must never be used when 
the noun is not preceded by a determinative word like 
the definite article, or a possessive or demonstrative 
pronoun. 

- What ? S& a -6 ; 

What do you want] > ~ a ( < ~- ,..<. 

W hat are you in want of s J y y J 

Ofo. U. All the cases of the personal pronouns 
have been more or less employed thus far, except the 
genitive, which is as follows : 

Of me — of thee — of him. QJictncr — IDctncr — fetner. 

Of us — of you — of them. Unfcr — ©iter (Sfacr) — t^cr (for 

all genders). 

Is he in want of me 1 3ft ?* nictner bcnetfVtcjt ? 

He is in want of you. (§r ift 3hrer bcnot()t^t. (See Les- 

son XVI.) 

Are you in want of these books? ®int) Stc Hefet SPiichcr bcnotf)i$t? 

I am in want of them. 3d) bin fccrfdben tvnotbicjt. 

Is he in want of my brothers 1 3ft er metner SBrfoer benorbiqt ? 

He is in want of them (&t ift ibret benettjtat. (See Les- 

son XVI.) 



78 

EXERCISES. 69 

Will you do me a favour ? — Yes, Sir, what one (\va$ fur cincn) \ 
—Will you tell your brother to sell me his horse? — I will tell him 
to sell it you. — Will you tell my servants to sweep my large 
rooms ? — 1 will tell them to sweep them.-i-Will you tell your sun 
to come to my father ? — I will tell him to come to him. — Have you 
anything to tell me] — I have nothing to tell you (put the dative 
before the accus.). — Have you any tiling to say to my father ? — I 
have a word to say to him. — Do your brothers wish to sell their 
carriage? — They do not wish to sell it. — John (^cbarm) ! art thou 
there \^c\) ? — Yes, Sir, I am here ( ; a),— Wilt thou go to my hatter 
to tell him to mend my hat ?- r I will go to him.-|-Wilt thou go to 
the tailor to tell him to mend my coats'? — I will go to him. — Art 
thou willing to go to the market I- 5 — 1 am willing to go thither. — 
What has the merchant to sell 1 — He has beautiful leather gloves, 
combs, and good cloth to sell. — ] as he any shirts to sell? — He 
has some to sell. — Dohs he wish to sell me his horses'? — He 
wishes to sell them to you. 

70. 

Is it late? — Tt is not late. — Whut o'clock is it? — It is a quarter 
past twelve. — At what o'clock does your father wish to go out ? — 
He wishes to go out at a qaarter to nine. — Will he sell this or that 
hjrse? — He will sell neither this nor that. — Does he wish to buy 
this or that «-«>at ? — He wishes to buy both. — Has he one horse 
more to sell ? — He has one more, but he does not wish to sell it. — 
Has he one carriage more to sell ?- -He has not one more carnage 
to sell; but he has a few more o en to sell. — When will he sell 
them? — He will sell them to-da} — Will he -sell them in the 
morning or in the evening ? — He will sell them this evening. — At 
wmat o'clock ? — At half past five. — Can y<>u go to the baker? — I 
cannot go to him; it is late. — H w late is it? — It is midnight. 
— Do you wish to see that man ? — I wish to see him, in order to 
know him. — -Does your father v, ish to see my brothers ? — He 
wishes to see them, in order to know them. — Does he wish to see 
my horse ?— He washes to see it. — At w T hat o'clock does he wish 
to see it? — He wishes to see it at six o'clock. — Where does he 
wish to see it? — He wishes to see it in (ouf) the great square. — 
Has the German much corn t3 sell? — He has but little to sell. — 
What knives has the merchant to sell ? — He has good knives to 
sell. — How many more knives has he ? — He has six more. — Has 
the Irishman much more wine? — He has not much more. — Hast 
thou wiae enough to drink? — I have not much, but enough. — Art 
thou able to drink much wine ? — I am able to drink much. — Canst 
thou drink some every day ? — I can drink some every morning and 
every evening. — Can thy brother drink as much as thou? — He can 
lrink more than I. 



79 



71. 



What are you in want of 1 — I am in want of a good hat. — Are 
you in want of this knife 1 — I am in want of it. — Do you want 
money? — I want some. — Does your brother want pepper? — He 
does not want any. — Does he want some boots ] — He does not 
want any. — What does my brother want] — He wants nothing 1 . — 
Who wants some sugar? — Nobody wants any. — Does anybody 
want money ? — Nobody wants any. — Does your father want any- 
thing? — He wants nothing. — What do I want? — You want no- 
thing. — Art thou in want of my book ? — I am in want of it. — Is 
thy father in want of it ? — He is not in want of it.— Does your 
friend want this stick? — He wants it. — Does he want these or 
those corks ? — He wants neither these nor those. — Are you in want 
of me? — I am in want of thee. — When do you want me? — At 
present. — What have you to say to me ? — I have a word to say to 
thee. — Is your son in want of us ? — He is in want of you and 
your brothers. — Are you in want of my servants ? — I am in want 
of them. — Does any one want my brother ? — No one wants him. 



THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON.— bkx tmir irrsissigste 
£sction. 



THE PRESENT. 



There is no distinction in German between : I love, 
do love and am loving. All these present tenses are 
expressed by : id) [iebe, I love. 

In the regular verbs the third person singular and 
second person plural of the present tense indicative 
mode are alike, and terminate (even in most of the ir- 
regular verbs) in et or t The first and third persons 
plural in all German verbs are like the infinitive. , 



To love. 2 1 e h e n. 

love, C loves, 

do love, he < does 1 

' am loving. f is loving, 



do love, he < does love, >3cl) Hebe, et ttckt or debt, 
am loving. f is loving. ) 

wfe'v, ,» to,, "wstfsfeas: 

{ art loving. ( are loving. ) v ' 

C love, ? love, i 

We < do love, they 2 do love, >9Bir (tefcen, fte tie&ctu 
( are loving ( are loving. ) 



80 



Obs. A. The letter e is often rejected in the second 
and third persons singular and in the second person 
plural of the present tense ; but never in verbs the 
root of which ends in b, t, t b, ft, or in two or more 
consonants, after which t or fi could not be distinctly 
pronounced, as in : fenben*, to send ; bit feitbefr, er fenbef, 
3br fenbct ; orbnen, to set in order ; bit orbneft, er orbnet, 
3f)t orbnet, &c. On the other hand this contraction 
always takes place in verbs that end in elnor e r n, 
as : fcfymeicfjeht, to flatter ; bu fdjmctcfyrfft, cr fdjmctdjclt, 3tyr 
fcf>metcf)e(t ; dnbent, to alter; hn dnbcrjl, er dnbcrt, %l)v an* 
bert* (See Lesson XXIV. the Infinitive.) 



To want. 

Do you want your money ? 
I was* it. 

To set in order. 
To open. 

Do you open the window ? 
I open i . 



83 r a u d) c n (governs the accusa 
tive). 

SMraucbcn etc 3F>r GMb ? 
3cb braucrjc & 

D v b n c n. 

D c f f n c n (aufmacbcn, cuif$mi?cicl)cn). 
?JJ?ad)cn ®u fca* Jcnjlcr auf ? 
3d) mact>c cs auf. 

Obs. B. German verbs are generally not irregular 
in the present tense, but rather in the imperfect and 
past participle. Some, however, are irregular in the 
second and third persons singular ; and as pupils 
should be acquainted with all the irregularities, we 
shall always mark these two persons whenever they 
present any. Of those which we have seen already, 
the following are irregular in the second and third 
persons singular. 



To give : 


(Sjc&en*: 


thou givest — he gives. 


£)u gtfcfl -— ct cji6t. 


To see : 


©cfcen* : 


thou seest —he sees. 


£>u ftcfyft — cr ftdfjt. 


To speak : 


<Sprcd)en # : 


thou speakest — he speaks. 


£)u fprtd)fl — cr fpricfyt. 


To take, to carry : 


Srcicjcn* : 


thou earnest — he carries. 


S)u tracjft — cr tracer. 


To wash : 


83Jaf*cn* : 


thou washest — he washes. 


£>u rvafdjcfl — cr wa\d)t 


To break : 


3cr&rcd)cn* : 


thou breakest — he breaks. 


£>u jcrfcriebft — cr $etbrtd)t. 



81 

[O 3 Personal pronouns not standing in the nomina- 
tive, take their place after the verb. 

Do you love him ? Ctefoen (Sic 1 fy n ? 

I do love him. 3d) tube t i) n. 

I do not love him. Set) lube t f) n n i d) t» 

Does the servant sweep the JU'brt fc>ct S3ct>tcntc fcaS Simmer 

■ room ] a u <> ] 

O&s. C In simple tenses, as the present or imper- 
fect, the separable particle is always placed at the 
end of the sentence ; unless this begins with a con- 
junction, a relative pronoun, or a relative adverb, in 
which case the particle is not separated from the verb, 
which then takes its place at the end. 

He sweeps it. (?t fefyrt c$ cuiS. 

Does your father go out to-day ! (5jcf)t Sbr 5Satcr ftcutc aue 1 

He does not go out to-day. (Sr gefyt r)eute ntcl)t cm$. 

exercises. 72. 

Do you love your brother ] — I love him. — Does your father love 
him ] — He does not love him. — Dost thou love me, my good child 1 
— I love thee. — Dost thou love this ugly man ] — I do not love him. 
— Does your father want his servant] — He does want him. — Dost 
thou want anything ] — I want nothing. — Does the servant open the 
window ] — He does open it. — Dost thou open it] — 1 do not open 
it. — Dost thou set my books in order] — I do set them in order. — 
Does the servant set our boots or our shoes in order 1 — He sets 
(both) the one and the other in order.-}-Do our children love us ]^ 
They do love us. — Do we love our enemies ]-^-We do not love 
them. — Do you wan^ your money ] — I do want it. — Do we want 
our carriage ] — We do want it. — Are our friends in want of their 
clothes (.ftletfccr) ] — They are in want of them. — What do you give 
me ] — I do not give thee anything. — Do you give my brother the 
book ] — 1 do give it him. — Do you give him a hat ] — I do give him 
one. 

73. 

Dost thou see anything ] — I see nothing. — Do you see my large 
garden ] — I do see it. — Does your father see our ship ] — He does 
not see it, but we see it. — How many ships do you see 1 — -We see 
a good manjf; we see more than thirty of them. — Do you give me 
books] — I do give thee some. — -Does our father give you money 1 
— He does not give us any. — Does he give you hats ]— He does 
not give us any.— Do you see many sailors 1 — We see more 
soldiers (t*ct (gclCxit, plur. en) than sailors. — Do the soldiers see 
many storehouses ] — They see more gardens than stoiehouses.— 
4 # 



82 

Do the English give you good cakes 1 — They do give us some 
Do you give me as much wine as beer ] — 1 give thee as much A 
the one as of the other. — Can you give me some more cakes 1--I 
can give thee no more ; I have not many more. — Do you give me 
the horse which you have ] — I do not give you that which I have.— 
Which horse do you give me ] — I give you that of my brother. 

74. 

Do you speak to the neighbour ] — I do speak to him. — Does he 
speak to you ] — He does not speak to me. — Do your brothers speak 
to you ] — They do speak to us. — When dost thou speak to thy 
father] — I speak to him every morning and every evening. — What 
dost thou carry ] — I carry a book. — Where dost thou carry it to ] — I 
carry it home. — Do you wash your stockings ] — I do not wash 
them. — Does your brother wash as many shirts as stockings] — He 
washes more of the one than of the other. — Hast thou many more 
stockings to wash ] — I have not many more to wash. — How many 
more shirts have your friends to wash ] — They have two more to 
wash. — What does your servant carry ] — He carries a great table. 
— What do these men carry ] — They carry our wooden chairs. — 
Where do they carry them to ] — They carry them into the large 
room of our brothers. — Do your brothers wash their stockings or 
ours] — They neither wash yours nor theirs ; they wash those ot 
their children. 

75. 

Dost thou not break my glass ] — No, Sir, I do not break it. — D'o 
the sons of our neighbours break our glasses ] — They do break them. 
— Who tears your books] — The young man tears them. — Do you 
not tear them ] — I do not tear them. — Do the soldiers cut trees ] — 
They do cut some. — Do you buy as many hats as gloves] — I buy 
more of the one than of the other. — Does your brother buy any 
bread ] — He is obliged to buy some ; he is hungry. — Do oui 
brothers buy any wine ] — They are obliged to buy some ; they are 
thirsty. — Do you break anything. — We do not break anything. — 
Who breaks our chairs] — Nobody breaks them. — Dost thou buy 
anything] — I do not buy anything. — Who keeps (takes care of) 
our money ] — My father keeps it. — Do your brothers take care of 
my books ] — They do take care of them. — Dost thou take care of 
anything] — I do not take care of anything. 

76. 

Does the tailor mend our coats ] — He does mend them. — What 
dost thou write] — I write a letter. — To whom dost thou write a 
letter ]— To my father. — When does thy brother write his letters] 
— He writes them in the morning v id in the evening. — What dost 
thou now. — I do nothing. — At what o'clock do you go to the the- 
atre ]-*-At a quarter past seven. — W T hat o'clock is it now ] — It 



83 



wants a quarter to six. — At what o'clock does your cook go to the 
market] — He goes there at five o'clock (put fcabtn to the end). — 
Does he go thither in the evening] — No, he goes thither in the 
morning. — Do you go any whither ]— I go no w^hither; but my 
brothers go into the garden. — Dost thou drink anything] — I drink 
nothing ; but the Italian drinks good wine and good beer. — Do you 
send me one more book ] — I do not send you one more. — Are you 
answering his letter] — I am answering it. — Does he answer thine] 
— He does answer it. — What do you say ]-— I say nothing. — Must 
I give him money to remain here ] — You must give him some to 
go out. — -Ts this man selling anything ] — He is selling good cakes. 
— What do you sell] — I sell nothing; but my friends sell nails, 
knives, and horse-shoes. — What does the man say ] — He says no- 
thing. — What art thou looking for ] — I am not looking for any- 
thing. 

*** We should fill volumes, were we to give all the exercises that are applica- 
ble to our lessons, and which the pupils may very easily compose by them- 
selves. We shall therefore merely repeat what we have already mentioned 
at the commencement: pupils who wish to improve rapidly ought to compose 
a great many sentences in addition to those given ; but they must pronounce 
them aloud. This is the only way by which they will acquire the habit of 
speaking fluently. 



THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. — jfmxf ttttb bxmBlQZte 

Section. 



The pain, 
the tooth, 
the ear, 

the neck, 
the ache, 
the evil, 



ber ©camera ; 

ber 3ar)tt ; 

$>a$ £)f)t (is not softened 

takes en in the plur.) ; 
t>et Jbats ; 

. bat 2$c!j (plur. en a ) ; 
bct£ itebet. 



and 



Sore {ill, ivicked). 

Bad. 

Evil, ill. 



SoTe. 
@d)ltmm. 
He bet. 



Have you a sore finger ] 

I have a sore finger. 

Has your brother a sore foot ] 

He has a sore eye. 

We have sore eyes. 



£aben <§tc etnen bofen finger? 
3d) babe etnen bofen Jinqer. 
£at 3bt 93ruber etnen bSfen gup 1 
<§r fjat etn bofeS Tfuge. 
££tt fyaben beje tfugen. 



* $>a§ 3Beb/ the ache, is employed in the plural only to denote the pangs of 
childbirth. 



84 



The bead -ache, 

the tooth-ache, 

the ear-ache, 

a sore throat, 

a pain in one's back 

He has the head-ache. 
I have the tooth-ache. 

The elbow, 
the back, 
the knee, 

To bring. 
To find. 

That which (what). 



t)ai jtepfwen ;* 
fccts Bflfrmvdi ; 
fcctS £)()remvef) ; 

$Menjct)mct> 

(Sr bat ^cpffcbmcr^cn.c 

3d) babe 3a[)n[d)mcr$en. 

fcer (Sttbecjen ; 
fcer 9?ticfcn ; 
t)a^ £nte. d 

93 r t n 9 c n *. 
g in ben*. 

2£a£ (&ae{enjgc metd)e$, t>a$ wcU 

06s. J.. SBBflS is often used instead of baSjemge, tt>cfr 
d)e3 or ba3, tt>elcf)e3, that which. (See Lesson XXIX.) 

Do you find what you are look- Jtnten (Sie, ma 6 (Ste fiicfyen ? 

ing for ? 
I find what I am looking for. Sen finbc, was tct) fnenc. 
He does not find what he is look- (St ftnfcet ntd)t, tx>a* er fucbt. 

ing for. 
We find what we are looking for. 95*tr fmben, ma§ w\v fucben. 
1 have what I want. 3cb babe, wa$ id) braucbe. 

I mend what you mend. 3d) befferc au$, n>a$ Sic ausfcef* 

fern. 

Obs. B. As the second member of this phrase be- 
gins with a relative pronoun, the particle axx$ is not 
separated from its verb which is removed to the end. 
(See Obs. C. Lesson XXXIV. and rule of Syntax, Les- 
son XLVII.) 

To read (thou readest, he reads). £ e f e n * (t>u Hcfcfi, er (tefet or 

Kept). 
To study. © t u t> t r c n . 

To learn. Serncn. 

Obs. C. The particle j it does not precede the infini- 
tive joined to the verb lewett, to learn. (See Lesson 
XL. Ex. 

b Compound words are of the gender of the last component which expresses 
the fundamental or general idea. 

c (&d)m?r$, pain, is here in the plural. In compound words, <3Bef) is em- 
ployed in the singular, and (&d)ttter$ in the plural, thus: 3$ fyabe Jtoyfwefy, 
and : 3d) fyctfte & op ffty mermen, I have the head-ache. 

d $)a§ jtttte, the knee, does not take an additional e in the plural and is ne- 
vertheless pronbuneed as if it did* 



85 

I learn to read. f 3d) (erne fefen. 

lie learns to write. f (£t Uvnt fcbrctbcn. 

French, fran#jifcf) (an adjective e ) ; 

English, cnq(ifd) ; 

German, tcutfd). 

Do you learn German ? £erncn &£ tcutfd) ? 

I do learn it. 3d) (erne e$. 

I do not learn it. 3d) ftfnc e$ ntd)t. 

exercises. 77. 

Where is your father ] — He is at home. — Does he not go out]— 
He is not able to go out ; he has the head-ache. — Hast thou the 
head-ache 1 — I have not the head-ache, but the ear-ache. — What 
day of the month is it (Den nnemeliren fiaben rutr, Lesson XXI) to- 
day ? — It is the twelfth to-day. — What day of the month is (Dot 
iwmefjic iff) to-morrow ] — To-morrow is the thirteenth. — What 
teeth have you]— I have good teeth. — What teeth has your bro- 
ther ] — He has bad teeth. — Has the Englishman the tooth-ache 1 — ■ 
He has not the tooth-ache ; he has a sore eye. — Has the Italian a 
sore eye ] — He has not a sore eye, but a sore foot. — Have I a sore 
finger] — You have no sore ringer, but a sore knee. — Will you cut 
me some bread ] — I cannot cut you any ; 1 have sore fingers. — 
Will anybody cut me some cheese ] — Nobody will cut you any. — 
Are you looking for any one] — I am not looking for any one. — 
Has any one the ear-ache ] — No one has the ear-ache. — What is 
♦he painter looking for] — He is not looking for anything. — Whom 
are you looking for] — I am looking for your son. — Who is look- 
ing for me ] — No one is looking for you. — Dost thou find what thou 
art looking for] — I do find what I am looking for ; but the captain 
does not find what he is looking for. 

78. 

Who has a sore throat ] — We have sore throats. — Has any one 
sore eyes ] — The Germans have sore eyes. — Does the tailor make 
my coat ] — He does not make it ; he has a pain in his back. — Does 
the shoemaker make my shoes ] — He is unable (femn ntcbt) to make 
them ; he has sore elbows. — Does the merchant bring us beautiful 
purses (Kt IBeutd) ] — He cannot go out; he has sore feet. — Does 
the Spaniard find the umbrella which he is looking for] — He does 
find it. — Do the butchers find the sheep which they are looking for ] 
— They do find them. — Does the tailor find his thimble ] — He does 
not find it. — Dost thou find the paper which thou art looking for]— 
I do not find it. — Do we find what we are looking for] — We do 
not find what we are looking for. — -What is the nobleman doing] 
— He does what you are doing. — What is he doing in his room ]— 
He is reading. 

• Derived from be* Sran^ofe, the Frenchman. 



86 



79. 



Art thou reading] — I am not reading. — Do the sons of the noble- 
men study] — They do study. — What are they studying] — They 
are studying German. — Art thou studying English ] — I have no 
time to study it. — Are the Dutch looking for this or that ship ]-— 
They are looking for both. — Is the servant looking for this or that 
broom ] — He is neither looking for this nor that. — Who is learning 
German ] — The sons of the captains and those of the noblemen are 
learning it.-^-When does your friend study French] — He studies 
it in the morning. — At what o'clock does he study it ] — He studies 
it at ten o'clock. — Does he study it every day ] — He studies it 
every morning and every evening. — What are the children of the 
carpenter doing ? — They are reading. — Are they reading German ? 
— They are reading French ; but we are reading English. — What 
books does your son read ] — He reads good books. — Does he read 
German books] — He reads French books. — What book do you 
read ] — I read a German book. — Do you read as much as my chil- 
dren ] — I read more than they. — Does your father read the book 
which I read ] — He does not read that which you read, but that 
which I read. — Does he read as much as I ] — He reads less than 
you, but he learns more than you. — Do you lend me a book ] — I do 
lend you one. — Do your friends lend you any books ] — They do lend 
me some. 



THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON.— Qztt)B ntib breiosigst* 
Section. 

Spanish, fpcmifdf) (an adjective a ). 

The termination tfcfy serves to form adjectives of the 
names of nations. Thus : 



Italian, 


ttctttcmfcf) ; 


Polish, 


polntfd) ; 


Russian, 


tufftfd) ; 


Latin, 


Icitetntfd) ; 


Greek, 


Qtiednfcb ; 


Arabian, Arabic, 


ara Infer; ; 


Syrian, Syriac, 


fenf*. 


The Pole, 


bet spele ; 


the Roman, 


bet 9?ffmet ; 


the Greek, 


t)cr ©riecfc* ♦, 


the Arab, the Arabian, 


bet Utab?* > 


the Syrian, 


bet @t)ter. 



* Derived from Spantett, Spain, 



87 



Are you a Frenchman 1 
No, Sir, I am a German. 

Is he a tailor] 

No, he is a shoemaker. 

He is a fool. 

To wish, to desire* - 

The fool, 

the mouth, 

the memory, 
Have you a good memory 1 
He has a little mouth. 
Your brother hks blue eyes. 
Do you wish me a good morn- 
ing? 
I wish you a good evening. 

Blue, 
black, 

Instead of* 

To play. 

To listen, to hear. 

Instead of listening. 
Do you play instead of studying] 
I study instead of playing. 
That man speaks instead of list- 
ening. 



To listen to. 



I listen to him. 

To listen to some one or some- 
thing. 

That which. 



©inb ©ie etn $fcm$ofe ? 

0*ein, metn £ert, id) bin cin ©cut* 

ftfer. 
3ft et etn (Scbnetbet ? 
9?etn, cr if! etn <Sd)ul)mad)et. 
(St ijl etn 9tor. 

SGSunfdjen. 

bet 9?att (gen. en) ; 
bet 9J2unb (has no plur.) ; 
ba$ ©ebad)tmg (plur. e). 
£afren (Sic etn a,ute$ ©ebad)tntfi ? 
@r fyat etnen flctncn 9J?unb. 
Sbt ^tubct bat btauc 2Cua,en* 
SBunfcbcn @ic nut etnen cutten 

Bergen ? 
3d) roiinfdK 3&nen etnen catten 

2C6cnb. 

Mau ; 
fd)i»at§. 

2Cnftatt $u. 
© p t c ( e n. 
$ o t e n. 

f 2Cnftatt $u f)6ten. 
f ©ptelcn ©te, anftatt $u ftubtten ? 
t 3d) ftubttc, anftatt gu fptclen. 
t SDiefer 9}Jann fpudjt, anftatt $u 
fycten. 

' 2C n ft o t e n (an$uf)cten, governs 

the accusative). 
3 u () 8 t e n ($u$uf)oten, governs 
the dative). 

C 3d) fyore tfrn an. 
t 3* Wre it)m$u. 
2Cuf Semanben obet etroa$ fyoten. 

2) a S, ro a & 



{£oten (Sic ouf t>a$, tva$ Sfjncn bet 
SDlann fa$t ? 
£ercn (Sic auf ba$, wag bet Sflann 
Shnen fagt? 
I do listen to it. 3d) f)otc barauf. b 

b $nfiorett takes the person in the accusative, and jutjovett in the dative. 
They never relate to a thing ; but fyoren auf stands either with the person or 



88 

He listens to what I *ell him. @r r)8rt auf fca$, tva$ id) ifjm fa$c. 

To correct. 95 c r fe e f f c r n, c c r r t q t r c n. 

To *aA-e off (as the hat). 2( b n c I) m c n * (oOjinu'imu'n). 

To take off (as clothes). 2( u * $ t e f) c n * (flU*$U$kf)Cli). 

To take away. £B c a, n c I) m c n*. 

To take. 91c()iucn*. . 

Thou takest, — he takes. 3)u ntmmfi, — or ntnunt. 

Thou takest off thy hat. £Hi nihmift 2)t'im*n out a(\ 

Do you take off your boots 1 Bxcbcn @t« Sure ^tiefdn cmS 1 

We take off our coats. 9Ttr giehcn unforc 9?3cfc mi*. 

Who takes away the chairs 1 SGBi't nimint Mo £riih(c mgl 

The servant takes them away. £>cr $}cbii*ntc ntmnit ftc \vc$. 

exercises. 80. 

Do you speak Spanish 1 — No, Sir, I speak Italian. — Who speaks 
Polish ] — My brother speaks Polish. — Do our neighbours speak 
Russian 1 — They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. — Do you speak 
Arabic] — No, I speak Greek and Latin. — What knife have you ? 
— I have an English knife. — What money have you there 1 — Is it 
Italian or Spanish money] — It is Russian money. — Have you an 
Italian hat] — No, I have a Spanish hat. — Are you a German ] — 
No, I am an Englishman. — Art thou a Greek ] — No, I am a Span- 
iard. — Are these men Poles ] — No, they are Russians. — Do the 
Russians speak Polish] — They do not speak Polish, but Latin, 
Greek, and Arabic. — Is your brother a merchant] — No, he is a 
joiner. — Are these men merchants] — No, they are carpenters. — 
Are we boatmen ] — No, we are shoemakers. — Art thou a fool ? — I 
am not a fool. — What is that man ] — He is a t silor. — Do you wish 
me anything] — I wish you a good morning. — What does the young 
man wish me] — He wishes you a good evening. — Whither must I 
go] — Thou must go to our friends to wish them a good day (£cn^). 
— Do your children come to me in ordnr to wish me a good evening 1 
— They come to you in order to wish you a good morning. 

81. 

Has the nobleman blue eyes ] — He has black eyes and a little 
mouth. — Hast thou a good memory ] — I have a bad memory, but 
much courage to learn German. — What dost thou (do) instead of 
playing] — I study instead of playing. — Dost thou learn instead of 
writing] — I write instead of learning — What does the son of our 
bailiff (do)] — Heroes into the garden instead of ^oing into the 
field. — Do the children of our neighbours read ] — They write in- 
stead of reading. — What does our cook (do)] — He makes a fire 

the thing, and always requires the accusative. Ex. ^cf) f)i>ve tbn an, or t'cb fro* 
re tbn: ju, 1 listen to'him; but tci? t>i5re auf fc>aS, roaS ete mtr \a$tn, I listen to 
what you are telling nie. 







instead of going to the market. — Does your father sell his ox ?— 
He sells his horse instead of selling his ox. — Do the physicians 
go out] — They remain in their rooms instead of going out. — At 
what o'clock does our physician come to you ? — He comes every 
morning at a quarter to nine. — Does the son of the painter study 
English? — He studies Greek instead of studying English. — Does 
the butcher kill oxen] — He kills sheep instead of killing oxen. — 
Do you listen to me ? — I do listen to you. — Does your brother listen 
to me? — He speaks instead of listening to you. — Do you listen to 
what I am telling you? — I do listen to what you are telling me. 

82. 

Does the man listen to what you are telling him ? — He does listen 
to it. — Do the children of the physician listen to what we tell them ? 
— They do not listen to it.- — Dost thou listen to what thy brother tells 
thee ? — I do listen to it. — Do you go to the theatre ? — I am going to 
the storehouse instead of going to the theatre. — Are you willing to 
listen to me ? — I am willing to listen to you, but I cannot ; 1 have 
the ear-ache. — Does thy father correct my notes or thine ? — He 
corrects neither yours nor mine.— Which notes does he correct ? — 
He corrects those which he writes. — Does he listen to what you 
tell him ? — He does listen to it. — Do you take off your hat in order 
to speak to my father ? — I do take it off in order to speak to him. — 
Does thy brother listen to what our father tells him ? — He does 
listen to it. — Does our servant go for some beer ? — He goes for 
some vinegar instead of going for some beer.— Do you correct my 
letter ? — I do not correct it ; I have sore eyes. — Does the servant 
take off his coat in order to make a fire ? — He does take it off. — 
Do you take off your gloves in order to give me money ? — I do 
take them off in order to give you some.— Does he take off his 
shoes in order to go to your house? — He does not take them off. — 
Who takes away the tables and chairs ? — The servants take them 
iway. — Will you take away this glass ? — I have no mind to take it 
iway. — Is he wrong to take off his boots ?- — He is right to take 
diem off. — Dost thou take away anything? — I do not take away 
mything. — Does anybody take off his hat ? — Nobody takes it off. 



THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Qkbcti tmb 
^. bmssigste Section. 

Wet (moist). $1 a Q (an adjective). 

To wet (to moisten). 9? a £ ni a cb c n (ne&en)«. 

To show. 8 c t $ e n, ro c t f c n * (govern the 

dative*)* 

• 3 e f(J en expresses the mere act of showing; tvetfert implies showing with 
instruction, and is derived from the word : bte iffietfc, the manner. 



90 



To let see (expose to sight). 

Do you let me see your gold 

ribbons 1 
I do let you see them. 

Brandy, 

tobacco, 

tobacco (for smoking), 

snuff, 

cider, 

meal (flour), 

apples, 

The gardener, 

the cousin, 

the brother-in-law, 

the handkerchief, 

the pocket handkerchief, 

the valet, servant, 

Do you go for your brother-in- 
law ] 
I do go for him. 

To intend {to think). 

Do you intend to go to the ball 

this evening 1 
1 do intend to go thither. 

To know. 

I know — he knows. 

We know — they know. 
Thou knowest — you know. 



Do you know German 1 

I do know it. 

Do you know how to 

French ? 
Can you read French 1 



read 



S c \, c n ( a f f c n (governs the ac- 
cusative). 

gctfien Sie unci) 3fyrc getbcncn S5tXttv 

ber feben 1 
3d) laffc Sic btefelben fcfjcn. 

SBranntroctn (masc); 

Uabof (masc.) ; 

SWoucbtobof ; 

Sd)mipfta&af ; 

(£tfcer (masc.) ; 

SWeM (neut.) ; 

Bepfrf (Apfel) (plur. of bet 2CpjW). 

tor (SJartnet ; 

ber better ; 

cor ScbfcKtgCt ; 

bag Sud) ; 

co6 Sebnupftudj ; 

ber Wiener, ber £ncd)t. b 

#elen Stc 3r)ren Sdjroagcr ? 

3d) f)ofc tfjn. 
© e b c n f c n. 

©cbenfen Sic fteutc 2tt>enb auf ben 

95atl $u geben 1 
3d) gcbcnfe btrtiuiqeben. (See Obs. 

A. Lesson XXVII.) 

Stiffen * (fonncne). 

Scb nxift — cr n>et§. 

££tr nuffen — fie retffen. 

©u roctgt — 3&r nriflet (Sic wtf* 

fen). 
Gormen Sic bcutfd) 1 
34 farm e$. 

> ilb'nncn Sic franco ftfd) (cfen ? 



b Wiener generally means servant ; hence : ber $ammerbtener, the valet de 
chambre ; ber ^trcfjenbtener, the church-minister, clergyman ; ^necr)t points 
out the lowest degree of servitude, hence : ber <§augfned)t, the menial ser- 
vant; ber Stall fned)t, the groom, the stableman ; ber Sftettfnccfyr, the jockey. 

c SBiffett implies to have the knowledge of a thing, not to be ignorant of it ; 
I onnen signifies to be able, to have the knowledge of an art or a science. Ex. 
Scfe toettf, ma§ Ste fa a. en mo lien, I know, what you wish to say. (5r fann 
etn'en bentfd)en SBrtef fcfyrctoen, he knows how to write a German letter. The 
learner must take care not to confound roiffen*, to know, with fontten*, to be 
able, and the latter not with fettnen*, to be acquainted (See Lessons XXVIIK 
and XXXIII.) 



91 

Can you make a hat? ^ 

Do you know how to maite a C.^cnncn 'Sic ctnen $ut mctcben ? 

hat] 3 

Can you come to me to-day] Jt&tnen Sic I)cutc $u mic fcmmcn 1 

To swim. <& cl) w i m m e n *♦ 

Do you know how to swim ? ~> n @i fi)wimmn % 

Can you swim I 3 

Whither 1 where to? 2B o r) t n ? 
Whither are you going ] 2Bo Qcfycn Sic f)in ] d 

EXERCISES. 83. 

Do you wish to drink brandy] — No, I wish to drink wine. — Do 
you sell brandy ] — I do not sell any; but my neighbour, the mer- 
chant, sells some. — Will you fetch me some tobacco] — I will 
fetch you some ; what tobacco do you wish to have ] — I wish to 
have some snuff; but my friend, the German, wishes to have some 
tobacco (for smoking). — Does the merchant show you cloth ] — He 
does not show me any. — Does your valet go for some cider ] — He 
does go for some. — Do you want anything else (necb rtroas) 1 — I 
want some flour ; will you send for some (for) me ] — I will send 
for some (for) you. — Does your friend buy apples ] — He does buy 
some. — Does he buy handkerchiefs] — He buys tobacco instead ot 
buying handkerchiefs. — Do you show me anything] — I show you 
gold and silver clothes. — Whither does your cousin go ] — He goes 
to the bail. — Do you go to the bail ] — I go to the theatre instead 
of going to the ball. — Does the gardener go into the garden] — He 
goes to the market instead of going into the garden. — Do you send 
your servant to the shoemaker ] — i send him to the tailor instead 
of sending him to the shoemaker. 

84. 

Dost thou go to fetch thy father ] — I do go to fetch him. — May 
(.*tann) I go to fetch my cousin] — You may go to fetch him. — 
Does your valet find the man whom he is looking for] — He does 
find him. — Do your sons find the friends whom they are looking 
for] — They do not find them. — When do you intend going to the 
ball] — 1 intend going thither this evening. — Do your cousins intend 
to go into the country ] — They intend to go thither. — When do 
they intend to go thither ] — They intend to go thither to-morrow. — 
At what o'clock] — At half-past nine. — What does the merchant 
wish to sell you ] — He wishes to sell me pocket-handkerchiefs. — 
Do you intend to buy some] — 1 will not buy any. — Dost thou know 

d SBofyttt, as above, may be divided into two parts, the first of which is 
placed in the beginning and the second at the end of the sentence. If the 
sentence ends with a past participle or an infinitive, f) i tt is placed before it 



92 

anything 1 — I do not know anything 1 . — What does thy cousin know ? 
— He knows how to read and to write. — Does he know German 1 — 
He does not know it. — Do you. know Spanish 1 — I do know it. — 
Do your brothers know Greek ] — They do not know it ; but they 
intend to learn it. — Do I know English 1 — You do not know it; 
but you intend to study it. — Do my children know how to read 
Italian'? — They know how to read, but not how to speak it. 

85. 

Do you intend to study Arabic? — I intend to study Arabic and 
Syriac. — Does the Englishman know Polish 1 — He does not know 
it, but he intends learning it. — Do you know how to swim ? — 1 do 
not know how to swim, but how to play. — Does your cousin know 
how to make coats'! — He does not know how to make any; he is 
no tailor. — Is he a merchant] — He is not one. — What is he ] — He 
is a physician. — Whither are you going"? — I am going into my 
garden, in order to speak to the gardener. — What do you wish to 
tell him ? — 1 wish to tell him to open the window of his room. — 
Does your gardener listen to you 1 — He does listen to me. — Do 
you wish to drink some cider '? — No, I have a mind to drink some 
beer ; have you any ? — I have none ; but I will send for some. — 
When will you send for some? — Now. — Do you send for apples ? 
-—I do send for some. — Have you a good deal of water ? — I have 
enough to wash my feet. — Has your brother water enough ? — He 
has only a little, but enough to moisten his pocket-handkerchief. — 
Do you know how to make tea 1 — I know how to make some. — Does 
your cousin listen to what you tell him? — He does listen to it. — 
Does he know how to swim 1 — He does not know how to swim. — 
Where is he going to] — He is going no whither; he remains at 
home. 



THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— arijt tttlb breissigate 
Section. 

The intention. £) c r 2>orfaf$. 

Intended. ® e f o n n e n. 

To intend or to have the intention. © c f e n n c n f e i n*. 

1" intend to go thither. 3d) bin cjofennw nin^uqehen. 

We have the intention to do it. ££tr ftnfc gcfonnen es ju tbun. 

(Srhnlten* (to receive :- ny- 

thing sent). 

i S3 c f c m m c n * (to receive as a 
To receive. J present)< 

I © ni p fa n g e n * (to welcome, to 
entertain). 



Thou receivest — He receives. 

He receives money. 

He obtains the preference. 

He receives his friends. 

Do you receive a letter to-day 1 

I receive one to-morrow. 

To guide (conduct, take), 
To lead. 
I lead the horse into the stable. 

The preference, 
the stable, 
blind, 
sick (ill), 
poor, 

To extinguish. 

To light. 

To set on fire. 

Does he extinguish the candle 1 
He lights it. 



93 

C 3)u ertflWt. @r crWlt. 
£ 5)u empfanojk* (St empfa'ngt. 

(St bcfemmt ®etf>. 

@r crhalt ben N £cquq. 

C£t cmpfangt feme Jreunto. 

(Srbalten ©ic beute etnen JBrtef 1 

3d) erfyatte hicrgen einen. 

# a h r c n ") b 
ftctten 5 ' 
Set) ffi&re bag yfetb in ten (Statu 

ber 9Ser$ug ; 
fcet Stall ; 
Ntno ; 
Fran! ; 
arm. 

2f u $ I o f eft e n (v. act. and n. ii 

au^iitofeften). 
2f n $ ii n t> e n (anutumben). 
2C n ft c cf c n (an$ujtccfen). 

SSfcht cr bag «tcftt au$ ? 
(£t ^unt>ct eg an. 



To depart, to set out. % b r e t f c n (atyuvctfen). 

When do you intend to depart 1 £Cann gcbenfen (Sic ab.uiretfen ? 
I intend to depart to-morrow. 3d) cjebenfe morgen ab$ureifen. 

exercises. 86. 

Do your brothers intend to go into the country? — They do in- 
tend to go thither. — Do you intend to go to my cousin ] — I do in- 
tend to go to him. — Dost thou intend to do anything] — I intend to 
do nothing. — Do you intend to go to the theatre this evening] — I 
do intend to go thither, but not this evening. — Dost thou receive 
anything] — I receive money. — From (>3Sen) whom dost thou receive 
some ] — I receive some from my father, my brother, and my cousin. 
— Does your son receive books'? — He does receive some. — From 
whom does he receive some ] — He receives some from me, from his 
friends, and neighbours. — Does the poor man (Der Utmc, See 
page 34, Obs. A.) receive money ] — He does receive some. — From 
whom does he receive some 1 — He receives some from the rich.— 
Dost thou receive wine] — I do not receive any. — Do I receive 
money ] — You do not receive any. — Does your servant receive 



a The persons not mentioned follow the regular conjugation. (See Pre- 
sent Tense, Lesson XXXIV.) 

b ^ubren expresses the act of conducting only; letten means to conduct 
with safety. Ex. (Sinett Stxanhn fitfyteit, to conduct a sick person; ettt Jttttb, 
etnen SSUn&en letten, to guide a child, a blind man. 



94 

clothes (ft(eit)er) ] — He does not receive any. — Do you receive the 
books which our friends receive] — We do not receive the same 
which your friends receive; but we receive others. — Does your 
friend receive the letters which you write to him ] — He does re- 
ceive them. — Do you receive the apples which I send you] — I do 
not receive them. — Does the American receive as much brandy as 
cider ] — He receives as much of the one as of the other. — Do the 
Scotch receive as many books as letters ] — They receive as many 
of the one as of the other. 

87. 

Does the Englishman obtain the preference ] — He does obtain it. 
— Does your cousin receive as much money as I ] — He receives 
more than you. — Does the Frenchman receive his letters ]— He 
does receive them. — When does he receive them] — He receives 
them in the evening. — When dost thou receive thy letters ] — I re- 
ceive them in the morning. — At what o'clock] — At a quarter to 
ten. — Dost thou receive as many letters as I ] — I receive more ot 
them than thou. — Dost thou receive any to-day ] — I receive some 
to-day and to-morrow. — Does your father receive as many friends 
as ours (as our father) ]— He receives fewer of them than yours 
(than your father).— Does the Spaniard receive as many enemies 
as friends]— He receives as many of the one as of the other. — Do 
you receive one more crown] — I do receive one more.— jDoes your 
son receive one more book ] — He does receive one m(%- What 
does the physician receive ] — He receives good tobacco, g&ti snurT, 
and good pocket-handkerchiefs. — Does he receive brand^^-He 
does receive some. 

88. 

Does your servant receive shirts] — He does receive some. — Does 
he receive as many of them as my valet (does) ] — He receives quite 
as many of them. — Do you receive anything to-day ] — I receive 
something every day.— Dost thou conduct anybody ]— I conduct 
nobody. — Whom do you guide ] — I guide my son. — Where are you 
conducting him to ] — I conduct him to my friends to wish them a 
good morning.— What is your son ]— He is a physician.— Does 
your servant guide any one ]— He guides my child.— Whom (2Bcn) 
must I guide ]— Thou must guide the blind. (Page 34, Obs. 
A.)— Must he conduct the sick person ] — He must conduct him.— 
Whither must he conduct him ]— He must couduct him home.— 
Whither is he leading your horse ]— He is leading it into the 
stable.— Dost thou guide the child or the blind man]— I guide both, 
—When does the foreigner intend to depart ]— He intends to depart 
this morning.— At what o'clock]— At half past one.— Does he not 
wish to remain here ]— He does not (<Sr nritl rucfct).— Do you intend 
to go to the theatre this evening ]— I intend to go there to-morrow 
Do you depart to-day ]— I depart now. — When do you intend ti 



95 

write to your friends I — I intend to write to them to-day. — Do your 
friends answer your letters ] — They do answer them. — Do you ex- 
tinguish the fire'?— I do not extinguish it. — Does your servant light 
tht> candle ] — He does light it. — Does this man intend to set your 
warehouse on fire ] — He does intend to set it on fire (cmjuftccfcn). 



THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. — Neirn nnh brcissigste 

Section. 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



The comparative is formed by adding e r and the 
superlative by adding jt a to the simple adjective. 
Examples : 



Handsome — handsomer — 

handsomest. 
Small — smaller — smallest. 
Wild — wilder — wildest. 



Posit. Comp. Superl. 
©rf)6n — fcfyoner — fcfyonft* 

fflein — f (enter — tkin% 
SOBtlb — ttntber — nnlbeft. 



Obs. A. Comparative and superlative adjectives 
are declined like the positive. Examples : 



Comparative. 

Masculine. Neuter. 



The handsomer 
table, the hand-<( 
somer book, &c. 



ba$ fcfyottere 95ucf)* 
be3 fcfyoneren 33ucfyeg* 



r N. ber fcfyonere 

£tfd>, 
G. be3 fcfyoneren 

Ziffled, 
D. bem fcfyoneren bem fctjotteren 23ttdfje. 

Ziffle, 
A. ben fcfyoneren ba$ fcf)5nere b 23ucfy. 



a In the superlative, ft is sometimes preceded by e when the pronunciation 
requires it, as : fiifs, sweet, fiijjiefl: ; fc^Iec^t, bad, fdbtecf)tefi. In the word grog, 
great, the superlative gtojileffc, is contracted into #t't$t, as: ber gvftjste SJiamt, 
the greatest man. 

b The letter e, which precedes or follows the consonant X in the compara- 
tive, is often omitted for the sake of euphony ; thus instead of: ber, baS frf)5= 
nere, beS fdjoneren, bem fdjoneren, we say : ber, bag fdjotire, be8 fc^onent, bem 
fcfybnetU, &c. (See Obs. Leseon XIX.) 



96 



Superlative. 

Masculine. Neuter. 



The smallest 
hat, the smal- <: 
lest book. &c, 



ba$ Ucinfte %n<h. 
be3 fteinjien 23ucf)eg* 



r N . ber Hemjle 

G. be£ t kin ft en 

S)ute$, 
D. bent Hempen bent Hempen 93ucf)e, 

£ute, 
A. ben Hempen bas Hetnpe 35ncf), 

§itt, 



Ofo* jB. The radical vowels a, o, it, are softened 
in the comparative and superlative into a, 6, it* c 
Examples : 

Posit. Comp. Superl. 



Old, &c. 


aft 


alter aftefit. 


pious, &e. 


fromm 


frcmmer fromm fh 


young, &c. 


im 


jiinger jitngfh 



Ofcs. C The following adjectives, which are also 
used as adverbs, are irregular in the formation of their 
comparatives and superlatives. 

Positive. Comp. 

23afb, eber, 

ber or bag batbtge, efyere, 

©em, Iteber, 

ber or bag fiebe, Itebere, 

®ut, beffer, 

ber or ba$ gate, befjere, 

( £odj, c fcoJjer, 

I ber or ba# fyofye, fyofyere, 



Soon, 
Willingly, 
Good, 
High, 



Superlative. 

efoefi (am efyepen' 1 ) 

efyefte* 

Kebfl (am Kebfiett) ; 

tisbfbe. 

beft (am beften) ; 

befte. 

fyocfyp (am Ijocfypen); 

fyocfype. 



c On the adjectives which do not soften the radical vowels a, o, U in the 
comparative and superlative, see Obs. £>. hereafter. 

d When an adjective is used in the superlative degree adverbially, it is 
combined with a contraction of the definite article, and one of the preposi- 
tions, at , mtf, $u, in, as: am toentgften, the least; cmfg t^oc^fte, at the most; ium 
Beften, ft,r the best ; tm minbefieh, at least. Hence the adverbs : WonfttnS, 
in the handsomest manner; freftenS, in the best manner; I;ocfrftenl, at the 
most; net cfyftenS, next time ; toemajtenS, at least, &c. 

e In the positive and comparative degrees the form frolj, not 1)0$/ is used as 
an adjective before a noun ; but as a predicate after the noun, the positive is 
1)0$. Ex. S)et bofye SBaum, the high tree ; ber Ijityere ^Baum, the higher tree ; 
but bicfer S3aum tft f)0$, this tree is high. 



97 



Positive. 


Comp. 


Superlative. 


9faf)e, 

ber or ha$ ttctfye, 

SSiet, 

ber or ba£ t>te£e, 


naber, 
ndbere, 
ntebr, 
ntefyre, 


ttarf)^(amnacf)pen); 

nacbfte* 

ntetjl: (am ntetften) ; 

roeifte* 



Near, 
Much, 



This book is small, that is smal- 
ler, and this is the smallest of 
all. 

This hat is large, but that is 
larger. 

Is your book as large as mine? 

It is not so large as yours. 
It is larger than yours. 

Not so large. 

Are our neighbour's children as 

good f as ours ] 
They are better than ours. 

Whose ? 
It is. 

Whose hat is this ? 

It is the hat of my brother. 

It is my brother's. 

It is my brother's hat. 

Whose hat is the finest] 

That of my father is the finest. 

Whose ribbon is the handsomer, 



yours or mine I 


ge CO 


Good, gentle, pretty, 

light, easy, 

heavy, difficult, 

great, grand (big, large), 

long, 

short, 

round, 


arttg ; 
letd)t ; 
fcfyrocr ; 
grog ; 
tang; 
f urj ; 
runt); 


rich, 


tctd). 



*Dtefc$ SBud) tft fletn, jeneg iff fleb 
nit, unt) ttcfeg bier tft am fleins 
ften (tag Heinftc) son atlcn. 

3)tefet £ut tft grop, alletn jener tft 
grower. 

3ft 3^r 23ucr) fo grcp rote tag met* 
ntge? 

& tft ntd)t fo grog al^ tag S&rige. 

©6 ift grower ais tag S&rtge. 

S^t d) t fc groj}. 

©tnb tie Winter unfereg 9?adjfca?$ 

fo at tig nne. tie unfrtgen ? 
(Sic ftnt arttger djg tie unfrtgen. 

SB c f f e n ? s (See Lesson XXIX.) 
<£g tft. 

SGBeflcn 45ut tft tag ? 
©6 t|t ter £ut metneg SBruterg, 
©6 tft metneg JBrutcrg. 
(£g tft metneg 58ruterg £ut. 
SOBefftn £ut tft ter fcbonfte ? 
£)er metneg latere tft ter fcrjSnfte. 
SBeffen SBant tft fcboner, tag S^rU 
ge oter tag metntge ? 



O&s. D. The adjectives which do not soften the ra- 
dical vowels in the comparative and superlative, are : 
1st, Those of which the last syllable does not belong 

* In this phrase the word a X 1 1 g does not quite correspond to the English 
word good; but it does in many others, as for instance : be good ! fei arttg I 
a goqd child, etrt atttgeS »£mb. 

g The word which answers the question rceffett ? is always put in the geni 
live case. 

5 



08 



to the primitive 11 word, as: battfbar, grateful; fcfyttlbfg, 
culpable ; fcogfyaft, malicious. Ex. arttg, pretty ; arttger, 
prettier ; arttgft, prettiest. 

2d, Participles, as : latent), refreshing ; gelcbt praised ; 
tobettb, furious ; fticfyettb, seeking, &c. 

3d, Those which contain a diphthong, as: gettau, 
exact ; faitf, lazy ; Man, blue ; gratt, grey, &c. 

4th, Those terminating in e V, as tapfer, valiant, &c. 

5th, The following : 

flat, clear ; fcinft, gentle ; 

fnapp, tight ; fatt, satisfied ; 

lafym, lame ; fcfyfaff/ slack ; 

(0$, loose ; fcfylanf, slender ; 

matt, wearied ; ftcirr, numb ; 

motfd), brittle ; ftofy, proud ; 

naclt, naked ; ffraff, stiff ; 

pKatt, flat ; ftumm, dumb ; 

ptump, clumsy ; toll, mad ; 

tot), raw ; t>ott, full ; 

tunt>, round ; $af)m, tame. 



S3(ap, pale ; 
fount, variegated ; 
faf)(, fallow ; 
falfcl), false ; 
ftof), joyful ; 
gerafce, straight; 
gefunt), healthy ; 
Qlatt, smooth ; 
ijoljt, hollow ; 
f)0tfc>, kind ; 
faf)(, bald ; 
tav$, stingy ; 

Obs. E. 



In German the superlative is almost al 
ways relative, and to express the absolute superlative 
we use, as in English, one of the adverbs: fet)r,very 
recfyt, very; fyocfyjt, extremely; wtgemein, uncommonly 
&c. Ex. ©it fefyr armer 9D?amt, a very poor man; ettt 
fef)r fcfyoneg $mb, a very fine child. 

Obs. F. Than, after a comparative, is translated by 
a I g (See Ota. B. Lesson XXIII.) . To increase the 
force of the comparative, we use the adverbs ttod), still, 
and tt>eit, far. Ex. 9?od£) grower, still greater; tcf) bin tt>ett 
gtMttcfyer al$ er, I am far happier than he. 

Obs. G. The following adjectives have no compara- 
tive: 

Positive. 
ber or ba$ cwffcre, 
ber — bag trntere, 
ber — bag fymtere, 
ber — bag /tmtttere, ber - 
ber — bag obere, ber ■ 



The exterior, 
the interior, 
the posterior, 
the middle one, 
the superior, 



Superlative. 
ber or bag augerfte ; 
ber — bag mnerfte ; 
ber — ba$ fymterfte ; 

bag mittelfie ; 

bag ofcerfie ; 



h By primitive we mean a word to which a syllable maybe added in order 
to form another word, as batifbax, which is formed of the word $)anf, thank% 
and the syllable bar. 



90 

Positive. Superlative. 

the inferior, ber or i>a$ untere, ber or ba$ untevfte ; 
the anterior, ber — bct$ borbere, ber — ba$ ttorberpte. 

EXERCISES. 89. 

Is your brother taller (Qtofj) than mine] — He is not so tall, but 
oetter than yours. — Is thy hat as bad as that of thy father 1 — It is 
better, but not so black as his. — Are the shirts of the Italians as 
white (n>eifj) as those of the Irish 1 — They are whiter, but not so 
good. — Are the sticks of our friends longer than ours 1 — They are 
not longer, but heavier. — Who have (£Bet fyaf) the most beautiful 
gloves ] — The French have them. — Whose horses are the finest ] 
— Mine are fine, yours are finer than mine ; but those of our friends 
are the finest of all. — Is your horse good 1 — It is good, but yours 
is better, and that of the Englishman is the best of all the horses 
which we know. — Have you pretty shoes'? — I have very pretty 
(ones) ; but my brother has prettier (ones) than I. — From (£3 on) 
whom does he receive them ] — He receives them from his best 
friend. — Is your wine as good as mine 1 — It is better. — Does your 
merchant sell good handkerchiefs 1 — He sells the best handkerchiefs 
that I know. 

90. 

Have we more books than the French i — We have more of them 
than they ; but the Germans have more of them than we, and the 
English have the most of them.— Hast thou a finer garden than 
that of our Physician ]— I have a finer (one). — Has the American 
a finer house than thou ] — He has a finer (one). — Have we as fine 
children as our neighbours ] — We have finer (ones). — Is your coat 
as long as mine ! — It is shorter, but prettier than yours. — Do you 
soon (batb) go out 1 — I do not go out to-day. — When does your 
father go out 1 — He goes out at a quarter past twelve. — Is this man 
older than that (man) i — He is older, but that (man) is healthier 
(gefunt>er). — Which of these two children is the better ] — The one 
who studies is better than the one who plays. — Does your servant 
sweep as well as mine 1 — He sweeps better than yours.— Does the 
German read as many bad books as good (ones) 1 — He reads more 
good than bad (ones). — Do the merchants sell more sugar than 
coffee 1 — They sell more of the one than of the other. — Does your 
shoemaker make as many boots as shoes 1 — He makes more of the 
one than of the other. 

91. 

Can you swim as well as the son of the nobleman ? — I can 
swim better than he ; but he can speak German better than I. — 
Does he read as well as you I-— He reads better than I. — Have you 
the head-ache 1 — No, I have the ear-ache. — Does your cousin 
listen to what you tell him 1 — He does not listen to it. — Does the 



100 

son of your bailiff go into the forest] — No, he remains at home, 
he lias sore feet. — -Do you learn as well as our gardener's son 7 — 
I learn better than he, but he works better than I. — Whose car- 
riage is the finest ] — Yours is very fine, but that of the captain is 
still finer, and ours is the finest of all. — Has any one as fine apples 
as we ] — No one has such fine (ones). (See end of Lesson 
XXXIV.) 



FORTIETH LESSON.— jbier^igste Uciion. 

To begin. ttnfangen* (an$ufana,en)* 

Thou beginnest — he begins. £)u fattajl: an — et fancjt an. 

I begin to speak. 3d) fange an gu fptecfyen. 

Does your servant sweep the jtefytt 3fa SBefcientet t>a£ Simmer 

room, which I sweep ] au$, roe(d)e$ id) auSfefyte ? 

To finish, to end* (S n b i a, e xu 

Not yet. 9?od) nid)t. 

Already. (Scfyon. 

Before. (Sfye (6et)0r), 

Do you speak before you listen ? (Sprecfycn &it, efye @tc boren ? 

Does he go to the market before ©cl)t et auf t>cn 9}iarit, efye et 

he writes] fcbrctbt? 

Do you take off your stockings 3tef)en @ie 3f)te (Strumpfe au$, efyc 

before you take ofTyour shoes ] &.C 3fyre <Sd)uf)e aus$uf)cn ? 

I take off my shoes before I take 3* $te(K metne ©d)ut)C a t -$, efye id) 
ofi my stockings. mctne Strumpfe au6$tcf)fc. 

O&s. J.. These examples show that when a con- 
junctive word, as a conjunction, a relative pronoun or 
relative adverb begins the sentence, the separable par- 
ticle is not detached from the verb, which is placed at 
the end. (See Lesson XXXIV. Obs. C, and Rule of 
Syntax, Lesson XLVIL) 

Often. £) ft (oftmafg, AfterS), its compara- 

tive is oftct, and its superlative 
am ofteften* 

As often as 3 ou. ©0 oft note ©tc. 

Oftener than you. Defter (£>ftet) ate ©te. 

Not so often as you. Sfttcfyt fo oft alt @te. 

To breakfast. $tuf)ftucfen. 

Early. * § t ft f). 

Do you breakfast before you g) #tuf)ftticfcn ©te, e^e @ie in Un 
into the wood 1 8Mb ge&en ? 



101 

Does he breakfast before he be- griibftucft etyefje et anfd'ttgt $u at* 

gins to work ] frctten ? 

Do you breakfast as early as 1 1 grubfh'tcfen Sic fc frtif) tvtc id) ? 
I breakfast earlier than you. 3d) fruf)ft&fe fru()CC ate ©i£ 



Too. 


(Spat. 
3u. 


Too late. 

Too early. 

Too great. 

Too little. 

Too much. 
Do you speak too much 1 
I do not speak enough. 


3u fpat. 

3u frufj. 

3u a,reg. 

3u ttetn. 

3u wU 

©prccbcn Sic $u met? 

3d) fprcd)c ntd)t gemig. 



Obs. B. We have seen (Lesson XXIV.) that the in- 
finitive in German is always preceded by the particle 
|U* This particle, however, is omitted before the infi- 
nitive, 

1st, When it is joined to one of the following verbs : 

Surfeit*, to be permitted ; f)et$ett% to bid ; fyelfen*, to 
help ; fyorett*, to hear ; fonnen*, to be able (can) ; (af* 
fen*, to let ; lebren, to teach ; ternen, to learn ; ntogen*, 
to be allowed (may) ; nttijfen*, to be obliged (must) ; 
feben*, to see ; foUen*, to be obliged (shall, ought) ; tt>of* 
fen*/ to be willing, to wish (will). 

ga^rett*, to ride, to go (in a carriage) ; ftnben*, to 
find ; fiitylen, to feel ; nennen*, to call, to name ; retten*, 
to ride, to go on horseback. 

2d, When the infinitive is used in an absolute sense. 
Ex. gfetgtg fern gqtemt bem ^Ratine, it behoves a man to 
be assiduous. When two infinitives are thus em- 
ployed, the verb which follows them is put in the third 
person singular. Ex. ©etne $ebter befennen unb bereuen 
ift fcfyon balbe 23efferung, to acknowledge one's faults and 
to repent of them is already half an amendment. In 
constructing the phrase with e3 tji, it is, the verbs fern*, 
to be; befennen*, to acknowledge; bereuen, to repent, 
are removed to the end and preceded by j u* Ex. @$ 
gejtemt bem 9Kanne, fletfjtg ju fetm & tft fcfyon i)<xlbe 2Sep* 
rung, feme gefyter ju befennen unb ju bereuen* 



102 

EXERCISES. 92. 

Do you begin to speak 1 — I begin to speak.. — Does your brother 
begin to learn Italian? — He begins to learn it. — Gan you already 
speak German 1 ? — Not yet, but I am beginning. — Do our friends 
begin to speak] — They do not yet begin to speak, but to read. — . 
Does our father already begin his letter] — He does not yet begin 
it. — Does the merchant begin to sell? — He does begin. — Can you 
swim already] — Not yet, but I begin to learn. — Does your son 
speak before he listens] — He listens before he speaks. — Does your 
brother listen to you (Lesson XXXVI.) before he speaks] — He 
speaks before he listens to me. — Do your children read before they 
write ] — They write before they read.— Does your servant sweep 
the warehouse before he sweeps the room ] — He sweeps the room 
before he sweeps the warehouse. — Dost thou drink before thou 
goest out] — I go out before I drink. — Does your cousin wash his 
hands (fane £ant>e) before *he washes his feet ] — He washes his 
feet before he washes his hands. — Do you extinguish the fire be- 
fore you extinguish the candle ? — I extinguish neither the fire nor 
the candle (au$, to the end). — Do you intend to go out before you* 
write your letters ] — I intend writing my letters before I go out. — 
Does your son take off his boots before he takes off his coat ] — 
My son takes off neither his boots nor his coat (cm*, to the end). 

93. 

Do you intend to depart soon (6o(fc) 1 — I intend to depart to- 
morrow. — Do you speak as often as I] — I do not speak as often, 
but my brother speaks oftener than you. — Do I go out as often as 
your father ] — You do not go out as often as he ; but he drinks 
oftener than you. — Do you begin to know this man ] — I begin to 
know him. — Do you breakfast early ] — We breakfast at a quarter 
past nine. — Does your cousin breakfast earlier than you] — He 
breakfasts later than I. — At what o'clock does he breakfast ] — He 
breakfasts at eight o'clock, and I at half-past six. — Do you not 
breakfast too early ? — I breakfast too late. — Does your father break- 
fast as early as you] — He breakfasts later than I. — Does he finish 
his letters before he breakfasts ] — He breakfasts before he finishes 
them. — Is your hat too large ] — It is neither too large nor too 
small. — Does our gardener breakfast before he goes into the garden ? 
— He goes into the garden before he breakfasts. — Do you read 
French as often as German ? — I read French oftener than German. 
— Does the physician speak too much ] — He does not speak enough. 
■ — Do the Germans drink too much wine? — They do not drink 
enough of it. — Do they drink more beer than cider ] — They drink 
more of the one than of the other.— Have you much money] — 
We have not enough of it. — Have your cousins much corn ] — 
They have only a little, but enough. — Have you much more brandy ? 
—We have not much more of it. — Have you as many tables as 



103 

ihairs ] — I have as many of the one as of the other. — Does your 
friend receive as many letters as notes ! — He receives more of the 
latter than of the former. — Do you finish before you begin ? — I 
must begin before I finish (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FORTY-FIRST LESSON.— ©in tmb tri^igst* Uttiott. 

THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 

The past participle of regular verbs a is formed from 
the second person plural of the present indicative, by 
prefixing to it g e* Ex. Sfyr ftebet or Itebt, you love ; ge* 
tiebet or gefiebt, loved. The past participle of irregular 
verbs will always be given with the verb. 

All that has been said (Obs. A. Lesson XXXIV.) on 
the rejection of the letter e, is equally applicable to 
the past participle, this being formed from the second 
person plural. 

Obs. A. Some verbs do not add the syllable g e in 
the past participle. (See those verbs, Lesson XLV.) 

To be — been. © e t tt * — g e tt> * f e n. 

Have you been to the market! ©inb ©te auf bem SDZatfte gewe* 

fen? 

I have been there. 3d) bin fca geroefen. 

f have not been there. 3d) bin nid)t fca (jeroefen. 

Have I been there 1 S3tn id) fca geroefen ? 

You have been there. ©te ftnb t>a geroefen. 

Has he been there ? 3ft et ba gewefen ? 

Ever. 3*/ iematS. 

Never. 9?te, niemalS. 

Have you been at the ball % ©tub ©ie auf bem 95aU geroefen ? 

Have you ever been at the ball 1 ©tub ©ic je auf bem 95att geroefen 1 

I have never been there. 3d) bin nic t)a geroefen. 

Thou hast never been there. £)u bift nie ta geroefen. 

You have never been there. ©te ftnb (3^ fetb) niemate ta ge* 

roefen. 
He has never been there. (St ijt nie t>a geroefett. 

Have you already been at the ©tub ©te fdjen im ©djaufptel geroe* 
play ? fen ? 

a The pupils, in repeating the irregular verbs already given, must not fail 
to mark in their lists the past participle of those verbs. 



104 

I have already been there. ^cb tun fcben ba gcwcfcn. 

You have already been there. <&k fint) fcbcn t>a cjenNfen. 
The play, $a?> (Scbaufiud (piur. c). 

I have not yet been there. £>cb bin nccb niebt cci gi'iwfetv 

Thou hast not yet been there. £)u bifr nccb nid)t ba cjenxfen. 
You have not yet been there. ©te fint) nccb ntcbt t>o gi'nrcft'n* 
He has not yet been there. G£r tflt nccb ntcbt t^a gcnxfcn. 

We have not yet been there. 2£tr fint) nccb ntcbt ^a gcnxKn. 
Have you already been at my <Sinb Bk fcbcn bet metnem &>ater cp 

father's (with my father) 1 tvcfen 1 

I have not yet been there (with 3d) tun ncd) md)t Wx trjm geiues 

him). fen. 

Where have you been this morn- 2£o ftnb <§h btefen 9D?crCjcn geroe* 

ing 1 fen ? 

I have been in the garden. Scb tun tm (in bem) (15artcn craves 

fen. 
Where has thy brother been 1 S?c iff 3>ein SBruber qenxfen ? 
He has been in the storehouse. <§t tft tm £3crratrjs()au|"e geroefen. 

exercises. 94. 

Where have you been 1 — T have been at the market. — Have you 
been at the ball ! — 1 have been there. — Have 1 been at the play 1— 
You have been there. — Hast thou been there 1 — I have not been 
there. — Has your cousin ever been at the theatre? — He has newer 
been there. — Hast thou already been in the great square 1 — I have 
never been there. — Do you intend to go thither! — I intend to go 
thither. — When will you go thither 1—1 will go thither to-morrow. 
— At what o'clock 1 — At twelve o'clock. — Has your son already 
been in my large garden 1 — He has not yet been there. — Does he 
intend to see it 1 — He does intend to see it. — When will lie go 
thither (htnetn) 1 — He will go thither to-day. — Does he intend to j/o 
to the ball this evening 1 — He does intend to go thither.— Have you 
already been at the ball 1 — I have not yet been there. — When do 
you intend to go thither (babtn) 1 — 1 intend to go thither to-morrow. 
— Have you already been in the Englishman's room 1 — 1 have not 
yet been in it (barm). — Have you been in my rooms 1 — I have 
been there. — When have you been there 1 — 1 have been there this 
morning. — Have 1 been in your room or in that (in bom) of your 
friend 1 — You have neither been in mine nor in that of my friend, 
but in that of the Italian. 

95. 

Has the Dutchman been in our storehouses or in those (til benen) 
of the English 1 — He has neither been in ours nor in those of the 
English, but in those of the Italians. — Hast thou already been at 
the market 1 — I have not yet been there, but I intend to go thither. 
—Has the son of our bailiff been there 1 — He has been there. — 
When has he been there 1 — He has been there to-day. — Does the 



105 

son of our neighbour intend to go to the market 1 — He does intend 
to go thither. — What does he wish to buy there 1 — He wishes to 
bay some chickens, oxen, cheese, beer, and cider there. — Have you 
already been at my cousin's house 1 — I have already been there. — 
Has your friend already been there 1 — He has not yet been there. — 
Have we already been at our friends 1 — We have not yet been 
there, (tu't ihncn). — Have our friends ever been at our house] — 
They have never been there. — Have you ever been at the theatre 1 
± have never been there. — Have you a mind to write a letter!— 
I have a mind to write one. — To whom do you wish to write 1 — 
I wish to write to my son. — Has your father already been in the 
country 1 — He has not yet been there, but he intends to go thither. — 
Does he intend to go thither to-day 1 — He intends to go thither to- 
morrow. — At what o'clock will he depart! — He will depart at 
half past six. — Does he intend to depart before he breakfasts ! — 
He intends to breakfast before he departs. — Have you been any- 
where ! — I have been nowhere. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FORTY-SECOND LESSON. — %mi ttttir tri^igsts 
Section. 



To have — had* 



£ a b e n * — g c fj a M . 



DCf 3 The participle past, as well as the infinitive 
(Lesson XXIV), when it forms with the auxiliary a 
compound tense, is in German placed at the end of the 
phrase. 



Have you had my coat ] 

I have not had it. 

Have I had it ! 

You have had it. 

You have not had it. 

Thou hast not had it. 

Has he had it] 

He has had it. 

Hast thou had my book 1 

I have had it. 

I have not had it. 

Have you had the books J 
I have had them. 
Has he had them 1 
He has had them. 
Have you had bread 1 
I have had some. 
Hast thou had paper 1 



£aben @te ntetnen 9?ocf gefjabt? 

3cb babe tbn ntcbt gebabt. 

£abe tcb tbn gehabt ? 

<&ic baben tbn gebabt. 

©tc baben ibn ntcbt gebabt. 

2)u baft tbn ntcbt gefyabt* 

&at er tbn gebabt ? 

(§r hot tbn gebabt. 

£oft £>u metn s -£ucb gebabt ? 

3d) babe e$ gebabt. 

3d) babe es ntcbt §chabL 

£aben Ste t>ie 5Mid)Ct gefjabt? 
Scb b^e fte gebabt. v 
£at ct fie gebabt? 
(Sr bat fie gebabt, 
6aben@te SSrcfc ejehabt? 
3cb babe roetcbeS gebabt. 
£aft ^)u gpapiec gebabt ? 



106 



I have had none. 
Have 1 had any 1 
Has he had some wine ? 
He has had some. 
He has had none. 
What has he had? 
He has had nothing. 



$abc tcb nxlcbes cjefyaftt ? 
|>at cr SSein c\c()abt ? 
(gt bat tpekfyen gebabfc 
<§r fjat tetnen getjabt. 
rfBas bat cr gefjabt ! 
($r bat ntd)t* gcfyabt. 



V* 



He has never been either right f (£r bat me roebet 9Secf)t nod) Una 
or wrong. ted)t gefyabt. 

To take place. © t a 1 1 ft n b e n *. 

Does the ball take place this gtnbct bet 23aft btefen 2Cbcnb 

evening ] (Start ? 

It does take place. (Sr pnt^et ©tart. 

It takes place this evening. 

Found. 
When did the ball take place ? 



Yesterday. 
The day before yesterday. 
It took place yesterday. 



<£t fmbet btefen 2Cbenb ©tatt. 
®efunben. 

SE&ann bat bet 23att Start gefun* 

ben ? 
©eftern. 
SScrqejicrn. 
(5r bat cjefterrv Start cjefunben. 



O&s. J.. Expressions such as ©tatt ftttbett*/ ought 
to be considered as separable verbs, of which the par- 
ticle is placed at the end in simple tenses and before 
the syllable g e of the past participle. Here the sub- 
stantive ©tcttt, place, stands as a separable particle. 



Time* 

The first time. 
The last time. 
Last. 
How many times (how often) ] 
Once, 
twice, 
thrice, 
severaV times, 

Formerly. 

Sometimes. 

Do you go sometimes to the mar- 
ket] 
1 do go sometimes thither. 



sfl*a(. a 

£>aS crfre £M. 
£>a$ (cgte gjfot* 

9Bic mefaiaU 
einmal ; 

Sroetmal ; 
btetmal ; 
t)erfd)tebene #M. 

<S r) e b e m (er)emat$, erjebefien, t>ov* 
mate). 

®ef)en ®te mancfymal auf ben 

Sttarft ? 
3d) gefye mandjmal bafjin* 



a When the word 9JM is preceded by an adjective or an ordinal number, it 
is written with a capital initial letter ; when annexed to a cardinal number, it 
begins with a small tetter. 



107 

Gone. (3 c $ a n 9 c tt. 

Gone thither. £ i n q e 9 a n 9 e tu 

Have you gone thither some- (Stub <Sie mandjmal fytnc^cmgen ? 
times ? 

O&s. 5. Here it may be seen how the syllable g c 
in the past participle is placed between the separable 
particle and the verb. (See Lesson XXV.) 

I have gone thither sometimes. 3d) bin mcmdfemal fyingegcmgen. 

Oftener than you. £)eftet aU <Ste. 

Have the men had my trunk ? £aben trie Scanner metttcn Coffee 

$if)aU ? 
They have not had it. @te fyaben tf)n nid)t cjefjabt. 

Who has had it? 2Bct fyat tf)n cjefyabt? 

Have I been wrong in buying £cibe id) Unred)t gcljabt, SBud^Ct: $u 

books? frmfett? 

You have not been wrong in (gte fyciben md)t Untedjt gcrjabt, mU 

buying some. d)C $u Caufcn* 

exercises. 96. * 

Have you had my glove 1 — I have had it. — Have you had my 
pocket-handkerchief? — I have not had it. — Hast thou had my 
umbrella ? — I have not had it. — Hast thou had my pretty knife ? — 
I have had it. — When hadst (fyaft — .qcfyabt) thou it? — I had it yes- 
terday. — Have I had thy gloves ? — You have had them.-— Has your 
brother had my wooden hammer?. — He has had it.— Has he had 
my golden ribbon ? — He has not had it. — Have the English had 
my beautiful ship ? — They have had it. — Who has had my thread 
stockings ? — Your servants have had them. — Have we had the iron 
trunk of our good neighbour ? — We have had it. — Have we had 
his fine carriage ? — We have not had it. — Have we had the stone 
tables of the foreigners ? — We have not had them. — Have we had 
the wooden leg of the Irishman? — W T e have not had it. — Has the 
American had my good work ? — He has had it. — Has he had my 
silver knife ? — He has not had it. — Has the young man had the 
first volume of my work ? — He has not had the first, but the 
second. — Has he had it? — Yes, Sir, he has had it. — When has he 
had it ? — He has had it this morning. — Have you had sugar ? — 
I have had some. — Have I had good paper ?— You have had some. 
— Has the sailor had brandy ? — He has had some. — Have you had 
any ? — I have had none. 

97. 

Has the German had good beer ? — He has had some. — Hast 
thou had large cakes (.ftneften is not softened in the plur.) ? — I have 
had some. — Has thy brother had any ? — He has had none. — Has 
the son of our gardener had flour ? — He has had some. — Have the 



108 

Poles had good tobacco ? — They have had some. — What tobacco 
have they had ? — They have had tobacco for smoking- and snuff 
(JKaiicb' unfe @dmupftabaf). — Have the English had as much sugaj 
as tea? — Th'vy have had as much of the one as of the othe r . — 
Has the physician been right] — He has been wrong.— Has 'he 
Dutchman been right or wrong? — He never has been either right 
or wrong. — Have I been wrong in buying honey ? — You have been 
wrong in buying some. — What has your cousin had ? — He has 
had your boots and shoes. — Has he had my good biscuits 
(Swicbcicf is not softened in the plur>) ? — He has not had them. — 
What has the Spaniard had ? — He has had nothing. — Who has 
had courage? — The English have had some. — Have the English 
had many friends ? — They have had many of them. — Have we 
had many enemies ? — We have not had many of them. — Have we 
had more friends than enemies ? — We have had more of the latter 
than of the former. — Has your son had more wine than meat ' — 
He has had more of the latter than of the former. — Has the Turk 
had more pepper than corn ? — He has had more of the one than of 
the other. — Has the painter had anything ? — He has had nothing. 

98. 

Have I been right in writing to my brother ? — You have not 
been wrong in writing to him. — Have you had the head-ache ?-— 
I have had the tooth-ache. — Have you had anything good ? — I have 
had nothing bad ? — Did the ball take place yesterday ? — It did not 
take place. — Does it take place to-day ? — It does take place to- 
day. — When does the ball take place ? — It takes place this evening. 
— Did it take place the day before yesterday 1— It did take place. 
— At what o'clock did it take place ? — It took place at eleven 
o'clock. — Have you gone to my brother's ? — I have gone thither. — 
How often hast thou gone to my cousin's house ? — I have gone 
thither twice. — Do you go sometimes to the theatre ? — I go some- 
times thither. — How many times have you been at the theatre ? — 
I have been there only once. — Have you sometimes been at the 
ball ? — I have often been there. — Has your brother ever gone to the 
ball ? — He has never gone thither. — Has your father sometimes 
gone to the ball ? — He went (ill — C|cqangcn) thither formerly.— Has 
he gone thither as often as you ? — He has gone thither oftener than 
I. — Dost thou go sometimes into the garden ? — I do go thither 
sometimes. — Hast thou never been there? — I have often been 
there. — Does your old cook often go to the market ? — He does go 
thither often. — Does he go thither as often as my bailiff ? — He 
goes thither oftener than he. 

99. 

Have you formerly gone to the ball ? — I have gone thither some- 
times — When hast thou been at the ball ?— I was there the day 
before yesterday.— Didst thou find anybody there? — I found (babe ' 
gefunfcen) nobody there.— Hast thou gone to the ball oftener than 



109 

thy brothers 1 — I have gone thither oftener than they. — Has yoiu 
cousin often been at the play ] — He has been there several times. 
— Have you sometimes been hungry ] — I have often been hungry. 
— Has your valet often been thirsty] — He has never been either 
hungry or thirsty. — Have you gone to the play early V—I have 
gone thither late.— Have I gone to the ball as early as you ] — You 
have gone thither earlier than I. — Has your brother gone thither 
too late] — He has gone thither too early. — Have your brothers had 
anything] — They have had nothing. — Who has had my purse and 
my money ? — Your servant has had both. — Has he had my stick 
and my hat ? — He has had both. — Hast thou had my horse or that 
of my brother] — I have had neither yours nor that of your brother. 
— Have I had your note or that of the physician ] — You have had 
both (bctre). — What has the physician had ] — He has had nothing. 
— Has anybody had my golden candlestick ] — Nobody has had it. 
(See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FORTY-THIRD LESSON.— SDm Mlh tner^gste 
Ciction. 

To do — done. Z h u n * — a, e t f) a n. 

What have you done ] ££a£ bah'tt <Ste qctr)an ? 

I have done nothing. 3d) babe md)tS CKtban. 

Has the shoemaker made my £at tvr ©cbufymacfyct: metne (gttefel 

boots ] 9c macb t ? 

He has made them. (?r bat fte gemacftt. " 

He has not made them. (§t rjat fte ntd)t ejemacfyt. 

To take off-taken off. f * * n e f ' *' « * -«* 9 « " • mm c n. 

M M i 2C u s $ t e f) c n * — a u * .cj e $ o a, e n. 

Have you taken your boots off] &aUn (Sic 3brc ©ttcfel aii&je^gcn ? 
I have taken them off. 3d) &abc fie aii?a/$egcn. 

This, that. © t c f c £, t>a$. 

Has he told you that ] £at cr 30nen t>a$ gefacjt? 

it. © $. 

He has told it to me. . (St r)at c$ nut gefcujt. 

Obs. The neuter pronoun e 3, it, which is some* 
times rendered into English by so, and more elegantly 
omitted, may in German relate to substantives of any 
gender or number, to adjectives, and e^ven to whole 
phrases. 



110 

Have you told it to me 1 £aben Cie e*> mir cjefagt ? 

I have told it to you. 3d) babe eg Sbnen a/fagt. 

Who has told it to him 1 9Bcr bat c6 ifjm gefdgt ? 

Are you the brother of my friend 1 ©tn.fc @ie t)cr 23rut>er mctneS greun* 

to? 
I am. f 3d) bin c & 

Are you ill ? <Stnt> ©te franf ? 

I am not. t 3d) bin e $ ntd)t. 

Are our neighbours as poor as f @tnt> unfere 9?ad)barn fo arm, voU 

they say ? ft e e $ fagen ? 

They are so. t @* e P n ^ c $• 

To s;?e0& — spoken. @ p r e d) e n * — a, e f p r o d) e n. 

I have spoken with the man. 3d) babe nut t>cm Sfflanne Qefprccfyen. 
I have spoken to the man. 3d) fyabe* t>en 9DJann gejprod)etu a 

Wi^A. 501 1 1 (a preposition which gov- 

erns the dative). 

With which man have you 9)ttt tvefeftem SOtanne f)aben ©te a,es 

spoken % fprocfyen ? 

To which man have you spoken? ££etd)en Sflann fyaben ©^ a,efprod)en ? 

CW (past participle). (3 c f d) n i 1 1 e n. 
Picked up. U u f 9 e b o ,b e n. 

Washed. ® c rt) a f d) e n. 

Which books have you picked gBeldbe S3iid)cr r)ctfoen ©ie auf^efjos 

up ? ben ? 

[ have picked up yours. 3d) babe tie 3fa%cn aufa^oben 

(See Obs. B. preceding Lesson.) 

Burnt. 33erbrennt. b 

Which books have you burnt? 2Be(d)e SBiicber baben @te Derbrennt? 
[ have burnt no books. 3d) babe fetnc 23ud)cr wrbrennt. 

Torn. 3 err iff en. 

Which shirts have you torn 1 SMcbe £cmt>en f)obcn @tc $errtffen ? 
I have torn my own. 3d) f)at>e tie metnigen aemffen. 

EXERCISES. 100. 

Have you anything to do 1 — I have nothing to do. — What has 
your brother to do 1 — He has to write letters. — What hast thou 
done 1 — I have done nothing. — Have I done anything 1 — You have 

a Semanbetl fpred)ett means to speak to somebody in an absolute sense, with- 
out mentioning the subject spoken of, whilst mit ^emanbem fyrecfyett, means to 
speak with or to somebody about a particular thing, as : mit 3em-. i nbem liber 
tt\va$ (son etner (Sacbe) fprecfyen, to speak with somebody about something. 

b The participle past of the verb Berbretmen would be tterbrannt, if it were 
employed either in a neuter or int/ansitive sense. Ex. Are my books burnt? 
ftnb ntctnc £Uid)er Bevbramit? They are burnt, fie fittb utbxannt (See Note 
S Lesson XXV. 



Ill 

torn my clothes (jttctfcet*). — What have your children done 1 — They 
have torn their beautiful books. — What have we done ! — You have 
done nothing ; but your brothers have burnt my fine chairs. — Has 
the tailor already made your coat ! — He has not yet made it. — 
Has your shoemaker already made your boots'? — He has already 
made them. — Have you sometimes made, a hat? — I have never 
made one. — Hast thou already made thy purse ! — I have not yet 
made it. — Have our neighbours ever made books! — They made 
(r)aben — gcmacfyt) some formerly. — How many coats has your tailor 
made ? — He has made thirty or forty of them. — Has he made goon* 
or bad coats !— He has made (both) good and bad (ones). — Has 
our father taken his hat off! — He has taken it off. — Have your 
brothers taken their coats off! — They have taken them off. — Has 
the physician taken his stockings or his shoes off! — He has taken 
off neither the one nor the other. — What has he taken away! — 
He has taken away nothing", but he has taken off his large hat. — 
Who has told you that ! — My servant has told it to me. — What has 
your cousin told you ? — He has told me nothing. — Who has told 
it to your neighbour ? — The English have told it to him. — Are you 
the brother of that (fciefe$) youth ? — I am (3d) bin cs). — Is that boy 
your son ! — He is. — How many children have you ! — I have but 
two. — Has the bailiff gone to the market] — He has not gone 
thither. — Is he ill ! — He is. — Am I ill ! — You are not. — Are you 
as tall (grcp) as I! — I am. — Are your friends as rich as they say ! 
— They are. — Art thou as fatigued as thy brother! — I am more so 
(c£ mefyr) than he. 

.101. 

Have you spoken to my father ? — I have spoken to him. — When 
did (fyabcn Qcfptedf)en) you speak to him! — I spoke to him the day 
before yesterday. — Have you sometimes spoken with the Turk ! — 
I have never spoken with him. — How many times have you 
spoken to the captain? — I have spoken to him six times. — Has 
the nobleman ever spoken with you ! — He has never spoken with 
me. — Have you often spoken with his son ! — I have often spoken 
with him. — Have you spoken with him oftener than we ! — I have 
not spoken with him so often as you (have).— To which son of the 
nobleman have you spoken ! — I have spoken to the youngest. — To 
which men has your brother spoken ? — He has spoken to these. — 
What has your gardener's son cut ? — He has cut trees. — Has he 
cut corn! — He has cut some. — Has he cut as much hay as corn! 
— He has cut as much of the one as of the other. — Have you 
picked up my knife ? — I have picked it up J— Has your boy picked *~j 
up the tailor's thimble! — He has not picked it up. — Have you * 
picked u a crown ! — I have picked up two of them. — What have 
you picked up ? — We have picked up nothing — Have you burnt 
anything? — We have burnt nothing. — What have the sailors 
burnt !— They have burnt their cloth coats.— Hast thou burnt my 
fine ribbons ! — I have not burnt them. — W T hich books has the 



112 



Greek burnt? — He has burnt his own. — Which ships ((^cfnffe) 
have the Spaniards burnt? — They have burnt no ships. — Have you 
burnt paper? — I have not burnt any. — Has the Physician burnt 
notes? — He has burnt none. — Have you had the courage to burn 
my hat ? — I have had the courage to burn it. — When did you burn 
it ? — I burnt it yesterday. — Where have you burnt it ? — I have 
burnt it in my room. — Who has torn your shirt ? — The ugly boy of 
our neighbour has torn it. — Has anybody torn your books ? — No- 
body has torn them. 



FORTY.FOURTH LESSON.— bier anb merest* 
Ceciicm. 







Infinitive. 


Past part, 


To drink - 


—drunk. 


Strut Fen* 


— getrunfetu 


To carry - 


—carried. 


Xrayen* 


— getragetu 


To bring- 


-brought. 


SBrinqen* 


— gebradjt 


To send - 


-sent. 


(Senten* 


— gefanbt 


To write- 


-written. 


Schreiben* 


— gefcbriebem 


Te see - 


-seen. 


©ebett* 


— gefeberu 


To give - 


-given. 


©efren* 


— gccjcbeiu 


To lend - 


-lent. 


Seiben* 


— -geltetyeiu 




NEUTER 


VERBS. 





Neuter verbs are conjugated like the active. The 
latter, however, always form their past tenses with 
the auxiliary bctben*, f o have ; on the contrary, some 
neuter verbs take fem*, to be, and others bctben*, for 
their auxiliary ; others again take sometimes baben*, 
and sometimes fein*. Those of which the auxiliary 
is not marked have the same as in English. 

To come — come (Past part.), .ft c m m en* — q c I c m m c n. 
To go — gone. W> e b on* — c\ o c\ a n c\ e n. 

Is the man come to youi father? oft h'r ^ttafin- $n obtvm iSattv §p 

fenmurn ? 

He is come to him. (£r ift \\\ ifmi qefenuncn. 

Is thy brothei gone into the 3ft £H*tn V^nirer ouf fcos (auf$) 

field] fictt ^adnaw ? 

He is gone thither. @*r ift t»a!un <HMfl»i<Kn. 

Have you seen the man 1 Jbatvn ^'w Nn ^?ann gefchen ? 

I have seen him. ocb hntu* tftn jV'fibvn. 

Have you seen my book j $aU\\ @u mctn &uct) gefefoen? 



113 

I have seen it. Scb fycifce e$ gcfc!>cn. 

I have not seen it. 3d) fyafte e* ntd)t gc[cl)cn. 

When?— Where? ' 2£ann? — 2Bo? a 

When did you see my cousin 1 ££orm fjaben ^ie metnen Setter ge* 

feben ? 
L saw him the day before yester- 3d) babe U)n wtgcjtern cjefefyen. 

day. 
Where have you seen him 1 2£o batten @ie tbn gefeben ? 

I have seen him at the theatre. 3d) babe tbn tin theater gefeben. 
Where hast thou seen my book] 2Be baft £Hi mctn 2*ud) gefefjett ? 
I have seen it in your room. £d) b a t >c *$ tn 3^rem Simmer gefes 

ben. 

Do you learn to read ] ?ernert (Sic tefen ? 

I do learn (it). 3d) lerne e£. 

I learn to write. 3d) (erne febretben. 

Have you learnt to write? 4baben ©te febretben gctcrnt ? 

I have (learnt it). 3d) babe es gelcrnt* 

To hfl?« (to be acquainted with) jt e n n e n * — g e f a n n t. 
— known.* 

Have you known those men 1 Jpabm &e jenc fanner gefannt ? 
1 have not known them. 3d) b Q bc fie ntd)t gefannt. 

Obs. Instead of the past participle, the following 
verbs retain the form of the infinitive when preceded 
by another infinitive : b biirfen*, to be permitted ; f)et$en # , 
to bid ; bclfen*, to help ; fyorert, to hear ; fomten*, to be 
able (can) ; laffen*, to let ; lebrert, to teach ; lernert, to 
learn ; mogen*, to be allowed (may) ; mitflen*, to be 
obliged (must) ; feben*, to see ; follen, to be obliged 
(shall, ought) ; ttwften, to be willing, to wish (will). c 

To let {to get, to have, to order). 2 a f f e n *. (See Lesson XXXI. 

where this verb is conjugated 
in the present tense.) 

To get or to have mended — got Tfusbeffern (affen*. 
or had mended. 

a Learners ought now to use in their exercises the adverbs of time, place, 
' and number, mentioned in Lessons XXVII. XXXI. XXXII. and XLII. 

b It will be useful to remember that the particle § it does not precede the 
1 infinitive joined to one of these verbs. (See Obs. B. Lesson XL.) 

c Modern authors do not always observe this distinction, but ^ve the pre- 
ference to the regular form. Thu^, it is already generally said : ^d) habe ihn 
fenrtert $e(ernt (not leweti), I have become acquainted with him ; 3d) bob* tf)m 
! atbettcn gebolfen (not belfen), I have helped him to work ; er bat mify xifytift 
1 ftreefcett $tUi)Xt (not ternen), he has taught me to speak correctly. 



114 

To get or to have washed — got 2Bajd)en taffeta* 

or had washed. 
To have made — had made. 90?ad)en faffen*. 

Are you getting a coat made (do £ajfen ©ie einen SRcd madjen ? 

you order a coat) ! 
I am getting one made (I do 3d) (affe etnen macfyeru 

order one). 
I have had one made. 3d) fyabe etnen madjen (offciu 

Has your brother had his shirt £at 3fa S3rut)cr' fein £emt> rcafdjen 

washed ! faffen ? 

He has had it washed. @r t>at e$ roafdjen faffen. 

The cravat, baS £at$tud) ; 

the neck, t>ct $al$. 

Hast thou sometimes had cravats jpaft £)u mancrmial Jg>at6t£id)cr au$* 

mended ! bcffern (a (Ten ? 

have had some mended some- 3d) ftabe mondjmol roeldje au^beffern 

times. faffen. 

exercises. 102. 

Have you drunk wine ! — I have drunk some. — Have you drunk 
much of it! — I have drunk but little of it. — Hast thou drunk 
some beer ! — I have drunk some ! — Has thy brother drunk much 
good cider ! — He has not drunk much of it, but enough. — When 
did you drink any wine! — I drank some yesterday and to-day (3d) 
fyabt geftetn unt> fyeutc nx(cbcn). — Has the servant carried the letter ? 
— He has carried it. — Where has he carried it to ! — He has 
carried it to your friend. — Have you brought us some apples ?- — We 
have brought you some. — How many apples have you brought us ! 
■ — We have brought you twenty-five of them. — When did you 
bring them ! — I brought (babe — gcbrad)t) them this morning. — At 
what o'clock! — At a quarter to eight. — Have you sent your little 
boy to the market? — I have sent him thither (bafytn). — When did 
you send him thither ! — This evening. — Have you written to your 
father ! — I have written to him. — Has he answered you ! — He has 
not yet answered me. — Have you ever written to the physician ! — 
I have never written to him. — Has he sometimes written to you % 
— He has often written to me. — What has he written to you ! — He 
has written to me something. — Have your friends ever written to 
you ! — They have often written to me. — How many times (Lesson 
XLII.) have they written to you ! — They have written to me more 
than thirty times. — Have you ever seen my son ! — I have never 
seen him.— Has he ever seen you !-r-He has often seen me. — Hast 
thou ever seen any Greeks ! — I have often seen some. — Have you 
already seen a Syrian ] — I have already seen one. — W^here have 
you seen one ! — At the theatre. — Have you given the book to my 
brother ! (Rule of Syntax, Lesson XXVIII.) — 1 have given it to 
him. — Have you given money to the merchant! — I have given 
some to him. — How much have you given to him ! — I have given 
to him fifteen crowns. — Have you given gold ribbons to our good 



115 

neighbours' children? — I have given some to them. — Will you 
give some bread to the poor (man) (Page 34, Obs. A.) ? — I have 
already given some to him. — Wilt thou give me some wine ] — I 
have already given you some.—When didst thou give me some ] — 
I gave you some formerly. — Wilt thou give me some now 1 — I 
.cannot give you any (3d) farm Sfynen fetnen). 

103. 

Has the American lent you money ] — He has lent me some. — 
Has he often lent you some 1 — He has lent me some sometimes. — 
When did he lend you any ? — He lent me some formerly. — Has 
the Italian ever lent you money ] — He has never- lent me any. — 
Is he poor 1 — He is not poor ; he is richer than you. — Will you 
lend me a crown ] — I will lend you two of them. — Has your boy 
come to mine ] — He has come to him. — When ]- — This morning. — 
At what time] — Early. — Has he come earlier than 1 ] — At what 
o'clock did you come ] — I came at half past five. — He has come 
earlier than you. — Where did your brother go to ? — He went to the 
ball. — When did he go thither ] — He went thither the day before 
yesterday. — Has the ball taken place ] — It has taken place. — Has 
it taken place late] — It has taken place early. — At what o'clock] 
— At midnight. — Does your brother learn to write ] — He does learn 
it. — Does he already know how (Lesson XXXVII.) to read ] — He 
does not know how yet. — Have you ever learnt German ] — I learnt 
it formerly, but I do not know it. — Has your father ever learnt 
French] — He has never learnt it. — Does he learn it at present] — 
He does learn it. — Do you know the Englishman whom I know] 
I do not know the one whom (Lessons XII. and XIV.) you know ; 
but I know another (Lesson XXI). — Does your friend know the 
same nobleman whom I know 1 — He does not know the same ; but 
he knows others. — Have you known the same men whom I have 
known (u)dd)C id) gcfannt babe). — I have not known the same ; but 
I have known others. — Have you ever had your coat mended] — 
I have sometimes had it mended ] — Hast thou already had thy 
boots mended ] — I have not yet had them mended. — Has your 
cousin sometimes had his stockings mended ] — He has several 
times had them mended. — Hast thou had thy hat or thy shoe mend- 
ed ? — I have neither had the one nor the other mended. — Have you 
had my cravats or my shirts washed ] — I have neither had the 
one nor the other washed. — What stockings have you had washed ? 
— I have had the thread stockings washed. — Has your father had 
a table made ?— He has had one nade. — Have you had anything 
tnade ? — I have had nothing made. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 






116 

FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. — Mnf mti> flierjigste 
feciiou. 

To receive — received. 23 c £ m men* (c r 1) a I t e n *, 

e mpf angcn '•*). 

Ofc. JL We have observed (Lesson XLI.) that some 
verbs do not take the syllable g e in the past participle ; 
they are, 

1st, Those which begin with, one of the inseparable 
unaccented particles : be, emp, ent, er, ge, tter, ttnber, jer 
(See Lesson XXV.), or with one of the following par- 
ticles, when inseparable : buret), through ; butter, behind ; 
ilbev, over ; um, around ; rnttcr, under ; ttoll, full ; ttneber, 
again. a 

2nd, Those derived from foreign languages and ter- 
minating in iren, or teren* Ex. (lubircn, to study ; past 
part, fhtbtrt, studied. 

Rule. All verbs, in general, which have not the prin- 
cipal accent upon the first syllable, reject the syllable 
ge in the past participle. 

How much money have you re- SBtcoicl (3cU) fycifrcn ftc befemmen 1 

ceived ? 
I have received three crowns. 3d) bciftc fcret SfaU'r Oefcmmcn. 
Have you received letters ! Jpakm ©'te 35ru'fe crboltcn ? 

I have received some. 3d) fycibe ttK'lcfye cr()cilten* 

To promise — promised. 23erfpted)e n* — t> etfprocften. 

Obs. B. Derivative and compound verbs are con- 
jugated like their primitives : thus the verb fcerfprecfyen* 
is conjugated like fprecfyen*, to speak, which is its pri- 
mitive. (Lessons XXIV. and XXXIV.) 

Do you promise me to come ? ^erfprccfKtt (£te mit $u fommen ? 
I promise you. Set) ttcrfpredje c$ 3bnen. 

The grosh (a coin), t>cr @rcfd)cn (is not softened in the 

plur.) ; 
the denier, fc>er pfennig. 

A crown contains twenty-four (5tn Sbcilet fyat trier unb $rcan$t3 
groshes. ®rcfd)cn. 

a Verbs compounded with these particles are inseparable, when the par- 
ticles may be considered as adverbs, and separable, when they have tiw 
meaning of prepositions. 



117 



A grosh contains twelve deniers. (Sin ©refcben fiat gntfff gjfenntge. 

A florin contains sixteen groshes ©in ©ulfecn r>at. fccb^cbn ©rofcfeen 
or sixty kreuzers, or forty-eight obcr fed^tg jfreuger, obcr acfet unt) 
good kreuzers. mergtg gute jtrcujcr. 

A denier contains two oboles. ©in pfennig feat §n>ei feller. 
The obole, bet feller* 

There is. @$ ift. 

There are. @ 8 fi n & . 

How many groshes are there in SDStcmcC ©rofefeen ftnb in einem Sfea* 

a crown ? (cr ? 

Twenty-four. 25ier unb arcan^ig. 

To wear out — worn ouU TCbttagen * — abgcttagen 
(dbntigen — abgenngt). 
95 u d) ft a 1 r c n — b u d) j! a & 1 1 1. 
BB.ie! 



To spell — spelled. 
How? 



Well. 
Bad, badly. 

How has he washed the shirt 7 
He has washed it well. 



©lit, \vcU (adverbs b ). 

@d)(cd)t, libel, fcfelimm (adverbs c ). 



££ie feat et bag £emb geinafcfeen I 
(£t feat eg gut geroafeben. 
How have you written the letter? 235ic feaben ©U ben 33rtef gefefette* 

ben? 



7%ws. 
So so. 

In this manner. 

To call — called. 

Have you called the man ! 
I have called him. 

• To dry. 



©0. 

(So fc. 

'2Cuf btefeTfrt. 
,2(uf btefe SBetfe. 

9?ufen* — gerufen. 

£aben <Sie ben Sflann gerufen 1 
3d) feabe ifen gerufen. 



Stocfnen. 
To put {to place, to lay). £ e g e n . 

Do you put your coat to dry 1 Cegen @te Sferen &ecf $u ttoefnen ? 
1 do put it to dry. 3d) lege ifen ni troefnen. 

Where have you placed (put) 2Bo feaben (Sie t>a$ 23ud) fetnge- 
thebook? (egt? (See Note d , Lesson 

XXXVIL 



•> @htt relates to the manner in which a thing is done. Ex. C£t rebet QUt, he 
speaks well. $BoM denotes a certain degree of well being. Ex. 3% bin 
tt>ol)f, I am well ; id? lt*et£ e$ tt)ot)l/ 1 know it well. 

c <5d)led)t is the opposite to gut, and libel the opposite to toobl. Ex. (§X 
fdn'eibt fcblecbf, he writes badly. fetroaS itbel nebmen, to be offended at any- 
thing. <Sd)limm is employed nearly in the same sense as libel, thus we say: 
fctylimttt gemtg, bad enough ; beffc) fcpltmmer, so much the worse. 



118 

I have placed it upon the table. 3d) fyafce e$ auf ben £tfd) gcCcgt-. 

To lie — lain. 2 t e 9 c n * — 9 eleven. 

Where lies the book ? SD&c tiegt ba$ <8urf) ? 

It lies upon the table. (SS Ctegt auf bem Stfcfte. 

It has lain upon the table. (5* foot auf bem £tftf)C gelegcn. 

There. £)atauf. 

Does the book lie on the chair ? gtcgt ba$ 93ud) auf bcm ©tur)(e ? 
It does lie there (on it). ($6 ttegt b a t a u f. 

It has lain there. (&$ M barauf gelegen. 

EXERCISES. 104. 

Hast thou promised anything? — I have promised nothing. — Do 
you give me what you have promised me ? — I do give it to you.— ■ 
Have you received much money 1 — I have received but little. — How 
much have you received of it ? — I have received but one crown.— 
When have you received your letter ? — I have received it to-day.— 
Hast thou received anything 1 — I have received nothing. — What 
have we received ? — We have received long (grop) letters. — Do you 
promise me to come to the ball ? — I do promise you to come to it. — t 
Does your ball take place to-night? — It does take place. — How 
much money have you given to my son ? — I have given him fifteen 
crowns. — Have you not promised him more 1 — I have given him what 
I have promised him. — Have our enemies received their money ?— 
They have not received it. — Have you German money ? — I have 
some. — What kind of money have you ? — I have crowns, florins, 
kreuzers, groshes, and deniers. — How many groshes are there in 
a florin ? — A florin contains (f)at) sixteen groshes, or sixty kreuzers, 
or forty-eight good kreuzers. — Have you any oboles? — I have a 
few of them. — How many oboles are there in a denier ? — A denier 
contains two oboles. — Will you lend your coat to me ? — I will knd 
it to you ; but it is worn out. — Are your shoes worn out ? — They 
are not worn out. — Will you lend them to my brother ? — I will 
lend them to him. — To whom have you lent your hat ? — I have not 
lent it ; I have given it to somebody. — To whom have you given 
it ? — I have given it to a pauper (bet Uxmc). 

105. 

Does your little brother already know how to spell ? — He does 
know. — Does he spell well ? — He does spell well. — How has your 
little boy spelt? — He has spelt so so. — How have your children 
written their letters ? — They have written them badly. — Do you 
know (Lesson XXXVII.) Spanish 1 — I do know it. — Does your 
cousin speak Italian? — He speaks it well. — How do your friends 
speak? — They do not speak badly (ntcf)t libel). — Do they listen to 
what you tell them ? — They do listen to it. — How hast thou learnt 
English ? — I have learnt it in this manner. — Have you called me ? — 
I have not called you, but your brother. — Is he come ? — Not yet, 



119 

(Lesson XL.) — Where have you wet (nop mod)en) your clothes ? 
— I have wet them in the country. — Will you put them to dry 
($u trcclncn (ecjen) 1 — I will pat them to dry. — Wliere have you put 
my hat 1 — I have put it upon the table. — Hast thou seen my book ] 
— I have seen it. — Where is it ] — It lies upon your brother's trunk. 
— Does my handkerchief lie upon the chair] — It does lie upon it. — 
When have you been in the country ] — I have been there the day 
before yesterday. — Have you found your father there 1 — I have found 
him there. — What has he said ] — He has said nothing. — What have 
you been doing in the country ] — I have been doing nothing there. 



FORTY.SIXTH LESSON. — 0*d)0 nub merfaete 



Does your father wish to give 3£tfl Sfyr 23otcr mit ettroS $u tfyun 

me anything to do 1 gcben ? 

He does wish to give thee some- (5t nrill Dtt etrooS $u tfyun o,eben. 

thing to do. 

Obs. £> a J a , to it, relates sometimes to an kifini 
tive, as: 

Have you a mind to work 1 £oben ©tc £uft $u orbdten ? 

I have no mind to it. 3d) Ijobe fctnc £uft t>o$u. 

Is thy brother gone to the 3ft £)etn S3rut>et auf$*£anfo Qco/in. 

country ] gen ? 

He is gone thither. <S'tTift t>of)tn gegono,en. 
Hast thou a mind to go thither! #oft £)u Suft t>af>tn $u gefyen ? 

I have a mind to it. 3d) fyobe £uft bo^tn 

How old are you 1 £Bte oft ftnb (Ste ? 

I am twelve years old. 3d) bin $ft>otf 3of)r a oft. 

How old is your brother] SSSte oft tft 3 fa 23rubet ? 

He is thirteen years old. @r tft -fctetaefjn 3afa oft* 

Almost {nearly). S3 c t n o fj e or foft. 

JLfowJ. U n 9 e f a f) r. 

Hardly* Ifliinu 

He is almost fourteen years old. (St iff foft t)terger)n Sofa oft. 

I am about fifteen years old. 3d) bin uwjefo'fa ftinfoefa 3«fa 

oft. 
He is almost sixteen years old. (5t ift betnofa fed)^r)n 3<*fa fltt. 
Your are hardly seventeen years ©ie ftnb fcmm fieben$ef)tt 3«fa atk 
old. 

* Here custom requires the singular limber. 



120 

Not quite. 9? t d) t gang. 

I am not quite eighteen years 3d) bin nicfa gan$ ad)t$el)n 3afa 

old. alt. 

Art thou older than thy brother 1 SBift £>u after alS JDctn SBrubet ? 

I am younger than he. 3d) bin (linger als ct. 

To understand — undei stood. 9S e r it e f) e n * — ttetftanben. 

Do you understand me 1 2Serftcf)cn (Ste mid) ? 

I do understand you. 3d) write fa @tc. 

Have you understood the man 1 Jpaben @tc ben SRann tterjtanbcn ? 
I have understood him. 3d) babe tfai oerftanben. 

1 hear you, but I do not under- 3d) fare (Sic, abet id) ttcrjtefa @ie 
stand you. md)t. 

The noise, ber Carm ; 

The noise (roaring) of the wind, bat (Saufen bc$ £Binbe$; 

The wind, ber SBinb. 

Do you hear the roaring of the £oren @ie ba$ ©aufen be£ £$tn* 

wind ] bes 1 

I do hear it. 3d) fate c& 

To hark. ©ellen. 

The barking, t>a$ 23eften. 

Have you heard the barking of £aben (Sie ba$ SBellcn ber Imnbeges 

the dogs 1 r)crt ? 

I have heard it. 3d) fabe eS ger)crt. 

To lose — lost. SSerlieten* — 1> e r ( o r e n . 

To oeatf — beaten. © d) I a g e n * — 9 e f d) t a g e n. 

Thou beatest, — he beats. £)u fcfaagit, — er fcfaagt. 

To reao? — reai (past part.). £ e f c n * — g e t e f e n. 

To remain — remained. 23 I e i b e n* — g e b 1 1 c b e n (takes 

fcin for its auxiliary). 
To take — taken. 91 e f) m e n * — g e n m m e tn 

To know — known. 2£ i f f e n * — g e w u 9 t. 

Have you lost anything ? £abcn <Ste etroag ttertoren ? 

I have lost nothing. 3d) fabe nid)t$ wrforcn* 

To lose (at play) — lost. ' SSetfptelen* — 1> e t f p t e ( t. 

How much has your brother lost? SQ&temct fat 3fa SSruber ttcrfpielt? 

He has lost about a crown. (£c fat nngefdfa einen Sfafet *>er* 

fpielt. 
Who has beaten the dog ? 2Ber fat ben £unb gefd)(agcn ? 

No one has beaten it. Sftemanb fat tr>n gefd)(agen. 

How many books has your cousin SBicmel Sticker fat 3fa better fd)0ti 
already read I gelefen ? 



121 

He has already read five of them, (Sr hat berett fd)0n filnf getcfcn, unfc 

and at present he is reading jc£t ttcf'ti't £>as fecfyjfo 

the sixth. 
Has the man taken anything f \pat r^er Wlann 31)ncn ctroag <}es 

from you] riommen ? 

He has taken nothing from me. f @t f)at mtr ntcf)t$ gcncmmctt. 
Do you know as much as this SOBiffen @te fo met ttne tucfer 

man ] 9^ann ? 

I do not know as much as he. 3d) roettt ntc&t fo tnet rote er» 
Have you known that] $akm (Sic t>a* getxmj}t ? 

I have not known it. 3d) babe c£ rud)t genmfjt. 

Where have our friends re- 2i3o fint) unfere greunfce ge6tte6cn ? 

mained I 
They have remained at home* <Ste fint) $u 6ciufe gefcttefcetu 

EXERCISES. 106. 

Have you time to write a letter] — I have time to write one.— » 
Will you lend a hook to my brother ] — I have lent one to him 
already. — Will you lend him one more ] — I will lend him two 
more. — Have you given anything to thepoor ] — I have given them 
money. — How much money has my cousin given you ] — He has 
given me only a little; he has given me only two crowns. — How 
old is your brother] — He is twenty years old, — Are you as old as 
he] — I am not so old. — How old are you] — I am hardly eighteen 
years old.— How old art thou ] — I am about twelve years old. — Am 
I younger than you ]— I do not know. — How old is our neighbour'* 
— He is not quite thirty years old. — Are our friends as young as 
we ] — They are older than we. — How old are they ] — The one is 
nineteen and the other twenty years old. — Is your father as old as 
mine ] — He is older than yours ] — Have you read my book ] — I have 
not quite read, it yet. — Has your friend finished his book ] — He has 
almost finished it.— Do you understaud me ] — I do understand you. 
— Does the Englishman understand us ] — He does understand us. 
— Do you understand what w T e are telling you ] — We do understand 
it. — Dost thou understand German] — I do not understand it yet, 
but 1 am learning it. — Do we understand the English ] — We do 
not understand them. — Do the Germans understand us ] — They do 
understand us. — Do we understand them ]— We hardly understand 
them. — Do you hear any noise 1 — I hear nothing. — Have you heard 
the roaring of the wind ] — I have heard it. — What do you hear] — 
1 hear the barking of the dogs. — Whose dog is this ] — It is the dog 
of the Scotchman. 

107. 

Have you lost your stick ] — I have not lost it. — Has your ser- 
vant lost my note ] — He has lost it. — Have you gone to the ball ] 
—No, I have not gone to it. — Where have you remained ] — I have 
remained at home. — Has your father lost (at play) as much money 
ts I ? — He has lost more of it than you ] — How much have I lost t 



122 

—You have hardly lost a crown.— Where has thy brother re* 
mainedl— He has remained at home.— Have your friends re- 
mained in the country 1— They have remained there.— Do you 
know as much as the English physician]—! do not know as much 
as he.— Does the French physician know as much as you J— lie 
knows more than I.— Does any one know more than the French 
physicians'?— No one knows more than they.— Have your brothers 
read my books ]— They have not quite read them.— How many of 
them have they read ]— They have hardly read two of them.— Has 
the son of my gardener taken anything from you ]— He has taken 
my books from me.— What hast thou taken from him ]— I have 
taken nothing from him.— Has he taken money from you]— He 
has taken some from me.— How much money has he taken from 
you i— He tas taken from me almost two crowns. (See end of 
Lesson XXXIV.) 



FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Sieben nrib triaqigste 

To bite— bitten. S3 c t p e n — 9 c M f f e n. 

Why ? 2B a t u m ? 

Because. 805 e U. 

flJT The verb of the subject or nominative, (in 
compound tenses, the auxiliary) is placed at the end 
of the phrase, when this begins with a conjunction or 
a conjunctive word* such as a relative pronoun or a 
relative adverb. The conjunctions which do not re- 
quire the verb to be placed at the end, will be given 
hereafter. 

Why do you heat the dog 1 SBatum fd)fagen 6tt t>en £unt> ? 

I beat it, because it has bitten 3* fdjlage tyn, mil ct nud) gefoffcn 

Do you see the man who is in <§ef)ett ©te ben sDfenn, roddjet (bet) 

the garden? im ©atten ift ? 

I do see him. 3d) felje Ujn. 

Do you know the man who has Mermen ®te ten gjfonn, bet (welder) 

lent me the book ? nut to* 23ud) Qcltc^en fat ? 

I do not know him. 3* fenne tfyn md)t. 

Do you read the book, which I Sefen ©te ba^ SBucfj, weW&e* tcr> 3&* 

have lent you 1 ncn cjcltefjen fatje ? 

I do read it. 3* tefc e& 

Obs. When the verb, which a conjunctive word 
causes to be placed at the end of the phrase, is com- 



123 

pounded with a separable particle, this is not detached 
from it. Ex. 

I breakfast before I go out. 3$ fritfjftucfc, efje id) cmsgche. 

Does the tailor show you the Scigt Sbncn bcr @d)UiU>er t)cn SRcd, 
coat, which he is mending? tuclcfycn cr cmebcfjcrt? 

To wait. SB a r t e n. 

To expect. (S t ru a 1 1 c ru* 

To wait for some one or for 2Cuf (Stncn ebcr ctroaS marten. 

something. 
To expect some one or some- (Stncn cb^r cttt>a$ cttuavtcn. 

thing. 
Do you wait for my brother 1 SSartcn Sic ouf metnea S3rubct ? 
I do wait for him. 3d) roartc auf ibn* 

Do you expect friends ] ©rroartcn Sic $rcunbc ? 

I do expect some. 3d) ernxirte etntQc. 

To owe. © d) u I fc t g f c t n *. b 

How much do you owe me 1 SOBtcoict ftnb <Sic mir fcrjutbta, ? 

I owe you fifty crowns. 3d) tun Sljnen ftinfttg £r)a(et fct>u(« 

big. 
How much does the man owe SBicmcl t|t Syttenbet 9#ann fduitbig? 

you? 
He owes me ten shillings. @t ift mtr $efm (sdntltrtgc fdjutbtg. 

Does he owe as much as you 1 3ft cr fc me! fdnUbig tt>ic ^ic? *" 
He owes more than I. (St ift mchr fcrjulbto, al5 id). 

The shilling, bcr (Scrolling ; 

the pound, ba$ ^)funb ; 

the livre (a coin), bcr jranfe. 

To return — (to come back) — re- 3 u r u cf f o nun e n * — $utucfges 
turned. f o m m c n. 

At what o'clock do you return Urn nrictnet lifer fommen <Sie t>en 

from the market? bem SOGarfte ^urticf ? 

I return from it at twelve o'clock. 3d) fomme urn $tt$lf Uf)r Don t>a %\\s 

rltcf. 

From there, thence (from it). SSon ba. 

Does the servant return early &ommt bcr SSebtcnte friif) Don ta $u* 

thence? rue!? 

He returns thence at ten o'clock (St fommt urn jefjn Uijr 93?orgcn$ 

in the morning. t)Cn ba $urucf. 

At nine o'clock in the morning, f Urn ncun Ufyr $Horgcn$. 
At eleven o'clock at night. f Urn ctf Uf)t 2Cbcnb$. 

a SBavfert auf, with the accusative case, is used, when the person or thing 
spoken of is present, and ertixirrett, when it is not. 

b ^dutlbtg feut*, to owe, is to be considered as a compound verb, of which 
the separable particle is placed at the end, fcfyulbig, due, owing, indebted, hav- 
ing here the force of the separable particle. 



124 

How long J ££te (nngc?c 

During, for. 2B a f) t: e n t> (a preposition which 

governs the genitive case). 

How long has he remained £Bte tange tft er t)a gebUeben ? 
there ? 

A minute. (Sine minute. 

An hour. (Sine (Stunbe.a 

A day. (Sinen Sag. 

A year. (Sin 3af)t (a neuter substantive, 

taking e in the plur. without 
being softened). 
A month. (Sincn SDto'nat 

The summer, bet (Scanner. 

The winter, ber ©sinter. 

r s I£a()tenb b<?$ ^emmetS. 
During the summer. < Den (Scunner, ttber. 

C. 2)en Scunner fyinburcr). 
How long have you spoken with ££te kinge l)aben Ste nut tern 90?ans 

the man ? ne gcfprodjien ? 

I have spoken with him for three 3d) fyabe brct Stunben mit tf)m ges 

hours. jprecrjcn. 

How long has your brother re- SQSte lange tfit 3f)r SBrutcr ouf bem 

mained in the country ? Ccinbe gebltebcn ? 

He has remained there a month. (£r ift etnen DJfcncit ba geblteben. 
Have you remained long with Sinb (gte fange bet tneinem s £atct: 

my father 1 gebttoben 1 

I have remained with him for an 3d) bin eine Stunbe long bet tfjm $e* 
hour. btteben. 

Long. Scmge. 

EXERCISES. 108. 

Why do you love that man 1 — I love him, because he is good. — 
Why does your neighbour beat his dog 1 — Because it has bitten 
his little boy.- — Why does our father love me 1 — He loves you, be- 
cause you are good. — Do your friends love us 1 — They love us, be- 
cause we are good. — Why do you bring me wine? — I bring you 
some, because you are thirsty. — Why does the hatter drink? — He 
drinks, because he is thirsty. — Do you see the sailor who is in 
(ouf) the ship ] — I do not see the one who is m (ouf) the ship, but 

c The accusative case answers to the question tine lattge ? how long ? and 
other similar questions, relative to measure, weight, quantity, &c, as tine 
lang? how long? tine fdjnuer? how heavy? ttneotd? how much? tine tbeu* 
er? at what price? tine tinut? how far? tine gvoj? of what size? tine alt? 
how old ? 

d SfJHuute, minute, ©tttttbe, hour, are two nouns of the feminine gender; 
they add tt in al) the cases of the plural without softening the radical vow- 
els. We can also say: ettte ©tutti>e tang during an hour; eitt 3a^v lang, 
during a year, 



125 

the one who is in (cmf) the square. — Do you read the books which my 
father has given you 1 — I do read them. — Do you know the Italians 
whom we know ] — We do not know those whom you know, but 
we know others (cmberc). — Do you buy the horse which we have 
seen] — 1 do not buy that which we have seen, but another (ctn 
QnfcercS). — Do you seek what you have lost] — I do seek it. — Do you 
find the man whom you have looked for ] — I do not find him. — 
Does the butcher kill the ox which he has bought in (cmf with the 
dat.) the market ] — He does kill it. — Do our cooks kill the chickens 
which they have bought] — They do kill them. — Does the hatter 
mend the hat which I have sent him ] — He does mend k. — Does 
the shoemaker mend the boots which you have sent him ] — He does 
not mend them, because they are worn out. — Does your coat lie 
upon the chair ] — It does lie. upon it. — Does it lie upon the chair 
upon which 1 placed it? — No, it lies upon another. — Where is my 
hat ] — It is in the room in which (roertn or in rcekfyem) you have been. 
— Do you wait for any one ] — I wait for no one. — Do you wait for 
the man whom I have seen this morning] — I do wait for him. — 
Art thou waiting for thy book ] — I am waiting for it. — Do you 
expect your father this evening] — I do expect him. — At what 
o'clock has he gone to the theatre ] — He has gone thither at seven 
o'clock. — At what o'clock does he return from there ] — He returns 
from there at eleven o'clock. — Has your bailiff returned from the 
market ] — He has not yet returned from it. — At what o'clock has 
your brother returned from the country] — He has returned from 
thence at ten o'clock in the evening. 

109. 

At what o'clock hast thou come back from thy friend ] — I have 
come back from him at eleven o'clock in the morning. — Hast thou 
remained long with him ] — I have remained with him about an 
hour. — How long do you intend to remain at the ball ] — I intend 
to remain there a few minutes. — How long has the Englishman 
remained with you ] — He has remained with me for two hours. — 
Do you intend to remain long in the country ] — I intend to remain 
there during the summer. — How long have your brothers remained 
in town (in t)i't (StaiH) ] — They have remained there during the 
winter. — How much do I owe you ] — You do not owe me much.— 
How much do you owe your tailor ] — I only owe him fifty crowns. 
— How much dost thou owe thy shoemaker ] — I owe him already 
seventy crowns. — Do I owe you anything ? — You owe me nothing. 
* — How much does the Frenchman owe you ] — He owes me more 
than you. — Do the English owe you as much as the Spaniards ] — 
Not quite so much. — Do I owe you as much as my brother ] — You 
owe me more than he. — Do our friends owe you as much as we ] — 
You owe me less than they. — Why do you give money to the mer- 
chant] — I give him some, because he has sold me handkerchiefs. 
— Why do you not ,rink ] — I do not drink, because I am not 
thirsty. — Why do you. pick ip this ribbon ] — I pick it up, because 



126 

I want it. — Why do you lend money to this mam] — I lend him 
some, hecause he wants some. — Why does your brother study 1 — 
He studies, because he wishes to learn German ((ernen tvi(l). — Art 
thou thirsty 1 — 1 am not thirsty, because I have drunk. — Has your 
cousin drunk already ? — Not yet, he is not yet thirsty. — Dops ttie 
servant show you the room which he sweeps ] — He does not show 
me that which he sweeps now, but that which he has swept yester- 
day. — Do you breakfast before you go out 1 — I go out before I 
breakfast. — What does your shoemaker do before he sweeps his 
room 1 — He mends my boots and my shoes before he sweeps it. (See 
end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— 2Uht unb merest* 
Cation. 

To live , to dwell, to reside, to £B o F) n e ru 
abide, to lodge* 

Where do you live ? ££o roebnen ©te? 

I live in William-street, number 3d) ruefae in t>er SSMfbelmSfhrapc, 

twenty-five. Dciumner fttnf unt) a $rt>an$ia,. 

Where has your brother lived? 933 o fat ibr SVrufcet gewebnt ? 

He has lived in Frederic-street, @t bat in t>cr grtebricbsftrage, 9?ums 

number one hundred and fifty. mcr fantert unt> fitnfttg geiuefat. 

Dost thou live at thy cousin's 2£ofaft £)u bet Detnem better 1 

house? 

I do not live at his, but at my 3d) luobne nicbt bet xfym, fenbern bet 

father's house. metnem &>ater. 

Does your friend still live where 2£chnt 3br ^rcunb nod) (ta), it?o 

I have lived 1 icb gcroctynt babe 1 

He lives no longer where ycu @t iuebnt nicbt mebr (ta), rco @te 

have lived ; he lives at present geivcbnt haben ; er we font iefct auf 

in the great square. tern cu*o(?en *piage. 

The street. jDtc Strafe (a noun of the femi- 

nine gender). 

The number. £)tc 9? u miner (a noun of the femi- 

nine gender). 

To brush. 23 it t ft e n. 

Have you brushed my coat 1 £>aben ©te metnen Sfocf gebittftet ? 
I have brushed it. 3d) babe tfa cjeburftet. 

How long ? SB i e I a n a, c 1 

Till, until. S3 i g. 

* In German, the conjunction Uttv, is used to add a number less than a 
Hundred. V 



127 

Till noon. ) .„■ . nr>it .„ 

Till twelve o'clock. £ ® Ig 9Mta 9- 

Till to-morrow. 9H$ morgcn. 

Till the day after to-morrow. £3t$ ubermorgen. 

Till Sunday. iBU ©onntag. 

Till Monday. 33U Stfontag. 

Till this evening. 23t$ ^wte 2C6cnb. « 

Till evening. 33tS auf t>en ttbenb. 

Until morning. 33t$ an ten Bergen. 

Until the next day. S5i£ $um anfcern Sag. 

Until this day. S3t$ auf fcriefen Sag* 

Until this moment. S3tg auf Mefcn 2Cugenblicf. 

Till now — hitherto. 33t6 ie|t — 6i$f)er. 

To this place, hither, thus far, as S3t6 fjtetfyer (an adverb of place )♦ 

far as here. 
To that place, thither, so far, as S3t$ t>af)tn (an adverb of place). 

far as there. 

Obs. The days of the week are all of the mascu- 
line gender, except tie 9DJttttt>oci)e, Wednesday, which 
some authors use as feminine. 

Tuesday, &ienftag ; 

Wednesday, s^ittwod) ; 

Thursday, 3)onnetftag; 

Friday, grettag ; 

Saturday, ©amftag OSonnabenfc). 

Then. £> a n n — (a U t) a n n). 

Till I return (till my return). Stt$ id) gurfieffemme. 
Till my brother returns (till my 23tS metn 2Brut>er $ur(ltffommt 

brother's return). 
Till four o'clock in the morning. <BtS trier itfjr 9)2ctgen$. 
Till midnight (till twelve o'clock S3t$ £Rtttetnad)t (a noun of the 

at night). feminine gender). 

How long did you remain with £Bie lange fint> <&u bet metttem 

my father 1 23ater geblteben ? 

I remained with him till eleven 3d) b'm bis elf Uf)r 2Cbent>$ bet tfym 

o'clock at night. geblteben. 

One, the people, they or any one. $31 a n (indefinite pronoun always 

singular). 

Have they brought my shoes 1 $at man metne @d)ufie gcbradjt ? 
They have not brought them yet, 97?an f)at fie nod) ntd)t gebrad)t 
What have they said 1 £Ba$ bat man gefagt ? 

They have said nothing. 9)tan bat ntd)t£ gefagt. 

What have they done 1 2BaS bat man getbait ? 

They haws done nothing. Stfan fjat nict)t^ getban. 



128 

To he willing (to wish),— -been 2$ 11 C tt *, — 9 e R> ! 1 t. 

willing (wished). 

Has he been willing to go for £at cr ten 2Cr# Wen rooHen ? (not 

the physician % geivellt. See 06s. Less. XL1V.) 

He has not been willing to go (St f)at it)n tiid)t rjelen wellen. 

for him. 

Has he wished to go out this £ctt cr bicfcn Bergen au^cfyen 

morning ? ruoUen ? 

He has not wished to go out. (5r hat mct)t auvgehen roellen. 

Have they been willing to do it T £cit man es tbun ruellcn ? 

They have not been willing to 93?an tjat C6 nict)t tl)un a>ellen. 

do it. 

They have not been willing to Wan fjett nut)t$ tl)\\n wollcn. 

do any thing. 

To Z>e aoZe (can),— been able & on n c n* — $e I enn t. 

Have they been able to find the $o\ man bte 93iicber fmben fonncn ? 

books ] (not gefennt. See Less. XL1V.) 

They have not been able to find SOlan tycit fie ntd)t fint>cn fonnen. 

them. 
Has tne tailor been willing to £>at t>cr (Schneider utetnen SRcd cmi>: 

mem * my coat ] beffern wellen ? 

He has not been willing to mend (St tjat tfjn nicl)t ausbeffcrn well en. 

it. 

Something (or anything) new. Stwo^ 9? c tl c £. 

What do they say new 1 2£a$ fagt man SfteueS ? 

They say nothing new. 9)ion fagt md)tS 9?cuc& 

iVew. 9? c u. 

My new coat. Sffietn ncucg .SUetb. 

My new friend. sfiltin neuet grcunb. 

His new clothes. ©cine neuen JUcibcr. 

EXERCISES. 110. 

Where do you live? — I live in the large (in bet cjrePen) street. — 
Where does your father live ] — He lives at his friend's house. — 
Where do your brothers live ] — They live in the large street, number 
a hundred and twenty. — Dost thou live at thy cousin's 1 — 1 do live at 
his house. — Do you still live where you did live (geroofjnt (jaben) ] — 
I live there still. — Does your friend still live where he did live]— 
He no longer lives where he did live. — Where does he live at present ? 
— He lives in William-street, number a hundred and fifteen. — 
Where is your brother] — He is in the garden. — Where is your 
cousin gone to ] — He is gone into the garden. — Did you go to the 
play yesterday ? — I did go thither. — Have you seen my friend ] — 
I have seen him. — When did you see him ] — 1 saw (tjabe — gefeheti) 
him this morning. — Where has he gone to ] — I do not know (Obs. 



129 

Lesson XLIIL). — Has the servant brushed my clothes 1 — He hag 

brushed them. — Has he swept rny room ] — He has swept it How 

long- did he remain here 1 — Till noon. — How long- have you been 
writing-'? — I have been writing until midnight. — How long did I 
work] — You worked until four o'clock in the morning. — How long 
did my brother remain with you '? — He remained with me until 
evening. — How long hast thou been working "1 — I have been working 
till now. — Hast thou still long to write] — I have to w T rite till the 
day after to-morrow. — Has the physician still long to work 1 — He 
has to work till to-morrow. — Must I remain long here ]- — You must 
remain here till Sunday. — Must my brother remain long w T ith you 1 
— He must remain w T ith us till Monday. — How long must I work]— 
You must work till the day after to-morrow. — Have you still long 
to speak ] — I have still an hour to speak. — Did you speak long 1 — ■ 
I spoke (babe — CjejVrodKn) till the next day.-— Have you remained 
long in my room ? — I have remained in it till this moment. — Have 
you still long to live in this house] — I have still long to live in it 
(Darin). — How long have you still to live in it] — Till Sunday. 

111. 

Does your friend still live with you 1 — He lives with me no longer. 
— How long has he lived with you ] — He has lived with me only a 
year.— How long did you remain at the ball ] — I remained there till 
midnight. — How long have you remained in the carriage ? — I have 
remained an hour in it. — Have you remained in the garden till now 1 
— I have remained there (Darin) till now. — Has the captain come 
as far as here] — He has come as far as here. — How far has the 
merchant come ? — He has come as far as the end of the small road. 
— Has the Turk come as far as the end of the forest ? — He has come 
as far as there. — What do you do in the morning? — I read. — And 
what do you do then ] — I breakfast and work. — Do you breakfast 
before you read 1 — No, Sir, I read before I breakfast. — Dost thou 
play instead of working (Lesson XXXVI.) ] — I work instead of 
playing. — Does thy brother go to the play instead of going into the 
garden] — He does not go to the play. — What do you do in the 
evening ] — I work.— What hast thou done this evening ] — I have 
brushed your clothes and have gone to the theatre. — Didst thou 
remain long at the theatre 1 — I remained there but a few minutes. — 
Are you willing to wait here ] — How long must I wait 1 — You must 
wait till my father returns. — Has anybody come ] — Somebody has 
come. — What have they (man) wanted (gcivctlt) ] — They (9J?an) have 
wanted to speak to you.— Have they not been willing to wait] — 
They have not been willing to wait. — W T hat do you say to that 
man ] — I tell him to wait-. — Have you waited for me long] — I have 
waited for you an hour. — Have you been able to read my letter]— 
I have been able to read it. — Have you understood it ] — I have 
understood it. — Have you shown it to any one] — I have shown it 
to no one. — Have they brought my clothes ? — They have not brought 
them yet. — Have they swept my room and brushed my clothes ]— 
6* 



130 

They have done both (tcibc6). — What have they said ] — They have 
said nothing. — What have they done? — They have done nothing.-— 
Has your little brother been spelling 1 — He has not been willing 
to spelL — Has the merchant's boy been willing to work 1 — He has 
not been willing. — What has he been willing to do ] — He has not 
been willing tc do anything. 

112. 

Has the shoemaker been able to mend my boots 1 — He has not 
been able to mend them. — Why has he not been able to mend them ] 
-—Because he has had no time. — Have they (man) been able to find 
my gold buttons ? — They have not been able to find them. — Why 
has the tailor not mended my coat ] — Because he has no good 
thread. — W^hy have you beaten the dog ? — Because it has bitten me. 
— Why do you not drink ? — Because 1 am not thirsty. — What have 
they wished to say 1 — They have not wished to say anything. — 
What do they (man) say new in the market? — They say nothing 
new there. — Have they (man) wished to kill a man! — They have • 
not wished to kill any one. — -Have they said any thing new ?— 
T^ey have said nothing new. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FORTY-NINTH LESSON.— ^utt xtnh derogate 
Section. 

To steal — stolen. <S t c b { e n * — cjcftofjUn. 

Thou stealest, he steals. 2)u fttcWft, — cr fttefjtt. 

To steal something from some f Scmantcm ctwaS fh'fjlcn*. 

one. 
Have they stolen your hat from f £>at man Sfynm Sfyten £ut Qes 

you 1 . ffoWen ? 

They have stolen it from me. f sftfcm bat tf)tt nut geftoMcm 
Has the man stolen the book f $at Sir fcer fOiaxm t)a$ 23ud) 

from thee ? geftohtcn 1 

He has stolen it from me. f (&r bat es mtt geftobfen. 

What have they stolen from you? f &Ba6 f)at man Sfynen gcffoljfcn ? 

AIL U it is declined in the following 

manner. 

( N. G. D. A. 

All 1 Masc. alter — e3 — em — em 

( Neut affeg — eg — em — eg* 

! Plural for all genders. 

N. G. D. A. 
Wk — er — en — e. 



131 

All the good wine. 2(ttet cuite 2£ein. 

All the good water. 2Cftc$ fuite SKSoffcr. 

All the good children. 2(lle cuite Winter. (See page 34, 

Obs. B.) 

Obs. A. When two determinative words, which do 
not take the definite article, as : aft, all (See Lesson 
XXXII.) ; btefer, this; jetter, that, &c, are placed 
one after the other, they have each the characteristic 
ending of this article. Ex. 

All this wine. 2CUcr bicfcr (not btcfe) 8GBetn. 

All this money. 2(Ue$ fctefee (not btcfe) ©clt>. 

All these children. Me fctcfe Winter, 

All these good children. 2ttlc fctcjc guten ^inbcr. 

Obs. B. In familiar style, when aft, all, is followed 
by a pronoun, it often rejects its termination. Ex. 

All his money. m fctti ®ett>. 

The word, £>a$ 85*ort ; 

the speech, t>a$ SBort (plur. £&otte). a 

How is this word written! ££tc fcfyrcibt man ttefeS SBott ? 

It is written thus. 9)lan \d)vtibt e$ fo. 

To dye or to colour, % a t b c n . 

To dye black, white. ^cfywat^, roetp farben. 

To dye green, blue. ©tun, btau farben. 

To dye red, yellow. 9?otf), gctt> fatben. 

To dye grey, brown. ©rem, braun farbert. 

My blue coat. $)ltin bfauet £Rc& (mettt Matte* 

mm. 

This white hat. £)tcfet roct£e 6ut. 

Do you dye your coat blue ? gdtben @tc S^rcn 9?0tf b(au ? 

I dye it green. 3d) fatbe tfyn grun. 

What colour will you dye your £Bte rcolten @ie S^r &udf) fd'tbm ? 

cloth ? 

1 will dye it blue. 3d) w\U eS btau fatbett. 

The dyer, fcer gatbet. 

To g-e* dyed— got dyed. $ a r b c n t a f f e n *. 

What colour have you got your 2Btc fyaben @te 35ten £ut fatben 

hat dyed ] foflett ? 

I have got it dyed white. 3* fyabe ifjn roetg fdtben foffen. 

a When SBort, means merely a word, its plural is 2Bortet ; but when it 
conveys the meaning of a whole phrase, its plural is SBotte. Ex. £eetc 
SGotte, useless words ; ©lattben (5ie weinen SBotten, take my word for it; t>a$ 
45auptit>ort, the substantive ; plur. bte 4pauptu>orter, the substantives. 



132 

As far as my brother's. &H $u mctnem SBtubcr, 

As far as London. *Bi$ 8*nfcon» 

As far as Paris. ?B\$ $povt$. 

As far as England. %*>ti nod) (Sncjiont). 

As far as France. 2U$ nod) ^ronfrdd). 

As far as Italy. SSte nod> Stoltcn. 

Germany, S)eutfcb(ont> ; 

Spain, Ippanich ; 

Holland, Reliant* 

Rule. The names of countries, towns, and villages, 
belong to the neuter gender, and stand without the 
article. They are indeclinable, except in the genitive, 
which receives $ when the pronunciation admits it. If 
the ending of the name does not admit the letter i, as 
in spctrt^, Paris, the preposition fcett, of, is used. Ex. 
tie ©ttttofyner fcon ^Pari$, the inhabitants of Paris. 
Some proper names of countries are of the feminine 
gender. These, like all other feminine nouns, are in- 
variable in the singular, and form their case by means 
of the definite article, viz. 1, Names of countries 
which terminate in ei. Ex. bie £urfei, Turkey ; and 2, 
the following : bie $rimm, Crimea ; bte Sauft'g, Lusatia ; 
tie SOtorf, March; bie $Mbait, Moldavia; tie qjfalj, 
Palatinate ; bie ©cbroeig, Switzerland. Ex. bie ScfitDeij, 
Switzerland ; ber <Bd)tic>ei$, of Switzerland ; ber <&d)Wtifo 
to Switzerland ; tie ©d)H>etj, Switzerland. 

To travel. 9? c i f c n (is used with the auxi- 

liary fctn). 

Do you travel to Paris ? 9?ctfcn Sic nocl) g)ort$ 1 

Do you go to Paris ] ©eljcri Sic nocb par'tf ? 

I do travel (or go) thither. 3d) rcifc (id) ejebe) tufrin. 

Is he gone to England ] 3ft cr nocb (Sngtanb ejerctpt ? 

He is gone thither. (£r t)l t)of)tn qcrc'tf't. 

How far has he travelled 1 *Bts lvobtn tft cr cjcrctf't ? 
He has travelkd as far as (§t ift bt$ nod) 2(mcrt!o cjcrctf't. 
America. 

exercises. 113. 

Have they (mem) stolen anything from you ] — They have stolen 
all the good wine from me. — Have they stolen anything from your 
father 1 ? — They have stolen all his good books from him. — Dost 
thou steal anything 1 — I steal nothing. — Hast thou ever stolen 



133 

anything''? — I have never stolen anything (nie cht>a£). — Have they 
stolen your apples from you ] — They have stolen them from me. — 
What have they stolen from me] — They have stolen from you all 
the good books. — When did they steal the carriage from you? — - 
They stole (v)fan bat — a/ftebh'n) it from me the day before yesterday. 
— Have they ever stolen anything from us ]-^-They have never 
stolen anything from us. — Has the carpenter drunk all the wine ] — 
He has drunk it. — Has your little boy torn all his books ] — He has 
torn them all. — Why has he torn them] — Because he does not 
wish to study. — How much have you lost (at play) ]— I have lost 
all my money. — Do you know where my father is ] — I do not know. 
— Have you not seen my book ] — I have not seen it.— Do you 
know how this word is written ] — It is written thus. — Do you dye 
anything] — I dye my hat. — W^hat colour do you dye it ] — I dye it 
black. — What colour do you dye your clothes] — We dye them 
yellow. 

114. 

Do you get your trunk dyed ] — I get it dyed. — What colour dc 
you get it dyed ] — I get it dyed green. — What colour dost thou get 
thy thread stockings dyed ] — I get*them dyed white. — Does youi 
cousin get his handkerchief dyed ] — He does get it dyed. — Does 
he get it dyed red ] — He gets it dyed grey. — What colour have 
your friends got their coats dyed ] — They have got them dyed green. 
— What colour have the Italians had their carriages dyed ] — They 
have had them dyed blue. — What hat has the nobleman] — He has 
two hats, a white one and a black one. — Have I a hat ]— You have 
several. — Has your dyer already dyed your cravat] — He has dyed 
it. — What colour has he dyed it] — He has dyed it yellow. — Do you 
travel sometimes ] — I travel often. — Where do you intend to go to 
(lun^ureijVn) this summer] — I intend to go to Germany. — Do you 
not go to Italy ! — I do go thither. — Hast thou sometimes travelled ? 
— I have never travelled . — Have your friends the intention to go to 
Holland ] — They have the intention to go thither. — W^hen do they 
intend to depart ] — They intend to depart the day after to morrow. 
— Has your brother already gone to Spain ] — He has not yet gone 
thither. — Have you travelled in Spain] — I have travelled there. — 
When do you depart ? — I depart to-morrow. — At what o'clock ? — ■ 
At five o'clock in the morning. — Have you worn out all your boots ] 
—I have worn them all out. — W r hat have the Turks done J — They 
have burnt all our good ships. — Have you finished all your letters ] 
—I have finished them all.— How far have you travelled ] — I have 
travelled as far as Germany. — Has he travelled as far as Italy] — 
He has travelled as far as America. — How far have the Spaniards 
gone] — They have gone as far as London. — How far has this poor 
man come ] — He has come as far as here. — Has he come as far as 
your house 1 — He has come as far as my father's. (See end of 
Lesson XXXIV.) 



134 



FIFTIETH LESSON.— 4Fftnf?igste fcsrtiou. 



Above. 
Below. 

This side. 
That side. 



Dbert(rest). ' j Jj™$ ((motion). 



Utttett (rest). 

©teSfettS(rest). 
SettfettS (rest). 



tjmunter or fytttctb 
fyerunter or fyerab 
Hither, bterfyer, ) 
l)ter fyeritber, > 
Don bortfyer ) 
Thither, bortfyttt 



(motion). 

(motion), 
(motion). 



Obs. A. The particles fyet and fyttt, having no corres- 
ponding words in English, must be carefully distin- 
guished from each other, jper expresses motion to- 
wards the person who speaks, as : fyerattf, up ; fyenmfer 
or fyerab, down ; fyeraug, out ; fyeriiber, hither, to this 
side, jjttt expresses motion from the person who 
speaks towards another place, as : fytncmf, up ; ^tttltnter 
or fytrtab, down; fymauS, out; dumber, thither, to the 
opposite side. If, for instance, I wish to tell any one 
who is on a mountain to come down, I must say : font* 
mm ©te Remitter, come down (to where I am). He 
might answer me, fontmert ©te fyerctttf, come up. I might 
say to him, trf) fortune tttcfyt fyutcmf, I am not coming up ; 
and he might answer me, uttb id) ntrf)t fyutltttter, and I 
am not coming down. 

According to this we must say: fommen ©te herein, 
come in ; gefyen ©te fytnauS, go out ; fasten ©ie fytnttber, 
drive to the opposite side ; fprtttgctt ©te fyineut, jump in 
(i. e. ttt bett fflu$, into the river) ; but should the per- 
son speaking be already in the water, he would say ; 
fprtngen ©te fyerettu 



The mountain, 
the river, 
the present, 



fccr 93 erg ; 

t>cr £(uj} ; 

t)a6 ©cfcfyent: (plur. e a ). 



Obs. B. The adverbs bte£feit£, jenfett£, ought to be 
carefully distinguished from the prepositions, bte$feft ; 



a Neuter words, formed of a verb and the prefix ge, add e to all the cases 
plural, and do not soften the radical vowel. 



135 

jenfett The latter are always followed by the genitive, 
whilst the others never govern a case. Ex. bie^fett t>e$ 
glufietf, on this side of the river ; jenfett fceg Sergei, on 
the other side of the mountain. 

To go up the mountain. £)en 23et£ Ijtnauf gefyen *. 

Where is your brother gone to 1 ££o tp 3f)t 23tut>et fyinQeQangen ? 
He is gone up the mountain. (5t tji t>en 93et$ f)inauf gegangen. 

To gzW back again {to restore). SBiebetgefcen*. 

Thou givest back again. <Du gtfcft rmebet. 

He gives back again. (St Qtbt tptebet. 

Given back again. SOBtefcergegc&ctu 

Does he restore you your book ? dttbt er Sfoncn 3fa 23uc^ tmetet ? 

He does restore it to me. (St Qtt>t eg mit rciebet* 

Has he given you your stick £at ct Sfynen 3t)rcn ©tccf rmcbetges 

back again 1 gcben ? 

He has given it me back again. (St fyat tfyn nut rmcbet^ecjeben. 

To fogm, to commence. 2t n f a n Q e n *, uegtnnen*. 

Begun, commenced. ^ncjefancjen, kgonnen. 

Have you already commenced £aben <Ste S^tcn S3tief fcfyon ange* 

your letter ] fangen ? 

Not yet. 9?ccf) nid)t. 

I have not yet commenced it. 3c!) Ija&e tr)n ncd) mcf)t angefan* 

gen. 
Have you received a present ] Robert @U etn dk'fcfyenf fcefoms 

men? 
I have received several. 3d) fjct&e t>ctfcf)tebene fcefommen. 

From whom have you received 83 on went baben @ie (Sk'fcfyenfe beEom* 
presents 1 men ? 

T^ercce ? WAere /row ? 2B o f) e t ? 

Out of. Tt\\$ (governs the dative). 

Where do you come from ? £Co f emmen ©tc fyet ? 

O&s. C The adverb tt>of)er may be separated into two 
parts (as tootfitl, Lesson XXXVII. ), the first of which is 
put at the beginning, ana the second at the end of the 
phrase. If the phrase ends with a participle past, or an 
infinitive, her is placed before it ; but it precedes the 
particle JU of the infinitive. 

I come from (out of) the garden. 3cf) fomme auS bem (fatten. 

Where has he come from 1 2M)et tft et gefommen ? 

He has oome from the theatre: (St ift au* bem &fyeatet gefommen. 



136 

Tobe worth, SBertf) fetn*. 

How much may that horse oe ££teme( fcmn btcfeS g)fcrt> rccrtl) 

worth 1 fan ] 

It may be worth a hundred @6 Eann l)unt)crt SbaUt wcrt^fdn. 

crowns. 

This is worth more than that. £)tcfcs tft merjr rocrtf) all jenc$. 

The one is not worth so much as £)a* cine tft nicbt fo met rocttlj at$ 

the other. ba6 cmbere* 

How much is that worth 1 iBxmci tft bet* nxrtb ? 

That is not worth much. 5)ag tft ntcbt met rocrtf). 

That is not worth anything. £)as ift nicbt* rocrtf). 

To 6e toter. 23 e f f e r f c i n * (mcl)t roertf) 

fetn *). 

Ajnlnotas good as my brother] S$tn id) ntcbt fo gut rote mem S3tus 

ber ? 

You are better than he. k ~.\ 1 s ^ * ^'^ 4M 

(_ <Ste Itnt menr rocrtf) cu$ er. 

[ am not as good as you. 3d) bin ntcbt fo flut rote 0te# 

EXERCISES. 115. 

Do you call me ?-— I do call you. — Where are you ?. — I am on (auf 
with the dative) the mountain ; are you coming up ] — 1 am not 
coming up. — Where are you?— 1 am at the foot (am jnfje) of the 
mountain ; will you come down ? — I cannot come down. — Why 
can you not come down ] — Because I have sore feet. — Where does 
your cousin live ] — He lives on this side of the river. — Where is 
the mountain 1— It is on that side of the river. — Where stands the 
house of our friend ? — It stands on that side of the mountain. — Is 
the garden of your friend on this or that side of the wood 7 — It is on 
that side (jvnfetts). — Is our storehouse not on that side of the road ? 
— It is on this side (btcfcfetts). — Where have you been this morning? 
— I have been on (Lesson XXX.) the great mountain. — How many 
times have you gone up the mountain ] — 1 have gone up (btnauf 
geganqen) three times. — Is our father below or above 1 — He is above. 
— Have the neighbour's boys given you your books back again? 
— They have triven them to me back again. — When did they give 
them back again to you 1 — They gave (hcibcn — roteberqegeben) them 
back again to me yesterday. — To whom have you given your stick ? 
— I have given it to the nobleman. — To whom have the nobleman 
given their gloves 1 — They have given them to Englishmen. — To 
which Englishmen have they given them 1 — To those (Lesson 
XIV.) whom you have seen this morning at my house. — To which 
people do you give money '? — 1 give some to those to whom (Lesson 
XtV) you give some. — Do you give any one money 1 — I give some 
to those who want any. — To which children does your father give 
cakes] — He gives some to those who are good. 



137 



116. 



Have you received presents ] — I have received some. — What 
presents have you received 1 — I have received fine presents.— Has 
your little brother received a present ] — He has received several. — 
From whom has he received any I — He has received some from my 
father and from yours. — Do you come out of the garden ] — I do not 
come out of the garden, but out of the house. — Where are you going 
to ? — I am going into the garden. — Whence comes the Irishman ? 
— He comes from the garden. — Does he come from the same garden 
from which (au$ nxldjem) you come]- — He does not come from the 
same. — From which garden does he come ? — He comes from that 
of our old friend. — Whence comes your hoy ] — He comes from the 
play. — How much is that carriage worth? — It is worth five hundred 
crowns. — Is this book worth as much as that ] — It is worth more. 
— How much is my horse worth ? — It is worth as much as that of 
your friend. — Are your horses worth as much as those of the French? 
— They are not worth so much. — How much is that knife worth ? 
— It is worth nothing. — Is your servant as good as mine ? — He is 
better than yours. — Are you as good as your brother] — He is better 
than I. — Art thou as good as thy cousin ] — I am as good as he. — 
Are we as good as our neighbours ] — We are better than they. — 
Is your umbrella as good as mine ] — It is not worth so much. — - 
Why is it not worth so much as mine? — Because it is not so fine 
as yours. — Do you wish to sell your horse 1 — I do wish to sell it. — 
How much is it worth ] — It is worth two hundred florins. — Do you 
wish to buy it ] — I have bought one already. — Does your father 
intend to buy a horse 1 — He does intend to buy one, but not yours. 
(See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FIFTY-FIRST LESSON.— ©in nrib fftn^igste flection. 

That (conjunction). <D a g (See Rule of Syntax, Les- 
son XLVIL). 

What do you say? SQBaS fagen (Sic] 

I say that you have my book. 3d) facje, ba§ (Sic incin 93 ud) batten. 

I tell you that I have it not. 3d) fage Sbnen, t)ap id) e$ ntd)t 

batte. 
Have you not had it 1 fatten Sic e$ ntcbt gcbattt ? 

I have had it, but I have it no 3d) batte c$ gcbattt, abet id) r)atte e3 
longer. nid)t mcbr. 

No more. 9H d) t m c f) r. 

Where have you placed it ] SQSo batten @te es btngefcgt ? 

I have placed it on the table. 3d) batte c£ attf ben gtfd) getegfc 

Is it (does it lie) on the table 1 2iegt c* aitf t>em &tfd)C? 

It is (lies) on it. (SSttegt barauf. 



Some, a little. 
Can you give me some water 1 

I can give you some. 

Must. 

Necessary (adjective). 

To be necessary. 



138 

(Stroas (etn went 9). 

jtcnnen Sie mu; etroaS Safiet ge* 
. ben ? 
3d) 6ann Sfjnen rc>e(d)e$ gcfcen. 

Stiffen, past part, gemupt. 
$ 8 1 1) i g. 
9Zctf)tg fcin*. 

$ftufi man ouf ben 9^ar!t gefjcn ? 
3ft eg notfytg auf ben ^larft $u ge* 
f)cn? 






C 9)?an mufi bafytn gefjen. 
£ <S* tit nc " 



Is it necessary to go to the 
market ? 

It is necessary to go thither. 

What must one do in order to 235a6 mup man tfyun, um bcutfd) $U 

learn German ] fern en 1 

One mast study much. 93?an mujj titef jtubtten. 

What must he do ] £Bat> mup cr tfyun ? 

He must go for a book. (Sr mufi etn SBud) fyofcn. 

What must I do ] SBa* mug id) tljun I 

.£&'#, sjZew*. <Stif(. 

To 6e sitting, been> sitting. S 1 § e n * (takes r)a&en for its 

auxiliary), gefeffen. 

You must sit still. (Sic miiffcn fttlX ftgen. 

Have you been obliged to work £a6en Sie ote( arftcttcn mfifien (Obs. 

much to learn German! Lesson XLIV.), um beutfd) $U 

fernen 1 
I have been obliged to work 3d) fyabe tuef atfcetten mufien. 

much. 

The competency, the subsistence, £) a $ 2( U 6 £ m m e n. 

the livelihood. 
To have wherewithal to live. 



Has he wherewithal to live ] 

He has. 

What must I buy ] 

Some beef. 

The ox (neat). 
You must buy some beef. 

What do you wish ? 
What do you want ! 

I want some money. 

Do you want some money ? 



S e t n 2Cu$fommen I) often* 

£at cr fcin 2Cu$fommen ? 

<£r &at eg. 

£&a$ mug id) faufen 1 

«Ktnbffetfd). 

Dag $tnb. 

(Sic mttjjcn $tnbfletfd) faufen. 

2Ba$ wolf en Sic ? 
CSBaS braucben Sic? 
I 2Bag fjaben Sic notfjig ? 
5 3d) fyafce ®c(b nottytg. 



3d) braucbe ®cfb. 
S3raud)cn Sic ®cfb ? 
Do you wish to have some &Botten Sie @elb fyctfwn 1 
money 1 



139 



I do want 9 )me. 

Do you want much 1 

I do want much. 

How much must you have ] 

How much do you want I 

I only want a grosh. 

Is that all you want ? 

That is all I want. 

More, 

Do you not want more ] 
I do not want more. 
What does he want ] 
He wants a coat. 
Have you what you want? 
I have what I want. 
He has what he wants. 
They have what they want. 



3d) fcrcmdje rocfd)C$. 
SSraudjen @ie fccffcn met ? 
3d) brand)* beffen met. 
g&twiel nmfjm Sic babcrt 1 
SLBtcmcl braucben Ste ? 
Scl) brauebe nur cincn ©refdjen. 
3ft t>a$ allcS, roaS (Sic bvaud)cn ! 
£)a$ tft alle*, rca$ let) braucfyc. 

9}? e ^ r. 

93raud)cn Sic ntcftt mcfyt 1 
3d) braud)c nid)t mefjr. 
££a$ btcutd)t cr ? 
(Sr braud)t cin £(cib. 
Soabm (Sic, was (Sic braud)cn ? 
3d) babe, was id) braud)C. 
(5r f)at, roaS et braucbt. 
Sic fyaben, wa§ fie btaud)cn. 



To be obliged (shall, ought). (SoUcrt, past. part. g'efollt. 



What am I to do 1 
You must work. 
Am I to go thither ] 
You may go thither. 



2£a$ fett id) tbmn ? 
(Sic fctlcn arbcttcn. 
(Sell id) r)tngcr)cn ? 
<Ste Conncrt fyincjcljcn. 



EXERCISES. 117. 



Were ((Sine — geroefen) you yesterday at the physician's 1 — I was 
at his house (bet tbm). — What does he say ] — He says that he can- 
not come. — Why does he not send his son] — His son does not ga 
out (ocbt md)t ciuS, Lesson XXXIV. Obs. C). — W^hy does he not 
go out (qcbr cr nicbt cms) 1 — Because he is ill. — Hast thou had my 
purse ? — I tell you that I have not had it. — Hast thou seen it"? — I 
have seen it. — Where is it ] — It lies upon the chair. — Have you 
had my knife]— -I tell you that I have had it. — Where have you 
placed it 1 — I have placed it upon the table. — Will you look for it ] — 
I have already looked for it. — Have you found it ] — I have not found 
it. — Have you sought (for) my gloves ] — I have sought (for) them, 
but I have not found them. — Has your servant my hat] — He has 
had it, but he has it no longer. — Has he brushed it ] — He has 
brushed it. — Are my books upon your table ] — They are (lie) upon 
it. — Have you any wine ] — I have but little, but I will give you 
what I have. — Will you give me some water ] — I will give you 
some. — Have you much wine] — I have much. — Will you give me 
some ] — I will give you some. — How much do I owe you ] — You 
owe me nothing. — You are too kind (gutto,). — Must I go for some 
wine ] — You must go for some. — Shall I go to the ball ] — You 
must go thither. — When must I go thither] — You must go thither 
this evening. — Must I go for the carpenter ] — You must go for him. 



140 

« — Is it necessary to go to the market 1 — It is necessary to go 
thither. — What must one do in order to learn Russian ? — One must 
study much. — Must one study much to learn German ] — One must 
study much. — What shall I do] — You must buy a good book.— 
What is he to do'? — He must sit still. — What are we to do ] — You 
must work. — Must you work much, in order to learn the Arabic? — 
I must work much to learn it. — Does your brother not work 1 — He 
does not want to work. — Has he wherewithal to live 1 — He has. — 
Why must I go to the market ? — You must go thither to buy some 
beef. — Why must I work 1 — You must work, in order to get ((jabcn) 
a competency. 

118. 

What do you want, Sir 1 — I want some cloth. — How much is 
that hat worth ] — It is worth three crowns. — Do you want any 
stockings ? — I want some. — How much are those stockings worth ] 
— They are worth twelve kreuzers. — Is that all you want ] — That 
is all. — Do you not want shoes 1 — I do not want any. — Dost thou 
want much money 1 — I want much. — How much must thou have] 
— I must have six crowns. — How much does your brother want 1 
— He wants but six groshes. — Does he not want more ? — He does 
not want more. — Does your cousin want more ] — He does not want 
so much as I. — What do you want ] — I want money and boots. — 
Have you now what you want? — I have what I want. — Has 
your brother what he wants ] — He has what he wants. 



FIFTY.SECOND LESSON.— Zmci unb ftttttyflste 
faction. 

To pay— paid. 23 e % a r) I c n — b z ; n h I t. (See 
Obs. A. Lesson XLV.) 

To pay a man for a horse. Qftnem Laurie ctn g>fcrb H^Un. 

To pay the tailor for the coat. £)em ©cbneifcet ton STorf btyihUn. 

Do you pay the shoemaker for 2$c$ab(en @ic t>em <Sd)iif)uiad)Ct tie 

the shoes 1 ©dbttfre;? 

I pay him for them. Jscb be#if)lc ft« tbm. 

Does he pay you for the knives'? SBqaMt cr 3btrcn fur t)tc goffer? 

He pays me for them. (£t be$aj(jlt fie mtr. 

Obs. A. These examples show that the verb be$at)* 
ten governs the dative of the person, and the accusa- 
tive of the thing. It may also be used with the pre- 
position fur, /or, as in English. Ex. I pay him for 
the boots, id) bejafyle ibm fur tie ©ttefeL But taken 
figuratively, in the signification of bejlrafen, to punish, 



To demand — demanded 
To ask — asked. 



141 

it is sometimes construed with the accusative of the 
person, as in the following expressions : Xoaxt\ id) tviU 
2Mrf) tejablen, wait, I shall pay (punish) you for it ; ben 
babe id) (d)6n be$ctl)lt, I have paid (punished) this man 
well. 

Have you paid the shoemaker Jpabcn ©"te from ©cbufymadjet ^e 

for the boots ? ©ttefel Inhabit ? 

I have paid him for them. 3cb babe fie tbm be$af)lf. 

I pay what I owe. 3d) Oqahlc, rc>a$ icb [cbutbkj bin. 

Have you paid for your book'? Spabtn ©te'Sbt 9$ud) be^abtt? 

I have paid for it. 3d) babe e$ be^abtr. 

I have not yet paid for it. 3d) fyabe C6 nod) ntcbt bqabl't. 

fSSertangen — t) c r I a n 9 1. 
To beg of— begged of. 2t n f p r c d) e n * — a n cj e f p r d) e tn 

To pray — prayed* "£ 9U 1 1 > n * fl h e 1 1 ti 

To request — requested. $ •* 

To ask any one for money. 9? en Semonbcm (Mb scrfangem 

To beg money of some one. Scmanben urn (Mb anfprexfyeh*. 

To request money of any one. Setnanben um (Mb bitten*. 

What do yoa ask me for] 2£a$ ttcrtorigen (Sic t>en nur ? 

I ask you for nothing. 3d) Wtfattge ntd)t$ bun 3bnen. 

I beg some money of you. 3d) fpveebe @le urn (Mb an. 
He has begged some money of (St bat mid) um (Mb anejefpredjen. 
me. 

jPor. it in (a preposition governing the 

accusative). 

Do you beg some money of him 1 ©precften <Ste tbn um (Mb an ? 
I beg some of him. 3d) erbttte mir nxfrfjeS t>en tbm. 

To solicit any one to do a thing. (Stspos sen 3cmant>cnrcrbittcn** 

For it. Daru m. 

To ask him for it 5" Sf)n Umm fl «fP rc * c «** 

1 o ask mm tor it. £ ^ wn . ^ Kr(cmgcn# 

rr« u i>- r 4.1, C Sbn batum anfprcd)en*. 

To ask him for them. J ^ Mn ^ ^n^m. 

t i r -x C 3cb fprecbe @tc barum an. 

I ask you for it. £ ^ g^ ^ ^ g^ 

Do you ask me for anything 1 SScrfangen ©tc etn?a£ Den mtt ? 

1 I ask you for the hat. 3d) lutte <Ste um ben .put. 

Do you ask me for the hat 1 SBtttcn <Sic midj um ben £ut ? 

I ask you for it. 3d) bttte @tc barum. 

To s;?ea& 0/ some one. $ n 3 c m a n b c m f p t e d) c n *♦ 

Does one speak of that man ] €>pricbt man t>on bicfem SJianne 1 
One speaks of him. 5flan fpridjt son tf)m. 



142 



One does not speak of him. 
Do they speak of my book ] 
They speak much of it. 
What do you say to it] 
I say he is right. 



Sftan fpttcljt nidjt t>on tljm. 
@prtd)t man turn metnem 33ucf)C ? 
sfilan fprtd)t mcl batwm 
£Ba$ fa$en 6ie ba$u (f)iet$u) ? 
Set) fage, tap et &ed)t fyat. 



Content, satisfied. Suftteben. 

iVew. 9? e u. 

To be content with any one. SOJit Scmanbcm gufrieben fctn** 
Are you content with this man 1 ©tnb <Ste mit btcfem 93?anne $ufrie* 

ben? 
I am content with him. 3d) bin mit tfym gufricben. 

Obs. B. Of I) t e r, here, and b a, JAere, compounc 
adverbs are formed by means of certain prepositions 
governing the dative or accusative. In these adverbs 
fyter and ia stand instead of the three genders singular 
and plural, dative and accusative of the demonstra- 
tive pronoun : btefer, btefe, biefe£ (ber, tie, ba#), which is 
never used with a preposition. 

Are you content with your new (Stnb ©ie mit Sfjtcm ncucn JUetbe 

coat 1 $uftteben ? 

I am contented with it. 3d) bin bamit $ufricben. 

I am discontented with it. 3d) bin un^uftteben bamit. 

Discontented. Un^ufrteben. 

Of what do they speak ? 2Bos?en fprid)t man ? 

They speak of peace, of war, of 9Jfrm fpttcfyt t)cn bem $rieben, t>on 

your book. bem &rtea,e, t>on Sfjrcm 93uc^e. 

Do they speak of peace ] (Sprtcfyt man t)on bem Jtteben ? 

They do speak of it. 9#an fpttcfyt bat>om 

Obs. C. The adverb IDO, where, like fyter and ba 
(See O&s. above), forms compound adverbs with certain 
prepositions governing the dative or accusative. In 
these tt>o takes the place of the. dative and accusative 
of the pronoun interrogative toelcfyer, toefcfye, tt>eld)e£, or 

SBemtt ffnb <Ste $ufrteben ? 

3* bin mit metnem &ud)e aufrtes 

ben. 
SDtft mem ftnb ©te $uftteben ? 
3* bin mit metnem Center $ufw* 

bem 

©tubit en — frubttt. (See 
Obs. A. Lesson XLV.) 



With what are you content ? 
I am content with my book. 

With whom are you satisfied 1 
I am satisfied with my master. 

To study — studied. 



143 

To correct-corrected. \%\\\\ $™^Utxl\ ! ft 

To question,— interrogate, graven (governs the ace). 

The uncle, ter £)fyetm (is not softened in the 

plural) ; 
the gentleman, the lord, tet £>ert ; 

the master, the tutor, the pre- > ^ g c f )rcr • 
ceptor, the professor, J ' 

the scholar, ter <Sd)ii(et ; 

the pupil, tet Sb'gttng ; 

the fee, wages, salary, tec 2ci)n (has no plur.) ; 

tne lesson, tie Section (a feminine noun, 

taking en in the plur,) ; 
the exercise, tte tfufgabe (a feminine noun, 

taking n in the plur.) ; 
To receive a present from some S3 on Semantem cm ©e|cf)cn£ fcfem* 
one. men*. 

exercises. 119. 

Have we what we want ] — We have not what we want. — What 
do we want ] — We want a fine house, a large garden, a beautiful 
carriage, pretty horses, several servants, and much money. — Is 
that all we want ] — That is all we want. — What must I do ] — You 
must write a letter. — To whom (Lesson XXX.) must I write \ — 
You must write to your friend.— Shall I go to the market 1 — You 
may go there. — Will you tell your father that I am waiting for him 
here ? — I will tell him so (Obs. Lesson XLIIL). — What will you 
tell your father ] — I will tell him that you are waiting for him here. 
—What wilt thou say to my servant ? — I will say to him that you 
have finished your letter. — Have you paid (for) your table 1 — I have 
paid (for) it. — Has your uncle paid for the book/? — He has paid 
for it. — Have I paid the tailor for the clothes '] — You have paid 
him for them. — Hast thou paid the merchant for the horse 1 — I have 
not yet paid him for it. — Have we paid for our gloves ] — We have 
paid for them. — Has your cousin already paid for his boots ] — He 
has not yet paid for them.-— Does my brother pay you what he 
owes you ] — He does pay it me. — Do you pay what you owe 1 — I 
do pay what I owe. — Have you paid (with the dative) the baker 1 
—I have paid him. — Has your uncle paid the butcher for the meat 1 
—He has paid him for it. — Have you paid your servant his wages ] 
— I have paid them to him. — Has your master paid you your wages 7 
— He has paid them to me. — When did he pay them to you 1 — He 
paid (bat — bc$a rjlt) them to me the day before yesterday. — What do 
you ask this man for ] — I ask him for my book. — What does this 
boy beg of me ? — He begs of you some money. — Do you ask me 
for anything ] — I ask you for a crown. — Do you ask me for the 
bread 1 — I ask you for it. — Do the poor beg money of you 1 — They 
beg some of me. — Which man do you ask for money ] — I ask him 
for some whom you ask for some. — Which merchants do you ask 



144 

for gloves ] — I ask those who live in William-Street (Lesson 
XL VIII.) for some. — Which joiner do you ask for chairs ] — I ask 
that one, whom you know,, for some. — What do you ask the baker 
for 1 — I ask him for some bread. — Do you ask the butchers for some 
meat ] — I do ask them for some. — Dost thou ask me for the stick ? 
— I do ask thee for it. — Does he ask thee for the book? — He does 
ask me for it. — What have you asked the Englishman for ] — I have 
asked him for my leather trunk. — Has he given it to you 1 — He has 
given it to me. 

120. 

Whom have you asked for some sugar ? — I have asked the mer- 
chant for some. — Of whom have the poor begged some money 1 — 
They have begged some of the noblemen. — Of which noblemen 
have they begged some 1— They have begged some of those whom 
you know. — Whom do you pay for the meat 1 — 1 pay the butchers 
for it. — Whom does your brother pay for his boots 1 — He pays the 
shoemakers for them. — Whom have we paid for the bread ] — We 
have paid our bakers for it. — Of whom have they (man) spoken 1 — 
They have spoken of your friend. — Have they not spoken of the 
physicians 1 — They have not spoken of them. — Do they not speak 
of the man of whom (oen iuclcf)eni) we have spoken? — They do speak 
of him. — Have they spoken of the noblemen 1 — They have spoken 
of them. — Have they spoken of those of whom we speak 1 — They 
have not spoken of those of whom we speak, but they have spoken 
of others. — Have they spoken of our children or of those of our 
neighbours 1 — They have neither spoken of ours nor of those of 
our neighbours. — Which children have been spoken of ] — Those 
of our preceptor have been spoken of. — Do they speak of my book ] 
— They do speak of it. — Of what do you speak 1 — We speak of 
war. — Do you not speak of peace ] — We do not speak of it. — Are 
you content with your pupils 1 — I am content with them. — How 
does my brother study 1 — He studies well. — How many lessons 
have you studied ? — I have already studied fifty-four. — Is your 
master satisfied with his scholar ] — He his satisfied with him. — 
Has your master received a present ? — He has received several.— 
From whom has he received presents 1 — He has received some from 
his pupils.— Has he received any from your father 1 — He has re- 
ceived some (both) from mine and from that of my friend. — Ts he 
satisfied with the presents which he has received ] — He is satisfied 
with them. — How many exercises hast thou already done 1 — I have 
already done twenty-one. — Is thy master satisfied with thee ] — He 
says that he is satisfied with me. — And what dost thou say ? — I say 
that I am satisfied with him. — How old art thou ] — I am not quite 
ten years old. — Dost thou already learn German ? — I do already 
learn it. — Does thy brother know German 1 — He does not know it. 
— Why does he not know it 1 — Because he has not learnt it. — Why 
has he not learnt it ] — Because he has not had time. — Is your father 
at borne 1 — No, he has departed, but my brother is at home. — Where 



145 



is your father gone to 7 — He is gone to England. — Have you some- 
times gone thither 1 — I have never gone thither. — Do you intend 
going to Germany this summer! — I do intend going thither. — Have 
you the intention of staying there long ] — I have the intention of 
staying there during the summer. — How long does your bi other 
remain at home ? — Till twelve o'clock. — -Have you had your gloves 
dyed. — I have had them dyed. — What have you had them dyed] — 
I have had them dyed brown. — Will you tell your father that I 
have been here 1 — I will tell him so. — Will you not wait until he 
comes back again 1 — I cannot wait. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. - mxd nnb fiinfygsi* 
Section. 



To eat — eaten* 
Thou eatest — he eats. 

To dine {eat dinner) — dined* 

At what o'clock do you dine 1 
I dine at five o'clock. 

I have dined. 

I have dined earlier than you. 

II we you already breakfasted 1 £abcn ^ fcbon gcfrufyflucft ? 



(Sffcn* — gegeffcn. 

£>u 1^3— eriffet ortjlt. 
C 3u OJHttag cffcn — $u SKittag gcgejs 
\ fen. 

( ^pctfen — gefpetfet or gefpetf't. 
' Mm ttuemct Ubr fpetfen <Sic 1 

Mm nxlcbc 3at cffcn ©te $u $Jllt* 
tog? 

3d) fpctfe urn fdnf (urn funf Ufjt). 

Sch babe $u 9)?tttag gegeffcn. 
Set) ()abc fnibcr gefpeift a(S (Sic* 



The dinner. 
The breakfast. 

To eat supper {to sup). 



The supper. 

I wish to eat supper. 

I have supped late. 
After, 

After you. 
After me. 
After him. 
After my 1 rother. 
I have breakfasted after him. 
7 



£>ci$ gtftttogeficn. 
£)ci£ $ruf)ft&f. 

3u 2f 6 c n D effen*, 2£6ettb* 
btot) cffcn*. 

£)a$ 2fbcnbcffcn, bat tfbcnbbrob. 

3d) voWl 2(bent>breb cffcn. 
( 3d) fyabc fpat gu 2lbcnb gegeffcn. 
< 3d) r)aOc fpat 2C0cnb0tob gegeffcn. 

$1 a cf) (a preposition governing 
the dative). 

9toc!) 3f)nen. 

9lad) mir. 

£?acb ibm. 

§tach metnem <8rubcr. 

3d) fyabt nad) tr;m gefruljftucft. 



146 



To hold—held. 

Thou holdest — he holds. 
Will you hold my stick 1 

To try — tried. 
To taste — tasted. 

Will you try to do that 1 

I have tried to do it. 

You must try to do it better. 

Have you tasted that wine \ 

I have tasted it. 

Are you looking for any one 1 
Whom are you looking for 1 
I am lookifrgr for a brother 
mine. 



An uncle of mine. 
A neighbour of yours. 
A relation of mine. 



fatten* — gefjatten. 

3)u baltft — er f)aU 

Swollen (Sic metnen (Stocf fatten ? 

C5)robtren — ptobttt. 
£ & e t f u d) c n — 1> e t f u d) t. 

£$ ct fud)en — »etfud)t. 

Swollen @te soetfucfyen, fcaS $u tfyun 1 

3d) fyaU DCtfucbt, e$ $u tfjun. 

@te muffen oerfudjen, eg beffer $u mas 

d)en. 
6afcen ©ie tuefen SDSctn gefojtct (t>cra 

fu*t) ? 
3d) fyabe tfjn gefojtct (wfucfyt). 

@ud)en (Sic Semanfoen ? 
2Ben fud)en @ic ? 
of f 3d) fucfyc einen mctner 25rut>er. 



Ace. Sing. Gen. PZ&r. 

t (Smen memer SDfyeime, 
t ©urn 3f)rer SRacfybant* 
t @men memer a3ertt>anbtem 



O&s. Adjectives taken substantively are declined like 
other adjectives. Ex. ber 23ertt>attbte, the relation; gen. 
beg SSernxuibtett, of the relation, &c. ; ber SSebtente, the 
servant ; gen. beg 93ebientett, of the servant, &c. ; em 23er* 
ttXtttbter, a relation ; em SSebtettter, a servant, &c. 



The parents (father and mother). 
He tries to see an uncle of his. 

A cousin of his. 
A friend of ours. 
A neighbour of theirs. 
He tries to see you. 
Does he try to see me ? 

To inquire after some one. 

After whom do you inquire ] 
I inquire after a friend of mine. 

The acquaintance. 
Whom do you look for? 



SDte 2Cc(tern ((Sttern). 

@r fudfjt eincn fetner Dfyetme $u fe« 

rjen. 
f (Stnen fctner SSettetn. 
t (Stnen unferet gteunbe. 
f (Sin en ifirct S£ad)batn. 
kv fud)t @te $u fefyen. 
@ud)t et micr) ^u ferjen ? 

9^ac^ Semanbem ftagen. 

Stacft wem ftagen @ic ? 

3d) ftage nacr> eincm mcincr gteiut* 

fce. 
©er SBefcmnte. 
<&en fucfyen ©te ? 



14* 

I am looking for an acquaintance 3d) fucfje etttcn metncr. SSefcmntcn. 

of mine. 
I ask him for a piece of bread. 3>cf) tutte tf)n um cm <BtM S3rct>. 

Rule 1. The preposition of which in English stands 
between two substantives, when the second determines 
the substance of the first, is never expressed in Ger- 
man. Ex. 



©in ^egen papier* 
£>tet SBe^en 5>apter. 



A piece of bread. f (5tn (Stucf 9Brot. 

A glass of water. f ©in @(a* Gaffer, 
A sheet of paper. 
Three sheets of paper. 
The piece, t ia$ (Stucf ; 

the sheet, tet ^Becjen ; 

the small piece (little bit), tas @tiicfd)cn ; 

the little book, tag 2$uct)(etru 

Rule 2. All diminutives terminating in cfyett and letn 
are neuter, and those terminating in ling are mascu- 
line. To form diminutives from German substantives, 
the syllable cf)en or I e i xt is added, and the radical 
vowels, a, 0, u, are softened into a, 6, ii. Ex. 

The small house, tciS &au£d)en ; 

the small picture, ta$ 5ftltd)cn ; 

the little heart, tctS £er$d)en ; 

the little child, fcaS £tnt(etn ; 

the little boy, tag .StnaOlcin, JtnaOcfyen ; 

the suckling (baby), tcr (Sauojtna,; 

the favourite, darling, tcr CteMtrto, ; 

the apprentice, ter Settling. 

EXERCISES. 121. 

Have you already dined ]— Not yet. — At what o'clock do you dine 1 
— I dine at six o'clock. — At whose house (SBct roem, Lesson XXVI.) 
do you dine '? — I dine at the house of a friend of mine. — With whom 
(bet rocm) did you dine yesterday ] — I dined (babe — qefpeipt with a re- 
lation of mine. — What have you eaten 1 — We have eaten good bread, 
beef, apples, and cakes. — What have you drunk ? — We have drunk 
good wine, good beer, and good cider. — Where does your uncle dine 
to-day 1 — He dines with (bet) us. — At what o'clock does your father 
eat supper ] — He eats supper at nine o'clock. — Do you eat supper ear- 
ier than he] — T eat supper later than he. — At what o'clock do you 
breakfast 1 — I breakfast at ten o'clock. — At what o'clock did you 
eat supper yesterday * — We ate (fjaben — gegeffen) supper late. — 
What did you eat 1 — We ate only a little meat and a small piece of 
bread. — When did your brother sup ? — He supped after my father 



148 

—Where are you going to? — I am going to a relation of mine, in 
order to breakfast with him. — Do you dine early ] — We dine late. 
— Art thou willing to hold my gloves ] — I am willing to hold them. 
—Is he willing to hold my cane ] — He is willing to hold it. — Who 
has held your hat? — My servant has held it. — Will you try to 
speak. — I will try. — Has your little brother ever tried to do exercises] 
— He has tried. — Have you ever tried to make a hat? — I have never 
tried to make one. — Have we tasted that beer ? — We have not 
tasted it yet. — Which wine do you wish to taste ] — I wish to taste 
that which you have tasted. — Have the Poles tasted that brandy ] 
— They have tasted \t. — Have they drunk much of it (reason) ]— 
They have not drunk much of it. — Will you taste this tobacco ] — 
I have tasted it already. — How do you find it] — I find it good. — 
Why do you not taste that cider] — Because I am not thirsty. — 
Why does your friend not taste this meat ] — Because he is not 
hungry. 

122. 

Whom are you looking for ] — I am looking for the man who has 
sold a horse to mc, — Is your relation looking fur any one ] — He is 
looking for an acquaintance of his. — Are we looking for any one ] 
— We are looking for a neighbour of ours. — Whom dost thou look 
for] — I look for a friend of ours. — Are you looking for a servant of 
mine ] — No, I am looking for one of mine. — Have you tried to 
speak to your uncle ] — I have tried to speak to him. — Have you 
tried to see my father ] — I have tried to see him. — Have you been 
able (Less. XLVII1.) to see him ] — I have not been able to see him. 
— After whom do you inquire ] — I inquire after your father. — After 
whom dost thou inquire ] — I inquire after the tailor. — Does this 
man inquire after any one] — He inquires after you. — Do they in- 
quire after you] — They do inquire after me] — Do they inquire 
after me ] — They do not inquire after you, but after a friend of 
yours. — Do you inquire after the physician] — I do inquire after 
him. — What do you ask me for] — I ask you for some meat. — 
What does your little brother ask me for ] — He asks you for some 
wine and some water. — Do you ask me for a sheet of paper ] — I 
do ask you for one. — How many sheets of paper does your friend 
ask for] — He asks for two. — Dost thou ask me for the little book 1 
— I do ask you for it. — What has your cousin asked for ] — He has 
asked for a few apples and a small piece of bread. — Has he not 
breakfasted yet ] — He has breakfasted, but he is still hungry. — 
What does your uncle ask for ] — He asks for a glass of wine.— 
What does the Pole ask for ] — He asks for a small glass of brandy. 
— Has he not already drunk ] — He has already drunk, but he is 
still thirsty. 



149 

FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON.-bier ttttb fflntyjste 
Cation. 

I see the man who has my mo- 3d) febe ben sjEcirm,. tt)c(cl)cr mctil 

riey. (SJelb bat. 

I see the child who plays. 3$ fefye ba$ .fttnb, wekbc$ fpictt. 

1 perceive him who is coming". Scb bemerfe ben, ix>c(ct)cr fcmmt 
I see him who owes me money. 3d) fche ben, rotfdjec mir ©elb fd)u(s 

bicj tft. 
Do yoa perceive the soldiers l*™**™ «£ J* «*Jrtftfc aelcfte 

who are going into the store- ^ _ "^^^^TJ ™f *, 
, , i ° ' 95cm«rfen <Stc etc (Selbaten, rucict>e 

v in pc5 SOtago^tn (btnctn) ejeben 7 

I do perceive those who are go- C Jsd) bemcrfe bte, nxtcbe bafytn geben. 

ing into it. £ 3d) bemetie t>ie / wclc^e fjincin ger)ctn 

J./50. 2( u d). 

To perceive — perceived. S3 c m c r f e n — demerit. 

Have you perceived any one 1 £aben ©tc S^nanben bemcrft ? 
I have perceived no one. Set) babe 9?tcmanben bemerft. 

The soldier, bcr @e(bar. a 

To cm to the store-house S ^ flcb bcm ^ a W n 9^ cn *- 

lo go to the store-house. £ ^ ^ sDfo gajin (()indn) g^ cn *. 

Obs. A. Direction towards a place or towards a 
country is expressed by the preposition ttarf) with the 
dative. 

Willingly. (B e r n. 

To like. f ©crn ftaben*. 

To like to see. f ®crn feben*. 

To like to study. f ©ern fhibtrcn. 

To like wine. . } ©orn 3£ctn trtnfen*. 

He likes a large hat. f 6*r hat cptri etnen cjrepen £>ur? 
Do you like to see my brother 1 f (Schcn fete metnen SBrubet gem 1 

I do like to see him. j 3* f c ^ 1 ' ^ n 9 crn * 

I like to do it. f 3cb tbue es qcrn. 

Do you like water? \ Srinfen &i cjern 2£afTer? 

No, 1 like wine. \ Sftctn, td) trtnfe gcrn SBetn. 

Fowl, 4Mtbn ; 

the fish, ber £ifcb ; 

fish, S?tfcbi' (plur.) ; 

the pike, bcr &cdit ; 

pike, £ed)te (plur.). 

* Substantives derived from foreign languages and terminating in: ftltt 
arcb, at, et, ent, tft, it, ofl, add en to the genitive singular and to all the other 
cases singular and plural. 



150 

To like something. t @' in Jreunb t>on etwa$ fetn.* 

I like fish. f gtVbin etn grcunt) t»cn gifc&en. 

He likes fowl. f CEt tjh cjcrn jjbu'bn. 

I do not like fish. f 3d) bin tcm grcunt) t>on gifcbem 

Zfy heart. # u S it> e n b t g. 

To Ze#rrc % torZ. 2£u6tucnbtg (crncn. 

Do your scholars like to learn Semen 3^c (Scaler Cjern au$roens 

by heart ? big ? 

They do not like learning by (Sic (crncn md)t cjcrn au^nxnttcj. 

heart. 

Have you learnt your exercises £n&en ©te 3fyrc 2(uffja()cn au6«>cn? 

by heart? bta, odernt ? 

We have learnt them. SQBtr V'b.n ^ fl^tcrnt. 

Once a day. (Sin mat t>e« &aq& 

Thrice or three times a month. Sreimal bc$ 9)Z&mit& 

Obs. B. The genitive is used in reply to the ques- 
tions : tt>attn ? when ? me eft ? how often ? in speak- 
ing of something that takes place habitually and at a 
determinate period. 

Six times a year. ^edb^maf be$ 3afj>rc& 

How many times a day does he Ss&e trielmal (rote eft) ipt et t>C6 

eat ? $aqs ? 

tie eats three times a day. (£t ifft fcrctinol be$ Saqs. 

Do you eat as often as he 1 (Sffen fete fc eft n>te cr ? 

When do you go out ? S&ann ejefyen fete aug ? 

We go out early in the morning. 2£tt get) en t>e$ 932orejcn$ friif) au$» 

Jf. £Senn (See Rule of Syntax, 

Lesson XLVIL). 
I intend paying you if I receive 3d) bin gefonnen, fete $u (n^afjkn, 

my money. roenn tcb mcin ©clt> tufemme. 

Do^rou intend to buy wood 1 ©efcenfen fete £>e($ $n fa it fen 1 
I do intend to buy some, if they 3d) gct>cnfe roctebcS $u faufen, nxnn 
pay me what they owe me. man nut bejafytt, roaS man nut 

fd)u(btcj tft. 

How is the weather] "> c«w a\*. <m>**^ ;o- *a i 

wu * i • j c A u • •** r s I£a6 fur abetter t u c$ s 
What kind of weather is it ] 3 

It is fine weather at present. (5$ tft jcgt fd)b'ne$ ^Better, 

How was the weather yester-") 

wttWnd of weather was it [*»«« ^ «*"« »« c * **«»* 
yesterday ? J 

Obs. C. SGBar, was, is the imperfect of the auxilia 
ry verb fetn*, to be; we shall speak of it hereafter 
(See Lesson LVII.) 



151 



Was it tine weather yesterday ! 
It was bad weather yesterday. 
It was fine weather this morning. 

Is it warm ? 
It is warm. 

Very. 
It is very warm. 
It is cold. 
It is very cold. 
It is neither cold nor warm. * 

Dark, obscure, 
dusky, gloomy, 
clear, light, 

It is gloomy in your shop. 

Is it gloomy in his room 1 

It is gloomy there* 

The shop, 

moist, humid, damp, 

dry, 
Is the weather damp 1 
The weather is not damp. 
It is dry weather. 
The weather is too dry. 
It is moonlight (moonshine). 
We have too much sun. 
We have no rain. 

The moonlight, moonshine, 

the rain, 

the sun, 
Of what do you speak 1 
We speak of the weather. 

The weather, 



&Bar ce geffefti fcf)6neg ^Better ! 
(§g war gcftern fcfylecfyteS ^Better. 
(£g war btefen 9Jicrgen fcfyoneg 2Bet* 
ter. 

3ft eg warm 1 
(S*g ift warm. 

(5g tft fefyr warm. 

(§g tft fait. 

@S tft febr fa(t. 

@s ift weber fait nod) warm* 

ftnftcc ; 
bunfel ; 
f)ctt. 

G$ tft bunfel in Sljtem Saben, 
S3 c^ bunfel in fetnem Simmer 1 
(£g ift bunfel bartn. (See Obs. A 
and C. Lesson XXIX.) 

ber £aben ; 
feu*t ; 
trccfen* 

3ft eg feud)tcg ^Better ? 
^)ag ^Better tft ntd&t feud)t 
(Sg tft trccfeneg better. 
®a$ ^Better ift gu trccfen. 
©g ift -$ftonbfd)Ctn. 
5Btr fyafcen $u met (Sonne. 
&Btr fjaben Ceinen 3Secjen. 

ber Sfflonbfcfyetn ; 

ber SKegcn ; 

bie (Sonne (a feminine noun). 

2Bot>on fprecfyen ©te 1 

2Btr fprccfyen com (t>on bem) SOSettet^ 

bag ^Better* 



EXERCISES. 123. 

Do you perceive the man who is coming 1 — I do not perceive 
him. — Do you perceive the soldier's child ? — I perceive it. — What 
do you perceive 1 — I perceive a great mountain and a small house. 
— Do you not perceive the wood 1 — I perceive it also. — Dost thou 
perceive the soldiers who are going to the market 1 — I do perceive 
them. — Do you perceive the men who are going into the garden 1 — 
I do not perceive those who are going into the garden, but those 
who are going to the market. — Do you see the man to whom I 
have lent money 1 — I do not see the one to whom you have lent, 
but the one who has lent you some. — Dost thou see the children 
who are studying ] — I do not see those who are studying, but those 



152 

who are playing 1 . — Do you perceive anything * — I perceive nothing, 
— Have you perceived the house of my parents ? — I have perceived 
it. — Do you like a large hat ? — 4 do not like a large hat, but a 
large umbrella.— What do you like to do ?— I like to write. — Do 
you like to see those little boys ?•— I do like to see them. — Do you 
like beer ? — I like it.- — Does your brother like cider ?— He does not 
like it.-— What do the soldiers like ? — They like wine and water. — 
Dost thou like wine or water? — i like both (K'tTcf), — Do these 
children like to study ? — They like to study and to play. — Do you 
like to read and to write 1 — I like to read and to write. — How many 
times do you eat a day ? — Four times. — How often do your children 
drink a day ? — They drink several times a day. — Do you drink as 
often as they ? — I drink oftener — Do you often go to the theatre 1 
— I go thither sometimes. — How often do you go thither (in) a 
month ? — I go thither but once a month. — How many times a year 
does your cousin go to the ball ? — He goes thither twice a year. — 
Do you go thither as often as he ? — I never go thither. — Does your 
cook often go to the market 1 — He goes thither every morning. 

124. 

Do you often go to my uncle's ? — T go to him six times a year. — 
Bo you like fowl ? — I do like fowl, but I do not like fish. — What 
do you like ? — I like a piece of bread and a glass of wine. — What 
fish does your brother like'? — He likes pike. — Do you learn by 
heart] — -I do not like learning by heart. — Do your pupils like to 
learn by heart? — They like to study, but they do not like learning 
by heart. — How many exercises do they do a day ? — They only 
do two, but they do them well. — Do you like coffee or tea? — I like 
both. — Do you read the letter which I have written to you (Rule of 
Syntax, Lesson XL VII.) 1 — I do read it. — Do you understand it ? — 
I do understand it. — Do you understand the man who speaks to you 1 
— I do not understand him 1 — W T hy do you not understand him ? — I 
do not understand him because he speaks too badly. — Does this man 
know German 1 — He does know it, but I do not know it. — Why do 
you not learn it? — 1 have no time to learn it. — Have you received 
a letter 1—1 have received one. — Will you answer it. — I am going 
to (,3cb miU) answer it. — When did you receive it ? — I received it at 
ten o'clock in the morning. — Are you satisfied with it ? — I am not 
dissatisfied with it. — What does your friend write to you ?— He 
writes tome that he is ill (Rule of Syntax, Lesson XLV1I.). — Does 
he ask you for anything ? — He asks me for money. — Why does he 
ask you for money ? — Because he wants some. — W T hat do you ask 
me for? — I ask you for the money which you owe me. — Will you 
wait a little ? — I cannot w T ait. — Why can you not wait ? — I cannot 
wait because I intend to depart to-day. — At what o'clock do ynu in- 
tend to set out?— -I intend setting out at five o'clock in the evening. 
—Do you go to Germany ? — I do go thither. — Are you not going to 
Holland ? — I am not going thither. — How far has your brother gone ? 
•—He has gone as far as London, 



153 



125. 



Do you intend going to the theatre this evening 1 — I do intend 
going thither, if you go. — Has your father the intention to buy 
that horse ] — He has the intention to buy it, if he receives his money. 
— Has your cousin the intention to go to England. — He has the 
intention to go thither, if they pay him what they owe him. — Do 
you intend going to the ball ] — I do intend going thither, if my friend 
goes ? — Does your brother intend to study German 1 — He does in- 
tend to study it, if he finds a good master. — How is the weather to- 
days—It is very fine weather. — Was it fine weather yesterday ? — 
It was bad weather yesterday. — How was the weather this morning? 
— It was bad weather, but now it is (tft es) fine weather. — Is it warm ] 
— It is very warm. — Is it not cold ] — It is not cold. — Is it warm or 
cold ] — It is neither warm nor cold. — Did you go to the country 
(Lesson XXX.) the day before yesterday 1 — I did not go thither. 
— Why did you not go thither ? — I did not go thither, because it 
was bad weather. — Do you intend going into the country to-morrow 1 
— I do intend going thither, if the weather is fine. 

126. 

Is it light in your room 1 — It is not light in it. — Do you wish to 
work in mine 1 — I do wish to work in it. — Is it light there ] — It is 
very light there. — Can you work in your small room (Rule 2, Lesson 
LIII.)] — I cannot work there. — "Why can you not work there 1 — 
I cannot work there, because it is too dark. — Where is it too dark % 
— In my small room. — Is it light in that hole ] — It is dark there. — Is 
it dry in the street (Lesson XL VIII.) 1 — It is damp there. — Is the 
weather damp ] — The weather is not damp. — Is the weather dry 1 — 
It is too dry. — Is it moonlight ] — It is not (tetn) moonlight, it is 
very damp. — Why is the weather dry 1 — Because w T e have too much 
sun and no rain. — When do you go into the country 1 — I intend go- 
ing thither to-morrow, if the weather is fine, and if we have no 
rain.— Of what does your uncle speak 1— He speaks of the fine 
weather. — Do you speak of the rain 1 — We do speak of it. — Of 
what do those men speak ] — They speak of fair and bad weather. 
— Do they not speak of the wind 1 — They do also speak of it (aucf) 
fccwen). — Dost thou speak of my uncle 1 — I do not speak of him. — 
Of whom dost thou speak ] — I speak of thee and thy parents. — Do 
you inquire after any one 1 — I inquire after year uncle (Lesson 
LIII.) ; is he at home ] — No, he is at his best friend's. (See Lesson 
XXXIX and end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



7* 



154 

FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.— JTunf ttttb fttnfygst* 
Action. 

OF PASSIVE VERBS. 

In English, the past participle is joined to the verb 
to be, either to form the passive voice, or as an ad- 
jective to qualify the subject. In the first instance it 
must be translated by werbert*, and in the second by fettt** 

In German we distinguish, as in Latin : bct$ Qau^ ift 
Qebaut, domus cedificata est, from bad $)cux$ ttnrb gebcmt, 
domus cedificatur ; bte 23riefe ((lib gefcfyrteben, litterce scrip- 
tee sunt, from bte 33nefe tt>erben gefefyrieben, litterce scri- 
buntur. 

To ascertain whether a past participle stands as an 
adjective or not, one has only to change the construc- 
tion into the active voice ; if in that voice the tense 
is the same as in the passive, the participle is a pas- 
sive participle, and the auxiliary to be must be trans- 
lated by tt>erben # ; but if the tense is not the same, it 
then stands as a mere adjective, and the auxiliary to 
be must be translated by fem # * Ex. 3d) toerbe gettebt, 
I am loved, is in the same tense, when I say : er liebt 
mid), he loves me ; but ber ©ptegel tfl jerbrocfyen, the 
looking-glass is broken, is not in the same tense, 
when I say: er fyat ben ©ptegel jerbrocfyett, he has bro- 
ken the looking-glass. Here jerbrocfyett is nothing but 
an adjective, which qualifies the subject ©piegef, look 
ing-glass. 

I am loved. 3cb nx'tbc getiefct. 

Thou art guided. £>u nnrft Cjdritet. 

He is praised. (gr nurt) gdebt. 

We are heard. 25? te nxroen gehort. 

They are blamed (Ste nxrbcn getaMt. 

You are punished. \ | f)r «*** ^™| 

To praise, to blame. SeOen, tat>ctn. 

By me — by us. £$en nut — ben tm$. 

By thee— by you. &en Div — son (gucf) (3f>ncn)» 

By him — by them. $on tfjm — »on ifjnen. 

I am loved by him. 3d) ttH'tt>e son tbm gcttcbt. 

Who is punished ! SBct nutt) geftraft ] 



155 



The naughty boy is punished. 

By whom is he punished 1 

He is punished by his father. 

Which man is praised, and which 
is blamed 1 

The skilful man is praised, and 
the awkward blamed. 

Which boys are rewarded, and 
which are punished ? 

Those that are assiduous are re- 
warded, and those that are idle 
punished. 

We are loved by the captain's 
sons, you are despised by them. 

You are praised by our brothers, 
and we are despised by them. 



Good— naughty. 

Skilful, diligent — awkward. 

Assiduous — idle. 

Ignorant. 

The idler, the lazy fellow, 

To reward — rewarded. 

To esteem. 
To despise. 
To hate. 

Is your book torn % 
It is not torn. 
Are your children good ? 
They are very good. 
Is the enemy beaten 1 
He is beaten. 
The enemies are beaten. 
These children are loved, because 
they are studious and good. 



£>et unctrttge &n<u3e rotrb ^eftraft 
$on mm roitb er gcftraft ? 

(5r rcttb sen fctncm s i$atcc gcftraft, 
2Mdbct Sflann rottb gctobt, unt> mU 

cl)er rotrb gctabelt ? 
£)et gefcr/tcfte SOtann txrirb cjctobt unb 

ber ungefdjtcftc getaMt. 
SBeldje jtnabcn roerben belorjnt, unb 

roctdfte roerben beftraft ? 
©teienigcn, wc(d>e ftetjnQ ftnb, wet* 

ten betofynt, unt) bic, roelcfye tta'ge 

ftnt), bcftraft. 
SBtt roetben Don ben ©b'tjnen be$ 

£auptmann$ gctiebt ; 3ftt roerbet 

»cn tfynen t>etad)tet. 
©ic rcetben Don unfern 93riit)ern ges 

lo&t, unt) wit roetben son tfynen 

i>ctaci)tet. 

2Crtta — unatttq. (See Note f , Les- 
son XXXIX.) 
@tefd)ttft — ungefeftteft* 
gffetjng — trage (faul). 
Unrotjfenb. 
bet $au(en$er. 

SBefefjnen — 6e(or}nt (See 055. A 

Lesson XLV). 
2Cd)ten, fcl>a|cn. 
83etad)ten. 
£affem 

3ft 3()t SBucr; jemflen ? 
(SS tft nid)t gerriffen* 
(Sinb Sbre jUnbet atttg ? 
©ie ftnb fet)r atttg. 
3ft ber getnb gestagen ? 
(5t ift gefefyacjen. 
*Dte $etnbe ftnb gefd)(agen. 
*Dtcfe $tnbet rocrben geliebt, tt>ct( fte 

fteijng unb atttq ftnb. (See Note 

f, Lesson XXXIX.) 



EXERCISES. 127. 

Are you loved by your uncle 1 — I am loved by him. — Is your 
brother loved by him 1 — He is loved by him. — By whom am I 
loved ? — Thou art loved by thy parents. — Are we loved 1 — You are 
loved. — By whom are we loved ] — You are loved by your friends. 
—Are those gentlemen loved 1 — They are loved. — By whom are 
they loved 1 — They are loved by us and by their good friends.— 
By whom is the blind man led 1— He is led by me. — Where do 



156 

you lead him to ] — I lead him home. — By whom are we blamed ? — 
We are blamed by our enemies. — Why are we blamed by them ? -— 
Because they do not love us. — Are you punished by your tutor] — 
We are not punished by him, because we are good and studious. — 
Are we heard] — We are (es, Lesson XLIII.). — By whom are we 
heard] — W^e are heard by our neighbour. — Is the master heard by 
his pupils] — He is heard by them. — Whicfi children are praised ? 
—Those that are good. — Which are punished] — Those that are 
idle and naughty. — Are you praised or blamed] — We ar \ neither 
praised nor blamed. — Is our friend loved by his masters? — He is 
loved and praised by them, because he is studious and crood ; but 
his brother is despised by his, because he is naughty and idle. — Is 
he sometimes punished ?— He is (nnrD es) every morning and pvery 
evening. — Are you sometimes punished ]— I am (o>*) never; I am 
loved and rewarded by my good masters. — Are these children 
never punished ] — They are (cs) never, because they are studio-us 
and good ; but those are so (c$) very often, because they are idle 
and naughty. 

128. 

Who is praised and rewarded ] — Skilful people (?cutc) are 
praised, esteemed, and rewarded, but the ignorant are blamed and 
despised. — Who is loved and who is hated ] — He who is studious 
and good is loved, and he who is idle and naughty is hated. — ■ 
Must one be good in order to be loved ? — One must be so. — What 
must one do in order to be loved ] — One must he g-ood and assidu- 
ous. — W^hat must one do in order to be rewarded] — One must be 
skilful and study much. — Why are those children loved ] — They 
are loved, because they are good. — Are they better than we ] — They 
are not better, but more studious than you. — Is your brother as 
assiduous as mine ] — He is as assiduous as he ; but your brother 
is better than mine. — Do you know anything new ? — 1 do not 
know anything new. — What does your cousin say new ] — He says 
nothing new. — Do they not speak of war ] — They do not speak of 
it. — Of what (Obs. C. Lesson LII.) do they speak ] — They speak 
of peace. — What do they say] — They say that the eneu^ is beaten. 
— Are you understood by your pupils ] — i am understood by them. 
— Dost thou often receive presents ] — I do receive some if I am 
good. — Are you often rewarded ] — We are rewarded if we study 
well, and if we are diligent. — Has your master the intention of 
rewarding you] — He has the intention of doing so if we study 
well. — What does he intend to give you if you study well ] — He 
intends givn?^ us a book. — Has he already given you a book ]— • 
He has already given us one. 

129. 

Have you dined already] — I have dined already, but I am stiL 
hungry. — Has your little brother drunk already ] — He has drunk 
aitfeody^but he is still thirsty, — What must we do in order to be 



157 



skilful ? — You must work much. — Must we sit still in older to 
study 1 — You muot listen to what the master tells you. — Do you 
intend to eat supper to-day ] — I do intend to dine before I eat 
supper. — At what o'clock do you dine ] — I dine at four and eat 
supper at nine o'clock. — Have you seen my cousin? — I have seen 
him.— What has he said] — He has said that he does not wish to 
see you (fe ben ivtll). — Why does he not wish to see me i — He does 
not wish to see you, because he does not like you. — Why do^s he 
not like me ] — Because you are naughty. — Will you give me a 
sheet of paper ] — Why (^-e^u) do you want paper 1 — 1 want some to 
write a letter. — To whom (Lesson XXX.) do you wish to write / 
— I wish to write to the man by whom (ttcn ivdcbem) lam loved. — 
After whom do you inquire ) — 1 inquire after no one. (See end of 
Lesson XXXIV.) 



FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. — S*cl)S ttttir funfyijste 
jUciion. 



OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



These verbs having no determinate subject, are only 
conjugated in the third person singular, by means of the 
indefinite pronoun e3, it. Ex. 



To rain— 
To snow- 



■it rains, 
-it mows. 



Does it thunder 1 
'It does thunder. 
Is it foggy 1 
Does the sun shine 1 

The sun shines. 

It thunders loud. 
Foggy, 
the fog, 
hard, violent, 

To shine — shone. 
To thunder. 

The sun does not shine. 

The sun is in my eyes. 
The face, 
the thunder, 
the snow, 
the sunshine, 
the parasol, 



9? e a, n c n — c s rennet. 
© d) nc t e n — c x> f ct) n e i t. 

jDenncrf es? 

CEs ftonncrt. 

3ft c£ netelij ? 

Sft H ©enncnf&ctn ? 
[ (£s tft Senncnfcbein* 
( 93Mr haben ^onnenfd)etn. 

(5* frennert beftuj. 

nch'ftg ; 

ter gjefrel ; 

t)cfttg. 

<£ cb c t n c n * 
£) c n n e r n. 



•gefebtencn. 



iD'ic Sonne febctnt ntcbt. 

t SDic Sonne fdjetrit mir tn£ ©cficbt 

ta^ i»eft*t ; 

ter IDonner ; 

frcr Scbnee ; 

ter Scnnenfebein ; 

tec ^cnneu|~d)irui» 



158 

Does it lighten 1 Bftft e$ ? 

It do.es lighten. (5* lti|t. 

To hail. £agc(n, fd&(opcn. 

The hail, bet #cige(. 

I SB: 

It rains very hard. (£•$ rennet |ef)t ftarf. 

It lightens much. @g Ht|t fet)f. 

Does it snow T (ScrmettcS? 

It does snow much. @g fefynett fer)r* 

It hails much. (£$ t)a^ctt fefyr. 

05s. JL. There are some impersonal verbs, which re- 
late to a person : they govern the dative or accusative, 
and instead of: id) bin fymtgricj, (Lesson V.) one may 
say: eg fyungert mid), I am hungry : for the verb fyungerrt/ 
to be hungry, governs the accusative. 

To be thirsty. ©urjlcn. 

To be sleepy. <S d) t a f e r n. 

Art thou sleepy ? ©cWfifert e$ ©id) ? ' 

I am not sleepy, but hungry. @g febtafert mid) ntd)t; abet e$ f)Utt* 

gert nucfe. 
is your brother thirsty 1 Durftct e$ Sfotcn SBruoer ? 

He is thirsty. (gg turftet tfyn. 

He is not thirsty, but sleepy. (5$ burftct ifyn ntd)t ; abet e$ fd)(afett 

tfjn. 

0&5. I?. The case of the verb may be placed before 
the impersonal verb, but then the indefinite pronoun e$ 
must be suppressed. For instance, instead of : eg fytmgert 
mid), one may say : mid) fywtgert, I am hungry ; but if 
the sentence is interrogative, the indefinite pronoun eg 
must not be omitted. 

Are you sleepy 1 <Sd)(afett e$ @te? 

We are sleenv 5" ®* fd>l«fcrt un$. 

We are sleepy. £ Un$ febtfifctt. 

Are those men hungry ? £>unqctt c$ btefe 9}?a'nnet ? 

C (5$ fyuncjett 

£ (Sic bunqert 
Who is thirsty 1 ©en burftct e$ ? 



They are h„„ gry . [SttStf^ 

Who is thirsty ? ©en burftct c$ 1 

I am very thirsty. i OTt* ^urflct febr. 



* 45utt$ertt, in the signification of to fast, is neuter, and follows the conju- 
gation of neuter verbs. 



159 

Has your cousin been thirsty ? £ctt eg Sftten fetter gcbtttjtet ? 

He has been thirsty. 5" g f *f ^n getuirjtct. 

J C Sbn bat getmrftct, 

Where has he gone to 1 £Bof)tn tft cr Cjctctf't ? 

He has gone to Vienna. (St tft nact) £Bten gcrci]'t. 

Is it good travelling 1 3ft e6 gut tetfen ? 

It is bad travelling. (5$ tft fd)(cd)t tetfen. 

In the winter. 3>m SQBtnter. 

In the summer. 3m ©ommer. 

Is it good travelling in the win- 3ft c£ gut retfen tm Winter ? 

ter] 
It is bad travelling in the winter. (g$ tft fcf)ted)t retfen tm £Btntet. 

The spring, ter gtiifjUnCj ; 

the autumn, ter £etfrft. 

To ride in a carriage. $af)ten* (in this signification 

takes fetn* for its auxiliary 11 ). 

Ridden in a carriage. ©efafyten. 

To ride on horseback. Stctten* (takes fetn* for its auxi- 
liary). 

Ridden on horseback. # ©etttten. 

To go on foot. 3u Jufje ejeben*. 

Do you like to go on horseback 1 f SKctten @tc gem ? 

I like to ride in a carriage. f 3cb fat)re gern. 

Where is the bailiff gone to (on £8o ift ter 2Cmtmann r)tncjcritten ? 

horseback) ] 

He is gone (on horseback) to the (St tft in ten 2Mt> gcritten. 

forest. 

When does your cousin go to £Bann qer)t tf)t better nad) 23etltn ? 

Berlin ? 

He goes thither this winter. (St Qef)t btcfen Quintet tar)tn, 

I intend going this spring to 3d) tnn gefennen, btcfen $tiir;ttwj 

Dresden. nacb £)te*t>en $u retfen. 

Where is your uncle 1 ££o ift Sbt Dhetm ? 

He is in Berlin. (St ift in Berlin. 

He is at Berlin. (§tf ift ju SB celt n. 

Rule. The preposition Jit or in is used to express 
rest in a place or country, and the preposition nad) 
motion or direction towards a place or country. 9iad) 
is particularly used before names of towns or coun- 
tries (Lesson LIV.) ; but the preposition ju must be 
made use of to express motion towards a person. 
(Lesson XXVI.) 

a When the verb fafjren* signifies to move anything by a carriage it is ac- 
tive and takes fyafcett* for its aux&iary. 



160 

The two prepositions JU and in answer the question 
tt>0 ? and nctd) the question tt>ct)Ut ? as is seen by the 
above examples. 

Is it good living in Paris V "> ft ^ j n . % 

Is the living good in Paris ? j J ^ 

It is good living there. I m .^ ym fcfl> 

J he living is good there. ) ° 

Is the living dear in London 1 ( ^.» . ¥U .„ A% . ,,/,,„ • o A „s AM » 

Is it dear living in London] $^' ' 

The living is dear there. (£*5 tft tbeucr Men t)cu 

Is it windy ] Does the wind 3jl e$ tvtnbig 1 

blow ] 
It is windy. The wind blows. @$ iff ix>tnMc^, ber 2Bint> cjefyt. 

^ii 1 ^ The wind f 6 * ** - *** ■»* 

r •. . i S oft c$ ftiirmifcbl 

Is ll storm y T j 3ft <e ftiinmfdK* better ? 

T ^ . . . S (£* ill ntd)t |~tttnm|d). 

It is not stormy. j ^ ^^ ^ ni(ft ^^ 

Strong, stormy, dear, windy. £tuv#; ftfirmtfet) ; tl)Ciu'r ', nnnfctj 

EXERCISES. 130. 

Do you like to ride in a carriage 1 — I like to ride on horseback.-- 
Has your cousin ever gone on horseback 1 — He has never gone or* 
horseback. — Did you go on horseback the day before yesterday? — 
I went on horseback to-day. — Where did you go to (on horseback) 1 
— 1 went into the countr} 7 . — Does your brother ride on horseback as 
often as you ] — He rides on horseback oftener than I. — Hast thou 
sometimes ridden on horseback 1 — I have never ridden on horse- 
back. — Wilt thou go (in a carriage) to-day iuto the country ] — I will 
go thither (in a carriage). — Do you like travelling] — I do like 
travelling. — Do you like travelling in the winter] — I do not like 
travelling in the winter, 1 like travelling in the spring and in autumn. 
— Is it good travelling in the spring ] — It is good travelling in the 
spring and in the autumn, but it is bad travelling in the summer 
and in the winter. — Have you sometimes travelled in the winter? 
— I have often travelled in the winter and in the summer. — Does 
your brother travel often ] — He travels no longer, he formerly travel- 
led much. — When do you like to ride on horseback ] — 1 like riding 
on horseback inthe morning after breakfast. — Is it good travelling 
in this country ] — It is good travelling here (r\i). — Have you ever 
gone to Vienna ] — I have never gone thither. — Where is your 
brother gone to ? — He is gone to London. — Does he sometimes go 
to Berlin 1 — He went thither formerly. — What does he say of (tton) 
that country 1 — He says that it is good travelling in Germany ] — 
Have you been at Dresden ■ — I have been there — Have you stayed 
there long 1 — I have stayeil there two years. — What do you say oi 



161 

the (wit ten) people of that country ]— I say that they are good people 
(eg cuire Scute ft lit 1 )* — Is your brother at Dresden ? — No, Sir, he is 
at Vienna 1 — Is the living good at Vienna ] — The living is good 
there. 

131. 

Have you been in London] — I have been there.— Is the living 
good there ! — The living is good there, but dear. — Is it dear living 
in Paris 1 — It is good living there and not dear.— At whose house 
have you been this morning ] — I have been at my uncle's. — Where 
are you going to now 1 — 1 am going to my brother's. — Is your brother 
at home ! — I do not know. — Have you already been at the English 
captain's ? — I have not been there yet. — When do you intend going 
thither 1 — I intend going thither this evening.— How often has your 
brother bem in London ] — He has been there thrice — Do you like 
travelling in France ? — I like travelling there, because one finds 
good people there. — Does your friend like travelling in Holland ? 
— He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad there. 
— Do you like travelling in Italy ] — I do like travelling there, be- 
cause the living is good there, and one finds good people there ; but 
the roads are not very good there. — Do the English like to travel in 
Spain] — They like to travel there ; bat they find the roads there too 
bad. — How is the weather ] — The weather is very bad. — Is it windy ? 
— It is very windy. — Was it stormy yesterday ] — It was stormy. — 
Did you go into the country 1 — Idid not go thither, because it was 
stormy. — Do you go to the market this morning ] — I do go thither, 
if it is not stormy. — Do you intend going to Germany this year] — 
I do intend going thither, if the weather is not too bad. — Do you in- 
tend breakfasting with me this morning 1 — I intend breakfasting 
with you, if I am hungry. 

132. 

Does your uncle intend dining with us to-day] — He does intend 
dining with you, if he is hungry. — Does the Pole intend drinking 
some of (yen) this wine] — He does intend drinking some of it (fccu 
£cu), if ne i s thirsty. — Do you like to go on foot ]— 1 do not like to 
go on foot, but I like going in a carriage when (nxnn) I am travel- 
ling. — Will you go on foot ] — 1 cannot go on foot, because I am too 
tired. — Do you go to Italy on foot ] — I do not go on foot, because 
the roads are there too bad . — Are the roads there as bad in the summer 
as in the winter ] — They are not so good in the winter as in the 
summer. 

133. 

Are you going out to-day ] — lam not going out when it is raining. 
— Did it rain yesterday ] — It did not rain. — Has it snowed ] — It has 
snowed. — Why do you not go to the market ] — 1 do not go thither, 
because it snows. — Do you wish to have an umbrella ] — If you have 
one. — Will you lend me an umorella ] — I will lend you one. — What 
sort of weather is it ] — It thunders and lightens. — Does the sun 
shine 1 — The sun does not shine, it is foggy. — Do you hear the 



162 

thunder 1 — I do hear it — How long have you heard the thunder.— 
I have heard it till four o'clock in the morning 1 . — Is it fine weather 1 
— The wind blows hard and it thunders much. — Does it rain ] — It 
does rain very fast (ftarf). — Do you not go into the country 1 — How 
can I go into the country, do you not see how (rote) it lightens 1 — 
Does it snow ] — It does not snow, but it hails. — Does it hail ] — 
It does not hail, but thunders very much. — Have you a parasol 1 — 
I have one. — Will you lend it me ] — I will lend it you. — Have we 
sunshine ] — We have much sunshine, the sun is in my eyes. — Is it 
fine weather 1 — It is very bad weather, it is dark ; we have no sun- 
shine. 

134. 

Are you thirsty ] — I am not thirsty, but very hungry. — Is your 
servant sleepy] — He is sleepy. — Is he hungry ] — He is hungry. — 
Why does he not eat ] — Because he has nothing to eat. — Are your 
children hungry 1 — They are very hungry, but they have nothing 
to eat. — Have they anything to drink] — They have nothing to 
drink. — Why do you not eat? — I do not eat when (roenn) I am not 
hungry.- — Why does the Russian not drink 1 — He does not drink 
when he is not thirsty. — Did your brother eat anything yesterday 
evening ] — He ate a piece of beef, a small piece of fowl, and a 
piece of bread. — Did he not drink 1 — He also drank. — What did 
he drink ] — He drank a large glass of water, and a small glass of 
wine. — How long did you stay at his house (bet thin) ] — I stayed 
there till midnight — Have you asked him for anything] — I have 
asked him for nothing. — Has he given you anything ] — He has 
given me nothing. — Of whom have you spoken ] — We have spoken 
of you. — Have you praised me 1 — We have not praised you; we 
have blamed you. — Why have you blamed me 1— Because you do 
not study well. — Of what has your brother spoken] — He has 
spoken of his books, his houses, and his gardens, — Who is hungry 1 
— My friend's little boy is hungry. — Who has drunk my wine ? — 
No one has drunk it. — Hast thou already been in my room? — I 
have already been there. — How dost thou find my room ] — I find it 
beautiful. — Are you able to work there ] — I am not able to work 
there, because it is too dark. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— gfcbett ntib fiutfygste 
tzzlion. 

OF THE IMPERFECT ANE PERFECT TENSES. 

In English there are three imperfect tenses, viz : I 
praised, did praise, and was praising. These three 
are expressed in German by one imperfect id) (obte* It 
is used to express a past action or event in reference 



163 

to another, which was either simultaneous with or an 
tecedent to it. It is the historical tense of the Germans, 
and is always employed in narration, particularly 
when the narrator was an eye-witness of the action or 
event. The perfect tense, on the contrary, expresses 
an action or event, as perfectly past and ended, with- 
out any reference to another event, and when the 
narrator was not an eye-witness. In this latter in- 
stance the imperfect also may be used, if the narrator 
accompanies his narrative with any phrase denoting 
that he does not speak in his own name, as tttatt facjt or 
fagt man, they say, it is said, &c. 

The perfect tense is compounded of the present of 
this auxiliary, and the past participle, as in English. 
(See Lessons XLL, XLII. &c.) 

I was — he was. 3 cf) roar — cr roar. 

We were — they were. 93Mr roarcn — ftc roarcn. 

Thou wast — you were. £)u roarft — 3t)r roatct ((Sic roarcn). 

Were you content ? £Barcn Sic $ufrict>cn 1 

I was very content. 3d) roar fchr $ufrict>cn. 

Was the wine good? ££ar fccr SOBctn cuUl 

It was very good. (5t roar fcrjr gut. 

Were you there yesterday? (Suit) Sic a/ftcrn fca gcrocfcn ? 

I was there to-day. Jscb tun l)cutc £>a cjcrocfcn. 

Where was he the day before ££e tft cr Dorgcftcrn gcrocjcn ? 

yesterday 1 

Were you already in Paris ? (Sint) (Sic fcbcn in $)ariS gcrocjcn 1 

I was there twice already 1 3d) bin fcften $rocimal ba gcrocfcn* 

Obedient — disobedient. ©cfycrfam — ungc()orfam. 

Negligent. 9?ad)(afjta,. 

Obs. A. The imperfect of regular verbs is formed 
from the infinitive by changing en into t, and adding 
the proper termination to each person, viz. e, to the 
first and third persons singular, en, to the first and third 
persons plural, eft, to the second person singular, and 
et, to the second person plural. Ex. 



C loved, ( loved, 

I < did love, He < did love, 

( was loving. ( was loving. 

( loved, I loved, 

We < did love, They < did love, 

( were loving. ( were loving. 



Scf) Itebte — er 
Itebte* 

2Btr Itebten — 
ffe ftebtetu 



164 

ilovedst, C loved, ) £lt Kebtefl — 

didst love, You 1 did love, > %bt (tebtet(Stc 
wast loving. ( were loving. ) licbten). 

Obs B. The consonant t of the imperfect is pre- 
ceded by e, if the pronunciation requires it, which is 
the case in all verbs, the root of which ends in t>, t, tt)/ 
or (I, or in several consonants united. (See Obs. A. 
Lesson XXXIV. and Lesson XLI.) Ex. 

f worked, f worked, } <v , , . 

I i did work, Hei did work, j.jct) arDcttcte — 

[was working. [was working, j 

w fe Fke \ tk hf ie \ l®tf arbcttetoi 
We did work They did work _. fte arbeiteten . 

I^were working. [ were working, j ' 
fworkedst, f worked, ] 2>u arbettetefl — 

Thou j didst work, You j did work, j> 3t>r arbettetet 

[wast working, [were working.; (Siearbettetcn)* 

O&s. C In all German verbs, whether regular or 
irregular, the third person singular of the imperfect 
tense is the same as the first person ; and the third 
person plural is the same as the first in all the tenses. 

I had — he had. ?d) ftatte — cr fjatk 1 . 

We had — they had. 2A% batten — fie batten. 

Thou hadst — you had. £>u battel! — Jfyr fyaiUtQtBxt batten) 

Had you money ? barton (£ie &c(b ? 

I had some. 3d) batti WiUhc** 

Had your brother books 1 Jpatte 3b r 3$rul>ct s 3iid)er ? 

He had some. (£r fyatU mcUlyc. 

What had we! 2£as batten ivir? 

What sort of weather was it yes- £i?as fltr $3cttct war cs geftern ? 

terday ? 

It was fine weather. (££ mar fcbb'nc^ better. 

Had you a wish to buy a horse ? .patten Sie Otifl an ^ferb $u fatts 

fen ? 

I had a wish to buy one, but I Set) fyattc 2 lift etnS $u fruifen, ah*t 

had no money. id) battc fetn ©eft. 

Did your cousin intend to lean )Bav 3b r ^Setter cjefennen foeutfcl) $u 

German ] lernen ? 

He did intend to learn it, but he <£r war gefornitn e$ $u (etnen, abet 

had no master. Ct battc humx Zcfyvcx. 



165 

EXERCISES. 135. 

Were you at home this morning-? — I was not at home. — Where 
were you ? — I was at the market. — Where were you yesterday ? — 
I was at the theatre. — Wast thou as assiduous as thy brother?— 
I was as assiduous as he, hut he was more clever than I. — Where 
have you been ? — 1 have been at the English physician's. — Was 
he at home ? — He was not at home.- — Where was he ? — He was at 
the ball. — Have you been at the Spanish cook's ? — I have been at 
his house. — Has he already bought his meat ? — He has already 
bought it.^-Have you given the book to my brother? — I have given 
it to him. — Hast thou given my books to my pupils'? — I have 
given them to them. — Were they satisfied with them (frcuntt) 1 — 
They were very well (four) satisfied with them. — Had your cousin a 
wish to learn German ? — He had a wish to learn it. — Has he 
learnt it ? — He has not learnt it. — Why has he not learnt it 1 — 
Because he had not courage enough. — Have you been at my 
father's ? — I have been there (bet tt)m). — Have you spoken to him 1 
— I have spoken to him. — Has the shoemaker already brought yov 
the boots ? — He has already brought them to me. — Have you paid 
him (for) them ? — I have not paid him (for) them yet. — Have you 
ever been in London ? — I have been there several times. — W'hat 
did you do there ? — I learnt English there. — Do you intend going 
thither once more ? — I intend going thither twice more. — Is the 
living good there 1 — The living is good there, but dear. — Was your 
master satisfied with his pupil ? — He was satisfied with him. — 
Was your brother satisfied with my children ? — He was very well 
(jVfir) satisfied with them. — Was the tutor satisfied with this little 
boy ? — He was not satisfied with him. — Why was he not satisfied 
with him ]— Because that little boy was very negligent. 

136. 

Were the children of the poor as clever as those of the rich ? — 
They were more clever, because they worked harder (nicf)r). — Did 
you love your tutor? — I did love him, because he loved me. — Did 
he give you anything ? — He gave me a good book, because he was 
satisfied with me. — Whom do you love ? — I love my parents and 
my preceptors. — Do your tutors love you? — They do love me, 
because I am assiduous and obedient. — Did this man love his 
parents? — He did love them. — Did his parents love him ? — They 
did love him, because he was never disobedient. — How long 
did you work yesterday evening ? — I worked till ten o'clock. 
— Did your cousin also work ? — He did also work. — When 
didst thou see my uncle? — I saw him this morning. — Had 
he much money ? — He had much. — Had your parents many 
friends ? — They had many. — Have they still some ? — They have 
still several. — Had you any friends? — 1 had some, because I had 
money — Have you still some ? — I. have no longer any, because I 
have no more money. — Where was your brother ? — He was in the 
garden. — Where were his servants ? — They were in the house.—* 



166 

Where were we 1— We were in a good country and with (bet) 
good people. — Where were our friends ] — They were on (board) 
the ships of the English. — Where were the Russians ] — They 
were in their carriages. — Were the peasants in the fields ? — They 
were there. — Were the bailiffs in the woods ? — They were there.— 
Who was in the storehouses ? — The merchants were there. 

137. 

What sort of weather was it 1 — It was very bad weather. — Was 
it windy ] — It was windy and very cold. — Was it foggy^ — It was 
foggy. — Was it fine weather 1 — It was fine weather, but too warm. 
— What sort of weather was it the day before yesterday ] — It was 
very dark and very cold. — Is it fine weather now ] — It is neither 
fine nor bad weather. — Is it too warm ] — It is neither too warm 
nor too cold. — Was it stormy yesterday] — It was very stormy. — 
Was it dry weather 1 — The weather was too dry ; but to-day it is 
too damp. — Did you go to the ball yesterday evening] — I did not 
go, because the weather was bad. — Had you the intention to tear 
my books ] — I had not the "intention to tear, but to burn them. 
(See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— &cl)t tmb fimfypte 
Action. 

f spoke, fspoke, 1 _ , , a 

I jdid speak, He | did speak, ^[W 
[was speaking. [was speaking. J '" ^* 

{spoke, fspoke, 1 SB3tr fpracfyen 

did speak, They j did speak, > — jTe fprocfyem 

were speaking, [were speaking. J obs.c. Less.LVU. 
f spokest, ["spoke, i 2)U fpracfyji — 

Thou < didst speak, You-j did speak, j-Sfyr fpracfyet 

I wast speaking. I were speaking. J (©te fpracfyen)* 

Obs. In irregular verbs the imperfect of the indica 
tive is formed by changing the vowels : a, ei, i, 0, U, 
and adding the termination belonging to each person. 
Hence in the irregular verbs we shall mark only the 
change of that vowel, together with the termination of 
the first person, in order to enable learners to know 

a Learners ought now to add to their list of verbs the imperfect of all ir- 
regular verbs which they have been using hitherto, or will have to use here 
after. 



167 

the imperfect tense. Examples : the verb fprecfyen 
above changes in the imperfect the radical vowel e into 
a ; Metbett, to remain, changes it into te, thus : tri) Uieb, 
I remained; gefyert, to go, into t, thus: id) giltg, I went ; 
Jtefyen, to draw, into o, thus : id) jog, I drew ; fd)Iagen, 
to beat, into U, thus : id) fcfytug, I smote. 

Compound verbs follow in general the conjugation of 
simple verbs. 

At first (in the beginning). (St ft, $uerft (anfcm§6). 

Afterwards. £ernad) or nacfyfyet. 

Hereupon, upon this. $tetauf» 

DCP Whenever a sentence begins with any other 
word than the subject, its order is inverted, and the 
subject stands after the verb in simple, and after the 
auxiliary in compound tenses. b 

At first he said yes, afterwards ©rft fagte e t ja, rjernad) netn. 

no. 
At first he worked, and after- (gtflt at&ettete, tint) rjernad) fpteltc ct. 

wards he played. 
I do not go out to-day. #eute Sf 6* id) ntd)t aits. 

Now you must work. Scgt mtifjen © t c atkhen. 

My father set out yesterday. ©cftetn tft m c t n s £ a t e t afcge? 

tetf't. 
Here lies your book and there £tet licgt 3f)t SBud) unt) t>a 3r)r 

your paper. papier. 

He came afterwards. @t tft bemad) (nad)f)et) gcfommcn. 

Upon this he said. £terauf fagtc c r. 

J.5 soon as. @ c b a I fc>, f o h a 1 b a I $. 

.1 drinl* as soon as I have eaten. 3d) tttnfe, fe&alb id) gcgcffcn ftafte. 
As soon as I have taken off my ®obalt> id) mctne ©cbube au*ge$te 
shoes I take off my stockings. gen ba6e,$tel)e id) metne (Strumpfc 

au$. c 
What do you do after supper 1 2Bag tf)tm @tc ncid) tern 2Cbcnbcf? 

fen? 

To sleep — slept. © d) ( a f c n — a, e f d) t a f e n. Im- 

perfect fd)(i cf. 

I sleep, thou sleepest, he sleeps. 3d) fctyafe, tu fd)(afft, et fd)(aft. 

b From this rule must be excepted the conjunctions which serve to unite 
sentences vSee Lesson XLVII.) ; they leave the subject in its place and throw 
the verb to the end of the sentence. 

c See Obs. C. Lesson XXXI V. 



168 



Does your father still sleep 1 
He does still sleep. 



©cW&ft 3fa SSatct nocb? 
(St fd)(aft nod). 



To live. 2 c b e n« 

Is your relation still alive 1 f £cbt Sbr SSctmanbtet nod) ? 

He is no longer alive (he is dead), f (£r (cbt utcbj mebt. 

Without. £) bn c (is followed hy $u before 

the infinitive). 

Dbne @ctb. 

■■ £)bnc £u fprecbcn. 



Without money. 
Without speaking. 
Without saying anything". 



To go away — gone away. 



£)()ne etrooS $u fagen. 

SB e g g c b e n * — \v c 9 $ c g a n g c n. 
Iiuperf. 3 1 n g. 



He went away without saying (St gtng nxg, ofync ettva£ $u fagcn. 
anything. 



JU last. 
To arrive- 



-arrived. 



Has he arrived at last ? 
He has not arrived yet. 
Does he come at last? 
He does come. 

To give away — given away. 
To cut off — cut off (past part.). 

Has he given away anything] 
He has given away his coat. 



(SnMid). 

2C n f m m c n * — a n g c £ m m c n. 
Imperf. f a m. 

3ft cr enfc(td) angcfomtncn ? 
(Sr tjt nod) ntcbt angeEemmen. 
&ommt cr enMid) ? 
(St fommt. 

£$ e g g e b e n* — w e g g c g c b c n 

Imperf. g a b. 
2C b f cb n c t b e n* — a b g e f d) n i 1 * 

t c n. Imperf. f cb n t 1 1 . 
&at cr ctroav; rwggcgcbcn 1 
(St bat fcin -ft let b rocggegebat. 



To cut one's throat. 
They have cut his throat. 



Semanbcm ben £a(S abfebnetben *. 
SDlan bat ibm ben £a($ abge* 

febntttcn. 
(Stncm £unbc tie Dbtcn dfcfdjncU 

ben *. 
2Ba$ baben fie ibm getfyan ? 
®tc baben ibm bte D&ten abge* 

febntttcn. 

Saut. 

Does your master speak aloud ? (Spttcbt Sftr £cl)tct (aut ? 
He does speak aloud. (St fpttd)t (aut. 

In order to learn German, one Urn bcutfd) $u letnen, mup mem (aut 
must speak aloud. fptcd)cn. 

exercises. 138. 

Hadst thou the intention to learn English ] — I had the intention 
to learn it, but I had not a good master. — Did your brother intend 



To crop a dog's ears. 

W T hat have they done to him 1 
They have cut off his ears. 

Aloud. 



169 

to buy a carriage ? — He did intend to buy one, but he had no more 
money .< — Why did you work ] — I worked in order to learn Ger- 
man. — Why did you love that man ] — I loved him because he loved 
me. — Have you already seen the son of the captain 1 — I have a" ready 
seen him. — Did he speak French ] — He spoke English. — Where 
were you then (Lesson XL VIII.)] — I was in Germany. — Did }^ou 
speak German or English ] — I spoke neither German nor English, 
but French. — Did the Germans speak French ] — At first they spoke 
German, afterwards French. — Did they speak as well as you ]— • 
They spoke just as well as you and I. — What do you do in the 
evening. — I work as soon as I have supped. — And what do you do 
afterwards ]— - Afterwards I sleep. — When do you drink ] — I drink 
as soon as I have eaten. — When do you sleep ] — I sleep as soon as 
I have supped. — Dost thou speak German 1 — I spoke it formerly. 
— Dost thou take off thy hat before thou takest off thy coat ] — I take 
off my hat lis soon as I have taken off my clothes. — What do you 
do after breakfast ] — As soon as I have breakfasted I go out. — Art 
thou sleeping] — You see that I am not sleeping. — Does thy brother 
still sleep ] — He does still sleep. — Have you tried to speak to my 
uncle ] — I have not tried to speak to him. — Has he spoken to you % 
— As soon as he sees me, he speaks to me. — Are your parents still 
alive ] — They are still alive. — Is your friend's brother still alive 1 
— He is no longer alive. 

139. 

Have you spoken to the merchant] — I have spoken to him.— 
Where have you spoken to him ? — I have spoken to him at my 
house (6ct nur). — What has he said ] — He went away without say- 
ing anything. — Can you work without speaking ] — I can work, but 
not study German, without speaking. — Do you speak aloud when 
(iwnn) you are studying German ] — I do speak aloud. — Can you 
understand me ] — I can understand you when (rocnn) you speak 
aloud. — Wilt thou go for some wine ] — 1 cannot go for wine withont 
money. — Have you bought any horses ] — I do not buy without 
money. — Has your father arrived at last ] — He has arrived. — When 
did he arrive ] — This morning at four o'clock. — Has your cousin 
set out at last ] — He has not set out yet. — Have you at last found 
a good master ] — I have at last found one. — Are you at last learning 
English ] — I am at last -learning it. — Why did you not learn it al- 
ready ] — Because I had not a good master. — Are you waiting for 
any one 1 — I am waiting for my physician ] — Is he coming at last ] 
— You see that he is not yet coming. — Have you the head-ache ] — 
No, I have sore eyes. — Then you must wait for the physician.— 
Have you given away anything ] — I have not given away anything. 
— What has your uncle given away ? — He has given away his old 
clothes. — Hast thou given away anything] — I had not anything to 
give away. — What has thy brother given away] — He has given 
away his old boots and his old shoes. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 






170 



/P^C^fflinSfLESSON.— Nztrn ntib f&n^igete 
Cectiott. 

Bten. 855 ct ten. 

Ols. A. The learner must remember that tt>erben * 
not fein*, is the verb which serves to form the passive 
voice (Lesson LV.). The past participle of the former 
is tt>ort>en, and that of the latter getoefett. (Lesson XLI.) 

Have you been praised "? (Stnb (Sic gdobt roerben ? 

I have been praised. 3d) bin getobt roerben. 

Hast thou been blamed 1 23tft £)u gctabelt roorbcn ? 

I have not been blamed. 3d) (un ntd)t getctbctt twrben. 

Have we been loved ] ©tnb rmr aeltebt roorbcn ? 

By whom has he been punished ? SSon went ift cr gejtrcift roorbcn ? 

He has been punished by his (Sr tft oon feincm 93ater Qeftraft root* 

father. ben. 

When has he been punished 1 ££cinn tjt er gcftraft roorben ? 
He has been punished to-day. (§r tjt fyeutc gcftraft roorben. 

I was — he was ^ 3d) rourbe — cr rourbe 

>1 



gctebt. 



We were — they were > praised. 2Btr rourben — fte rourben 
Thou wast — you were J £)u rourbeft: — Sfyrrourbet 

(<Ste rourben) 

Were you loved 1 2Burben <Ste gctiebt ? 

I was loved. 3d) rourbe gelte&t. 

Was he hated ? SBurbe er cjefyafit ? 

He was neither loved nor hated. ®r rourbe roeber geliefct nod) gefjapt. 

To become. £& e r b e n *• 

The past participle of this verb is : 

Become. ® e ro c r b c n. a 

And its imperfect : 
I became — he became. Set) roarb or rourbe — er roarb or 

rourbe. 
Thou becamest. £>u roarbft or rourbeft. 

Obs. B. In all the other tenses and persons, t&erbeit*, 
to become, is conjugated as the verb which serves to 
form the passive voice. (See Lesson LV. and above.) 

He was made a king. 7 x re * «" • 

He became a king. 8 j t <& "><"* *«mfl. 

n Not toorbett, which is tfie past participle of the verb that serves to form 
ne passive voice, as may be seen above. 



171 



Have you become a merchant ] 
I have become a lawyer, 
He has taken the degrees of a 
doctor. 

The king-, 
the successor, 
the lawyer (barrister at law), 

the office, the employment, 
Learned. 

To fall sick. f 
■ To be taken ill. 

To recover, to grow well. 

To recover one's health. 
He was taken ill. 
He has recovered his health. 

What has become of him ] 

He has turned soldier. 
He has enlisted. 

To enlist, to enroll. 

Children become men. 



i 



©inb ©tc .ftaufmann gewerben ? 
3d) bin 'tfbrjor'at gercerten. 
t (Sr ift Sector getuorben, 

bcr jtontg ; 

bcr Sl^acbfcCgcr ; b 

bcr 2(bt)c6at (See Note a , -Lesson 

L1V.) ; 
ba* Xmt. 

Ocfefrt 

> fr jttanf rocrben *. 

> f ©ejtmb werben *. 

t (Sr tvarb fremf. 

T <5*r tfi gefunb gercerben. 
' 2£a$ ift au$ ibm gcrccrben ? 
;. £So ift er btngerommen ? 

<£t t(i <Selbat geroorben. 

<5r bat fid) anrcerben laffen. 

©elbat rocrben** 

<Std) anrecrOcn laffcn*. 

2(u$ jltnbern nxrben Scute. 



^ S&ctpcn*-— getiffen. 



To tear — torn. 

To snatch — snatched* 

I tore — we tore. 3d) rip — ttrit ttficn. 

Thou torest — you tore. 3)u riffeft — 3b^ ttffet (<Ste ttffcn). 

He snatched it out of my hands. (§r rip c$ imjr au$ ben £a'nbcn. 

What did he snatch out of your £BaS rip et Sfyncn au$ ben $anben I 
hands ? 



When. 



XL VII.) 



(See Lesson 



I was there, when you were 3cfj war t>a, aU <Ste tia warem 



there. 

Next year. 

Last month. 

Last Monday. 

Next, 

last, 
When was he in Berlin ? 
He was there last winter. 



9?ad)ires Sabr. 

SScrigcn (tefetcn) £Konat. 

£e$tcn SKentag. 

nacbft ; 

»orig, (e|t. 

£Bann roar et in SBcrtin ? 

(§r war Dcrtgcn ^Sinter ta. 



When will you go to Berlin 1 ££ann roolten @te nacfy SBertin retfen ? 

b Masculine substantives derived from a regular verb do not soften the radi- 
cal vowel in the plural, as : 5ftad)folaer, which is derived from ttacfyfetgen, tQ 
follow, to succeed ; plur. Me Sftad&fofger, the successors. 

c The verb m^ett, to tear, to pull, to wrest, must not be mistaken for jc?s 
rctfjett, which means : to tear to pieces, to rend, to burst asunder, 



172 

I will go thither next summer. 3>df) will nacftftcn ©ommct bafyin 

retfen. 

So that. @ o bap (See Lesson XL VII.). 

I have lost my money, so that I 3d) babe metn ©cit) wrier en, fo tap 

cannot pay you. id) Sic ntd)t bqablen fann. 

I am ill, so that I cannot go out. 3d) bin tvant, fo t)ap id) nid)t auSgc* 

fyen fann. 

The imperfect of fonttert is id) fonttte, I could. 

The way to Berlin. £)er 2Bcg nad) <8erltn. 

The way from Berlin to Dresden^ 3)er SGBcg ocn Berlin nad) 3)rc$ben. 
Which way has he taken ? 2Md)cn 2Bcg f)at cr genommcn? 

He has taken the way to Leipzic. (St fjat ten 2Beg nad) Cetpjtg a/noms 

men. 
Which way will you take ] £Se(d>cn 2Bcg roollcn <Sie nefymen ? 

I will take this way. 3d) will biejen SQBcg nefymen. 

And I that one. Unt) id) jencn. 

exercises. 140. 

Why has that child been praised 1 — It has been praised, because 
it has studied well. — Hast thou ever been praised ? — I have often 
been praised. — Why has that other child been punished 1 — It has 
been punished, because it has been naughty and idle. — Has this 
child been rewarded 1 — It has been rewarded, because it has worked 
well. — When was that man punished ? — He was punished last 
month. — W^hy have we been esteemed 1 — Because we have been 
studious and obedient. — Why have these people been hated ] — Be- 
cause they have been disobedient. — W x ere you loved when you were 
at Dresden 1 — I was not hated. — Was your brother esteemed when 
he was in London ]— He was loved and esteemed. — When were you 
in Spain 1 — I was there when you were there. — Who was loved and 
who was hated 1 — Those that were good, assiduous, and obedient, 
were loved, and those who were naughty, idle, and disobedient, 
were punished, hated and despised. — What must one do, in order 
not to be despised 1 — One must be studious and good. — Were you 
in Berlin when the king was there 1 ? — I was there when he was 
there. — Was your uncle in London when I was there 1 — He was 
there when you were there. — Where were you when 1 was at Dres- 
den] — I was in Paris. — Where was yoxir father when you were in 
Vienna 1 — He was in England. — At what time did you breakfast 
when you were in Germany ] — I breakfasted when my father break- 
fasted. — Did you work when he was working ] — I studied when he 
was working. — Did your brother work when you were working 1 — 
He played when I was working. 

141. 

What has become of your friend 1 — He has become a lawyer. — 
What has becC^e pf vour cousin ? — He has enlisted. — Was your 



173 

uncle taken ill ? — He was taken ill, and I became his successor in 
his office. — Why did this man not work? — He could not work, be- 
cause he was taken ill. — Has he recovered ] — He has recovered. — 
What has become of him"? — He has turned a merchant. — What 
has become of his children ] — His children have become men. — 
What has become of your son ] — He has become a great man. — 
Has he become learned 1 — He has become learned (c*). — What 
has become of my hook ] — I do not know what has become of it.— 
Have you torn it ? — I have not torn it. — What has become of our 
neighbour ] — I do not know what has become of him. — Did they 
wrest the book out of your hands'? — They did wrest it out of my 
hands. — Did you wrest the book out of his hands ? — I did wrest it 
out of his hands. — When did your father set oat 1 — He set out last 
Tuesday. — Which way has he taken 1 — He has taken the way to 
Berlin. — When were you in Dresden ] — I was there last year. — 
Did you stay there long ] — I stayed there nearly a month. — Has 
my brother paid you] — He has lost all (Obs. B., Lesson XLIX.) 
his money, so that he cannot pay me. (See end of Lesson 
XXXIV.) 



SIXTIETH LESSON.— fitofoigste Action. 

Of whom , of which. 93 o n b c m, W t> tt. 

Obs. A. Of which, when relating to a thing, may 
be translated by the preposition which the verb re- 
quires, added to the adverb tt)0* 

I see the man of whom you 3d) fefje ben Sfltonn, t) tt b em (ttOtt 
speak. nxfcbcm) <&k fprecfyen. 

I have bought the horse of which 3d) fjabc ba$ Spfcrb gefauft, t)0tl 
you spoke to me. b e m (Sic nut nut gefprecfyctt r)a&en. 

Has your father the book of £at 3r)t 93ater fc>a£ 33ud), ro & C n 
which I am speaking 1 td) fpted)C ? 

Whose. £>cffen. Plur. bet etn 

The man whose. £)ct 9)?arm, befferr. 

The child whose. £a$ £mt>, beffcru 

The men whose. iDtc banner, bctert. 

I see the man whose brother has 3d) febe ben 9D2ann, beffen 23tubct 

killed my dog. tnetnert £unb getcbtct f)ar. 

Do you see the child whose fa- ©ef)cn ©te bciS jUnb, beffen $atct 

ther set out yesterday ? gejtetn abgcrctf't ift ? 

I do see it. 3d) fefje z% 

I see the man whose dog you 3d) febe ben sjjicmn, beffen £tmb <Ste 

have killed. getobtet (ja&cn. 

Do you see the people whose ©efjen <Stc bie Scute, betctt §)fetb td) 

horse I have bought 1 gefauft fyabe ? 



174 

I do see them. 3d) fefye fte. 

I have seen the merchant whose 3d) babe ben .ftaufmcinn gcfebcn 
shop yon have taken. bcffcn Saben ©w genemmcn fyaben. 

DCf 3 Incidental or explicative propositions are 
placed either immediately after the word which they 
determine, or at the end of the principal proposition. 

(3d) f)abe nut b«n ^cinnc, beffen 
jpauS abgcbrcmnt ift, gejvvedu'n. 
3d) babe nut bcm 93tonric gefprecfyen, 
beffen £ciu$ abgebrannt tft. 
C2(bbr ennen, (verb act. and neut. 
To burn — burnt* < irreg.) ab geb tan nt. Imperf. 

C b r a n n t c. 

|£aben (Sic ba^ 93udj, roefcbcg td) 
3bncn geliefycn babe, ejetefen ? 
£aben <Sie ba* 93 ud) .qefefen, nxkfyeS 
id) Sbnen gclteljcn babe ? 
I have what I want. 3d) babe, was id) braud)e. 

That, the one of which. iQ Ci$, b c f f c n. 

Have you the paper of which £aben (Sic bat $)apiet, beffen ©te 

you have need ] 6cnotf)tgt ftnt) ? 

I have that of which I have need. 3d) babe ba6, beffen id) benctl)igt bin. 

Dative. Gen. 

That, the one of which, ( M. ber, Don tt>eld)em-ber, beffen* 
of whom. ( N. bas,i)on toetcfyem-ba^beflfem 

I see the man of whom I speak. 3d) febe ben 9J?ann, tton n?c(d)em td) 

fprccbe. 
I see the one of whom I am 3d) ft' be ben (benjemgen), Den mU 
speaking to you. d)cm id) nut Sbncn fptecbe. (See 

Lesson XII.) 
Which book have you] £Be(d)es $ucb baben <Stc ? 

I have that (the one) of which I 3d) Ijctbe fr n $> (bci^enige), beffen id) 
have need. benotbtgt bin. 

Dative. Gen. 

Those, the ones of which. \ *g ^ £f | *"> *™' 

Which men do you see ] 95Md)C banner feben Ste ? 

I see those of whom you have 3d) febe bie (btejemgen), t>on xoeU 
spoken to me. d)en (yen benen) ®te mit nut 

qcfrtocben (joben. (See Lesson 
XIV.) 



175 

Which nails has the man ? £Belcf)C Stfagcl fjat bet 9)iarm ? 

He has those of which he has (5c I)at Me (fctqentgen), foeten et 6e 
need. not()tqt tjt 

Dat. Plur. 
To whom, D e n e n ♦ 

I see the children to whom you 3d) fefye bte Winter, be lien <Ste 
gave apples. 2Cepfel gegeben fyaben. 

Of those. 25 c n b e n e n (dative). 

Of which people do you speak 1 $on roc(d)cn Scuten reben ©te ? 
I speak of those whose children 3d) rebe t?on b e n e n (benierugen), 
have been assiduous. beten Winter fleipta, gewefen (int>. 



DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE 
when it is used instead of either 
The demonstrative pronouns biefer, jerter, the determi- 
native pronoun berjemge,or the relative pronoun Wetcfyer* 
(See 06s. Lessons XII. and XIV.) 



Masculine. Feminine. 


Neuter. Plural for all genders. 


Nom. ber bie 


bag bie 


Gen. beffen (beg) berett 


beflfen (beg) berer (berett) 


Dat. bem ber 


bem benen 


Ace. ben bie 


bag i>k. 



Obs. B. In the genitive singular masculine and 
neuter, beg is often used instead of beftett, chiefly in poe- 
try and compound words. 

Obs. C. When the definite article is used instead 
of tt>e(d)er, its genitive plural is not berer, but beren* 
(See Obs. Lesson XIV.) 

EXERCISES. 14*2. 

Did your cousin learn German 1 — He was taken ill, so that he 
could not learn it. — Has your brother learnt it ] — He had not a 
good master, so that he could not learn it. — Do you go to the ball 
this evening 1 — I have sore feet, so that I cannot go to it. — Did you 
understand that Englishman? — I do not know English, so that I 
could not understand him. — Have you bought that horse ? — I had 
no money, so that I could not buy it. — Do you go into the country 
on foot ] — I have no carriage, so that I must go thither on foot. — 
Have you seen the man from whom I received a present] — I have 
not seen him. — Have you seen the fine horse of which I spoke to 
you 1 — I have seen it. — Has your uncle seen the books of which 



176 

you spoke to him? — He has seen them. — Hast thou seen the maw 
whose children have been punished ? — I have not seen him. — To 
whom were you speaking when you were in the theatre ? — I was 
speaking to the man whose brother has killed my fine dog. — Have 
you seen the little boy whose father has become a lawyer ? — I have 
seen him. — Whom have you seen at the ball ? — I have seen the 
people there whose horses and those whose carriage you bought. — 
Whom do you see now ? — I see the man whose servant has broken 
my looking-glass. — Have you heard the man whose friend has "lent 
me money ? — I have not heard him* — Whom have you heard ? — 1 
have heard the French captain whose son is my friend. — Hast thou 
brushed the coat of which I spoke to you? — I have not yet brushed 
it. — Have you received the money which you were wanting? — I 
have received it. — Have I the paper of which I have need ? — You 
have it. — Has your brother the books which he was wanting ? — He 
has them. — Have you spoken to the merchants whose shop we 
have taken ? — We have spoken to them. — Have you spoken to the 
physician whose son has studied German ? — I have spoken to him, 
■ — Hast thou seen the poor people whose houses have been burnt ? — 
I hav° seen them. — Have you read the books which we lent to 
you ] — We have read them. — What do you say of them ? — We say 
that they are very fine. — Have your children what they want ? — 
They 1 ave what they want. 

143. 

Of wlich man do you speak? — I speak of the one whose brother 
has turned soldier. — Of which children did you speak? — I spoke 
of those whose parents are learned.— Which book have you read ? 
— I have read that of which I spoke to you yesterday. — Which 
paper has your cousin? — He has that of which he has need. — 
Which fishes has he eaten ? — He has eaten those which you do not 
like. — Of which books are you in want ? — I am in want of those 
of which you have spoken to me.— Are you not in want of those 
which I am reading ? — I am not m want of them. — Is any one in 
want of the coats of which my tailor has spoken to me ? — No one 
is in want of them.— Do you see the children to whom I have 
given cakes ? — I do not see those to whom you have given cakes, 
but those whom you have punished. — To whom have you given 
money ? — I have given some to those who gave me some. — To 
which children must one give books ? — One must give some to 
those who learn well and who are good and obedient. — To whom 
do you give to eat and to drink] — To those who are hungry and 
thirsty. — Do you give anything to the children who are idle ? — I 
give them nothing. — What sort of weather was it when you went 
(gtngen) out ? — It was raining and very windy. — Do you give cakes 
to your pupils ? — They have not studied well, so that I give theiaa 
nothing. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



177 
SIXTY.FIRST LESSON.— ©in ttni sa^igste £*cti0tt. 

To forget— forgotten. SSetgeffen* — t> e t ge ff en. 
Forgot. Imperf. 83 e v Q a g . 

Thou forgettest — he forgets. 3)u wrgtffcft — ct ttergtfft. 

I have forgotten to do it. 3>d) babe wrqeffen, eg $u tfyun. 

Has he forgotten to bring you the £at cr t>era,cffen, Sfynen tag 23ucf) JU 

book ] bringcn ? 

He has forgotten to bring it me. (St Ijcit ttera,effen, eg nut ju fcttn* 

gen. 
f (£te fja&en uetgeffen, an mtc!) $u ferrets 
You have forgotten to write to J ben. 
me. j ©te fyafcen ttetgeffen, mit: $u fefytet* 

t ben.' 

To belong. (g> e r) 6 r c n . 

Does this horse belong to your ®ef)b'rt ttefeg $>fett 3f)tcm S3ru* 

brother ? tcr ? 

It does belong to him. (£g gcbort tfrm. 

To whom does this table belong 1 2£em gcr)ort ttefet Stfcf) ? 
It belongs to us. (Sr gcl)6rt ung. 

To whom do these gloves belong] SQBcm Qcr)6rcn ttefe J£>antfci)uf)e ? 
They belong to the captains. ©te geljoten ten £aupt(euten. 

Whose. &B e f f e n (See Lesson XXIX. and 

XXXIX). 
Whose hat is this 1 SBeffcn £ut tpt bag ? 

It is mine. (§g tft metner. 

Obs. A. The possessive conjunctive pronouns, when 
used instead of the possessive absolute pronouns, in 
the nominative masculine take the termination e X f and 
e£ in the nominative and accusative neuter. (See 
Obs. Lesson VII.) 

Whose book is this 1 SBeficn SBucft tft tag ? 

It is his. <£g tft femes. 

Whose carriage is that 1 SBeffen SBagen tft tag ? 

It is ours. (Sg ift unferer. 

Whose shoes are these 1 2Bcfl"cn <Sd)ufje ftnt tag ? 

They are ours. (5*g fint unfere. 

Ota. 5. These examples show that the indefinite 
pronoun e$ may be used of any gender or number. 
(See also the Obs. of Lesson XLIII.) 

Toft (suit). & U it en, p af fen , ftefjen*. 

Do these shoes fit these men ? spaflcn ttefe ©cfyufje tiefen OTatt* 

nern? 



178 



They fit them. 

That fits you very well. 

To suit {please) — suited. 



<Ste paffcn tbnen> 

2)ag fW)t Sbnen fefct gut. 

2£nftcljcn* — angeftanben. 
Imperf. ft a n t>. 

etel)t Sbrem SBtuber fciefeg Sucb 

cm? 
(Se ftebt tbm an. 
<Stcf)cn 3bten *8rufc>ern fcicfe ©ttcfcl 

an! 
(Sic jteben tbncn an. 
©tebt eg 3bnen an, fctefeg $u tbun I 
(£g ftebt mir an, eg$u t(jun. 

© e 3 1 e m e n. 



Does this cloth suit (please) your 

brother 1 
It suits (pleases) him. 
Do these boots suit (please) your 

brothers ? 
They suit (please) them. 
Does it suit you to do this! 
It does suit me to do it. 

To become. 

Does it become you to do this ? (Ueatemt eg 3bnen, bicfcg $u tbun ? 
It does become me to do it. (£g ge^tcmt mir, eg $u tbun. 

It does not become me to do it. (Sg cjcjtemt mir ntcbt, eg $u tbun. 
It does not become him to go on (5g cjegtcmt tbm nicbt, $u #upe $u ge* 
foot. b<m. 

To please. 33 e I i e b c n. 

Does it please your brother to 33eltebt eg Sbrem SSrufcet mit^ufoms 
go with us 1 men (with us is understood) 1 

Does it suit your brother to go ©tcbt eg Sb^em 23rut>et an mitju* 
with us 1 Commen ? 

It does not please him. (Sg beltcbt tbm nid)t. 

It does not suit him. (Sg ftebt tr)m nicbt an. 

What is your pleasure 1 What I £Bag beltcbt Sbuen ? 

}2Bagbetiebt! 



do you want 1 

To please, to like. 

Thou pleasest— he pleases. 

Does this book please you ] 

Do you like this book ? 

It pleases me much. 

I like it very much. 

How are you pleased here? 

I am very well pleased here. 

Paid in cash, ready. 
Ready money. 
To pay down. 
To buy for cash. 
To sell for cash. 

On credit. 
To sell on credit 



©efatlen*. 
Imperf. a, eft el. 

3>u cjefalljt — er cjcfattt, 

t®efaat3bnent)tefegS3ucb? 

I (£g cjefatft mir fcbt* 

2Bte cjefallt eg Sbnen bier ? 
@g gefdttt mir recbt roobl f)itv. 

SSaar. 

23aarcg ®ett>. 

SBaar be$a btctt. 

Urn baavc^ ®elb faufen. 

Urn baarcg ®elb serfaufen. 

2Cuf (Stefctt, auf 95orcj. 
2Cuf (Srcfctt Detfaufcn. 



179 

The credit, bcr (Srebtt, bet 93crg. 

Will you buy for cash 1 Snellen Sie urn baauS (Mb frmfen ? 

Does it suit you to sell me on ©tebt c£ Sbnen an, mir auf (Srebtt 

credit? $u serf aufea ?; 

To succeed — succeeded* © c 1 1 n 9 c n * — 9 c I u n 0, e n. 

Imperf. a, e ( a n 9. 

O&s. C This impersonal verb takes fetttfor its auxi- 
liary, and governs the dative. (See Obs. A. Lesson 
LVI.) 

Do you succeed in learning the f ®ettngt es 3fynen bcutfd) $u (et* 

German 1 ncn ? 

I do succeed in it. f ©6 gettngt nur. 

I do succeed in learning it. f (£$ geltngt mir, e§ $u tetncn. 

Do these men succeed in selling + (Mtngt e£ btefen £cuten, tr)te 



their horses? 
They do succeed therein. 


$)ferbe $u serEaufcn? 
f (b gcltngt tfynen. 


There is* 
There are* 


<S$ ftnb* 


Is there any wine ? 
There is some. 
Are there any apples 1 
There are some- 
There are none. 
Are there any men ? 
There are some. 


3ft8©ctn ba? 
@$ ift welder ba. 
(Stub Kepfel ba ] 
(56 ftnb rocldje ba. 
— (££ ftnbfetne ba, 
<Sinb Scute ba? 
@$ ftnb etntge t)a. 



Obs. D. The impersonal verb there is, there are, is 
translated by e£ i fi> eg finb, when it expresses exist- 
ence in a certain place, and by eg Q\bt, when it expres- 
ses existence in general. Ex. 

There are men who will not stu- (&$ gi6t SDlenfcfyen, roetcfye nidjt ftubU 

dy. tmwcttetu 

Is there any one ? 3ft Semanb t>a % 

There is no one. <S$ ift SKemanb ta* 

Has a man been there ? 3ft ein 9Jfomn t^a geroefen ? 

There has been one there. <£•$ if! etnet ba gewefen. 

Were many people there ? SBaten Dtctc fceute t>a ? 

There were a great many there (5$ waun fef)t triele ba. 

To clean. & einig en, r et n mad)en. 

Clean. 9tetn. 

The inkstand, ba§ SEtntenfafSL 

Will you clean my inkstand ? SBolten <Sie mettt Stntenfag retnt* 

a,cn? 
I will clean it. 3d) wilt eg retmgen. 



180 

To keep-— kept. f8 e f) a I 1 e n*. 

Kept. Imperf. 93 e t) t c 1 t. 

Will you keep the horse 1 Snellen ®tc ba$ g>fcrb bc^attcn ? 

I will keep it. 3d) will c$ fcefyatten. 

You must not keep my money. (Sic muffen mcin ©eft md)t (>ef)afc 

ten. 

Directly, immediately. ©egtctd). 

This instant. ^Dicfen UxxQtnUxd. 

Instantly. 2CuQcnblicflicf). 

I will do it. 3d> rotfl eg tljun. 

I will do it immediately. 3d) roil! eg feg(etd) tljun. 

I am going to work. 3d) rotU arbeiten. 

OGr 3 Some conjunctions do not throw the verb to the 
end of the phrase (See Lesson XL VII.), but leave it in 
its place immediately after the subject. They are 
the following : 

lint), and ; entroebec — ebet, either — or ; 

abet or atletn, but ; roefocr — nod), neither — nor ; 

fonfcetn, but (on the contrary) ; feroo&l — aU, ? „ . 

fcenn, for ; fcrocW — ate aud), S y 

©fcet, or ; nid)t nur — fenfcetn aud), not only 

— but also. 

I cannot pay you, for I have no 3d) femn ©tc nid)t fcegafjten, t)enn td> 

money (because I have no fjabe fein (Mfc> (roett id) fein (Mfc 

money). fyabe). 

He cannot come to your house, ($r fann ntd)t gu Sfynen fommett, 

for he has no time. fcenn er fjat nid)t 3eit. 

exercises. 144. 

Have you brought me the book which you promised me 1 — I 
have forgotten it. — Has your uncle brought you the handkerchiefs 
which he promised you ] — He has forgotten to bring me them. — 
Have you already written to your friend ] — I have not yet had time 
to write to him. — Have you forgotten to write to your parent 1 — 
I have not forgotten to write to him. — To whom does this house 
belong T— It belongs to the English captain whose son has written 
a letter to us. — Does this money belong to thee ? — It does belong 
to me. — From whom hast thou received it ? — I have received it 
from the men whose children you have seen. — To whom do those 
woods belong] — They belong to the king. — Whose horses are 
those] — They are ours. — Have you told your brother that I am 
waiting for him here? — I have forgotten to tell him so. — Is it 
your father or mine who is gone into the country 1 — It is mine. — 
Is it your baker or that of our friend who has sold you bread on 



181 

credit ] — It is ours. — Is that your son 1— He is ((£*> tft) not mine, he 
is my friend's. — Where is yours ] — He is at Dresden. — Does this 
cloth suit you ] — It does not suit me, have you no other 1 — I have 
some other; but it is dearer than this. — Will you show it to me 1— 
I will show it to you. — Do these boots suit your uncle ! — They do 
not suit him, because they are too dear. — Are these the boots of 
which you have spoken to us ] — They are the same.— Whose 
shoes are these ] — They belong to the gentleman whom you have 
seen this morning in my shop. — Does it suit you to go with us 1 — - 
It does not suit me. — Does it become you to go to the market ] — It 
does not become me to go thither. — Did you go on foot into the 
country 1 — It does not become me to go on foot, so that I went 
thither in a carriage. 

145. 

What is your pleasure, Sir 1 — I am inquiring after your father. 
— Is he at home ] — No, Sir, he is gone out. — What is your 
pleasure ] — I tell you that he is gone out. — Will you wait till he 
comes back again 1 — I have no time to wait. — Does this merchant 
sell on credit ] — He does not sell on credit. — Does it suit you to 
buy for cash ] — It does not suit me. — Where have you bought 
these pretty knives'? — I have bought them at the merchant's whose 
shop you saw yesterday. — Has he sold them to you on credit 1 — 
He has sold them to me for cash. — Do you often buy for cash ] — 
Not so often as you. — Have you forgotten anything here ? — I have 
forgotten nothing. — Does it suit you to learn this by heart ] — I 
have not a good memory, so that it does not suit me to learn by 
heart. 

146. 

Has this man tried to speak to the king? — He has tried to speak 
to him, but he has not succeeded in it. — Have you succeeded in 
writing a letter ? — I have succeeded in it. — Have those merchants 
succeeded in selling their horses 1 — They have not succeeded 
therein. — Have you tried to clean my inkstand. ] — I have tried, but 
have not succeeded in it. — Do your children succeed in learning 
the English ] — They do succeed in it. — Is there any wine in this 
cask ] — There is some in it (t*attn). — Is there any brandy in this 
glass T — There is none in it. — Is wine or water in it 1 — There is 
neither wine nor water in it. — What is there in it 1 — There is 
vinegar in it.— -Are there any men in your room 1 — There are some 
there. — Is there any one in the store-house] — There is no one 
there. — Were there many people in the theatre 1 — There were many 
tlisre. — Are there many children that will not play? — There are 
many that will not study, but few that will not play. — Hast thou 
cleaned my trunk ] — I have tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. 
-—Do you intend buying an umbrella'? — I intend buying one, if 
the merchant sells it me on credit. — Do you intend keeping mine 1 
—1 intend giving it back again to you, if I buy one. — Have you re* 



182 

turned the books to my brother? — I have not returned them yet to 
him. — How long do you intend keeping them-! — 1 intend keeping 
them till I have read them. — How long do you intend keeping my 
horse? — I intend keeping it till my father returns. — Have you 
cleaned my knife? — 1 have not had time yet, but I will do it this 
instant. — Have you made a fire 1 — Not yet, but I will make one 
(n>dd)C6) immediately. — Why have you not worked 1 — I have not 
yet been able. — What had you to do 1 — I had to clean your table, 
and to mend your thread stockings. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SIXTY-SECOND LESSON.— Zwi ttttb Btt\)]\%%lt 
Section. 



To run — part, past run. 



Thou runnest — he runs. 
To run away. 
Behind (a preposition). 

To be sitting behind the oven. 

He ran behind the oven. 
Where is he running to ] 
He is running behind the house. 
W^here has he run to 1 

The oven, the stove, 

the blow, the knock, 

the kick, 

the stab, 
Have you given that man a 

blow] 
I have given him one. 
A blow with a stick, 
beatings with a stick, 
the stab of a knife, 
the kick (with the foot), 
a blow (with the fist), 
blows (with the fist), 
the sword, 
the stab of a sword, 
the sabre, 



To push — pushed. 



£ a u f e n * — gclaufen (takes 
fetn for its auxiliary). Imperf. 
lief. 

£)u taufft — cr (duft. 

SBeaJaufcn*. 

Jptntcr (governs the dative and 

accusative). 
Winter bem £)fen ft§en*. Imperf 

fag. 
(St lief fytntet t>cn £)fctn 
2£ef)tn (duft er \ 
(St (duft fytntet bag &au& 
££o tft et Ijtngelaufen ? 

t)ct £)fen ; 

bet ©d)(aa,, bet £tet> ; 

bet ©top/ bet Stitt; 

bet ©ttd). 

£aben ©te btefem Sftanne etnen 

©cf)faa, gegeben ? 
3d) fyabe ifjm etnen gegefcen. 
etn Sdblag nut bem <Stetfe ; 
@tecffcbldgc, (Stecfytuget ; 
bet 9fle fierjttd) ; 
bet Stttt (nut bem Jupe) ; 
etn @cf)(ag (nut bet gaufi) ; 
$aujtfd)(age ; 
ticv £)egen ; 
bet jDcgcnftfd) ; 
bet <Sdbet. 

© t o p c n * — g e ft o p c n. Imperf, 
fit eg. 



183 



Thou pushest — he pushes. 

To beat. 
Why do you push him ] 
I push him, because he has 

pushed me. 
Has this soldier given you a 

blow] 
He has given me a blow with 

the fist. 
I gave him a kick. 



S)u fWpefi — ec ftflgt. 

spciigetn (fcbfagen*). 

SBarum frozen <Ste ifyn ? 

3d) ftopc tfyn, tuetf er mid) gcftopen 

fat. 

£at Sbnen biefcr ©olbat etnen 

<Sd)lag gegeben ? 
(St fjat mtr etnen ©djfog nut tec 

gauft gegeben*. 
3d) gab ttjm etnen Srttt. 



The shot or the report of a gun, fcct Jfintenfdjufi ; 



the shot of a pistol, 
the powder, 
the officer, 
the shot, 

To shoot — part, past shot. 
Imp erf. shot, 



To fire a gun. 

To fire a pistol. 

To fire at some one. 
I have fired at a bird. 

To fire a gun at some one. 

1 have fired (shot) at that bird 

I have fired twice. < 

I have fired three times. 
I have fired several times. 
How many times have you fired 1 
How T many times have you fired 

at that bird 1 
I have fired at it several times. 



I have heard a shot. 

He has heard the report of a 
pistol. 

We have heard a clap of thun- 
der. 

The clap of thunder, 



fcet g)tjlolcnfd)ug ; 
bat spufocc ; 
fcet £)ffmet ; 
fcec <Sd)ufL 

<S d> i e fj e n * — g e f d) o f f e n. 
f*ep. 

{(Stnen gltntenfdjup tfjun*. Imp. 
m. 
Sine gttnte to6fd)tepen* or abfd)tes 
Jen*. 
r(5unen sptjMcnfdjufi tfiun*. 
< Sine ^ptftele lostaffen* or foefdjte* 
C fen*. 
2Cuf 3emanfcen febtepen*. 
3d) f)abe auf einen SSoget gefebeffen. 
9?ad) Semanfcem nut bet glinte 

fdjiepen*. 
(Stncn gttntenfdjufi nad) Semcmfcem 

tf)un*. 
3d) babe nad) fctefem SSogel mit tec 
•gttnte gefdjoflcn. 



3d) F)abe gwetmal gefebeffen. 
3d) babe $roet gttntcnfd)uffe getfyan. 
3d) babe t>ret g ttntenfcbtifTe getban. 
3d) babe etntge gltntenfcbuffe getban. 
££te mefaial baben @te gefebeffen ? 
£Bte tuelmal baben ©te nad) fctefem 

SSoget gefebeffen ? 
3d) babe t>etfd)tefcene 9M nad) tfjm 

gefebeffen. 
3d) fjabe einen $(tntenfcbup gebott. 
(St f)at einen g)tfxo(cnfd)up gebort. 

2Btt fyaben etnen £)ennetfd)tag ge* 

bort. 
fcet £>cnnerfd)tag. 



184 



EXERCISES. 147. 



Do you intend buying a carriage] — I cannot buy one, for I 
have not yet received my money. — Mast I go to the theatre ] — You 
must not go thither, for it is very bad weather. — Why do you not 
go to my brother 1 — It does not suit me to go to him ; for I cannot 
yet pay him what I owe him. — Why does this officer give this 
man a stab with his sword ] — He gives him a stab with his sword, 
because the man (fctcfcr) has given him a blow with the fist. — 
Which of these two pupils begins to speak ] — The one who is 
studious begins to speak. — What does the other do who is not so] 
— He also begins to speak, but he is neither able to write nor to 
read. — Does he not listen to what you tell him ] — He does not 
listen to it, if (See Rule of Syntax, Lesson XLVII.) I do not give 
him a beating (<Stcc!pruQc(). — What does he do when (nxnn) you 
speak to him ] — He sits behind the oven, without saying a word. 
— Where does that dog run to] — It runs behind the house. — 
What did it do when you gave it a beating ] — It barked and ran 
behind the oven. — Wliy does your uncle kick that poor dog ] — 
Because it (otcfcr) has bitten his little boy. — W^hy has your servant 
run away] — I gave him a beating, so that he has run away. — 
Why do those children not work] — Their master has given them 
blows with the fist, so that they will not work (arbetten ruction).— 
Wliy has he given them blows with the fist] — Because they have 
been disobedient. — Have you fired a gun ] — I have fired three 
times. — At whom did you fire ] — I fired at a bird which sat oa a 
tree. — Have you fired a gun at that man ] — I have fired a pistol at 
him. — Why have you fired a pistol at him ] — Because he gave me 
a stab with his sword. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SIXTY.THIRD LESSON.— Hm amir zcttylQQtc 
Cation. 

To cast — past part. cast. £& e t f c n * — gerootfen. Im- 
perii". n> a r f. 

Thou castest — he casts. £)u rmrfft — cr rmtft 

To cast an eye upon some one ©inert 23(tc£ (Die 2Cugcn) cmf demons 

or something. ben ofcet etnxiS roerfen*. 

Have you cast an eye upon that £aben <Ste etnen 23licf auf fcricfcS 

book ] ®ud) geroerfen ? 

I have cast an eye upon it. 3d) babe etnen 23(tcf fcarauf ge* 

rucrfen. (See Obs. A. Lesson 
XXIX.) 

To throw — thrown. 805 e r f e n* — cjerpotfetu 
Threw. 2Batf. 



185 



Have you thrown a stone into $abcn (Sic ctncn (Stein in ben #(ug 

the river? geroerfen ? 

I have thrown one into it. 3d) fyabe ctncn fytnctn cjcroorfen. 

(Ofo. A. Lesson L.) 



Now. 

Where does the stone lie now 1 
It lies in the river. 

To draw, to pull. 
To drag. 



The evil, the pain, 
To hurt. 



To hurt some one. 

The injury, the damage, 
To cause (to do). 

To prejudice some one. 

It is a pity. 

Have you hurt that man % 

I have not hurt him. 

Why have you hurt that man 1 

I have not hurt him. 
Does this hurt you ? 
It does hurt me. 
Have I hurt you ? 
You have not hurt me. 

Harm. 

Have I ever done you any harm? 

On the contrary. 
No, on the contrary, you have 

done me good. 
I have never done harm to any 

one. 
To do good to anybody. 

To show — shown. 



9?un. 

9Bo ticgt nun ber (Stein ? 
(St Uegt in tern (tm) -g'tuffe. 

3 1 e fj e n *♦ Imperf. $ c 3. 

<Sd)l epp en. 

tail Setb. 
SBcf) tbun*. 
' Scmcmbem ctn>a$ $u ^eibetr)un** 

Semanbem cin 2ett> tfyun*. 
Semanbem SBofe* tbun*. 
Semanbem 23ofc$ 5iif%cn. 
t)cv <Sd)aben. 

3ufti a,en, t>etur fad) en. 

Semanbem (Scfyaben $ufu$en. 

t @$ i|1 <Sd)abc. 

jpaben (Sic biefem 9}?anne etroag p 

£eibe cjetfyan ) 
3d) babe t&m md)t$ $u Ce'tbe ge* 

tfyan. 
SBorum bafrcn (Sic btefcm Stfanng 

cin £etb gctfjan ] 
3* babe tfyn nid)t$ -S3fc'fc$ gctfyan* 
Sfjut bag Sfcnen met) ] 
(5$ tljut mtr roef). 
£afcc id) Sbnen rocb a/tfyan ? 
(Sic ftaben mtr ntci>t mel) gctfjatn 

S3ofe$. 

£abe id) Sfyncn jc 936*fe$ getfjan ? 

3m ®cgcntfjct(. 

9?ein, tm ®ea,entf)ctt, (Sic fjafcen mir 

©uteS getfyan (errutcfen). 
3d) fyafce ntc Semanbem etroaS $u 

£etb gctfyan. 
Semanbem ©ute$ tfyun* (crroet* 

fen*). 
(Srroetfen* — etnriefen. Imperf. ct* 

tvie$. 



To be good for the health, to be Sutva'ajtd) 
wholesome. 



That does me good. 



}f«n*. 

C 2)te$ tbut mtr roofyf. 
C 3>tc$ ift nut: $utraa,(td). 



186 

What does the servant do with ££a$ mod)t fcer SSetnentC nut feme*, 

his broom 1 Sefen 1 

He sweeps the room with it. (St hi)vt &a$ Simmer banut au$. 

What does he wish to make out ££a* will et au$ fciefem £ol$e ma* 

of this wood 1 cfyen 1 

He does not wish to make any- (St; will md)t$ fcarauS macfyen. 

thing of it. 

To pass by the side of some one. 2Cn Semdntem t>otbetger)cn *• 

I pass by the side of him. Set) gefje an tfjm oorbct. 

Have you passed by the side of ©int> @ic an metnem 23tut>er ttors 

my brother ? betgegangen ] 

I have passed by the side of him. 3d) bin an ifjm Dorfcetgegangen. 

To throw away. ££egn>erfen*. 

He has thrown away his money. <$r r)at fctn ($5e(t> roeggeroorfen. 

Before. 33 r (dative and accusative). 

To pass before a place. SSor etnem Drte ttotbetgefyen *. 

To pass by a place. 2ln cincm £)rte t>erbeiger)en *• 

He has passed before my house. (St ift t)0t meinem £>aufe Dorbetgc* 

gangen. 
I have passed by the theatre. 3d) bin am Sweater DorOetgegans 

gen. 
He has passed before me. (St ift Dor mir DOtbctgcgcmgen. 

exercises. 148. 

How many times have you shot at that bird 1 — I have shot at it 
twice. — Have you killed it ] — I have killed it at the second shot. — 
Have you killed that bird at the first shot 1 — I have killed it at the 
fourth. — Do you shoot at the birds which you (see) upon the houses, 
or at those which you see in the gardens'? — I shoot neither at 
those which I (see) upon the houses nor at those which I see in the 
gardens, but at those which I perceive upon the trees. — How many 
times have the enemies fired at us ? — They have fired at us several 
times. — Have they killed any one ] — They have killed no one. — 
Have you a wish to shoot at that bird 1 — I have a desire to shoot at 
it. — Why do you not shoot at those birds ] — J cannot, for I have 
no powder. — When did the officer fire ? — He fired when his 
soldiers fired. — How many birds have you shot at? — I have shot 
at all that I have perceived, but I have killed none, for my powder 
was not good. 

149. 

Have you cast an eye upon that man 1 — I have cast an eye upon 
him. — Has your uncle seen you ] — I have passed by the side of 
him, and he has not seen me, for he has sore eyes.— Has that man 
hurt you 1 — No, Sir, he has not hurt me. — What must one do in 
order to be loved 1 — One must do good to those that have done us 



187 

harm. — Have we ever done you harm \ — No, you have on the 
contrary done us good. — Dc you do harm to any one? — I do no 
one any harm 1 — Why have you hurt Ihese children 1 — I have not 
hurt them. — Havel hurt you] — You have not hurt me, but your 
children (have). — What have they done to you 1 — They dragged 
me into your garden in order to beat me. — Have they beaten you 1 
— They have not beaten me, for I ran away. — Is it your brother 
who has hurt my son ] — No, Sir, it is not my brother, for he has 
never hurt any one. — Have you drunk of (ttttt) that wine ? — I 
have drunk of it, and it has done me good . — What have you done 
with my book'? — I have placed it on the table. — Where does it lie 
now r— It lies upon he table. — Where are my gloves 1 — They are 
lying upon the chair. — Where is my stick? — They ($ftan) have 
thrown it into the river. — Who has thrown it into it ] (See end 
of Lesson XXXIV.). 



SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. — but mtb Spigot* 
lection. 

To spend time in something. £>te Sett nut etroaS ^ubrtngen * or 

rjinbrtncjeri*. 
Imperf. brought. S3rad)tc. 

What do you spend your time in? SBomit bttngcn @ie tie Sett $u ? 

Rule. A demonstrative, relative, or interrogative pro- 
noun is never used with a preposition, when it relates 
to an indeterminate thing. Instead of the pronoun, one 
of the adverbs ba, tt>0 is joined to the preposition ; thus : 
oaran, for an ba$ ; tt>oran, for an tt)a$ ; n>oranf, for auf 
tva$ ; tvomit, for mil toa$, &c. (See Obs. B. and C, 
Lesson LII.) 

I spend my time in studying. 3cb brtnge t)tc 3ctt mlt ©rufctten $u. 
What has he spent his time in ] S&emtt fjat cr trie Sett $ugebracbt ? 

To miss, to fail. 33 e r f c f) i e n, t> c r a b f a u m c n. 

f SDcr ^emfmemn fjat t>a$ ©clt) $u 
The merchant has failed to J bttngen serabfSumt (tvtfebtt). 
bring the money. 1 £)cr .ftemfmann feat wrabfaumt (ttcrs 

[ feb(t), bag <3tli> gu btingeiu 
V r ou have missed your turn. @te baben Sbre 5Hctbe wrfebtt. 

You have failed to come to me <§ti rjoben Dctfeblt, fctcfen Bergen $U 
this morning. nur .ut femmcru 

The turn, t)tc <Kett)i\ 

To hear. $ o r e n. 

To hear of some one. 23 on Senumbem rjb'ten. 



188 

Have you heard of my friend 1 $abm (Ste tton mctncm $mtnbe ge* 

Ijort? 
[ have heard of him. 3d) habc Don tf)in gcbort. 

Of whom have you heard ] &>cn nxm \jabcn @te-ge()8rt? 

Have you heard nothing new ] £cit>en (g>tc nid)t6 SReu<£ ge()(5rt ? 
I hear that your father has ar- 3d) l)ore, focifi 3f)r $3atet angefom* 
rived. men ift. 

To assure. 23 c r ft d) c r n (governs the dat.). 

Obs. The verb fcerftcfyern requires the dative of the 
person, when followed by the conjunction ba$, expressed 
or understood ; otherwise it takes the accusative of the 
person, and the genitive of the thing, or the dative of 
the person and the accusative of the thing. 

!3d) t>crfid)cre @te metncS SBetftan* 
3d) »crftd)ere bfynen metnen 23et* 
ffemb. 

!d5 c f cf> e fj en* — g cfd) e F) c n 
r c n. Imperf. ix> i b e r f u F) r. 
To happen, to meet with. 23 c q e g n e n (has fetn* for its 

auxiliary). 

The fortune, happiness, ba$ ®(ucf ; 

the misfortune, ba$ llngtucf. 

A great misfortune has happened. (Ss tft ein grefe$ Vtngtucf gefdfeefjen. 
He has met with a great misfor- (5$ ift ibm ctn grefeS Ungfurf begegs 

tune. net (nribcrfafyrcn). 

1 have met with your brother. 3d) bin Sftrcm $tubet begegnet. 

Are there many horses in this vil- ©tbt e$ mcl ^pfetbe in biefem Detfe ? 
lage ? 

Mere. Dafe (Oft or bci. 

There is not a single good horse (S£ gtbt fetn etn^tgcS guteS $3ferb t>a* 
there. fclbft. 

The village, ba» £>otf; 

single, citing. 

Are there many learned men in ($5ibt eS met (Mcfjrre in Jrcmfrctcf) ? 

France ? 
There are a good many there. G?t> gtbt fef)t Mete ba. 
There are no apples this year. (&$ gtbt feine 2Tcpfc( btefeS Safjr. 

To 6e o/ wse, f o £e o-ood. S a u g e n. 
To be good for something. 3u etrcaS taugen. 



189 

Of what use is that? 2Be$u tougt ba$ ? (Ofo. C, Les- 

son LIL, and Rule, page 

187.) 
It is good for nothing. (S$ tcmgt $u ntd)t^. 

The good for nothing fellow, t>er Scuigcnicfyts ; 

the fault, the defect, fccr Jefyler. 
Is the stuff which you have 3ft t>er Sato,, fcen @te gcfauft fyafon, 
bought good ] gut? 

no; 8 £ S&tSSS^ } *««< « ^ «£* 

EXERCISES. 150. 

T do not see my gloves ; where are they ] — They are lying in 
the river. — Who has thrown them into it 1 — Your servant, because 
they were no longer good for anything. — What have you done with 
your money ? — I have bought a house with it (taunt). — What has 
the joiner done with tnat wood ] — He has made a table and two 
chairs of it. — What has the tailor done with the cloth which you 
gave him? — He has made clothes of it for (fur with the accus.) 
your children and mine. — What has the baker done with the flour 
which you sold him ] — He has made bread of it for you and me. — 
Have the horses been found ] — They have been found. — Where 
have they been found ] — They have been found behind the wood, 
on this side (Lesson L.) of the river. — Have you been seen by 
anybody ? — I have been seen by nobody. — Have you passed by 
anybody] — I passed by the side of you, and you did not see me. — 
Has any one passed by the side of you ] — No one has passed by 
the side of me. 

151. 

Do you expect (Lesson XLVII.) any one ] — I do expect my 
cousin, the officer. — Have you not seen him ] — I have seen him 
this morning ; he has passed before my house. — What does this 
young man wait for (Obs. C., Lesson LIL and page 187) ?— 
He waits for money. — Art thou waiting for anything] — I am 
waiting for my book. — Is this young man waiting for his money ] 
— He is waiting for it. — Has the king passed (in the carriage) 
here (bier roertu't) ? — He has not passed here, but before the the- 
atre. — Has he not passed before the new fountain ] — He has 
passed there ; but I have not seen him. — What do you spend your 
time in ] — I spend my time in studying. — What does your brother 
spend his time in ] — He spends his time in reading and playing. — 
Does this man spend his time in working 1 — He is a good for 
nothing fellow ; he spends his time in drinking and playing. — 
What did you spend your time in, when you were at Berlin] — 
When I was at Berlin, I spent my time in studying, and riding on 
Horseback. — What do your children spend their time in ] — They 
spend their time in learning. — Can you pay me what you owe me ] 
—I cannot pay it to you, for our bailiff has failed to bring me my 



190 

money. — Why have you breakfasted without me? — You failed to 
come at nine o'clock, so that we have breakfasted without you. — 
Has the merchant brought you the stuff which you bought at his 
house (bet tf)m) ?-— He has failed to bring it to me.— Has he sold 
it to you on credit 1 — He has sold it to me, on the contrary, for 
cash. — Do you know those men 1 — I do not know them; but I 
think that they (cS) are good for nothing fellows, for they spend 
their time in playing. — Why did you fail to come to my father 
this morning ? — The tailor did not bring me the coat which he 
promised me, so that I could not go to him. 

152. 

Have you heard of any one ?— -I have not heard of any one, 
for I have not gone out this morning. — Have you not heard of the 
officer who has killed a soldier ? — I have not heard of him. — Have 
you heard of my brothers ? — I have not heard of them. — Of whom 
has your cousin heard ? — -He has heard of a man to whom a 
misfortune has happened. — Why have your scholars not done 
(gemad)t) the exercises'? — I assure you that they have done them. 
— What have you done with my book ? — I assure you that I have 
not seen it. — Have you had my knives 1 — I assure you that I have 
not had them. — Has your uncle arrived already ? — He has not 
arrived yet. — Will you wait till he returns ? — I cannot wait, for I 
have long letters to write. — What have you heard new ? — I have 
heard nothing new. — Has the king assured you of his assistance? 
— He has assured me of it (beffen, Obs. Lesson XVI.). — What has 
happened to you? — A great misfortune has happened to me. — 
What? — I have met with my greatest enemy, who has given me 
a blow with his stick. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SIXTY.FIFTH LESSON.— Mtlf ntti BCt^XQBtC 
Cation* 

How long is it since ? ££te fan$e tft c$ febon, tap ? 

It is long since. (5$ tft fcfyori (ange, bap. 

Is it long since you breakfasted ? 3ft e$ febon (angc, bap @te gefrubjfucft 

baben ? 
It is not long (it is a short time) (£$ tft ncd) ntcbt (ange, t>a$ tcb Qefrufys 

since I breakfasted. ftticft rjabe. 

It is a great while since I break- (5$ tft febon febt (cutge, t)d$ id) gc* 

fasted. ftufylucft babe. 

I breakfasted an hour ago. 3>d) babe t>ot etna <Stunbe geftub* 

fiti*. 

Obs. A. In speaking of time, the word ©tltttbe, 



191 

hour,* must be employed, and not the word Ufyr, which 
signifies watch. 

Two hours ago. 95 or gnw! (Stunben. 

Is it long since you saw him 1 3ft eg fd)cn fange, baj} @te tfm gefc* 

ben fyafcen? 
How long is it since you saw SGBtc (ange tft e£, tap Sie tf)tt gefe&en 

him ? fyaben 1 

I raw him a year ago. 3d) babe tfyn ror etnem Safyrc gefe* 

fyen. 
Two years ago. 9Scr $roct 3afjrcn. 

An hour and a half ago. £>or anbertt)al& (Stunben. 
Two hours and a half ago. ?8or brtttf)at(> ©tunben. 

Is it long since you are in 3ft c$ fcfyen fange, bap ©te In granf- 

Francel rctd) finb ? 

Have you been long in France ] f (Stnb ©te fcfyon (ange in grants 

retd) ? 
He has been in Paris these three C f (5r tft felt bret 3af)ren in tyavii. 

years. £+ G£r tft fcfton bret 3afyre in $)ari§ 

How long is it since he was SGBte (ange tft e$, bap er fyter war 1 

here 1 
He was here a fortnight ago. (St war Dot Merge r)n Sagen rjter. 

It is but a year since. (£$ tft erft etn 3ar)r, bap. 

Obs. B. But is translated by mtr (Lesson XIX. # ' 
when it relates to a quantity, and by evft when to time. 

It is more than a year since. ($g tft (anger aU etn 3abr, bap. 
It is hardly six months since. <£•$ fint) faum fed)* Senate, bai' ( . 
It is nearly two years since. (5$ fint) ungefafyr $roet Safyre, bnp. 
It is almost a year since. (5$ tft balb etn 3a br, baj}. 

I have been living here these two f 3$ rcofyne fett groet Saljren bier. 

years. 
How long have you had that f £Bte (ange (jafcen ©te fraS $)ferb ? 

horse ] 
J I have already had it these five f 3d) fycibe *$ fcr>on funf 3af)re. 

years. 
It is already more than three (SS fint) fefyen mefyr a(£ brct Senate 

months since. bap. 

I have not seen him for a year. 3cl) f)at*e tfyn in etnem Saljre ntct)t 

gefefyro. 

Saon, almost. 93 a t b. 

A few hours ago. 83 or etntgen ©tunben. 

Half an hour ago. S3 or einet l)alt>en (Stttnbe. 

A quarter of an hour ago. 85cr etner 33terte(ftunbe. 



• £>ie <Stunfoe, the hour, is a feminine noun, and has tt in the plural, 



* 



192 

I hare seen him more than twen- 3d) f)ak tfyn mcfjt cil$ $rocm$tgmal 

ty times. gefefyen. 

More than a hundred times. 9J2et)t a(6 fyunbcrtmal. 

Since. <& c t 1 (a preposition governing 

the dative). 

JTow Zorcg- / f ^ c * * ^ a n n ? 

How long has he been here ? f (Sett warm if! ct fytet: ? 
These three days. j @ f tt bret Scicjen. 

This month. f (Sett etnem denote. 

To cost. & o ft c n (is an impersonal verb 

governing the dative of tha 
person). 

How much does this book cost SBiemet feftet 3t)nen btefcS 93uc^? 

you? 

T4 , ,, A r (SS fefict nut mertftalb Abater. 

It costs me three crowns and aS ^ mn mfe ^ ^ ^ ^^ 

halt ' C Sfcilet. 

f *Dtcfcr Sij$ fojiet tfym adbt^atO (M* 
This table costs him seven! ben. 

florins and a half. ] liefer Stfd) feftet tfjm ficben unb 

( etnen f)aU>cn ©ulben. 

O&s. B. The adjective fyctlb, half, is declined when 
before a substantive ; but it is not declined in fraction- 
al numbers, as atibertfyatb, one and a half, compounded 
of ber cmbere (jweite), the second, and fyatfr, half; britt* 
fyctl6, two and a half, compounded of ber britte, the 
third, and tyalb, half. 

To purchase (to buy). <5 t n 6 a u f e n. 

What have you purchased to- £Ba$ fyaben <Ste fyeute eingefauft? 

day? 
I have purchased three pair of 3d) 6at»c tret $)aat @cr)ur)e unb 

shoes, and two pair of boots. groct 5)aar Sttefet etngefauft. 
Have you purchased anything Robert @ic (jcute etroctg cingefauft 1 

to-day 1 

Obs. C. The names of weights, measures, and 
quantities, as well as the word SJiamt, man, meaning a 
soldier, are not used in the plural, when preceded by 
a noun of number. 

My father has bought twenty OTetn SSater fjat 3tt)an$tg $)funb 

pounds of sugar. 3uc!er gefrmff.. 

Three quires of paper. ©ret <8 u d) papier. 

A. regiment of a thousand men. (Sin Regiment t>on taufenb 9# a tt tt. 



193 

The pound (weight), * t>n$ 9)funt> ; 

the dozen, bas £)u(jcn& ; 

the pair, bo6 tyaav ; 

the quire of paper, t>as 35ucb papier ; 

the foot (measure), fcet Jug, fcer <Sd)Ur) ? 

the inch, t>er 3ctt ; 

the regiment, t>a* Regiment ; 

the ring, t>ct 9Uncj ; 

the picture, fca$ ©cmalbe. 

EXERCISES. 153. 

Have you ever been in this village ? — I have been there several 
times. — Are there good horses in it ? — There is not a single one in 
it. — Have you ever been in that country 1 — I have been there once, 
— Are there many learned men there ? — There are many there, but 
they spend their time in reading. — Are there many studious chil- 
dren in that village ? — There are some, but there are also others 
who will not study. — Are the peasants of this village able to read 
and write ] — Some are able to read, others to write and not to read, 
and many both to read and to write ; there are a few who arc 
neither able to read nor to write. — Have you done the exercises ? — 
We have done them. — Are there any faults in them ? — There are 
no faults in them, for we have been very assiduous. — Has your 
friend many children? — He has only one, but who is a good for 
nothing fellow, for he will not study. — In what does he spend his 
time ] — He spends his time in playing and running. — Why does 
his father not punish him 1 — He has not the courage to punish 
him. — What have you done with the stuff which you bought? — 
I have thrown it away, for it was good for nothing. — Have you 
thrown away your apples'? — I tasted (them), and found them very- 
good, so that I have eaten them. 

154. 

Have you been long in Paris'? — These four yeaw. — Has your 
brother been long in London 1 ? — He has been there these ten years. 
— Is it long since you dined 1 — It is long since I dined, but not 
long since I supped. — How long is it since you supped] — It is 
two hours and a half. — Is it long since you received a letter from 
your father ? — It is not long since I received one. — How long is it 
since you received a letter from your friend who is in Germany?— 
It is three months since I received one. — Is it long since you spoke 
to the man whose son has lent you money 1 — It is not long since I 
spoke to him. — Is it long since you saw your parents 1 — It is a 
great while since I saw them. — Has the son of my friend been 
living long in your house ?— -He has been living there a fortnight 
(meqcfjn Sage). — How long have you had these books'? — I have 
had them the^e three months. — How long is it since your cousin 
set out ] — It is more than a month since he set out. — What is be» 
9 



194 

come of the man who spoke English so well ? — I do not know 
what is become of him, for it is a great while since I saw him. — > 
Is it long since you heard of the officer who gave your friend a 
stab with his sword] — It is more than a year since I heard of him. 
— How long have you been learning German? — I have been learn- 
ing it only these three months. — Are you already able to speak it ? 
-—You see that I am beginning to speak it. — Have the children of 
the French noblemen been learning it long 1 — They have been 
learning it these five years, and they do not yet begin to speak. — 
Why can they not speak- it ] — They cannot speak it, because they 
are learning it badly. — Why do they not learn it well"? — They 
have not a good master, so that they do not learn it well. 

155. 

Is it long since you saw the young man who learnt German with 
(bci) the same master with whom we learnt it ] — I have not seen 
him for nearly a year. — How long is it since that child ate 1 — It 
ate a few minutes (Lesson XL VII. Note d ) ago. — How long is it 
since those children drank ] — They drank a quarter of an hour ago. 
— How long has your friend been in Spain ] — He has been there 
this month. — How often have you seen the king ] — I saw him more 
than ten times when I was in Paris. — When did you meet my 
brother *? — I met him a fortnight ago. — Where did you meet him ] — 
In (2Cuf) the great square (53la£) before the theatre. — Did he do you 
any harm 1 — He did me no harm, for he is a very good boy. — Has 
your son long been able to read ] — These two days only. — With 
(23et) whom has he learnt it ] — He has learnt it with (bet) the Ger- 
man tutor. — How long have you been spending your time in study- 
ing ] — Nearly these twenty years. — Have you purchased anything 
to-day ] — I have purchased something. — What have you bought 1 
— I have bought three casks of wine and thirty pounds of sugar. — 
Have you not bought any stockings ] — I have bought nine pair oi 
them. — Have you also bought handkerchiefs 1 — I have bought two 
dozen of them. — Why have you not bought gold rings ? — I could 
not buy anything more, for I had no more money. — Are there many 
soldiers in your country 1 — There is a regiment of three thousand 
men there. — How long have I kept your cousin's money 1 — Yoe 
have kept it almost a year. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON.— 0ect)0 ntib 0*d)?lg0te 
ftertion. 

Just now. (Be c&cn. 

* have ju*t aeen your brother 3d) fja&e fo cfcen SFjten SSrutot ge|e« 

ben. 



195 

He has just written. (?r hat fc cfren gcfcftttefcen. 

The men have just arrived. £>ie Scute put) fe cOertangefommctu 

To spend money* 2£u$gebcn*. 

How much have you spent to- SQSicmd fjaben ®tc fycute mtSgcQCben ? 
day] 

To spend {to eat, to consume). SS c r ,3 e f) r e n. 

What am I to pay ] f ££as foafcc id) t>crgef)rt ? 

How much has he spent at the f jffiumci f)ot et bet tern SQBtrt^e 

inn ? wqcbrt ? 

He has fifty crowns a month to f (£r t)at ten $ftcnat fiinfjtg &{)flkr 

live upon. $u MTfifytin, 

To squander, to dissipate, SSerfcfytuentcn. 
to lavish. 

He has squandered all his (£r fjert feifl 0/m$eS SScrmflgcn r>er* 

wealth. febroentct. 

The landlord, the innkeeper, ter &£trtf)'; 
the wealth, the fortune, tas iOcrmogcn ; 

j entire, whole. 30 n$. 

C\ SBcbct finfc (Sic? 9DBo ftnt <§u 
j What countryman are you 1 < " fyer ? 

C 2Ba$ fur cin £ant$mann a ftnt ©if ?- 



From Venice. USen (au$) SScnettg. 
From London. S3 en (cms) Conten. 
I am from Dresden. 3d) bin aus £>tcsten# 

O&s. A. The syllable er is the characteristic termi- 
nation of the masculine gender, b and signifies the per- 
son that performs or is accustomed to perform the thing 
expressed by the verb. This syllable joined to the 
name of a town or country, forms a substantive de- 
noting the man born in such a town or country, Ex. 

He is a saddler, cr if! ctn ©atfllet ; 

a baker, etn fB&ftt f 

a locksmith, ctn ^cfyoijer; 

the lock, fca$ @d)toj* ; 

the saddle, ter (Sattel ; 

the key, ter ©djttiffel* 

* The plural of bet Scmbgmatttt, the countryman, one of the same country, 
ia £cutbeleute. Its feminine is £anb§manntn, country-woman, a woman of the 
same country. This word must not be mistaken for ber Scmbmctun, the coun- 
tryman, farmer, rustic, the plural of which is £cmbleute. 

b For this reason most substantives of this termination are of the mascu- 
line gender. 

c Derived from Bctcfen, to bake, 



196 



He is from Berlin, 

Are you an Englishman] 

Whence do you cornel 
I come from Paris. 



t (St tft cin 2Sct(inct. 
@inb &t cin (£ngtcmt>ct ? 

( 2£of)cr fcuimen @te ? 
\ 2Bu fonmien ©ie bcr ? 

3d) fommc t>on s patt*. 



£ £) t c n c n (governs the dative). 
To serve, to wait upon. < JKcMcncn (governs the acctt- 

^ sative). 
To serve some one, or tc wait 3 e m a n t> e m t> i e n e ru 



upon some one. 
To be in one's service. 

Has he been in your service 1 
Does he serve you well ] 
He serves me very well. 



33 c t 3 c m a n t> c m t> t e n c n. 

£at cr kti Sbncn client ? 
JBefctent cr <&k .gut ? 
(St bctuent unci) jcf)t gut. 



This is to no purpose (of no use), f £)a£ fctent $u ntd)t5. 

Do you choose any of it ] 

I do not like it. 

It will not do for me. 



To spoil. 

Thou spoilest — he spoils. 

You have spoiled my book. 
My book is spoiled. 

Has he spoiled my hat ] 



t £ann id) Sfoncn bcimit fcicnen ? 
> f ®amit tft mir ntcfytcjcbicnr. 

33crfc>cr(>cn* (verb. act. and 

neut. irreg.). 
3 u © d) a n b c n m a d) c n (a vtil- 
L gar expression). 

2)u DcrbirOft, cr Dcrfcttfct. (Imp. 

t>crt>arb.) 
(Sic rjaben mctn ffiucr) scrfcorkn. 
9)Mn SBucb tft wr&orbcn ($u ©c&an* 

fcen cjcmad)t). 
$at cr roeinen £ut pcrborfccn ($u 

^crjanben gemad)t) ? 

93 cfdjff btgen. 

©tefet 4but ffefet Sbnen gut. 
SXBie ftcbt mir t)icfcr £ut? 
(St ftcf>t 3fyncn nid)t gut. 

££unt>crfd)6n. 



To damage. 

That hat fits you well. 
How does this hat fit me? 
It does not fit you. 

Most lovely, charming. 

Admirably. 

' To dress, to Jit, to sit well. Si ( e 1 1> e n. 

Obs. B. The verb ffetben, when it signifies to Jit, to 
sit well, is neuter ; but when it means to dress, to clothe, 
it is active, and governs the accusative in both signi- 
fications. 



* OTer is the genitive plural of the word all, all. 
Joined to the superlative to giye J»* more strength. 



It is sometimes thus 



197 

That hat fits you admirably well. £)tefcr. £ut fletfcet @te otlcrltcbjl. 

That coat fits him. sOJcfer $ccf ftoitet ifjn gut. 

My father clothes me. D3ktn SScttcr Hcjftct mid). 

God clothes the poor. ©ett flctfcet tic 2Crmen. 

The man with the blue coat. £)ct Sttarm nut t)cm bfauen .Rlcfte. 

How was the child dressed? S&tc war t)as £tnt> geftetftct? 

It was dressed in green. f ®g roar griin geflctfcct. 

How large] Uu^p, 

Of what size 1 J J H 

How high 1 of what height ] SBtc f)Cd) ? 

How deep ] of what depth 1 33Me tief ? 

Of what height is his house ? 3£tc f)ed) tft petti #cm$ ? 

It is nearly thirty feet high. ©5 tft una/fahr fcrctfltg $up r)odv 

(Lesson LXV. Ofo. C.) 

True. 2B a r> r. 

. s it true that his house has been 3jt eg roafyr, bap fetn #au$ ot)ge« 

burnt ] brannt tft ? 

It is true. (£•$ tft vuabr. 

Is it not ] (meaning, Is it not f 9itd)t ivafyt ? 
true !-) 

The philosopher, t>ct SBctttttftfe, tec $>r;t(efopr) (gen. 

en). 

EXERCISES. 156. 

Who is the man who has just spoken to you 1 — He is a learned 
man. — What has the shoemaker just brought] — He has brought the 
boots and shoes which he has made us. — Who are the men that 
have just arrived ] — They are philosophers. — Of what country are 
they 1 — They are from London. — Who is the man who has just 
started 1 — He is an Englishman, who has squandered away (rers 
fdnvcnh't) all his fortune in France. — What countryman are you 1 — 
I am a Spaniard, and my friend is an Italian. — Wilt thou go for 
the locksmith ] — Why must I go for the locksmith 1 — He (J)crfc(tu') 
must make rne a key, for I have lost the one belonging to my room 
(fcen utilities 3tmm?r$). — Where did your uncle, dine yesterday 1 — 
He dined at the innkeeper's. — How much did he spend ] — He spent 
three florins. — How much has he a month to live upon 1 — He has 
two hundred florins a month to live upon. — Must I go for the sad- 
dler?— You must go for him, for he must mend the saddle. — Have 
you seen any one at the market 1 — I have seen a good many people 
there. — How were they dressed 1 — Some were dressed in blue, 
some in green, some in yellow, and several in red. 

157. 

Who are those men 1 — Tne one who is dressed in grey is my 
neighbour, and the one with the black coat the physician, whose 
son has given my neighbour a blow with a stick. — Who is the man 



198 



with the green coat? — He is one of my relations. — Are you froia 
Berlin] — No, I am from Dresden. — How much money have your 
children spent to-day] — They have spent hut little; they have 
spent but one florin. — Does that man serve you well ] — He does 
serve me well ; but he spends too much. — Are you willing to take 
this servant] — I am willing to take him if he will serve me. — Can 
I take this servant] — You can take him, for he has served me very 
well. — How long is it since he (first) served you] — It is but two 
months since. — Has he served you long ] — He has served me (for) 
six years. — How much did you give him a year (t>c? Jabrc*") ] — I 
gave him five hundred francs without clothing him. — Did he board 
(2(9) with (bet) you] — He did board with me. — What did you give 
him to eat]— I gave him whatever (ocn allem, rpaf) 1 ate. — Were 
you pleased with him ] — I was much (fefev) pleased with him. (See 
end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SIXTY.SEVENTH LESSON.— Qkbcn ntih sec^igste 

Action. 



To trust with. % n t> e r t r a u c n. 

To entrust, to confide, to commit 23 e r t r a u e n. 
in confidence. 

I trust you with my money. 3d) ttcrtrauc Sftrten metn (55ett an. 

He has trusted me with his mo- (Sr fyat mtr fern ©clt> atwrtraut. 
ney. 



I entrust you with a secret. 

To unbosom one's self to one. 

The secret, 
To keep anything secret. 

I traTfr kept it secret. 

Secret (adjective). 



3d) ttcrttaue Sfynen cin ©efjetms 

nip. 
f @td) Scmanbem t>ettraucn. 

tag ($ef)etnimfi (plur. e a ). 
(Strcag gefjetra fyatten. 

Imperf. I)ic(t. 
3d) babe eg gefjetm gefyaltcn. 
©efyctm. 



To pity. 

With all my heart. 
Do you pity that man] 



23 e H a g e n. 

f SScn gan$em £>cr$en. 
93eflagen (Sic ticfen 9)tonn ? 
I do pity him with all my heart. 3d) h'Hage ifjn sen gan^cm £ct* 

$en. 



To offer — offered. 
I offer it you. 



2C n b t e t e n * — angebcten. 
Imperf. b o t. 

3d) tucte eg S^ncn an. 



*■ Neuter nouns terminating hi ft, add e to all cases of the plural without 
•oftening the radical vowel. 



199 

From. % u r (a preposition governing 

the accusative). 

To take care of something. b rc .J^y* ^ l,uJL* 
° £ tetivas tn 2ld)t net)men*» 

Masc. Nwit. 

To take care of it, | ggj $£jf * | ^ ^ ^ 

To take care of the hat. Den &ttt in 2Cd)t ncbmen*. 

Imp erf. nabm. 
Do you take care of yourclothes? Sftcfymcn (£te Sbte jtletbet: in U$tl 
I do take care of them. f 3d) nel)tne fie in 2Cct)t. 

Obs. A, There are in German many substantives, 
adverbs and other words and expressions which form 
one signification with the verb, as : CtU$tt)enbtg fetttett, to 
learn by heart ; b gem e|Jett*, to like to eat (Lesson 
LIV.) ; fdjuftrig fern*, to owe (Lesson XL VII.), &c. These 
are placed exactly like the separable particles (Lesson 
XXV.), but are never joined to the verb. 

C 2MIen <Ste fur mem $)ferb f<v* 
Will you take care of my horse 1 < gen ? 

( Snellen @tc metn g^fcrb fceforgen ? e 

. will take care of it. \ 3* "& b jf < ^ m * 

} 3d) ttnll eg fcefcrgetu 

To take care. (Screen, fcefctQen. 

The merchant of Hamburg. £)et hamburger $aufmantt. 

Obs. B. The genitive of names of towns is gener- 
ally expressed in German by an adjective. This is 
formed by adding the syllable er to the name, and is 
indeclinable. Ex. 

Singular. Plural. 

f Nom. ber Setpjtger ©tubent — bie^ ?exp* 
The student J Gen. be£ ?eip$tger ©tubentett — ber I jtger 
of Leipzic. i Dat. bem ?eip$tger ©tubentett— ben j ©ttt* 
^Acc. hen 2etpjtger ©tubenten — btej bentem 

b This and the above examples show that such a cc instruction is not alto- 
gether unusual in English. 
c The first of these two expressions is the best. 



^00 

The citizen (burgess) of London, fcer Senfrener 23urqet ; 
the citizen of Paris, t)cr ^artfcr SBftrgcr ; 

the beer of Strasburg, fcog ©trojfturger S3 ten 

exercises. 158. 

Are there many philosophers in your country ? — There are as 
many there as in yours. — How does this hat fit me ] — It fits yon 
very well. — How does this hat fit your brother 1 — It fits him ad* 
mirably. — Is your brother as tall (cjrcfj) as you 1 — He is taller than 
I, but I am older than he,— How high is this man? — He is five 
feet, four inches high. — How high is the house of our landlord? — 
It is sixty feet high.— -Is your well deep ? — Yes, Sir, for it is fifty 
feet deep. — How long have those men been in your father's service 1 
— They have been in his service already more than three years. — • 
Has your cousin been long at Paris ? — He has been there nearly 
six years. — Who has spoiled my knife? — Nobody has spoiled it, 
for it was spoiled when we were in want of it. — Is it true that youi 
mcle has arrived ? — I assure you that he has arrived. — Is it true 
Jiat the king has assured you of his assistance ]-— I assure you that 
it is *rue.-— Is it true that the six thousand men whom we w T ere ex- 
pecting have arrived ?— I have heard so. — Will you dine with us ? 
— I cannot dine with you, for I have just eaten. — Will your brother 
drink \\ glass (of) w r ine j — He cannot drink, for, I assure you, he 
has jut t drunk. — Do you throw away your hat 1 — I do not throw it 
away, '/or it fits me admirably. — Does your friend sell his coat ]— 
He does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully. — There are many 
learned men in Berlin, are there not (ntcbt roar)r) 1 asked Cuvier a 
man from Berlin (t>et 33crftner). Not so many as when you were 
there, answered the man from Berlin. 

159. 

Why do you pity that man? — I pity him, because he has trusted 
a merchant of Hamburg with his money, and the man (fctefet) will 
not return it to him. — Do you trust this citizen with anything] — I 
do not trust him with anything. — Has he already kept anything 
from you 1 (Sfynen etwet* be batten).— I have never trusted him with 
anything, so that he has never kept anything from me. — Will you 
trust my father with your money ? — I will trust him with it. — What 
secret has my son entrusted you with 1 — I cannot entrust you with 
that with which he has entrusted me, for he has desired (bitten*) 
me to keep it secret. — Whom do you entrust with your secrets ]— 
I entrust nobody with them, so that nobody knows them. — Has 
your brother been rewarded 1 — He has on the contrary been pun- 
ished ; but I beg you to keep it secret, for no one knows it. — What 
has happened to him 1 — I will tell you what has happened to him, 
if you promise me to keep it secret. — Do you promise me to keep 
it secret ? — I promise you, for I pity him with all my heart. (See 
end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



201 

SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— &d)t nxib BtttyiQZt* 
flection. 

Each man. Scbcr 93?cnfd). 

Each child. 3et>e$ JUnt). 

Every one. 3et>ermarm. 

The whole world. Die ejem^e 2Bctt. 

Ofo. J.. S^^matttt adds g in the genitive, and re- 
mains invariable in the other cases, thus : 

TNom. ^ebevmantt. 

Every one, every body. J g-IS^f 

I^Acc. 3^ermann. 

Every thing (meaning all). 2C t ( c ^. 

Obs. B. 2lfte£, all, taken substantively, is put in the 
neuter gender singular. Ex. 

He knows every thing. (5r fonn atteS. 

I have seen all. 3d) fyabc attcs gefefjeru 

He is fit for any thing. f @* x ft $* attem au 3et>taud)cn. 

Obs. C. ©anj, whole, entire, is used with the article, 
but all, all, is never used with it. 

The whole town. Die $an$e (Stafct. 

The whole society. Die gan$e ©efctlfdjaft. 

A^Ts h SuTe? lth ' }««*«**«»**«. 

The walk (meaning the place to tec <Spa$terpfa$ ; 

walk in), 
the concert, Concert ; 

the walk (meaning the walking), bet (Spct^iercjang. 
There were many people in the 6$ nxtren met Scute ouf bem ®yas 

walk (at the concert). Sierp/tnge (im (Sen cert). 

I have cut his finger. t 3 c b f)«be it)n in ben Stncjct 9 C * 

febnttten. 
He has cut my leg. t @ r fa* mid) in bct$ SSein gefdjnit* 

ten. 
He has cut off his finger. (£t f)at ir)m ben $tnc)et afcgefcrjnitten. 

He has cut it off. @r f)at ifjn trjm abgcfd>nittcn. 

Entirely. ©cmjltd). 



To bring along with one. $fl i t h t i n g c n 



* 



Have you come quite alone ? Stnb (Ste gan^ atlcin c^emmm ? 
9* 



202 

Obs. D. Slftem, as a conjunction, has the same signifi- 
cation as aber, but ; as an adverb it signifies alone. 

No, I have brought all my men Sfletn, id) fya&e atle meinc Seute mtte 

along with me. a,ebrad)t. 
He has brought all his men along (gr fjat afle feine Ceute mttgebtadjt. 

with him. 

Have you brought your brother £aben ©ie Sfyten 23tubct nutgcs 

along with you ? brad)t? 

I have brought him along with 3d) fyabe ifyn mita,cbtad)t. 

me. 

Have you told the groom to bring £abcn @k bem (Statlfnedjt Qefagt, nut 

me the horse ? bag $)ferb gu bttnejen ? 

The groom, t)cr <Stallfncd)t. 

'Unmet t, in bet iflafjc (go- 
verns the genitive). 
Near. \ 93 e t (governs the dative). 

3G e b c n (governs the dative and 
accus.). 

Near me. 9?ebch mtr. 

f 23d bem Jcuet. 
Near the fire. J 2Cm geucr. 

[ 83cr bem 5?euer» 
Near the castle. Unweit be*> <Sd)(offc6. a 

Where do you live ] HBo rooftnen @tc ? 

I live near the castle. 3d) roofyne umr-ett beg (Sd)(effe& 

What are you doing near the fire 1 £Ba$ tfjun @te bei bem -geiicr ? 

To fall. gallcn (takes fetn for its auxi- 

liary), 

Thou fallest— he falls. 2)u f atlft — er fallt. 

Fallen. ©efallcn. 

Fell (Imperf.). #iet. 

To drop (meaning to let fall). $ a U e n (affen*. 

Has he dropt anything % Jpat er etroag fallen faffen ? 

He has not dropt anything. (5r r)at md)t$ fallen laffen. 

To hinder, to prevent. 93erl)tnbetn. 

You hinder me from sleeping. (£te »erl)inbern mid) $u fdjlafen. 

EXERCISES. 160. 

^ Whom do you pity 1 — I pity your friend —Why do you pity, 
him ? — I pity him because he is ill. — Do the merchants of Berlin 

• £>a$ ©djlofji, the castle, is declined exactly like ba$ <&$lo% the lock. 



203 

pity anybody ] — They pity nobody. — Do you offer me anything ? — 
I offer you a gold ring. — What has my father offered you 1 — He 
has offered me a fine book. — To whom do you offer those fine 
horses 1 — I offer them to the French officer. — Do you offer that fine 
carriage to my uncle ? — I do offer it to him. — Dost thou offer thy 
pretty little dog to these, good children ] — I do offer it to them, for 
I love them with all my heart. — What have the citizens of Stras- 
burg offered you 1 — They have offered me good beer and salt-meat 
(ae[(kl$er\H Jlctfcb). — To whom do you offer money ? — I offer some to 
those Parisian citizens, who have assured me of their assistance. — 
Will you take care of my clothes ] — I will take care of them. — Wilt 
thou take care of my hat ] — I will take care of it. — Are you taking 
care of the book which I lent you ] — I am taking care of it. — Will 
this man take care of my horse ? — He will take care of it. — Who 
will take care of my servant ? — The landlord will take care of him. 
— Does your servant take care of your horses 1 — He does take care 
of them. — Is he taking care of your clothes 1 — He is taking care of 
them, for he brushes them every morning. — Have you ever drunk 
Strasburg beer ? — I have never drunk any. — Is it long since you ate 
Leipzic bread ] — It is almost three years since I ate any. 

161. 

Have you hurt my brother-in-law ] — I have not hurt him ; but he 
has cut my finger. — What has he cut your finger with 1 — With the 
knife which you had lent him. — Why have you given that boy a 
blow with your fist ? — Because he hindered me from sleeping. — 
Has anybody hindered you from writing 1 — Nobody has hindered 
me from writing; but I have hindered somebody from hurting your 
cousin. — Has your father arrived ]— -Every body says that he has 
arrived; but I have not seen him yet. — Has the physician hurt 
your son ? — He has hurt him, for he has cut his finger. — Have they 
cut off this man's leg ] — They have cut it off entirely. — Are you 
pleased with your servant ] — I am much (fefyt) pleased with him, 
for he is fit for anything. — What does he know? — He knows every 
thing. — Can he ride on horse-back ] — He can. — Has your brother 
returned at last from Germany ] — He has returned thence, and has 
brought you a fine horse. — Has he told his groom to bring it to me ] 
— He has told him to bring it to you. — W'hatdo you think (fagcn) of 
($u) that horse ? — I think (fage) that it is a fine and good one, and 
(I) beg you to lead it into the stable. — In what did you spend your 
time yesterday 1 — I went to the public walk (fcet ©pqterptag), and 
afterwards to the concert. — Were there many people in the public 
walk? — There were many people there. 

162. 

What did you see at the concert ? — I saw many people. — What 
did you do after the concert. ? — I went to the inn (£cu> 2Bittf)$i)au$) 
in order to dine.— Have you dined well ?— I have dined very well* 



204 

but 1 have spent too much. — How much have you spent ? — I have 
spent nearly two florins and a half. — Is the fare (Spcifct man) good 
at your inn 1 — It is very good ; but every thing is so dear, that one 
must be rich to dine there. — Have you dropt anything ? — I have 
dropt nothing; but my cousin dropt some money. — Who picked it 
up ? — Some men who were passing by picked it up. — Have they 
returned it to him]— They have returned it to him, for they were 
good people. — Where were you going to when I met you this morn- 
ing'?- — I was going to my uncle. — Where does he live? — He lives 
near the castle. — What news has (fagt) your uncle ] — He has no 
news. — What has happened to him? — A little misfortune has hap- 
pened to him. — Will you tell me what has happened to him 1 — I 
will tell it you ; hut I beg you to keep it secret. — I promise you to 
tell it to nobody. — Will you tell me now what has happened to 
him ] — He fell as (cilS) he was going to the theatre. — Is he ill ] — 
He is very ill. — I pity him from my heart, if he is ill. — Have you 
succeeded in finding a hat that fits you well ] — I have succeeded in 
finding one. — How does it fit you ] — It fits me admirably. (See 
end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SIXTY-NINTH LESSON.— Nemt nub BCt^Btt 
Section. 

Far. SBeit. 

How far? 2Bteroctt? 

How far is it from here to Ber- SBtc roeit tft e$ son fytet nctct) 93et* 

lin ? tin ? 

Is it far from here to Berlin ? 3j> cS rocit Don fytet nacl) 23etftn ? 

It is far. (SStftnmt.. 

It is not far. (5$ ift ntd)t recti. 

How many miles is it 1 3Bic triel 9Metten ftnb eg ? 

It is twenty miles. (£•$ ftnb 3roan$ta, Sfletfen. 

The mile, btc OTette (a feminine noun*). 

It is almost a hundred and thirty <£$ ftnb betnafye fyunbert unb bretpt$ 

miles from here to Berlin. $ftcttcn son fytet nacl) SBerltn. 

It is nearly a hundred miles from (S£ ftnb ungefafyr. fyunbert StfeUen OCtt 

Berlin to Vienna. 23et(m nacl) SSien. 

To like better. $ i e u e r m '6 g c n. b 

Part, past gemod)t. 
Imperf. m o d) t e. 

I like better, thou likest better * 3d) mag ftcber, bu mogft defect, ct 
he likes better. mag Uefccr. 

a A German mile is equal to four English miles and a half. 

* Steber. is the comparative to gent. (See Lessons XXXIX. and LIV.) 



205 

Than 2U *, at* t*a% 

f 3d) mag ticker bier btetben att a\xf* 
I like staying here better than I geberu 
going out. 1 3d) bfctbe fiefcer r)ter, at* bap id) au5? 

i 3*« 

(Sftogcn ©te tteber febretben a(6 fprc? 
cben ? 
febretben @W tteber, at* bap @tc fpres 
dyen ? 
[3d) mag tiebcr fprecben at* [djrcU 
I like to speak better than to J ben. 

write. 1 3d) |pred)e tteber, ol$ bap id) ferret? 

I be. 
He likes to play better than to & mag tteber (ptetcn at* ftubt.- 

study. rcn. 

He likes to do both. (Sr tbut bctbe* gcrn. 

I like beef better than mutton, f 3cb eflfe debet $tnb- at* (£d)6> 

fenfteifcb.c 
He likes beer better than wine, f (Sr truift tteber SSier at* SSettt. 
Do you like bread better than f ©ffen Sic tteber ©ret) at* ota* 

cheese ] fe ? 

I like neither the one nor the 3d) cfle fetn* t>en betben gem. 

other. 
I like tea as much as coffee. 3d) trinfe eben fo gem Sfyee true 

£affee. 
The calf, ta^ £atb. 

Quick, fast. © c f d) ro i n b, f d) n c 1 1. 

Slow, slowly. 2 a n g f a tn. 

He eats quicker than I. (5r ipt gefebrotnber at* id). 

Do you learn as fast as 1 1 Semen @te fc fcrmelt rote id) ? 

I learn faster than you. 3ct) feme febnetter at* (Sic. 

I do not understand you, because 3d) tierftebe "<Stc ntd)t, roeit <Ste JU 
you speak too fast. febnett fprecben. 

Cheap. SBofctfcit. 

Does he sell cheap ? SSerfauft cr roobtfett ? 

He does not sell dear. (5r wrfauft md)t tbeucr. 

He has sold to me very dear. (5r bat mtr fctjr tbeuer scrfauft. 

So. <S c. 

So much. ©o Diet. 

« When two or more compounds terminate in the same component word, 
this is joined only to the last, and a German hyphen (=) is placed after the 
others. Ex. ber (£itt= unb 2tu3gan<$, the entrance and exit; er tft ein #uttv 
<5prad)= unb (Sdjretblebrer, he is a good master of languages and of writing; 
9ftinb= unb Sdjopfenfletfcb, beef and mutton; aufs unb jumacben, to open and 
to shut; instead of ber (£tn$cmg nnb 3fa§a,ctnc|, ber <g:prad)Ie&rer unb <&d)vetb» 
fearer, Sfcirtbfktfcfc unb <Scbityfenfletfc§, aufma^en unb jumac^en. 



206 

Tht* man sells every thing- so Dicfer 90?ann wrfauft atle^fo tftcuer 

very dear that one cannot buy ban man ntdrjts bci tfym frmfen 
any thing" of him. farm. 

DC/ 3 Iti a sentence in which the verb ought to stand 
at the end (Lesson XL VII.), when the auxiliary fettt* 
or toerfceii*, or one of the verbs biirfen*, fonnen*, laffen^, 
tnogert*, nutften*, foflett*, wolten*, is added to an infini- 
tive, it must be placed immediately after that infini- 
tive, as is seen in the above example. 

I do not know what you wish to Scb tuctp ntd)t, roa* @te fa gen rook 

say. len. 

You speak so fast that I cannot @?c fprecben fo fcfyncU, t>a$ id) <Ste 

understand you. ntcbt Dcrftcbcn farm. 

I assure you that he wishes to 3d) perfkrKte (2>te, bap cr @te fpte* 

speak to you. dben will. 

To drink. Z t i n 6 c n*. 

Drank. gran! (Imperf.). 

Do you drink tea or coffee ] fSnnfen &W Sfjee ebcr.ftaffce? 

I drink neither the one nor the 3d) tvtnfc 6ctn6 pen k'tben. 

other. 

What do you drink in the morn- S35a^ trtnfen (Sic be* 9Q2cra,en$ ? 



mg? 



EXERCISES. 163. 



flow far is it from Paris to London 1 — It is nearly (bctnane) a 
Hundred miles from Paris to London. — Is it far from here to Ham- 
burg] — It is far. — Is it far from here to Vienna] — It is almost a 
lundred and forty miles from here to Vienna. — Is it further from 
Berlin to Dresden than from Leipzic to Berlin ? — It is further from 
Berlin to Dresden than from Leipzic to Berlin. — How far is it from 
Paris to Berlin] — It is almost a hundred and thirty miles from here 
to Berlin. — Do you intend to go to Berlin soon] — I do intend to go 
thither soon. — Why do you wish to go this time ] — In order to buy 
good books and a good horse there ; and to see my good friends.— 
Is it long since you were there ] — It is nearly two years since I was 
there. — Do you not go to Vienna this year] — 1 do not go thither, 
for it is too far from here to Vienna. — Is it long since you saw 
your Hamburg friend ] — I saw him hut a fortnight ago. — Do youi 
scholars like to learn by heart ] — They do not like to learn by 
heart ; they like reading and writing better than learning by heart. — « 
Do you like beer better than cider] — I like cider better than beer. 
— Does your brother like to play ? — He likes to study better than 
to play. — Do you like meat better than bread ? — I like the latter 
better than the former. — Do you like to drink better than to eat? 
—I like to eat better than to drink ; but my uncle likes to drink 



207 

better than to eat. — Does your brother-in-law like meat better than 
fish ] — He likes fish better than meat. — Do you like to write better 
than to speak]— I like to do both. — Do you like fowl better than 
fish ] — Do you like good honey better than sugar ] — I like neither. 

164. 

Does your father like coffee better than tea ] — He likes neither. 
— What do you drink in the morning- 1 — I drink a glass of water 
with a little sugar; my father drinks good coffee, my younger bro- 
ther good tea, and my brother-in-law a glass of good wine. — Can 
you understand me] — No, Sir, for you speak too fast. — Will you 
be kind enough (fc gut jVtn) not to speak so fast (longfamcr $u fpres 
cbcn) ] — I will not speak so fast if you will listen to me. — Can you 
understand w T hat my brother tells you ] — He speaks so fast, that I 
cannot understand him. — Can your pupils understand you] — They 
understand me when I speak slowly ; for in order to be understood 
one must speak slowly. — Why do you not buy anything of that 
merchant] — 1 had a mind to buy several dozen of handkerchiefs, 
some cravats, and a white hat of him ; but he sells so dear that I 
cannot buy anything of him. — W T ill you take me to another? — I 
will take you to the son of the one whom you bought of last year. 
— Does he sell as dear as this (one) ] — He sells cheaper. — Do you 
like going to the theatre better than going to the concert ] — 1 do 
like going to the concert as well as going to the theatre ; but I do 
not like going to the public walk, for there are too many people 
there. — Do your children like learning Italian better than Spanish? 
— They do not like to learn either ; they only like to learn Ger- 
man. — Do they like to speak better than to w T rite i — Tney like to do 
neither. — Do you like mutton ] — I like beef better than mutton. — 
Do your children like cake better than bread ] — They like both. — 
Has he read all the books which he bought ? — He bought so many 
of them, that he cannot read them all. — Do you wish to write some 
letters ] — I have written so many of them, that I cannot write any 
more. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTIETH LESSON.— 0iebett}ig0te Action. 

OF REFLEXIVE VERBS. 

When the action falls upon the agent, and the ob- 
jective case refers to the same person as the nomina- 
tive, the verb is called reflexive. 

In reflexive verbs the pronoun of the object is of the 
same person as that of the subject, and stands either 
in the dative or the accusative, according as the verb 



208 

governs the one or the other case. In the third person 
singular and plural it is always ffrf), whether the verb 
governs the dative or accusative. 

A REFLEXIVE VERB GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 

To disguise myself— to disguise sjtttd) flcrftctten — Un$ wrftcltcn. 

ourselves. 
To disguise thyself— to disguise Did) tterjMten — GSud) wrjtctfcn. 

yourselves. 

A REFLEXIVE VERB GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 

To represent to myself— to re- 9#it ttcrjMIen — UnS ttCrfWicn 

present to ourselves. 
To represent to thyself— to re- Dit serjMlcn — (Sud) ttOtftdlen. 

present to yourselves. 

THIRD PERSON FOR ALL GENDERS. 

Singular and Plural Dative and Accusative. 

To disguise one's self— to repre- (Sid) oerftctlcn — fid) Dorfleflcn 
sent to one's self. 

DC/ 3 The personal pronoun of reflexive verbs is 
placed after the verb as in English ; and so are all 
other personal pronouns when they are not in the no- 
minative. 

Obs. A. There is no real reflexive verb in English, 
that is to say, such as cannot be used otherwise ; but 
in German, there are many, as for instance the follow- 
ing, which govern the accusative : 

To rejoice. (Std)*jreuen. 

To be ashamed. ®icb fd)amcn» 

To look back. ©id) umfcfjcn*. Imperf. fafj. 

Do you see yourself? ©ebcn (Stc fid) ? (8cf)Ct 30* @ud) ]) 

I do see myself. 3d) fcfyc mid). 

Thou cuttest thyself. £)u fcbnetttcfi 2)td). 

He cuts himself. (Sr febnctfcet ftcb. 

1 am afraid to go thither. 3d) furd)te mid) f)tn$ugef)en. 

They burn themselves. (Sic Crennen fid). 

To flatter. © d) m c t d) c ( n (governs the da- 

five). 
Dost thou flatter thyself] ©dunch&ctft £>« Sir ? 

I do not flatter myself, 3d) fd)mctd)le mir ntc^t. 



209 



We do not flatter ourselves. 
He disguises himself. 
You represent to yourself. 

To fear some one. 

To be afraid of somebody. 

I am not afraid of him. 

I do not fear him. 

Of whom are you afraid 1 

Whom do you fear ] 



SBit fdjmctdjefa un$ tud)t. 
@t ttcrftcllt fid); 
Sic jtcllen fid) not. 

Semcmtcn fiird)ten. 

©id) for Scmantcm furcfjten. 

3d) ftivcbte mid) md)t t>cr U;m. 

3d) ftirdtfe tfm md)t. 

S3 or nxm furdjten <Ste fid) ? 

SBcn furcfyten ©ie ? 



To enjoy something. 

To amuse one's self in doing 

something. 
To pass away the time, 
To drive away. 
Driven away. 
Drove away. 
The pastime, the diversion 



?<Std) gui 



gum 3cttt>crtret& nut ctmi 
afttgcn* 

Dw Beit ttcttteifcen*. 

83ertm&en*. 

9Scrtric&em 

SBertrteb (Imperf.). 

£)et 3cttt>ertteit>. 
In what do you amuse yourself 1 ££emtt tfcrttetOen @tc fid) tie Sett? 
I amuse myself in reading. 3d) tiertteibe mit tie 3eit mit Scfen. 

He diverts himself in playing. (5t wxtxtibt fid) tie Sett mit ©pieien. 

Masc. Fem. Neut. 

Each or each ( 3eber, jebe, jebeS* 
one. ^ @n jeber, erne jebe, em jebeS* (Sebermcmtt*) 

O&s. B. Seber, jebe, jebeS, has no plural, and is de- 
clined like alt, with the characteristic termination of 
the article (Lesson XLIX.). Preceded by the indefinite 
article, it is declined like an adjective preceded by this 
article. 

Every man has his taste. Setcr #ftenfd) r)ot fetnen ®cfd)macf. 

Each of you. (Sin jcter son (5ud). 

Every body speaks of it. Setermcmn fprtcfyt tawn. 

Each man amuses himself as he (Sin jebec wrtrcibt fid) tie 3eit rote 

likes. c$ tftm gcfallt. 

Each one amuses himself in the (Sin jeter t>crtrctbt ficr) tie 3ctt fo gut 

best way he can. er farm. 

The taste, tct (Sjefdjmacf. 

To mistake, to be mistaken. <Sid) 1 1 1 e n, f t cf) t a u f dr) e tu 

Every man is liable to mistake. Scter TOcrtfcl) femn ficr; trren. 

<&k trrcn fid). 



You are mistaken. 

To soil. 
To deceive. 



S3cfcbmu$cn, fd)mii|tcj macfyetu 
83etrfta,en* (fcetrtecjen*). 



210 

Dece ; ved. SBetrogen (past part.) Imperf. fce* 

trog. 
He has cheated me of a hundred (£t bat mid) urn fyunbctt 3 Met b& 
crowns. ttecjen. 

At (over). tie tut (a preposition governing 

the dative and accusative). 

To rejoice at something. (Sid) fiber ctwa* fteucn. 

I rejoice at your happiness. 3d) freue mid) uber 3f)t ©tiicf. 

At what does your uncle rejoice ] ££erubcr frcut fid) 3bt £)f)etm ? 

To believe. dHaubett. 

This verb requires the person in the dative., and the 
thing in the accusative. It governs also the accusa- 
tive with the preposition an* 

Do you believe that man] ©(auben <Ste btefertt 93?amte? 

I do not believe him. 3cb Cjfaufte Qhm ntd)t. 
Do you believe what I am tell- ©lau&cn (Sic nut, wa$ id) Sfynett 

ing you ] fage ? 

I believe in God. 3d) qfaufcc an @ctt. 

The God, bet ©ctt (plural ©ottet) ; 

the story-teller, the liar, tct Cucmer, 

To utter a falsehood, to lie. Ciiqcn (part, past getogen, Imperf. 

teg). 

(See the Continuation of this Lesson Page 211.) 
EXERCISES. 165. 

Have you written long or short letters] — I have written (both) 
,ong and short ones. — Have you many apples ] — I have so many 
of them that I do not know which I shall (foil) eat. — Do you wish 
to give anything to these children ] — They have studied so badly, 
that I do not wish to give them anything. — What is this man re- 
joicing at] — He is rejoicing at the luck which has happened to his 
brother. — What dost thou rejoice at] — I rejoice at the good fortune 
that has happened to you. — What do your children rejoice at ]— 
They rejoice at seeing you. — Do you rejoice at the happiness ot 
my father] — I do rejoice at it. — What does your uncle say to my 
happiness ] — He rejoices at it from his heart. — Do you flatter my 
brother] — I do not flatter him. — Does this master flatter his pu- 
pils ] — He does not flatter them. — Is he pleased with them ] — He 
is much (fefyt) pleased ($ufrteben) with them when they learn well ; 
but he is highly (fefyr) displeased with them when they do not learn 
well. — Do you flatter me] — I do not flatter you, for I love you. — 
Do you see yourself in that small looking-glass ?j— I do see myself 
in it. — Can your friends see themselves in that large looking- 
glass] — They can see themselves therein. — Why do you not re- 
main near the fire] — Because I am afraid of burning myself.— 



211 

Does this man make his fire ? — He does not make it, for he is 
afraid of burning himself. — Do you fear me 1 — I do not fear you. — 
Do you fear those ugly men 1 — I do not fear them, for they hurt 
nobody. — Why do those children run away ] — They run away, be- 
cause they are afraid of you. — Do you run away before your ene- 
mies ] — I do not run away before them, for I do not fear them. 

166. 

In what do your children amuse themselves ]— They amuse 
themselves in studying, writing, and playing. — In what do you 
amuse yourself] — I amuse myself in the best way I can, for I read 
good books, and I w T rite to my friends. — In what do you amuse 
yourself when you have nothing to do at home 1 — T go to the play 
and to the concert, for every one amuses himself in the best way 
he can. — Everyman has his taste; what is yours ] — Mine is to 
study, to read a good book, to go to the theatre, the concert, the 
ball, and the public walk, and to ride on horseback. — Has that 
physician done any harm to your child? — He has cut his finger 
(ce m Ten finger), but he has not done him any harm ; so you are 
mistaken, if you believe that he has done him any harm. — Why do 
you listen to that man ] — I listen to him, but I do not believe him ; 
for I know that he is a story-teller. — How do you know that he is 
a story-teller 1 — He does not believe in God ; and all those who 
do not believe in God are story-tellers. — Why does your cousin 
not brush his hat] — He does not brush it, because he is afraid of 
soiling his fingers (ftd) t>te Jtnget). — What does my neighbour tell 
you ] — He tells me that you wish to buy his horse ; but I know 
that he is mistaken, for you have no money *to buy it. — What do 
they say at the market ] — They say that the enemy is beaten. — Do 
you believe it 1 — I do believe it, because every one says so. — Why 
have you bought that book 1 — I bought it, because I wanted it to 
learn German ; and because every one spoke of it. (See end of 
Lesson XXXIV.) 



CONTINUATION OF THE SEVENTIETH LESSON. 

iFolge hex siebsn^igsten Cection. 

When a proposition has no definite subject, the 
English, in order to avoid the pronouns they, people, 
&c, use the verb in the passive voice ; and say : / was 
told, instead of, They told me ; It ivas given to me, in- 
stead of, They gave it to me. This is expressed in Ger- 

i man by means of the indefinite pronoun man, one, as 

j in French by on. Ex. 



212 



I am told that he is arrived. 90?an fagt mir, l)ap cr angefemmcn 

■ m 

A knife was given to him to cut $)tan gab tfmi ctn sjfteffiT, fctn 2>rob 
his bread, and he cut his gir'fcbnctben, unb cr fcbnttt fid; in 
finger. ben finger. 



PERFECT OF REFCEXIVE VERBS. 



Have you cut yourself'? 

I have not cut myself. 

Have those men cut themselves ] 

They have not cut themselves. 

Hast thou hurt thyself] 

I have not hurt myself. 

Who has cut himself] 

I have cut my finger. 

I have rejoiced. 
I have flattered myself. 
Thou hast cut thyself. 
He has flattered himself. 
We have been afraid. 

You have mistaken. 



To pull out. 

He pulls out his hair. 

He has pulled out his hair. 

He has cut his hair. 

I have had my hair cut. 

I have cut my nails. 

The hair, 



To go to bed. . 

To get up, to rise. 

Do you rise early I 
I rise at sun-rise. 

I go to bed at sun-set. 

At what time did you go tc beo. 

At midnight. 



£o&en <&u fid) gefebnitten ? 
3d) babe mtdi tttcbt gefebnitten. 
Jpabcn fid) btefc banner gefebnitten ? 
<ku baben ficb ntcbt gefebnttten. 
£>aft 5) u ©tr wc\) getban ? 
3d) batie mir nid)t met) getban. 
SBer hat fid) qcfdviiTtcn ? 
f 3d) babe mid) in ten finger gc* 
febnttten. 

f 3d) babe rntcb gefrcut (gejtcuet), 

3d) babe mir gcfcbmctcbclt. 

£>u baft ®tcb gefebnitten. 

(Sr bat ficb gcfcbmeidKlt. 

f 2£tt baben unS gefiircbtct. 
C f Sbr babt @ud) gcirrt. 
£ t ©u baben fid) garrt. 

2Ciifireifte'ttt. 

t (Sr retjit ficb bte £aatc au$. 

f (£r bat ficb Me &a<\vc auvgcrtffcn. 

t ©t bat ficb tie £aarc abgefcbntt* 

ten. 
f 3d) babe mir bte £aare febnetben 

taffen. 
f 3d) babe mir tie 9?agel abgefebnite 

ten. 
ba$ #aat (plur. c). 

f"3u ©ette geben*. 
< <Ecb(afen geben*. 
C 0icb legcn* 



S 



2Cufftebcn*. 

(^teben ^ie frub auf ? 

3d) ftebc nut (Senncnaufgang auf. 

3cb fti'bc mil (Scnnenttntergang git 

SBcrtfc 
3cb lege nucb nut (^enncnuntergang. 
Urn rocfebe 3eit finb <&\c $u JBcttc ge* 

gangen ? 
Uui SDrtttano^t 



213 

At three o'clock in the morning. Urn bvet llfrt 93?erqcn$. 

He went to bed late. (£t tjl [pat $u VBcttc jjegangem 

At what o'clock did you go to Urn nnemcl U()r jinfo <£'ic gcficrn $ti 

bed yesterday ] ^etttf geqanaen ? 

At a quarter past eleven. Urn cm 3>iertc( auf gnriftf* 

The bed, tas Su'tt (plur. en). 

Tne sun-rise, £ rer ^ ang ^ ^ niK . 

The sun-set $ Ccr £'™^muUcraaru> 

lire sun set, £ ^ Untetgang ^ <~ enne# 

Nothing but. $lid)t$ a ( g. 

He has nothing but enemies. (St hat ntcbtS o(l Jcinbc. 
He drinks nothing but water. (£t trinfr nid)ts at? SBaffer. 

EXERCISES. 167. 

Did your father rejoice to see you 1 — He did rejoice to see me. — 
What did you rejoice at]— I rejoiced at seeing my good friends. — 
What was your uncle delighted with ( s I£ctubct t)cit fid) tf)r £)f)ttm 
qefrait) 1— He was delighted with (tiber) the horse which you 
brought him from Germany. — What were your children delighted 
with ]— They were delighted with the fine clothes which I had 
had made (for) them. — Why does this officer rejoice so much (jo 
fehr) ? — Because he flatters himself he has good friends. — Is he not 
right in rejoicing? — He is wrong, for he has nothing but enemies. 
— Do you flatter yourself that you know German] — I do flatter 
myself that I know it; for 1 can speak, read, and write it. — Can 
you write a German letter without an error (bet gfeljlcr) ] — I can. — 
Does any one correct your letters 1 — No one corrects them ; they do 
not require (broudftcn ntcbt) to be corrected, for I make no faults in 
them. — How many letters have you already written ] — I have al- 
ready written a dozen. — Have you hurt yourself] — I have not hurt 
myself. — Who has hurt himself] — My brother has hurt himself, 
for he has cut his finger. — Is he still ill ] — He is better. — I rejoice 
to hear that he is no longer ill ; for I love him, and I pitied him from 
my heart. — Why does your cousin pull out his hair ? — Because he 
cannot pay what he owes. — Have you cut your hair ] — I have not 
cut it (myself), but I have had it cut. — Why do you pity that 
child ] — Because he has cut his foot. — Why was a knife given to 
him ? — A knife was given to him to cut his nails, and he has cut 
his finger and his foot. 

168. 

Do you go to bed early ] — I go to bed late, for I cannot sleep if 
I go to bed early. — At what o'clock did you go to bed yesterday ? — 
Yesterday I w r ent to bed at a quarter past eleven. — At what o'clock 
do your children go to bed ? — They go to bed at sun-set. — Do they 
rise early ] — They rise at sun-rise. — At what o'clock did you rise 
to-day ? — To-day I rose late, because I went to bed late yesterday 



214 

evening. — Does your son rise late ? — He must rise early, for he 
never goes to bed late. — What does he do when he gets up 1 — Fie 
studies, and then breakfasts.— Does he not go out before he break- 
fasts ? — No, he studies and breakfasts before he goes out. — What 
does he do after breakfast] — As soon as he has breakfasted he 
comes to my house, and we ride (on horseback) into the forest. — 
Didst thou rise this morning as early as 1 1 — I rose earlier than 
you, for I rose before sun-rise. (See end of Lesson XXXIV,) 



SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON.— Qftn ttttir Bubzny$Btt 
Hzttion. 

To take a walk. (Spqicten gefycn*. 

To take an airing in a carriage. (Spqteten fabren* (Imp. fuf)t). 
To take a ride on horseback. (Spc^teten tctten* (Imp. titt). 

DCJ 3 A. When two or more infinitives, two past 
participles, or a past participle and an infinitive de- 
pend upon each other, the last in English is put the 
first in German. 

Do you wish to take a walk (to 2Mlen (Sic fpqteren cjefyen ? 

go a walking) ! 

1 do wish to take a walk (to go 3d) will fpqtetcn gefyen. 

a walking). 

He wishes to take a walk. (gt nntt fpci^teren gefyen. 

Thou wishest to take an airing. £)u nullf! fpqteren fafyten. 

They wish to take a ride. @te motion fpajtetcn retten. 

Do you wish to see him work 1 SBcUcn <2>ie if)n arbeiten fefyen ? 

Has your brother been praised ? 3ft 3b* £3tut>et gelobt roorben ? 

He takes a walk every day. (St gefyt die Sage fpqtctcn. 

Do you often walk ? ©efyen <Ste oft fpqteten ? 

I take a walk every morning. 3d) gefec alle SCRorgen fpqteten 

To take a child a walking. Sin &tnb fpqtcren ftiljren. 

Do you take your children a $uf)ten ©tc 3f)tc .fttnbet fpqtetetn 

walking ? 
I take them a walking every 34 fltyts fie alle Ubent) fpa^ieten. 

evening. 

DCP 2?. Two infinitives or participles not depend- 
ing on each other follow the English construction. 

One must love and praise one's Wlan mup feinen Jteunb (te&en unfc 

friend. (oOem 

Whom must we despise and 2Ben mup man t>etacl)ten unt> (fra* 

punish 1 fen ? 



215 

I take a walk, when I have no- 3d) $ef)C fpojteren, roenn id) $u £oufe 
thing to do at home. nid)t$ $u tl)un tyabUi 

Obs. A. The adverb tt>amt is used to interrogate 
with respect to time only. In all other instances the 
English when is translated by ft>emt* Ex. 

When do you start 1 ££cmn retfen (Sic ab ? 

When did he start ] SBann ip er aOgcrctf't ? 

To £e«cA* £ef)t en< 

O&s. jB. This verb, when joined to an infinitive, 
governs the name of the person in the accusative ; 
and when the thing taught is expressed by a substan- 
tive, it governs a double accusative, the one of a per* 
son and the other of a thing. 

He teaches me to read. (5r (eljrt find) (efen. 

I teach him to write. 3d) Ccr)re tfyn fd)ret&en. 

He teaches me arithmetic and (Sr lefyrt mid) t>a$ 9?ed)nen unt> 
writing* <Sd)reiOen. 

O&s. C. All infinitives taken substantively are of 
the neuter gender. Any German infinitive may thus 
be taken substantively, e. g. ba$ D?ecf)nen, arithmetic, 
from recfyttett, to reckon; fea3 ©cfyreiben, the writing, 
from fcfyreiben*, to write, &c. 

I teach you the German Ian- 3d) (cr)rc @te t>te t>eutfd)e ©pros 
guage. d)c. a 

run t err id) ten. 
To instruct. < U n t e r r i d) t e r f I) e t I e n (or g e* 

C ben*). 

The instruction, the lessons, fcer ttnterrtd)t. 

He ffives me lessons i ® V $ iU mir Wltfewiflft 

lie gives me lessons. ^ ^ ^^ mtr Untcrdd)t# 

I give him lessons in German (I 3d) gebe (or crtr)ct(c) tl)m Unterrtd)t 

teach him German). tm £>eutfd)en. 

I gave lessons in English to his 3d) l)abe feinen $tnfc>ern Unterrtd)t 

children (I taught his children tm (SngUfcfycn ertfyetlt. 

English). 
He takes lessons in dancing. (£r ntmmt itnterrtd)t tm &ctn$en. 

The learned man, t>er ©elefyrte ; 

■ $>\t <5pt<i&)t, the language, is a feminine noun, and ha* n in the plural. 



216 

a learned man, ctn (Mcfyrtct (See Obs. Lessor 

LIU.) ; 

the clergyman, bcr ©ctftticbc ; 

a clergyman, an (Stetjiltcher ; 

the German master (meaning ) 

the master of the German V tit £)cutfd)lcf)tt'r ; 

language), J 

the German master (meaning ^ 

that the master is a German, > bcr bcutfcbc Scfyrcr ; 

whatever he teaches), ) 
.he dancing master, bcr £annncificr. 

To dance. Sanson. 

To cipher, to reckon. 91cd)ncn. 

To remember, to recollect. © t d) crtnnem. 

Obs. D. This verb governs either the genitive alone 
or, less elegantly, the accusative with the preposition 
an. 

Do you remember that man ? ©rtnncrn Sic fid) btcfeS 9Jfcmne$ ? 
I do remember him. 3d) crtnncrc mid) fctncr. 

rCSTtnnert er fid) fctncS SScrfpre 

Does he recollect his promise? < re . ■?■■ ■ .. f f . ^ r 

r I (Srtnncrt cr ]id) an fctn SScrfpro 

{ d)cn ? 

He does recollect it. 5 * cr . innct ' ft *&«• 

( (Sr cnnncrt fid) baran. 

Does he recollect it ? J ®™ ne « cr p* **» ? , 

( (Srtnnert cr fid) baran ? 

I remember you. 3d) crtnncrc mid) 3()rci\ 

I recollect them. 3d) crinncrc mid) ibrcr. 

He remembers me. (Sr crinncrt fid) mcincr. 

He recollects us. ($r crinncrt fid) unfcr. 

I have remembered him. 3d) faOc mid) fcincr crinncrt. 

exercises. 169. 

Do you call me 1 — I do call you. — What is your pleasure 1 — You 
must rise, for it is already late. — What do you want me for! — 1 
have lost all my money at play, and I come to beg you to lend me 
some. — What o'clock is it 1< — It is already a quarter past six, and 
you have slept long enough. — Is it long since you rose 1 — It is an 
hour and a half since I rose. — Do you often go a walking? — I go 
a walking when I have nothing to do at home. — Do you wish to 
take a walk? — I cannot take a walk, for I have too much to do. — 
Has your brother taken a ride on horseback 1 — He has taken an 
airing in a carriage. — Do your children often go a walking ? — They 
go a walking every morning after breakfast. — Do you take a walk 



217 

after dinner ]-— After dinner I drmk tea and then ttake a walk.-— 
Do you often take yolr children a walking ] — I take them a walking 
every morning and every evening.— Can you go along with me] — 
I cannot go along with you, for 1 must take my little brother out a 
walking. — Where do you walk 1 — We walk in our uncle's garden 
ami fields. — Do you like walking]—! like walking better than eat- 
ing and drinking. — Does your father like to take a ride on horse- 
back ] — He iikes to take a ride in a carriage better than on horse- 
back. — Must one love children who are net good ! — One ought, on 
the contrary, to punish and despise them. — Who has taught you to 
read 1 — I have learnt it with (bet) a French master. — Has he also 
taught you to write V — He has taught me to read and to write. — 
Who has taught your brother arithmetic ] — A German master has 
taught it him. — Do you wish to take a walk with usl — 1 cannot go 
a walking, for I am waiting for my German master. — Does your 
brother wish to take a w T alk 1 — He cannot, for he is taking lessons 
in dancing. 

170. 
Have you an English master ? — We have one. — Does he also 
give you lessons in Italian 1 ? — He does not know Italian ; but we 
have an Italian and Spanish master. — What has become of youi 
old writing master ] — He has taken orders (has become a clergy- 
man). — What has become of the learned man whom I saw at youi 
house last winter? — He has set up for a merchant. — And what has 
become of his son ] — He has turned a soldier. — Do you still recol- 
lect my old dancing master ] — I do still recollect him; what has 
become of him ] — He is here, and you can see him, if you like 
(roolien).— Hast thou a German master ? — I have a very good (one), 
for it is my father, who gives me lessons in German and in Eng- 
lish. — Does your father also know Polish? — He does not know it 
yet, but he intends to learn it this summer. — Do you remember 
your promise 1 — I do remember it. — What did you promise me ? — 
I promised to give you lessons in German; and I will doit. — Wil 
you begin this morning] — I will begin this evening, if you please 
(roenn es 3bncn gcfallig iff). — Do you recollect the man whose son 
taught us dancing? — I no longer recollect him. — Do you still recol- 
lect my brothers ]— I do recollect them very well, for when I was 
studying at Berlin, I saw them every day. — Does your uncle still 
recollect me 1 — I assure you that he still recollects you. — Do you 
speak German better than my cousin ] — I do not speak it as well as 
he, for he speaks it better than many Germans. — Wnich of your 
pupils speaks it the best ] — The one that was walking with me yes- 
terday speaks it the best of them all. — Is your uncle's house as high 
as ours ? — Yours is higher than my uncle's, but my cousin's is the 
highest house that I have ever seen. — Has your friend as many books 
as 1 ? — You have more of them than he ; but my brother has more 
of them than (both) you and he. — Which of us (9S>et t>en ung) has 
the most money ] — You have the most, for I have but thirty crowns, 
my friend has but ten, and you have five hundred. (See end of 
Lesson XXXIV.) 
10 



218 



■SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON.— Zwzi ttttir siebimjigsU 

Cation. 



To make use of, tc use. 

Do you use my horse ? 

I do use it. 

Does your father use it ? 

He does use it. 

Have you used my carriage % 

I have used it. 

Do you use my books 1 

I do use them. 

May I use your bock ? 

Thou may est ute it 

To approach, to draw near. 

To withdraw from, to go away 

from. 
Do you approach the fire ? 
I do approach it. 
I go away from the fire. 
I go away from it. 
What do you recollect 1 
I recollect nothing. 
What are you withdrawing from ? 
Are you cold ? 
I am very cold. 
I am not cold. 
Art thou cold ? 
Is he warm 1 
Are they warm or cold ? 
They are neither warm nor cold. 

Who is cold ? 

My feet are cold. 

His hands are cold. 

Why does that man go away from 

the fire ] 
He goes away from it, because 

he is not cold. 

To freeze— ^frozen* 
Froze* 



(Sid) bebt enen 
genitive). 



(governs the 



JBebtenen @ie fief) me'ncS g)ferbe$? 
3>cb bebtcne mid) beffetben. 
S3et)ient fid) 3br aSotcr beffelben ? 
(St bebtent fid) beffelben. 
£aben (Sie fi.ci) metnes 2Baa,ens be* 

bicnt ? 
3d) f)abe mid) beffetben bebtent. 
SScbtenen (Sic fid) metner $3tid)et? 
3d) bebiene mid) berfelben. 
&ann id) mid) 3f)re* 23ud)e* bebtcs 

ncn ? 
£)u fannft 3Md) beffelben bebienen. 

&\d) ntf&ern (governs the dative). 
(Sid) entfetnen (governs the dative 

with the preposition son). 
9?af)ern (Sic fid) bem #euer V 
3d) nafyere mid) bemfelben. 
3d) entferne mid) »om ftcuer. 
3d) entferne mid) bason. 
2Botan erinnetn <Sie fid) ? 
3d) ettnncte mid) an ntd)t£. 
SBoDcn entferncn (Sie fid) ? 
t 3ft e«3bn*n fait? 
t ©Siftmtt fcr)r fott. 
t (g^iftmir md)t fait, 
t 3ft e$£tt fait? 
t 3ft eg tfjm roarm ? 
t 3ft eg ifjnen warm obec fait? 
t ®g ift tfmen roeber roarm necj> 

fait. 
t SBcm tfteSfalt? 
t <§g ift nut an ben pgen fait, 
t ©g ift tf)m an ben £anben fait. 
SSarum entfernt fid) biefer SRann oon 

bem $eucr ? 
@r entfernt ftd) bason, roeil eg tfjm 

nid)t fait ift. 

t <?rtete<n — aeftoten. 
§tor (imperfect). 



O&s. The impersonal verb frferett, to freeze, governs 



219 

the accusative, and may also be used for the English 

verb to be cold, as : 

T am very cold. f (£$ frtcrt mtcb feftr. 

£ am not cold. f ®s frtcrt mtcb ntd)t. 

Who is cold 1 f ii : cn frtcrt c$ ? 

My feet are cold. f 9#tr frtcrcn tue <$u^» 

His hands are cold. \ 3l)tn frtcrcn fctc £ant>C. 

For w;Aa£ ? whereto ? for what 9G5 3 U ? 
purpose ? 

What do you want money for ? ££o$u fcrcutcbcn @ie (Mb ? 

I want some to buy a carriage 3d) brctud)C it>c(d)C$, um ctnen £Ba« 

with. qcn 311 taufcn. 

What dees this horse serve you £Bc$ii tucnt 3f)ncn tucfcS $)ferb ? 

for] 

It serves me to ride out upon. (£$ t>'tem mit au^urcitcn or $um 2(u$* 

rctten. 

To ride out. tfusreiten*. 

To go out in a carriage. 2(u6fa()rcn*» 

exercises. 171. 

Which is the nearest way to go to your uncle's castle? — This 
way is shorter than the one we took yesterday ; but my father 
knows one which is the nearest of all. — Do you use my carriage'? 
— I do use it. — Has your father used my horse] — He has used it. 
— What does this horse serve you for V — It serves me to ride out 
upon. — Do you use the books which I lent you ] — I do use them, — 
May I (.ftcmn id)) use your knife ] — Thou mayest use it, but thou 
; cut thyself. — May my brothers use your books'? — They 
may use them, but they must not tear them. — May we use your 
stone table "? — You may use it, but you must not spoil it. — What 
has my wood served you for 1 — It has served me to warm myself 
with. — For what purpose do your brothers want money ?— They 
want some to live upon. — What does this knife serve us for? — It 
serves us to cut our bread, our meat, and our cheese with. — Is it 
cold to day"? — It is very cold. — W T ill you draw near the fire'? — I 
cannot draw near it, for I am afraid of burning myself. — Why does 
your friend go away from the fire 1 — He goes away from it, because 
he is afraid of burning himself. — Art thou coming near the fire 1 — 
I am coming near it, because I am very cold. — Are thy hands cold 1 
— My hands are not cold, but my feet are. — Do you go away from 
the fire ! — I do go away from it. — Why do you go away from it? — 
Because I am not cold. — Are you cold or warm ! — I am neither cold 
nor warm. 

172. # 

Why do your children approach the frre ? — They approach it, be- 
cause they are cold. — Is any body cold ? — Somebody fs cold.-r-Who 



220 

is cold ] — The little boy, whose father has lent you a horse, is cold. 
— Why does he not warm himself? — Because his father has no 
money to buy wood.— Will you tell him to come to me to warm 
himself? — I will tell him so. — Do you remember anything] — I re- 
member nothing". — What does your uncle recollect] — He recollects 
your promise. — What have I promised him ? — You have promised 
him to go to Germany with him next winter. — I intend to do so if 
it is not too cold. — Are your hands often cold ] — My hands are 
scarcely ever cold, but my feet are often so. — Why do you with- 
draw from the fire ] — I have been sitting near the fire this hour and 
a half, so that I am no longer cold. — Does your friend not like to 
sit near the fire ] — He likes, on the contrary, much (fcfjr) to sit near 
the fire, but only when he is cold. — May one approach your uncle ] 
— One may approach him, for he receives every body. (See end 
of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. -Dm ntib Blcbttt^U 

Cection. 

To shave $ »«1iWii (verb active). 

} @tcb rcmrcn (verb reflexive). 

To get shaved. @tcb raftren laffcn*. 

To dress, to put on clothes. 2Cn$tcbi'n*. 

To dress. ttnftettu'ru 

To undress, to put off clothes. 2fue$ter)m*. 
To undress. 2Cu§£letbcn. 

Obs. A. Slttjteftett* expresses either tc dress or to put 
on clothes, but anfleiben can only be used to express the 
English to dress. The same may be said with regard to 
au$$iet)en* and au^fietben. 

Have you dressed yourself] £>abcn <Ste ftd) anqeffcibet ? 

I have not yet dressed myself. 3d) babe mid) necb ntcbt angcf(etbct» 

Have you dressed the child? Ipabm ® X{ ^ a& -ftinb ange$oa,en ? 

I have dressed it. 3d) bate & anqiso^cn. 

He has put on his coat. @r bat fetnen Wccf angc;ogcn. 

He has taken off his shoes. <Sr bat fettle ©cbube au$a,e$oa,en. 

To wake. . SSecfen, aufroecfen. 

To awake. dtmatym, aufnxicben. 

Obs. B. SOSetfett and auftt>e<jfett are active verbs, but 
ertt>arf)en and ctufwacfyeg are neuter, and take the verb 
fein* for their auxiliary, ©ecfett signifies to wake in- 
A -^tionally, cmftoetfen unintentionally : Ex. 2Boffen ©tc 



221 



mid) urn $tt>et Uf)t toetfen ? Will you wake me at two 
o'clock? QKacfyen (Sfe femen ?arm, bamtt ©te it)tt nid)t 
anfwcden, do not make any noise, that you may not 
wake him. @rrttaci)en means to awake at once or by ac- 
cident. Ex. 3rf) ermarfrte auf cinmal an$ memem Xvanme, 
I at once awoke from my dream. Sluftpactjeit, means to 
awake regularly without any accident. Ex. £>e$ 9Kor* 
geit3 ctufttxtcfyen, to awake in the morning. 

To come down ( Syrab, tyinab ) fletgett*, gefyen*, 
(See Less. L.) \ £mmrer, buumter 5 rettenV fa(jren*,2C, 

To go down into the well. 3n ben IBtunhen fjtnunter ftetgen*. 

To come down the hill. 93om SPerge bcrab ftetgen*. 

To go down the river. jSDen (Strom t)inab fafyren*. 

To alight from one's horse, to 93 em ^ferbe jtogcn*. 
dismount. 

I tfusftcigen*. 

1 2Uis tern SSagen ftetgen*. 



To alight, to get out. 



To mount — to ascend* 

To mount the horse. 
To get into the coach. 
To go on board a ship. 

The dream, the beard, 
the stream (the river), 



<& t c t g e n (part, past gefttegen. 
Imperf. fHeg). 

2fuf« (ouf tcie) $ferb jtagen*. 
3n ben 53>agen ftetgen*. 
3n etn ©cfyiff ftetgen*. 

ber Sraum ; bet 33art ; 
bcr (Strom. 



Where is your brother ? 93^c ift 36r ©ruber ? 

He is in the garret. @r ift cuif bem 93eben. 

Will you desire him to ccme £8etlen @te tbn tutten fjcrafo (fjcruns 

down 1 tcr) $11 tommen ? 

The garret (the loft) under the £)er ©cben unter bem £)ad)C ctnc$ 

roof of a house. £aufe$. 

To come down. $cxab (or fter unter) fommen. 



To behave. to>conduct one s 5 ©id) auffufyren 
( Sid) (v 



etragen* (Imperf. fcetrug). 
Scb ftibrc micb gut auf. 
S$ie ftif)rt cr fid) auf? 

(55 e g e n (a preposition governing 
the accusative). 

He behaves ill towards this man. (Sr frctrd'gt fid) fd)(ecJ)t gegen btefen 

SOtenn. 
H6 has behaved ill towards me, (§r \)at fid) u6e( gegen mtd) fcetragen. 



self 
I behave well. 
How does he behave ! 

Towards. 



222 

To be worth while. 3)er $$uf)c a roettl) fetn* 

Is it worth while % 3ft c£ t>ct SKube roertf) ? 

It is worth while. @6 tft fccr 9JHibi' ircrtf). 

It is not worth while. (§s tft ntcbt t>cr §03(11)* ivcrtf). 

Is it worth while to do that? 3ft es ber 9Mf)C roertb, fctefeS $tt 

tf)un ? 

Is it worth while to write to 3ft t$ fce? 93ur)e roertb, an ir)n $U 

him ] fcbrcibcn ? 

Is it better I 3ft es bcffcr ? 

It is better. (Se tft bcffer. 

It is better to do this than that. (§£ tft bcffcr, biefeS n(S jcne^ §U 

tbun. 
It is better to stay here than to (5* tft beffer, btcr $u bletben, fltS fpas 
go a walking. $teren $u gef)en. 

EXERCISES. 173. 

Have you shaved to-day ? — I have shaved. — Has your brother 
shaved 1 ? — He has not shaved himself, but has got shaved. — Do 
you shave often 1 — I shave every morning", and sometimes also in 
the evening. — When do you shave in the evening ] — When I do 
not dine at home. — How many times a day does your father 
shave] — He shaves only once a day, but my brother has such a 
strong beard, that he is obliged to shave twice a day. — Does your 
uncle shave often ] — He shaves only every other day (etncn £09 utn 
fcen anbern), for his beard is not strong. — At what o'clock do you 
dress in the morning ] — I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and 
I breakfast every day at eight o'clock, or at a quarter past eight. — 
Does your neighbour dress before he breakfasts ] — He breakfasts 
before he dresses. — At what o'clock in the evening dost thou un- 
dress 1 ? — I undress as soon as I return from (am) the theatre. — 
Dost thou go to the theatre every evening 1 — -I do not go every eve- 
ning, for it is better to study than to go to the theatre. — At what 
o'clock dost thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre?-— 
I then undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten 
o'clock.— Have you already dressed the child] — I have not dressed 
it yet, for it is still asleep (fcbtaft nccb). — At what o'clock does it 
get up ? — I gets up as soon as it is waked. 

174. 

Do you rise as early as 1 1 — I do not know at what o'clock you 
rise, but I rise as soon as I awake. — Will you tell my servant to 
wake me to-morrow at four o'clock ] — I will tell him. — Why have 
you risen so early] — My children have made such a noise that 
they wakened me. — Have y( u slept well ] — I have not tdept well, 
for you made too much noise — At what o'clock must I wake you ? 

a $te SttuH is a feminine suostantive, and takes n in the plural, 



223 

— To-morrow thou may est wake me at six o'clock.— At what 
o'clock did the good captain awake] — He awoke at a quarter past 
five in the morning. — When did this man go down into the well ] 
— He went down into it this morning. — Has he come up again 
yet (ruuCvr' (vrmif gejmgen) 1 — He came up an hour ago. — Where 
is your brother ! — He is in his room. — Will you tell him to come 
down? — I will teil him so; but he is not dressed yet. — Is your 
friend still on the mountain? — He has already come down.-^-Did 
you go down or up this river] — We went down it. — Has your 
brother dined already? — He dined as soon as he had alighted from 
his horse. — Is your urTcle already asleep (fd)lcifen*) I — I believe 
that he is asleep, for he went to hed as soon as he had alighted. — 
Did uiy cousin speak to you before he started ? — He spoke to me 
before he got into the coach. — Have you seen my brother] — I saw 
him before I went on board the ship. 

175. 

How did my child behave 1 — He did behave very well. — How 
did my brother behave towards you ? — He behaved very well to- 
wards me, for he behaves well towards every body. — Is it worth 
while to write to that man] — It is not worth while to write to him. 
—Is it worth while to alight in order to buy a cake 1 — It is not 
worth while, for it is not long since we ate. — Is it worth while to 
dismount from my horse in order to give something to that pc or 
man ] — Yes, for he seems to want it ; but you can (fonnen) give 
him something without dismounting from your horse. — Is it better 
to go to the theatre than to study]— It is better to do the latter 
than the former. — Is it better to learn to read German than to speak 
it ] — It is not worth while to learn to read it without learning to 
speak it. — Is it better to go to bed than to go a walking 1 — It is 
better to do the latter than the former. — Is it better to get into a 
coach than to go on board the ship ] — It is not worth while to get 
into a coach or to go on board the ship when one has no wish to 
travel. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 

%tzt\on. 



-bier nub Bicbtnfy&tt 



To hire, to rent* 

To hire a room. 
Have you hired a room ] 
I iiave hired one. 

To let 

He has a room to let. 

To part with something. 



Sfttetfjen. 

(Sin 3tmmer mtctfjcn. 

&aben <Ste em Simmer gemtetfjet 1 

3d) babe etn$ gemtetfjet. 

aSermtctfjen. 

@t bat em 3tmmet $u t>etrmietr)ca 
(Stnxr* abfefyajfen. 



224 



Do you intend to part with your 
horses 1 

I have already parted with them. 

He has parted with his eaYriage. 

Have you parted with (dis- 
charged) your servant 1 

I have parted with (discharged) 
him. 

To get rid of something*. ? 

To rid one.*s self ot* something. _£ 

Did you gat fid'of your damaged 
sugar 1 

I did get rid of it. 

Did he get rid of his old horse 1 

He did get rid of it. 



Stno <&\c gcfennen, Sfae $fert>e ctfc* 

gufdbaffdt ? 
3d) hate ftc (ebon abgefcbaffk 
(5r bat fcmen 2£agen abcjcfcbafft. 
|>aben Sic Sbrcn SBctrienten abajis 

fcbafft ? 
3d) babe tbn aba/fefjafft. 

f (Stbas kt> cocrben*. 

j- <Stnb <S*c Sbren wrbcrbencn 3u? 

dor les Qeiverfccn ? 
f 3d) bin tbn les a/rc>crbcn. 
f 3ft ex fein aires "Pferfc les gcrocrr 

Den ? 
f @t tjl c* tcs geroerfcen. 



To hope, to expect* ^) f f c n. 

Do you expect to find him there 1 vftoffen &c tbn ba $u ftnbcn ? 

I do ~xpect it. 3cb beffe C6. 

Hope and expectation make jpeffen unt) barren macbt 9ttancben 

many a dupe. gum barren. (See Lesson XL. 

Obs. B.) 

To wait, to tarry. barren. 



To change. 
To exchange, to truck. 

To change one thing for another, 
I change my hat for his. 



To put on one's hat. 
To put on linen. 
To put on a cravat. 

Do you change your hat 1 ") 

Do you put on another hat 1 3 
I do change it. "> 

I do put another on. 5 

He puts on other (shifts his) 

linen. 
He changes his linen. 
I put on another cravat. 
I change my cravat. 



% a u f cb e n. 
SB et tail fcbcn. 
It m t a u f d) e n. 

(Stoas* gegen eroxtf wrtaufefKR 01 

umtaufcbcm 
Scb taufebe metnen £ut SC&en ben 

fetntgen urn. 

2)cn #ut auffc§etu 
2Mfd>e a anfegen. 

©in £a(Srueb umbtnben*. Part, 
past, gcbuntcn. lmperf. bant). 

•(Scgen @tc etnen anbern £ut auf ? 

- 3d) fe|e ctnen anbern auf. 
(5v tegt ($tcbt) anbere £t*afc&e an. 

£5t tvccbfdt feme SMfcbe. 

3cb btnbe etn anbercs Jbatetucb urn. 

3d) mc$4e bas |>a(6tucb* 



* £>te SBafc^e, the linen, is a iejpinirie collective noun and has consequent- 
ly no plural. 



225 

To put on other clothes. \ f* **«*«* * f , 

He puts on other clothes. * |* r ?«j* J!S um - , fc 

r ( @r roccbjclt feme jUeibcr. 

He puts on another shirt. \ £ ^ef)t ein anfcere* £emt> am 

To change the horse. \ | in *}**" *£* W^mett*. 

To exchange. £B e d) f c I n. 

To take fresh horses. £)tc spfetbc roedbfefa. 

To exchange a piece of money. (Sin ©tiicf (Mt> nxebfefn. 

To correspond with some one. j&rtefe twit Semantciii nxebfetn. 

Do you correspond with your 2£ecbfe(n <Ste SBricfc nutSfjrcm 9Sa* 

father ? ter ? 

I do correspond with him. 3d) nwdbsfe SSriefe mit t&m. 

To mix. © t d) m t d) e n. 

Amongst. Unter (a preposition governing 

the dative and accusative). 

I mix among the people. 3d) nrifebe mtd) unter tie 2eute. 

He mixes among the soldiers. (5t nufd)t fid) unter fcte <Sott)atcn. 

C2Bteberet£ennen*. 
To recognise or to acknowledge. <(S*r£cnncn*. 

C Imperf. e r ! a n n t e. 

Do you recognise this man ? (Srfennen @ie fctefen 9}?ann ? 
It is so long since I saw him, 3d) babe tbn feben fo fonge ntd)t gc* 
that I do not recoiftect him. feben, bap id) ifyn md)t nnebeters 

fenne. 

^ exercises. 176. 

Have you already hired a room ] — I have already hired one.— 
Where have you hired it] — I have hired it in William Street, 
number (one) hundred and fifty one. — At whose house (55ct twin) 
have you hired it 1 — At the house of the man whose son has sold 
you a horse. — For whom has your father hired a room 1 — He has 
hired one for his son who has just arrived from Germany. — Did 
you at last get rid of that man ] — I did get rid of him. — Why has 
your father parted with his horses 1 — Because he did not want 
them any more. — Have you discharged your servant ] — I have dis- 
charged him, because he served me no more well. — W T hy have you 
parted with your carriage'? — Because I do not travel any more.— 
Has your merchant succeeded at last in getting rid of his damaged 
sugar 1 — He has succeeded in getting rid of it. — Has he sold it on 
credit] — He was able to sell it for cash, so that he did not sell it 
on credit. — Do you hope to arrive early in Paris ? — I hope to ar- 
rive there at a quarter past eight, for my father is waiting for me 
this, evening. — For what have you exchanged your carriage which 
10* 



226 

you no longer made use of] — I have exchanged it for a fine Ara- 
bian horse. — Do you wish to exchange your book for mine ] — I 
cannot, for I want it to study German with. — Why do you take 
your hat off? — I take it off, because I see my old writing-master 
coming. — Do you put on another hat to go to the market ] — I do 
not put on another to go to the market, but to go to the great con- 
cert. 

177. 

Why does your father put on other clothes ] — He is going to the 
king, so that he must put on others. — Have you put on another hat 
to go to the English captain ] — I have put on another, but I have 
not put on another coat or other boots. — How many times a day 
dost thou put on other clothes ] — I put on others to dine and to go 
to the theatre. — Do you often put on a clean shirt (cin tx>ctj}cS Jpcmb) ? 
— I put on a clean one every morning. — When does your father put 
on a clean shirt 1 — He puts it on when he goes to the ball. — Does 
he put on a clean cravat (cin roetpeS #a(stud)) as often as you? — He 
puts one on oftener than I, for he does so six times a day. — Did 
you often take fresh horses when you went to Vienna 1 — I took 
fresh ones every three hours. — Will you change me this gold coin 
(fca* (SolDftucf) l — I am going to (mill) change it for you ; what money 
do you wish to have for it (tmfiir) 1 — -I wish to have crowns, florins, 
and kreuzers. — Do you correspond with my friend ] — I do corres- 
pond with him. — How long have you been corresponding with my 
brother] — I have been corresponding with him these six years al- 
most. — Why do you mix among those people? — 1 mix among 
them in order to know what they say of me. — Have you recognised 
your father ] — I had not seen him for such a Jong time, that I did 
not recognise him (3d) fyattc trm fo (ang'e mcfytcjcfefjcn, t>a^ id> tf)n ntd)t 
rotcbct crfanntc). — Do you still speak German ] — It ^ so long since 
I spoke it, that I have nearly forgotten it all. — Amongst you (Untcc 
(Sud)) country people there are many fools, are there not (ruci)t roafyt) ? 
asked a philosopher lately (ncultd)) of a peasant (ctncn SBauctn). 
The latter (£>tcfcr) answered him : " Sir, one finds some in all sta- 
tions *(t>ct ^tant))." "Fools sometimes tell the truth (bte 2Baf)E* 
fyett)," said the philosopher. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY.FIFTH LESSON.— Mttf ntib Bubctl^tC 
tcttion. 

To find one's self (to be 9 to do). <^tdr> beftnben** Imperf. fcmk 

How do you do ? t 9Q&* 6eftnbcn @ic fid) ? 

I am very well. j 3$ bcftnbe mid) fcf)r roof)(. 

How is your father ? SOSie beftnfcct fid) 3f)t |>ett SBatct; ? 



227 

Obs. In the German the words £err, sir, $van, ma- 
dam, &c. must be preceded by the possessive pronoun. 

He is ill. f (£ T bejtnbet ft* iibcl 

Your brother. f 3 b r £ c t r ©ruber. 

Your cousin. f 3 b r .pert better. 

Your brothers. f 3 b r c £ c r r e n 35rubcr. 

To stay, to sojourn. ©id) aufbaften*. Imperf. r)ie(t. a 
Have you stayed long- at Vien- $aton ©te fid) tange in 2Bten aufaes 

na 1 batten ? 

I have stayed there only three 3d) babe mid) nur bret- Sage t>a aufs 

days. gefiaCteru 

Where does your brother stay at 3Bc bait fid) 3f)t £err 23tuber a,cs 

present ? genroarttq auf 1 

At present. (5$ea>mroarttcj. 

To mock at, to criticise some one ©id) ubet Semanben cbet etroaS auf? 

or something. fyaften*. 

To laugh at some one. ©id) uber 3emanben (ujftg madjen. 

He criticises every body. @r l)a(t fid) uber Sebecmann auf. 

To earn, to get. 93 e r b i c n e n. 

To gain. (3 e it> t n n e n *. Part, past, cj e s 

iv n n c n. Imperf. a, e ro a n n. 

To get one's bread. ©etn 2$rob Detbtenen or envetben*. 

Part, past, cm>etbcn. Imperf. 
erroatb. 

To get one's livelihood by. © t d) e r n a f) r c n m i t. 
He gets his livelihood by work- (St ernafjrt fid) nut Utbtitw. 

I get my livelihood by writing. 3d) ernafyre mid) nut ©d)tetben. 
I gain my money by working. 3d) tterbtcne metn ®e(b mit tttbettett. 
By what does this man get his SSonut etnafyrt fid) btefet Gianni 
livelihood 1 

To spill. 93etcjtcfjen*, Part, past, t) e t s 

a, ff e n. Imperf. c r 9 op. 

He has spil* the wine over the &*r bat ben SBciri auf ben Stfcf) Der* 
table. QCffen (action). 

a Compouna verbs are conjugated exactly like simple verbs. We shall 
therefore merely note the irregularities of the latter, and leave it to the learner 
himself to add the separable or inseparable particles. Thus fctttb is the im- 
perfect of ftnben*, to find (See Lessons XXXV. and XLIL), and befatto that 
of befmben*. The participle past of fitttbett is gefunben, and that of befmben*, 
befunben, the syllable ge being omitted on account of the inseparable particle 
(See Lesson XLV.). $>tett is the' imperfect of the verb r)altcn*, to hold (Les- 
son Lin.), and f)telt auf that of auf batten*, The past participle of fatten is 
gefcalren, and that of auffyalten*, aufge^aftm 



228 



To stand, © t e f) c n *. Part, past, geftanben. 

Imperf. ftanb. 

The wine is on the table. £)et SBe'tn jref)t auf bcm Stfcfye 

(rest). 

Has your father already <le- 3ft 3fyr £err SSatcr fcfcon abgcmf't? 

parted 1 

He is ready to depart. (?r if! bereft 'afyureifctu 

Ready. Sfrcit* 

To make ready. Seretten t 

To make one's self ready. ©ttf) bereft macften. 

To keep one's self ready. ©.id) bereft batten*. 



To jrpJfS (£o pierce). 

To break somebody's heart. 
You break this man's heart. 



To hang. 

To be hanging. 



Was my hat hanging on the nail ] 

It was hanging on it. 

I hang it on the nail. 

The thief has been hanged. 

Who has hung the basket on the 

tree? 

The thief, 

the robber, the highwayman, 
The patient (the sick person), 

Tolerably well. 
It is rather late. 
It is rather far. 



3etfpalten (butcfyboljten)* 

Scmcmbem bat #er$ butdbbofyren. 
(Sie burdbbofjten btefem 9#anne ba$ 
£et$. 

£ an a, en (verb active, regular). 

£ a no, e n * (a neuter irregular 

verb). Part, past, gebangen. 

Imperf. r)tng. 

.ping metn £ut an bem 0lagc( ? 

(5r fjftnjbaran. 

3d) bange ifjn an ten 9?aqel. 

JDcr 5)icb tft gebangt tttocben. 

SDSer bat ten .kotb an t>cn 95oum ge* 

bangt ? 
bet IDic& ; 
bet dauber. 
bet patient. (See Note, Lesson 

LIV.) 
•3temltd), fo jtemltd). 
(£$ tft $tcmUd» fpdt. 
(§6 tft §iemlid) roeit. 



EXERCISE 178. 

How is your father 1— -He is (only) so so. — How is your patient ? 
— He is a little better to-day than yesterday. — Is it long since you 
saw your brothers ? — I saw them two days ago. — How were they ? 
— They were very well. — How art thou ] — 1 am tolerably well 
(ntcbt libel). — How long has your brother been learning German? 
— He has been learning it only three months. — Does he already 
speak it?— He already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your 
cousin who has been learning it these five years. — Is it long since 
you heard of my uncle ! — It is hardly three months since 1 heard 
of him. — Where was he staying then? — He was staying at Berlin, 
but now he is in London. — Do you like to speak to my uncle 1— 



229 

I do like very much (febr) to speak to him, but I do not like (id) bafre 
nicbt cjcrn) him to laugh at me. — Why does he laugh at you] — He 
laughs at me, because I speak badly. — Why has your brother no 
friends 1 — He has none, because he criticises every body. — What 
do you get your livelihood by] — I get my livelihood by working. 
— Docs 3 T our friend get his livelihood by writing] — He gets it by 
speaking and writing. — Do these gentlemen get their livelihood by 
working] — They do not get it by doing any thing, for they are 
too idle to work. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON.— gecl)0 tttt& skbet^igst* 

£ecti0n. 

To doubt any thing. > 2Cn ctroaS *nxtfc(n (governs the da- 

To question any thing. \ tive with the preposition an). 
Do you doubt that] 3nxtfdn @ie t>citan ? 

'. do not doubt it. } 

I make no question, have no >3d) ittxtflc nicf)t fcaran. 

doubt of it. 3 

It is not to be doubted. Daran ift ntd)t $u gwcifcln. 

What do you doubt] SBcran jroetfdn <£ie? 

I doubt what that man has told 3d) petfk an fc>em,tpa$ fctcjer 90*ann 

me. mtr gcfagt ()q*. 

To agree to a thing. IJeber (or tvccjen) etroaS etntg (or 

cm*) rcetfcen*. 

Do you grant that ? ©eftefjcn (Sic e$ ? 

I do grant it. 3cb geftcbe es (or id) gcftcfjc es etn, or 

tcb o/be C6 $u). 

How much have you paid for that 2Btemet rjabcn ©te ftir Mcfcn £ut be* 

hat ] $ablt ? 

I have paid three crowns for it. 3d) l)abc bret Scaler fcafiir bc$af)(t. 

.For. ^ (i r (a preposition governing the 

accusative). 

I have bought this horse for five 3d) fyaU Mcfcg g>fcrt> ftir (or urn) 
hundred francs. fiinf f)unt>ett $rant:en gcfauft. 

The price, t>er f)ret$. 

Have you agreed about the price ! ©tnt) <2te fiber ben $)ret$ (roegcn t>c$ 

§>rctfc$) ctnto, gcruerfcen ? 
We have agrees abou; it. 95?ir fine fcarubcr (t>e$roca,cn) etnig 

geroetben. 
About what have you agreed ? SGBoruber (rccsroegen) jtnfc ©ic «tmg 

gctuorbeti ? 



230 



.-. . .;, S UetuT fcen $>rci$. 

About the price. J ^^ to>«^ 

On account of (about). 95>egeti (a preposition governing 
the genitive). 
(?K'fU'rKn &c Sh'ren Jefjtevetn? 

3cb Cliche, ^af} c* etn £ef)fer ijt. 

r:Ctd) W$lctcb?ij*. Part, past, m* 
: glicben. Imperf. tkT^ltd), 
' ©icb r>etetmo,en. 
(Shmnllto/n. 

3nt> effen, bocb, i ebod). 
.£) e ffen u ngcodbtct. 

Stage n*. Imperf. trug. 



Do you confess your fault? 

I do confess it. 

I confess it to be a fault. 

To agree, to compose a differ- 
ence. 

To consent. 

However. 
For all that. 

To wear. 



What garments does he wear? 2£a* fiir JfUcilVr tragt er? 

He wears beautiful garments. @r tragt febone .ftfetfcer. 

Against my custom. ©co/n metnc ©ercefynfjeit (a fern. 

.noun taking en in the plural). 

As customary. S3>ie gcit)cbnttci). 

The partner, tvt .panbelScjcnep (gen. en). 

To observe something, to take (Struck merfen (geroafyt nxtfcen*, fes 



notice of something. 
Do you take notice of that ? 
I do take notice of it. 
Did you observe that? 
Did you notice what he did ? 

I did notice it. 



()cn*). 
Sfflcrfcn @t« tasi? 
3cb merfe es. 
4babcn @ic fcaS gemerft? 
|>abcn <Sie gefeVn, wag er a,etf)an 

bat ? 
3d) babe e$ gefeben. 

To expect (to hope). 93crmutbcn (boffen)* 

Do you expect to receive a letter 8Scrnmtbcn (Sic cinen 93rief son 3*)- 

from your uncle ? tern £)()etm $u erfyalten ? 

I do expect it. 3cb fyoffe e$. 

He, expects it. (5*t t>ermu<f)et e$. 

Have we expected it? Jpaben nut e$ oernmtfjet ? 

We have expected it. SQSir fyaben es tJetmutfyet. 

To get (meaning to procure). 93 c r f cb a f f e n. 
I cannot procure any money. 3d) fcmn mtr fetn ©ctt) ferfebaffen. 
He cannot procure any thing to @t £mm ftd) ntd)t? $u effen Ocrfd)af* 

eat. fen. 

exercises. 179. 

What have you gained that money by ? — I have gained it by 
working. — What have you done with your wine ? — I have spilt it 



231 

on the table. — Where is yours 1 — It is on the large table in my lit- 
tle room ; but you must not drink any of it, for I must keep it for 
my father who is ill. — Are you ready to depart with me ? — I am so. 
— Does your uncle depart with us 1 — He departs with us if he plea- 
ses. — Will you tell him to be ready to depart to-morrow at six 
o'clock in the evening ] — I will tell him so. — Wliy are you laugh- 
ing at that man 1 — I do not intend to laugh at him. — I beg of you 
not to do it, for you will break his heart if you laugh at him. — Why 
have they (man) hanged that man ] — They have hanged him, be- 
cause he has killed somebody. — Have they (man) hanged the man 
who stole a horse (from) your brother (in the dative) 1 — They (3Wan) 
have punished him, but they have not hanged him : they only hang 
highwaymen in our country (bet une). — Where have you found my 
coat ? — I found it in the blue room ; it was hanging on a great nail. 
—Will you hang my hat on the tree ?• — I will hang it thereon. 

180. 

Do you doubt what I am telling you 1 — I do not doubt it. — Do 
you doubt what that man has told you ] — I do doubt it, for he has 
often told me what was not true (rt?af)t). — Why have you not kept 
your promise 1 — I know no more what I promised you. — Did you 
not promise us to take (fubtcn) us to the concert (on) Thursday 1 — I 
confess that I was wrong in promising you ; although (tnfceffcn) the 
concert has not taken place. — Does your brother confess his fault? 
— He does confess it. — What does your uncle say to that letter 1 — 
He says that it is written very well ; but he admits that he has 
been wrong in sending it to the captain. — Do you confess your fault 
now 1 — I confess it to be a fault. — Have you at last bought the 
horse which you wished to buy*? — I have not bought it, for I have 
not been able to procure money. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY.SEVENTH LESSON. — Qitbctl nnb 

OF THE PLUPERFECT. 

This past tense expresses an action entirely finished 
when another action which relates to it was com- 
mencing. % 

After having read (after I had 9?ad)t)cm tcb Qctcfcn Ijattc 

read). 
After having cut the bread (after 9?ad)fccm et tag SBtot) gcfdjntttm t)aU 

he had cut the bread). te. 

After having eaten (after he had 92od>Dem er QCQeffen fjatte. 

eaten.) 



232 

After cutting myself. 9?acbbem id) mid) gcfcl>ntttcn batte. 

After dressing yourself. SRacbbem ©« ficb angcjegcn batten. 
After he had withdrawn from the 9?ctd)bem cr fid) Mm -Jciier cntfernt 

fire. t)attc. 

After thou hadst shaved. 9iad)t>em ©u S)td) rafirt (jattcft. 

After they had warmed them- SHacbbem fie. fid) ejeroarmt batten. 

selves. 

Before I set out. (Sfjc id) abrctfe. ' 

When I had read, I breakfasted. 9?cid)t>em icV) o/lefen F)attc, ftuf)ftucfte 

id). 

DCf 3 In the second member of a compound phrase the 
nominative is placed after its verb. 

When y6u had dressed you went Stfadbbem ©te fid) ancje^ocjen fatten, 

out. 9 i n g c n ©te au& 

When he had cut the bread he Stfacbbem cr t>a$ s .8rot) gefebmtten t)aU 

cut the meat. , te, f*cbnift cr ba(> #teifd). 

After he had read the letter he 9?ocb&em cr ben 23rtcf cjclcfcn f>atte^ 

said. fa g t e cr. 

Before I depart I will once more She tcb ctbrcifc, ro i ( I i cb nod) em* 

see my children. mat meine £mt>cr feben. 

Obs. A. This transposition of the nominative does not 
take place when the phrase begins with the subject. 

He cut the meat after he had cut (Sr febnttt bfl$ $tcijcb, nad)bem er ba$ 

the bread. S3reb a,efd)mtten i)attc. 

What did he do after he had SBctS tt)at cr, nad)bem er gegeffen fyaU 

eaten 1 tc ? 

He went to bed. <£t cjing 311 93ette. 



THE FOLLOWING VERBS GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE 

preposition it 6 e X ♦ 

To be afflicted at something. tteber ctroaS Mv&bt fcin*. 
To afflict one's self at something-, ©tcb fiber ettwa* betrtiben. 
Are you afflicted at the death of <Sinb @ic fiber ben Sob metnc* 

mv friend ? j$reunM$ berf ubt ? 

I vm much afflicted at it. 3d) bin febr betrfibt barubcr, 

At w r hat is your father afflicted 1 SBeriiber tft 3b* peer sBatcr bctrfibt ? 



The accident, 


bet 3ufat; 


the death, 


bcr Sob. 


To die (to lose life). 


feterben* 


I die, am dying. 


3ch fterfc 


Thou liest, art dying. 


£>u ftttbjl 



233 

He dies, is dying. (5r fhrbt. 

Died. Part, past, gejtcr&en. Imperfect, 

ftarb. 

To complain of some one or some- Sid) u b e r 3entanfcen e fc e t 
fAmg-. etroag b e H a g e n (b e f d) n? e s 

r en). 

Do you complain of my friend 1 23ef(agen Ste fid) fiber metnen 

Jrcunfc ? 
I do complain of him. 3d) bef(age mid) iiber tfyn. 

Of whom do you complain "? Uebcr nxn beftagen @tc fid) ? 

Of what does your brother com- SBeruber befd)roert fid) 3fo 23ruter? 
plain ! 

To wonder, to be astonished or Sid) u b e r e t tt) a 5 tr> u tt fc e r tu 
surprised at something. 

Do you wonder at what I have ££unfcern &t ftd) tiber fca$, nxt$ tcr) 

done? getfyan fyabc? 

I do wonder at it. 3d) rountere mtd) banker. 

At what are you surprised ? SEertiber rounfcern &€ fid) ? 

To fe glad. £ i e 6 f e t n* (governs the dative). 

To be sorry. Sett) f e t n* or tf)un* (governs 

the dative). 

I am glad of it. f (53 tft mtr tteb. 

I am sorry for it. f (5$ tfjut or (tfr) mtr fetfc. 

I am glad to hear that your father (5$ tft mtr (teb $u serncfymen, fca§ 3fa 

is well. £err SSater fid) rocfyl befmfcet. 

To hear (to understand). SSernefymen*. 

Dear, litb ; 

sad, sorrowful. traurtg. 

The prince, fcer gttrjt 0?rtn$) (en in the ge- 

nitive) ; 
the count, fcer ©raf (en In the genitive) ; 

the baron, ber 23aron. 

To pronounce 2Cu5fpred)e n*. 

The Saxon, fcer <Sad)fe ; 

the Prussian, fcer spreujje ; 

the Austrian, ber £\ftretd)er. 

Saxony, ®od)fcn ; 

Prussia, $preu£en ; " 

Austria, £cfrretd) (Defterretd)*). 

The Christian, fcer (5brtft (gen. en) ; 

the Jew, fcer 3ufce ; 

the negro, fcer 9?cger (fcer $filrt)v, gen. en). 

* All names of countries are neuter. 



234 

EXERCISES. 181. 

Has your father at last bought the house ? — He has not bought it, 
for he could not agree about the price. — Have you at last agreed 
about the price of that carriage 1 — We have agreed about it. — How 
much have you paid for it 1 — I have paid fifteen hundred francs (bet: 
gran 6c) for it. — What hast thou bought to-day 1 — I have bought 
three beautiful pictures, a pretty gold ring, and two pair of thread 
stockings. — How much hast thou bought the pictuies for 1 — I have 
bought them for seven hundred francs. — Do you find that they are 
dear 1 — I do not find so. — Have you agreed with your partner 1 — I 
have agreed with him. — Does he consent to pay you the price of 
the ship 1 — He does consent to pay it to me.— Do you consent to go 
to England ] — I do consent to go thither. 

Have you seen your old friend again (rotct>cr Qcfehcn) 1 — I have 
seen him again. — Did you recognise him ] — 1 could hardly recognise 
him, for contrary to his custom, he wears a long sword. — How is 
he 1 — He is very well. — What garments does he wear 1 — He wears 
beautiful new garments. — Have you taken notice of what your boy 
has done ? — I have taken notice of it. — Have you punished him for 
it 1 — T have not punished him for it, because he has confessed his 
fault. — Has your father already written to you? — Not yet; but I 
expect to receive a letter from him to-day. — Of what do you com- 
plain? — I complain of not being able to procure some money.— 
Why do these poor people complain 1 — They complain because they 
cannot procure a livelihood. — How are your parents 1 — They are 
as usual (wie flcroobnltd)), very well. — Is your uncle (Sfyr £en: 
£)bctm) well? — He is better than he usually is (ate gewb'bnttcb). — 
Have you already received a letter from your friend who is in Ber- 
lin ? — I have already written to him several times ; he has, how- 
ever, not answered me yet. 

182. 

What did you do when you had finished your letter 1 — I went to 
my brother, who took (fubrcn) me to the theatre, where I had the 
pleasure to find one of my friends, whom I had not seen for ten 
years. — What didst thou do after getting up'this morning? — When 
I had read the letter of the Polish count, I went out to see the the- 
atre of the prince, which-I had not seen before (nod) ntct)t).— What' 
did your father do when he had breakfasted 1 — He shaved and went 
out. — What did your friend do after he had been a walking 1 — He 
went to the baron. — Did the baron cut the meat after he had cut the 
bread ] — He cut the bread after he had cut the meat. — When do you 
set out ] — I do not set out till (crjt) to-morrow ; for before I depart 
J will once more see my good friends. — What did your children do 
when they had breakfasted ? — They went a walking with their dear 
preceptor. — Where did your uncle go to after he had warmed him- 
self? — He went nowhither. — After he had warmed himself he un- 
dressed and went to bed. — At what o'clock did he get up 1 — He go* 
up at sunrise. — Did you wake him? — I had no need to wake him 



235 

for he had got up before me. — What did your cousin do when he 
heard (of) the deafrh of his best friend 1 — He was much afflicted, 
and went to bed without saying a word. — Did you shave before you 
breakfasted 1 — I shaved when I had breakfasted. — Did you go to 
bed when you had eaten supper ] — When I had eaten supper I 
wrote my letters, and when I had written them I went to bed. — At 
what are you afflicted 1 — 1 am afflicted at that accident. — Are you 
afflicted at the death of your relation 1 — I am much (|\'br) afflicted 
at it. — When did your relation die 1 — He died last month. — Of 
what do you complain 1 — I complain of your boy. — Why do you 
complain of him ! — Because he lias killed the pretty dog, which I 
received from one of my friends. — Of what has your uncle com- 
plained 1 — He has complained of what you have done. — Has he 
complained of the letter which I wrote to him 1 — He has com- 
plained of it. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY.EIGHTH LESSON.— Qfcljt nnb Bubtn)i%Xtt 

Section. 

Declension of Feminine Substantives. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. 
bte/ ber, ber, bte* 



rp, ^ Singular. 

I Plui^al. 



bte, ber, ben, bte* 

I. Singular. 

Rule. All feminine substantives, without excep- 
tion, together with all foreign feminine words adopted 
into German, as : bte $orm, the form ; bte ?mte, the 
line, remain invariable in all the cases singular. Ex. 
Nom. bte $vau, the woman ; Gen. ber gr au > °f tne 
woman ; Dat. ber $xait, to the woman ; Acc. bte 
$vau, the woman. 

II. Plural. 

Rule. Feminine substantives ending in e, el, er, add 
n, and all others ett, in all the cases of the plural ; and 
do not soften the radical vowels. (See Table of the 
Declension of Substantives, Lesson XIII.) 
There are two exceptions to this rule : 
1st, The two substantives : bte 5DJtttter, the mother ; 
bte ^oct)ter, the daughter, soften the radical vowels in 



2S6 



the plural without adding n. a Ex. Plural : t)te flitter 
the mothers ; bte Jixtter, the daughters. 

2d, Feminine monosyllables containing an Ci or U, 
are declined in the plural like masculine substantives, 
that is, they add e in all the cases and soften the radi- 
cal vowel. b 



The door — the doors. 
The bottle — the bottles. 
The fork — the forks. 
The pen —the pens. 
The hand — the hands. 
The nut — the nuts. 

She — they. 



Has she ? 

She has. 
She has not. 
Have they ? 
They have. 
They have not. 



Sing. Plural. 

fete £t)ttr, — bte Xtfhrtn. 
bte $(afd)e — bte glaf#n, 
bte ©abel — bte ©abeln. 



bie gebenu 
- bte £anbe. 
-WeWific. 



(See Table 
Pronouns, 



bte geber 
bte ftanb 
bte ghtfJ 

6tc — ftc. 
Personal 
XXVIII.) 

£a! fie ? 
(Sic hat. 
(Sic bat ntcbt. 
facibiti ftc ? 
&c babcn. 
(Sic I)abcn ntcbt. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. 
I ntetne, metner, metrter, 



of the 
Lesson 



Ace. 

nteme* 



My (feminine singular). 

My (plural for all genders). 1 ; metne, metner, metnen, metne* 

Obs. A. In this manner all possessive pronouns of 
the feminine gender are declined, as : Seine, thy ; feme, 
his ; ifyre, her ; unfere, our ; (Sure, your ; tfyre, their. 

The father and his son or his £)ct SSatcr unt> feirt (Sebn obcr fcinc 

daughter. Secbter. 

The mother and her son cr her .Die Gutter unt> ir)r ^efyn ctct tfjre 

daughter. Socbtcr. 

The child and its brother or its £)as .ftint> \mt fcin 23rut>er efcet 

sister. fcinc (BcbnxfU'r. 

My door — my doors. 9)Mnc Shfit — meinc Sbtircn. 

Thy fork — thy forks. ©cine (Stofret — Deine ©abeln. 

a Except in the dative. It will be remembered that all substantives with- 
out exception take tt in the dative plural, if they have not one in the nomina- 
tive. (See Lesson XIII.) 

b The declension of those substantives which deviate from these rules 
will be separately noted. 



237 



His pen — his pens. 
Her brother — her brothers. 
Her sister — her sisters. 
Her book — her books. 



^ctne <?eber — fetne ftebenu 
Shr SBrubcr — thre Sfcftbec. 
Shrc £d)nxfter — tbre (Scbroeftern. 
Shr *Bucb — tbre £>tid)er. 



THE ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE ARTICLE OF THE 
FEMININE GENDER. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



the goocn ^ 
of the good [^ ^ / 



to the good | ■ 
the goodj 



Plur. 



Singular. 
Nom. fcte gute. 
Gen. ber gittett* 
Dat. ber guten. 
Ace. bie QUte. 



Plural. 
bie gutem 
ber gutem 
ben guteit* 
bte gutem 



Obs. B. The adjective preceded by a possessive 
pronoun. of the feminine gender, as: mettle, betne, &c. 
has exactly the same declension as with the definite 
article. 



My good linen, 

the right hand, 

the left hand, 

the language, 

the tongue, 

the street, 

the town, 

the woman, the wife, 

the girl, 

the young lady, 

My right hand aches. 
His left hand aches. 

The room, 

the chamber, 

the cabinet, 

the apartment, 
The front room, 
the back room, 
the silk, 
the silk stocking, 



metric gute getnma'fib ; 

bte red) to Syatfb ; 

btc ftrifc £anb ; 

bte ©pracbe ; 

bte 3unge ; 

bie <Strai)e ; 

bte (Stabt ; 

bie $rcui (does not soften and 

takes en in the plural) ; 
ba$ SEctbcbcn ; 
ba6 grauletn. 

sQllt fcbtiicr^t bte recite £anb. c 
Sfym febmcrjt bte Itnfe £anb, 

bte (Stube ; 

ba$ Simmer ; 

bte hammer ; 

ba$ (55emad). d 

tie ©tube t»crn tyrant ; • 

bie ©tube bmtcnanS ; 

bte (Setbe ; 

ber fetbene ©trumpf. 



c When the sensation expressed by the impersonal verb is felt only in a 
i .rt of the body, the person is put in the dative. 

d ^tubc is the room commonly inhabited an*d in which there is a' stove. 
\ mmer is the general word for room, whether there is a stove in it or not 
hammer is a small room in which there is no stove, and in which various 
flings are kept; hence bte Meiberfammer, the wardrobe ; bte Q3obertfamnter, 
tlie garret, &c. @emad) is only used in speaking of the apartments in a cas- 
lie or a palace. 



238 



THE ADJECTIVE WITHOUT AN ARTICLE IN THE FEMININE 
GENDER. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. 



Good, &c. (in the singular). 
Good, &c. (in the plural). 



gute, guter, guter, gute. 
gute, guter, guten, gute. 



Some good soup/ ®ute ®uppe. 

Some bad pens. ©cbtecfytc jefcern. 

Some beautiful linen shirts. (gd)one (cinrocinoene £emben. (See 

Obs. Lesson IV.) 

THE ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE 
IN THE FEMININE GENDER. 

\ j« A , P . . s IN. eine gute. G. enter guten* 
A good, fee. (feminine). | A ^ J^ D einer j^,. 

THE FOLLOWING PRONOUNS ARE DECLINED LIKE THE 
DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

This or this one, that or that one, btefe, jcne. 
Some, sundry, ctnt^e, et(tcr)C 

Many, several, mcfyre or mef)tm\ e 

Which, wclcbe. 

All, alle. 

Many a one, some, mand)Cr, mandK, mand)eg. 

2Cnt>erc is declined like an adjective. 

Obs. C. In the plural all adjectives, ordinal num- 
bers, and pronominal adjectives have the same declen- 
sion for all genders, as we have already seen in many 
parts of this work, particularly in the Table of the 
Declension of Adjectives, Lesson XVIII. 

REMARK. 

T<* become intimately acquainted with the declen- 
sion of adjectives, ordinal numbers, and pronominal 
adjectives, the learner has only to familiarize himself 
with the definite article ; for when the adjective is 
preceded by a word having the characteristic termina- 
tion/ it takes en in. all the cases, except in the nomi- 

« Some authors write mefyre, others mefjtere. The latter is more usual, 
the former more correct. 

f The terminations of the definite article are called characteristic because 
they characterize the case, number, and gender. 



239 

native singular of all genders and the accusative sin- 
gular feminine and neuter, in which it takes e (Page 
33, Rule 2d.). The adjective itself takes these termi- 
nations when it is not preceded by any article^ or if 
the word preceding has not the characteristic termi- 
nation, as : em, mem, fetlt, &c. in the nominative of the 
masculine, and nominative and accusative of the 
neuter gender. 

This principle is clearly exemplified in the adjective 
preceded by the indefinite article. The nominative 
em, not having the characteristic termination er for 
the masculine and e£ for the neuter, the adjective 
takes it. Ex. din guter 9Eftarm, em guteS $mb* 

The characteristic termination of the masculine 
being e r and that of the neuter e $, that of the femi- 
nine is e : so that is is sufficient to join the ending e to 
a word of the characteristic termination to make it 
feminine. Ex. Masc. and neuter : btefer, t>tefe$ ; femi- 
nine : btefe ; masc. and neuter : jener jene$ ; feminine, 
jerte. 

These principles being once well understood, the 
learner will find no difficulty whatever in declining 
adjectives, ordinal numbers or pronominal adjectives. 

Have you my pen 1 £aben ©te meine Jebet ? 

No, Madam, I have it not. Sftetn, SJtobcim (gnfffctge •$rau h ), id) 

fyabc fie ntcbt. 
Which bottle have you broken 1 5ffie(d)e ^tafcbc fjafcen <Stc $ert>red)en ? 
Which soup has she eaten 1 80Bc(dbe ©uppe bat fie gegeffen ? 

What pear have you 1 2Ba$ fur cine SStrnfr fyabm <&'k ? 

What linen have you bought 1 ££a$ ffit Setnroanb fyabm @ie $e* 

fouft ? 
Do you see my sister ? (geben ©te meine ©d)mefter ? 

I do see her. 3d) fet)e fie. 

Have you seen my sisters 1 £aben ©ie meine ©cftroefletn gefcs 

ben ? 
No, my lady, I have not seen SGetn, mem grauletn, id) fjafce fie 
them. md)t gefeben. 

s Except in the genitive singular masculine and neuter, in which it takes 
ett, and in the nominative and accusative neuter in which it changes a8 into 
eg. (Page 33, Rule 2d.) 

h If speaking to a lady of rank, gnabige %xa% gracious Lady, rauit be 
used. 



240 

The nose, fc>ie 9?afe ; 

the butter, tie Gutter ; 

the soup, tie Suppc ; 

the towel, fccis £>anttucb ; 

the napkin, fcbs SeUertuch, fctc Sctrictte. 

exercises. 183. 

Are you not surprised at what my friend has done 1 — I am much 
surprised at it. — At what is your son surprised ! — He is surprised 
at your courage. — Are you sorry for having- written to my uncle ] 
— I am, on the contrary, glad of it. — At what art thou afflicted ] — I 
am not afflicted at the happiness of my enemy, but at the death of 
my friend. — -How are your brothers 1 — They have been very well 
for these few days. — Are you glad of it? — 1 am glad to hear that 
they are well. — Are you a Saxon 1 — No, I am a Prussian. — Do 
the Prussians like to learn French ]— They do like to learn it. — 
Do the Prussians speak German as well as the Saxons 1 — The 
Saxons and the Prussians speak German well ; but the Austrians 
do not pronounce it very well (md)t cdtyt gut); notwithstanding 
they are (beffen unc^acfttet fint> e*) very good people. — Which day of 
the week (^Bcldn'n'&aq in fcer SBocbO do the Turks celebrate (feicrn) 1 
— They celebrate Fjriday (fcen Jrettag) ; but the Christians cele- 
brate Sunday, the Jews Saturday, and the negroes their birth-day 
(fret dkbuttetcig). 

184. 

Has your sister my gold ribbon 1 — She has it not. — What has 
she ] — She has nothing. — Has your mother anything ] — She has a 
fine gold fork. — Who has my large bottle ] — Your sister has it. — 
Do you sometimes see your mother ] — I see her often. — When did 
you see your sister ] — I saw her three months and a half (Obs. C., 
Lesson LXV.) ago. — Who has my fine nuts] — Your good sister 
has them. — Ha,s she also my silver forks ] — She has them not. — 
Who has them ] — Your mother has them. — Have your sisters had 
my pens ] — They have not had them, but I believe that their, chil- 
dren have had them. — Why does your brother complain] — He 
complains because his right hand aches.— Why do you complain ] 
— I complain because my left hand aches. — Is your sister as old 
as my mother 1 — She is not so old, but she is taller. — Has your 
brother purchased anything] — He has purchased something. — 
What has he bought] — He has bought fine linen and good pens. 
— Has he not bought some silk stockings ] — He has bought some. 
— Is your sister writing ? — No, Madam, she is not writing. — Why 
does she not write ] — Because she has a sore hand. — Why does 
the daughter of your neighbour not go out] — She does not go out, 
because she has sore feet. — Why does my sister not speak ] — Be- 
cause she has a soar mouth. — Hast thou not seen my silver pen? 
— -I have not seen it. — Hast thou a front room ?— I have one be* 



241 

hind, but my brother has one in the front. — Does the wife of our 
shoemaker go out already 1 — No, my lady, she does not go out 
yet, for she is still very ill. 

185. 

Which bottle has your little sister broken ? — She broke the one 
which my mother bought yesterday.— Have you eaten of my soup 
or of my mother's 1 — I have eaten neither of yours nor your mo- 
ther's, but of that of my good sister. — Have you seen the woman 
that was with (bet) me this morning 1 — I have not seen her. — Has 
your mother hurt herself] — She has not hurt herself. — Have you a 
sore nose 1 — I have not a sore nose, but a sore hand. — Have you 
cut your finger 1 — No, my lady, I have cut my hand. — Will you 
give me a pen 1 — I will give you one. — Will you (have) this (one) 
or that (one) 1 — I will (have) neither. — Which (one) do you wish 
to have 1 — I wish to have that which your sister has. — Do you 
wish to have my mother's good black silk or my sister's 1 — I wish 
to have neither your mother's nor your sister's, but that which you 
have. — Can you write with this pen ? — I can write with it (Obs. 
2?., Lesson L1I.). — Each woman thinks herself amiable ((tebengz 
rc>urt>tg) and each is conceited (beftgt ©tgenltebe). — The same (@ben 
fc) as men (tie 9J?ann$perfcn), my dear friend. — Many a one thinks 
himself learned who is not so> and many men surpass (ubertteffen*) 
women in vanity (an Sttilfeit). (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON.— Nzntl Xttib ftbfthqtgStC 

Cation. 

To go into the kitchen, to be in 3>n tie jlucfee o,er)en*, in tet $ticfje 
the kitchen. fetn*. (See Lesson XXIX. 

Note b .) 
To go to church, to be at church. 3n tie &trd)e gefjen*, in tec JUrd)* 

fetn*. 
To go to school, to be at school. 3n fcte ^djute gefjen*, tn tec ©cfyul* 

fetn*. 
To go into the cellar,*to be in 3n t>en better gefjen*, in lent £et* 
the cellar. Icr fetn*. 

The dancing school, tie $an$fd)u(c ; 

the play (the comedy), tie R onto tie ; 
the opera, tie £)pec. 

1 o go a hunting, to be at hunt- f #uf tie Scmt a,eFjen*,auf tec 3og0 
ing. fein*. (See Lesson XX X* 

Note ».) 

To go to the castle, to he at the 2Cuf tag ©cfitofJ a,er)en*, auf tern 
castle. ©cfytoffc fetn*.* 

* The preposition cmf denotes action and existence upon the exterior of an^ 
thing or motion towards an elevation. 
11 



242 



To go to the exchange, to be at 2Cuf bte 93orfc ge!)en*, auf bet 258rfe 
the exchange. fetn*. 

The bank, Me <Banf (plur. SBanfen) ; 

the bench, bte SBanf (plur. 33anfe)* 

To go to fish or a fishing, gtfcfyen gefyen*. 

To hunt. Sagcn. 



The whole day, aL the day, 

the whole morning, 

the whole evening, 

the whole night, all the night, 

the whole year, 

the whole week, 

the whole society, 

All at once, 

suddenly (all of a sudden), 



ben gotten Sag ; 
fccn gan^en Bergen ; 
ben ganjen 2C6ent> ; 
bie gan$e 9?acf)t ; 
bat gan$e Saljt ; 
bie gan$e SBodbe ; 
bte gan$e ®efeflfcl)aft. b 
auf etnmal ; 
plogltcfy. 



Next week. 
Last week. 
This week. 
This year. 
Your mother, 

your sister, 
your sisters, 

A person, 
The belly-ache, 

She has the stomach-ache. 
His sister has a violent head- 
ache. 



SDie ftinfttge (nd'd)j!e) 9Bod>e. 

£)te »ortge (wrgangene) 3S5oc^e* 

£)tefe ^Bocfte* 

£)icfe$ 3a!}r, 

t Sbre grau Gutter (See 055. 

Lesson LXXV.) ; 
t Sfa grauletn @d)mcirer ; 
t Sbfe gtciuletn (Scfyweftern. 
etne sperfen. 
bag 33aud)roef); plur. bie SSaucf)* 

fcfynteqen. 
©ic foot 9)?agenfcf)mer$en (plur.)*. 
@etne (Scfyroeftet fyat fyefttgeS Jtopf* 

rocfj. 



Some of it, any of it. ■ 
Some of them, any of 

them. 
Of it, of them. 



Singular and Plural fern 

A 



Sing. 

and 
Plur. 

fern. 



Pronouns possessive abso- 
lute. 
Mine, his, hers, ) o. 
Ours, yours, theirs. ) °" 



?i 



SSMcfye, berett, berfelfcem 
(See Q&s. Lesson XVI.) 



Feminine. 



Singular. 

bte metntge, bte fetntge, bte tfyttge. 
bie unfrige, bte (Suttge, bie t&rigfc. 



* Substantives terminating in et, tyit, hit, f$aft, and atl) are feminine. 



243 



Mine, his, hers, 
Ours, yours, hers. 



> Plural. 



Have you my pen or hers 1 
I have hers. 

To her. 



What do you wish to send to 

your aunt 1 • 
I wish to send her a tart. 
Will you send her also fruits 1 
I will send her some. 
Have you sent the books to my 

sisters ] 
1 have sent them to them. 

The fruit, 

the tart, 

the aunt, 

the peach, 

the strawberry, 

the cherry, 

the cousin (aunt), 

the niece, 

the might (power), 

the maid-servant, 

the gazette, 

The relation. 



Plural. 

bte meimgen, bte fetmgen, bte 

tfyrtgeu. 
bte imfrtgen, bte (Surigeit, bte 

tf)rtgem c 

£akn (£te mctne gebet obcr tie \U 
• ttcje ? 
3d) fyafce bte ir)rtgc. 

3 f) v (See Table of Personal Pro- 
nouns, Lesson XXV11I.). 

2Ba$ roollen (Ste Sfact g^urjme fcfyis 

cfen? 
3d) mill tf)t cine Scrte fcfytcfen. 
SSoUen ®te tf)t aucb grud)te fcfyicfen ? 
3d) will ii)t roelcbe fdbtcftn. 
£a(>en <§te mctnen (Scfyroeftetn tie 

Sbticper $c[d)tcft ? 
3d) fya&e fie ifyrten $cfd)ttft. 

tie $rud)t ; 

bte Serte ; 

bte Sffiufymc (bte Sante) ; 

bte 5)firfid)e ; * 

bie (Srbbeere ; 

bte jUrfdje; 

bte 23afe ; 

bie 9?td)te ; 

bte TOacr>t ; 

bte 93?a£b ; 

bte 3ettunc\.<i 



The neighbour (feminine), 
the ware (merchandise, goods), 



MberSernxmbte; 
F. bte SSerroanbte ; 

bte 9?ad)6arinn ; 
bte SOSaare* 



(an adjec- 
tive noun. 



Obs. A. A feminine substantive is formed by join- 
ing the syllable inn to a masculine substantive. Ex. 



The actor, 
the actress, 



ber ©djciufptefct ; 
bte (Scfyaufptelettnru 



c These pronouns have the declension of an adjective preceded by the defi- 
nite article. (See Lesson VII.) 
* Words terminating in ung are feminine. 



244 



Obs. B. If the radical syllable of the masculine sub- 
stantive contains one of the vowels a, 0, U, it is gen- 
erally softened on being made feminine by the addi- 
tion of the syllable mtu Ex. 



The countess, 
the fool (fem.), 
the cook (fem.), 

the peasant (peasant's wife), 

the sister-in-law, 

To catch a cold, 
To have a cold, 
To have a cough, 
I have caught a cold. 

The cold, 

the cough, 
To make sick. 
It makes me sick. 



tie ©rd'ftrm ; 
tie Sttdrrinn ; 
tie ^ocbtnn ; 
tte'-^duertnn ; 
tte <Sct)tvacjerinn. 

ten ^djnupfen ftefommen*. 

ten (Scbnupfen fyaben*. 

ten £uften fyaben*. 

3d) f)abc ten @&)nupfen fcefommen. 

ter ©cbnupfen; 

tec £uften. 

Rxaui mcicben. 

(5$ mad)t mid) txant 



exercises. 186. 

Where is your cousin? — He is in the kitchen. — Has your cook 
(fem.) already made the soup ] — She has made it, for it stands al- 
ready upon the table. — Where is your mother 1 — She is at church.— 
Is your sister gone to school ? — She is gone thither. — Does your 
mother often go to church 1 — She goes thither every morning and 
every evening. — At what o'clock in the morning does she go to 
church ? — She goes thither as soon as she gets up. — At what o'clock 
does she get up 1 — She gets up at sun-rise. — Dost thou go to school 
to-day] — I do go thither. — What dost thou learn at school? — I 
learn to read, write, and speak there. — W T here is your aunt] — She 
is gone to the play with my little sister.— Do your sisters go this 
evening to the opera 1 — No, Madam, they go to the dancing school. 
— ils your father gone a hunting ] — He has not been able to go a 
hunting, for he has a cold. — Do you like to go a hunting 1 — I like 
to go a fishing better than a hunting. — Is your father still in the 
country 1 — Yes, Madam, he is still there. — What does he do there ? 
— He goes a hunting and a fishing there. — Did you hunt when you 
were in the country ? — I hunted the whole day. 

187. 

How long have you stayed with (Bet) my mother? — I stayed with 
her the whole evening. — Is it long since you were at the castle ?— 
I was there last week. — Did you find many people there 1 — I found 
only three persons there. — Who were those three persons ] — They 
((S?) were the count, the countess, and their daughter. — Are these 
girls as good as their brothers 1 — They are better than they. — Can 
your sisters speak German ?— They cannot, but they are learning 



245 

it. —Have you brought anything to your mother ] — I brought hei 
gvod fruits and a fine tart. — What has your niece brought you ]— 
She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries, and good 
peaches. — Do you like peaches'? — I do like them much (ji'()t). — 

" How many peaches has your neighbour (fern.) given you ] — She 
has given me more than twenty of them. — Have you eaten many 
cherries this year ? — I have eaten many of them.— Did you give 
any to your little sister? — I gave her some. — Why have you not 
given any to your good neighbour (fern.) ] — I wished to give her 
some, but she did not wish to take any, because she does not 
like cherries. — Were there many pears last year ] — There were not 

* many. 

188. 

Why do your sisters not go to the play ] — They cannot go thither, 
because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. — Did you 
sleep well last night ]■ — I did not sleep well, for my children made 
too much noise in my room. — Where were you last night] — I was 
at my brother-in-law's. — Did you see your sister-in-law ? — I did 
see her.- -How is she? — She was better yesterday evening than 
usual. — Did you play] — We did not play, but we read some good 
books ; for my sister-in-law likes to read better than to play. — 
Have you read the gazette to-day 1 — I have read it. — Is there any 
thing new in it ] — I have not read anything new in it. — Where have 
you been since (fetth'm) I saw you]— I have been at Vienna, Lon- 
don, and Berlin.— Did you speak to my sister] — I did speak to her. 
• — What does she say ] — She says that she wishes to see you. — 
Where have you put my pen ] — I have put it on the table. — Do you 
intend to see your aunt to-day ] — I do intend to see her, for she has 
promised me to dine with us. — I admire (ftcnnmt>ern) that family 
(tic JfanuUe), for the father is the king and the mother the queen of 
it. The children and the servants (fro* ■ ©cftnbc has no plural) are 
the subjects (t)cr Untcrtfjan, gen. en) of the state (t>er Stoat). — The 
tutors of the children are the ministers (ret 9JHmjtev), who share 
(ttu'ilen) with the king and queen the care (t>te @erqc)of the govern- 
ment (t>te ^eauTunoJ. The good education (t)ie Srftieftmtg) which 
is given to children (See Obs. Contin. of Lesson LXX.) is the 
crown (tie jUoik) of monarchs (t>er aftonard), gen. en). (See end 
of Lesson XXXIV.) • 



EIGHTIETH LESSON.— &d)t}igst* tttixotl. 

To march (to walk). 9Qtarfd)trcn. a 

To walk (to go on foot). ©cljcn* Gu Jupc gefan). 

■ The verb mctrfdnten takes the auxiliary fern*, when there is a destination 
of place, else it takes either bctben* or fein*. Ex. 2>te 3lnnec tft nad) Oiom 
mavfd)trt, the army has marched to Rome ; bte 2lrmee fyat (or ift) fcett ganjetl 
Sag marfefyirt, the army has marched the whole day. 



246 



To step 

To travel. 

To wander (to go on foot). 

The traveller, 

the wanderer (the traveller on 

foot), % 
To walk or travel a mile. 
To make a step (meaning to step 

physically). 
To take a step (meaning to take 

measures morally). 
To go on a journey. 
To make a speech*. 

A piece of business, "> 
an affair, 5 

To transact business, 

To salt. 

Salt meat, 

fresh meat, 

the food (victuals), 

the dish (mess), 

the milk, 
Salt meats, 
Milt-food, 

To attract. 

The load-stone attracts iron. 

Her singing attracts me. 

To allure, to entice. 
To excite, to charm. 
To charm, to enchant. 
To enrapture, to ravish. 
1 am enraptured with it. 
The beauty, 
the harmony, 
the voice, 
the power (the force), 



©cbtetren*. Part, past* gcfcfyrittcn 

Imperf. fcbrttt. 
$Ketfcn, ) take fcin for their 
2Banfcvrn, $ auxiliary. 

t)cr $ci£mfe ; 
tet SOSantm-r (£Banter*mann). 

(Sine JXfteitc $uriicf(ea,en. 
(Sin en <Sd)t ttt macron, 

(Sinen Scfyritt tfjun*. 

(Sine $ctfe macftcn. 
Sine SkDe fyalten*. 

ein (55cfcl>aft (plural e). 

(5>efd)afte macfyen. 

© a ( i e n. 

gefa^ene^ #(etfcr; ; 
frifdbe^ Jfetfd) ; 

tie <Spctfe ; 

ta$ <55erid)t (plur. e) ; 

tie ^t(ct). 

gefatyne (Spetfen ; 

9Jttld)fpetfe. 

Tin ftd) $tej(jen* (berberies 
fyen*, an$ie fyen*). 

£)et Magnet gtcf)t bag ©fen an 

ft*. 
3ftr ©efang giefyt mi* an. 

Cocfen. 

$8e$aufcetm 

(SntnMen. 

3d) bin fcaru&et entyucft. 

tie ©*8nr)ctt; 

tie £armonte ; 

tie ©ttmme ; 

tie (Skroatt* 



To meddle with something. 

To concern one's self about 

something. 
To trouble one's head about 

something, (to meddle with 

something). 



\ @t* in erroa* mtf*en. 
I <&\d) nut etroag atujeben*. 



<£!$ urn etwag 6cf ftmmctiu 



247 



I do not meddle with other peo- 3cf) mtfcfye nud) ntd)t itt 
pie's business. £ante(. 

The quarrel (the contest), tct^antel; 

the commerce (the traffic), tet £antel (has no plural). 

Strange (foreign), frcmt. 

It is strange. (£s ift fonter6ar» 



ftemfce 



He employs himself in painting. 
The art of painting, 
chemistry, 
the chemist, 
the art, 



<£t gtbt fid) nut tcr sfilalitti a& 

tie vRlaktti ; 

tie Sfyerme, tie <Sd)ettefunfi: ; 

tct (Sfjemtfet (ter- (Sdjettefunfttet) ; 

tic Jvunji 



To look at some one. 
To concern some one. 
I look at you. 

The thing, 



Semcmten anfefyen*. 
Semanten attgerjett*. 
3d) \it)i <Bw an. 
i tic <&a$i, 
} taS £Ding (plur. e)* 
I do not like to meddle with 3$ mtfd)e mid) md)t gettt itt ®itta,e, 

things that do not concern me. tie mid) nid)tg anQefyen. 
What is that to me 1 t %&&* 9^t tag mid) an ? 

What is that to you 1 f 2Bag get)t tag <Sie an ? 



gfrtetetfjoletn 

tag SBteterfjoten. (See Lessin 
LXXI. Obs. C.) 
tne beginning, the commence- tet 2(nfang ; 

ment, 
the wisdom, tie S&ctgfyctt ; 

^ . A C tag <Stutium ; b 

the study, £tag<Stutiren-, 

the goddess, tie ©ctttnn ; 

the lord, tet£ett; 

the nightingale, tie S^ac^tigatt. 

All beginnings are difficult. OTet tfttfana, if! fd)tt?et: (a proverb). 



To repeat. 
The repetition, 



To create*. 

The creator, 

the creation, 

the benefit (the kindness), 

the fear of the Lord, 

the heaven, 

the earth, 

the solitude, 

the lesson, 



<S d) a f f e tt. Part, past, gefdjaffctn 
Imperf. fd)uf» 

tec <Sd)b'pfet ; 

tie <Sd)6pfuna, ; 

tie 2Bct)ttt)Qt ; 

tie gutd)t teg £ettn ; 

ter £tmme( ; 

tie (Stte ; 

tie (Sinfamfett ; 

tie Section; 



b Substantives terminating in um, form their plural by changingJHtt into 
en. Ex. bat Snbmbuum, the individual,- plur. t>te 3nbi»tbuen ; ba$ <s>uunum, 
the study ; plur t>ie <Stubien. 



248 

the exercise, tic 2Cufgat>e ; 

the goodness. tic ©ute. c 

I have clone it for your sake. Stf) fabc e$ S&wtwegcn grt&an. 

Ofo. The preposition ttegen takes its place either 
before or after the genitive which it governs ; but when 
it follows a personal pronoun, the letter t is substituted 
for the letter r of the pronoun which then forms one 
word with the preposition. The same thing should be 
observed with regard to the prepositions fyalbett, on ac- 
count of, and um — tttttten, for the sake of, with this 
difference, that the latter never stands before the sub- 
stantive. Ex. 

Stfctnetrcegen, tnetnctfycMen, on ac- Unfertrocgen, unfertfyol&cn, on ac- 
count of me. count of us. 

Skinctajcgen, fceinctfyafOen, on ac- (Sutehve^en^eutetfyatOen, on account 

count of thee. of you. 

©'ctnetn>e$cn, femctrjatOen, on ac- Sfyretroegcn, xfyrctfyalbm, on account 

count of him. of them, for their sake, 

SFirt'trvcqen, tJjretfyal&cn, on ac- 
count of her. 

In the same way we say : ttm ttteutetttrittett, for my 
sake ; nm beutetttrillen, for thy sake, &c. 

He has done it for the sake of (St foot e$ um ifyretautlen gctfyatn 
her. 

On account of you and your S'fjrct* tint Sljret Jt inter, cfren fc* 
children, as well as on account rc>of)l alS meinct* tmt tet 9J?ctnU 
of me and mine, I have put gen nxgen, fycibe icb Sbncn tiefe 
you in mind of and inculcated n>icf)ttgc tint) untriiqlicbe SBafyts 
this important and infallible fyeit 311 ©cmfitfje cjefutyrt unfc ein* 
truth. gefobd'rft. 

The cleanliness, the uncleanli- tie $Hetn(ic))feit ; tie Unreinltcrjfeit ; 
ness, 

the government (meaning the t)te £)t>ric}feit. 
magistrate), 

Sensible, reasonable, Dcrnfinfttg* 

Not only— but also. £Ucf)t audit — fentern mid). 

EXERCISES. 189. 

Will you dine with us to-day ]— With much pleasure. — What 
have you for dinner ? — We have good soup, some fresh and salt 
meat, and some milk-food. — Do you like milk-food 1 — I like it bet- 

« Abstract substantives have no rlural in German ; as fcie @itte, the good- 
new ; bte £iefce, the love, <fcc. 



249 

ter than all other food. — Are you ready to dine? — I am ready. — Do 
you intend to set out soon ? — I intend setting out next week. — Do 
you travel alone ? — No, Madam, I travel with my uncle. — Do you 
travel on foot or in a carriage ? — We travel in a carriage. — Did you 
meet any one in (ouf with the dative) your last journey to Berlin ? 
-We met many wanderers. — What do you intend to spend your 
time in this summer? — I intend to take a short journey. — Did you 
walk much in your last journey ? — I like very much to walk, but my 
uncle likes to go in a carriage. — Did he not wish to walk ? — He 
wished to walk at first, but after having taken a few steps, he 
wished to get into the carriage, so that I did not walk much. — 
What have you been doing at school to-day ? — We have been listen- 
ing to our professor, who made a long speech on (fifecr with the 
accus.) the* goodness of God. — What did he say? — After saying, 
" God is the creator of heaven and earth ; the fear of the Lord is 
the beginning of all wisdom;" he said, "repetition is the 
mother of studies, and a good memory is a great benefit of God."-— 
Why did you not stay longer in Holland ? — W T hen I was there the 
living was dear, and I had not money enough to stay there longer, 
— What sort of weather was it when you were on the way to Vi- 
enna ? — It was very bad weather ; for it was stormy, and snowed, 
and rained very heavily. d 

190. 

What are you doing all the day in this garden? — I am walking 
in it (twin). — What is there in it that attracts you ? — The singing 
of the birds attracts me. — Are there any nightingales in it ? — -There 
are some in it, and the harmony of their singing enchants me. — 
Have those nightingales more power over (fiber with the accus.) 
you than the beauties of painting, or the voice of your tender ($artz 
ltd)) mother, who loves you so much 1 — I confess, the harmony of 
the singing of those little birds has more power over me than the 
most tender words of my dearest friends. — What does your niece 
amuse herself with in her solitude? — She reads a good deal and 
writes letters to he,r mother. — What does your uncle amuse himself 
with in his solitude ? — He employs himself in painting and chem- 
istry. — Does he no longer do any business? — He no longer does 
any, for he is too old to do it. — Why does he meddle with your 
business 1 — He does not generally (v\cn?o()nttcb) meddle with other 
people's business; but he meddles with mine, because he loves 
me. — Has your master made you repeat your lesson to-day ? — Hs 
has made me repeat it. — Did you know it ? — I did know it pretty 
well. — Have you also done some exercises ? — I have done some, 
but what is that to you, I beg ? — I do not generally meddle with 
things that do not concern me ; but I love you so much (fo febr) that 
I concern myself much (fcfyr) about what you are doing. — Does any 
one trouble his head about you ? — No one troubles his head about 

* The learner must here repeat all the expressions relative to the impersonal 
verb e $ ift, it is, in Lessons LIV. and LVI. 

n* 



250 

me ; for I am not worth the trouble. — Not* only for the sake of 
cleanliness, but a.so for the sake of health (cte ®eftmt)f)eit), prudent 
people avoid (fid) fyiiten t>cr with the dative) uncleanliness, and wash 
themselves often. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON.— ©in ttttb attyfystZ 
Cation. 

OF THE FUTURE. 

The first or simple future is formed from the present 
of the auxiliary tt>erbett*> to become,* and the infinitive 
of the verb, as in English from shall or will, and the 
infinitive. Ex. 

I shall love, he (she) will love. 3d) nxtbe Itefcen, cr (fte) ttnrb (tefcen. 
Thou wilt love, you will love. 3>u wtrft ikfo&n, 3f)E rocrbct (<Ste 

tverfcen) liebcn. 
We shall love, they will love. SBtt; nxtben tteben, fte roerfcen ftekth 

I shall be loved. 3d) wcrbc Qeltefct roerben. 
Will you love my mother 1 ' SSerben @te mane Gutter tie&en ? 

I shall love her much. 3d) roerbe fte fefor tteben. 

I shall never love her. 3d) nxrbe fte me UeOen. 
I shall love her when she loves 3d) roerbe fte tfefren, roenn fte mtd) 

me. (teben wtrt). (See Less. XL VII.) 

Will you go out to-day ? SQBetDcn ^ie fjeute auscjefyen 1 

To be dusty. (5 1 a u 6 1 £ f c i n *, ftou&en. 

Is it dusty 1 ? 3d c$ jtauttfl? 

It is dusty. (£g tft ftaubtg. 

It is very dusty. <£g i(j f c f)t fku% 

Is it muddy out of doors I 3ft eg febmugtg braufen? 

It is very muddy. $$ ift fef>r fd)mugt<^ 

To be smoky, to smoke. fKaudjcn. 
Is it smoky 1 Does it smoke ? 9laud)t e$ ? 
It is very smoky. It smokes <£$ raud)t fe!)t. 

much. 
It is too smoky. It smokes too (S$ remdjt $u feljt. 

much. 

To go in. ^ i n e t n ^ e 6 e n *. 

To come in. $ev tin torn m en*. 

■ The verb Herbert* when employed in the formation of the future and 
other tenses, loses its proper signification. 



251 

# 

Will you go in ? SBetben ©te fjtncin gcFjcn 1 

To sit down. ©id) f e $ e «• 

To sSf. © i | c n * (verb neuter). Part. 

past, g e f c f f c n. Imperf. fag. 

I will sit down on that chair. 3d) will mid) ctuf fctefen ©tuftf fc|cn.» 

Where did he sit 1 &£o fag ct ? 

He sat upon that chair. (St fa(j auf fctefcm ©tufyte. 

To Aave /e/jf. U e b t i $ 6 U t & e n *. Imperfect, 

bl'xeb. 

How much money have you left 1 S&itwl @c(b Meifct Sbncit iibrtg? 
I have a crown left. @g btetbt nut etn Skater iibrig. 

I have only three crowns left. (§s bltibcn mit nut fctct Sfyatet fl6rig. 
If I pay him I shall have but £Benn id) tbn Oega^e, rotti) mit nut 
little left. roenia. ftbttg bltibm (or fo uoxxb 

mit nut roenta, ixbtXQ bkxbm). 

DCP A. The subject is placed after the verb in an 
inversion of propositions ; that is, when that which 
ought to stand first is put after, and forms as it were/ 
the complement of the other. An inversion of propo- 
sitions takes place when the first proposition begins 
with a conjunction. Ex. 

If he comes, I shall speak to him iSenn ct femmt, wetfce td) mit ifjm 

(inversion). fprec&en. 

I shall speak to him if he comes 3d) roetbe mit tfjm fptd)en, roenn ct 

(without inversion). fommt. 

If it is fine weather to-morrow, I 2£cnn t£ motgen fcboneS SBettet x% 

shall take a walk (inversion). roetbe id) fpe^ieten Qefycn. 
I shall take a walk if it is fine 3d) roctfce fpe^ieten gefyen, wenn C5 

weather to-morrow (without metgen fcfyoneS ^Better tjfc 

inversion). 

DCf 3 -B. The subject is also placed after its verb, 
when in an inversion of propositions, the conjunction 
tt>etm, if, is omitted in the first. This omission of the 
conjunction may take place or not ; but when it does, 
the second proposition begins with the conjunction f 0, 
then (so). 

• Then (so). ©0. 

T - T ■ t i_ 11 CSSefomm* id) mcin (Mb (instead 

If I receive my money I shall S of . mnn ^ mdn @c(t) 6c!cmmc) , 

P a y y° u ' £ fo beaaWe *4 «* 

*> Whenever a will or intention and not merely futurity is to be expressed, 
the verb tooGett* is used, 



252 

T , „ ( (Sprint et gu mi* (for : tpcnn cr $u 
If he speaks to me, I shall an- 1 mir ^ v \^ f j wcr & e id) ty m ant* 
swer him. £ wortcn. 

O&s. When the conjunction W>etttt is not omitted, the 
conjunction fo of the second proposition may either be 
omitted or not, unless the proposition is of a certain 
length. 

If you will promise me to keep SBcnn <Ste ttrit wrfprcdjen iDCttcti/ c« 
it secret, I shall tell it to you. flcbeim *u bciltcn, fo totxU id) c* 

Sfynen fagcn. 

I have spent all my money, so 3d) fjabe oil mem ®db curtate* 
that I have none left. ben, fo tap mir fetn$ me&r ubrig 

blctfct. 

To^ZZ. gfillen (anfuUen). 

To fill a bottle with wine. (Sine #fof*e nut Sfcctn anfulfctt. 

I fill my purse with money. 3d) fifclle metnen SBcutel (metne 235'ts 

fc) nut ©ctt>. 
With what do you fill that glass] aOSomtt futten <Stc fcUfc* ©la$ ? 

EXERCISES. 191. 

Will your father go out to-day 1 — He will go out, if it is fine 
weather. — Will your sister go out 1 — She will go out, if it is not 
•windy. — Will you love my brother 1 — I shall love him with all my 
heart, if he is as good as you. — Will your parents go into the 
country to-morrow 1 — They will not go, for it is too dusty. — Shall 
we take a walk to-day 1 — We will not take a walk, for it is too 
muddy out of doors. — Do you see the castle of my relation behind 
yonder mountain? — I do see it. — Shall we go in? — We will go in, 
if you like. — Will you go into that room 1 — I shall not go into it, 
for it is smoky. — I wish you a good morning, Madam. — Will you 
not come in ? — Will you not sit down 1 — I will sit down upon that 
large chair. — Will you tell me what has become of your brother ? — 
I will tell you. — Here is the chair upon which he sat often.— When 
did he die 1 — He died two years ago. — I am very much (fchr) afflic- 
ted at it. — Hast thou spent all thy money 1 — I have not spent all. 
— How much hast thou left of it? — I have not much left of it; I 
have but one florin left. — How much money have thy sisters left ?-— 
They have br~*. three crowns left. — Have you money enough left to 
pay your tailor ? — I have enough of it left to pay him ; but if I pay 
him, I shall have but little left. — How much money will your bro- 
thers have left? — They will have a hundred crowns left. — Will 
you speak to my uncle if you see him 1 — If 1 see him, I shall speak 
to him. — Will you take a walk to-morrow 1 — If it is fine weather, I 
shall take a walk ; but if it is bad weather, I shall stay at homo.-— 



253 

Will you pay your shoemaker 1— I shall pay him, if I receive my 
money to-morrow. — Why do you wish to go ]— If your father comes 

I shall not go ; hut if he does not come, I must go Why do you 

not sit down 1— If you will stay with (bet) me, I will sit down; 
but if you go, I shall go along with you. — Will you love my chil- 
dren]— If they are good and assiduous, I shall love them; hut it 
they are idle and naughty, I shall despise and punish them. — Am 
I right in speaking thus (jo)?— You are not wrong. (See end of 
Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.— %m\ mtir arijtfljste 
£ation. 

OF THE PAST OR COMPOUND INFINITIVE. 

In German, as in English, the past infinitive is formed 
from the infinitive of the auxiliary and the past par- 
ticiple of the verb ; but in English the past participle 
stands after the infinitive, whereas in German it pre- 
cedes it. Ex. 

Have loved, to have loved. ~®cftc&t f)afrcn, grtteftt $u fjafcen. 

In order to have loved. Um CjCltebt ya t)aben. 

Without having loved. £)bnc geltebt $u f)aben. 

Have been loved. (SklteOt lverben fctn. 

To have been loved. dkltcOt rverben $u fctn. 

OF THE PAST FUTURE. 

The past or compound future is formed, as the first 
or simple future (preceding Lesson) from the present 
of the auxiliary tt>erben* and the past infinitive. Ex. 

I shall have loved, he (she) will 3d) nxrbe geffctt Fjafcen, er (fie) wirb 

have loved. geltebt fyaben. 

Thou wilt have loved, you will £)u rmrft $eltct>t fjafren, 3or rcetbet 

have loved. (^tc nx'tben) gdic&t f)<uxn. 

We shall have loved, they will SDStr rwrben gcliebt fyaben, fie ivetben 

have loved. cjeltebt bciben. 

I shall have been loved. 3d) nxrbe geftebt roetben fctn. 

I shall have written my letters 3cf) roctbe metne <8rtcfc gefdjrkfccn 

before you return. bobtxt, ebc <B\c gurueffemmen. 

wu tu -a c + u v, r^>cnn id) ^ 9>fert> bc$af)(t faben 

When I have paid for the horse > ^ { m ^ } 

I shall have only ten crowns I mvt ^ x mx ncct) ^ n Zi)ai { x 



left 



[ iibricj btetbetu 



254 

OCT 3 A. When at the end >f a proposition there are 
two* infinitives, two past pal ticiples, or an infinitive 
and a past participle, the verb which on account of 
the conjunction ought to be thrown to the end of the 
phrase, may be placed either before or after those in- 
finitives or participles. Ex. 

f 2£aS roerbcn @tc tftun, roenn ©tc $u 

What will you do when you J DJHttag cjegeffen fyabm nxrbcn, 

have dined'? 1 or njctben $u 93itttag gcgcfl[cn fya* 

[ ben ? 
When I have spoken to your \**<™ i* 3ft«n JBruDcr 9 cfprc«en 
brother I shall know what I J *°* cn ™*\ °*. tvetbe gefprccDcn 

have to do I & abcn ' f° wcrt)e ld) Wl ff cn ' wag xd > 

[ $a tfjun fyabe. 

.DCr 3 The latter way of placing the verb is the most 
elegant and most usual. Ex. 

;3d) fafce tr)m gefagt, baf^te ba$ 
gjferb (jaben wtratifva muffen (and 
not oerfaufen gemuf't or miiffcn 
fyabm). 

The same (feminine). £) t c f e t 6 e,. b t e n a m ( t cf) c. (See 

Lessons XII. and XIV.) 

The same thing. I ^ c Jf? ft ie "*?%> ®"* e - 

s } S)a6fcl&e (bag namltcfyc) 2)tng, 

One and the same. (Stncrlet. 

It is all one (the same). (Ss ift etnettcu 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 
Such. ©otcfyer, folcfye, f o t cf> e 8 

(is declined according to 
the characteristic termi- 
nation). 

Obs. 4% When fold) is preceded by em or feitt, it has 
the declension of an adjective. Ex. 

Such a man, such a woman, such (gilt [olcfyct: sjtfann, cine fotcfye <5?tatt, 

a child. cm fo(d)C$ jtinb. 

Such men merit esteem. (Solcfye $flenfct)en Dctbtenen 2Tc^tuttg* 

Obs. B. When foW) is followed by em, it is not de* 
clined. Ex. • 



255 

Such a man, such a woman, such @otd) em Warm, fotc^ etne $tau, fotdfc 
a happiness. cm ®(flcf. 

0>i the outside of without, out of. 2C u g e t f) alb (a preposition gov- 
erning the genitive). 

The church stands outside the £)te jUrdje if! aupetfjatb bet ©tabt. 

town. 
I shall wait for you before the 3d) roetbc ©ic t>ot bem S£r)ore (<Stabt* 

town-gate. t()otc) erroattcn. 

To go out. 4btnau$qefjcn*. 

To come out. ^ctausfemmen*. 

Seldom (rarely). (Setter*. 

Does he sit under the tree ? ©tgt er untcr bem SBoume ? 

He is sitting under it. @r ftgt barunter. (Obs. B. Lea- 

son LII.) 

To continue {to proceed). {|jV|{^i?' 

He continues his speech. f (Jr farjrt tn fritter SKebc fort. 

The annPtilP J bct %>P etit > 

ine appetite, ^ ^.^ ^ ^ ^ m ^ ; 

the narrative, the tale, t>tc <Sr$at)lung ; 

the shore (the coast, the bank), bag Ufcr ; 

the sea-shore, la$ Ufcr t>{$ 9#eeteS ; 

on the sea-shore, am Ufet beS 9J2cete& 

Not until (not before)* 9? i dj t e f) e r — b M. 
Before. (Stye, ef)eal$,b*et)Ot. 

I shall not see him until I go 3$ roetbe tfjrt md)t fcfjcn, el)e (be* 

thither. oet) td) r)tugcr)e* 

Did you see him before his de- Robert <Bu ir)n t)or fctner 2Cbtetfe a,e* 

parture ] fefjen ? 

I will not do it until you tell 3d) tl)ue e$ tud)t, bt$ ©ie e$ mtr fa* 

me. o,en. 

There is, there, are. 2)a iff. Plural, ta ftnb. 

Here is, here are. £ter iff, — bier finb. 

Here I am. £iet bin id). • 

There is my book. 3)a ift mctn 25ud). 

There it is. .£)a tft e$. 

There they are. £)a ftnb fie. 

* ftottfe^ett is a regular verb active and governs the accusative ; fortfatjrett*, 
en the contrary, is neuter and irregular and governs the dative with the pre- 
position in or mtt. 



256 

Therefore. ^cfwecjcn, bafjer. 

That is the reason why. £)ci$ tft Otc llrfadbe, roatum. 

Therefore I say so. 3)e£nxt}cn fa^c id) c$. 

My sister's feet are cold. Reiner @d)wcf!cr frtcrcn t>tc gfijife. 

Her hands are cold. 3br frtcrcn t>te £cint>e (e$ tft tf)r- ail 

t)cn £ant)cn fait). 

exercises. 192. 

When will you go to Italy 1 — I shall go as soon as I have learnt 
Italian. — When will your brothers go to Germany ] — They will 
go thither as soon as they know German. — When will they learn 
it ] — They will learn it when they have found a good master — . 
How much money shall we have left when we have paid for our 
horses ] — When we have paid for them we shall have only a hun- 
dred crowns left. — Have you told my brother that I have been 
obliged to sell the carriage ] — I have told him so. — Have you writ- 
ten to the same man to whom my father wrote] — I have not writ- 
ten to the same, but to another. — Have they already answered you] 
— Not yet, but I hope to receive a letter next week. — Have you 
ever seen such a person ? — I have never seen such a one. — Have 
you already seen our church ] — I have not seen it yet. — Where does 
it stand]- — It stands outside the town. — If you wish to see it, I 
will go with you in order to show it to you. — Who is there] — It is 
I. — Who are those men ] — They are foreigners who wish to speak 
to you. — Of what country are they ] — They are Americans. — 
Where have you been since 1 saw you ] — We sojourned long on 
the sea-shore, until a ship arrived, which brought us to France. — 
Will you continue your narrative 1 — Scarcely had we arrived in 
France when we were taken to the king who received (cuifnabm) us 
very well and sent us back to our country. — Whom are you look- 
ing for] — I am looking for my little brother. — If you wish to find 
him you must go into the garden, for he is there. — The garden is 
large, and I shall not be able to find him if you do not tell me in 
which part (tvr &bct() of the garden he is. — He is sitting under 
the large tree under. which we were sitting yesterday. — Now I 
shall find him. 

193. 

Why do your children not live in France ] — They wish to learn 
English, that is the reason why they live in England. — Why do 
you sit near the fire] — My hands and feet are cold, that is the rea- 
son why I sit near the fire. — What do the people live upon that 
live on the sea-shore] — They liv« upon fish alone. — Why will you 
not go a hunting any more] — I Runted yesterday the whole day, 
and I killed nothing but an ugly bird, that is the reason why I shall 
not go a hunting any more. — Why do you not eat ] — I shall not eat 
before I have a good appetite. — Why does your brother eat so 
much ] — He has a good appetite, that is the reason he eats so much 
—If you have read the books which I lent you, why do you not re- 



257 

turn them to me? — I intend reading them once more, that is the 
reason why I have not yet returned them to you ; but I shall return 
them to you as soon as I have read them a ($um) second time, — 
Why did you not bring me my clothes ] — They were not made, 
therefore I did not bring them ; but I bring them to you now, here 
they are. — You have learnt your lesson, why has your sister not 
learnt hers ] — She has taken a walk with my mother, that is the 
reason why she has not learnt it ; but she will learn it to-morrow. 
— When will you correct my exercises ] — I will correct them when 
you bring me those of your sister. — Do you think (gtaubcn) you 
have made mistakes in them. — I do not know. — If you have made 
mistakes you have not studied your lessons well ; for the lessons must 
be learnt well, to make no mistakes in the exercises. — It is all the 
same, if you do not correct them (for) me to-day, I shall not learn 
them before (fo tvette id) fie erft) to-morrow. — You must make no 
mistakes in your exercises, for you have all you want, in order to 
make none. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. -Him nttb arl)t}ifl0t* 
tation. 

To die of a disease. Tin ctncr (dative) itranfbett fter* 

ben*. 

The small pox, tie Slattern (plural of tie SBfat* 

ter, the blister, the pustule, the 

pock). 

She died of the small pox. @te i|t an ben Slattern gcjterben. 

The fever, the intermitting fever, ta$ gteber, t>a$ ^ecbfefftcber. 

He had a cold fit. <5r batte etnen 2Cnfall ren gretytf f 

He has an agrue. (£t bat ta$ gtcbct befemmen. 

His fever has returned. (St bat tag giebet wtctct befoul* 

men. 

The apoplexy, ter (Scbfag, ter ®cMac|ftu6. 

rT , , , .,i < ( 3)cr ©cbtaq (jat tbn qerubrt. 

He has been struck with apo- J ffi ift » ^ J m ^ 

P lex y- ( ten. 

C Gtuitcn ftbqano, baben*. 
To sell well. < ($ ; ut afrqeben*. 

( SHet jta'iifer ftnten*. 
Wine sells well. f Dec 95?etn qebt gut ab (bat QUtcn 

tfbganq). 
Cloth sells well. t £> a * Sucfc bat gutcn 2Cbgang (ftns 

tet totcf .ft&ujvr). 
Wine will sell well next year, f £>et 2Betn rotrt> nacbfteS 3>abt- giu 

ten #bqanq baben 



258 



£)effncn, aufmcicbcn, auffdjUcfen*.* 
'3umacbcn, gufcl)ttcpcn * (active 

verbs). 5 
Sugebcn*, aufcbttejkn*. Part, past, 

gefcbloffcn. Imperf. fcblep. 
v 2Cufgct)cn # (a neuter verb), ficfy b'ff* 

ncn. 
£)tefc Sbtit gcF)t feidjt auf (ift Icicty 

gu off n en). 
£>te $(>flt fcftltcp ntcbt. 
£)aS gcnjlct fd)ticpt gut 

*8on roettcm, t»cn feme. 
g}?an ficbt t>icfcg £au$ t>on tueitem 
(son feme). 

f 6otnmerf(ett>er tta'gt man ntcbt tm 
Summer clothes are not worn J £Btntcr. 
in winter. } ^onimcrf kxtcv roetben ntd)t im 3Bttt* 

( tcr getragen. 

That is not said. S)a$ tt>trt> ntcr)t gefagt* 

That cannot be comprehended. £)a$ ift unbcgrciflid). 

(S$ ift fccutltd). 



To open. 

To shut. 

To open. 

That door opens easily. 

The door does not shut. 
The, window shuts well. 

Far off, from afar. 

That house is seen far off. 



SSecjtetfen*. Part, past, feegtiffen. 
Imperf. bccnuff. 
C 9?acb ten Umftcinfcen. 
l$la<b SScfdbaffenbcit fcet ttmfttfnte. 

tic a$efcbaflfcnf)eit ; . 

tec Umftant). 

9?acbt>em, }e nacbtem, in fc fern. 
9?acbt>em e3 ift (nctcbtem e$ lommt). 
Sfladb&em tie itmftanfce ftnt. 



It is clear. 

To conceive, to comprehend. 

According to circumstances. 

The disposition, 
the circumstance, 

According- as. 

According- to circumstances. 

It depends on circumstances. 

Do not put the glass upon the (Stellen (Sie t>a$ (5Ha$ ntcbt auf ten 
table, for it will break. Stfcb ; tenn e$ tt>irt gcrbredr)cn. 

Imperf. aetbtacb* 
To put. ©tcKcn. 

To lay- £egen. 

a Deffnett and aufmctcbeit mean to remove the obstacle in order to give ac- 
cess, as : bte £()ore, bte Zfyiix etnes %immtx8, cinen ©cfjvanf, einen $8\itf offnen 
or aufmacbett, to open the town-gates, the door of a room, a cupboard, a let- 
ter. Deffnen is only employed to make an opening in the thing itself, as : et- 
nen 2etcfynam, erne 5lber, em ©efebroit* offttett, to open a corpse, a vein, an ab- 
scess, because there is no opening yet. So we say bte Saufcjtafcett ftfftten, to 
open the trenches. 2luffcbltef;ett is only employed in speaking of things that 
are shut with a key or a padlock. 

b The same distinction is to be made between JUtttactyett and jufc^ltefkn*, as 
between aufmactyert and ctuffcfyltefkn*. 



259 

To set, to seat. @c|ert. 
To stick. ©tedfctu* 

Are the women handsome 1 (gtnb tie Jxaucn fcfto'n ? 

They are so; they are rich and 6ie jtnfc) c $ ; fie ftnt) rcid) unfc fcf)(fo. 
handsome. 

What countrywoman is she 1 S ^ of) i r J? [ ie \ 
J c ^° *ft ft* bet ? 

She is from France. @k ift auS (or t>on) granftetd). 

To be angry at somebody (about 956'fc auf 3emant>en (uuer etrca$) 

anything). fetru 

What are you angry about ] SKcriibcr fint) <Ste bofe ? 

Are you sorry for having done Sfyut c$ 3f)nen tetb, e$ getljan $U 
it ] faben ? 

r (£$ tf)ut nut (ctt>. 
I am sorry for it. < (£$ tjt mit nid)t lieb. (See Lesson 

C LXXVII.) 

Polite (courteous), impolite (un- £ofttd) ; unrjofUcf). 

civil). 
Happy, unhappy. GblMtify ; unc^ucfltcf). 

What sort of pen have you lost 1 2&a$ fur eirte $et>et: fyaben @ie ttetfo: 

ten? 
A gold one. (Sine gelfccne. 

What sort of pens has your 2Ba$ fur gefcern rjat 3r)te (Scfyweftet: 

sister made ? ejefefyiutten ? 

Good ones. ©lite. 

exercise 194. 

Of what illness did your sister die ] — She died of the fever. — 
How is your brother 1 — My brother is no longer living. He died 
three months ago. — I am surprised at it, for he was very well last 

c ©tefteit is used when the person or the thing spoken of is, as it were, 
standing upright, and legen when it is lying. Ex. tie ©Icifer, t>te ^fafefye auf 
i>tn £tfct) fteUen, to put the glasses, the bottle on the table ; em $mb auf ba8 
33ett legen, to place a child upon the bed ; etu Slkib auf bag Q3ert legen, to put 
a coat upon the bed ; U)0 fyabtn Sie metnen ©tod; lu'ugefteUt? where have you 
placed my stick? ft>o fyaben ®ie mem Sfteffer fymgelegt? where have you put 
my knife ? The verbs ftefyett* and Itegen* may be explained by the English 
verbs: to stand and to lie. Ex. Sfyt <Btod ftefyt in tneinem simmer, your 
stick is (stands) in my room; 3f)X 23ruber ftebt am ^enfter, your brother 
stands at the window; 3fyx Sfteffer liegt auf htm Xifcfye, your knife is (lies) 
upon the table ; i)kx fttyt %f)X (gtocf unb ba liegt %fyv SDMfer, here stands 
your stick and there lies your knife. (Se^eu nearly answers to the English 
verb to seat, as : fe^en (fete ftdj luerl)er, seat yourself here. It is also used in 
the following idiom : 3emanbcn in htn (Stanb fefcen, to enable some one, as: 
td) babe ityn in btn (Stanb gefefcr, e3 $u tfmn, I have enabled him to do it. 
(fctecfen, as an active verb, is used with the preposition fn followed by the 
accusative. Ex. 3n bte £afcfye ftetfen, to put into the pocket. We shall 
hereafter see various other examples of these verbs. 



260 

summer when I was in tne country. — Of what did he die 1 — He 
died of apoplexy. — How is the mother of your friend ? — She is 
not well ; she had an attack of ague the day before yesterday, and 
this morning the fever has returned (tint) btefen 9)?crgcn tpwtfi'r). — 
Has she the intermitting fever ? — I do noi know, but she often has 
cold fits. — What has become of the woman whom I saw at your 
mother's 1 — She died this morning of apoplexy. — Did the wine 
sell well last year 1 — It did not sell very well; but it will sell 
better next year, for there will be a great deal of it, and it will not 
be dear. — Why do you open the door] — Do you not see how it 
smokes here? — I do not see it; but you must open the window in- 
stead of opening the door. — The window does not open easily, 
that is the reason why I open the door. — When will you shut it] 
— I will shut it as soon as there is no more smoke. — Why do you 
not put those beautiful glasses on the small table 1 — If I put them 
upon that little table they will break. — Did you often go a fishing 
when you were in that country 1 — We often went a fishing and a 
hunting. — If you will go with us into the country, you will see the 
castle of my father. — You are very polite, Sir; but I have seen 
that castle already. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON.— bier ttttir atWty*** 
Csctkm. 

The utility, the use, bet 9?u£cn ; 

the advantage, feer SSortbetf. 

This thing is of no use. £>tefc ©ache tft Mn fctnem 9?u§en» 

To profit by a thing. Hftugen ciu* etner Seiche $teben*. 

To turn a thing to profit. Sid) cine Seiche $u 9Jugc tncichcn. 

To be useful to any one. Senmnbem nugen (or niigen). 

Of what use is that] Si^u nii£t t)cif>? 

That is of no use. &az ntigt ntchtS. 

Useful. £M§ltch. 

Useless. Unnu#, nug(o$. 

Is it useful to write a great deal? 3ft '*$ nu£(td), mef $u jcfyrct&en ? 

It is useful. @$ tft nugticf). 

Is it well (right) to do it 1 3ft c$ tufltcj, e$ $u tfjun ? 

It is not well (wrong). (S$ tft urUnlltfj (untecl)t). 

What is that ] 2£ci£ iff bae? 

I do not know what it is% 3d) ivetp ntcl)t, wat eg tft. 

To be called. $ e t (5 c n *. Part, past, cj c fj c t p e n* 

Imperf. \) i e p. 

What is your name 1 t 2£te betfcen ©tc ? 

My name is Charles. j 3* J&rtpe (mem 0*ame tft) Ravi 



261 

What do you call this in Ger- 2£tc fjcifft bag h'nf fccutfcf) ? 

man ? 
How do you express (say) this ££ie facjen <£te tag auf frang6fifd> ? 

in French ] 
What is that called 1 2£ie nennt man tag ? 

To name. Stamen*. Part, past, o/nannt 

Imperf. nannte. 

DECLENSION OF THE NAMES OF PERSONS. a 

The names of persons are declined either without 
or with the article. Without the article they take $ 
in the genitive, and en in the dative and accusative, 
with the article they add nothing to their termination. 
Ex. 

Nom. SRvtfMm or ber SBttfyefm, William. 
Gen. 5SuMm$ — be$ 3SiH)efat, of William. 
Dat. §BStlt)elmen — bem 2Bilbe(m, to William. 
Ace. SBilfyelmen — ben SBityelm/ William. 

Nom. GrKfabetf) or bie (SKfabetfy, Elizabeth. 

Gen. @fifabetf)g — ber &x\abeti), of Elizabeth. 

Dat. (Slifabetben — ber (Slifabetf), to Elizabeth. 

Ace. ©tfabetfyen — bie ®ifabetfy, Elizabeth. 

Obs. A. Names of persons terminating in fdf), £, % 
%, %, j, take en€ in the genitive. Ex. grattj, Francis ; 
gen. gremjen^* Names of females in a or e (the com- 
mon endings for almost all such names) change in the 
genitive a or e into en£* Ex. SEBUfyefaiina, Wilhelmine ; 
gen. SBBityelmtttenS, of Wilhelmine. ?eonore, Eleanor ; 
?eonoren3, of Eleanor. 

Obs. B. To indicate that the ending of the geni- 
tive is not a part of the name, it is commonly separ- 
ated by an apostrophe as in English. Ex. ®cf)ifter'3 
©ebtd)te, Schiller's poems; ©oetlje'S SEBerfe, Goethe's 
works. 

Sooner — than. (Sfjcr — att. 

Rather — than. Ck'tuT — ati* 

He has arrived sooner than I. (St ift efyct. ancjefommen at$ td). 

• For the proper names of countries and towns, see. Lesson XLXX. 



262 

f Stebet werfe td) mem ©ctt> tn ben 
Rather than squander my mo- J glufj, ef)e id) e$ t>crfcbn^cnbe* 
ney I throw it into the river. | (5f)C id) mem ©clb »erfd)wcnbe, wets 

^ fc id) ce Ucbcr in ben gtup. 
I will rather pay him than go 3d) will tfjn tteber be$al)len, at$ f)tn» 

thither. gcfyen. 

I will rather burn the coat than 3d) will ten 9?0cf Itebet Wtbtennen, 
wear it. att il)t\ ttagen. 

Sure. (55 e W i p. 

To be sure of a thing. (Since ©acfte gewifi fein*. 

I am sure of that. 3d) bin beffen cjewtp. 

I am sure that he has arrived. 3d) rceip (or bin) £ewip, tap et an* 

gefommen tft. 

IknowitwelL } 3* »«¥**»* 

To repair to, to go to. ©id) wofytn begeben*. 

I went to my room. 3d) begab mid) auf mein Simmer. 

He repaired to that town. (St begab fid) in biefe ©tabt. 

To repair to the army, to one's ©id) $ut ttrmce, ^u feinem Regimen* 

regiment. te begeben*. 

I repaired to that place. 3d) fyabc mid) an btefen £)rt begeben* 

He repaired thither. (St fjat ftd) bat)in begeben. 

Go where you please. ©efyen ©te, wofym ©te tvollen* 

George the Third. ©eotg bet JDritte. 

Louis the Fourteenth. Cut) wig bet SBtet^efynte. 
Henry the Fourth. £einrid) bet SSiette. 

Europe, European. (Sutopa; eutopaifd). 

Fluently. (Mauftg. 

Charles the Fifth spoke several jtatl bet $unfte fprod) geta'uftg mefa 
European languages fluently. tete eutepatfefye ©ptadjen. 
Such a thing. ©o etwa5. 

Have you ever seen such a £aben ©te je fo ctwai gefefyen ? 

thing 1 
Have you ever heard of such a £aben ©te ie fo ttivcit gef)(Stt ? 

thing ] 
I have never seen nor heard of 3* fa&e nie fo etwas gefefyen nod) 
such a thing. gefyott. 

exercises. 195. 

When did you see my father's castle ] — I saw it when I was 
travelling last year. It is one of the finest castles that I have ever 
seen ; it is seen far off. — How is that said ? — That is not said. 
That cannot be comprehended. — Cannot every thing be expressed 
in your language 1 — Every thing can be expressed, but not as in 
yours. — Will you rise early to-morrow ] — It will depend upon cir- 
cumstances ; if I go to bed early, I shall rise early, but if I go to 



263 

bed late, I shall rise late. — Will you love my children ? — If they 
are good, I shall love them. — Will you dine with us to-morrow ]— 
If you get ready (juOerettcn taffen) the food I like, I shall dine with 
you.— Have you already read the letter which you received this 
morning"'?— I have not opened it yet. — When will you read it]—- 
I shall read it as soon as I have time. — Of what use is that ] — It is 
of no use. — Why have you picked it up ] — I have picked it up, in 
order to show it to you. — Can you tell me what it is ] — I cannot 
tell you, for I do not know ; but I shall ask my brother who will 
tell you. — Where have you found it 1 — I have found it on the bank 
of the river, near the wood. — Did you perceive it from afar ] — I did 
not want to perceive it from afar, for I passed by the side of the 
river. — Have you ever seen such a thing ] — Never. — Is it useful to 
speak much 1 — If one wishes to learn a foreign language it is use- 
ful to speak a great deal. — Is it as useful to write as to speak ] — 
(t is more useful to speak than to write ; but in order to learn a 
coreign language, one must do both (Oetfc)e£). — Is it useful to write 
<tll that one says 1 — That is useless. . 

196. 

Where did you take this book from 1 — I took it out of the room 
of your friend (fern.). — Is it right to take the books of other people ] 
— It is not right, I know ; but I wanted it, and I hope that your 
friend will not be displeased ; for I will return it to her as soon as 
(have read it. — W T hat is your name] — My name is William. — 
What is your sister's name ] — Her name is Eleanor. — Why does 
Charles complain of his sister ]— Because she has taken his pens. 
-—Of whom do those children complain ]— rFrancis complains of 
Eleanor and Eleanor of Francis. — Who is right'? — They are both • 
wrong ; for Eleanor wishes to take Francis's .books and Francis 
Eleanor's. — To whom have you lent Schiller's works 1 — I have lent 
the first volume to William and the second to Elizabeth. — How is 
that said in French ] — That is not said in French. — How is that 
said in German ] — If is said thus. — Has the tailor already brought 
you your new coat'? — He has brought it to me, but it does not fit me 
well. — Will he make you another] — He must make me another ; 
for rather than wear it, I will give it away. — Will you use that 
j horse ] — I shall not use it. — Why will you not use it ] — Because it 
does not suit me. — Will you pay for it ] — I will rather pay for it 
than use it. — To whom do those fine books belong ] — They belong 
to William. — Who has given them to him 1— His good father. — 
Will he read them ? — He will tear them rather than read them.— . 
Are you sure that he will not read them ] — I am sure of it, for he 
has told me so.. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



; 



i 



264 



EIGHTY.FIFTH LESSON.— jFunf ttttir art)t}igste 
tution. 



Sweet. 

mild, 

agreeable, 
Sweet wine, 
A mild zephyr, 
A mild air, 
A soft sleep, 



fanft; 
angcnc&m. 
fitjjcr 2£cm ; 
etn fanfter Sephqr; 
cine fanfre 2uft ; 
cin femfter (Sd)(af. 



Nothing makes life more agree- 9?id)ts mad)t t>a£ 2ct>cn emgencfymer, 
able than the society of and atefcte ®efc(lfd)aft unt) t)cr Umgang 
intercourse with our friends. nut unfern grcuntJen. 



Sour, acid. 
To cry, to scream, to shriek* 

To help. 

Thou helpest, he helps. 
I help him to do it. 
I help you to write. 

I will help you to work. 
To cry out for help. 

To inquire after some one. 

Will you have the goodness to 
pass that plate to me 1 

Will you pass that plate to me 
if you please? 
To reach. 

If you please. j 

Complaisant, pleasing. 
As you please. J 

At your pleasure. 
As you like. j 

To knock at the door. 
To happen. 
Something has happened. 



(Bauer. 

@ d) r e t c n *. Part, past, cj c s 
f d) r i c c n. Imperf. f d) 1 1 c. 

£ c I f e n * (governs the dative). 
Part, past, 9 e \) I f c n. Imperf. 

£>u f)t(fft, cr F)t(ft. • 
3d) f)e(fe ir)m t>artn. 
3d) bin tr)m battn OeJnUfUd). 
3d) f>clfe 3f)ncn fefyrctberu (See Les- 
son XL.) 
3d) will 3bnen arbettcn fyelfen. 
Urn £u(fe fdjreicn*. 

©tcf) nad) Scmanbcm erfunti^Ctt 
(nad) Scmanbem fragen). 

Swollen (Sic t>te (Mte baOen, nut btefe 
©d)fiffe( $u retd)en ? 

©cllcn ©te mir geftfUtajt btefe @d)iif* 
(y( rctd)en ? 

$Hctd)cn. 

5" ©efamgfk 

[ 2£enn e* Sftnen gefatftg tft. 
©efatitg. 

>2Bie eg Sfjnen gefanig iff. 

2fn bte Sfjftr ffepfen. 
r (^id) etetgnen, fid) gutragen* (take 

rjciften for their auxiliary). 
1 ISorfallen*, gejefyefyen*, fcegegnen 

(take fetn). 
<&$ bat fid) etwa$ jugettageu (eteig* 
net). 



265 

What has happened ? $£a$ iff rtfrgefallen (gefd)er)en) ? 

A great misfortune has happened. (S3 ifUtn gregeg tlnqtticf gcfcfyeljeiu 

Nothing has happened. (SS ift ntd)t$ tjergcfallcn. 

A misfortune has happened to (§£ ift tfjm cut Ungtticf fcegegnet, 

him. 

I had an accident. 3$ r)atte etnen Sufatt. 

To jt?owr. © i e p e n*, f d) u 1 1 e n, e i n f d) e ns 

fen. 

To pour away, £$eggte£en*. 

To shed. 95 c t g i c ji e n*. 

To shed tears. Sfjrtfnen &ergte0cn* (Part, past, tftts 

goffcn. Imperf. wrgop). 
A tear. (Sine £ for fine. 

With tears in his, her, our, or 9J2tt tfyranenben 2£ugcn. 

my eyes. 
f pour wine into a glass. 3d) Qtcf5e SBetn in etn ©lag. 

I put corn into a sack. 3d) fcrjtitte (Skttetfce in einen ©acf. 

I pour out some drink for that 3d) fcfyenfe ttefem 2Q?anne gu tttnfen 
• man. etn. 

I pour away the wine, for it is 3d) gtejk ben 2Betn roeg, fcenn er taugt 

"good for nothing. md)t6. 

C.f 28a$ an&etteff en* (an&c« 
As to, as for, with respect to. < t r o f f e n, a n h e t r a f). 

ft SSas anbelangen. 

As to me, I do not know what f 2Ba£ mtd) anbetrtfft (anfcelangt), 
to say. fo roeip id) nicfyt, wag td) fagen fott 

To meet with. t^ntteffen* (governs the ace). 

Part, past, get toff en. Im 
perf. traf* 

Where have you met with him? f ^° fyabtn <Ste tr)n angettoffen ? 

I do not know what to do. f 3d) wetf* ntdjt, tt>a$ id) tljun foff. 

I do not know where to go to. } 3* H>eijSt tttd)t, roorjtn id) geljetl 

foil. 
He does not know what to an- f @t wetp ntcfyt, wa$ et antoorttit 

swer. foil. 

We do not know what to buy. f 2B« »Mfcn M**/ wa $ «** fattfm 

follen. 

To unbosom one's self to some @icr) Scmanfcem settrauen. 

one. 
To trust some one. Semanfcem trauen or tjerttauett. 

rp az^^^o $ (Sinem ntijjtraucn. 

To distrust one. - f «ncm nidjt trauen. 

Do you trust that man ? Srauen (or wtttauen) ©tc fctcftt* 

sfllann* ? 
12 



266 



I do trust him. 

He trusts me. 

We must not trust every body. 

To laugh at something. 

Do you laugh at that 1 

I do laugh at it. 

At what do you laugh T 

To laugh at, to deride someone, 

I laugh at (deride) you. 

Full. 

A full glass. 

A full glass of wine. 

A book full of errors. 

The means, 
To afford (to have the means). 
Can you afford to buy a horse 1 

I can afford it. 

I cannot afford it. 

The lady, 

To taste, to like, to relish. 

How do you like this wine ? 
I like it well. 
I don't like it. 



3d) ttaue (or Detttaue) xlfjm. 

(St traut (or wrtraut) mit. 

2Bir nuiffen mcfyt einem 3>efc>en 

trauert; 
tlebet etroaS facfyett. 
Socmen @te bariibet ? 
3d) (ad)C bcirtiber. 
SBorfibet focfeen <Ste ? 
Semanben auelad)en (or t>crfad)en). 
3d) focfye @te au$ (wdacfye <Bu). 

(Sin ©fas t>cil 2Betn (em »otte$ ®fo$ 
gBctn). 

©in $ud> Dotfet gef)(et. 

£te 50Uttc( fafren*. 

£aben (Ste tie 9D^itteO etn g>ferb $u 

f oufcn ? 
3d) fcafce bte 9}ltttet ba$u (td) r)abc 

3d) babe ftf ntdjt 
t>ie JDame. 

© d) m e cf e n. 

SSie fdjmccft S^ncn btefet £Betn? 
(St fcfymecft mit gut 
©r fd)mec!t mtr md)t 



exercises. 197. 

Do your scholars learn their exercises by heart? — They will ra- 
ther tear them than learn them by heart. — What does this man ask 
me for 1 — He asks you for the money which you owe him. — If he 
will repair to-morrow morning to my house I will pay him what I 
owe him. — He will rather lose his money than repair thither.— 
Charles the Fifth, who spoke fluently several European languages, 
said that we should (man mftffe) speak Spanish with the gods, 
Italian with our (fetnet) mistress (bte ©eltcOte Ohs. Lesson LIIL), 
French with our (feinem) friend (masc), German with soldiers, 
English with geese (bte ©an^), Hungarian (unqcmfd)) with horses, 
and Bohemian (fcofymtfd)) with the devil (bet &eufe(). — Why does 
the mother of our old servant shed tears ] What has happened to 
her? — She sheds tears because the old clergyman, her friend, who 
was so very good to her (bet tf)t fc met ®ute6 getfjan fyat), died a few 
days ago. — Of what illness did he die 1 — He was struck with apo- 
plexy. — Have you helped your father to write his letters '? — I have 
lielped him.— Will you help me to work when we go to town ? — I 



267 

will help you to work, if you will help me to get a livelihood.-^ 
Have you inquired after the merchant who sells so cheap ? — I have 
inquired after him ; but nobody could tell me what has become of 
him.- — Where did he live when you were here three years ago ?— 
He lived then in Charles Street, No. 55. — How do you like this 
wine ? — I like it very well ; but it is a little sour. 

198. 

How does your sister like those apples? — She likes them very 
#ell ; but she says that they are a little too sweet. — Will you have 
'die goodness to pass that plate to me ? — With much pleasure. — 
Shall (@cll) I pass these fishes to you? — I will thank you to pass 
;hem to me. — Shall I pass the bread to your sister ? — You will 
oblige (t>ct(nnt)en*) me by passing it to her. — How does your mo- 
ther like our food ? — She likes it very well ; but she says that she 
has eaten enough. — What dost thou ask me for ? — Will you be kind 
enough to give me a little bit of (t>en) that mutton 1 — Will you 
pass me the bottle, if you please? — Have you not drunk enough? 
— Not yet; for I am still thirsty. — Shall I give (einfdbcnfcn) you 
some wine ? — No, I like cider better. — Why do you not eat ? — I do 
not know what to eat. — Who knocks at the door? — It is a foreigner. 
—Why does he cry ? — He cries because a great misfortune has 
happened to him. — What has happened to you ? — Nothing has 
happened to me. — Where will you go to this evening 1 — I don't 
know where to go to. — Where will your brothers go to] — I do not 
know where they will go to ; as for me, I shall go to the theatre.— 
Why do you go to town ?— I go thither in order to purchase some 
books.— Will you go thither with me ? — I will go with you ; but I 
do not know what to do there. — Must I sell to that man on credit? 
— You may sell to him, but not on credit ; you must not trust him, 
for he will not pay you. — Has he already deceived any body ? — ■ 
He has already deceived several merchants who have trusted him. 
— -Must I trust those ladies 1 — You may trust them ; but as for me, 
I shall not trust them; for I have often been deceived by the wo- 
men, and that is the reason why I say, we must not trust every 
body. — Do those merchants trust you ?— They do trust me, and I 
trust them. 

199. 

Whom do those gentlemen laugh at ? — They laugh at those la- 
dies who wear red gowns (t)a$ ,5tlrit>) with yellow ribbons. — Wliy 
do those people laugh at us? — They laugh at us because we speak 
badly. — Ought we to (OTu^ man) laugh at persons who speak bad- 
ly ? — We ought not to laugh at them ; we ought, on the contrary, 
to listen to them, and if they make blunders ( gerjler), we ought to 
correct them for them. — What are you laughing at ? — I am laughing 
at your hat ; how long (fett roann) have you been wearing it so 
large ? — Since ((Setttem) 1 returned from England. — Can you afford 
to buy a horse and a carriage? — I can afford it. — Can your brother 



268 

afford to buy that large house \— He can afford it.— Will he buy it 1 
— He will buy it, if it pleases him. — Have you received my let- 
ter]-—! have received it with much pleasure. 1 have shown it to 
my German master, who was surprised at it, for there was njt a 
single mistake in it. — Have you already received Jean Paul's and 
Wieland's works 1 — I have received those of (t>cn) Wieland ; as 
to those of Jean Paul, I hope (jo boffe id)) to receive them next 
week. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY.SIXTH LESSON.— 0ed)$ nxib art)t}igste 
Section. 

Who is there ? 2Bet if? fca ? 

It is I. 3d) tun eg. 

Is it you 1 ©tn& ©te eg ? 

It is not I. 3d) bin eg md)t. 

It is you. ©te ftnb eg. 

It is he, it is she. (5t ift eg, fte ift eg. 

Are they your brothers? <Stnt> eg 3bte SBtubet ? 

They are not my brothers. @g ftnb meine- *8tubet nic^t. 

QCJ^ Appositional phrases 9, are in German always 
put in the same case as the principal noun. Ex. 

NOMINATIVE. 

Lycurgus, the Spartan legislator. £t)f:utg, bet (SJcfefcCjefcet ©parta'g* 
Religion, this daughter of hea- £>te Religion, bteje £od)ter beg $\nv 

ven, is the faithful companion me(g, ift bie tteue ©efcifyttmn bet 

of men. 9)lenfd)en. 

GENITIVE. 

The duty of a father, the natural £>eg 83atetg, t)t^ naturltdben 23ot* 
tutor of his children, is to pro- munbeg fetnet $tnbet, 5>fltd)t ijt 
vide for them. eg, flit fie $u fotfjen. 

DATIVE. 

That honour is due to my friend 2)tefe ($l)te gebufjrt rnctnem Jteunbe, 
who is a brave man. etnem btcwen 9ttanne* 

I gave the father, this honest old 3d) fja&e bem £3atet, biefem tecfyt* 
man, the model of his family, fd)affenen ®tetfe, bem Sflufret fei* 
that advice. net gamtlie, ben diatt) £tQt* 

&en. 

* We call a phrase oppositional when it serves to explain and determine the 
principal noun. 



269 

That happened under Constan- £>tc£ gcfdjar) unter (Sonffantttt bem 
tine the Great, the first Chris- ©tegen, bem erftcn d)rift(td)en Jlats 
tian emperor. fcr. 

ACCUSATIVE. 

t concerns my friend, the coun- (5$ Mt'xfjt mctnen Stcunb, ten 

sellor N. <Katb 9?. 

I have known the king, that 3d) babe ben .Sb'ntg, btefcn 2Bol)ttr;as 
benefactor of his people; tet fctneS &olfe&, gefonnt. 

The duty, _ Hie ^fttcbt ; 

the companion, -bcr (Sk'fabrtc ; . 

the tutor (the guardian), ber SSermunb (plur. SSormunbet) ; 

the mode], bag SDftifiet ; 

the family, tie gTamUil ; 

the people, bas £8e(! ; 

honest, tcd)tfd)affen ; 

faithful (true), tr eu. 

To thee, my dearest friend, I give £>iv, metnem (tcbffrm ^mmfc/ 9 e &* 
this ring. id) btefcn SKtno,. 

DC/ 13 •#• In German the pronoun must be in the 
same gender, number, and case, with the substantive. 

Of me, who am his nearest rela- SScn nut, fetnem nadbftcn 93ern>anfc* 

tion, he requests nothing. ten, ttertangt er ntd)t$. 

Is it they who speak ? (Stub fie es, tie fprecfyen ? 

It is they. (Sic finb e$. 

It is 1 who sneak 5" 3d) bm **' bct ^* U 

It is 1 who speak. £ 3d) ^ ^ ^ ^ ^^ 

OCT 3 C« When a personal pronoun is followed by 
a relative pronoun, it may or may not be repeated af- 
ter the latter ; but if it is not repeated, the verb which 
follows the relative pronoun must stand in the third 
person, though the personal pronoun be of the first or 
second person, 

It is you who laugh. £ ^ ^ ^ ^ fa ^ 

r £)u tuft e$, ber bu c£ getfjem fjaft ; 
It is thou who hast done it. < or, 

C 3)u btft e$, ber c$ getbem r)at. 
It is you, gentlemen, who have (Sic finb c$, metne #crren, tic fcta$ 

said that. cjefagt f)abcn. 

To look like, (to appear) 2Cu$feben* rote. 

How does he look ] 2£te fietyt er au$ ? 



270 



He looks gay (sad, contented). (£r fteF)t tujttfl (trcmricj, jufrtefcen) 

This beer looks like water. £)tefe$ 93ter ftcbt avii rote ©offer* 

You look like a doctor. ©te fcf)cn w'u cm 2Cr^t ou*. 

Our equals. f Itnfereei ©(eicben. 

He has not his equal or his f (§r l)at feincs ®(eid)cn md)t. 
match. 



To resemble some one. 

He resembles me. 

I resemble your brother. 

I resemble him. 

• Each other. 

We resemble each other. 



'SLemanbem g t e t cb e n *. Part. 

past, gcgttcben. Imperf o/tcb. 
3 e m a n t> c m a b n 1 1 cb fel)en* or 
fctn *. 

(Sr ftcbt mir abnltcb. 

3d) gfcidbc 3()rem 2$ ruber. 

3d) bin tbm obnlid). 

©inanber (an indeclinable pro- 
noun)^ 



( £Bit gtctcben einonber. 
( 3&tr fcben cinanbcr dbnttcb. 
They do not resemble each other. (Sic fcben etnanbet nicbt abnltcb. 
The brother and the sister love 3)cr 23ruber nnb t>ic ^d)tt>cftct ties 

each other. ben etttonber. 

Are you pleased with each other? (Stub 0ie mit etnanber $ufrieben ? 

SB&tt ftnb eg. - 



We are (so) 

I am well. 

To drink to some one. 

To drink some one's health. 
I drink your health. 



3cb bin ejefunb. 

Semanbem $utrtnrVn*. 
t SemonbeS ©cfunbbeit trinfen*. 
<2Cuf Semonbe* ©efunbbett trtns 
C fen*. 

3cb trinfe 3brc (Sk'funbbctt. 

3d) trinfe auf 3bre (35ejnnbbett. 

To make some one's acquaint- SBetonntfcboft mit Semonfccm mod)etl» 

ance. 
To become acquainted with some- 3?manben fennen (ernen. 

body. 

[ 3d) fyabc feine 93efanntfdjoft ge* 

I have made his acquaintance. 3 ™* r ; g3 cfanntfcI)aft mit {f)m &(s 

{ mncbt. 
I have become acquainted with 3d) babe ibn fennen ejetcrnt. 

him. 
Are you acquainted with him (Stnb <Sie mit ifjm (il)r) brt onnt? 

(her)l 



b (£tttanber indicates that the action expressed by the verb is reciproca* 
between several persons or things, and is employed for all cases and gendera. 



271 

Do you know him (her) ] $enncn @te tfjn (fie) ! 

I am acquainted with him (her). 3d) bin nut tfjm (tf)r) fcefcmnt* 

I know him (her). 3d) ferine tfyn (fie). 

He is an acquaintance of mine. (£r tf£ metn JBefannter. 

She is my acquaintance. (Stc tft mctne -Sefannte. 

He is not a friend, he is but an (£r if! tetn greunb, et ift ttUt etrt 
acquaintance. SSefrmnter. 

Obs. (go denotes the consequence of a preceding 
proposition. (See DCr* B. Lesson LXXXI.) 

As thou hast not done thy exer- SBcit bu betne 2Cuf^at>cn ntcftt 91U $es 

cises well, thou must do them mad)t rjaft, fo mufJt fcu fie nod) em* 

again. mal mad)en. 

As he did not come, I sent for £)a er ntcbt Fam, (fc) ftcf id) ifyn nt? 

him. fen. (Lesson LXXXI.) 

Again, once more. ££od) etnmal.. 

As. <Da, mil. 

exercises. 200. 
Where have you become acquainted with that lady ? — -I have be- 
come acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. — Is 
it thou, Charles, who hast soiled my book? — It is not I, it is your 
little sister who has soiled it. — Who has broken my fine ink-stand] 
— It is I who have broken it. — Is it you who have spoken of me ? 
— It is we who have spoken of you, but we have said of you nothing 
but good (^utcs). — Why does your cousin. ask me for money and 
books ] — Because he is a fool ; of me, who am his nearest relation 
and best friend, he asks for nothing. — W^hy did you not come to 
dinner ($um 932tttageffen) ]— I have been hindered, but you have been 
able to dine without me. — Do you think that we shall not dine, if 
you cannot come? — How long did you wait for me] — We waited 
for you till a quarter past seven, and as you did not come, we dined 
without you. — Have you drunk my health ] — We have drunk yours 
and that of your parents. — -A certain man liked much wine, but he 
found in it (oaran) two bad qualities (fcte ©tgcnfdbaft). "If I put 
water to it (bint'ln)," said he, " I spoil it, and if I do not put any 
to it, it spoils me."— How does your uncle look] — He looks very 
gay ; for he is much pleased with his children; — Do his friends 
look as gay as he ? — They, on the contrary, look sad, because they 
are discontented. — My uncle has no money, and is very contented, 
and his friends who have a great deal of it, are scarcely ever so. — 
Do you like your sister] — I like her much, and as she is very com- 
plaisant towards me, I am so towards her ; but how do you like 
yours ] — We love each other, because we are pleased with each 
other. 

201. 

Does your cousin resemble you? — He does resemble me. — Do 
your sisters resemble each other]- — They do not resemble each 
other ; for the eldest (Die a(tefte) is idle and naughty (unartig), and 



212 



the youngest assiduous and complaisant towards every body. — Who 
knocks at the door] — It is I, will you open it] — What do you 
want I — I come to ask you for the money which you owe me, and 
the books which I lent you. — If you will have the goodness to 
come to-morrow, I will return both to you. — Do you perceive yon- 
der house ] — I do perceive it, what house is it] — It is an inn (t)a$ 
2Bittf)Sf)au6) ; if you like, we will go into it to drink a glass of 
wine ; for I am very (fefyr) thirsty. — You are always thirsty when 
you see an inn. — If we enter it, I shall drink your health. — Rather 
than go into an inn I will not drink. — When will you pay what 
you owe me 1 — When I have money ; it is useless to ask me for 
some to-day, for you know very well that there is nothing to be had 
of him who has nothing. — When do you think you will have mo- 
ney ] — I think I shall have some next year. — Will you do what I 
shall tell you? — I will do it, if it is not too difficult. — Why do you 
laugh at me f — I do not laugh at you, but at your coat. — Does it 
not look like yours ] — It does not look like it ; for mine is short 
and yours is too long, mine is black and yours is green. (See end 
of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY-SEVENTH 



LESSON.- 

tzzlxon. 



-Qhbm ntih acf)t}igste 



To get into a scrape. 
To get out of a scrape. 

I got out of the scrape. 

The snare, 

always, 
That man always gets into bad 
scrapes; but he always gets 
out of them again. 

Between* 



©td) £anbe( $u$tef)en*. 

@td> fyetauS betfert*. 

@tdf) au$ ber ©cbftngc $teben*. 

©id) son ctwat los macben. 

3d) babe nur I) eta us gebeffetu 

3d) r>abe uud> aue t>et (Scfytnge ge$e? 

gen. 
3d) bin gut bat>on gefommen. 
bte ©cbltnge ; 
tmmer. 
2>tefet SRann $td)t ftd) tmmcr fcWtms 

me £anM $u ; aber er fjttft fid) tm* 

met rcnebet fyetauS. 

3 rc> t f d) e n (governs the datiys 
and accusative). 



The appearance, 
the sight, the face, 
the mien, the look, 
the countenance, the physiog- 
nomy, 
To have the appearance. 
To appear 



bas 2Cnfer)en ; 
t>a$ ©cfid)t ; 
tie WRUM ; 
bte ©eftcbtebUbung 

£)a$ 2fnfer)en baben*. 
©cfyetnen** Imperf. fd)ten. 



273 



To look. 
To look well. 
To look good. 

'You (appear) look very well. 

She looks angry. 

She appears to be angry. 

They appear to be contented. 
They look contented (pleased). 



2Cu$fcF)en*. 
©ut auSfeben*. 
©ut $u fet« fcfyemen*. 

©te fct)cn febt $ut au$. 

©ie fte&t tJetbrtejtftd) au$. 

©te fcbeint bofe (oetbrieffttd)) $u 

fetn. 
©ie fcbemen $uftteben $u fern* 
©te feben ocrgnttgt au$. 



To look pleased with some one. Scmanbem ein fceunbUdjeS ®efid)t 



To receive one kindly. 

Friendly, kindly. 

To look cross at some one. 

When I go to see that man, in- 
stead of receiving me with plea- 
sure, he looks displeased. 

^ good-looking man. 

i bad-looking man. 

Sad-looking people or folks. 
To imagine. 
* 

That man whom you see, seems 
desirous of approaching us. 

To visit, to go to see some one. 
To pay some one a visit. 

To frequent a place. 

To frequent societies. 
To associate with some one. 

It is all over with me ! 

It is all over ! 

It is too late to consult to-day 
about what was done yesterday 
(a proverb). 

The spite, the displeasure, 
the grief, the sorrow, 
To vex, to spite some one. 
To hurt some one's feelings. 
You have vexed (spited) that 

man. 
You have hurt that man's feel- 
ings. 

The place, 
I know a good place to swim in. 

12* 



mad)cn. 

(Stnen freunbUd) empfancjen** 

gteunb(id). 

Semanbem ein bofeS ©efid)t macrjen. 

2Bcnn id) btefen Sttann bejucfye, mad)t 
cr writ ein bofeS dkftd)t, cmftatt 
mid) freunfcltd) aufeunebmen. 

(Sin 50?ann sen gutem tfnfefjen. 

<5in 9^ann sen fd)led)tem ttnfefjetu 

£eute sen fcb(ed)tem tfnfetjeiu 

©id) einbtlben (governs the da- 
tive). 

£)et Sftann, ben ©te fefyen, fd)eint 
fid) un$ (dative) nafyetn $u rootten. 

Semanben befucben. 
Semanbem etnen S3efud) madjeiu 
Sin en £>rt befud&en. 
©efetifebaften bej'ucben. 
SD^tt Semanbem umejefyen*. 

(5$ ift urn mid) cjefd)cf)en ! 
3d) bin tterloren ! 
(£•$ tft barum ejefebefyen ! 
©cfebefyene £)'mge finb md)t $u anbetn 
(©ptiebwott). 

ber SSetbtufi ; 

bet Summer. 

Semanbem £>etbtuj-i madden. 

Semanbcn frdnfen. 

©ie baben btefem 9^anne SSerbrug 

gemacbt. 
©ie fyaben btefen 9}*ann gefta'nft 



ber £)rt, bic ©telle. 
3cb roetfi eine cjute 
©cbrotmmen. 



©telle gum 



274 

To swim. <Scf)ttummen*. Part, past, gefcfywom* 

men. Imperf. fdbwamm. 

To experience. @ r f a b x c tt*. Imperf. e r f u f) r. 

To endure (experience). (S r b u 1 1> e n. 

To jfeeZ (experience). (5 m p ft n b e n*. Imperfect, enu 

p f a n b ♦ 

I have experienced a great deal. 3d) babe met etbulbet (empfunben, 

er fab ten). 
I have experienced a great many 3cb babe Stel UngtM gefyabt. 
misfortunes. 

To swjfer. 2 e t b e n* (a, e U 1 1 e n, ( 1 1 1). 

To feel a pain in one's head or f 2Cm jtepfe obet am $upe (etben*. 

foot. 
I felt a pain in my eye. f 3d) fjabe am 2Cua,e gelttten. 

To neglect. S3 et n a d) laf ft$en. 

To mzss (*o neglect). SSetfaumen. 

You have neglected your prom- ©tc fjaben tfyt SSctfprccben Wtnacfc 

ise. faffta,t. * 

You have neglected to come to (Ste baben tJCtfd'umt, $ut (Stunbc ($ut 
your lesson. Cccttcn) $u fremmen. 

To yield. £Betcben* a takes fein. Part, past, 

gcrmdfren. Imperf. roid). 
To yield to some one. 3emanbem nacbgeben*. 

r@td> in ctroae (accus.) fducfem 
To yield to something. < @tcb $u ctroa* bequemen. 

C Q?$ Oct etroas bewenben (affen*. 
To yield to necessity. <B'uh in bie Sfjetbrocnbtgfctt febicfen 

We must yield to necessity. #flan mup fid) in bie CftotbroenbigrVtt 

fd)icfen. 

To spring. ©pringen** Part, past, gefptungen. 

Imperf. fptang. 

To jump (hop). £tipfen. 

To blow up, to burst, ©ptengen. 

To omit. 2(u$(affen*. Imperf. ftc£. 

To spring up from below. $on unten bcrauf fprtngen*. 

To spring forward. 9Senvarts fpringen. 

To spring backward. 3urticf fprtngen. 

The child hopped joy full arcund *£)a$ .£inb i)iipfte ftt-'ubtg urn mid) 
me. f)crum. b 

■ 30Betd)en, to steep, and ernjetcfjen, to soften, tj mollify, are active and regu- 
lar verbs, and consequently take fyctbett* for their auxiliary. 

b 43iipfen, to jump, to hop, to frisk, is generally used in speaking of animals 
that spring, and of children. 



275 

The besiegers let the bastion £)te SMageret ftcficn tie <8ajM fpren* 

blow up. gen. 

The copier has omitted a few S>cr 2f bfcfercibcc ^)Qt ctntge 3eUen au^s 

lines. getaffen. 

'2(uf Scmanfcen cbet etroag fog 



To rush upon some one or 
something-. 



fptingen*, fo$ ftuqen, (o$ tens 
nen*. 
Ueber Semanbcrt obct ctroaS r)ctfa(s 
ten*. 

The cat springs upon the rat. " Die £age fpttngt auf Me 9?atte (o$. 
To leap on horseback. ©id) auf t>a$ qpfcrl) fd)tt>ingcn* (ges 

febwungen, fdntxmg). 
To run. JKennen* (gerannt, rannte). 

To swing-. ©cbroingen* (gefefyroungen, fcfyroang)* 

To still greater ill luck. 3u nod) grcferem Ungtucf. 

To still greater good luck. 3u ncd) grenerem (Mitf. 

To my still greater ill luck I 3u ncd) grobvrem Unglticf fyafce tdj 

have lost my purse. meine 33ctfe t>erlorcn. 

exercises. 202. 

Is it right to laugh thus at everybody? — If I laugh at your coat, 
I do not laugh at every body. — Does your son resemble any one ]— . 
He resembles no one. — Why do you not drink ] — I do not know 
what to drink ; for I like good wine^ and yours looks like vinegar. 
—If you wish to have some other I shall go down into the cellar 
(Lesson LXXIII) to fetch you some. — You are too polite, sir, I 
shall drink no more to-day. — Have you known my father long] — I 
have known him long, for I made his acquaintance when I was yet 
zX (auf) school. We often worked for one another, and we loved 
each other like brothers. — I believe it, for you resemble each 
other. — When I had not done my exercises, he did them for me, 
and when he had not done his, I did them for him. — Why does 
your father send for the physician ] — He is ill, and as the physi- 
cian does not come he sends for him. 

203. 

Is that man angry with (auf with the accus.) you ] — I think he 
is angry with me, because I do not go to see him ; but I do not : 
like to go to his house : for when I go to him, instead of receiving 
me with pleasure, he looks displeased. — You must not believe that 
he is angry with you, for he is not so bad as he looks. — He is the 
best man in (pen) the world ; but one must know him in order to 
appreciate (fd)d£en) him. — There is ((5$ tfit) a great difference (bet 
Unterfcbtefc) between (dative) you and him ; you look pleased with 
all those who come to see you, and he looks cross at them. — 
Why do you associate (gehen Sic — um) with those people] — I as- 
sociate with them because they are useful to me. — If you continue 
to associate with them you will get into bad scrapes, for they have 



276 

many enemies. — How does your cousin conduct himself? — He 
does not conduct himself very well ; for he is always getting- into 
some bad scrape (or other). — Do you not sometimes get into bad 
scrapes 1 — It is true that 1 sometimes get into them, but I always 
get out of them again.- — Do you see those men (Scute) who seem 
desirous of approaching us I — I do see them, but I do not fear 
them ; for they hurt nobody. — We must go away, for I do not like 
to mix with people whom I do not know. — I beg of you not to be 
afraid of them, for I perceive my uncle among them. — Do you 
Know a good place to swim in 1 — I do know one. — Where is it] — 
On that side of the river, behind the wood, near the high-road (t)te 
£cmt>fttc$e). — When shall we go to swim ? — This evening if you 
like. — Will you wait for me before the city-gate 1—1 shall wait for 
you- there ; but I beg of you not to forget it. — You know that I 
never forget my promises. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY.EIGHTH LESSON.— &cl)t ttttb axt^ifiste 
Section. 

By all means (obstinately). 9#tt allet 5D?adbt unt) (Bewail 

To follow. Sctqcn, nad)geben* (govern the da- 

tive). 
To pursue. S3etfe(§en (governs the accus.). 

I have followed him. 3ct> bin tfym nacf^egangen. 

To lose one's wits. £)en QSerftanb mlieten*. Imperf. 

t>et(ot. 
The sense, the wit, the intellect, t>er s #erftanfc>, , *• 
That man has lost his wits, for £)tefer Sfflann f)at t>en SOcrjtanb t>cr« 

he does not know what he is lotcn, fcenn cr wetp ntcfyt, wa$ et 

doing. tt)Ut. 

That man wishes by all means £)tefet Wann n>UI mxv nut alter d5es 

to lend me his money. wait fetn ©ell) letfyen. 

Obs. A. The neuter of the demonstrative pronoun 
b t e f e 3 (bct£) may in the singular relate to substan- 
tives of any gender or number, and even to a whole 
proposition. 

Is that the lady whom you spoke 3ft bag t>te £>ame, t>on fcer (gte nut 
of to me 1 nut cjefprecben fyaben ? 

That is a bad man. £)a£ ift etn frofer 9Konn. 

Which are the pens with which 2Bdd)e$ fint> tie jefcetn, mit benen 
you write so well 1 <Ste fo $ut fcr>rctben ? 

Obs. JS. The neuter of the interrogative pronoun, 



277 



tt> e ( rf) e £, which, may equally relate to substantives of 
any gender or number. 

Which is the best pronuncia- ££cld)C$ tft t)te tn'fte 2(u$fprad)C ? 
tion 1 



What a beautiful book ! 



SBctd) etn fd)onc$ 35ud) ! 



O&s. C SEBeW), when it expresses admiration, may 
be followed by the indefinite article. It remains then 
invariable. 



What a great man ! 
What fine weather ! 
What good people they are ! 
What a happiness ! 
How fortunate ! 
How lucky ! 



ffiMcb cin a,re£er Warn ! 
fetches fcbeite better ! 
SBclcbc gutc Scute finfc t>a$ ! 

>2Bcld) cin ®IM or n»e(d)c$ ®lucf ! 



Perhaps. 
I shall perhaps go thither. 



8$teIlci<H 

3d) roerte mctteicbt fytngerjen. 

Ofe. D. flow;, before an exclamation, is translated 
by tt>ie, ttrietnef, tt>ekt). Ex. 



How good you are ! 

How foolish he is ! 

How foolish she is ! 

How rich that man is ! 

How handsome that woman is ! 

How kind you are to me ! 

How happy you are ! 

How much I owe you ! 

How much I am obliged to you ! 

How many obligations 1 am ( 
under to you ! { 

How many (what a multitude 

of) people ! 
The multitude, the great number, 

To be under obligations, to be "7 
obliged to some one fbi some- ? 
thing. J 

To be indebted to some one for " 
something. * 

To owe something to some one. J, 

I am indebted to him for it. 



££ic gut [tub (Sic ! 

££tc fcumm ift cr ! 

®t« tmmm ift ftc ! 

2£ie rcid) ift tuefer 90?cmn ! 

2£te feben ift fctefe #rau ! 

SSMcbe ©ute @te fur mid) r)a6cn ! 

9&a$ {tnb (Sic fc qlucf(td) ! 

2£tcmcl id) 3bncn ntcbt febutbtg bin ! 

SOBic fcfyr bin id) 3faum nid)t oerfcuns 

ten! 
I'SBJaS id) 3fincn ntcbt rerbanfe ! 
-3&tcttte( id) Sbncn nid)t 511 t>ert>anfcn 

babe! 
3Bclcbe 9ftenfd)cnmcnge ! £Beld) cine 

Sfflenge 93olf$! 
tie Sttencjc. 



3cmanbcm 
fein*. 



fur ctroaS tteruunben 



Semcmbem ctroaS scrbanfen or $u 
rerbanfen baben*. 

£)ae fjabe id) ir)m §u tJetbanfcn. 



278 

To thank, £) a n f c n (governs the dative). 

To thank some one for some- 3emant>em fur ettvaS fcanfcn. 

thing-. 

I thank you for the trouble you 3d) banfc Sbnen fur tie 9JUif)e, t^ 

have taken for me. . <Ste ffd) fur mid) QCgeOen t)aben* 

Is there anything more grand 1 ££aS ift grower? 
Is there anything more cruel 1 ££a£ tft cjraufamet ? 
Is there anything more wicked 1 2£as t|l QCttlofer ? 
Can anything be more handsome] £ann ciroas fd)encr fctn ? 

To run up. £crkt(aufen*. 

To hasten up. £erbcici(en. 

To run to the assistance of some Swianfocm W »g>Citfe ctfen. 
one. 

To save, to deliver. gotten. 

To hasten. ©Hen. 

To plunder (to rob). splimfcern. 

Many men had run up ; but in- SBtele Scute watch f)cr6ctgcct(t ; a£lcx» 

stead of extinguishing the fire, cmftatt fcaS geuer $u lofd)en, jtngen 

the wretches set themselves to tne (Slenfccn an $u ptunfcctn. 
plundering. 

To begin something. <5rn?a$ anfana/n*. Imperf. ftng* 

To sef about something. (Sid) an ettuaS (ace.) mad)en. 

Have they been able to extin- £at man t>a$ Jcucr tofd)en fonn.cn ? 

guish the fire 1 
Have they succeeded in extin- 3ft e£ tfynen cjelungen, fcaS Jeuet 3 U 

guishing the fire ? lefchen ? 

The watch indicates the hours. £)ie Htt $eto,t £>te ©tunfcen an. 
To indicate. 2Cn$ctgcn* 

To quarrel, ©id) $ a n !c n. 

To chide, to reprove some one. 3^mant)en au^anfen or au$fd)cttcn* 

(gefebetten, fdbatt). 
To scold some one. 5Q?tt 3cmant)cm $anfen. 

The quarrel, * t)cr Ban!, tic 3an!crct. 

To dispute, to contend about VLcbsx etn?a6 ftrcitcn* (geftottin, 

something. jtrttt). 

About what are those people dis- SBoriibet ftretten btefe Scute ? 

puting ] 

They are disputing about who (Sic ^anfen fid), rocr $ucrfi gefyen foil. 

shall go first. 

OF THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 

The present participle is formed from the infinitive, 
by adding the letter b. Ex. Stebett, to love ; present 



279 

part. Kefcettb, loving ; arbetten, to work , present part, 
ctrbettenb* 

The present participle in German is used in the at- 
tributive sense like an adjective. Ex. ©n jter&enber 
93ater, a dying father ; ber lacfyenbe grufyfing, the smiling 
spring; bte nafyettbe ©tunbe, the approaching hour ; bct$ 
jttternbe $tnb, the trembling child. But it cannot be 
used as a predicate. We cannot say with the Eng- 
lish : the boy is reading. a This must be expressed by 
the present tense, as : ber fixiabe lief t h 

In English the present participle is used to express 
cause, reason, condition, and time. But this is rarely the 
case in German. For in all such instances the present 
participle is translated by the following conjunctions 
with the verbs expressed by the English participles : 
al$, when, as ; ttacfybem, after ; ba, as ; inbem, as, whilst ; 
tt>etl, because. Ex. 

Being lately at your brother's 2tt$ td) neuftd) bet Sfytcm SStufcer 

house, I gave something to his roar, gab id) fatten ittnfcern etnxtg. 

children. 
Having eaten supper, she went to 9?ad)t>em c fte $u 3?acf)t cjegeffen fyatte, 

bed. atng fie $u SSette. 

Having no money, I cannot lend «Da tcb fetn ©ett> fyabe, fo fantt id) 3f)- 

you any. nen !etn^ letben. 

Knowing that you are my friend, £)a id) roeijj, fcap @tc metn Jreunt) 

I beg of you to do me that fa- ftnt>, fo bttte id) (Sic, mtr btefen 

vour. ©cfatten $u tfjun. 

Not rinding my brother, I went 3nbem td) meinen 93ruter md)t fnnfc, 

to my sister. (fo) ging id) gu mctner @d)n>ej!cn 

Being ill, I cannot work. SBcil id) tvant bin, frmn id) ntd)t at: 

betten. 

Ofo. _Z2. These examples show that each of the eoii- 

a In sublime style, principally in poetry, it may be used adverbially. Ex. 
Stttcrnb »or iebem 5: fatten lebt ber feurcbtfame in eitugcr ?lngft, trembling at 
each shade the fearful lives in constant anxiety. 3 Inn in bte ^ebe etnfauettb, 
begaun ber eble ?lcbt(leg, interrupting him, the noble Achilles began. 

b Several words formed originally from verbs, have lost the nature of pre- 
sent participles, and are used as adjectives only, both in the attributive and 
predicative sense ; they are : brtttgettb, pressing ; briufenb, oppressive ; ctmteb- 
menD, captivating ; f(te£ettb, fluent ; bittrettknb, overpowering ; tranfcnb, mor- 
tifying; vctjeub, charming. Ex. ^bre^itten ftub fehr etmtebmenb, her man- 
ners are very captivating ; bte 9loth tft bvutcjenb, the necessity is pressing ; 
bte £aft tft britcfenb, the burden is oppressive ; btefe 33e(etbtiUtHfl tft franfenb, 
this insult is mortifying ; feme ^Hebe tft flteiienb, his speech is fluent; ftc ifl 
t'etjenb, she is charming. 

c $la&)i)tm can only be employed with the pluperfect of the indicative. 



280 

junctions aU, ttacfybem, ba, mbem, tt>etf, has its peculiar 
signification, and that there is necessarily a difference 
in their application: 1st, al$ refers to a definite event 
of a past time ; 2d, narf)bem states that an action was 
finished when another action commenced ; 3d, ba im- 
plies a logical cause from which an inference is drawn ; 
4th, tttbem is used to state that an event is simultane- 
ous with another event ; 5th, tt>etf expresses a real rea- 
son why a thing is or takes place. 

Obs. F. The present participle may, in English, be 
converted into a substantive by a preceding article, 
as : the reading, the writing, the speaking. This can- 
not be done in German, where the infinitive must be 
employed, as : ba$ ?efert, ba3 ©cfyretben, ba£ ©precfyett. As 
an adjective, however, but not as an abstract substan- 
tive, the present participle may elliptically be turned 
into a substantive, as : ber Sefenbe, one that reads ; ber 
©ct)rei6enbe, one that writes; ber ©precfyenbe, one that 
speaks. 

By too much reading one fatigues £)urd) 311 meieS £efen ermtifctft man 
the eyes. fid) tic 2Cua/n. 

Obs. G. Sometimes the present participle is transla- 
ted by a substantive preceded by a preposition. Ex. 

I saw your brother whilst I was 3>d) fyaOe 3f)ren S3tut>er tm SSor&et^e* 
passing by. fyen gefefjen. 

He came with a book under his (5r fam nut cittern SBucfre untcr bem 

arm. 2(rme. 

When I was in the country, I was 2C(S id) cmf bent Ccmbe roar, befant) id) 

very well. nricb fobr rc>ob(. 

She smiled as she was saying (Sic (cid)elte, intent fie t>a$ fagte* 

this. 

To perform (to represent) SScrftelten. 

To entertain (to amuse). Untcr batten*. Imperf. untetfjteft. 

To bargain (to deal). .ftantetn. 

To reply. (Stnnetvnt. 

To be struck with horror 93 on ©rnuen ((Sntfegen) befallen 

worsen*. 

The horror, ba*' ©ration, H$ (Sntfcgen. 

A. violent head-ache. ©in fjeftto/S jlopfroefy. 



281 

EXERCISES. 204. 

Ah, it is all over with me! — But, bless me! (mctn ($5ott!) why 
do you cry thus 1 — I have been (3Kan bat mtv) robbed of my gold 
rings, my best clothes, and all my money : that is the reason why 
1 cry.— Do not make so much noise, for it is we who have taken 
them all in order to teach you to take better care of your things 
((Sacben), and to shut the door of your room when you go out. — 
Why do you look so sad '] — I have experienced great misfortunes ; 
after having lost all my money, I was beaten by bad-looking men ; 
and to my still greater ill-luck I hear that my good uncle, whom I 
love so much, has been struck with apoplexy. — You must not 
afflict yourself so much, for we must yield to necessity ; and you 
know well the proverb : " It is too late to consult to-day about what 
was done yesterday." — Can you not get rid of that man? — I cannot 
get rid of him, for he will absolutely (fcurcbcius) follow me. — He 
must have lost his wits.— What does he ask you for 1 — He wishes 
to sell me a horse, which I do not want. — Whose houses are these 1 
— They are mine. — Do those pens belong to you ] — No, they be- 
long to my sister. — Are those the pens with which she writes so 
well 1— They are the same. — Which is the man of whom you com- 
plain ?— It is he w T ho wears a red coat. — " W T hat is the difference 
(fcer llntt'tfcrnetO between a watch and me 1 " inquired a lady (of) a 
young officer. " My lady," replied he, "a watch marks the hours, 
and near (t>ct) you one forgets them." — A Russian peasant, who 
had never seen asses, seeing several in Germany, said : " Lord (93frtn 
©ctt), what large hares there are in this country ! " — How many 
obligations I am under to you, my dear friend ! you have saved my 
life ! without you I had been (marc icb) lost. — Have those misera- 
ble men hurt you ? — They have beaten and robbed me ; and when 
you ran to my assistance they were about to strip (au&Mjfeti*) and 
kill me. — I am happy to have delivered you from (cms) the hands 
of those robbers.— How good you are !— Will you go to Mr. Tor- 
tenson's to night (tucjen 2(bent)) ? — I shall perhaps go. — And will 
your sisters go 1 — They will perhaps. — W^as you pleased at the 
concert yesterday ? — I was not pleased there, for there was such 
a multitude of people there that one could hardly get in — I bring 
you a pretty present with which you will be much pleased. — What 
is it] — It is a silk cravat. — Where is it? — I have it in my pocket 
(tie gafcbc).— -Does it please you 1 — It pleases me much, and I 
thank you for it with all my heart. — I hope that you will at last 
accept (cinncbmcn*) something of (yen) me. — What do you intend to 
give me 1 — 1 will not tell you yet, for if I do tell you, you. will find 
no pleasure when I give it to you. 

205. 

Why do those men quarrel 1 — They quarrel, because they do not 
know what to do. — Have they succeeded in extinguishing the fire ? 
—They have at last succeeded in it ; but it is said that several 
houses have been burnt. — Have they not been able to save any- 



282 

thing 1 — They have not been able to save anything ; for, instead of 
extinguishing the fire, the miserable wretches who had come up set 
themselves to plundering. — What has happened 1 — A great misfor- 
tune has happened. — Why did my friends set out without me ] — 
They waited for you till twelve o'clock, and seeing that you did not 
come, they set out. — Tell ((Stolen) us what has happened to you 
lately.— Very willingly, but on condition (mtt t>em £*c6tnge or untet 
ber iBebtngung) that you will listen to me attentively (cmfmerffam) 
without interrupting (unterbrecben*) me. — We will not interrupt 
you, you may be sure of it. — Being lately at the theatre, I saw The 
speaking picture and The weeping woman performed. This latter 
play (£>ae te|tere @tucf) not being very (fcnbcrlicb) amusing to me, I 
went to the concert, where the music (t)tc Sffluftf) caused me a vio- 
lent head-ache. I then left (sertaffcn*) the concert, cursing (octs 
nriinfcben) it, and went straight (gerafce) to the mad-house (t>a$ 9?ar 
tenfyaufe), in order to see (bcfud)cn) my cousin. 



EIGHTY-NINTH LESSON.— Neun txnb adftfyete 
Cwtion. 

Towards, against. ©eg en i; ^ g 

Against. 345 t e t J b 

©egett denotes the direction of two things turned 
towards each other and is used for towards and against ; 
tt) t b e x f on the contrary, denotes hostility and is only 
used for against. Ex. 

To take the field against the ©egen (or rctbct) ben $ei*ft> gu $e(fc)e 

enemy. ._ gict)ch*» 

What have you against me ? &Sba$'bofim 0U geQen (or itubet) 

mtcb ? 
You speak against yourself. ®tt rebcn qcqen (or nnfrer) ftcb felbft. 

To swim against the current. ©egert ben ^trcm fcbrotmiiu'n*. 
The love of a father towards his Die Ctebe vtneg $at*r$ gegen (not 

children. . toitcv) fetne &mfecr. 

I have nothing against that. 3d) fyabe ntd)t$ bct'cjcgcn. 

Self, selves. © e ( b ft or f e ( h e r (is indeclin- 

able). 

I myself. 3d) feffcft 

Thou thyself, he himself. ' 2)u jtfbft, cr frtbft. 

W T e ourselves, you yourselves. $5 it ft Kir, 3r)r (Sic) f^lOft. 

They themselves. @U felbft* 

He himself has told it to me. (St fetbft ^at e$ mtt gefagt. • 



283 

Obs. A. The pronoun preceding self is not transla- 
ted into German. But the personal pronoun preced- 
ing fel6ft is declined. 

He has given it to me (not to @r fyat'ti nuv fctbft gcgeben. 

another person). 
They themselves have come to ©te fctbft ftnb $u nur gefcmmcn. 

me. 
We have given it to them (not SQBtr fyafcen e$ ifyncn fctbft gegeben. 
to others). 

The day before. £>er Sag tterftcr. 

The preceding day, ber ttorbergebenbe Sag. 

The day before Sunday is Satur- £)et Sag t)cr ©onntag bctpt @am^ 

day. tag. 

The day before (the preceding £)er Sag serbcr (bet ttctfyetgefyenbe 
day), was Friday. Sag) war rin Jrcttag. 

Again (anew). SSon IHeuem, rotiber. 

Once more (again). 9?cd) etnma(. 

He speaks again. (5t fprtcbt roteber. 

I must hear him again. 3d) mug it)n son 9?euem fyoten. 

O&s. J3. The adverb ttrieber must not be mistaken for 
the inseparable particle ttttber (Lesson XXV.), nor for 
the preposition ttnber, against It answers to the 
English word again. Ex. ttneberfommen*, to come 
again ; ttrieberanfangert*, to begin again. It must not 
be mistaken for gurittf, back again, which as in English 
denotes retrogression. Ex. 3uriicffotttmen # , to come 
back again. 

The light, bag 2trf)t. 

To blow. SMflftti* (qeblafen, Mtc$). 

To blow out. 2Cu*btafen*. 

To flee. glteftcn* (gcflofjcn, fieb). 

C(Sntflieben*. 
To run awayr s ©ntlaufen*. 

C 5)at>on (an fen*. 
Why do you run away ? s Ii x arum la u fen ^te nxg (batwn) ? 

I run away, because I am afraid. 3d) (aufe bason (nxg), recti id) mid) 

furd)te (or recti id) gitrcbt l)abe). 
To make one's escape. } 

To run away, to flee. > Die $(ud)t nef)mcn* (or ergretfen*). 

To take to one's heels. ) 

He deserted the battle. (St ift au£ bet ^d)tad)t entftef)en or 

ent(aufen. 
The thi<3f has run away Det JDicfr tjt entlaufcn (ba&on* or reeg* 

gdaufen). 



284 

To catch, to lay hold of, to seize. ©rgrctfen* (crgttffen, crgrtff). 
To translate. ttc&Ctfc$eri. a 

To translate into German. ?iuf toutfd) itbevfeken. 

To translate from French into 2(u* tern Jrau^cftfcbcn tn$ jDcutfdje 

German. iiberfefeen. 

To translate from one language 2(us etner (Spracbe tn fotcanfocrc tiber* 

into another. fegcn. 

To introduce. (vinfiihren. 

I introduce him to you. 3d) fu()re i()n fcet Sbnen etn. 

Since ox from. &> n — a n, f e 1 t. 

02* en fctefcm 2fugcnb(tcfc an. 
From that time. < Sett Me jet 3ett. 

C $en fctefer 3ctt an. 

Obs. C. Compound prepositions must be divided 
and the case which the preposition governs placed be- 
tween the two component parts, as : 

From my childhood. 33en metnet Sucjcnb an. 

From morning until evening. 3Som 9"flora,en b\$ $um 2(benfc>. 

™ a'..'--... ;'„ , S Sfctat tfnfanqe bis gum (Snt>e. 
r rom the beonnninp; to the end. < ^ v ; :p t , /x. s. . 

To produce (to yield, to profit). (Stnbrtncjen*. 

To destroy. Serftoren. 

To reduce. Jperabfe£en. 

To limit. (Sinfcbranfen. 

To diminish (to lessen). SSetfretnern. 

To reduce the price. ©en spreis betabfe£en. 

To reduce (to bring down) the {Den tyxtU bt£ auf etnen &r)a(ct 
price to a crown. fyeruntetbtincjen*. 

The merchandise, tic 2£aare. 

The price of the merchandise f 2>ic £Baate fcfyla'Cjt ab. 
falls. 

The yard, the ell. Me ©lie. 

To deduct. f 9?acb(affen*. 

Having not overcharged you, I } So icb <Ste gar ntcbt uberfcgt fjabe, 
cannot deduct anything. fo fann id) ntd)t^ nactyajjen. 

JoaTto^ch. \ ***■ (inseparable). 

By the year (or a year), jafyrltcb ; 

by the day (or a day), taglicb ; 

by the month (or a month), monatUcr). 

a In iiberfe&ett, tc translate, the accent being on the root of the verb, lib ct 
is inseparable, and consequently its past participle is iiberfefct, n. t iibergefefct. 
{See Lesson XLV.) 



285 

By no means. (55at ntdf)t. 

Not at all. ©an$ tint) gat ntcrjt. 

How much does that situation SBtetnct bringt Sfynen fctefeS 2Cmt 
yield you a year? jafytlid) cin? 

exercises. 206. 

On entering the hospital (fcas $efpttat) of my cousin I was struck 
with horror at seeing several madmen (Der $lavv, gen. en) who came 
up (nabon).to me jumping and howling (beu(en). — What did you do 
then 1 — I did the same (e$ eben fo madjen) as they, and they set up 
a laugh (anfangen* $u tacben) as they were withdrawing (fid) gutfiefs 
gicficn or nx'gh'qebcn*). — When I was yet little I once (c'tnft) said to 
my father, " I do not understand (tjctfltefyen*) business, and I do not 
know how to sell ; let me play." My father answered me, smiling 
(Idcbdn), " In dealing one learns to deal, and in selling to sell." 
"But, my dear father," replied I, "in playing one learns also to 
play." " You are right," said he to me ; " but you must first (t)ot* 
f)Ct) learn what is necessary and useful." 

Do you already know what has happened? — 1 have not heard 
anything.- — The house of our neighbour has been burnt down. — 
Have they not been able to save anything 1 — They were very for- 
tunate in saving the persons that were in it ; but out of (t>on) the 
things that were (fid) kftnt>en*) there, they could save nothing. — 
Who has told you that ]— Our neighbour himself has told it to me. — 
Why are you without a light ? — The wind blew it out, when you 
came in. — What is the day before Monday called 1 — The day be- 
fore Monday is Sunday. — Why did you not run to the assistance of 
your neighbour whose house has been burnt down ? — I could not 
run thither, for I was ill and in bed. — What is the price of this 
cloth ] — I sell it at three crowns and a half the ell. — I think (ftnz 
ten*) it very dear.— Has the price of cloth not fallen 1 — It has not 
fallen : the price of all goods has fallen, except (au^cjenonunen) that 
of cloth. — I will give you three crowns for it. — I cannot let you 
have it for (um) that price, for it costs me more. — Will you have 
the goodness to show me some pieces (bag &M, plur. e) of English 
cloth ] — With much pleasure. — Does this cloth suit you ? — It does 
not suit me. — Why does it not suit you 1 — Because it is too dear ; 
if you will lower the price, I shall buy twenty yards of it (batten), 
j — Having not asked too much, I cannot take off anything. 

207. 

You learn French ; does your master let you translate ? — He lets 
me read, write and translate. — Is it useful to translate in learning 
a foreign language 1 — It is useful to translate when you nearly 
know the language you are learning ; but while (roenn) you do not 
yet know anything, it is entirely useless. — What does your Ger- 
man master make you do 1 — He makes me read a lesson ; after- 
wards he makes me translate French exercises into German on 



286 

(fiber with the accus.) the lesson which he has made me read ; and 
from the beginning to the end of the lesson he speaks German to 
me, and I have to answer him in the very (felbft) language which 
he is teaching me, — Have you already learnt much in that manner? 
— You see that I have already learnt something, for T have hardly 
been learning it four months, and I already understand you when 
you speak to me, and can answer you. — Can you read it as well 1 
— -I can read and write as well as speak it. — Does your master also 
teach English ? — He does teach it. — Wishing to make his acquaint- 
ance, I must beg of you to introduce me to (bet) him. — As you wish 
to make his acquaintance, I shall introduce you to him. — How many 
exercises do you translate a day 1 — If the exercises are not difficult 
I translate (from) three to (bis) four every day, and when they are 
so, I translate but one. — How many have you already done to-day 1 
— It is the third which I am translating; but to-morrow I hope to 
be able to do one more, for I shall be alone. — Have you paid a visit 
to my aunt 1- — I went to see her two months ago, and as she looked 
displeased, I have not gone to her any more since that time. — How 
do you do (to-day) ] — I am very unwell. — How do you like that 
soup 1 — I think (fmrjcn*) it is very bad ; but since I have lost my 
appetite I don't like an}^thing.— How much does that situation 
yield to your father ] — It yields him more than four thousand 
crowns. — What news do they mention (fa gen) ? — They say that the 
Turks have taken the field against the Russians. — Every one will 
find in himself the defects which he remarks in others : the defects 
of others are before (us), our own behind us. (See end of Lesson 
XXXIV.) 



NINETIETH LESSON.— Jfemqigste Action. 

PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I may have, thou mayest have, 3d) Ijafce, 3)u fyabeft, cr (fie, e$) 

he (she, it) may have. fyabe. 

We may have, you may have, SBtt fyaben, Sfjt fyafcet, fie fja&en. 

they' may have. 

I may be, thou mayest be, he 3d) fet, 3)u fetcft (or fetjt), cr (fte, 

(she, it) may be. e$) feu 

We may be, you may be, they £Btt feien, 31)* fetet, fie feten. 

may be. 

I may become, thou mayest be- 3d) roetbe, 2)u roetbejt, et (fie, eg) 

come, he (she, it) may become. roctbe. 
We may become, you may be- 3Btr roerfcen, 3^ ttJerfcet, fie n>er* 

come, they may become. t)en. 

1 may praise, thou mayest praise, 3d) fofce, 2)u lobeft, er (fie, c^) lobe, 
he (she, it) may praise. 



287' 

fVe may praise, you may praise, 2Btt (often, Sfjr (o6ct, fie (ebett. a 
they may praise. 

Obs. A. The present of the subjunctive differs, in 
regular verbs, from the present of the indicative only 
in the third person singular, which rejects the letter U 
All German verbs are regular in the present of the 
subjunctive, which is formed from the infinitive. 

Obs. B. The letter e which is often omitted in the 
present of the indicative (Obs. A, Lesson XXXIV.) 
must always be retained in the present of the sub- 
junctive. 

He who requires to be honoured 5Bet tterfongt, tap mem tfm fetneS 

on account of his riches, has 9£etdf)tf)um8 tnegen tterefyre, fcer 

also a right to require amoun- fjat aud) em 9?ed)t $u wttongen, 

tain to be honoured that con- fcafi man etnen 23et$ wrefyte, bet 

tains gold. ®ctt> in fid> fyat. 

IMPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

In regular verbs the imperfect of the subjunctive 
does not differ from that of the indicative. In irregu- 
lar verbs it is formed from the imperfect indicative 
by softening the radical vowels and adding an e* b 

The imperfect of the subjunctive is used after the 
conditional conjunction toetttt, if, expressed or under-.. 



6 



tood. 



[f I had money. ££enn td) (Mt> f)atte (or r)atte icf) 

a In conjugating their verbs, learners would do well to prefix a conjunction 
to each person of the subjunctive, not because a conjunction should necessa- 
rily precede that mode, but because it is advisable to get into the habit of 
placing the verb after the conjunction, particularly in compound verbs. 
They may use for that purpose one of the conjunctions b a fi, ttt e n tt. Ex. 
£<U3 id) afcfdjretbe, that I may copy ; ttetut iti) abfcfyrtebe, if I copied ; roernt 
t$ abgefd)rieben. fyattt, if I had copied ; bctfj id) afcfc&reiben tuerbe, that I shall 
copy, &c. These examples show that when the phrase begins with a con- 
junction (Lesson XLVIL), the separable particle is not detached from the 
verb in simple tenses, and in the past participle gives way to the syllable ge. 

b From this rule must be excepted the sixteen irregular verbs which com- 
pose the first class in our list. These, having already an e in the imperfect 
indicative, do not add one in the subjunctive. Several of them do not soften 
the radical vowel, but become regular again in the imperfect subjunctive, as : 
fernten*, to know ; netmen*, to name,- to call ; rentten*, to run ; fenben *, to 
eend ; roenben*, to turn. 



288 

If I saw him. ££erm tcf) tf)tt fa'fjc (or fcifye left tfjn), 

If he did it. 85*enn er es tbcte (or tr)atc er^ e£). 

Were he to lose his money. £Benn er fctn ©clt) wrlcre. 

Were he to beat his dog. 2&enn er fetnen .punt) fd)luge. 

If you were rich. SBenn (Bte rctcJ) war^n (or rocireti 

<Ste retcb). 

O&s. C. As soon as toetttt is not conditional it re- 
quires the indicative mode. Ex. 

If he is not ill, why does he send SGScnn er nicfyt fronf tft, roarum lefpt 
for the physician 1 er ben doctor femnten ? 

05s. D. Instead of YoetM, the imperfect subjunctive 
of the verb [often is often used at the beginning of a 
sentence, as should in English. 

Should you still receive my let- ©oUten ©ie metnen S3rief nod) fjeute 
ter to-day, I beg you will call erbalten, fo bttte id) fete> augetts 
on me instantly. blicfttd) $u mtr $u femmen. 

Should he be hungry, something ©elite es tf)n fyungern, fo nuipte man 
must be given to him to eat. tbm ctrociS $u ejfen geben. 

OF THE CONDITIONAL OR POTENTIAL TENSES. 

The conditional tenses are formed from the imper- 
fect subjunctive of the verb tt>erbett # , which is: td) 
tVUttte, I should or would become, and, as in the future 
tenses (Lesson LXXXI. and LXXXIL), the present of 
the infinitive for the conditional present, and the past 
of the infinitive for the conditional past. The imper- 
fect of the subjunctive may be used instead of the 
conditional present, and the pluperfect of the subjunc- 
tive for the conditional past. Ex. 

I should do it. 3d) rotirbe e$ tfjun (or id) tF)5te eg). 

He would have done it. (St roiirfce e$ ^etfjan fyafoen (or er 

fyatte eg getfyart). 

We would go thither. . SBtr routfcen bafytn gefjett. 

You would go thither. 3l)t ttmrfcet l)tnQcr)en. 

They would go thither. ©ic it>tirt)en fytngefyen. 

Thou wouldst thank me once. £)u tt>urfc>efi mir etnft fcanfen. 

kt one time, one day (once). (Stnft, etneS &acje$. 

Obs. E. The imperfect of the subjunctive or the 
conditional tense may be employed either before or 
after conditional propositions, as in English. Ex. 



289 

I *-3uld buy it if I had money 3d) faufte e£ (or id) nriirbe e$ fcm- 
enough. fen), roenn id) (§>ctt> genug b^ttc. 

li 1 had money enough I would ££enn id) dk'tt) genug battc/fo nmtfcf 
buy it. id) e$ faufen (or fo faufte id) es). 

Had I money enough T would pay vg>dttc id) dklt> genug, fo foc$af)(te tcb 
for it. e$ (or fc rotttfce id) c$ be$af)(cn). 

Had 1 money I would give you £atte id) (MO (or rcctm id) ©c(b 
some. fyatte), fo rofirfce id) Sfynen roctdbe* 

geben (or fo gabe id) Sfyncn roel. 
d)C$). 

If I went thither I should see £Bcnn id) f)in$inge, fo ttmrbe id) tf)tt 
him. fefyen. 

Were I to give it to him, he would ®abc id) e$ tfym, et rourfce es (or fe 
keep it. rcutfcc er es) begotten. 

If I gave it to him, he would not SBenn id) e$ ihm ga&c, fo rctftfce et e$ 
return it to me. mir nid)t wtcbcrgc&cn. 

Had you come a little sooner (or, SBatcn @te etnen 2(ugen6ltcf efjer ges 
if you had come a little sooner) f ommen (or roenn <Sie einen Tluz 
you would have seen my bro- gcnblicf cfjcr gefommen waren), fo 
ther (or, you might have seen nuitben (Sic mcincn 93rut>ct gefes 
my brother). f)en fyciben (or fo fatten ©ie met* 

nen 23rubcr gcfcr)cn). 

If he knew what you have done, £8cnn cr rciif'te, nxi£ <Sie getfjetft fjas 
he would scold you. ben, fo nnitbc cr (Sie au^febetten. 

If there was any wood, he would SGBcnn £0(3 fc>a ware, fo rourfce it 
make a fire. $euer anmad)cn. 

If I had received my money, I SSknn id) mein (Mb fcefommen Fjd'ttc, 
would have bought a pair of fo ttnirbc id) mir cin $)aat neue 
new shoes. (^cfyufje gefauft fyaben. 

O&s. jP. The imperfect subjunctive of the verbs 
fomtett*, tt>often*, mogen*, imrfen*, is often employed to 
express various feelings, as : 

1st, $omtert, fear or desire. Ex. 

He might fall. (St fonnte fatten. 

I might (could) do it. 3d) fonnte e$ tfyun. 

2d, 2Boffett, solicitation. Ex. 

Would you have the goodness 1 2Bottten ©te tie ®(ite fyafcen ? 
Would you be so good 1 £&otftcn <Ste fo gutig fein ? 

Wouldst thou do me the favour 1 SBotlteft bu mir t>ie ©cfattigfett its 

roeifen ? 

3d, SJKogen, desire, either with or without the adverb 
gem. Ex. 

IshouldUketoUnow. j § * gg *^ 

13 



290 

4th, Surfeit, politeness, either in the present of the 
indicative or the imperfect of the subjunctive. Ex. 

May 1 ask you for the knife 1 3)orf (or burfte) id) @ie um bat 

ajftffer bitten ? 
May I beg of you to tell me ? Dcitf (or btitfte) id) Bk bitten, mir 

$u fa$en ? 

Would you learn German, if I SGSurben <Sie beutfd) (erncn, rocnn id) 

learnt it] c$ lernte ? 

I would learn it, if you learnt it. 3d) rotirbe e£ (ernen, recnn @ic e$ 

fcrntcn. 
Would you have learnt English, £&urt>en ®tc cngttfcb gctcrnt f)abcn, 

if I had learnt it 1 roenn id) e$ geicrnt ^attc ? 

I would have learnt it, if you had 3d) roiitbe c$ gcternt fyaben, roenn 

learnt it. (Sic e$ gcternt batten. 

Would you go to Germany, if 1 5&urbcn (Sic nncb £)eutfd)lanb reifen, 

went thither with you] nx'nn id) mit 3bncn tar)in retfete ? 

I would go thither, if you went 3d) nntrfce barjtn reifen, roenn <Ste 

thither with me. mit mir ba f)tn retfetcn. 

Would you have gone to Ger- SMrbcn <Ste nacb £)eutfd)lanb qc* 

many, if I had gone thither retf't fern, roenn td) mit S^nen 

with you ? tantn flcretf't marc ? 

Would you go out, if I remained 2Biirben (Sic auSgefjcn, roenn id) 

at home 1 gu £aufe bficbe ? 

I would remain at home, if you 3d) rcurbe $u £aufe btciben (or id) 

went out. btiebe $u £aufe) roenn (Sic au$s 

gitrgen* 
Would you have written a letter, SSiirbcn <Ste etnen 93ricf c\cfd)ricben 

if I had written a note ? fjaben, roenn id> ein SBillct gcfd)ries 

ben ^atte ? 

The spectacles, tic SBritTc (is in German used in 

the singular) ; 

a pair of spectacles, cine SBrttte ; 

the old man, t>et otte $ftcmn, bet ©reiS ; 

the optician, ber £)pticu$ ; 

To go (or come), to fetch. 2(bf)ofen. 

To keep one's bed (one's room). 2)a$ 25ctt (bat 3immer) fjtiten. 

The plate, ber Setter ; 

the son-in-law, ber (Scfymiegcrfobn ; 

the daughter-in-law, bic (^<$ttnegerted)ter ; 

the progress, bic $ortfd)ritte (plural) ; 

the step (the pace), ber ©dt>ritt ; 

really, nnrf(td). 

exercises. 208. 

Would you have money, if your father were here ? — I should 
have soma, if he were here. — Would you have been pleased, if I 



291 

had had some books 1 — I should have been much pleased, if you had 
had some. — Would you have praised my little brother, if he had been 
good? — If he had been good, I should certainly ((pvttv) not only 
have praised, but also loved, honoured, and rewarded him. — Should 
we be praised, if we did our exercises ] — If you did them without 
a fault, you would be praised and rewarded. — Would my brother 
not have been punished, if he had done his exercises? — He would 
not have been punished if he had done them. — Would your sister 
have been praised, if she had not been skilful 1 — She would cer- 
tainly not have been praised, if she had not been very skilful, and 
if she had not worked from morning until evening. — Would you 
give me something, if I were very good?— If you were very good, 
and if you worked well, I would give you a fine book. — Would 
you have written to your sister, if I had gone to Dresden] — 1 
would have written and sent her something handsome, if you had 
gone thither. — Would you speak, if I listened to you ] — I would 
speak, if you listened to me, and if you would answer me. — Would 
you have spoken to my mother, if you had seen her]— I would 
(have) spoken to her, and have begged of her to send you a hand- 
some gold watch (t>te Uf)t), if I had seen her. 

209. 
One of the valet de chambres (*>er $ammetfctcnct) of Louis the 
XIV. (8ut>nng t)C6 XIV.) requested that prince, as he was going to 
bed, to recommend (empfeblen*) to the first president (fcet Dbcrprafu 
tent) a law-suit (foet 5>rc$cf?) which he had against his father-in-law 
(tvricben cr mitfetnem (Set) tut cgc rooter fiihrte), and said, in urging him 
(in 3emant>en t>rtna/n*) : "Alas (2(d)) sire ((Surer 9Majcftat,), you have 
but (@tc Mtrfen nur) to say one word." " Well ((5t)," said Louis 
XIV., " it is not that which embarrasses me (l<x$ ift eS md)t, tua$ 
micb anftcbt) ; but tell me, if thou wert in thy father-in-law's place, 
and thy father-in-law in thine, wouldst thou be glad if I said that 
word?" 

If the men should come, you would be obliged to give them some- 
thing to drink. — If he could do this he would do that. — A peasant 
having seen that old men used spectacles to read, went to an opti- 
cian and asked for a pair. The peasant then took a book, and 
having opened it, said the spectacles were not good. The optician 
put another pair of the (pen t>en) Best which he could find in his 
shop upon hirs nose ; but the peasant being still unable to read, the 
merchant said to him : " My friend, perhaps you cannot read at 
all 1 ? " "If I could," said the peasant, "I should not want your 
spectacles." — I have always flattered myself, my dear brother, that 
you loved me as much as I love you ; but I now see, that I have 
been mistaken. I should like to know why you went a walking 
without me. — I have heard, my dear sister, that you are angry wkh 
me, because I went a walking without you. — I assure you that, had 
I known that you were not ill, I should have come for you ; but I 
i inquired at your physician's about your health, and he told me that 
f you had been keeping your bed the last eight days. 



292 



210. 



A French officer having arrived at the court of vienna(am 3Bte« 
net £ofe), the empress Theresa (bie .flatfertnn Serena) asked him, 
if (cb) he believed that the princess of (oon) N., whom he had seen 
the day before, was (ware) really the handsomest woman in (sen) 
the world, as was said 1 " Madam," replied the officer, "I though* 
so yesterday." — How do you like that meat] — I like it very well. 
— May I (£arf or biirfte id)) ask you for a piece of (sen) that fish 1 — 
If you will have the goodness to pass me your plate, I will give 
you some. — Would you have the goodness to pour me out some 
drink ] — With much pleasure. — Cicero seeing his son-in-law, who 
was very short (f(etn), arrive with a long sword at his side (cm fci't 
@cttc), said : " Who has fastened (oetnmfccn) my son-in-law to this 
sword 1 " (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-FIRST LESSON. — (Ru ttttir iwnufaBtt 

To propose. <S t cf) t> o x n e r) m e n *. 

I propose going on that journey. 3cb wbme mic ttot, btefe 3^eife $u 

macfyctu 

Toendeavour C© t* bcmft&en. 

1 o endeavour. £ © i * b e ft t c b c n, (trodbten). 

I endeavour to do it. 3d) bemube nud), e$ $u tfyun. 

I endeavour to succeed in it. 3d) fad)?/ C6 b a b i n $u bringen 

To aspire after something. £flacb ctwaS ttad)ten. 
He aspires after places of honour. (St trctcbtet nad) (SfyrenjMietn 
The honour, tie ©brc ; 

the riches, bet SRetcbtfjum ; 

the title, ber &ite(. 

I should not have complained of 3d) rourbe mid) ftbet bag, roag er 
what he has done, if it had gctban fjat, ntd)t beftagt baben, 
injured only me ; but in doing roenn c$ nur mtr gefebabet batte ; 
it, he has plunged many fami- obcr cr f>at oteU Samtlten baburd) 
lies into misery. tn$ (Stent) gejWrjt. 

Since you are happy, why do Da <Ste bod) gtiidftid) ftnb, roatum 
you complain? beflagen ©ie fid) b e n n ? 

O&s. J.. In German a good many words, as : bentt 
bod), tt>ot)l, &c. are used for the sake of euphony- 
Such words cannot possibly be rendered in English 
Ex. 



293 

Whaf, do you wish to say with 5Ba$ molten <Ste benn bamit fa* 

this] qcn? 

Since you have nothing to tell £)a <£te tbm bod) ntcbtS $u faa,cn 

him, why do you wish to see fyiisin, marnm roettim ©ie tfjn 

him ? b e n n feben ? 
Who has made the best use of £Bcr fjat mob I ben beften G5ebraud) 

his money ? yen fetnem ©elbe $emad)t ? 

To injure. <Scbaben. 

To plunge (to precipitate), <Stur$en. 

The use, bev ©ebraudj. 

You would oblige me much, if @te rofirben mid) febr trertunben, 
you would do me this favour. rcenn <Ste nur btefe ©efdtttgfett 

ermeifen molltcn. 
If you would render me this ££cnn Bii nur btefen ©ienft tetften 
service, you would oblige me tvolttcn, fo murben &t mid) fc^r 
much. serbtnben. 

To oblige. SScrlunben*, serpfltcbten. 

To render a service to some one. Scmonbcm etnen Dtenft letften. 
The obligation, bit* 3$erbtnbUcl)£ett» 

To tie (attach). Sttnbcn*. 

I tie the horse to the tree. 3d) btnbe ta$ $)ferb on ben SSanm. 

He is the most honest man that iDaS tft: ber ebrlicbfte 9$ann, ben 

has ever been seen. man jc (jemaUl) qefeben bat. 

I want a horse that must be tal- 3d) mu9 etn 5>ferb' baben, ia$ (wet? 

ler than this. . d)C6) groper ifi at$ btefeig. 

I am sorry that she is ill. (5*S tft (tf>ut) mtr leib, $a$ fie fran! 

ifi 
I am glad that you are come. (SS tft mir tteb, $>a$ (Ste gefommen 

ftnb. 
I am astonished that he has not 3d) munbere mid), t>a$ er fetnc 2Cufc 

done his exercises. gaben nid)t fjemacbt bat. 

He will marry her though she is (St rtnrb fie bctratben, ob ftc ajtetd) 

not rich. ntcbt rctcb tft. 

I will wait until he returns. 3d) will marten, big er gurucftommt. 

In case that should happen, let 3m Jalle e£ gefefyiebt, fo lajfen @ie 
me know it. mtcb'6 mtffen. 

OBSERVATIONS ON THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Obs. B. In German the subjunctive, being only 
used to express doubt or incertitude, is not governed 
by any particular words. It has more affinity to the 
English subjunctive than to that of any other lan- 
guage, and more than would at first be supposed. We 
sometimes, however, prefer the subjunctive where the 
English use the potential should or would, though we 
could in this case even use either the potential or the 
subjunctive. Ex. 



294 

should do it, if it were possible. 3d) to ii r b e e$ tfjun, roenn e$ mc9* 

ltd) wax e. 

Were I in your place, or if I were ££ a r c id) an Sbrcr ©telle, ebet 

in your place. roenn id) an 3brt'r ©telle ware* 

ZM he the treasures of Croesus, £cttte er bte <Scba£e be* (SrofuS, 

or if he had the treasures of ober rcenn er tie ©cba'ge be6 (Sro's 

Crcesus. fu$ t) a' 1 1 e. 

That man would be happier, if Diefer 93cann rcurbc gtucfUdjct 

he left off gambling. f ei n, nxnn er ^a? ©pielen lte£e. 

He would have been happier, if (Sr to u r t> e gtucfltcher 9 e to c f e n 

he had left off gambling. f e t n, nxnn er ba$ (Sptelen 9 e * 

l a f f e n b a 1 1 e. 
If you knew how ill I am, you ££cnn <Bte to it 9 1 e n (or to it p t c it 
would not fo astonished to find ©te), rote franf id) bin, fc to it r 5 
me in bed. I) e n (Ste ntcbt erflaunt f e in (fo 

roaren ©te ntcbt erftaunt), mid) 
im IBette $u fin ben. 
He would not Aave done it, had (Sr rv it r b e e£ ntd)t g e t f) a n fyas 
he foreseen the result. ben, r) a 1 1 c er t>en (Srfclg 

r a u 6 9 e f e f) e n. 
I should think myself ungrateful, 3d) rourbe mid) fur unbanfbar- 
did I not consider you as my I) a 1 1 e n, f a b e tcl) ©te ntd)t a(6 
benefactor. metnen 2Pebltl)ater a n, 

The French would not have gain- £>te granjofen it) 11 r e n tic (£d)lacf)t 
ed the battle, if they had not ntcbt gewonnen h a b e n (or 
had superior numbers. fatten bte ©cblacfyt ntcbt 9 e 5 

to n n e n), roenn fie md)t etne 
fo arojk llebermad)t son Ceuten 
9 e b a b t fatten. 

Obs. C. In English the potential should or would is 
used to express a wish relating to a future time, and 
the subjunctive to express a wish relating to a past 
time. In both instances the Germans use the subjunc- 
tive. Ex. 

^ ■» 

I wish you would do it. 3d) tttttnfcbte, @te t r) ci t e n e$, or 

bap (Ste e$ 1 1) a t e n. 
I wish you would go thither. 3d) ttutnfcbtc, ©ie cjinQen I) in, 

or ba9 ©te f) t ngt n gen. 
I wish you Aad done it. 3d) rciinfcbte, ©te batten e$ 9 e 5 

t b a n, or bap (Sic e$ 9 e 1 f) a n 

fatten. 
I wish you had gone thither. 3d) reitnfcbtc, ©te rod' r c n bins 

g c 9 a n 9 e n, or ba£ ©te ijins 

9 e 9 a n 9 e n to a r c n. 
1 should have wished to see him, 3d) h a 1 1 e 9 c n; it n f d) t, tl>n 3U 
had it been possible. fefyen, to a r e e$ mo'9ltd) 9 e n> e * 

[en. 



295 

i should like to read, if I had 3d) ( a f c $crn, WCXM id) twr 3ett 
only time. \) a 1 1 e. 

Ofo. D. Some expressions require sometimes the 
indicative and sometimes the subjunctive according to 
the manner in which the sentence is formed. Ex. 

f Indie, (it mag fo retdf) fern, 

However rich he may I tote er ttntt* 

be. | Subj. (it fet fo retdf), tt)te er 

t toofte. 

flndic. Sfyre ©ettxtft ntag fo 

Whatever your power J gro£ feut, al$ fte ttnlf. 

may be. ] Subj. 3fyre ®ett>cdt fet nod) 

I fo grog. 

O&s. J3. In German we never employ the indica- 
tive, 

1. In conditional propositions with or without the 
conjunction tt>emt, if. (See preceding Lesson.) Ex. 

If I could I would do it. SBenn id) fonnte, fo tfycite id) e$; or 

fonnte id), fo tfjate td) e$. 

If she were amiable he would SBenn fte (tebenSrofirbtcj roa're (or 
marry her. ware fte ItebenSrotirbtC}), fo tyeiras 

tfyete er fte. 

2. In exclamations and wishes. Ex. 

If I had friends ! £atte id) greunbe ! 

If I were rich ! £Bare id) retd) ! 

May heaven grant it ! £)er £tmmel gefce e$ ! 

God forbid ! ©ott befjttte ! 

I could not have thought it ! £atte td)'$ bod) nid)t QtOjjLauU I 

3. After the verbs er$cif)fett, to relate ; fmgen, to ask ; 
fagett, to say, and others, which relate indirectly, either 
to what we have said ourselves, or to what we have 
heard said by other persons. Ex. 

He related to me, that he had @r er$af)(te mtr, tap er ©d)tprud) 

suffered shipwreck, and had gclttten, unb fettt gan^eS 23crmb'gen 

lost all his fortune. Derleren fycitte. 

He asked me whether I was not (E*r fraqte uud), ob id) nid)t ber unb 

such a one, whether I had no bcr tvarc, Ob id) fctn dklb ^atte^ 

money, why I did not know roarum td) md)t fdjrei&en fonnte. 
how to write. 



296 

Thou art master on the cross- Du tnft ctn OTctftcr auf for 2Crm- 

bow, Tell. brufr, Sell. 

They say, thou standest up to SERan faqt, t>u ndfyncft c$ ouf mil 

any shooter ] jcfoeiii ©cf)fi$cn ? 

(Schiller's tBU&ctoi £clU 

I told him he had made a mis- 3cb fcigtc tbm, tag cr ficb ejetrn fyate 

take ; but he thought that was te ; cr mctnte aber, t>fl* rvdre rucht 

impossible, as he had looked mc\qltcb, rucit cr es fercunal buret)? 

it over three times. Qcfehen hdttc. 

A wise man said, The reason (Stn SSktfcr fogtc : £>cr SQjcnfcb babe 

why a man has but one mouth fceProegcn etnen 9D?unt> unt) $roet 

and two ears is, that he may Dbren, taunt cr lucntcjer fprectye, 

speak less and hear more. unt) mcfjt fjore. 

Obs. F. Mr., Mrs., and Miss such a one, are often 
translated by ber unb ber for the masculine, bie unb bte 
for the feminine, bct$ unb ba£ for the neuter. 

He said he would marry Miss @r fngtc, er n?crbc a bag unt) t>a£ 
such a one. grautctn bctratfyen. 

To suffer shipwreck. (£d)tffbrucl) letfcen*. 

Possible, mSglid) ; 

impossible, unmoa/id). 

. Whether. £) b. 

05s. 6?. ©6 is only used in indirect questions, or 
before sentences which express doubt or possibility. 
Ex. 

I do not know whether he is at 3$ wctp ntd)t, ob cr gu £aufe tjt. 

home. 
I did not know whether you 3d) n?u£te md)t, cb c$ Sbncn ftefc 

would be glad of it. fetn tvurfce. 

The question is whether he will (S* tft tic JrctfjC, ob cr c$ roitb tfyun 

do it. roellcn. 

O&s. H. £>b is a component of the following con- 
junctions : obgteirf), ofcfrfjon, obroofyl, ob$tt>ar, though, al- 
though. These conjunctions ought to be considered 
as two separate words, for the subject or even the 
case of the verb may be placed between them. Ex. 

I shall buy that horse, though it 3d) rccrfcc fctcfcS ?5fcrb Foufcn, cb eg 
is not an English one. glctd) fctn (Snojanfccr i|l. b 

* SBcrbe is here in the future of the subjunctive. (See the following Les- 
ion.) 
b When the subject or case of the verb is not a personal pronoun, it is not 



297 

Though he is my cousin, he £)& et cjfeid) (or fd)0n) twin SScttcc 
nevertheless does not come to iji, fb femmt cr tod) ntd)t $u nur. 
see me. 
Although he has promised it to Dt^leid) er e$ nur t?crfpred)en fyat, fo 

me, 1 do not rely upon it. $cf)te td) ted) nicht tarauf. 

Although he is poor, he does £)b cr fcbcn (or glcicb, Siuar, n>of)t) 
nevertheless a great deal of arm iff, fo tfeut er tod) met (Uute$. 
good. 

However, nevertheless, tod) ; 

the folly, tie £borf)ett, tie 9laxxUit ; 

the character, ter (Ebarafter (plur. e), tie ®es 

mutfysatt; 
bashful, timid, Mote ; 

fearful (timid), furcbtfam ; 

natural, ncturltd) ; 

polite (civil), impolite (uncivil), fycfUd) ; unfyofltd). 

exercises. 211. 

Well (9itm), does your sister make any progress 1 — She would 
make some, if she were as assiduous as you. — You flatter me. — 
Not at all ((5tan$ unt> gar ntcbt), I assure you that I should be highly 
iatisfied, if all my pupils worked like you. — Why do you not go 
^ut to-day ] — 1 would go out if it was fine weather. — Shall I have 
ihe pleasure of seeing you to-morrow 1 — If you wish it I will come. 
—Shall 1 still be here when you arrive (bet Sfyrer tfnfunft) 1 — Will 
you have occasion (tSJelecjettfyett) to go to town this evening ] — I do 
not know, but I would go now if I had an opportunity (tie ©ez 
(cgenbett). — \ou would not have so much pleasure, and you 
i would not be so happy, if you had not friends and books. — Man 
; would not experience so much misery (fo Diet (Stent) in his career 
1 (mif (finer fictufbabn), and he would not be so unhappy, were he not 
i so blind. — You would not have that insensibility (tie ©cfiibtteftgt'cti) 
i towards tbe poor, and you would not be so deaf to (tciub gegcn) their 
i supplication (tie 9*ttte), if you had been yourself in misery for some 
time. — You would not say that if you knew nie well. — Why has 
your sister not done her exercises'? — She would have done them, 
if she had not been prevented. — If you worked more, and spoke 
oftener, you would speak better. — I assure you, Sir, that I should 
learn better, if I had more time. — I do not complain of you, but of 
your sister. — You would have had no reason (Urfacfoc) to complain 
of her, had she had time to do what you gave her to do. — What 
has my brother told you 1 — He has told me that he would be the 
happiest man in the (t>on ter) world, if he knew the German lan- 
guage, the most beautiful of all languages. 

usually placed between these two words. Ex. Dfcgtetd) btefeS $ferb fern 
(Stofllcinber ift, fo tuerbe id) eS bod) faufen, although this horse is not an Ens- 
lish one, I shall nevertheless buy it. Dfrdetd) btcfem SJicmne md)t§ tvtberfa|= 
i ten ift, fo betlctflt er ftd) boc^), though nothing has happened to tins man, he is 
nevertheless complaining. 

13* 



298 

212. 

I should like to know why I cannot speak as well as you. — I 
will tell you : you would speak quite as well as I, if you were not 
so bashful. But if you had studied your lessons more carefully 
(bejfcr), you would not be afraid to speak; for, in order to speak 
well, one must learn; and it is very natural, that he who 
does not know well what he has learnt should be timid. — You 
would not be so timid as you are (a(s @te fint)), if you were sure to 
make no mistakes — There are some people who laugh when I speak. 
— Those are impolite people ; you have only to laugh also, and 
they will no longer laugh at you. If you did as I (do), you would 
speak well. — You must study a little every day, and you will soon 
be no longer afraid to speak. — I will endeavour to follow your ad- 
vice, for I have resolved (fid) t)Ctncf)men*) to rise every morning at 
six o'clock, to study till ten o'clock, and to go to bed early. — De- 
mocritus and Heraclitus (in German as in English 4beractttu$, &c), 
were two philosophers of a (t>0n) very different character : the first 
laughed at (ubet with the accus.) the follies of men, and the other 
wept at them. — They were both right, for the follies of men deserve 
(Dettuencn) (both) to be laughed and wept at. — My brother told me 
that you had spoken of me, and that you had not praised me. — We 
should have praised you, if you had paid us what you owe us.— 
You are wrong in complaining of my cousin, for he did not intend 
to hurt your feelings. — I should not have complained of him, if he 
had only hurt my feelings ; but he has plunged into misery a whole 
family. — You are wrong in associating with that man. He only 
aspires after riches. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-SECOND LESSON.— Zmi utib newnjigote 
tttiion. 

To be thoroughly acquainted with 90ltt ctnet <Scicf)e gencm fcefcmnt (or 

a thing. ocrtraut) fein*. 

To make one's self thoroughly <Std) nut ciner (Sacfye fccfannt (or 

acquainted with a thing. wtttaut) macfjen. 

I understand this business. 3d) bin nut fctefet 0acr)e Wtttaut (o* 

bcfannt). 
Acquainted, bcfannt ; 

intimate, familiar, ttcrtraur. 

1 am acquainted with that. f 3d) bin fccmut bcfannt (ttcttratlt). 

A species (a kind), cine 2Ctt, a cine ©attung. 

What kind of fruit is that ? \ ^ Q ! $ c cine * rt f^M * k * ? 

} 2£a6 fur etne grucbt tft bteS ? 

a The plural of collective nouns is generally formed by adding %xktt, 
kinds, species, to the singular. Ex. bte Dbftcuten, fruit (i. e. various sorts of 
fruit) ; t>& ©etreifceavtett, corn (L ©i various kinds of corn). 



290 



The kernel (of an apple, a pear, 
an almond), 

The stone, 

kernel-fruit, 

stone-fruit, 

V 

It is a kernel-fruit. 
To gather fruit. 

The dessert, 
To serve up the dessert, 



The fruit, 

the plum, 
the anecdote, 
the soap, 
the roast-meat, 

To dry (to wipe). 
To cease (to leave off). 
I leave off reading. 
She leaves off speaking. 



To avoid. ; 

To avoid some one. 

To avoid something. 

To escape (avoid a misfortune). 

The punishment, 
To avoid death he ran away. 

The flight, the escape, 
To do without a thing. 



bet jtetn. 

bet (Stein ; 
ta$ £ctncbft ; 
tag (gteinobft. 

(S*g ift cine £etnftud)t 

£>bft bre*en*. 

bet 9?ad)ttfd). 

ben 9?ad)ttfd) aufttagen*. 
i bag Dbft, 
( bte gtucfyt ; b 

tie- $>ffaume ; 

bte 2(necbote ; 

bte Seife ; 

bet 23taten. 

Ubtttdmtu 

2£uff)6ren. 

t Set) t)ht ouf ^u fefen. 

t <Sie fyott auf $u fptedjen. 

{ 9J2etben* (a,cmtecen, mieb)« 
I SSetmetben*. 

Semanben metben*. 

iStroag wrmctben*. 

(5'tnem Ungtucfe entgefyen* or entrin* 
nen* (entronnen, enttann). 

bte ©ttafe. 

Urn bem Sobe ^u entgefjen, nafjm et 
bte giucfyt 

bte gtucfyt. 



Can you do without bread 1 

I can do without it, 

I do without bread. 

Do you do without bread 1 

I do without it. 



( (Sine (or ehtet) ®a<fyt entbefjten 
(governs the gen. or the ace). 
' <Sid) bel)dfen # ofme etwag. c 
'jtonnen @ie fid) cfytu SStob begets 

fen? 
£6nnen <§te bag S3tob (beg SStcbeg) 

entbefjten 1 
' 3d) fann eg entbefyten. 
3d) bebelfe mid) ofync Btob. 
2Bcr)c(fcn <Ste fid) efjne S3tob ? 
3d) fcmn eg entbefjrem 



b $>te %xufyt is the fruit of trees and plants. Ex. 2)te ^elbftitdjte, the fruit 
of the fields. %xutyt is also employed figuratively: Ex. S)ie %xud)t fettter 
Slrbett, the reward of his labour. JDbft is only used in speaking of apples, 
pears, plums, and similar fruit. Hence baS .fterttobft, kernel-fruit; ba$ i&tettt* 
obft, stone-fruit. 

f c (£rtibef}ren is employed in the sense of to be without and to do without ; 
ftd> be$etfett* in the s&nse only of to do without. 



300 

There are many things which we SBtr muffett PtefeS cntfteljrem 
must do without. 

!93?cm fagt, n roetfce mcrgcn a&teU 
fen. 
9)?an fagt, tap er mermen aftretfen 
werfce. 

FUTURE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

The futures of the subjunctive differ from those of 
the indicative only in the second and third persons 
singular, which are : Werbefl and tt>erbe, instead of tturft 
and ttrirb. Ex. 

Thou wilt praise. £)u rocrbef! (often. 

He will praise. <5r werfce (often. 

Thou wilt have praised. SDu wcrfccji getoftt fyaften. 

He will have praised. <£r nx'tfce gelcftt fyaften. 

The future of the subjunctive implies a coming but 
uncertain event. Ex. 

(9}Zan fagt, er roerbe bait) anfom* 
men. 
9#an fagt, tap er fto(b onfemmen 
rpetfce 

{9)?an fjofft, er roerbe nod) $u red)tet 
3ett angefommen fetn. 
9flan fyofft, baji er nocb $u reciter Sett 
angefommen fein roerfce. 

They will warm the soup. 932cm nritb tie (Suppe rocttmen. 

Dinner, or supper, is on the table f 93fan fyat aufgetragen. 
(Literally : one has served up). 

To serve, to attend. 2Cufn?attcn. 

Can I help you to some of it? f jlcmn td) Sftnen bomtt mifroarten ? 
Shall I help vou to some soup 1 "> j .ftann id) 3f)nen mit ©uppe aufs 
Shall I help } >u to some soup 1 3 roartcn ? 
I will trouble you for a little. f 3* Mte nur ein roentg fcapon 

To ask for (politely). ©td) cmSftttten*. 

May I crave (beg) the favour of f ^arf td) nut Sftrcn Seamen au& 
your nara&l kitten? 



301 

The woma^ tie Jrau ; 

the wife, fccts SBciM 

EXERCISES. 213. 

1 come to wish yoa a good morning-. — You are very kind. — 
Would you do me a favour ] — Tell me what you want, for 1 would 
do anything to oblige you. — I want five hundred crowns, and I beg 
of you to lend them to me. I will return them to you as soon as 
I have received my money. You would oblige me much, if you 
would render me this service. — I would do it with all my heart, if 
I could ; but having lost all my money, it is impossible for me to 
render you this service. — Will you ask your brother whether he is 
satisfied with the money which I have sent him ] — As to my bro- 
ther, though it be little, he is satisfied with it: but I am not so; 
for having suffered shipwreck, I am in want of the money which 
you owe me. — Henry IV., meeting (cintrcffen*) one day in his 
palace (£vr $)a(a[f) a man whom he did not know (t>cr thm unbcfnmit 
War), asked him to whom he belonged ($uck boron). " I belong tc 
myself," replied this man. J* My friend," said the king, "you 
have a stupid master." 

214. 

Have they served up the scup ? — They have served it up some 
minutes ago. — Then it must be cold, and I only like soup hot (wax? 
\\k (Smfcpc). — They will warm it for you. — You will oblige me. — 
Shall I help you to some of this roast-meat ] — I will trouble you 
for a little.— Will you eat some of this mutton ? — I thank you, I 
like fowl better. — May I offer you some wine 1 — I will trouble you 
for a little. — Have they already served up the dessert] — They have 
- served it up. — Do you like fruit] — I like fruit, but I have no more 
appetite. — Will you eat a little cheese ? — I will eat a little. — Shall 
I help you to English or Dutch (heUd'ntufcb) cheese] — I will eat a 
little Dutch cheese. — What kind of fruit is that ] — It is stone-fruit. 
— What is it called ] — It is called thus. — Will you wash your 
hands] — I should like to wash them, but I have no towel to wipe 
them with. — I will let you have (^cbcn lojfcn) a towel, some soap, 

d 5)te $rcm is used in titles, in which case it is not expressed in English. 
Ex. £>te ?^rau ©tafttm, the countess. It stands for, 1. the mistress of the 
house. Ex. Qa§ ift bie man »om -Saufe, that is the mistress of the house ; 

2. the consort. Ex. Petite Arau ift febr fcfcon, his lady is very handsome ; 

3. the sex, but then it is generally combined with the word $erfon or §im* 
mer. Ex. .ttennen ete btefe Svrauensfy-erfim (btefeS ^rauen^immer)? do you 
know that lady ? The word SQtib m^ans : 1. in general a woman of the 
lower classes. It is sometimes combined with the word $erfon, and in speak- 
ing contemptuously with the word §8Ut>. Ex. &ie SBetber »om flememett 
SBolfe, the women of the lower classes ; bte SBetfcSperfott, bag 31>etfr§lu(i>, the 
female ; 2. a consort among the lower classes. Ex. @r hat em $Beit ftttiom* 
men, he has taken a wife (has married) ; 3. the sex in general. Ex. (5ttt 
ebleS SBeifc, a woman of noble sentiments ; bte dlatuv U$ 2£etbe$, woman'* 
nature. 



302 

and some water. — I shall be much (fefjr) obliged to you. — May 1 
ask you for a little water 1 — Here is some (£)a fyafccn @tc). — Can 
you do without soap ? — As for soap, I can do without it ; but I 
must have a towel to dry my hands with. — Do you often do with- 
out soap ? — There are many things which we must do without. — 
Why has that man run away ] — Because he had no other means of 
escaping the punishment which he had deserved. — Why did your 
brothers not get a better horse ? — If they had got rid of their old 
horse, they would have got another better one. — Has your father 
arrived already] — Not yet, but we hope that he will arrive this 
very day (nod) fycutc). — Has your friend set out in time 1 — I do not 
know, but I hope that he will have set out in time. 

215. 

Will you relate something to me 1 — What do you wish me to re- 
late to you 1 — A little anecdote, if you like. — A little boy asked 
(ferccrn) one day at table (bet &ifcl)e) for some meat; his father said 
that it was not polite to ask for any, and that he should wait until 
some was given to him. The poor boy seeing every one eat, and 
that nothing was given to him, he said to his father : " My dear 
father, give me a little salt, if you please." "What will you do 
with it ? " asked the father. " I wish to eat it with the meat (3cr) 
will c£ $u tern $tdfcfa effen) which you will give me," replied (scrfes 
gen) the child. Every body admired (beruunbern) the little boy's wit ; 
and his father, perceiving that he had nothing, gave him meat with- 
out his asking for it. — Who was that little boy, that asked for meat 
at table 1 — He was the son of one of my friends. — Why did he ask 
for some meat] — He asked for some because he had a good appe- 
tite. — Why did his father not give him some immediately ? — Be- 
cause he had forgotten it. — Was the little boy wrong in asking for 
some 1 — He was wrong, for he ought to have waited. — W T hy did 
he ask his father for some salt ] — He asked for some salt, that (ecu 
nut) his father might perceive that he had no meat, and that he 
might give him some. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-THIRD LESSON. -?Dm ntib Herniate 
jUction. 

To execute a commission. (Stnen 2Cuftrag au6rtct)tm, tJOu^tefyen*, 

be forge n. 
I have executed your commission. 3cf) babe S^ren 2Cuftrag gut au^ges 

rtd)tct (Mitogen, beforg't). 
1 2 

I have received with the greatest 3d) . r)abc 35r unterm fecfyften an 
pleasure the letter which you 3 4 

addressed to me, dated the 6th mtcf) gertcrjteteS <Sd)retben nut 
instant. fcem gropten SSergnugen etrjaU 

ten. 



303 

DCr* When the adjective precedes the noun (Les* 
s* 1 XVIII.) all words relating to it are placed before 
the adjective, or the participle used adjectiveiy, in the 
following order : 1st, The article or pronoun ; 2d, all 
words relating to the adjective or the participle adjec- 
tive ; 3d, the adjective or participle adjective ; and 
finally, 4th, the noun. Ex. 

1 2 3 

A man polite towards everybody, ©in gegen Sefcetmann fyofttcfyet 
"'- , ' i 4 

Sttcnfcl). 
12 3 4 

A. father who loves his children. (Sin fctne &infc)et ttefcenbet %$ativ. 
You have to study the twentieth ©te fyafcen t>ie gwan^tQfte Section 
Lesson, and to translate the 12 3 

exercises relating to it. $u jtufctren, unb tie t>o$u gefyfc 

4 
rigcn 2Cuf$aben $u u6erfegen. a 

Have you executed my eommis- .gjcifccn <Ste meincn 2Cuftraa au^es 

sion ? rid)tct ? 

1 have executed it. 3d) f)ctOe iftn cw$gerid)tet. 

To do one's duty. ^etne ©dmtfctgfctt tf)un*» 

To fulfil one's duty. ©cine $)flicf)t erfulien. 

To do one's task. ©cine 2Cr6e!t mocfecn. 

That man always does his duty. £)iefer 9}*ann tt)ut immer fetne <£tf)\\U 

trigfett. 
That man always fulfils his duty, ©iefcr $)?ann etfuftt immer fetne 

g)fttcbt. b 
Have you done your task 1 £aben <§u Sfore 2Crbctt gemacfyt ? 

He depends upon it. (St Dcrfffjjt fid) barauf. 

I rely upon you. 3d) wrlaffe mid) auf (Sie. 

You may rely, upon him. ©ie fonnen fid) auf ifyn ttertaffen. 

To suffice, be sufficient. ©cnftgcn, F)inreid)en, cjenug fctn*. 

To be contented with something. (Sid) mit etiuaS bfgntfgen* 

t *u * u j *c • * r i S 3ft Sbncn triefc* SBrcb qemtq ? 

Is that bread sufficient foryou ? j ^ J*^ ^ ,g ^^ ? 

It is sufficient for me. @S geniigt mic. 

a This kind of construction, wherein the noun stands separated more or 
less from its article, is more frequently made use of in elevated style than in 
conversation. 

b ^Sfltcfyt is that which our own conscience obliges ustoj^ (gdJuTbigfett, the 
orders given us by our superiors, an 4 is derived fron? bie ©rfyulb, the obliga- 
tion, debt. 



304 

Will that money be sufficient for &Btrb btefeS ®etb btcfcm 9}Janne ges 

that man ? ntigen ? 

It will be sufficient for him. (?$ rotrb if)m gcnfigon 
Little wealth suffices for the wise. 2Bentg genftgt bcni SBctfem 
Was this man contented with £at fid) btcfer gftann nut btefet ©urn* 

that sum 1 me begnfigt ? 

{2£at btefc ©umme fur btcfcn Warm 
btnreicbenb ? 
2Bar btefe ©umme btcfcm SOlanne ges 
ting? 
It has been sufficient for him. (Sr r;at fid) banut begnfigt 
He would be contented if you (St nmrbc fid) begnugen, roenn ©ie 
would only add a few crowns. nut nod) etntge &t)alcr btn$ufugen 

rooflten. 

To add. £tn$ufugcn. 

To build. fflaucn. 

To embark, to go on board. €>td) etnfcbtffcn. 
The sail, ta? @ege(. 

To set sail. llnter @?gt( gebcn*. 

To set sail for. ©egeta nacb. 

To sail for America. SRach tfmertfa fegctn. 

With full sails. SHit ocUcn ©egeitt. 

To sail with full sails. Stttt nodcn (Segeln fabren*. 

He embarked on the sixteenth of (Sr bat fid) am fcdfaebntcn (cbcr ben 
last month. fectyebnten) legtcn ODicnats etnge^ 

febtfft. 
He sailed on the third instant. (St tft ben brtttcn (cbcr otn brittcn) 

btefe* untcr (Segel gcgangen. 

That is to say (i. e.). £)aS F>cigt (nam(tcb). 

Et eaetera (etc.), and so on, and Unb fo wetter (abbreviated u. f. «?♦)♦ 
so forth. 

Otherwise, differently. 2Cnber$. 

In another manner. 2(uf cine anberc ?ftt. 

If I knew that, I would behave SBcnn tcb bae routfe, tDUtbe td) mtcl) 

differently. cinbcrS benebmen. 

If I had known that, I would 3£enn tcb bo$ gcrouk't batte, fo wurbe 
have behaved differently. tcb mtcb anbet* benommen rjaben. 

To behave. ©tcb benebmen*. 

Else (otherwise). (Sonft 

If not. 2£o ntcbt 

Mend, else (if not) you will be SBcffcrn @tc ficb, fonft (wo ntd)t) 

punished. ttnrb man <Ste ftrafen. 

I cannot do it otherwise 3d) fann e$ nid)t anberS macben. 



805 



OF THE IMPERATIVE. 



The second person singular of the imperative, being 
formed from the second person singular of the indica- 
tive, is only irregular when the latter is so. Ex. ©e* 
ben*, to give ; second person of the indicative, bit gtbjl:, 
thou givest; imperative, gt6, give thou. 5>effen% to 
help ; second person of the indicative, bu tytlffi, thou 
helpest ; imperative, Jt>itf> help thou. 

From this rule must be excepted : 1st. The follow- 
ing verbs : fyabm*, to have ; second person, bu bajl, 
thou hast ; imperative, \)abe, have thou ; feut*, to be ; 
second person, bu biff, thou art ; imperative, (et, be 
thou ; tt>erben*, to become ; bu ttnrft, thou becomest ; 
imperative, werbe, become thou ; nnflen*, to know ; 
second person, bit tt>et$t, thou knowest ; imperative, rtnfte, 
know thou ; tt>oCen # , to will ; bu ttulljl, thou wilt ; im- 
perative, tootle* 2d. Verbs which, in the second person 
of the indicative present, change the letter a into a* 
In the imperative they resume the radical vowel. Ex. 
?aufen, to run ; in laufji, thou runnest ; imperative, Ian* 
fe, run thou. 

All the other persons of the imperative are derived 
from the present of the subjunctive, which is always 
regular, as well as the plural of the present of the in- 
dicative. 

Have patience ! £nkn (Ste ($5ebu(t> ! 

Be attentive ! ©den 0u cmfmerffcmi ! 

Go thither ! ©c»)cn @te bin ! 

Give it to me ! ©cbcn (Sic c£ mtr ! 

Give it to him ! ©cbcn @te c| tt)tn ! 

Patience, impatience, bte (S5ct>utt> ; bte Ungcbulb* 

Lend it to me ! getften <Stc c$ mtr ! 

To borrow. 23er$eu ((etben*). 

I will borrow some money of 3d) will mtr sen 3bncn (Mb U'tben 

you. (bercjen). 

I will borrow this money of you. 3cb mill btefeS (Mb t»cn Sfynen bets 

gen. 
Borrow it of (or from) him. Screen @?ie eS »en tfjm. 

I do borrow it from him. 3d) bcrge C6 t>on i()uu 

Obs. A. These examples of the imperative are for 
the third person plural, which is most commonly used 



306 

in polite conversation ; but we sometimes also employ 
the second person plural, particularly in exhortations, 
as: 

Be (ye) good. ©ctb #iit. c 

Know (ye) it. SQSiffcf e£. d 

Obey your masters, and never ®ebetcf)et e (Suren £cf)retn, unb ma* 

give them any trouble. cbet i()nen hie $ett)rup. 

Pay what you owe, comfort the SBc^abtet, roa£ 3bt fcfyut&ta, felt) ; 
afflicted, and do good to those troftct t>tc Unglucfltdben, unt) tf)ut 
that have offended you. fcenjemgen ©utc$, fcne (Sud) Ocleis 

bt^t rjaben. 
Love God, thy neighbour as thy- fctebet ®ett unt) ©utett 92ad)jtcn tt>tc 
self (in German yourself). (Sucf) fclbflt. 

To obey. ($5er)0t:d)cn. 

To comfort. SrojTetu 

To offend. JMetfctgem 

The neighbour, tcr "S^adbfte ; 

sadness, fcte Sraurtgfctt ; 

the creditor, t>er ©taubtger ; 

the watch, t>te Uf)t ; 

the snuff-box, fc>te £)ofe. 

Ofrs. 2?. We often employ compound imperatives, 
in order to give to understand that we either com- 
mand or invite. They are formed for the third person 
sing, and plur. with mogen*, may ; fotfen*, shall ; and 
for the first person plural with faflfen*, to let, which 
likewise forms the compound imperative in English ; 
and with tt>ot(en*, will. Ex. (gr mag toften, let him (he 
may) praise ; er foil loften, let him (he shall) praise ; fie 
mogen loften, let them (they may) praise ; fTe follen toften, 
let them (they shall) praise ; laflfet Mt£ (often, let us 
praise ; ttnr tt>olten (often, let us (we will) praise, &c. 

Let us always love and practise Saflfet un$ tmmcr tie Sugenb ttefcen 
virtue, and we shall be happy unb ctusiiOcn, fo roertxm rctt in 
both in this life, and in the fctefem unfc> jenem Ccben §lucf(idj 
next. fctn. 

Let us see which of us can shoot 2Bit molten ferjen, wet t?on un$ am 
best. fceftcn fct)icj}cn fann. 

c From Sftjt! feib, second person plural of the indicative. 
d From %fyt ttnffet, &c. &c. 
« From 2\)t gef)or$et, &c. &c. 



307 



EXERCISES. 216. 

Have you executed my commission? — I have executed it. — Has 
your brother executed the commission which I gave him ? — He has 
executed it. — Would you execute a commission for me 1 — I am un- 
der so many obligations to you, that I will always execute your 
commissions when it shall please you to give me any. — Ask the 
horse-dealer (fcer ^pfcrDcfydnfcU'r) whether he can let me have the 
horse at (fur) the price which I have offered him. — I am sure that 
he would be satisfied, if you would add a few florins more. — I will 
not add anything. If he can let me have it at (fur) that price, let 
him do so; if not, let him keep it (fo mag cr C6 bebalten). — Good 
morning (in the accus.), my children! Have you done your task] 
— You well know that we always do it; for we must (mftjften) be 
ill not to do it. — What do you give us to do to-day 1 — I give you 
the ninety-third lesson to study, and the exercises belonging to it to 
do, — that is to say, the 216th and 217th. Endeavour to commit 
(madbcn) no errors (t>er gefylcr). — Is this bread sufficient for you 1 — 
It would be sufficient for me, if I was not very hungry. — When did 
your brother embark for America 1 — He sailed on the thirtieth of 
last month (l^tcn SftenatS). — Do you promise me to speak to your 
brother ? — I do promise you, you may depend upon it. — I rely upon 
you. — Will you work harder for next lesson than you have done for 
this I — I will "work harder. — May I rely upon it ] — You may (toru 
ncn t'5). 

217. 

Have patience, my dear friend, and be not sad ; for sadness alters 
( Anker n) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse (drqer). — Be not 
afraid of your creditors ; be sure that they will do you no harm. — 
You must have patience, though you have no mind for it (t>a$u) ; 
for I also must wait till I (man) am paid what is due to me. — As 
soon as I have money, I will pay all that you have advanced (au& 
(ecjen) for me. Do not believe that I have forgotten it, for I think 
of (ienfep an* with accus.) it every day. I am your debtor (t>et 
@d)u(incv), and I shall never deny (leucuten) it. — Do not believe that 
I have had your gold watch, or that Miss Wilhelmine has had your 
silver snuff-box, for I saw both in the ha; ds of your sister when 
we were playing at forfeits (pfant^r fptdcn). — What a beautiful 
inkstand you have there ! pray, lend it to me. — What do you wish to 
do with it ] — I wish to show it to my sister. — Take it, but take 
:;are of it, and do not break it. — Do not fear. — What do you want 
of (yen) my brother 1 — I want to borrow some money of him. — 
Borrow some of somebody else. — If he will not lend me any, I will 
borrow some of somebody else. — You will do well. — Do not wish 
(for) what you cannot have, but be contented with what Providence 
(bte £>erfchuna,) has given you, and consider (Ivbenren*) that there 
are many men who have not what you have. — Life (£»a£ gebett) 
being short, let us endeavour to make it (e$ uns) as agreeable (anges 
nefym) as possible. But let us also consider that the abuse (t>et 



306 



sfltffftraud), of pleasure (in the plur. in German, SSergntigungcn) 
makes it bitter (bitter). — Have you done your exercises ] — 1 could 
not do them, because my brother was not at home. — You must not 
get your exercises done by (son) your brother, but you must do them 
yourself. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY.FOURTH LESSON.— bier amir tunnjisete 
Ceciion. 



To be a judge of something. 
Are you a judge of cloth 1 
I am a judge of it. 
I am not a judge of it. 
I am a good judge of it. 
I am not a good judge of it. 



f ©id) ouf crwag ocrfterjcn*. 

f &n'rjW)cn (Sic fid) auf 2ud) ? 

j 3d) wrjfrefie mid) tarauf. 

t 3d) write be mtcb nicbt fcarauf. 

t 3d) Dccjiefte mtcb febr gut tarauf, 

t 3d) ocrftebe mid) ntd)t fefyr gut 
fcarauf, _ 



To draw. 

To chalk. 
The drawing, 
the drawer, 
To draw from nature, from life. 

To draw a landscape from nature. 

To manage or to go about a thing. 
How do you manage to make a 

fire without tongs 1 
I go about it so. 

You go about it in a wrong way. 
I go about it in a right way. 
How does your brother manage 

to do that] 
Skilfully, dexterously, cleverly. 

Awkwardly, unhandily. 

He should have managed the 

thing better than he has done. 
You should have managed the 

thing differently. 
They ought to have managed it 

as I have done. 
We ought to have managed it 

differently from what they did. 



3 e t d) n c tn 

9?acfyctd)ncn (fa(firen)* 

tie Beicbnung ; 

ter Setcbner** 

9Jacb fcet 9?atur, nad) t>cm 2ekn 

^etcbncn. 
(Sine £anfc>fd)aft nad) fc>er 9?atur $etd)s 

nen« 
(£g anfangen*. 
2Bte fangen.Sieeg an, cfjne 3ange 

Jfcuer an^umacben ? 
3d) fange e$ fo (or auf fctcfe SQSetfe) 

an. 
@te fangen eg md)t gut an. 
3cb fange cs gut an. 
SGSte fangt Sftr *Brut>er eg an, urn 

fctefeg $u thun ? 
©cfcbtcft (auf cine gefcfytcfte cfcer fcU 

ne 2Crt). 
llngcfducft. 
(St hattc e^ beffct anfangen fotten. 

(Sic batten eg anfcerg anfangen 

m (iff en. 
(Sic batten eg macben follen, rote id). 

• 
2£tr fatten eg inters madjen fotlen, 

alg fie. 



309 



To forbid. 



I forbid you to do that. 



SSctbteten*. Part, past, t?et* 
boten. Imperf. twtbct. 

3d) wtbtete S^ncn, btcfcS $u tfyutu 



To lower. 


9?tebct(affcn*, fjmtntcrfafien*. 


To cast down one's eyes. 


£)te 2(ugen mebcrfdtfagcn*. 


The curtain rises, falls. 


£>er *8erf)ang gefyt auf, fallt. 


The stocks have fallen. 


t £>er SBecfofdcouttf ift gotten (ftefct 




ntebrtger). 


The day falls. 


f £>a Sag netgt fid). 


It grows towards night, or night 


) 


comes on. 


£<£$ Wttb Sftad&t. 


It grows dark. 


s 


It grows late. 


@$ roirb fpd't. 


To stoop. 


©td) biicfen. 


To feel. 


#aF)leru 


To smell. 


3ii e ^ en* (aerocftcn*, rod)). 



He smells of garlic. 

To feel some one's pulse. 

To consent to a thing. 
I consent to it. 



<Sr rtecfct ttad) jtnob(aud). 

Semanbcm ben $>ul$ fufjten. 
C 3n etroaS nritUgen (or etrmritttgen). 
£ ©cine (Stnrotlligung ju etroas geben*. 
C 3d) rottltge batetn. 
c 3d) gebe metne (Stnwtlltgung ba$u. 



CSSerbergen* (setbotgen, t>erbarg). 
1 85crjtccfen. 
3n 3Bar)rt)ctt. 

3n t>er Sfjat (ttritf(td), roaf)rf)afttg). 
bieSbat; 
roafyc (red)t) ; 
n>af)tf)aft ; 

(St ift etn roafytrjaftet 2ftann. 
This is the right place for this £)as ift -t)cr roabrc (recite) sptag ftfr 
picture. btefe£ ©emalbe. 

As I live ! f @d roaljr id) lebe ! 

To think much of some one. 2Cuf Semanben met fjatten*. 

To esteem some one. Sewanben fdbagen. 

I do not think much of that man. 3d) fjattc nid)t oicl auf btefen SWann. 

I think much of him (I esteem 3d) fyalte Did auf tfjn (id) fd)aj$e tfyn 



To hide, to conceal. 

Indeed. 
In fact. 
The fact, 
true, 
genuine, 
He is a true man. 



him much). 

To permit, to allow. 

The permission, 
I permit you to go thither. 



S" r ( a u o e tt. 

btc (S'datibnip. 

3d) edaube Sfatcn F)in$uger;en (or 
bafjin $u gefjen). 



(To command, to order). 93efef)(en* (befoftfen, befafjl). 



310 

Obs. When the third person plural is employed in 
the imperative instead of the second, the personal pro- 
noun always follows the verb, but never when the 
second person is employed. Ex. 

Order it to be done. SBcfeMen ©te, bag man e$ tr)uc. 

Be virtuous. ^ett> tugenbfyaft. 

"Will you permit me to go to the Snellen ©ie nrit ertauben, auf ten 

market 1 Wavh $u qefyen ? 

To hasten, to make haste. (Sftcn, fid) fputen. 

Make haste, and return soon. (SUcn <Ste unt) fommen <Ste t>atb 

rmebet* 

t had done reading when your 3d) fjattc aufcjefiort gu lefen, at$ 3fj* 
brother entered. S5rubcr fyeretntrat. 

tfou had lost your purse when I @te batten 3bte SBorfe Dcrlctcn, al$ 
found mine. tcb btc metntqc fanb. 

To step in, to enter. ^crctntreten (ejetrcten, ttat). 

To he ashamed. (Sid) f d) a m e n. 

To be ashamed of some one or (Sid) SwtanbeS ober cincr €>acl)e 

something. fd&amcn*. 

I am ashamed of my impatience. 3d) fcba'mc mid) metnet Ungcbutb* 

To copy, to transcribe. 2fbfdbretbcn*. 

To decline. ©ecltmren. 

The substantive. £)a$ £aupm)ort. 

To transcribe fairly. f *«"!!£ a *®$j*«i 

J c 3n$ tone fcfyretben*. 

The adjective, the pronoun, the tag SBciroort ; bag gattwett ; taf 

verb, the preposition, Settrcett ; t>a$ &$cm>orr. 

The dictionary, the grammar, t>a$ ££b'tterbud) ; bie ©pracljlefjre 

(tic ©rammatif). 

Do good to the poor, have com- Sfjut ben 2Ctmen (5$ute£, nnb fjabt 
passion on the unfortunate, 3Ditt(etben mit ben Uno/LMlitf)m, 
and God will take care of the fo nnrb ber tiebe (55ott fur t>a$ 
rest. llebrtge forcjen. 

To do good to some one. Semanbem ©ute$ tfyun*. 

To have compassion on some 93itt(etben nut Scmanbcm fyaben*. 
one. 

Compassion, pity, la$ SfNtrtetben ; 

the rest, t)a$ Itebriqe. 

He has no bowels. f @r f)at £etn.93tftletben. 

For pity's sake. f 2Cu6 9#itletben. 

exercises. 218. 

What must we do in order to be happy 1 — Always love mid 
practise virtue (2tebet unb iibet bie — trnrner aus), and (fo) you w A be 
Happy both in this and the next life. Since we wish to be \ *ppy» 



311 

let us do good to the poor, and let us have compassion on the un- 
fortunate ; let us obey our masters, and never give them any trouble ; 
let us comfort the unfortunate, love our neighbour as ourselves, and 
not hate those that have offended us ; in short (6111*3), let us always 
fulfil our duty, and God will take care of the rest. My son, in or- 
der to be loved, you must (mug man) be laborious and good. Thou 
art accused (Oefdnitbigen) of having been idle and negligent in thy 
affairs. Thou knowest, however (jebod)), that thy brother has been 
punished for (tuctt) having been naughty. Being lately in town, I 
received a letter from thy tutor, in which he strongly complained of 
thee. Do not weep ; now go into thy room, learn thy lesson, and be 
(a) good (boy), otherwise thou wilt get (in the present tense) nothing 
for dinner. — I shall be so good, my dear father, that you will certain- 
ly ($cn>t£*) be contented with me. — Has the little boy kept his word ? 
— Not quite, for after having said that, he went into his room, tool 
his books, sat down at the table (fid) an ben Sifd) fc|cn), and fell 
asleep (einfcblafen*). He is a very good boy when he sleeps, said 
his father, seeing him some time after (batauf). 

219. 

Are you a judge of cloth 1 — I am a judge of it.-*- Will you buy 
some yards (for) me 1 — Give me the money, and (fc) I shall buy 
some (for) you. — You will oblige me. — Is that man a judge of 
cloth 1 — He is not a good judge of it. — What are you doing there? 
— I am reading the book (in bem 33ucbe) which you lent me. — You 
are wrong in always reading it (unmet bavin $11 (efen). — What do you 
wish me to do 1 — Draw this landscape ; and when you have drawn 
it, you shall decline some substantives w T ith adjectives and pro- 
nouns. How do you manage to do that ] — I manage it so. — Show 
me how you manage it. — What must I do for my lessons of to- 
morrow (tic mcrcjenbe (Stunbe) 1 — Transcribe your exercises fairly, 
do three others, and study the next lesson. — How do you manage 
to get goods without money ? — I buy on credit. — How does your 
sister manage to learn German without a dictionary ?— She manages 
it thus. — She manages it very dexterously. — But how does your 
brother manage it 1 — He manages it very awkwardly : he reads, 
and looks for (cwffudben) the words in the dictionary. — He may 
learn in this manner (auf btefe gBctfc) twenty years without know- 
ing how to make a single sentence (bet ©ag). 

220. 

Why does your sister cast down her eyes 1 — She casts, them 
down because she is ashamed of not having done her task. — Let 
us breakfast in the garden to-day : the weather is so fine, that we 
ought to take advantage of it (e£ ftenufeen). — How do you like that 
coffee ? — I like it very much (rcrtreff(tcb). — Why do you stoop 1 — I 
stoop to pick up the handkerchief which I have dropped. — Why do 
your sisters hide themselves 1 — They would not hide themselves, 
if they did not fear to be seen. — Whom are they afraid of] — They 



312 

are afraid of their governess (tie ($r$tc fieri tin), who scolded them 
yesterday because they had not done their tasks. — An emperor, 
who was irritated at (aufgebracbt qe^cn) an astrologer (fcer Stetntcus 
tet), asked him : " Wretch, what death (nxlcfyen &et>c$) dost thou 
believe thou wilt die?" — "I shall die of a fever," (Lesson 
LXXXIIL), replied the astrologer. " Thou liest," (page 210) said 
the emperor ; " thou wilt die this instant (in fciefem 2(ugenbftcf) a vio- 
lent (qcn)Q(tfam) death." As he was going to be seized (crcjrctfen 
tttoUen*), he said to the emperor, "Sir (®ncitttgfter &etr), order some 
one to feel my pulse, and it will be found that I have a fever." 
This sally (£)tcfet cjute (Stnfall) saved his life. — Do not judge (rid)' 
ten), you who do not wish to be judged ! — Why do you perceive 
the mote (t^as (Sttob) in your brother's eye, you who do not perceive 
the beam (bet SBalEen) which is in your own eye ] — Would you 
copy your exercises if I copied mine] — I would copy them if you 
copied yours. — Would your sister have transcribed her letter if I 
had transcribed mine] — She would have transcribed it. — Would 
she have set out if I had set out ] — I cannot tell you what she 
would have done if you had set out. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-FIFTH LESSON.— Mxii itttir ww^igst* 
Cation. 

To grow (to wax). £Bad)fen* (takes fein* for its 

auxiliary. Part, past, gewac^s 
fen. Imperf. roucl)S). 

To grow rapidly (fast). <£d)netl roacfyfen*. 

That child has grown very fast £)iefe$ £tnb tft in fur$et 3eit fef)t 

in a short time. gett)ad)fen (or rjerangeroacfyfen). 

To grow up (to grow tall). #etantt?ad)fen*. 

The flower, tie 93(ume ; 

the shelter, ber @d)U| (bte ©tcfyetfjett) ; 

the cottage, the hut, tie <Sttof)f)Utte. 

To shelter one's self from some- <Stcf) t)0t etttJdS (dat.) fcf)ft§ett. 

thing. 
To take shelter from something. Sid) t>0t etroaS (dat.) in @id)etl)ett 

fe|en. 
Let us shelter ourselves from the £Btt roollen unS t)0t tern SKegen (bem 

rain (the storm). £Binbe) fcl)u|$en (in (Stcfyerfyett 

fe|en). 
Let us enter this cottage in order Caffen <Ste wt$ in biefe ©ttofjfjfttte 

to be sheltered from the storm ^efyen, urn t)0r tern @tutmtt>ettet 

(tempest). in ©icfyetfyeit $u fetn. 

For fear of. 2Cu$ $urd)t — $tu 

To catch a cold. ©tcf) erf &lt£it» 



313 



will not go out for fear of 
catching- a cold. 



He does not wish to go to town 
for fear of meeting- with one 
of his creditors. 

Every where, throughout. 

All over (throughout) the town. 

Under the shade. 

Let us sit down under the shade 
of that tree. 



To pretend* 



That man pretends to sleep. 



3d) mill ntcbt autyttyn, a\xi $urdjt 
mid) m erfa'tten (otcr vodi id) 
mid) set (S-tfriltung fiircbte, otet 
au$ $utd)t, ten (Scbnupfcn $u ba 
frmimen). 

(St mill ntcbt nad) tet (Statt cjcben, 
au* gurcbt cinen fcinct ®loulugcc 
an^utreffcn. 

UcbexaU. 

+ 3n t)cr gan^cn ©tatt. 

t 3n ten (tem) ©dbattetu 

f €>efen mir un$ in ten <Sd)attcn 
tiefe* 2Baumc6 (otet untet ttefen 
23aum in ten (Sdjatten). 

f Sbun (ft cf> pcU en), aH cb 
or a 1 £ n> e n n (followed by 
the imperfect of the subjunc- 
tive). 



This young lady pretends 
know German. 



£)tcfet Stfann jtettt fid), al$ ob er 
febttefe. 
to JDicfcS ^rautcin tr)ut, at$ tterfttmte 
fie teutfd), or a($ rcenn (cb) fie 
teutfd) ttcrftimte. 

They pretend to come near us. (Sie (fallen fid), at$ 06 (or roenn) fte 

fid) un£ narjetn roollten. 

Then, thus, so, consequently. 21 i f 0. 

Obs. A. This word must not be mistaken for the 
English word also, which is translated into German 
by and). 



In a short time. 
Lately. 
To make a present of something 

to some one. 
Mr. Fischer wrote to me lately, 
* that his sisters would be here 
in a short time, and engaged 
me to tell you so ; you will 
consequently he able to see 
them, and to give them the 
books which you have bought. 
They hope that you will make 
them a present of them. Their 
brother has assured me, that 
they esteem you without know- 
ing you personally. 
14 



3n jturgeni. 

sfcttircf). 

Semcmtem em ®cfd)en£ mtt etwa$ 
macben. 

£crr gtfdbet febtieb nut neultd), tag 
feme $rau(em ©cbroeftetn in 
$ur$cm f)tcrt)cr fommen routtcn, 
unt bat mid)/ cS Sbnen $u fagen. 
<Sie rocttcn fie a I f feben, unt 
tbnen tic S3ucbet geben fonnen, 
mckbe <Ste gefauft baben. ©?e 
fjeffen, tag (Sic tbnen em ®efd)en£ 
tamit macben roetten. 3fa SStus 
tet bat mid) ttctficbett, ta& fie @te 
boebfebagen, obne @ic perfonlid> *u 
fennen. 



314 



Would to God. 

Would to God it were so. 
Would to God he had done it. 



£$otfte .®ott. (See Obs. F. Lesson 
XC.) 

SBettte (S5ott, e$ ware fo. 
SBotlte ®ott, et tjatte eg gcttjatu 



How could I get tired in your £Bte ft'nnte td) feet Sfynen tange SBeu 



company I 


U fjaben ? 


Firstly (at first), 


erjtens ; • 


secondly, &c. 


sroettenS iu 



To have reason to. 
He has reason to be sad. 
He has much sorrow. 



Utfac&e Ijaften* — $u. 

(5t fjat Itrfacfye trauttg gu fetn. 

(£r f)at mel $etbtup (itummet). 



Obs. B. When any one is thanked for a thing, he 
must answer in German : 



You have no reason for it. 



f (<Sie fjakn) 9?td)t Utfad^e. 



To look upon or into. (SSefyen auf or nacf). 

The window looks into the street. £)a$ gtnftet gefyt auf tie (nacf) bcr) 

The back door looks into the £)te £tntertfyut: gcljt nad) tern @5ats 

ten. 



garden. 

To drown. 

To be drowned. 

To jump out of the window. 
To throw out of the window. 



(grttd'nfen (active verb). 
'(Srtrtnfen* (neuter verb). Part. 

past, ertrunfen. Imperf. et:* 

tranf. 
©rfaufen* (neuter verb). Part. 

past, erfoffcn. Imperf. etfoff. 

C 2CuS bem gtnjtet fpttngcn*. 
i_ Sum gcnftet f)tnau$ fpttngen*. 
C U\\$ bem $enftcr roetfen*. 
C Sum gender fnnauS rcetfen.* 



To shoot (meaning to kill by (g r f d) t e p e tt *. 
shooting). 

{Semattbem cine jtugel cor ben it$pf 
Semanbem etne $ugef butcp bag 
(Skfyitn jagen. 
To shoot one's self with a pistol. @tcb nut etner $ptftc(e erfc^tepcn** 
He has blown out his brains. (St fyat fid) erfcfyoffen. 
He has blown out his brains with (St fyat pd) mtt einet ^iftcte tx* 
a pistol. fcfyoffen. 



315 

1 am drowning. 3d) ertrinfc. 

He jumped out of the window. (5r tfl au$ bem $cnfter Qefprungen. 

To get paid. f @tcf) bqabfen {affcn*. 

To suffer one's self to be pre- f (Sid) bitten (ajfen*. 

vailed upon. 
To get one's self invited to dine, f <^td) gum ^tttagcjfcn etnfaben 

fofim*. 

Get paid. f gaflfen @te fid) beaten ! 

Let us set out. £affen (Sic uns (or rctr roottcn) ab* 

retfem 
Let us breakfast. gaffen Sic unS (or wtr rcotlcn) frfifc 

ftttcfen. 
Let him give it to me. £)aj} cr mtr c$ gcbe, or cr cjcbc e$ 

mtr. 
Let him be there at twelve o'clock, JDcif cr um $rob'(f Ufyr ta fet, or cr fei 

urn $tt)6lf Ufyr t)a. 
Let him send it to me. £)ap cr mtr c$ fcnbe, or cr fcnbe e$ 

mtr* 
He may believe it. £)ap cr a,faube, or er $aube e& 

To be at one's ease. SSebagen, bcfyaaftd) obcr bcquem fern* 

(impers. verb, gov. dat.). 
To be uncomfortable. Unbcfyagltd), unbcquem ober cjentrt 

fein*. 
I am very much at my ease upon (&$ tft mtr auf btcfem <Stuf)le fefjr 

this chair. bcfyaojtd). 

You are uncomfortable upon your (SS ift Sfyncn ntcf)t befjagftdf) (ober 

chair. unbcfyaajtd)) auf Sfyrem <Stuf)(e. 

We are uncomfortable in that (S$ bcl)agt un$ in ttefcm &cftf)aufc 
boarding-house. (btcfer $)enfien) ntd)t. 

To make one's self comfortable. @6 fid) becjuem macfyen* 
To put one's self out of the way. (Sid) bcmttfycm 
Make yourself comfortable. SDtodben (Sic c$ ftd) bcquem. 

Do not put yourself out of the 23cmut)en (Sic fid) ntd)t. 

way. 
Do as if you were at home. Sfyun ©te, alt roenn @te $u £aufe 

rodrcn. 

Go and tell him that I cannot ®ef)t unb fagt tf)m, bap td) f)CUU 
come to-day. ntd)t fommcn fann. 

He came and told us he could (5*r frtm unb fagte ung, l>a$ cr md)t 
not come. f ommen t onntc. 

To prefer. 85 o r 1 i e f) e n * (a^egcn, 309), 

[ prefer' the useful to the agree- 3d) gtcfje ba£ 9£ti§tid)e bcm 2Cn<JC* 
able. nefymen t?or. 



316 

Obs. C. When an adjective is used substantively 
in the masculine or feminine gender, a noun is always 
understood, e. g. ber SWetcfye, the rich, meaning ber retcfye 
yjlann ; bte ©cfyone, the beautiful woman, meaning bte 
frf)one $raiu 

Few words to the wise (proverb). (Sktebrten tft cjut prcbtgcn (<Spttd)s 

wort). 

Ofe. D. An adjective used substantively without 
a noun being understood is always put in the neuter 
gender, e. g. bag @ro£ e, the great ; bag (Srfyaberte, the 
sublime ; bag 2leu$ere, the exterior ; bag Snnere, the in- 
terior. 

What he likes best is hunting ©ctn'CtebfteS tft tie Sagb unb t>a^ 
and fishing. ^ifcr)cn. 

" £)enn tx>o t>a$ ©trcngc nut tern 3at' 



For when the Manly and the 
Fair, 

When Strength and Beauty- 
form a pair, 

Then rings it out a merry song, 



ten, 
2Bo (StatfeS fid) unb sj)tttt>eg paarr 

ten, 
b £)a gtbt eS etnen guten .ft fang. 
(@ d) i ( ( e r in his Sieb boh bet 
©lecfe, the song of the bell). 
Severe, tender, mild (gentle). ©treng, $att, mftb. 
To be welcome. SBtllEommen fetn*. 

You are welcome every where, ©ie ftnb ubetaU wtdfommen. 

He will arrive in a week. (£*t rotrb in ad)t Sagen (einer 2&od)e) 

onfommen. 
It took him a week to make this (St f)ctt btefe SHctfe in ad)t Sagen 

journey. gemad)t. 

He will have finished his studies (Sr rt>irb feine (Stubtcn in etnem 

in three months. SStettetjafyre t)Otlenbet fyaben. 

He finished his studies in a year. (5r fyat feme (Stubien in etnem Safjs 

re ttollenbet. 

EXERCISES. 221. 

Have you already seen my son 1 — I have not seen him yet, how 
is he 1 — He is very well ; you will not be able to recognise him, 
for he has grown very tall in a short time. — Why does this man 
give nothing to the poor 1 — He is too avaricious (get^tg) ; he does 
not wish to open his purse for fear of losing his money.— What 
sort of weather is it ] — It is very warm ; it is long since we had 
any rain (eg* bat (ange ntcbt gereqnet) : I believe we shall have a 
storm (etn (Sk'nritrer befommen). — It may be (£)a& fann tt>of)l fetn). — • 
The wind rises (fid) etfyeben*), it thunders already; do you hear it? 
^Yes ; I dp hear it, but the storm is still far off (roett entfernt).— 



317 

Not so far as you think ; see how it lightens. — Bless me (Wltin 
©ctt), what a shower (wc(d) ctn entfe$(t€J)er 9^cgcn tfl fc>a*) ! — If we go 
into some place we shall be sheltered from the storm. — Let us go 
into that cottage then ; we* shall be sheltered there from the wind and 
the rain. — I have a great mind to bathe (bafcett) to-day. — Where will 
you bathe ? — In the river. — Are you not afraid of being drowned ? — 
Oh no ! I can swim. — Who taught you (es) 1 — Last summer I took 
a few lessons at the swimming-school (fcne ©d)Wtmmfd)u(c). — Where 
shall we go to now 1 — Which road shall we take ? — The shortest 
will be the best. — We have too much sun and I am still very tired ; 
let us sit down under the shade of this tree. — Who is that man that 
is sitting under the tree 1 — I do not know him. — It seems, he wishes 
to be alone ; for when we offer to (rootten*) to approach him, he 
pretends to be asleep. — He is like your sister : she understands 
German very well ; but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends 
net to understand me. 

222. 

Have you seen Mr. Jaeger ? — I have seen him ; he told me that 
his sisters would be here in a short time, and desired me to tell you 
so. — When they have arrived, you may give them the gold rings 
which you have bought; they flatter themselves that you will 
make them a present of them, for they love you without knowing 
you personally. — Has my sister already written to you ] — She has 
written to me, I am going to answer her. — Shall I (@cll icb) tell her 
that you are here 1 — Tell her ; hut do not tell her, that I am wait- 
ing for her impatiently. — Why have you not brought your sister 
along with you ] — Which one 1 — The one you always bring, the 
youngest (t)te junqftc). — She did not wish to go out, because she has 
the tooth-ache. — I am very sorry for it ; for she is a very good girl. 
— How old is she ? — She is nearly fifteen years old. — She is very 
tall for her age (bag 2((tcr). — How old are you 1 — I am twenty-two. 
— Is it possible ! I thought you were not yet twenty. 

223. 

Will you drink a cup of (bte &afie) tea 1 — I thank you, I do not 
like tea. — Do you like coffee 1 — I do like it, but I have just drunk 
some. — Do you not get tired here 1 — How could I get tired in this 
agreeable society 1 — As to me I always want amusement. — If you 
did as I do, you would not want amusement ; for I listen to all those 
who tell me anything. — In this manner I learn (crfabren*) a thou- 
sand agreeable things, and I have no time to get tired ; but you do 
nothing of that kind, that is the reason why you want amusement. 
— I would do every thing like (rc>tc) you, if I had no reason to be 
sad. — I have heard just now that one of my best friends has shot 
himself with a pistol, and that one of my wife's best friends has 
drowned herself. — Where has she drowned herself] — She has 
drowned herself in the river which is behind her house. Yester- 
day at four o'clock in the morning she rose without saying a word 



318 



to any one, leaped out of the window which looks ^nto the garden^ 
and threw (ftur$en) herself into the river where she was drowned. — 
Let us always seek the friendship (Die Jmtn^cfyaft) of the good and 
avoid (fltefyen*) the society of the wicked ; for bad society corrupts 
(wvberben) good manners (Die bitten, fern. plur.). — What sort of 
weather is it to-day ] — It snows continually (nod) irnmer), as it 
snowed yesterday, and according to all appearances (allem Kn\d)CU 
ne natf)) will also snow to-morrow. — Let it snow, I should like it to 
snow still more, and to freeze also, for I am always very well when 
it is very cold. — And I am always very well when it is neither 
cold nor warm. — It is too windy (gar $u ruin tit 9) to-day, and we 
should do better if we staid at home. — Whatever weather it may be, 
I must go out, for I promised to be with my sister at a quarter past 
eleven, and I must keep my word. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-SIXTH LESSON.— Secljs nnh nennjiget* 
jUction. 



Notwithstanding, in spite of. 

Notwithstanding that. 

In spite of him (her, them). 

Notwithstanding his" promise. 



C Uncjeacfytet (governs the gen.). 
C SQBtoer (governs the accus.). 

jDcffcn ungecicfytet. 

SBtbet fetnen (tf)ren) SGSitten. 

©etneg s £etfpred)eng ungeacfytet. 



Even. ^ocjat. 

He has not even money enough (St fat focjat mdf)t (Mb genua,, um 
to buy some bread. 23tob $u faufen. 



To manage. 



Do you manage to finish your 
work every Saturday night ] 



Do you manage to have your 
work done every Saturday 
night? 

Try to dc that to oblige me. 
I manage to go thither. 



(5*g bergefiatt macron, tap. 
fo etnrtd)ten, t>ap. 
fo macfyen, bag. 
f9D?ad)cn @ie eg fo, bap ©c offc 
©amftag 20>enb nut 3l)ret Uxbnt 
I fertta, roetben? 

^ Sttcbten <&'u eg fo ein, ba$ <§k jeben 
©amffag 2C6enb mit Sfjret UxUit 
fcrttg nxtben ? 
r $Kid)ten Ste eg fo etn (ober madben 
©ie eg fo), t>a$ <Ste otle ©amjtag 
2tbenb mit Sbrer 2Crktt fertta, 
ftnb (ober tr)re 2Crb:ett fertta r)as 
ben) ? 

S3ef!rc&cn <Stc ftd), btefeg $u tr)un 

urn mid) 511 tterbinben. 
3d) rtcbte eg fo etn, t>a$ id) t)tnget)en 

fann 9 



319 

To have done. S^rtia, fein*. 

Will yo 1 soon have done work- ©inb ©te bait) mit 3rjtet Arbeit 

ing ? fcrttg ? 

I shall soon have done. 3d) roett* bait fcctmtt fetttg fettl. 

To keep warm. . ©id) warm rjaltcn*. 

To go always neat. ©id) immet rein(tcr) rjalten*. 

To be (to keep) on one's guard, ©id) rjiiten, fid) tJOtfeben*. 

To take care (be careful). ©id) in 2(d)t nefymen*. 

To keep on one's guard against ©id) ttot Semantem in 7td)t nefymetl* 

some one. (or f)iiten). 

Take care that you do not fall. 9£cr)men ©te ftd) in 2Cdjt (f)uten ©te 

.fief))/ top ©ie md)t fallen. 
To beware of somebody or some- ©id) t)0t Semanbem otet t)OC etttxtS 

thing. feiiten (or in 2Cd)t neljmen*). 

Keep on your guard against that £uten ©ie fid) t)Ct ttefem Stfanne. 

man. 
ff you do not take care of that £Benn ©ie ftd) t)Ct ttefem $)fette 

horse it will kick you. nid)t in 2Cd)t nefymen, fo tt>irt> eg 

©ie fdbfogen. 
Take care. ©efyen ©ie fid) ttor. 

I fear he will come. 3d) furcate, bap er fomme. 

I do not doubt but he will come. 3d) gtx?cifle nid)t, tap et fommt* 
The bad weather hinders us from 2)ag fd)led)te ^Better t>etr)itttett, tap 

taking a walk. roir fpa^teten gefyetu 

I shall prevent you from going 3d) merte fcfyon ttetfytntettt, tap ©ie 

out. au$a,cr)en. 

( shall not set out till every 3$ roette nic^t abteifert, bt$ atfeS 

thing is ready. fettig ijt. 

The enemy is stronger than you £)er geint ift \tdxht, al$©iegeaj(aubt 

thought. fyaben. 

I shall certainly come, unless I 3d) roette genrip fommett, e$ fei 

am taken ill. tenn, tap id) Iran! witrte. 

To be taken ill (to fall sick). Stvant roetten** 
Very little more, and I would do (&$ fefylt memo,, tap td) eg tfjue* 

it. 
It is in your power to obtain me f ©$ fte^t nut bet Sfynen, tap id) 

that situation. tiefc ©telle befomme. 

He is quite different from what (Sr ijt gan$ antetS, at$ et t)0t swet 

he was two years ago. 3af)ten wat. 

You do not act any more as you ©ie Ijanteln nid)t mcfjt fc, ttrie (or 

have done. ©ie banbeln anterS, ak) ©ie ge= 

rjantelt Ijaben. 
Before you undertake anything G£f)e ©ie etroag untettter)men, faQCtt 

tell me of it.. * ©ie es mit. 

Did any body know how to tell £at Scniant auf cine natutlidjete 

a story in a more natural (more (ungefiinjteltere) Utt $u Ct$af)lett 

artless) manner than Lafon- gewupt, ale Safontaine ? 

taine ] 



320 

A thought, ctn ©ebanfe (masc.) ; 

an idea, cine 3tec ; 

a sally, ctn (Stnfatl (masc). 

To be struck with a thought. (Stnen Qnnfdl baben* (etnfaflen*) 

A .1 i . , -i C (3;£ fa'tit nur ctiuaS ctn. 

A thought strikes me. 1 r~ u u < , . re: c <* 

That never crossed my mind. <Sc ettt>a$ ift nur nie etngcfallcn. 

To take it into one's head. f ©id) ctnfallcn (effen*. 

He took it into his head lately to f (Sr Itejj fid) neultd) etnfatten, mtd) 

rob me.' $u bejreblcn. 

What is in your head 1 f £Ba$ fallt 3bnen ctn. 

In order that, in order to. 2fuf bap or bamit. 

He works in order to be one day (Sr arbeitet, bamit cr fetnem aSaterr 
useful to his country. (ante cinft (etnee Sa^) nu|ttd; 

nxrbc. 

The native country, the father- fcciS 23aterlanb. 
land, 

One day, once, etneS SageS, einjt. 

To be born. ©etmrtio, fetn*. 

Where were you born ? + 2Bo ffnb <&k gcOftrttg ? 

I was 1 orn in this country. f 3d) bin in biefem Canbe gebCirttg, 

Where was your sister born 1 f 2£o ift 3bre (Scbnx'fiet gcbiirtig ? 

She was born in the United States f ®ie tft in ben SSerctnigten (Staa* 

of North America. ten t>on D?crt)Qtnerifa cjebiirtig. 

Where were your brothers born ? f 2£o ftnt> 3bre ^Brubcr ejeburtig ? 

They were born in France. f (Ste ftnb tn granEtetcl) gcburtig. 

Around, round. £erum (umber). 

All around, round about. SRunb Return (tunb umfjer). 

The dish went around the whole S)te (Scbtiffct gtng bet t»cr gan^en 
company till it came back to &ifcbgefcU|cbaft bcrum, bt$ fie rotes 
the landlord. tcr $um s ii>trtbe $urutf fctm. 

We sailed around England. 2Btt fegetten urn (Sngtanb l)erum. 

They went about the town to look (Ste gingen in ber (Stabt umber, urn 
at the curiosities. tr)rc inneren ^erfrtmrbtgfetten $u 

betracbten. 

To go around the house. Urn $>a$ £kw6 Return geben*. 

To go about the house. 3n bem Jpaufe umbcrgeben** 

To express one's self. (Sicb auSbtficfen. 

To make one's self understood. (Stcb wrftanbltcb macben 

To have the habit. 3)ie ©eroobnbett baben*. 

To accustom. ©eruobnen. 

To accustom one's self to some- <Sid) an ctroas (accus.) geiuebncn. 

thing. 

Children must be accustomed Winter miiffen bet 3cttcn an bte 2Ct* 

eurly to labour. bctt geroobnt roetben. 



321 

CCSine (accus.) <&ad)t geroerjnt few* 
To be accustomed to a thing. < (Stner ©cid)e (gen.) qcroobnt fcin* 

C2(n etne <Sad)t' gercoljnt fdn*. 
I am accustomed to it. 3d) bin e$ getuebnt. 

I cannot express myself in Ger- 3cb fcinn micb im 2)eutfd)en nid)tgut 
man, for I am not in the habit cmsfcrucfcn, recti id) nid)t $u [pre* 
of speaking it. cbcn gervobnt bin (efcer : rceil td) 

tm (Sprcd)cn nid)t gefibt bin). 
You speak properly. f ©ie rcfccn, rote ficfy'g cjefjott. 

To chatter. Sptcufcern. 

To prate. <Sd)rt>a£en. 

A prating man, cin spiautctcr, (^d)tua|cr. 

A prating woman, eine <Sd)tt)cigetinn. 

To practise. Ucben. 

I practise speaking. f 3d) ube mid) tm <Spted)Ctt. 

To associate (to converse) with 9#tt Scmantcm umge^en*. 

some one. 
I associate (converse) with him. 3d) Qcf>e nut ir)m urn. 

EXERCISES. 224. 

Have you been learning German long ? — No, Sir, I have only 
been learning it these six months. — Is it possible ! you speak 
tolerably ($icmltcb) well for so short a time. — You jest (fcbcqen) ; I 
do not know much (of it) yet. — Indeed, you speak it well already. ■ 
I think you flatter me a little. — Not at all ; you speak it properly. 
— In order to speak it properly one must know more (of it) than I 
know. — You know enough (of it) to make yourself understood. — I 
still make many mistakes. — That is (tbut) nothing; you must not 
be bashful ; besides (tiberbtce) you have made no mistakes in all 
you have said just now. — I am still timid because I am afraid of 
being laughed at (man rnocbtc fid) ubct mid) luflicj macben). — They 
would be very unpolite to laugh at you. Who would be (fcenn) so 
unpolite as to laugh at you 1 — Do you not know the proverb 1 — 
What proverb? — He who (Lesson XXIX.) wishes to speak well, 
must begin by speaking badly. Do you understand all I am telling 
you ] — I do understand and comprehend (begmfcn*) it very well ; 
but I cannot yet express myself well in German, because I am not 
in the habit of speaking it. — That will come in (nut fcer) time. — I 
wish it (may) with all my heart. 

Good morning, Miss. — Ah ((Si) ! here you are at last. I have 
been waiting for you with impatience. — You will pardon me, my 
dear, I could not come soone r Mkt). — Sit down, if you please.— 
How is your mother] — She i jettp to-day than she was yesterday. 
— I am glad of it. — W^ere you a' n& hall yesterday ] — I was there. 
—Were you much amused (fid i .i* .. vj] — Only so so. — At what 
o'clock did you return home ?- -a garter past eleven. 
14* 



322 



225. 



Bo you sometimes see my brother] — I do see him sometimes; 
when I met him the other day (ncu(icb), he complained of you. u It 
he had behaved better, and had been more economical (fpavfam)," 
said he, " he would have had no debts (@d)ulten, plur.) and I 
would not have been angry with him." — I begged of (bitten*) him 
to have compassion on you, telling him, that you had not even 
money enough to buy bread. "Tell him, when you see him," re- 
plied he to me, " that notwithstanding his bad behaviour towards 
me, I pardon him. Tell him also," continued he, " that one should 
not laugh (fpottcn) at those to whom (Lessons XIV. and LX.) one 
is under obligations. Have the goodness to do this, and I shall be 
much obliged to you," added he in going away. — Why do you 
associate with that man ]— I would not associate with him, if he 
had not rendered me great services. — Do not trust him, for if you 
are not on your guard, he will cheat you. — Take care of that horse, 
otherwise it will kick you. — Why do you work so much ] — I work 
in order to be one day useful to my country. (See end of Lesson 

xxxiv.) y y v 



NINETY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Qubm tthb nemtpget* 

Cection. 

•He is too fond of me to do such f <gt lte(>t mid) $u fef)t, aU tap et 

a thing. ttefes tfyun fottte. 

I will rather die than do that. f 3d) will (tefret ftetfcen, ctl$ tap id) 

ttefeS tfyun fottte or ati ttefes tfyun. 
She loved him so much, that she ©ie liebte tfyn fo fefyt, tap fie tfyn fos 

^ven wished to marry him. cjat fyettatfyen wottte. 

He cannot have said that unless f (§r fruin ttefeS nid)t CjefaQt fya&en, 

he is a fool. es fei tenn, tap et em $tan tji 

To get married (to enter into { (Sid) tterfyetratfyen. 

matrimony). ( <§id) ttetefytkfyen or ttetmafylem 

To marry somebody. Semanten fyettatfyen. 

To marry (meaning to give in ^etfyettatfyen (Detefyltcfyen). 

marriage). 
My cousin, having given his 9?ad)tem metn better fetne <Sd)tt>e* 

sister in marriage, married ftet t>crt)Ctratr)ct fyatte (Page 280), 

Lady Pommern. fyettatfyete et gtaitfetn son $>oms 

mem. 
Is your cousin married ! 3ft 3fyt 6ett 23etter ttetfyettatfyet ? 

No, he is still a bachelor. f 9?etn, er tft nod) lettcj. 

To be a bachelor. f Cettcj fetn*. 

Embarrassed, puzzled, at a loss. $$ e t i e cj e tu 

The embarrassment, the puzzle, tie s 2S'ctlea,enfyctt. 

You embarrass (puzzle) me. <Ste fegen nuci) in a3et(eo,cnfyeit. 



323 

- a puzzle (perplex) me. jgie mad)en rntcJ) t>ettea,em 

The marriage, tic Jpmatb, bie (She, 

II ' demands my sister in aiar- & t-etfongt metne <Sd)roeftet: $Ut 
nage. @f)c. 

To take measures. £Ragregcfo neftmen* (or ctgreifen*). 

I shall take other measures. 3d) roetbe anbete 9Tftaftea,e(n ctgtets 

fen (or nefymen). 

Goodness ! how rapidly does gfletn ®ott ! tt)te t>erfttetd)t tie 3eit 
time pass in your society. in 3bret ®efellfd)aft. 

The compliment, bag Qtomptiment (plur. e a ). 

You are making me a compli- (Ste macben nut ba ein Compliment/ 
ment to which I do not know rcotauf id) nid)t$ $u antrootten 
what to answer. n>etfj# 

The least blow makes him cry 2)et fleinfte ©cfttag- mad)t if)n ttteU 
(weep). nen (6rina,t i^n $um SBetnen). 

To frighten. (Stfcfereefen (a regular active 

verb)* 

To be frightened. \ ©t^retfen* (a neuter irregular 

5 } verb), (etfd)tccfen, erfefytaf). 

Thou art frightened, he is bright- £)u cvfcfyttcfji, et erfdjttcft. 

ened. 
Be not frightened. (Srfcfyrccf en @ic ntd)t. 

The least thing frightens him Das ©ettngfte erfd)tecft if)tt (fie). 

(her, them). 
At what are you frightened ? £Bortt6et etfefyrecfen <Sie 1 (See 

Obs. C. Lesson LII.) 
To be frightened at something. Ueber etroaS (accus.) etfefytecfen*. 

Todevendon unon Wt>1) atl$tn* — ton. 

10 depend on, upon. } 2Cn t: om m en * — a u f. 

That depends upon circumstan- £)a$ fyangt Don ben Umftcmben a&. 

ces. 
That does not depend upon me. £)a3 f)cma,t ntd)t son mir af>. 
It depends upon him to do that. (5*6 fycrngt son tf)m ab, btefeS $u tfjun. 
! yes, it depends upon him. £) ! ja, bat bemgt son ifym a& 

(fommt ouf ifjn an). 
That man lives at every body's £)tefet 9D?ann (ebt auf SebetmannS 

expense. Unfoften. 

The expense (cost), tie Unf often (is never used in the 

singular). 
At other people's expense (or 2(uf 2Cnbetet Unfoften, 

charge). 

a Neuter nouns derived from foreign languages and terminating in ettt take 
e in the plural, except the two words: ba§ s $avlctment, the parliament; bct$ 
£ftegtmenr, the regiment, which like all other neuter nouns, take et in all the 
cases plural. 



324 



The fault, 

It is not my fault. 

Do not lay it to my charge. 
Do not accuse me of it. 
Who can help it ] 

Whose fault is it 1 
I cannot help it. 

The delay, 
He does it without delay. 
I must go (must be off). 

Go away ! be gone ! 

To be astonished (surprised) 

I am surprised at it. 

An extraordinary thing happened 
which surprised every body. 



Many things have passed which 
will surprise you. 



Many days will pass before that 
takes place. 



bte ©cfyuib. 
jtSd) bin ntcfct <Sd)ulb batan. 
\ { ®t tft ntd)t metric ©djulfc. 

i t ®eben ©fa nut t>te 8d>ulb ntcfyt. 

2£et fcmn bafttt ? 
< t 9QBet tft @d)utb baran ? 
} aBeffen (Scfeutb tft eg ? 
{ 3d) fcmn ntd)t$ bafttt. 
\ 3d) farm e$ ntd)t dnbent. 

bet 2Cuffd>u6, 

(Sr tf)ut e^ ebne 2Cuffd>uK 
t 3* will macfyen, bap id) forts 
fcHtme. 

t 9)?ad)en @te, bap <St.e fottfommen i 

(Stftaunen, erftaunt fetn*. 

3d) etftaune barubet. 

3d) bin barubet erftaunt. 

(5$ eretgnete fid> etmas 2Cupetorbente 

ttd)e$, member 3ebermann it* 

ftaunte (erftaunt rear). 
(5*$ tft 93tete$ gefd>cf;cn, roottibet <Sie 

erftaunen roetben. 
(5*6 bat ftcb $teteS etctcmet, rootubet 

©ie erftaunen roerben. 
OTebrcrc Sage roerben fjingefyen, er)e 

btefeg gefebtcbt. 
(Ss roerben mefyrete Sage fytngefjeri, 

cbe btefeS gcfcr>tcr)t. 



To jest. 

The jest, 
You are jesting. 

He is no joker (cannot take a 
joke). 

To beg some one's pardon. 
I beg your pardon. 
To pardon* 

The watch goes too fast. 
The watch goes too slow (re- 
tards). 
My watch has stopped. 

To stop. 
Where did we leave off? 



@ cl) e t £ e n. 

bet ©cfara. 

<Ste fd)er$en. 

(5t (apt ntcfyt nut fid) fcfyerjen* 

Sentanben urn 33er$etbung bitten*. 
3cb bttte @ic urn 23er$etbung«. 
aSetjetfyen* (&er$far;en, ' writer;). 

£>te Ubt gebt t>er (or $u ftub). 
£)te Ut)t gefyt nad) (or $u fpd't)* 

SWeine llr)t tft ftef)en gebtteben. 

<S t e I) e n b I e t b c n *. 

t ££o finb rptr jief)en geblieben ? 



325 

*Yhere did we stop ? f 2$o ftnb n?tr gebttcben ? 

vYe left off at the fortieth Les- &£tr ftnb bet bcr tucqtgftcn Section, 
son, page 100. Gate 100 ftefjen geblteben. 

To wind up a watch. (Sine ilf)r cuifttebcn*. 
To regulate a watch. (Sine ilbt jrellcn. 

Your watch is twenty minutes Sbte llbt gebt ^rcan^tg S02inutctl $u 
too fast, and mine a quarter frulj (set), unt) tic metntge cine 
of an hour too slow. $tettelfhinbe $u fpat (nacb). 

[t will soon strike twelve. ($g itnrb gleidb ^ix>ctf febtagen. 

Has it already struck twelve 1 £>at & feben $a>8lf qcfd)(agcn ? 
To strike (beat). ^dbfogen* (Imperf. |d)lug). 

Thou strikes t, he strikes. £)u fd)la'gft, et fd)lagt. 

1 hipVto Je^yS'a^ain soon. }+ Xttf'V^ ^^en.<> 

To fail, to want, to ail. $ c b I C n. 

What ails you ? 7 ~^ . - f • _,, - ' 

What is the matter with you ! j ** fl ? Wf! 3 ^ ncn ? 

You look so melancholy. (Sic feben fc febroetmutbtg cw$. 

On condition, or provided. S" K^ ®# "JWfc** 

' r (_ 5Wtt bem 23ebtnge, ©op, 

I will lend you money, provided 3d) will Sbnen dk'lb letben, untet 

you will henceforth be more bet 23cbtngung, t>a$ (Sic in 3us 

economical than you have hi- funft fpnrfamet feten, aU ©te bt£s 

therto been. tyt gert)efen fint). 

Henceforth. 3n Sufunft. 

Economical. ©parfam or bau^b otter tfd). 

To renounce gambling. ©cm ©ptele entfcigen. 

The game (sport, play), t)a$ Spiel. 

To follow advice (counsel). 5" ®! ncm *«$< &&- 
v J \ (Stnen 9?atb befotgen. 

exercises. 226. 

What o'clock is it] — It is half past one. — You say it is half past 
one, and by (ouf with the dat.) my watch it is but half past twelve. 
—It will soon strike two. — Pardon me, it has not yet struck one. — 
I assure you, it is five and twenty minutes past one, for my watch 
goes very well. — Bless me ! how rapidly time passes in your so- 
ciety. — You make me a compliment; to which I do not know what to 
answer. — Have you bought your watch in Paris ? — I have not 
bought it, my uncle has made me a present of it (bemtit). — What 
lias that woman entrusted you with ? — She has entrusted me with 

b This is the way in which Germans who are intimately acquainted 
generally express themselves when separating. It answers the Fiench: au 
flaisir de was revoir, or simply au revob\ 



326 

a secret of a (t>en cittern) great count who is in a gTeat embarrass- 
ment about the marriage of one of his daughters.— -Does any one 
ask her in marriage ? — The man who demands her in marriage is a 
nobleman of the neighbourhood (cms bet 9? a cl> b o v fcb a ft) . - — Is he rich? 
—No, he is a poor devil who has not a farthing (t>er .poller). — You say 
you have no friends among your schoolfellows (ftt ^ttfd)U(er) ; but 
is it not your fault] You have spoken ill of them (t»on tfyrten), and 
they have not offended you. They have done you good and never- 
theless you have quarelled with them (page 278). Believe me, he 
who has no friends deserves (tu'ttuenen) to have none. 

227. 

Dialogue (£)ct$ dkfprad)) between a tailor and his journeyman 
(ber (Sk'fell, gen. en). Charles, have you taken the clothes to the 
Count Narissi ] — Yes, Sir, I have taken them to him.— What did 
he say 1 — He said nothing but that (au£et t>a£) he had a great mind 
to give me a box on the ear (Me £)f)rfetge), because I had not 
brought them sooner. — What did you answer him ? — Sir, said I. 
I do not understand that joke : pay me what you owe me ; and ii 
you do not do so instantly, I shall take other measures. Scarcely 
($cmm) had I said that, when he put his hand to his sword (nacfc 
tern Deepen cjretfert*), and I ran away (tic glucfyt nef)men # ). 

228. 

At what are you astonished 1 — I am astonished to find you still 
in bed. — If you knew how (rote) sick I am you would not be as- 
tonished at it. — Has it already struck twelve 1 — Yes, madam, it is 
already half past twelve.; — Is it possible that it is so late] — That is 
not late, it is still early. — Does your watch go well (rect)t) 1 — No, 
miss, it goes a quarter of an hour too fast. — And mine goes half an 
hour too slow. — Perhaps it has stopped. — In fact, you are right. — Is 
it wound up ] — It is wound up, and yet (bennecf)) it does not go. — 
Do you hear, it is striking one o'clock. — Then I will regulate my 
watch and go home. — Pray (3d) lutte) stay a little longer (nod) etn 
roentCj) ! — I cannot, for we dine precisely at one o'clock (mtt tent 
€$)(agc ctn£). — (Adieu), till I see you again. 

229. 

What is the matter with you, my dear friend 1 why do you look 
so melancholy 1 — Nothing ails me. — Are you in any trouble (£croett 
©te irqent) etnen Summer) 1 — I have nothing, and even less than 
nothing, for I have not a farthing and owe a great deal to my cre- 
ditors. Am I not very unhappy 1 — When a man is well and has 
friends he is not unhappy. — Dare I ask you a favour ] — What do 
you wish? — Have the goodness to lend me fifty crowns. — I will 
lend you them with all my heart, but on condition that you will re- 
nounce gambling and be more economical than you have hitherto 
been. — I see now, that you are my friend, and I love you too much 



327 

not to follow your advice, — John ! — What is your pleasure, sir 1 — 
Bring me some wine. — Presently, sir. — Henry ! — Madam 1 — Make 
the fire. — The maid-servant has made it already. — Bring- me some 
paper, pens and ink. Bring me also some sand (bcr <Streu[anb) or 
blotting-paper (t>a$ 26'fcnpaptet), sealing-wax (bet . ©tcgettcicf) and a 
light (iHdbt). — Go and tell my sister not to wait for me, and be back 
again at twelve o'clock in order to carry my letters to (cmf) the post 
office. — Very well, madam. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-EIGHTH LESSON.— &cl)i nab nemqigrte 
ftection. 

Out of, except. 2C u fi e r (governs the dative). a 

Out of, or without doors. 2Cuf;et bem £cmfe. 

He works out of doors. (5*t atfteitet aupet bem £aufe. 

They were all present, except (Sic war en alle $>a, aujkt ten 6eiben 

the two brothers. 33rubetn. 

Except you and I, nobody was 2Cufet Sfynen imb nut fef)(te IDttes 

absent. manb. 

Besides that, otherwise. 2(upetbem (ubetbteS). 
Excepting this, he is an honest 2Cuj-Jetbem ift er ein c^rttcfter 9#ann* 

man. 

It can be done, t @$ ffot 50?tttc(, b cS $u tfyun. 

There is no means of finding f (S6 tft ntd)t moo.ttd) (obec e$ ojfct 
money now. fetn $ftttte(), fid) in bicfem 2£ua,en* 

fcUcfe (Mb $u serfefyaffen. 

Along. £ a' n a, 5 (governs the dative as 

well as the genitive)* 

Along the road. 1 Sfln^ bem Sffiege. 

All the year round. t &«$ WW 3 a ^ fjtnburd). 

To enable — to. 3n ben @tant> fcgen — $u. 

To be able — to. 3m (Stcmbe fetn* — $u. 

To sing. ©ingen* (Part, past, gefungen. 

Imperf. fang). 

9 

a 5ttt$et employed as a conjunction may be followed by any case, according 
to the verb by which the case is governed. Ex. 3d) foafte s ?ltemanbcn aufjer 
tyn gefefyett, I have seen no one except him ; e§ ttjar jftiemaitb ba, aufjer tx, 
nobody was there except he. 

b S>ct3 SUHttel, the means, is here in the plural. 

c The preposition IcingS must not be mistaken for the adverb Icingfi, super- 
.ative of lange, along while. Ex. Sent g 8 ben Ufern beg jftfjemS Uh id) fcfyott 
langft geretfet, it is a long time since I travelled along the borders of the 
Rhine. 



328 

To the right, on the right side $cd)t$, tecf)tet #cmt>. 

(or hand). 
To the left, on the left side (or Stnf^, (infer £ant. 

hand). 
Could you not tell me which is ^tennten (Sic mir ntcbt fagen, it>e(cbe$ 
the nearest way to the city tcr fuqejte 2£e$ \% urn an$ St}0r 
gate 1 $u fommen ? 

Go to the foot of this street, and ©chert (Sic t)ic gcm$e (Strafk rjtnauf 
when you are there, turn to the (binab) ; unt roenn (Ste Oben 
right, and you will find a cross- (unten) fint, roenten (Sic fid) 
way, which you must take. tinU ; to roctten (Sic cincn 

&teu$roea, ftnten, ubcr ten (Sic 
cjeben. 
And then 1 lint) bcrnacb ? 

You will then enter a broad street, £crnacb foutmen Sic in etnc §ictm 
which will bring you to a great Ucl) breite Straf'c, tie Sic auf 
square, where you will see a einen gtoften >p(a£ ffibtt, ivo Sie 
blind alley. cine Sacfgaffe feben nxrten. 

You must leave the blind alley Sic (affen t)ic S'acfaaffe (infer Jpant, 
on your left, and pass under unt> t]et)en turcb tie Scbrcnbbca,en, 
the arcade that is near it. tie taneben fint. 

Then you must ask again. f 2C(6tann fragen (Sic tveitct. 

The arcade, tcr Scbwibbcgcn ; 

the eross*way, ter ^reu^nxg ; 

the shore (bank), tog ©eftate ; 

the blind alley, tie Sacfo/iffe. 

Through. X) u r d) (governs the accusative). 

Do not cross (on horseback) the 3Mte nid)t burd) ben £Balt ! 

forest. 

He made his way through the f (5t babntc ftd) etnen ££ea, tutor) 

enemy. tic $etnte. 

By this means the patient was £)urcb ticfeg SDZtttct mart tcr .ftranfe 

cured. Cjcfunt. 

He speaks through the nose. (St rctct turd) tic Sftafe. 

Without. £)(jne, fontct (govern the 

ace us.). 

Do not go out without me. ©eben (Sic cbnc mid) nicbt au£ ! 

Without the least doubt. (Sonter d alien 3n>eife(. 

To last (to wear well). .gotten*, baucm. 

That cloth will wear well. £)tefe£ &ucb rctrt .qut boftcn. 

How long has that coat lasted £Bic (ana,e bot S^nctt tiefeg JUetb 
you? cje batten? 

To my liking. 9la<fy mcincm 93c(icbcn (©efaflcn)* 

d (Sorter instead of obue is only used in poetry. 



329 



To every body's liking. 9?od) SebetmannS ffietteben (SOBclfc 

gcfallcn). 
Nobody can do any thing to his 9?temant> fann tf)m ctroaS tecfyt mas 
liking. ct)cn. 



The question is, it turns upon. < 

It does not turn upon your 
pleasure, but upon your pro- 
gress. 

You play, sir, but playing is not 
the thing, but studying. 

What is going on ] 



The question is to kn )\v what 
we shall do to pass the time « 
agreeably. 

I propose (intend) joining a hunt- 
ing party. 

On purpose. 

I beg your pardon, I have not 
done it on purpose. 

A game at chess, 
A game at billiards, 

To play upon the violin. 

To play the violin. 

To play for something. 

To play upon the harpsichord. 

To play upon the flute. 
To play at cards. 
The game of chess, 
the card, 

the playing at cards (the card- 
playing), 
the pack of cards, 



(S$ banbdt ftdb inn. 

(£s fommt barauf an $u. 

(£$ fjanbett fid) nidrf urn 3f$t 9§e?s 

a,mta>Ti, fonbern um 3bre Sorts 

fci) rate. 
@ic fpteten, mein Jpetr ; aber (Sic 

feflen ntd>t fptelen, fenbern ftubt* 

ten. 
tlm tvas (roerum) banbett jtcb'S ? 
"IBoratif fommt e* .an ? 
(&$ fommt barauf an $u tuiffcn, n?a£ 

rutr tbun rocrben (conversational 

style : SQStr mujfen ttriffen, ma$ 

rmr tbun fetten), um unfere 3ett 

angcnebm f)in$ubrtngen obet $u$us 

brtngen. 
3d) nebmc mtr t>er, enter Sagbpartte 

bet$un>ef)ncn. 
mt gletg, wrfa'&ftcfc 
3d) bttte (Sic um ^er^ctbung, id) 

fyabc C6 nid)t sorfagttd) (mit J(ctp) 

gctban. 

etne spattte ©cbacfj. 

cine j>avm S8iUart>* 

2Cuf Sec SStdtne fpteten. 

JDte SSieiine obcr iBiolin fpteten. 

Um etroag fpieten, 

2(uf bem JUamcr (ba^ ^taoter) fpte* 

ten. 
2fuf bet Jtcte (btc Jlotc) Olafcn*. 
Garten fpteten/ 
ba* (Scbacbfptct ; 
btc ilattc ; 
X)ci$ JUrtenfptet ; 

t>a* ©ptel Garten* 



O&s The name of the instrument is put in the ac- 
cusative when we wish to express, with the verb fpie* 
lett, that a person knows how to play ; but when we 
wish to express that he is actually playing, it require? 
the preposition auf with the dative. Ex. bte 3Sielinf 
fptelen, to play the violin ; auf ber 3Stc[tne fpielen, to play 



330 

upon the violin. The names of games are employed 
without an article, and the rest is as in English. 

To blow. S3 I a f e n * (geblafen, fclte$). 

Thou blowest, he blows. ©u Md'fcft, ec blaft 

To hold one's tongue. 7 s± * • * • r* • ^ • v 

To stop speaking, to be silent. j@*™«3™* (9<W>»«.9««/ fdjttHcg). 

D,o you hold your tongue ? <Sd)it>ctgcn (Sic ? 

I do hold my tongue. 3d) fcfonxtge. 

After speaking- half an hour, he 9tfad)bem ct ctnc fjat&e <Stunbc gcte* 
held his tongue. bet fyattc, fcfyrciccj er. 

To suspect. SSctmutljen. 

I suspect what he has done. 3d) wrmutfye, wag ct gctfyan ^)at 

He does not suspect what is (St Dermutfyet md)t, nxiS tfym nnfc>et» 

going to happen to him. fafyrcn roirb. 

Do you intend to make a long ©cbcnfen ©te fid) (ange in bet (Stabt 

stay in town ? aufeu fatten ? 

I do not intend to make a long 3d) gefcenfe mid) nid)t lancje t>a auf 

stay there. gufatten. 

To make a stay. ©id) cutffattcn*. 

The stay, the sojourn, bet 2Cufcntr)a(t. 

To tfjmJL £> e n r: e n * (gebadjt, fcadfjte). 

To think of some one or of some- 2Cn Scmanben cbct an ettt)a£ tens 

thing. fen*. 

Of whom do you think? Un roen benfen @te? 

Of what do you think I SBotan t)en!cn (Sic? (See i?w/e, 

Lesson LXIV.) 

EXERCISES. 230. 

Sir, may I ask you where the Earl of B. lives ? — He lives near 
the castle (Lesson LXVIII.) on the other side (jenfeit) of the river. 
— Could you tell me which road I must take to go thither? — You 
must go along the shore (idng£ bem (SJefitobe fyin), and you will come 
to a little street on the right, which will lead you straight (getctbe) 
to his house (auf baS £au$ $u). It is a fine house, you will find it 
easily (letd)t). — I thank you, sir. — Does the Count N. live here? 
— Yes, sir, walk in (fid) farcin bemiifan), if you please. — Is the 
count at home ? I wish to have the honour to speak to him. — Yes, 
sir, he is at home ; whom shall I have the honour to announce 
(mctben) 1 — I am from B., and my name is F. 

Which is the shortest way to the arsenal (ba$ SeugfaitS) 1 — Go 
down this street, and when you come to the foot, turn to the left 
and take the cross-way ; you will then enter into a rather narrow 
(cngc) street, which will lead you to a great square, where you will 



331 

see a blind alley. — Through which I must pass 1 — No, for there is 
no outlet (bet 2(u£cjancj). You must leave it on the right, and pass 
under the arcade which is near it. — And then ? — And then you 
must inquire further. — I am very much obliged to you. — Do not 
mention it f@6 ifit md)t llrfocfye). 

231. 

Are you able to translate a French letter into German 1 — I am 
(es). — Who has (es) taught you ] — My German master has enabled 
me to do it. — You are singing, gentlemen, but it is not a time for 
singing; you ought to be silent, and to listen to what you are told. 
— We are at a loss.— ^What are you at a loss at? — I am going to 
tell you : it is a question with us how we shall pass our time agree- 
ably. — Play a game at billiards or at chess. — We have proposed 
joining a hunting party : do you go with (us) ] — I cannot, for I 

i have not done my task yet : and if I neglect it, my master will 
scold me. — Every one according to his liking ; if you like staying 

j at home better than going a hunting, we cannot hinder you. — Does 
Mr. K. go with us 1 — Perhaps. — I should not like to go with him, 
for he is too great a talker, excepting that he is an honest man. 

What is the matter with you] you look angry. — I have reason 
to be angry, for there is no means of getting money now. — Have 
you been at Mr. A's ? — I have been at his house ; but there is no 
possibility of borrowing any from him. I suspected that he would 
not lend me any, that is the reason why I did not wish to ask him ; 
and had you not told me to do so, I should not have subjected my- 
self (ftcl) ausfe|en) to a refusal (Die aSfdjlS-jjijjf 2(ntwort). 

232. 

I suspected that you would be thirsty, and that your sister would 
be hungry ; that is the reason why I brought you hither. 

I am sorry, however, that your mother is not here. I am aston- 
ished (<<£•§ befremfcet mid)) that you do hot drink your coffee. — If I 
were not sleepy I would drink it. — Sometimes (^Batt>) you are slee- 
py, sometimes cold, sometimes warm, and sometimes something 
else is the matter with you (tft 3>f)tten ctnxtS 2(nDetes). I believe 
that you think too much about (an) the misfortune that has hap- 
I pened to your friend (fern.). — If I did not think about it, who would 
j think about it 1 — Of whom does your brother think ? — He thinks of 
' me ; for we always think of each other when we are not together 
1 (Oct fa mm en). . 

I have seen six players (ber (Spieler) to-day, who were all win- 
ning at the same time ($u gfetdjet Sett). — That cannot be, for a 
player can only win when another loses. — You would be right if I 
were speaking of people that had played at cards or billiards ; but 
I am speaking of flute and violin players (bcr J(cten- lint) aStoftnfpre? 
I Icr). — Do you sometimes practise (macf)en) music ] — Very often, for 
1 I like it much.— What instrument do you play 1 — I play the violin, 



332 

and my sister plays the harpsichord My brother, who plays the 
bass (t)cr i8ap)u accompanies ((wglctten) us, and Miss Stolz some- 
times applauds us (3cmant>em ©ctfall ^uf(atfcbcn). — Does she not 
also play some musical instrument (fc^a* muftfriltfcbc Snftninunu) 1 — 
She plays the harp (t>ie JjbarfOi but she is too proud (fto($) to prac- 
tise music with us. — A very (jehv) poor town went to considerable 
expense (t)cr. bctracf)t(td)C 2fafn?an$) in feasts and illuminations (mtt 
^rcuK'itfeften unb (Srteucbtungcn) on the occasion of its prince passing 
through (bci tcr £)urd)rctfc tbre$ — ). — The latter seemed himself 
astonished (crftount) at it. — " It has only done," said a conrtier 
(t>et Jpofmcmn), " what it owed (to your majesty). " — " That is true," 
replied (wrfi'gcn) another, "but it owes all that it has done." (See 
end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-NINTH LESSON.— Neutt xrnb ttemtfcjste 
faction. 

Either — or. (Sntroeuct — obet. (Lesson 

LXI.) 

He either has done it, or will (St fat c$ enttvefcer gct!)an y cber nnrfc 
still do it. c$ ned) t()un. 

Obs. A. It has been noticed jn many parts of this 
work, that certain conjunctions correspond with others 
that generally follow them. These conjunctions are: 

@tttn>eber, is followed by : ober (Lesson LXL), either — or. 

je, or befio, the — the. 
( fonbern and) (Lesson LXL), 
( not only — but also. 

!fo — bod), or gfetcfywofyf, or 
md)t3 bejlott>eniger,though- 
nevertheless. 
fo, however — still. 
( al$, or al$ and) (Lesson 
( LXL), as well — as. 
{ nod) (Less. VII. and LXL), 
( neither — nor. 
fo, if— so. 

fo — bod), though — yet or 
nevertheless. 

a 3e unites two comparatives. 

*> 5Bemt is not only combined with gtetcf) and fd)0rt, but also with attbet*, 



<je, a 

%lid)t cittern, 

9ttdf>t tiur, 

Dbgletd), ) 
O6fd)on, > 
Dbwofyf, ) 

©o, . 


(Less. XCI.) 


©owofyf, 


. 


SBeber, 


• 


SBBemt, 
58enn gtetrf), 
SGBenn fcfyon, 


h • • 



333 

( abev, or attem or gtetcf)tt>of)t 
3tt)ar, < or jebod), though — never- 

( theless, or but. 

Prepositions either govern the J)te &ktr)a(tmfm>8tret ($)tapeftrtos 
genitive, or the dative, or the nen) regieren entnxbet ten ®cnU 
accusative, or finally the da- ttt>, obet ben 3)attD, et>ct ben 2(c? 
tive and accusative. cufattt), obet enbltd) ben £)attt> unt) 

2(ccufatit). 

The sooner, the better. " 3c efyer, [c ttebcr. 

The greater our pleasures, the 3c grower unfere greuben ftnb, bejlo 
more we feel how transitory mefyr empftnben wit tl)te $ets 
they are. gangltd)£eit. 

Ofo. B. <De$0 may be placed in the first member of 
the phrase, in which case je begins the second. Ex. 

A work of art is the more beau- (Sin .ftunflroetf tft befto fcfyonet, \t 

tiful the more perfect it is. t>ollfomtnenet e$ tft* 

(Sulzer.) 
She is not only handsome, but <&'u tft ntcftt nut fd)b'n, fonbern aud) 

she is rich also. tetd). 

Not only his idleness, but his in- 9?td)t nut fetne gtoutfjett, fonbetn 

discretion also makes him con- aud) fetne Unbcfc^cxt)ent)cit mad)t 

temptible. trm wtacbtltd). 

Though this young lady is not £)bg{etd) btefeS grautetn nid)t febt 

very handsome, she is never- febon tft, fo tft fie bod) fe()t licbenfc 

theless very amiable. ttrittbto,. 

However handsome she may be, (So fd)b'n fie aud) fetn mag, fo ift fie 

still she is not amiable. bod) ntcbt liebenswiirbuj. 

STou as well as your sister. (Soroobl ©ie, at$ 3fyt $tciutetn 

<Sd)tt>eftet. 
She is as handsome as she is @te tft fott>of)( fd)5'n at^ (teben&DUts 

amiable and rich. big unb tetd). 

They had neither bread, nor meat, ©te gotten roebet 93tob, nod) $(etfd), 

nor arms, nor money. nod) SBaffen, nod) ©etb. 

f he does not pay you for the £Benn er 3f)nen t>a* $)fetb nid)t be? 

horse, tell me. $af)tt, fo fagen @te e$ nut. 

Though I should have money, SKcnn id) gletd) (Mb fyatte, fo gabe 

still I would give him none. id) tfym bed) fetnS. 

tndeed I do not know him yet, 3n?at fenne id) tfyn nod) ntd)t, abet 

but he seems to be docile. et fcfyeint nut folajam. 

}ebod), aud), felbfi, and ttttr. Ex. SBetttt anberS, if otherwise ; ttetttt jebod), if 
however; tt>etm aud) or ttemt felbft, if even; ttemt nur, if only. All these 
compound conjunctions must be considered as two separate words, between 
which the subject and even the case of the verb (when a personal pronoun) 
may be placed. The same observation applies to the combination of Ob with 
other words. (See Lesson XCI. Obs. H. Note k.) 



I hope that your sister will 
marry my brother. 



334 

Though I wrote to him, never- 3d) rjafce tfjm swat gefd)riefcett, gtetdf)* 
theless he has not answered rool)( fyat et nur ntd)t geantwottet. 
me. 

f 3* rcunfcfyte, et fjatte eg md)t ge* 

I wish he had not done it. < <x, t ?» c£*l s r_ ~ , ^' «■ 4 . ii. 

I 3* nmnfcfyte, capper e£ ntd)t gettjan 

[ t)atte. 

Obs. C. The conjunction b a $ may be omitted ; 
but then the verb immediately follows its subject. 

I wish you would go with me. \ jj * f\?£"^\fL ,« 
J & ( 3d) woflte, bag ©te nut nur gtngen. 

'3d) Fjoffc, Sfjt #rau(etn ©cfynoefter 
«>irt> metnen SStubet fjetra? 
tfjcn. 
3d) r)offc, bap 3fa gra'tttetn @djn>e? 
ftcr metnen 23ruber fyeiratfyen 
rmrb. 

{©cfegt^, n)tr fatten tveber 33rob, nodj 
2Betn, nod) (Mb. 
©efegt, 6q9 tint rcebet S3tob, nod) 
2Betn, ncd) ®ett> fatten. 
fSKeflte ©ott atle grope £etten ttebtetf 
ben 5?rteb.en ! 
SBellte ©ott, ba$ afte grope £evteH 
ben gueben Itetten ! 

By virtue of. $ r a f t (governs the genitive). 

By virtue of his employment <gt nvuf Craft fetneS 2Cmtcg fo fyan* 
(his office) he must act thus. bettt. 

According to {by virtue of). 95 e t m 6 g e (governs the gen.). 

According to your order I must SSermoge 3fjte$ S3efefjl$ mup td) fo 
speak thus. fpredjen. 

Instead of. U n fi a 1 1 or ft a 1 1 (governs the 

genitive). 

He sent his daughter instead of 2CnJTatt fctneS (SofyneS fcbkfte et fetnc 

his son. £od)tet. 

He has adopted him. (£t (jot tfjn an JttnbeS ©tatt c an* 

genommen. 
Go thither instead of me. ©tatt metner gcr)c £)u (jtn, 

« The word (Start, lieu, place, when thus seuarated from an, must be con- 
sidered as a substantive. 



335 

In consequence of (according to). £ a u t (governs the genitive)* 

Acconiing to his letter, he ought gcmt (emeg 35rtcfe^ / mufj et ten 
to arrive here on the 18th of 18ten btefeg f)iet etntteflfetn 
this month. 

To exclaim. ICuStufen* (Imperf. ttef). 

To make uneasy. JBeunrufytgen. 

To be uneasy (to fret). SScunruhtgt (fcefcrgt) fettt*. 
Why do you fret (are you uri- SBarum fint (&k beunrufjtgt (fce* 

easy) ? forgt) ? 

I do not fret (am not uneasy). 3d) tun ntd)t fccferat (fceimrufuQt). 

Compose yourself! S3etul)igen @tc fid) ! 

To alter, to change. (Sid) Derantern. 

[ That manhas altered a great deal 2)tefer Sflann hat fid) fef)t ttercmtett, 
since I saw him, [cittern id) tf)n md)t Qcfer)cn fiabc. 

To alter a coat. (Sinen 9?ccf cmtetn. 

To recommend. (Smpfefjten*. 

To take leave (to commend one's ©td) empfef)(en*. 

self). 
Farewell, adieu ! 3d) empfefyle mid) S^ncn ! 

I have the honour to bid you f 3d) fyabe tie <£$«> rntct) S&nen $u 

adieu. empfefjlen. 

Obs. D. This and leben ©ie tt>of)f, farewell, is the 
general salute of the Germans when leaving each 
other. 

Farewell (adieu) ! £et>en <Stc «>el)l ! 

To bid one's friends adieu. (Semen greimten £ebercef)t fagcn. 

The recommendation (respects, tie (Smpfefylung. 
compliments), 

P 7tTSf COmpUmentSt0him ?^ a * en ^ *» SW mctae @m* 
I Remember me to him (to her). 5 *>fW un 9* 

To enjoy. ®enicpen* (governs the ace.}* 

i Enjoy all the pleasures that vir- ©entefkn ©te alte aSergnftgungeit, 
tue permits. tt>eld)C tie Sugcnt ertauftt. 

The past, tie s $crgangenf)ett, tag 93ergawjenc ; 

the present, tag (SJegenroarttge ; 

the presence, tie dkgennxttt. 

In his presence. 3n fetnet dScgenrcatt. 

The future, tag Surunfttge ; 

the loss, ter 33etfaft ; 

the loss of time, tc*t 3ettt>ertuft. 

Not to fail. 2(ugrtcfyen, md)t ctmangettu 



336 

Pray, present my compliments 3cb tuttc @te, Sbrem $tfittfeti 
(my respects) to your sister. ©dweftcr c\iitt^fr mctne (Smpfeb* 

lung $u tnacben. • 

f*8*efth e$ Sfinen o/falltcj tft, or 

[f you please. J _ sim Pjy «f [tti ^ f . 

J r j 93?enn @te fc gut fetn roolten or 

[ simply gtfijflft. 

I shall not fail. J £* **>* e ? ™*ncbtcn. 

J Xscb werbe ntcbt* ermancjctn. 

exercises. 233. 

I have the honour to wish you a good morning". How do you 
do? — Very well, at your service (3bncn oufturoarten). — And how 
are they all at home (bcfinbet man fid) bit 3bnen $u £aufc) ? — Toler- 
ably well, thank God ((SJctt fit £anf). My sister was a little indis- 
posed (unpafltcb), but she is better (ttueber berqcfMlt) ; she told me 
to give you her best compliments (fie (aft ftcb Sbnen fcejtenS empfeb(en). 
— I am glad (0f tjt nut lieb) to hear that she is well. As for you, 
you are health itself; you cannot look better (@te fonntcn ntcbt &ei 
fer ausfeben). — I have no time to be ill ; my business would not per- 
mit me. — Please to sit down (SPefteben @te ftcb ntebequfctffen), here 
is a chair. — I will not detain you from your buiness (yen ben (SJcs 
fc!) often abbalten*) ; I know that a merchant's time is precious (t>a$ 
einem .ftaufmanne bte Sett foftbactjf). — I have nothing pressing (nicbti> 
6tljge$) to do now, my courier is already dispatched (metne $)ojt tjt 
febon abgeferrtqt). — T shall not stay (fid) aufbafren*) any longer. I 
only wished in passing by (tm QScrbctqeben), to inquire about (fie!) 
crfrinbtqen nacb) your health. — You do me much honour. — Tt is very 
fine weather to-day. If you will allow me, I shall have the plea- 
sure of seeing you again this afternoon (nacb Stfcbe), and if you 
have time we will take a little turn together (fc gefjen rott etn roentg 
nut etnanber fpagteren). — With the greatest pleasure. In that case I 
shall wait for you. — I will come for you (<Bk abbo(en) about (qeqcn) 
seven o'clock. — Adieu then (atfc), till I see you again. — I have the 
honour to bid you adieu. 

234. 

The loss of time is an irreparable (unerfcg(tcb) loss. A single 
minute cannot be recovered (n)tcbcrcr(angen) for all the gold in the 
world. — It is then of (son) the greatest importance (tie 2£tcbttq£ett) 
to employ well the time, which consists only of minutes (au6 Wlv 
mrten befteben*) of which we must make good use (Me man roobt be* 
nu£en mu$). — We have but the present ; the past is no longer any 
thing, and the future is uncertain. A great many people (<Scbt tue(e 
5ttenfcben) ruin themselves (ftcb $u ($5tunbe rtcbtcn), because they wish 
to indulge themselves too much (roetl fie ftcb att$u qutttcb tfyun rucllcn). 
If most (bte ntetften) men knew how to content themselves (ftd) be* 
gnugen) with what they have they would be happy, but their gree- 
diness (bte (iUericjfett) very often makes them unhappy. In order to 



337 

be happy, we must (mug man) forget the past, not trouble ourselves 
about (ftd) bcrttmmi'rn urn) the future, and enjoy the present. — I was 
very dejected (ttciuttg) when my cousin came to me. " What is 
the matter with you V he asked me. " Oh (art)) ! my dear 
cousin," replied I, "in losing that money, I have lost every 
thing." " Do not fret," said he to me, " for I have found your 
money." 

235, 

As soon as Mr. Flausen sees me he begins to speak French, in 
order to practise it (urn ftd) $u tiben), and overwhelms me with po- 
liteness (nut £ofUd)t\'tten ftbetba'ufcn), so that I often do not know 
what to answer (\va$ id) tfym antrcorten foil). His brothers do the same 
(e$ cbcnfc madjcn). — However, they are very good people ; they are 
not only rich and amiable, but they are also generous (qre&mutfyig) 
and charitable (rooMtfyattg)-. They love me sincerely (aufricfettg), 
therefore, I love them also, and consequently (foetid)) shall nevei 
say anything to their disadvantage (SflacrjtfycittgeS son tfynen). 1 
should love them still more, if they did not make so much ceremony 
(bte Umftanbe) ; but every one has his faults (ber gefjlet), and mine 
is to speak too much of their ceremonies. 

236. 

Have the enemies surrendered (ftd) ergeben*) ? — They have not 
surrendered, for they did not prefer life to death ; and though they 
had neither bread, nor water, nor arms, nor money, they determined 
to die rather than surrender.- 1 - Why are you so sad ? — You do not 
know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend (fern.). — Tell me, 
for I assure you that 1 share (tt)et(cn) your sufferings (pa$ £etben) as 
well as (cbcn foroefyt af$) your pleasures (bte greube). — Though I am 
sure that you partake of (&t)cU an einer <§a$)C nefymen*) my suffer- 
ings, I cannot, however, tell you now (in btefem 2Cua,enbltdQ what 
makes me uneasy ; but I will tell you when an opportunity offers 
(gdegentltd) ot>er bet ©eteqenfyeit). Let us speak of something else 
now. What do you think of the man who spoke to us yesterday 
at the concert 1 — He is a man of much understanding (etn fefyr Ders 
ftanbtger 9}Jann), and not at all wrapt up in his merits (t)on fetnen 
23erbtcnfrcn etngenemmen fein*). But why do you ask me that 1 — To 
speak of something. — It is said (Sfflcm fcigt) : contentment surpasses 
riches (3ufrtebenf)ett Qcf)t iibcr 3U'td)tbum) ; let us then always be» 
content. Let us share with each other (nut etnanbet tr)ct(cn) what 
we have, and live all our life-time (unfet Qar^cS £ebcn) inseparable 
(un^crtrcnnUd)) friends. You will always be welcome (tmllfommen) 
at my house, and I hope to be equally so (e$ aud)) at yours. — If I 
saw you happy I should be equally so, and we should be more con- 
tented than the greatest princes, who are not always so. We shall 
be happy, when we shall be perfectly (wtttommen) contented with 
what we have ; and if we do our duty as we ought (gchortg), God 
15 



338 

will take care of the rest (fo rottb fcer ftefce ®ott fdr ba$ ttektge for* 
gen). The past being no longer any thing, let us not be uneasy 
^.bout the future, and enjoy the present. 

237. 

Behold, ladies, those beautiful (rjerrttd)) flowers, with their 
colours so fresh and bright (nut trjten fo frtfcben unb gfan^enbcn Jars 
ben) ; they drink nothing but water. The white lily has the colour 
of innocence (t>te Unfd)u(b) ; the violet indicates gentleness (bte 
(Scmftmutf)) ; you may (man fann) see it in Louisa's eyes. The 
forget-me-not (£)as &$ergtpmcinntd)t) has the colour of heaven, our 
future (funfttg) dwelling (bie £Bcf)nuna,, repeat the genitive), and the 
rose (bie 9?cfc), the queen of flowers, is the emblem (£>a£ <Sinnbttt>) 
of beauty (bie @d)on^eit) and of joy (t>te -gteube). You (9)?an) see 
all that personified (ttertt)irf(ict)t) in seeing the beautiful Amelia 
(2CmaUe). — How beautiful is the fresh verdure (t>a$ junge frifcl>c 
©run) ! It is salutary (roofyl tfyun*) to our eyes, and has the colour 
of hope (bte £effnun$), our most faithful (tteu, repeat the genitive) 
friend (fern.), who never deserts (wrfaffen*) us, not even in death 
(tm Sobe). — One word more my dear friend. — What is your plea- 
sure ? — I forgot to tell you to present my compliments to your 
mother. Tell her, if you please, that I regret (bebauern) not having 
been at home when lately she honoured (beefyten) me with her visit. 
— I thank you for her (in tfyrem 9?amen), I shall not fail. — Farewell 
then. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



HUNDREDTH LESSON.— §KtibcxtBtt tztixoxt. 

OF THE ADVERB. 

We have hitherto shown by numerous examples for 
the practice of learners, the place which the adverb 
is to occupy in a sentence. Let us now determine the 
place of the adverb by* standard rules. 

As the adverb modifies the signification of the verb, 
it should always be near it, particularly the negative 
Ittcfyt, which, if misplaced, would entirely change the 
meaning of a phrase. Ex. 

I have not the honour to know 3d) fyafce tttcfyt fctc (Sfyre, (Sic $U 
you. fennen. 

And: 
I have the honour not to know 3cf) Fmbe t>tc (Sfjre, @ie mcf)t |tt 

fennen. 



339 

Rules 

1st, The adverb precedes the adjective, the meaning 
of which it modifies. Ex. din tt>al)rbaft guter SJtatm, a 
truly good man ; etne tturfltrf) gttte ©elegen^eit, a truly 
good opportunity ; exit fefyr ctrttge^ Mint), a very good 
child. 

2d, It follows the imperative and precedes the infi- 
nitive to which it relates. Ex. 9?eben ©te laut, speak 
aloud ; fprerf)en ©te nid)t fo fdfnteft, do not speak so quick- 
ly; fcfyretben ©te [cmgfam, fo tt>erbett ©te fcfyon fcfyretben, 
write slowly, and you will write well ; id) bttte ©te, 
tttd)t ju fcfytteU ju fcfyretfcett, pray, do not write too fast. 

3d, It follows the simple tense of the verb, but pre- 
cedes it when the sentence depends on a conjunction. 
Ex. 3d) fage e£ 3fynen fret fyerau^, I tell you frankly ; 
id) tiexftehe ©te nid)t, n>ett ©te ju fcfynett fprecfyett, I do 
not understand you, because you speak too fast (Les- 
son LXIX.) ; er fotmttt nm gefyn Utyr 9Korgen3 a Don ba 
jurttrf, he returns from there at ten o'clock in the morn- 
ing (Lesson XL VII.) ; tt>emt ©te tcutgfam rebetett, fo tt>ttr* 
be id) ©te ^erjletjert, if you spoke slowly I should under- 
stand you. 

4th, In compound tenses it precedes the past parti- 
ciple. Ex. (it fydtte laut getefen, wernt ©te itjn ofter baju 
attgefyalten fatten, he would have read aloud, if you 
had oftener engaged him to do so ; id) bin fefyott ba ge* 
ttJefen,. I have already been there (Lesson XLI.) ; id) 
fyabe tfytt fcorgeftew gefefyen, I saw him the day before 
yesterday. 

5th, It follows the case of the verb, but precedes it 
when it is a partitive, or joined to an indefinite article. 
Ex. %d) faf) ttjtt geftew, I. saw him yesterday ; er t)at e£ 
ttttr fo eben gegeben, he has just now given it to me ; id) 
ttritt Hfti 3t)ttett morgen fcfyttfen, I will send it to you to- 
morrow (Lesson XXVIII.) ; fyafl £)U mattcfymal S?al$tu* 
cfyer au^beffern laffen ? hast thou sometimes had cravats 
mended I id) fyabe mattcfymat tt>eld)e au^bejfern taflen, I have 

a ttm jefjtt Xtf)X SftovgettS, is an adverbial phrase, and all sorts of adverbial 
expressions, or compound adverbs, as they may be called, follow the rules oi 
simple adverbs. 



340 

sometimes had some mended (Lesson XLIV.) ; fyabett 
©te je einen ©ephanten gefeben ? have you ever seen an 
elephant ? id) babe me einen gefeben, I have never seen 
one ; er fyatte btefen SSRorgen fetn ©e(b, he had no money 
this morning ; er trdgt gem einen gro$en £>nt, he likes to 
wear a large hat. 

6th, It precedes the case of the verb when governed 
by a preposition. Ex. 3d) tt)ttl tt)tt morgen ju 3t)nen fd)t* 
&etl, I will send him to you to-morrow (Lesson 
XXVIII.) ; ffnb ©te tange bet ntetnem SSater gebKeben ? 
have you stayed long with my father (Lesson XL VII.) ? 
id) bin eine ©tnnbe Icing bet tfym geblteben, I have stayed 
with him a full hour (Lessons XL VII. and XL VIII.) ; 
ttrir fpracfyen fo eben Don Sfynen, we have just spoken of 
you ; fonnen ©te l)ente ju mtr fommen ? can you come to 
me to-day? 

PLACE OF THE NEGATIVE nidjt 

Rules. 

1st, It likewise follows the simple tense and the 
case of the verb, when there is one, but precedes the 
infinitive and the past participle. Ex. %d) tterftefye bte>* 
fen 5D?ann nicfyt, I do not understand that man ; ber 9Kamt 
\)dt ben goffer ntcfyt, the man has not the trunk ; ber 
jnnge 5D?enfcf) Oungltng) fyctt tbn ntcfyt, the young man has 
it not (Lesson IX.) ; ©te effen ntcfyt, you do not eat ; id) 
ijabe tf)tt ntcfyt gefyabt, I have not had it (Lesson XLII.) ; 
er ttult ntcfyt arbetten, he does not wish to work ; id) babe 
tfyn ntcfyt gefefyen, I have not seen him ; id) t>a6e fte ntdfjt 
gefattnt, I have not known them (Lesson XLIV.) ; id) 
t)6re ©te, aber fcerftefye ©te ntcfyt, I hear, but do not un- 
derstand you (Lesson XL VI.) ; id) gebe e$ tfym mrf)t, I 
do not give it to him ; fTe Iteben jTcfy x\id)t, they do not 
love each other ; tdb fclf)metd)fe mtr mcfyt, I do not flatter 
myself; jTe fefyen etnanber ntcbt dbnttcfy, they do not re- 
semble each other (Lesson LXXXVL). 

Obs. A. When the negative sentence is preceded 
or followed by an affirmative one, nid)t precedes the 
case of the verb, but if the affirmative sentence con- 
tains another nominative with aber, the negative fol- 



341 

lows the general rule. Ex. %d) babe nid)t btefen, fbtt* 
tern jenen, I have not the latter, but the former ; er b&t 
Dtefeg, abet nid)t jene^,. he has the latter, but not the 
former (Lesson XL) ; id) babe Sbren Qui nid)t, abex mem 
SSruber bat tbn, it is not I who have your hat, but my 
brother. 

Obs. B. A negative, not depending on the nomina- 
tive of the verb, precedes the word the sense of which 
it modifies. Ex. @r arbettetben ganjen £ag nid)t, he does 
not work during the whole day ; and man arbettet nid)t 
ben ganjen Zag,, one does not work all day. 

2d, The case of the verb being governed by a pre- 
position, ntd)t, like other adverbs (Rule 6 above), pre- 
cedes it. Ex. dx til ntcbt jU £aufe, he is not at home 
(Lesson XXYI.) ; id) fitrcfyte mid) nid)t i)or tym, I do not 
fear him (Lesson LXX.). 

3d, It follows # the adverbs of time, but precedes all 
other adverbs, as adverbs of quality, of place, &c. 
Ex. 3d) axbeite bente nid)t f I do- not work to-day ; er 
fd)reibt nid)t fd)on, he does not write well ; er tft tticfyt 
ba, he is not there ; id) gefye nid)t bafyin, I do not go 
thither. 

4th, It follows the adverb nod). Ex. 3d) fcttt nod) 
ntcbt ba geroefen, I have not yet been there ; id) bin nod) 
tttrf)t bet ibm geroefen, I have not yet been at his house 
(Lesson XLL). The following sentences, however, 
must be distinguished from each other : tt>olfen ©te nod) 
n t d) t ettx>a$ effen ? will you not eat anything yet ? and 
molten ©ie n t d) t nod) etnoa$ efien ? will you not eat 
anything more ? In the latter sentence nid)t modifies 
the signification of nod) ettt)a3. 

Obs. C. The negative precedes the word and) f when 
the sentence is both interrogative and negative, but 
follows it when the sentence is simply negative. Ex. 
S3m id) nid)t and) ba gewefen ? have I not also been 
there ? nnb id) and) nid)t, nor I either ; unb er and) nid)t 
nor he either. 

To pretend _o be ill. \ J ^ ^ !ta ? ! f ^n*. 

^ I f (Sagen, man fct Iran!. 



342 

This boy always pretends to be 2)tcfct jtnobe gtbt ftcf) tmmet fftt 

ill; but when we sit down to fronf on* ; otletn roenn man $u 

dinner, he is generally well Stfcbe Gfibt, ft tfl cr o,cii>ebn(icb 

again. ttu-ebet bevgeftettt (rvicK't gefunftjL 

To be said. t ® o 1 1 eir*. 

He is said to have suffered ship- f (?r fell on t>cr finite *cn (Sicilten 
wreck near the coast of Sicily. ©cbiffbrud) (jcfitfeji hotvn. 

Out of all his property he is said f (5r fell yen olten feinen £>£bfdtij 
to have saved nothing but an feiten rtcbtS a{? etnen (cercn 9?eU 
empty portmanteau. fefocf Cji'rettet fyoben. 

OF TENSES. 

1st, The present tense is frequently substituted for 
the imperfect, to enliven the narrative and excite at- 
tention. This is sometimes done in English, but not 
so often as in German. Ex. 

Imagine my horror ! Yesterday £)enft (5*ucn metnen (Scbrecfen ! id) 

I went with my child to the cjebe gefrorn nut meinem .fttnbe 

gate of the town, to see the »cr bo£ Sfjor, urn ben ^nftbotlcn 

ascent of the balloon. . We oufiretcjen px fcfyen, Fonune mil 

were soon surrounded by the tbm tn£ ©ebroncje, petlicre e£ ctu$ 

crowd, when suddenly I lost ten ?fuQen, unb ftnbe eS crjr nod) 

sight of my child, and it was ctner (gtunbe betnobe $erbtucff unb 

not till an hour afterwards $ertreten mtebcr (for: id) cjtncj, 

that I found it, trampled un- feint, ttettot and font), 
der foot and nearly crushed 
to death. 

I now ascend the mountain ; a 3egt erfftmme tcb ben *3ctcj ; etn 

deep valley unfolds itself to ttefes Zhal eroffnet ftcb mctnem 

my delighted eyes ; a limpid ferfebenben 2fugc ; ^nufeben gotten 

stream murmurs among the ©cbitfeben rtefett etn Horet s -Bocb, 

verdant shrubs ; sheep are gu metnen T$ix\ien mctben Conuuet, 

grazing at my feet, and I be- unb bnrcb ben fernen $Botb btes 

hold the last rays of the set- cben fid) bte fe£ten (Strobten bet 

ting sun breaking through the ftnfenben (Sonne, 
deep foliage of the distant 
wood. 

2d, The present tense is employed for the future, 
when that time is indicated by another word in the 
sentence. Ex. 

We leave to-morrow for Berlin, 5Dlora,en retfen rcnr nod) 33'crltn ; in 
but 1 shall be back within a ocbt Sogen fcmmc tcb obct ttrieber, 
week, and I shall then cer- unb bonn befuebe tcb £>td) gettng 
tainly come to see you. (for rcerben mtr retfen, merbe id) 

ttriebetfommen, &c). 



343 

I shall be back in a moment. 3d) fomme Cjtetd) rmeber. 

We scale the castle this very £)tefe$ @d)top Ctfteigen nut- in btefet 

night. 9iacbt. 

I have the keys, we kill JDet ©d)(uffc( bin id) mfld)ttg ; 

writ etnvorben 
The guards, and deliver thee Die ^uter, reifen £)td) au$ Reiner 
from thy prison. jammer. 

(© d) 1 1 1 e t ' $ ^aria (Stuart), 

1st, The imperfect has already been touched upon 
in Lesson LVIL It is the historical tense of the Ger- 
mans. Ex. 

Scipio Africanus was in the ha- ©cipto, ber 2Cftifancr, fagte, er roftre 

bit of saying, he never was me rocmget cbne 95cfd)afttgun^ 

less idle than when he had a($ roenn et md)t$ ^tt tt)un fjd'tte. 

nothing to do ; and in fact his SBtrfttd) ti^at: er aud) me mebt ba 

busiest time was that which fd)dfrta,t, ati in bet (Stnfamfett ; 

he spent in solitude. For it fcenn fjier fann er fetnen wtcbttgen 

was there he meditated over ltnterner)mungen unb d5efdbaftcn 

his great enterprises and his nad) ; bier, tm ©d)0fie bet Sfcufye, 

future deeds. In the bosom entruatf er ^ptane gum £Bof)t fcined 

of retirement, he traced plans 93aterfanbeg, unb l)ict, entfernt 

for the happiness of his coun- t>on bem ^rctfe fctner SDtttlmtget, 

try; and there, far from the untcrfjtett er fid) etngtg unl) aftein 

intercourse of his fellow-citi- nut bem <3iMt berjetben* 
zens, he devoted his thoughts 
to the promotion of their wel- 
fare. 

2d, It is used to narrate an action or event of which 
the narrator was an eye-witness, or to express an ac- 
tion in reference to another which was either simulta- 
neous wi^h, or antecedent to it (Lesson LVIL). 

Yesterday a child was drowned, ©eftern ettrctnf em jtinb, crt$ id) auf 

while I was on the bridge. ber Stucfe jfanb. 

He granted my request because ®c geroflfjtte metne SSitte, mil a fte 

he found it just. gered)t femb. 

I was playing with my pupil, 3d) fptcttc nut meinem StytxtiQt, alt 

when the news was brought man mir bie 92ad)rid)t fcrad)te. 

to me. 

1st, The perfect tense is used to express an action 
or event as perfectly ended without any reference to 
another circumstance, and when the narrator was not 
an eye-witness of it. Ex. } 



344 

Were you yesterday at the con- ©tnt> @-'u gejtern tm Concert getw* 

cert ! roefen ? 

Has the army been beaten 1 3fx fcte 2(rmee gefcfylagen rcorfcen ? 

Has anybody been drowned ? 3ft Semcmb crtrunEcn ? 
Were you ever in Vienna 1 ©int> ©te je in SBiefl QCtvefcn ? 

2d, The imperfect may even be used when the nar- 
rator has not witnessed the event ; but then he must 
take care to add to his narrative a phrase like : fagte 
er, he said ; fagt man, it is said, &c. Ex. 

They say, that day before yester- SSorgcftern, fa g t m an, roar em 
day there was a great feast in grofeS Jeft in t>er ©tafct. 
the town, 

They say there was a battle on Den fiinf unt) $tt>an$tgjten wrigcn 
the 25th of last month. SWonats, f?cipt e$, ftet etne ©d)lad)t 

t>ot. 

Obs. D. We have already seen (Lesson XXXIV.) 
that we cannot say with the English, I am writing, I 
do write, both of which must be expressed by the only 
present id) fcfyret&e, I write ; nor, I was writing, I did 
write, both of which must be expressed by the only 
imperfect id) fdjrieb, I wrote (Lesson LVIL). Expres- 
sions such as the following : When you come to learn, 
he is to write, to go, I am to have it, fyc., cannot be 
translated literally in German. In such cases we use 
the future when mere futurity, and the verb {often when 
necessity or a wish is to be expressed. Ex. 

When you come to learn French. £Bann ©te fran^fifd) fernen werfcetu 

He is to write. (5t nnrb fcbretben. # 

Am I to go thither % ©oil td) f)tna,ef)en ? 

He is to go thither. (Sr foil fnnqefyen. 

Am I to have this book 1 ? ©oil id) fctcfeS SBttd) f)akn? 

Am I to give you a pen ] ©oil id) Sbnen etne Jefcer geben ? 

I was to speak for them all. 3d) follte fur 2(lle fptecben. 

He was to arrive on the 20th. (£r follte t>cn aroan^iten anfemmetu 

Obs. E. At the end of a 'phrase we sometimes omit 
the auxiliary of the perfect and pluperfect tenses, w r hen 
the phrase that follows it begins with another auxi- 
liary. Ex. 



Though I have never been in 
Paris, I am nevertheless ac- 
quainted with all that is 
going on there. 



345 

'£)& tcf) Qtctd) me gu $ari$ gewefen 
bin, bin id) bed) son attcm un* 
terticfytet, wa$ bafctbft »ota,e()t ; 
or, 
£)b id) gtctcb ntemate $u $)ari$ geroe* 
fen, fo bin id) bed) t>cn allcm un* 
terrtdjtct, n?a$ bafelbft »erger;t. 
As he did not answer me, I wrote^ £)a ct mir nid)t cjcantroortet (bat), 
to him no more. Ijabe id) tfym md)t mef)t gefdjrie* 

ben. 
The enemy having" been beaten, 9?ad)bem bet $etnb a,efd)(a$en wots 
it is to be hoped that the war ten (ift), tft $u fyejfen, bap bet: 
will be at an end. ifttico, geenbtgt fetn nncb. 

exercises. 238. *» 

Have you seen your niece ]— Yes, she is a very good girl who 
writes well and speaks German still better: therefore she is hon- 
oured and loved by every one. — And her brother, what is he doing I 
— Do not speak to me of him, he is a naughty (bofe) boy, who 
writes always badly and speaks German still worse : he is there- 
fore loved by nobody. He is very fond of dainties (ber qute 33ifyen) ; • 
but he does not like books. Sometimes he goes to bed at broad 
day-light (bet bellem Sao/), and pretends to be ill ; but when we sit 
down to dinner, he is generally better again. He is to study 
physic (bie 2Cr$nctfunft) ; but he has not the slightest inclination for 
it (oar feine Suft ba$u). — He is almost always talking of his dogs 
which he loves passionately (letbcnfd)aft(td)). — His father .is ex- 
tremely (au^ercrbentlicb) sorry for it. The young simpleton (bet 
2Mebfinma,e) said lately to his sister: "I shall enlist (Solbat roers 
ben* cber fid) anroerben faff en*) as soon as peace is proclaimed (ofs 
fentlid) befannt mad)en ober publtctten). 

•239. 

My dear father and my dear mother dined yesterday with some 
friends at (in dat.) the (hotel) King of Spain (t>en (Spanien). — Why 
do you always speak French and never German 1 — Because I am too 
bashful. — You are joking; is a Frenchman ever bashful ] — I have 
(a) keen appetite : give me something good to eat. — Have you any 
money 1 ? — No, sir. — Then I have nothing to eat for you. — Will you 
not let me have some on credit 1 I pledge (oetpfemben) my honour. 
— That is too little. — What, sir ! 

My dear friend, lend me a ducat (ber -Ducat, gen. en). — Here are 
two instead of one. — How much I am obliged to you ! — I am al- 
ways glad when I see you, and I find my happiness in yours. — Is 
this house to be sold 1 — Do you wish to buy it] — Why not ? — Why 
does your sister not speak ] — She would speak if she were not al- 
ways so absent ($crftreut). — I like pretty anecdotes (bie 2(necbete) ; 
they season (tt?ut$en) conversation (bie Untcrtjaltun^) and amuse (be* 
15* 



346 



tufttgen) every body. — Pray, relate me seme. Look, if you please, 
at page 389 of the book (in t>em <Bud)e) which I lent you, and (fc) 
you will find some. — To-morrow I shall set out for Hanau ; but in 
a fortnight (in mcqebn Sagen) I shall be back again, and then 1 
shall come to see you and your family. — Where is your sister at 
present ? — She is in Berlin, and my brother is in Leipzic. — This 
little woman is said to be going to marry the counseller N., your 
friend; is it true"? — I have not heard of it. — What news is there 
of our great army 1 — It is said to be lying (ftcfjen*) between the 
Rhine and the Weser. All that the courier told me seeming very 
probable (roaf)rfcbcin(tcb), I went home immediately, wrote some 
letters, and departed for Paris. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



HUNDRED AND FIRST LESSON. 

Action. 



-fyntibzxt ntib erste 



To begin to laugh, to weep, to 
cry, &c. 

To pledge. 
To pawn. 

To destroy by fire and sword. 

To look out of the window. 

I do not know whether this so- 
ciety will admit me. 

After ten o'clock you will not 
find me at home. 

The weathei is clearing up. 

My hand is asleep. 

To smell of garlick. 

To smell of wine. 

The sermon is over. * 

That is the question. 

He has nearly fallen. 

I did not find a living soul 



2Cnfangcn $u focben, $u roeincn, $u 

febreten u. f. n>. 
SSerpfanDen* 
SSerfcgcn. 

Sfflit jfeuer unb ©cfiroert server en. 
2(u$ fcem Jenifer fetKji*. 
3d) wetfi nid)t, eb Mefc ©efellfcljaft 

mid) n>irt> fyaben rcoUen. 
t 9tab gef)n ilbr treffen (Sic micf) 

nicbt meftr $u £aufe. 
£)a* "Better beitert fid) auf. 
t Petite £>ant> tjt etngefefytafen. 
hla&f ^ncb(aud) rtcd)en*. 
9lad) SBe'tn rtecben*. 
£)ie ^>rct>igt ift au& 
(S$ ijt tic grage (c$ fomnit fcarauf 

an), 
f (Sr ware bctnabe gefallcn. 
3d) babe feinc lebenfctge @ee(e ange* 

troffen. 



To wee* wz7A. 2Cntreffen* (Part, past, getrof* 

fen. Imperf. traf). 

You have the wrong key. (Sic baben ben unredbtcn @d)(uffc(. 

He is now on the road. (£r iff je|t auf bem 2&ege. 

Give me a clean plate, if you ®eben @tc mir gcf&tligft eincn rets 
please. nen Seller. 



347 

VARIOUS WAYS OF TRANSLATING THE VERB, TO PUT. 

To put one's hand into one's 3n tie £afd)e gteifen*. 

pocket. 
To put one's son to school. ©etnen ®oljn in tie (Sd)ule t f) U tt * 

(6 r t tt g e n *). 
To jom^ one out to prenticeship 3cmant)cn in tie Sefyte t^un*. 

(to bind one prentice). 
To put to account. 3tt SKecftnung § t e I) e n *.- 

To jdm* to flight. Sn.ttc S(ud)t i a cj c n (otcr f 6)1 as 

9 e n *). 
To j»^ one's hat on. (Semen £ut a it f f e % e tt. 

To jow^ an end. ©in (Snte m a d) e n. 

VARIOUS WAYS OF TRANSLATING THE VERB, TO SET. 

To set pen on paper (to take the Die Jeter etgtetfen*. 

pen in hand). 
To set sail. ttnter (Seget g e \) e n * (a 6 f e 9 e t n). 

To s^ in order (to regulate, 3n Dttnung b r i n g e n *. 

settle). 
To set something on fire. (StttmS an$uttten (a n ft e df C tt). 

To set to work. ©id) an tie 2tv0eit m a d) e tt. 

IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS DEPENDING 

1st, On the use or omission of an article. 

I have read Schiller. 3d) fycifce ten ©emitter gelefen. 

I He broke his neck. & f)at ten $ai$ gebrodjen. 

Nature is the best instructress. £) i e £)Mut ift tie befte Sefyterinn. 

! Man is mortal. £) e r sjEcnfd) ift fterbltd). 

Human life is short. S) a $ menfd)Ud)C 2eben ift fut$. 

Vice plunges its followers into £>aS gaffer ftuqt feine 2(nf)attget: 
perdition. in£ ^erterben. 

Eloquence is powerful. <D i e SBerettfamtVtt ift mad)tig. 

Poetry is enchanting. .£> i e >Dtcbtfunft ift be$aubemt. 

Government. S) i e Kegterung* 

1 History teaches us experience. £) i e ($5efd)td)te lefirt un$ (Srfafyruttg. 

Saint Paul. £) e r beittge $pau(u£. 

Most of his contemporaries. £) i e metften feiner 3eitgenojfen. 

In town. 3n t e r ©tatt. 

To go to church. 3n t i e ^irdje gefyen*. 

TAe East Indies. £>ftintien. 

1 The West Indies. SBcfttnttetu 

Before the conclusion of the dra- SSor (Snttgung teg <Sd)aufptele$. 
ma. 

2d, On the use of a pronoun. 

« I take the liberty of writing to 3d) ner)me m t r tie gretfyeit, ait 
you. ©te ju fd)t:et6en. 






348 



How goes it 1 How do you do ? 

Very well. 

I have bought a hat. 

Let us go on a party of pleasure. 

He is quite at home. 
He is very conceited. 
I have it in my hands. 
I have it before my eyes. 
I consent to it, (willingly or with 
pleasure). 



3d, On the use of a verb. 



2Bte a,ef)t'g 3 r) n e n ? 

(Sg get)t mtr febr roofjl. 

3d) bot^ m i r ctnen £ut cjefciufL 

SBtr roellen ung fyeute etn 23ero,ntU 

gen t>erfd)affen. 
6r mod)t ft d) ' g becmem. 
(£r bttfeet ft d) met etn. 
3d) r>a(>e eg in £anfc)en. 
3d) babe eg »cr 2Cucjcn. 
3d) bin e g jwjrtcfcen. 



Who has sairf mass to-day ? 
I «m with you in a moment. 
We shall have a storm. 

How is that I 

I do not scruple to do it. 

What do you think of it ? 
They will not dissuade me from 

it. 
To buy a lottery ticket* 
To be born. 
To bring forth. 
To doubt (to call in question). 
To Zay the cloth. 
To set down (to compose)* 



2Ber foot fjeute t>tc 9#effe gelefen? 

3d) font me Qletd). 

aQBir mermen etn ©witter b e f o m * 

m e n. 
£Cte 9 e r> t bag $u ? 
3d)trage fein 93et>en£en, 

eg gu tbun. 
2Bag batten @te fcat>en ? 
3d) taffe mtr bag nid)t augreben. 

3n fcte Sotrette f e fs e n. 
3ur 2Bett t o m m e n *• 
3ur 2£ett b r t n cj e n *. 
Sn Snxifel $ t e f) e n *. 
£)en £tfd) fcecfen. 
©cfyrtftltd) auffe|en. 



4th, On the use of a preposition. 



How is your health ? 

To land, to go ashore. 

His affairs are in a bad state. 

I bet six crowns. 

I forgive you. 

To esteem one's self happy. 

To make an enemy of some one. 

I fear to be burdensome to you. 



5Bte ftef)t eg u m 3fyre ©cfunbr)cit ? 

11 n g Cant) treten*. 

(£g fief)t itbet m 1 1 tbm aug. 

3cb nxtte u m fed)g Skater. 

3d) t)atte eg 3bncn i u cuit. 

©id) fur cjtudttd) batten. 

(Sid) Semonben stint gcinfce madjen* 

3d) furd)tc S^ncn $ur Caft §u fallen 



OBSERVE ALSO THE FOLLOWING IDIOMS. 



To prescribe milk-diet. 
To copy fair. 

Of one's own accord. 
We shall not live to see it. 
It is all over with me. 



© t c $0tf(d)fur serertmen. 

3ng 9?ctne fcfyretben* (rein abfd)tei* 

ben*). 
2fug freien (Stttcfen. 
2£tr roerfcen eg ntd)t erteben. 
@g ijl urn mtd) gefdjerjen. 



349 

My head turns round (is giddy). (S$ nnrb nut fdjnrinbftd). 

I faint. 3d) befemme cine £)f)nmacf)t 

I thought you were a German by 3d) fytelt <Ste flit etnen Qefcevnen 

birth. £)cutfd)etn 

To live on bad terms with some Uneinta, nut Semanbcm le&en. 

one. 
To follow an unprofitable trade, ©id) mit breblofen itimftcn abgcben*. 
This seems reasonable. &at (aHt ftd) fyoten (fcf)etnt tternunf? 

tig). 

To lose one's reputation. (Semen cuiten Seamen ttettieren*. 

By means of. 5DI tttelft or t>ermittetft (go- 

- vern the genitive). 

He has succeeded by means of SScrnuttctfl SfyrcS SBciftantc^ ift eg 

your assistance. tbm gclunqen. 

We reached the shore by means 2Bir famen mttteljt (tternrittelft) etne$ 
of a boat. .ftafyneS an$ lifer. 

Towards (to meet). (5 n tg e 9 e n (governs the dative). 
We went to meet his father. SGBtt o,ina,en fctnem SSater enta,egen. 

Against (in opposition to). 3 u «) 1 b e r. 
Never act against the laws. #anble nte ben ($efef$cn $urc>ibet. 

Opposite. ©eo^entUer. 

My house is opposite his. s^cin £au£ ftefyt bem fetntgen ejecjen* 

liber. 

Obs. The prepositions etttgegen, guttuber, and gegett* 
fiber are always placed after the case which they 
govern. 

Next to (after). 01 a dt) ft (governs the dative). 

Next to you I like him 33st. 9?acf)jt Sfyncn tft ct mir bet Stcbfte. 

Together with (besides, inclu- Sttebft, fammt (govern the dative), 
ding). 

He lost the ducat together with (St oerfor ben Du eaten fammt ben 
the crowns, sold the garden Sbalern, wtraufte ben (fatten 
including the house. nebft bem Jg^aufc. 

If I were now to question you as 2Benn id) @tc jcgt fraqte, rote tcb in 
I used to do at the beginning unfern erjtcn Secttencn $u thim 
of our lessons, what would pfleqte (n?te id) anfangS gu tfyun 
you answer] pflcgte), voa$ rourben <Ste ants 

roorten ? 



350 

We found these questions at first 2Btr fanben anfanqS btefe $racjen 
rather ridiculous, but full of ettvn* lacberUd) ; allctn t)dl SSer? 
confidence in your method, we traucn auf 3f)rc £ebtatt, beantz 
* answered as well as the small tverteten ttur btefelben, fo gut e$ 
quantity of words and rules we uns bet Heine SSettatf) pen 2£b'rs 
then possessed allowed us. tern unt> <Kecje(n ($)ttnctpten), ben 

ttrit bamate batten, cjeftattete (ets 
taubt'e), 

We were not long- in finding" out 2£tt fyaben bait) gemcrft, baf tie 
that those questions were cal- 5 rci Q en barauf beteebnet tuaten, 
culated to ground us in the un6 turd) bte retbetfprecbenben 
rules, and to exercise us in 2fntroertcn, t>ie rutt cjcpungcn 
conversation, by the contradic- rcaren, batauf $u geben, tie ^rtns 
tory answers we were obliged ctpten ($Regc(n) ein$ufd)a'rfen unb 
to make. un$ in bet llntetbaltuncj $u ttben, ' 

We can now almost keep up a 3e£t fonncn w'xv un$ betnafye wlU 
conversation in German. fommen auf beutfd) (tm 3)eutfd)cn) 

untetbdteru 

This phrase does not seem to us liefer (Sag fcfyeint un£ ntd)t (egtfd) 
logically correct. rtcbtiq. 

We should be ungrateful if we ££tt tuoten unbanfbar, nxnn tv'xv 
allowed such an opportunity etne fo febone ©etecjenbeit pcrbeis 
to escape without expressing a/ ben lief'en, cbne Sbnen unfere 
our liveliest gratitude to you. lebbaftefTe £)anfbar£ett $u be$etcjen» 

In all cases, at all events. 2Cuf jet en Jail. 

The native, ber Qrtnqeberne ; 

the insurmountable difficulty, bte unubenu'tnb(td)e ^ctotertcjfett ; 

this energetic language, btefe enercjifebe (rraftrolle) (Sptacfye ; 

the acknowledgment, bte (£rfehntltd)Eett ; a 

the gratitude, the acknowledg- bte jDcmfbartett 
ment, 

exercises. 240. 

Will you drink a cup of coffee 1 — I thank you, I do not like 
coffee. — Then you will drink a glass of wine ?— I have just drunk 
some. — Let us take a walk. — Willingly; but where shall we go 
to 1 — Come with me into my aunt's garden ; we shall there find a 
very agreeable society. — I believe it (Das fjtaube id) a/tn) ; but the 
question is whether this agreeable society will admit me. — You 
are welcome every where. — What ails you, my friend ? — How do 
you like (2Btc febmeeft Sbnen) that wine] — I like it very well (betrs 
Itcb) ; but I have drunk enough (jut ©enltCje cber aenug) of it. — 
Drink once more. — No, too much is unwholesome (ungefunb) ; I 
know my constitution (bte 9?atur). — Do not fall. — What is the mat- 
ter with you 1 — I do not know ; but my head is giddy ; I think I 
am fainting. — I think so also, for you look almost like a dead per- 
son. — What countryman are you 1 — I am a Frenchman. — You 

a (Stfemttltcbfett is derived from erfennen, to acknowledge. £)(Htfbarfett 
txpreeses both gratitude an 1 ack nowledgment. 



351 

speak German so well that I took you for a German by birth. — You 
are jesting. — Pardon me, I do not jest at all. — How long have you 
been in Germany ] — A few days. — In earnest? — You doubt it per- 
haps, because I speak German ; I knew it before I came to Ger- 
many. — How did you manage to learn it so well ] — I did like the 
prudent starling (fcer ^tciar). 

Tell me, why you are always on bad terms with your wife (Me 
gxau) 1 and' why do yo.u engage in unprofitable trades] — It costs 
so much trouble (Qt$ r"efret fc met 9Mur)e) to get an employment (big 
man etn — befontmt). — And you have a good one and neglect it (c$ 
fcintanfegen ctcv tfernacblaffiqen). Do you not think of the future 1 
— Now allow me to speak also (3e§t faff en ©ii mid) ciud) refceti). 
All you have just said seems reasonable, but it is not my fault (eg 
tft nid)t tnetnc Scbulb), if I have lost my reputation ; it is that of my 
wife (metne $rau tft (Scbulb tciran) ; she has sold my finest clothes, 
my rings, and my gold watch. I am full of debts (t>ett Ccbulfcen 
fetn*), and I do not know what to do (uxtsicb anfancjen efcer tbun fell). 
— I will not excuse (entfebuttigen) your wife ; but I know that you 
have also contributed (bettrciqen*) to your ruin (fcas 93erfcerben)* 
Women are generally good when they are left so. 

241. DIALOGUE. 

The master. If I were now to ask you such questions as I did 
at the beginning of our lessons, (viz.) Have you the hat which 
my brother has 1 am I hungry 1 has he the tree of my brother's 
garden ] &c. w T hat would you answer? 

The pupils. We are obliged (ge$nutngen) to confess that we 
found these questions at first rather ridiculous ; but full of confi- 
dence in your method, we answered as well as the small quantity 
of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were in 
fact not long in finding out that these questions were calculated to 
ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in conversation, by the 
contradictory answers we were obliged to make. But now that we 
can almost keep up a conversation in the energetic language which 
you teach us, we should answer : It is impossible that we should 
have the same hat which your brother has, for two persons cannot 
have one and the same thing. To (2(uf with accus.) the second 
question w r e should answer, that is impossible for us to know 
whether you are hungry or not. As to the last, we should say : 
that there is more than one tree in a garden, and in telling us that 
he has the tree of the garden, the phrase does not seem to us logi- 
cally correct. At all events we should be ungrateful if we allowed 
6uch an opportunity to escape, without expressing our liveliest 
gratitude to you for the trouble you have taken in arranging those 
wise combinations (Huge ££ege etnfebfacjen* efcet (Sombincittenen mas 
d)en), to ground us almost imperceptibly (betnabe unmerHicb) in the 
rules, and exercise us in the conversation of a language which, 
taught in any other way, presents (t>ctrbtcten*) to foreigners, and 
even to natives, almost insurmountable difficulties. (See end of 
Lesson XXXIV.) 



352 

HUNDRED AND SECOND LESSON.— finribtxl ttttb 
^xodtc Cection. 

To avoid death, with which he Urn bent Sebe $u entge|en, bcr tbm 
was threatened, he took to bewrftant) (roemit cr bebrol)Ct 
flight. war), nabm (cranff) cr bte $tud)t. 

I warrant you (I answer for it), f 3d) ftelje Sbncn bafur. 

So goes the world. f ©o gebt es in bcr SS?ett. 

But must one not be a fool to 2tbcr mftf'te man ntcbt etn 9?arr fetn, 
remain in a place bombarded roenn man an etnem t>en Ungarn 
by Hungarians ? bombarbtrtcn £)rte btetben roollte ? 

The deuce take the Hungarians f £)af Die ttngarn, roekbe feme 
who give no quarter ! ©nabe geben (nxlcbe gar ntci)t 

fefyenen), beim ^enfer rcaren ! 



Will yon be my guest ] Sweden ©tc metn ®a(! fetn ? 

Will you dine with me ? SQBolicn ©te nut nut effen ? 

r Scmanbcn 311 ®aft bitten*. 
To invite some one to dinner. < 3emanben gum •SQtfittagejfcn etnfas 

C ben*. 
I have ordered your favourite f 3d) babe 3f)tc Setbfpetfe $uberettcn 

dish. laffen. 

There is nothing like a good & gebt md)t$ ilbcr cin gute$ <Stucf 
piece of roast meat. SSratcn. 

The roast meat, bcr SBraten, bag ©cbratcne ; 

the guilty, bcr Scbulbtge ; ' 

the innocent, bcr Unjcbulbtgc ; 

a good (jovial) companion,, cin Utjrtger ^rubcr ; 
the husband, bet 9J?ann ((Sfyemann), 

C (Stncn <§fe( an etner ^ad)e baben* 
To be disgusted with a thing. «? (Stner @acbe (genitive) uberbruff^ 



Who hazards gains. > f grifel) gcrcagt tft f)at(> gcroennen. 

Nothing venture nothing have. J (Sprtcbrcort.) 

To strike (in speaking of light- f (Stnfcbtagen*. 
ning). 

The lightning has struck. f (SS r)at etngefcWagen. 

The lightning struck the ship. f £)cr SBtt£ febtug tn$ @d)tff. 

While my brother was on the 2((6 mctn *8rubcr auf bcr off en en 

open sea a violent storm rose (Sec (ebcr auf bem fjeben SDReere) 

unexpectedly; the lightning war, crbeb fici) (!am unoermuther) 

struck the ship which it set cin befttger (Sturm ; bcr <Bli§ 

on fire, and the whole crew feblug in* Scbtff, t>a$ cr onjtinbcs 

jumped into the sea to save re, unb t)a$ gan$e <Scbtff6t>cl5 

themselves by swimming. fpran^ (ftuqtc fkb) tn$ Sfleer, urn 

fid) nut ©cfonrimmen $u rettcm 



353 

He was struck with fright, (gr rtmrbe r-en (^cbrccfcn befallen 
when he saw that the fire (crfdjraf bcftig), a(S cr fat), bafj 
was gaining on all sides. tci5 Setter'- auf alien Sctten urn 

ft* artff. 
He did not know what to do. f (§r ttwfjte ntcbt, roo^u cr ficb ent* 

fdtftegen fetlte. 

it /, + i • • . C @r mecbtc nacbftnnen, n?tc cr wollte. 

He reflected in yam. £ gj; ffln „ ^^ -^ 

In vain. sSergebltcb, rergeben*, umfonft. 

To reflect (to hesitate). <^tcb befinnen* (Part, past, befen* 

nen). 
He hesitated no longer. f (5r befann fid) md)t fanger. 

I have not heard of him yet. 3d) babe tied) fetne 9^ad)rtcr>t t?cn 

tbm erbalten. 
My friend who was present told 9CRetn gretmfc, n>e(cber $ngegen roar, 
me all this. foot nur aflc$ biefes er$a()lt. 

What would have hecome of i SBic ware c$ nur ergangen ? 
me 1 i £Ba£ ware au$ nur geroorben ? 



A FEW MORE IDIOMS. 

It is a fortnight (a week) since SSteqebn (acbt) Sage fang bin id) 

I was out. ntcbt au?gcgangen. 

Will you not go out to-day ? ©tc roerben bed) fjeute auSgcfyen ? 
I would not importune you. 3d) null 3()ncn ntd)t befcbnxrltd) 

fallen. 
He has nothing to live upon, (St bat ntcbtS $u feben. 
I board and lodge him. 3d) gebe tfyrn freten Stfd) unb S&efy 5 

nung. 
The mystery will be discovered. £)te (Sacbe rturb feben an ben Sag 

femmctu 
They are going to lay the cloth. 20?an rmrb batb ben Stfd) beden. 
He lives high (feasts, eats, and (£r tpt unb trinft gut. 

drinks well). 
Have you done ? ©tnb <Ste ferttg ? 

That is his business. £)a mag cr $ufeben. 

To do one's best. ©cut #cu0erfte$ tbun*. 

He has assisted me. (Sr tft nur $ur £anb gcgangen. 

We must not be too particular. SBir mtijfen e$ (jo genau ntd)t neb* 

men. 
He is not to be blamed for not (Ei> ift ibm ntcbt gu ttcrbenfen, bap cr 

doing it. c$ ntcbt tr)Ut. 

The book is out of print ; it was &a$ 93ud) tft wrgrtfen ; e$ roar bet 

publised by N. 9?. ttcrlcgt. 

Will you please to take a plain Snellen (Sic nut etnem etnfadben 

supper with us % 2(bcnbcffen bit un£ furdeb (obet 

rorlteb) ncfymen ? 






354 

■ 

The general has been defeated ©er Sctb^ett tft ouf^ ' ^QUpt gcfdbfaf 
and the army routed. gen unt trie 2(rmee ufcer ten £aiu 

fen cjeruerfen werten. 

The angel, tor (Snget ; 

• the masterpiece, . toe ^ctftcrjlitcf ; 

her physiognomy, tbre (8eftcbT6triCtuug ; 

the expression. ter 2(u struct ; 

her shape, ibre ©eftatt ; 

the action, tie £antluncj ; 

the look, ter ftn&icf ; 

the contentment, tic 3ufriebenf)Ctt ; 

the respect, tie <£nrfurd)t ; 

the admiration, tie 5*enninfcming; 

the charm, the grace, tie ?(miuitb ; 
the demeanour, the manners, ta£ SBenebnten ; 

thin (slender), fetyemf ; 

fascinating (engaging), einnebment ; 

ravish ingly, gum (SntgMett ; 

uncommonly well, C]cm$ t)Crtreff(icf) ; 

perfectly well, t)Cllfomnicn. 
Her look inspires respect and 3br tfnbltcf flflfrt (Sbrfutd)t tint S3e- 
admiration. tDunteruncj ctn. 

Allow me, my lady, to introduce (Srfcmben ©te, gnatiqc $rau, tap 
to you Mr. G., an old friend id) Sbncn Jperrn r-on ©. alS einen 
of our family. often greunt nietnes ^aufes t>ers 

(WIe. 

1 am delighted to become ac- 3d) fteue mid) fcr)r, mein £err, 3bre 
quainted with you. S3efcinntfd)aft £U macben. 

I shall do all in my power to 3d) nxtte atleS $ftogUcbe tbun, urn 
deserve your good opinion. mid) Sbrer ©ercocjenrjett tDiirtta, 

3U tnacben. 

Allow me, ladies, to introduce to (Srfaubcn ©ie, metne £)amen, tap 
you Mr. B., whose brother has id) 3bnen £>errn son 23. rorftelle, 
rendered such eminent ser- teffm 23ruter Sbrem §3etter fo 
vices to your cousin. cjrejk Dienfte gelctftet bat. 

How happy we are to see you at 2£te febr fint rtrir erfreut, @ic bei 
our house ! un$ $u feben ! 

EXERCISES. 242. 

Why do you hide yourself? — I am obliged to hide myself, for it 
is all over with me if my father hears that I have taken to flight; but 
there was no other means (fcin antcrcg SWtttet ubrtg cter nicbt anter* 
mcq(td) fetn*) to avoid death, with which I was threatened. — You 
have been very wrong in leaving (»er(affen*) your regiment, and 
your father will be very angry (febr bofe cter gorntcj fein*) when he 
hears of it, I warrant you. — But must one not be a fool to remain 
in a place bombarded by Hungarians 1 — The deuce take the Hun- 
garians, who give no quarter ! — They have beaten and robbed (aufc 
pluntcrn) me, and (never) in my life have I done them any harm. 



355 

So goes the world, the innocent very often suffer for the guilty.— 
Did you know Mr. Zweifel ] — I did know him, for he often worked 
for our house. — One of my friends has just told me that he has 
drowned himself, and that his wife has blown out her brains with 
a pistol (Lesson XCV.). — I can hardly believe it; for the man 
whom you are speaking of was always a jovial companion, and 
good companions do not drown themselves. — His wife is even said 
to have written on the table before she killed herself: " Who haz- 
ards gains ; I have nothing more to lose, having lost my good hus- 
band. I am disgusted with this world, where there is nothing 
constant (bcftanfcivj) except (pl$) inconstancy (fjte Unbeftanfcic^cit)." 

243. 

Will you be my guest] — I thank you ; a friend of mine has in- 
vited me to dinner: he has ordered my favourite dish. — What dish 
is it] — It is milk- food. — As for me (2i3a6 mid) anbclancjt), I do not 
like milk-food : there is nothing like a good piece of roast beef or 
veal (Sfcint^ et)er jlalbsbratcn). — What has become of your joang- 
est brother 1 — He has suffered shipwreck in going to America. — 
You must give me an account of that ((Srjablen @ie mir feed) t>a$). — 
Very willingly. Being on the open sea, a great storm arose. The 
lightning struck the ship and set it on fire. The crew jumped into 
the sea to save themselves by swimming. My brother knew not 
what to do, having never learnt to swim. He reflected in vain ; 
he fou d no means to save his life. He was struck with fright 
when he saw that the fire was gaining on all sides. He hesitated 
no longer, and jumped into the sea. — -Well (9?un), what has be- 
come of him 1 — I do not know, having not heard of him yet — But 
who told you all that ] — My nephew, who was there, and who saved 
himself. — As you are talking of your nephew (£)a @te qercifje t>on 
Sfyrem Qtfeffen fprecfym), where is he at present] — He is in Italy. — 
Is it long since you heard from him ] — I have received a letter from 
him to-day. — What does he write to you] — He writes to me that 
he is going to marry a young woman who brings ($ubttn$en*) him 
a hundred thousand crowns.' — Is she handsome] — Handsome as 
an ange) ; she is a master-piece of nature. Her physiognomy is 
mild and full of expression ; her eyes are the finest in (Don) the 
world, and her mouth is charming (aUcrtkbft). She is neither too 
tall nor too short : her shape is slender ; all her actions are full of 
grace, and her manners very engaging. Her look inspires respect 
and admiration. She has also a great deal of wit (bcr flSerftonD) ; 
she speaks several languages, dances uncommonly well, and sings 
ravishingly. My nephew finds in her but one defect (bcr Jcbtcr). — 
And what is that defect] — She is affected (macl)t 2fn|~prucfK). — There 
is nothing perfect in the world. How happy you are (3Bte qlucKtd) 
finb ©tc) ! you are rich, you have a good wife, pretty children, a 
fine house, and all you wish (for). — Not all, my friend. —What do 
you desire more ] — Contentment ; for you know that he only is 
happy who is contented. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



356 



HUNDRED AND THIRD LESSON. — §mibtxt ttttb 
brine Cection. 

GENERAL REMARKS ON GERMAN CONSTRUCTION. 

The fundamental principle of German construction 
is this : the word which, after the subject, expresses 
the principal idea, is always placed after those words 
which only express accessory rdeas. It has the advan- 
tage of attracting and of keeping up and increasing 
the attention to the end of the phrase. 

The word which least defines the subject is placed 
at the beginning of the sentence, then come those 
words which define it in a higher degree, so that the 
word which most determines the meaning of the 
phrase is at the end. 

According to this we place the words in the follow- 
ing order: 

1st, The adverb of negation md)t, when it relates 
to the verb of the subject. Ex. ©em 33ater fceantttwtet 

1 
metttett SSrtef mcfyt, his father does not answer my letter. 

2d, The other adverbs relating to the verb of the 

1 2 
subject. Ex. ©te fcfyretfcen Sfyren 83rief ntcfyt gut, you do 
not write your letter well. 

3d, The preposition with the case it governs, or in 
its stead the adverbs of place: barter, and their com- 
pounds : bafyer, bafyttt, as well as the demonstrative ad- 
verbs compounded of ba and fyter, as : bamit, battOtt, 

1 
fytenwn, barauf, bariiber, &c. Ex. dv anttoortete mcfyt 

2 3 
fyofltd) auf nteinen S5rtef, he did not answer my letter 

1 2 ^3 
politely. ($r mtttwrtete nicfyt fcfyneff barauf, he did not 
answer it quickly. 

Obs. When the verb of the subject has several ca- 
ses with their prepositions, that which defines it the 
most exactly follows all the others, the determination 
of time always preceding that of place. Ex. @r ttat 



357 

boegett feiner Unfcfynfb mit frofyltcfyem ©ejTcfyte fcor bag ©ertcfyt 
(which defines most exactly) , on account of his inno- 
cence he appeared before his judges with a joyful 
countenance. £er @efnt)Kofe bikb cut biefem £age (time), 
cmf ber fd)dnften glnr (place), bei alter <£d)6nl)eit ber retjen* 
ben ytatuv (place) bennorf) ol)ne atfe (Smpftnbung (which de- 
fines most exactly), the insensible man, remained on 
that day without the least emotion, though in the most 
beautiful field and surrounded by all the beauty of 
charming nature. 1 

4th, The predicate of the subject. Ex. 3d) bin ntd)t 

2 3 4 

immer mit femer Slnttt>ort jnfrieben, I am not always 
satisfied with his answer. 

5th, The separable particles of compound verbs, as 
well as all those words which are considered as separ- 
able particles, inasmuch as they complete the sense of 
the verb (Obs. A, Lesson LXVIL), as: ctngtt>enbtg 
[ernen, to learn by heart; in Slcfyt nef)men # , to take 
care ; jit WlittaQ effen*, to dine, &c. Ex. SBctrttm ging 

12 3 5 

er nidtjt ofter mit %bjnen an$ ? why did he not go out with 
you oftener ? 

6th, The verb in the infinitive. Ex. (£r fcmn Sfyttett 
12 2 3 6 

nidjt immer fcfyneft auf Sfyren SSrief anttt>orten, he cannot 
always answer your letter quickly. 

7th, The past participle or the infinitive, when they 
form with the auxiliary a compound tense of the verb. 

12 2 3 7 

Ex. (£r bat mix nid)t immer fyoflid) baranf geantwortet, he 
has not always answered it politely. @r tt>irb Sfynett 

12 2 3 7 

nid)t immer fo fyoflid) anf Sfyren 23rief antroorten. 

* # * These remarks apply to the natural order of 
ideas; but the German language is so much subject to 
inversions, that we must sometimes deviate from them, 
according to the stress which we wish to put on cer- 
tain words, or the strength and importance we wish 
to give them in the sentence. See the following 






358 

RECAPITULATION OF THE RULES OF SYNTAX 
OR CONSTRUCTION. 

1st, When the adjective which precedes the noun 
is accompanied by some words that relate to, or define 
it, they are placed immediately before it. Ex. dine 
gegett Sebermamt fyoflicfye $rau, a woman polite towards 
everybody. 3fyr ©te fyerjttd) Kebenbeg $tnb, your child 
that loves you from all his heart. (Lesson XCIII.) 

2d, Personal pronouns, when not in the nomina- 
tive, as well as reflexive pronouns (Lesson LXX.) are 
placed after the verb. Ex. 3^) fobe &tcf), I love thee. 
dv licit mid), he loves me. 3d) ttmnfcfye Sfynen etnen gaten 
QKorgen, I wish you a good morning. 9D?eme (5d)tt>ejier 
beftnbet jTd) tt)of)(, my sister is well. 

Obs. A. When the accusative is a personal pro- 
noun, it precedes the dative, if not, it follows it. Ex. 
©cbcn ©te meinem 33 r u b e r bag S3 u rf) ? do you 
give the book to my brother 1 3d) gebe e 3 t f) m, I do 
give it to him. tylafym ©ie Sfyrer $rau ©emafylum ntettte 
(Smpfefyhtttg, present my compliments to your lady. 3d] 
gab e$ bexn SSater, I gave it to the father. (Lesson 
XXVIII.) But if we wish to put a particular stress on 
the dative, we must put it after the accusative." Ex. 
(gr erjdfjlte bxe gait je @efrf)trf)te feuter grau, he told his wife 
the whole history. Here the whole strength of the 
sentence falls on the words fewer grau* 

Obs. B. When the case of the verb is a genitive 
it is always preceded by the accusative, whether a per- 
sonal pronoun or not. Ex. 3d) fcerjTcfyere ©te meittet 
S)cd)a<i)tuxiQ, I assure you of my esteem, tyflaxt tyat ben 
©efangenen beg 23erbred)en£ i'tberttnefett, the prisoner has 
been convicted of the crime. (Lesson LXIV.) 

3d, The infinitive and past participle are always 
preceded by their cases, or in other words, the infini- 
tive and past participle always stand at the end of the 
sentence. Ex. 3d) werbe morgen auf$ Sattb gefyen, I shall 
go into the country to-morrow. & tft geftern bat)W ge* 
gangen, he went thither yesterday. 3d) tt>erbe Sbttett ba£ 
%5ud) gebett, I shall give you the book. (£r tyat e3 mix ge* 
fagt, he has told it to me. (Lessons XXIV. and XLII.) 



359 

Obs. A. When two or several infinitives, two past 
participles, or a past participle and an infinitive de- 
pend on each other, the first in English becomes the 

1 2 

last in German. Ex. ©ie fotmen tyn fprecfyen fyoren, you 

2 1 12 

may hear him speak ; trf) tt)erbe fyeute md)t fpajieren gel)en 

3 3 2 1 

f Ottttert, I shall not be able to go a walking to-day ; fem 

12 2 1 

Qau$ ift fcerfauft toorben, his house has been sold. 
(Lesson LXXI.) 

Obs. B. The two infinitives or participles, &c, not 
depending on each other, follow the English construc- 

1 2 

tion. Ex. 9D?cm ntit$ ©ott Ixebett imb fcerefyrett, we must 

1 2 

love and honour God ; fTe tt>irb geliefct unb gelobt, she is 

1 2 

loved and praised. (Lesson LXXI.) 

4th, The verb of the subject (in compound tenses 
the auxiliary) is removed to the end when the phrase 
begins, (a) with a conjunction, as : al$, bet, ob, ba$, 
Weif, tt>entt, a &c. (6) with a relative pronoun, as : ber, 
tt>etd)er, tt>er, meaning he who, and tt)a$, that which ; (c) 
after the relative adverb, tt>0, and all the prepositions, 
combined with it, as : tt>oburrf), tvomit, toofcon, &c. Ex. 
2tf3 id) ffe $xm erften 9Me fat), when I saw her for the 
first time. 3d) wihtfcfyte, bafj er mitgittge, I wish he would 
go with us. (gr Ixebt ©te nicfyt, mil ©ie fl>n beleibigt fya* 
ben, he does not love you, because you have offended 
him. 2Barten ©ie, bi$ id) mem ©e(b befomme, wait till I 
receive my money. Sfilemt id) e3 gettnt$t bdtte, had I 
known that. 2efett ©ie ba$ S3nd), tt>e(d)e3 kf) Sbnett gette* 
fyen I)a6e ? do you read the book which I have lent 
you? SBiflen ©ie nidt)t, n>o er gewefen tjt? do you not 
know where he has been ? $6mten ©ie ntir ttid)t fctgen, 
tt>a3 au£ it)ttt gemorben xji ? can you not tell me what 

a For conjunctions which do not remove the. verb to the end of the phnue. 
Me Lesson LXI 



360 

has become of him ? Qa$ if* eg eben, Wobttrd) er ettten 
fo grogen Scfyaben erlttten f)at, ttwfcon er fid) fd)tt>erlicf) ttneber 
erholen tt>irb, it is precisely that, by which he has sus- 
tained such a loss, as he will find it difficult to recover 
from. (Lesson XLVII ) 

Obs. A. When a proposition in which the verb is 
required at the end of the sentence, contains one of 
the auxiliaries fetit and werbett, or one of the verbs 
bitrfen, fomten, lafifen, ntufiert, fotfett, tt>oftett, joined to an 
infinitive, these take their place immediately after the 
infinitive. Ex. SBBemt ©ie bag ^)ferb faufen Gotten, if you 
wish to buy the horse. (Lesson LXIX.) But when 
not governed by a conjunctive word, they stand before 
the infinitive and its case. Ex. 2Boften ©te bag ^Pferb 
faufett ? Do you wish to buy the horse ? 

Obs. B. Incidental or explanatory propositions are 
placed immediately after the word which they define, 
or at the end of the principal proposition. Ex. (£g iji 
fcfyroer, einen geinb, ttefcfyer nxtdjfam tfl, $u tt&erfatfen, or : 
eg ift fcfywer, einen geinb ju iiberfattett, welcfjer tt>ad)fant ift 
(Lesson LX.) 

Obs. C. When there are at the end of a sentence 
two infinitives, two past participles, or an infinitive 
and a past participle, the verb which the conjunction 
requires at the end, may stand either before or after 
them. Ex. SfBenn ©ie Sfyre Section werben fhtbtrt fyafcen, 
or: fhtbtrt fyaben rcerben, fo werbe id) 3bnett fagen, tt>ag ©ie 
JU tfytm fyaben, when you have studied your lesson, I 
shall tell you what you have to do. (Lesson LXXXII.) 

ON THE TRANSPOSITION OF THE SUBJECT AFTER ITS VERB, 

5th, Whenever a sentence begins with any other 
woa-d than the subject or nominative, its order is in- 
verted, and in all inversions the subject stands after 
the verb in simple, and after the auxiliary in compound 
tenses (Lesson LVIIL). From this rule must be ex- 
cepted conjunctive words which serve to unite senten- 
ces. They leave the subject in its place and remove 
the verb to the end of the sentence (Lesson XLVIL 
and Rule 4th above). 



361 

A German sentence may begin with an adverb, a 
preposition and its case 9 a case, an adjective, a parti- 
ciple or an infinitive. Ex. $)mte g e t) e t cf> i\id)t a\\$, 
I do not go out to-day ; ntorgett tt> e r b e id) Ste befudjen, 
to-morrow I shall come to see you ; tm ^Ittfcmge fcfyuf 
©ott jjtmmet ttttb (Srbe, in the beginning God made 
heaven and earth. 33 o n feilten ^tnbertt f p r a cfy 
e r, he spoke of his children. 93et Sfynen b a b e id) 
mem 53ud) ttergefifen, I forgot my book at your house. Den 
9Rettfd)cn mad)t feiit SOBitfe grofj unb Hem (@d)itfer), his will 
makes a man great and little. 9?etrf) tfi er mcfyt, abet 
gefebrt, he is not rich, but learned. ©eltebt ttrirb er nid)t 
aber gefitrd)tet, he is not loved, but feared. Scfyaben tann 
Seber, aber mt£en farm ttur ber SfBeife unb ©ute, any man 
can do injury, but the wise and good only can be use- 
ful. (Lesson LVIII.) 

6th, The subject is placed after the verb in an in- 
version of propositions, that is, when that which ought 
to stand first, is placed after, and forms, as it were, 
the complement of the other. In other words : the 
subject is placed after its verb in the second membei 
of a compound phrase (Lesson LXXVIL). An inver- 
sion of propositions takes place, when the first propo- 
sition begins with a conjunction. Ex. 2)a$ er ©ie ttebt, 
to e t $ id) (for: id) tt>et$, ba# er @te liebt), I know that 
he loves you. 3e flet$tger em ©cfyiifer ift, befto fcfytiefterc 
$ortfrf)ritte mad)t er, the more studious a pupil is, the 
more progress he makes. SBenn id) veid) Ware, fo f) a 1 1 e 
f cf) $reimbe, I should have friends, if I were rich. Wad)* 
bem nnr bte ©tabt tterlaflTen fatten, jog ber %eini m 
Dtefetbe em, when we had left the town, the enemy en- 
tered it (Lesson LXXXL). 

Obs. In transposing the phrase there is no inversion 

; of propositions. Ex. £>er $emb jog in bte ©tdbt tin, 

1 ttad)bem n>tr btefetbe tterfaftett fatten, the enemy entered 

the town, after we had left it (Lesson LXXVIL). 

7th, The subject also follows its verb, when in an 

, inversion of propositions, the conjunction tt> e tt tt is left 

| out in the first. Ex. 3jl ba$ 253etter gihtjltg (for. 

J tt>entt i>a$ ^Better gtinfttg tfl), fo roerbe id) biefe Sftetfe in ad)i 

16 

I 



362 

Stagen antnten, if the weather is favourable I shall set 
out in a week (Lesson LXXXL). 

The same is the case with the conjunction ob, 
whether. Ex. 3d) wei$ md)t, f d) t a f e ober tt) a d) e t d) 
(for: ob td) fd)fafe ober tt>ad)e), I do not know whether I 
am asleep or awake ; and all compound conjunctions, 
such as : obgfetd), obfcfyon, wenn gfeidf), tt>enn fdjon, though. 
Ex. 33tn i d) g(etd) (fcfyon) md)t retd) (for : ob or n>enn tcfy 
gfetd) ntd)t retd) bin), fo bin id) bod) jnfrteben, though I am 
not rich, I am nevertheless contented. 

Obs. Adverbs of comparison, such as : ttne, as ; gletd)* 
t&ie, the same as ; ntd)t nnr — fonbern and), not only — but 
also, &c. ? make the nominative of the second member 
go after the verb, but not that of the first (this ob- 
servation is included in Rule 6. above). Ex. SBte (or 
g(etd)ttne) ba& SOJeer fcom 3Binbe bercegt ttnrb, alfo tvivh 
e t n 5ft a n n tton fetnen 2etbenfd)aften bewegt, as the sea 
is agitated by the winds, so a man is agitated by his 
passions. 

8th, Some conjunctions, when beginning a sentence, 
make the nominative go after its verb, as : bod), how- 
ever ; bettnod), nevertheless ; g{etd)tt>oM, notwithstand- 
ing ; bejfen nngeadjtet, for all thaU ntd)t$ befto wentger, 
nevertheless ; fyingegen, im ©egentfyeil, on the contrary. 
(This rule is included in Rule 5.) Ex. Sefifen nngead}* 
tet I) a b e n © t e mentals ntetnen SBunfd) erfittten rotten, 
for all that you were never willing to accomplish my 
desire ; bod) f d) r t e b e r, er fonnte ttid)t fommen, however 
he wrote that he could not come. 

9th, The subject follows its verb when the phrase is 
interrogative or ejaculatory. Ex. ? e r n e n Sfyre 
£ e r r e n 23 r it b e r beittfd) ? do your brothers learn 
German? 2Bte glitcfltd) ftnb ©te! or 908te ft lib ©fe 
fo gtittfftd) ! how happy you are ! (Lesson XXXII. and 
LXXXVIII.) 

Obs. When the subject is a personal or an interro- 
gative pronoun, the construction of the interrogative 
sentence is the same as in English. Ex. 3ft er JU 
£cwfe ? is he at home ? ©tnb ^ve ftvaukixt ©d)tt>eftern 
in bent ®arten? are your sisters in the garden? SfBer 
fft ba ? who is there ? 9Ba£ fyahen ©te getfjah ? what 



363 

nave you done ? SOBefcfyet $£nabe ^at btefe SSticfyet gefanft, 
Mtb tt>em bat er fte fcerefytt ? which boy has bought those 
books, and to whom has he given them ? 3Ba$ flit et* 
nen SOBagen haben ©ie gefauft ? what carriage have you 
bought ? 

• 10th, The subject not only stands after the verb, but 
also after all the words relating to it, when the sen- 
tence begins with the indefinite pronoun e3. Ex. @g 
Ufyxt mt3 tie @tfaf)tuttg, experience teaches us. 
&$ ift nid)t atfe £age erne fo gnte ©elegenfyett, there is not 
every day such good opportunity. 

11th, In inversions where the subject stands after 
its' verb, it may take its place either after or before 
the other cases, if they are personal pronouns, and if 
the subject is a substantive. Ex. £ente gtfct mem Setter 
mix em 23ucf), or fyente gtbt mix mem ?ebret em 33ud), to-day 
my master will give me a book, ©eftetn gab mem ?el)* 
tet e£ mix, or geftetn ga6 e3 mix mem ?et)tet, my master 
gave it to me yesterday. £>b et gletrf) ganj entftettt tt>at, 
etfannte H)n bod) fern ©oijtt, or etfannte fern ©ofyn tl)n bodf, 
though he was quite disfigured, nevertheless his son 
recognized him. 

12th, But if the subject is likewise a personal pro- 
noun, or if the other cases are substantives, it must 
precede. Ex. ©eftern gab er e3 mix (not e3 mix et), yes- 
terday he gave it to me. £>af)er liebt bet ©cfyiilet ben Selj* 
ter (not (tebt bett ?efyret bet ©cfyitler), therefore the pupil 
loves his master. 2)efien nngeadf) tet etfannte bet ©ofyn ben 
SSatet (not ben Sater bet ©ofyn), nevertheless the son re- 
cognised his father. 

EXERCISES. 244. 

A stranger having sold some false jewels (bet faffdbe (Sbetftetn) to 
a Roman empress (bte romtfcfte jtatjertnn), she asked (ferbern t>en) 
her husband (to make) a signal example (of him) (btc cuiffattenbe 
©cnugtfyuung). The emperor, a most excellent and clement prince 
(ber cm feftr gnabiger unb mtfbet Jairft war), finding it impossible to 
pacify (fcerurnqen) her, condemned the jeweller to be thrown to the 
wild beasts ($um ^cunpfe nut ben ttntben £f)tercn). The empress re- 
solved to be present (3euqe) with her whole court (ber joofftaar) at 
the punishment of the unfortunate mai (feines SobcS). As he was 
led into the arena (cmf ben Jlampfplag gefufyrt nnitbe), he expected to 
die (fid) auf ben Sob cjcfapt macften) ; but instead ((latt governs th* 



364 

genitive) of a wild beast a lamb (t>a$ £amm) came up to him and 
caressed him (n>cld)es tfjm liebtofete). The empress, furious (a'ufjerft 
aufgc'oracrjt) at the deception (fid) gum 23cftcn getjalten $u fcben), com- 
plained bitterly of it (fid) bitter befrrxgen beflagen) to (Oct) the em- 
peror. He answered : " I punished the criminal (ber ^erbredyer) 
according (nad)) to the law of retaliation (ba* 8GBtcDer&ergiftungsred)t). 
He deceived (betrtigen*) you, and he has been deceived in his turn 
(nneber)." 

245. 

The bakers of Lyons, having gone to Mr. Dugas ($u Semanbem 
Common*), the provost (ber <Stabtrtd)ter), to ask his permission (3c? 
manben urn. (Srfaubnif? bitten*) to raise the price of bread (nut tent 
23rcbe auf$ufd)(agen), he answered that he would take their petition 
into consideration (cr rootle ben ©egenftanb tfyrer $3ttte untcrfucben). 
As they took leave (nxggeften*), they contrived to slip (liepen ftc un? 
bemer!t) a purse containing (nut) two hundred Louis d'ors (ber 2out$* 
for) on the table. — When they returned, in the full conviction (nid)t 
$rrxtfetn) that the purse had been a powerful advocate in their favour 
(-ttrirrfcmi fur cine @ad)C fprccr)en*), the provost said to them : " Gen- 
tlemen, I have weighed (abrud'gen) your reasons (ber ©runt)) in the 
scale of justice (tie £Bagfd)a(e ber ®erecbtig!eit), and I have found 
them wanting (ntcbt ttdlnmbtig). I have not thought it expedient 
(Set) fjtett nid)t bafur) by a fictitious raising of price (unter einer unges 
gritnbeten Sf^urung) to make the public (bas spub(itum) suffer : I 
have, however (ttbrtgens), distributed (ttertrjet(en) your money to (uns 
ter with accus.) the two hospitals of the town, for I concluded (id) 
gtaubte) you could not intend it for any other purpose (ber ©ebraud)). 
Meanwhile (3d) fyabc etngcfer)cn) as you are able to give such alms 
(fctdje 2ttmofen $u gcben), it is evident you are no losers (ttcrlteren*) 
by your trade (ba$ ©enKtbc)." 

246. 

THE PHYSICIAN TAKEN IN (OctrCgCn). 

A physician of (in) Dublin, who was rather old (roe(d)er fcftOtt 
giemttd) bejafyrt mar), but who was very rich and in extensive prac- 
tice (in gropem #?ufe fterjen*), went one day to receive a considerable 
($temiicb Qrop) sum of money in bank notes and in gold. As he was 
returning home with (belaben mit) this sum, he was stopped (anfyaU 
ten*) by a man who appeared out of breath (au£er 2Ct1)em), owing to 
the speed with which he had run (rc>ci( cr $u fcfynell gelaufen roar). 
This man asked him (Unb ber tfyn bat) to come to see his wife, 
whom a violent diarrhoea retained in bed dangerously ill (an einem 
Ijeftigen 5^ u ff c gefa'brlid) franf barnteber tiegen*) ; he added that it was 
urgent she should have immediate advice (bop febfeuntge £tffe fe()t 
netbtuenbtg ware), and at the same time promised the physican hi3 
guinea fee (cine ©utnee fitr einen Scfucb). 

The physician, who was very avaricious (get$tg), was pleased at 
the prospect of gaining his guinea (cttte ftc |tt ttetbtenen) ; he direc- 



365 

ted (faqen $u) the man to lead the way (^emanbem ben 2Beg setgen), 
and promised to follow. He was led to a house situated (fteben*) 
in a remote (e-htlegen) street, and made to ascend to the third story 
(in t>a? etttte (Srecrroerf), where he was admitted into a room, the 
door of which was immediately (alfebatb) locked (KrfdblietJen*). 
The guid-e (£>er gtihrer) then presenting- (barretcben*) a pistol with 
one hand, and with the other an empty (Jeer) purse, which was 
open, spoke as follows (bterriuf vetete Der gu^rer t)en etfebtecfenen 2(r$t 
j&gerrbermafen an, tnbeni, &c ). 

44 Here is my wife: yesterday she was seized with a violent 
diarrhoea (an etnem fjefthjen s ^aud)fluffe fetben*), which has reduced 
her to the state (in ben Suftanb »etfe|eft) in which you (now) see 
her : you are one of our most eminent (gefebteft) physicians, and I 
know you are better able than any one to cure her. I am besides 
(ttlvrbieS) aware that you possess the best remedy for her; haste 
then to employ (anroenben) it, unless you prefer swallowing (sers 
febhicfen) the two leaden pills (tne $)iUe) contained in this instru- 
ment." The doctor made a horrible face (t)a6 abfcbeultcbe @eficbt), 
but obeyed. He had several bank notes and a hundred and twen- 
ty-five guineas rolled up (in Snellen) ; he placed the latter (Cue (egs 
tern) into the purse, as he had been desired (gefculDtg), hoping thus 
to save his bank notes. 

But the thief (uer Maimer) was up to this, and was perfectly 
aware of his having- them in his pocket (ornate, bajj er fie tn t>er gas 
febe r)attc). " Wait," said he, "it would not be fair (billig) that 
you should have performed (oerricbten) so miraculous a cure (Me 
.ftur) without remuneration (oergeben*) ; I promised you a guinea 
for your visit, I am a man of honour (t>et 9Q?ann t>on (£t)re), and 
here it is; but I know that you carry about your person (bet fid) 
baben) several little recipes (t>a$ Sftecept, plur. e) most efficacious 
(febr tmrrTcim) as preventives against the return (t)te SiMhfyv) of the 
disorder (ba*> Itebel) you have just removed (fjeiten) ; you must be 
so kind as to leave them with me." The bank-notes immediately 
took the same road as the guineas had done. The thief, then 
keeping his pistol concealed beneath his cloak (ber Mantel), ac- 
companied the doctor into the street (bterauf fiibrte fcer @auner, tns 
bem — n?kber gurticf) requesting him to make no noise. He stopped 
him (|le ben toffen*) at the corner (an ^er (Me) of a street, and for- 
bidding (tjetbteten*) him to follow, suddenly (plof?Ucb) disappeared, 
to seek, in a distant part of the town (bat entlegene <StabtMerteO, 
another habitation (bie SBerjnung). 

247. DIALOGUE (bte Unterrebun^) 

BETWEEN A FATHER AND MOTHER ON THE HAPPINESS (b(*£ 
28cb0 OF THEIR CHILDREN. 

Countess. Forgive me for having disturbed (rrjedfen taflfen*) 
you so early ; but I wanted to speak to you on matters of im- 
por ance. 



866 

Count. You alarm (beunrubtgeu) me . . . . I see that you 
have been crying; what has happened, my dear (tfyeuet)? 

Countess. I own I am a little agitated (urttufytOj) ; but I have 
nothing unpleasant (UnancjenebmeS) to communicate (mttrfyetfen) ; 
on the contrary. 

Count. From your emotion (bte Sewequng)? I should guess 
Emily to be the cause of it (bag tton — bte 3?ebe tfl). 

Countess. It is true .... My sister came this morning 
with a proposal (etne £etratb ttorfcblagen*) for her. 

Count. Well ? 

Countess. The gentleman who asks her (in marriage) is en- 
dowed with (beft^en*) all the advantages (ber 23crauc{) of birth 
(bte ©eburt) and fortune (ba£ ©U'uf). His merit is acknowl- 
edged (anerf ennen) by all. He is thirty ; his person agreeable ; 
he loves Emily, and even refuses the fortune (bte SluSjTeuer) 
which we should give her, stating his affection to be secured by 
her only (serlangt nut fie). 

Count. But how comes it that you are not overjoyed at this 
(auger fid) »or $reube fetn*)? I am very anxious (oor S3e<uer* 
be brennen) to learn his name. 

Countess. You know him ; he often comes here, and you 
like him exceedingly (febr). 

Count. Pray gratify (befrtebtgen) my curiosity. 

Countess. It is the Count of Moncalde . . . . 

Count. The Count of Moncalde ! a foreigner ; but he prob- 
ably (wabrfd)etn(td)) intends to settle (fid) meberlajfen*) in 
France ? . . . 

Countess. Alas ! he has declared that he can promise no- 
thing (feme QSerpfltdjtungemcjeben*) on that score (bte £)tnfid)t) ; 
this is informing us (erHaren) clearly (beutltd)) enough, that he 
intends to return to his own country. 

Count. And you would nevertheless accept him for your 
daughter ? 

Countess. I have known him (Umgang mit Semanbem ba* 
ben*) for four years. I am thoroughly acquainted with his 
disposition (ber Character). There cannot be a more virtuous 
(tugenbbaft) or estimable (fd)d$en£tt>ertb) man. He is very 
clever and agreeable (soft ©etjl unb 3(mtebmu'd)fett fetn*), has 
much good feeling (qefiibfooll), is well informed (unterrtd)tet), 
and perfectly devoid of affectation (unaffecttrt). He is a passion- 
ate admirer of talent (etnen letbenfd)aftltd)en ©efcfymacf fur Ta* 
tente babcn*) ; in short (mit etnem 2Borte) he possesses every 
quality (bte (Stgenfdjaft) that can answer my daughter's happi- 
ness (gfiufltd) madden). How can I reject him (fie tfym iserfa* 



1 



367 

gen)? Surely, my- love (metn $reu/tb), you do not think me so 
selfish (etneS folcfyen ©gotsmue fdfytg ^alten*). 

Count (taking her hand) (fte bet ber $anb faffenb). But 
can I consent to a sacrifice (ba# £)pfer) that would make you for 
ever (ctuf tra'merj unhappy? Besides (UeberbteS) I never could 
bring myself to part from Emily.— She is my daughter ; more 
than that even, her amiable disposition is your work. In Emi- 
ly I find your sense (ber ©etfr) and your virtues. No, I cannot 
part (fid) trennen) from her. I am looking forward with so much 
delight '(fid) etne fo fftge 28orftelumg son bem QSevgniigen macfyen) 
to her entrance into the world (fte in bte 2Bett etngefiifytt git fe* 
fyert) ! I am in much hopes of her shining in it (tfyre3 guten @T* 
folgS bann gu gentefjen). — How gratifying («ue tfyeuer) to me 
will be the praise (ba6 Cob) bestowed (ertfyetlen) on her ! — for 
I am convinced (fca id) ba$> SSemugtfetn fyabe), that to your care 
of her (bte ©etgfalt) alone, my love, she will be indebted for 
whatever success she may obtain. After having devoted (wib* 
men) the best years of your life to her education, can you now 
give her up, and see her torn from (entmgen* with dative) your 
arms and her country ; can you consent thus to lose in one mo- 
ment the fruit of (oon) fifteen years of anxiety (Sftiifye unb S(rbett) ? 

Countess. I have laboured for her happiness, and (have) not 
(sought) to educate (brtngen*) a victim to my own vanity. I 
beseech you, consider (bebenfen*) also the great and unhoped 
for advantages of the match (bte 93erbtnbung) now in agitation 
(roetcfye man un3 anbtetet). Think of the smallness (bte SSWtttet 
magtgfett) of her fortune. Consider the excellence and amiable 
disposition, the high birth and immense (unerme§(td)) fortune of 
her future husband ! — It is true, I shall be separated from 
Emily, but she will never forget me . . . this thought will be 
my consolation, and without fear for her future life (iiber ba& 
©d)tcffal (JmtltenS berufytgt), I shall be able to bear any other 
trial (affeS ertragen). 

Count. But will Emily herself be able to bring herself to 
leave you ? 

Countess. She has always been accustomed to obey the dic- 
tates of reason (bte QSerminft »ermag atte§ iiber fte). I am wil- 
ling to believe this will cost her some effort (bte Sfnfttengtmg 
wotrb tt>v fdjroer fatten) ; but if she does not dislike (^emanbem 
mtfifatten*) the temper and person of Mr. de Moncalde, lean 
answer (auf fief) nefymen*) for her compliance (fte gu beroegen), 
however painful (fcfytmertg) the sacrifice (gu btefem Opfer). In 
short I entreat (befd)tt)6re) you to entrust entirely to (fid) ganj 
$ertajfen* auf) me the care (roegen ber ©orge) of her happiness. 



368 

Count. Well (fficfybn), since you wish it, I will give my 
consent. You have indeed, my dear, earned (evroerben*) for 
yourself a right (ba§> 3ied)i) to dispose of your daughter (i'tber tl)r 
©d)tcffa( git entfcfyetben), which I will not dispute (flretticj macfyen). 
I know you will sacrifice (aufepfern) yourself for the sake of 
one so dear to you (fur btefen fo tfyeuern ©egenfranb). — I fore- 
see ($otau§fel)en*) that I shall not have your fortitude (ber -Diutb), 
but I admire, and can no longer withstand (imberfiefyen*) (your 
argument). — Still (3 ebod)) think, what sorrow (nue&xel Summer) 
you are preparing for yourself (ft cf) beretten) ; how shall I my- 
self support your grief and my own, your tears and those of 
Emily I 

Countess. Do not fear (befiird)ten) that I should cloud (beim* 
rutngen) your life by useless (ubevfliiffig) repinings (bte 5ibge). 
How could I give myself up to sorrow when my greatest con- 
solation will be the hope of alleviating (mitbern) your grief? 

Count. Ah, you alone are every thing to me ! You know 
it wt'.I .... friendship, admiration, and gratitude are the ties 
(bte SScmbe, plur.) that bind (feffetn) me to you. The influence 
CDte #errfd)aft) you have acquired (erbrtgert) over my mind 
(iiber ntd)) is so thoroughly justified (reefytferttqen) by your vir- 
tues, that far from denying (x>erldiignen), I glory in it (fetnert 
*Jfotbm bartn fegen, fte anuierfennen). — It is to you I owe every 
thing : my reason, my sentiments (ba3 ©efiifyl), my principles 
(ber ©runbfag) and my happiness. In you I find the most ami- 
able as well as the most indulgent (nad)ftd)ttg) of friends, the 
wisest (roetfe) and most useful adviser (bte niigltcfyfre 3fatbgebe* 
rtrm). Be then the arbiter of my children's destiny (bte (Scfyteb^ 
rtd)tertnn iiber ba$ ©d)uf fit) as you are that of my own. - But 
at any rate (roemgftenS) let us attempt (aHe£ serfucfyen) to per- 
suade the Count of Moncalde to settle (fid) mefcerbflfen) in 
France. . . . He seemed so struck (gerittjrt) by your affection 
(bte 3avtl\A)teit) for Emily, and to feel for. you such sincere 
attachment (2(nbang(td>fett) that I cannot yet believe his inten- 
tion (bte 5( b ft d)t) to be to separate you from your child. I can- 
not think his decision (ber Sntfd}lu§) unalterable (unttercinbers 
ltd)). 

Countess. No, do not let us flatter ourselves. He is a firm 
and decided character (fetn — fft fejT itnb entfdblcflTen). He has 
positively (bejrtmmt) told my sister that it would be vain to at- 
tempt to exact from him a promise (trm bte 33e trtatmg Brrgit? 
fcfyretbert) of residing in France. His resolution is irrevocably 
(ummbemifltd)) taken to return to Portugal. 

Count. You grieve (betriiben) me ... . But I repeat to 



369 

you, the fate of Emily is in your hands. Whatever it may cost 
me, you shall be absolute mistress (bte unumfcfyrdnfte ©ebtete* 
. rinn) of it. I shall consent to whatever you decide on (befcfylte* 
gen*). Do you intend speaking to-day (nod) fyeute) (on the 
subject) to Emily ? 

Countess. After dinner .... But it is late ; it is time to 
dress .... I have not yet seen my sons to-day ; let us go and 
see them. 

Count. I wanted to consult (urn 9?atfy frct^en) you on (roegen) 
something connected with (angefyen*) them. I am dissatisfied 
with their tutor (ber £)cfmetfl:er). Another has been proposed 
(ttcrfcfylagen*) me, I should wish you to speak to him ; I am told 
he speaks English perfectly ; I cannot judge myself of the latter. 

Countess. I will tell you if he really understands it well . . 

Count. How ? . . . But you have never learnt English . . 

Countess. I beg your pardon. I have been studying it for 
the last year, to be able to teach Henrietta, who had asked me 
to give her Oemanben urn etroaS erfucfyen) an English master. 
In general (3m Durd)fd)mtt) masters teach so carelessly (mtt fo 
tneler ^lacfyldffigt" eft) that, however excellent they may be, two 
years of their lessons (ber Unterrtcfyt) are not worth three 
months (ba£ QSterte(jat)r) of those (ocn bem) given by a mother. 

Count. What a (wonderful) woman you are ! . . . . Thus 
till yoar children's education is completed, you will spend part 
of your life with masters. Half of it (£)te etne ^)d(fte) you devote 
(cmroenben) to study (fid) $tt tmterricfyten), and the other half in 
teaching what you have learnt .... Yet in spite of such nu- 
merous occupations, whilst you thus multiply (sennelfdlttcjen) 
your duties, you spare time to devote (rotbmen) to your friends 
and to the world (bte ©efettfcfyaft). How do you manage (e$ 
anfcmgen) ? 

Countess. It is always possible to find time for the fulfilment 
of duties that are pleasing to us (bte un$ tfyeuer ftnb). 

Count. You always surprise me (beftdnbtg tn Grjfcttmett fe* 
| en), I own .... Ah ! if your children do not make you hap- 
py, what mother could ever expect from hers a reward of her 
affection ! . . . . And our dear Emily may be for ever lost to 
you ! . . . I cannot bear (ertrctgen*) the thought of it ! — Shall 
you see your sister again to-day ? Shall you give her your an- 
swer for the Count of Moncalde ? 

Countess. He requested a prompt decision (etne fcfyneffe imb 
bejrtmmte) .... I shall accordingly give (ertfyetlen) him the 
answer, since you allow it, as soon as I have questioned Emily 
on the subject (©mtltenS ©eftnnuncjen priifen)* 
16* 



370 

Count. I am certain, Emily will refuse (attSfdjtagen*) him. 

Countess. I think as you do, but it is not enough (fytnretcfyenb 
fetn*) that she has no aversion (abgeneigt fetn*) to the Count of. 
Moncalde, and that she feels (fyegen) for him the esteem he so 
justly deserves 

Count. Well, I see, we must submit (fief) entfcfyltegen*) to 
this sacrifice (bte Slufopferung) .... Speak to your daughter 

Speak to her alone, I should never have courage to 

support (cutSfyalten*) such an interview (bte Unterrebuncj) . . . 
I feel I should only spoil all your work. 

248. DIALOGUE. 

EMILY. AGATHA. 

Agatha. I was looking for you .... But, dear Emily, 
what is the matter? 

Emily. Have you seen mamma (bte 9J?utter) ? 

Agatha. No, she is gone out ; she is gone to my aunt's. 

Emily. And my father ? 

Agatha. He has shut himself up (fid) einfd)lte#en*) in his 
study (ba$ ^abinett) .... But surely, Emily, they are think- 
ing of your marriage (bte 93erf)etratfyung) ; I guess (erratfyen*) 
as much (e$) from your agitation (an Seiner SSenmrnmg). 

Emily. Ah, dearest sister, you little dream (me rotrft £)u 
ben stamen be£jemgen erratfyen) who is my intended (bem mart 
mid) befHmmt) ! . . . . Agatha, dearest Agatha, how much 1 
pity you, if you love me as well as I love you ! 

Agatha. Good heavens (@ered)tet |)tmmeO ! Explain 
(Srfldren) yourself more clearly (beutltd)). 

Emily. I am desired 0Ran beftefylt mtr) to marry the 
Count of Moncalde, and he is to take (mtt fid) fiifyren) me to 
Portugal. 

Agatha. And you intend to obey ? . . . . Could you leave 
us ? .... Is it possible my mother even should consent 1 

Emily. Alas ! (Setber) dear Agatha, it is but too true. 

Agatha. No, I never can believe it .... it is impossible 
you ever can (Su barfft nid)t) obey. 

Emily. What are you saying 1 Do you think I should 
oppose my mother's wishes (tann id) metner 9J?utter auber* 
ftefcen) I 

Agatha. But do you think she herself will ever consent to 
sucli a separation ? 

Emily. She only considers (in 33etrad)tuttg $tefyen*) what 



371 

she calls my interest (bet: QSottfyetl) ; she entirely forgets her- 
self. Alas ! she also forgets that I could enjoy (gente$en*) no 
happmess she did not witness (beflen fie ntcfyt 3euge wave) ! 

Agatha. Dear sister, refuse your consent (mcfyt etttttnfltgen) ! 

Emily. I have given my word. 

Agatha. Retract (juriitfne^men*) it . . . out of affection to 
my mother herself; your unfortunate obedience (ber ©efyorfam) 
would be (sorberetten) a constant source of regret (bte ewuge 
3icm) to us all. 

Emily. Agatha, you do not know my mother's fortitude. 
Her sensibility (3f)t gefiifyfootteS £>eta), though mastered (getet* 
tet) by her superior mind (bte iiberlegene 93ernunft), can, it is 
true, sometimes make her suffer, but will never be strong 
enough to betray her even into showing a momentary weak- 
ness (me wirt) e3 emen Slugenbttcf ©cfyroacfje t'n tfyr fyetttotbrtn* 
gen) ... . She is incapable (ttnfafytg) of ever regretting 
(bereuen) she has fulfilled a duty. 

Agatha. Emily ! dearest sister, if you go, I shall not sur- 
vive (ettt>a$ iiberleben) such a misfortune ! 

Emily. Ah, if you love me, conceal (from) me the excess 
(ba§ Ueberma$) of your grief. It can only unfit me for the 
task I have to perform (metier rnir su fefyr ba^u geetgnet tfl> 
mtd) nod) fcfyroddber stt madden). — Do not further rend (ntc^t 
ttottenbS gerretgen*) a heart already torn by the conflict of (baS 
fcfyon fo getfyettt tjt 3ttufdf)en) duty, affection and reason. 

Agatha. Do not expect me to confirm (©td) gu befefttgen 
tn) this cruel resolution. I can only weep and lament my own 
hard fate. 

Emily. I hear some one .... Dear Agatha, let us dry 
our eyes. 

249. 

On the liability to error (2Bte fefyr man fief) trren fann) 
of our judgments (tn fetnem Uvtfyetfe), or the injury 
(ber ©djafcen) repaid (erfegen). 

An English stage-coach (bte Sattbtutfdje), full of travellers 
(ber 3?etfenbe) 9 was proceeding (fafyren*) to York. Conversa- 
tion fell on (STOar fptad) met »on) the highwaymen and robbers 
that infested (bte man offers auf— antreffe) those parts (ber 
2Beg), and on the way of concealing one's money. Each 
person had his secret, but no one thought (Setnem pet e£ ettt) 
of telling it (offenbaren). One young lady (ba3 $?abd)en) only 
of eighteen, was less prudent than the rest (md)t fo Hag fettt*). 



372 

Imagining, no doubt, (Dbne 3roetfet tn ber $cetmmg) that she 
was thereby giving a proof (ber SeroetS) of her cleverness 
(ber QSerflant), she said with great self-satisfaction (gan$ offen* 
fcer'stg) that she had a draft (ber 28ed)fetbrtef) for two hundred 
pounds, which was (beftefyen*) her whole fortune, but that the 
thieves would be very clever (lijttg) if they thought of seeking 
for (roenn fie— fudjen fettten) this booty (beriRaub) in her shoe, 
or rather (jet fcgar) under the sole of her foot ; to mid it they 
would be obliged to (eg miigte ifynen nur euifatleii) rob her ol 
stockings. 

The coach was soon after (bait barcutf) stopped (anbalten*) 
by a gang of thieves (bte Jftdubetbanbe), who called upon (cuif* 
forbern) the affrighted and trembling travellers to deliver up 
(fyergeben*) their money. They accordingly all pulled out 
fterauSatefyen*) their purses, fully aware (ftd) aorfteflen) that 
resistance (ber 2Btberftcmb) would be perfectly useless, and 
might prove dangerous (ober gar gefd'brltd)). The sum (thug 
produced) appearing too small to these gentlemen (of the road 
they threatened (broken) to search (burd)fitd)en) all the luggagw 
(bte (Sffecten), if a hundred pounds were not immediately given 
them. 

" You will easily (let d)t) $nd double that sum (bag Sopped 
$g)" said an old gentleman from the corner of the coach (rtef 
tfynen — fytnten au$ bem SBagen gu)> " if you examine (burd)* 
fud)en) the shoes and stockings of that lady." The advice was 
very well taken (atifnebmen*), and the shoes and stockings being 
pulled off, the promised treasure (ber tterfimbtgte ©d)a(3) was 
discovered (getgt ft d)). The robbers humbly (bbfltd)) thanked 
the lady, paid (macf)en) sundry compliments on the beauty of 
her foot, and without waiting for an answer, they made off with 
their prize, leaving the coach to proceed on its journey (wetter 
fabven*). Hardly were the robbers gone, when the consterna- 
tion (bte SSeflui^ung) of the travellers was changed (fid) oerman* 
beln) into indignation (bte 2Butb). Words could not express 
(fid) md)t mtt SBortert auSbrtttfen laffen*) the sorrow of the poor 
woman, nor the resentment (ber 3 0rn ) expressed by (empeten) 
the whole party against the betrayer (ber 93errd tber). 

The strongest, and even the most insulting epithets of disgust 
(Die unglimpfltcbflen imb befd)fmpfenbfi:en aSetnamen) were lav- 
ished on him by all (fid) cui§ alter 9D?im&e bbrert laffen*), and 
many went even so far as to call him a rascal (ber 356fennd)t) 
and the accomplice of the thieves (ber 9?aubergeno§J. To 
these marks (bte Sleufiening) of the general indignation (be§ all- 
gemeinen Umx>ttfen£) (his conduct had excited) was added (oer* 



i 



373 

Wnfcen*) the threat (bte T)reburta) of giving the informer (tev 
2(mieber) a sound beating, and of throwing him out of the window 
(511m ®civ}en butauS)? and of instituting legal proceedings against 
him (^emanben qencfytltd) lelangen). In short (5t«rg)j all seemed 
to concur (ftd) erfcfyopfen) in forming schemes (ber ©ntttutvf ) 
for taking exemplary vengeance on the offender (an tern ©traf* 
haven erne auffatlenbe 9?act)e). The latter remained perfectly 
unmoved (\id) ^xni jittt cerbalten*), and only remarked once in 
extenuation (\id) mtt ber 3le«geriinq entfcbulbtcjen), that a man 
could have nothing dearer to him than himself (3eber fet ftd) 
felbft ber Ctebfte) ; and when the coach reached the end of its 
journey (ati man am ^ieie tev 9?etfe mar), he suddenly (urn^er* 
febene) disappeared (oeifd)tt>mben*), before his fellow-travellers 
could accomplish (tn3 28erf fe£en) any one (etne etn^e) of 
their intended measures (bfe beabftd)ttgten Stfagregelu) against 
him. 

As to the unfortunate young lady, it is easy to imagine (fid) 
sorftellen) that she passed a sad and sleepless night (bte 9Rad)t 
\)bd)\t traurtg nnb fd)lafl:3 uibrtnqen*). To her joy and aston- 
ishment (CaS Srftauneu), she received the next day the follow- 
ing letter : 

" Madam, — You must yesterday have hated (tterabfcfyetten) 
as an informer the man who now sends you, besides the sum 
you then advanced him (ocrfd)tef§en*) ? an equal (gletd)) sum, as 
interest thereof (al^ 3 u -f en fcctrauf), and a trinket (ba3 Suwel) 
of at least the same value (ber 28ertb) for your hair ($u %tyvem 
£)aarfd)mucfe). I hope this w T ill be sufficient (btnretd)en) to si- 
lence (mtlbem) your grief, and I will now explain (facjen) in a 
few words what must appear mysterious in my conduct {ten §e* 
betmen ©runt) metneS 95etracten3). After having spent (ftd) aufc 
fatten*) ten years in India (3nbten), where I amassed ($ufam* 
menbrtngen*) a hundred thousand pounds, I was on my way 
home with letters on my bankers (ber 2Bed)felbrtef) to that 
amount (fttt tie gan$e ©umme), when we were attacked (ange* 
fallen wet ten*) yesterday by the highwaymen. All my savings 
(bte retd)ltd)en ©rfparmjfe) must have inevitably been sacrificed 
(e3 war gefcfyeben urn), had the shabbiness (tie 5?argbett) of our 
fellow-travellers (tev 9?etfegefdbrte) exposed us to a search from 
(Don ©etten) these unprincipled spoilers (tev 3(nqretfer). Judge 
(Urtbetlen) for yourself, if the idea of returning to India thorough- 
ly empty handed (mtt Eclltg leeren £>dnben), could be support- 
able (ertr&gltd)) to me. Forgive me, if this consideration (bte 
95etrad)tung) led (ttermeger*) me to betray your confidence 
(ba3 gixtvauen »erratben*) and to sacrifice (aufopfern) a smaU 



374 

$tta£t(}) sum, though not my own, to save my whole fortune. I 
am under the greatest obligation to you. I shall be happy to 
testify OBewetfe gebert son) my gratitude in any way in my 
power, and I request you to consider (recfynen) these trifles (fur 
mcfytS) as only the expressions (bte ^ertncjen 3*i&)eri) °f m J 
readiness (buxd) toelcfye id) mid) beetfere) to serve you." 



A 

SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 

OF THE 

DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH, 

THEIR INFLECTION AND USE. 



By G. J. ADLER 



A 

SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 

OF THE 

DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH, 

THEIR INFLECTION AND USE. 



PARTS OF SPEECH. 

§ 1. The German language has ten parts of speech : 
. — The Article, Substantive or Noun, Adjective, Numeral, 
Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, and 
Interjection. 

Of these six are declinable ; namely, the Article, the 
Noun, the Adjective, the Numeral, the Pronoun, and 
the Verb. 

The remaining parts of speech are indeclinable and 
are called Particles. 

The declinable parts of speech have two numbers, 
the Singular and the Plural. 

To substantives, and to all the other declinable parts 
of speech, except the verb, belong three genders, Mas- 
culine, Feminine, and Neuter. 

§ 2. They have also four cases: — Nominative, 
Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, which in general cor- 
respond to those of the same name in the Classical 
Languages. 

1st, The nominative is employed as the subject of a proposition, 
in answer to the question "who?" or "what?" e. g. 2£et 
fomnrt ? t>er Stater, fcie gutter unt> t>a$ jlttifc frmuneri ; who comes 1 
the father, the mother and the child are coming". 

2d, The genitive denotes the relation of origin, possession, mu- 
tual connection, and many others, which in English are expressed by 
the possessive case, or by the preposition of. It answers to the 
question "whose?" e. g. s 2£cftcn &aus til bag? (S? tft t>es ,ftfrrig£; 
t>c» ftaufmanns ; whose house is this] It is the king's; the mer- 
chant's. 



378 



3d, The dative is the case of the remote object, from which any 
thing is taken, to or for which any thing is done. It answers to 
the question "to whom!" "for what?" e.g. SQBem fcttwjft £)u 
bas SSuct) ? £)ctn 2d)tet ; t>em .£na6en ; for whom do you bring that 
book? For the teacher; the boy. 

4th, The accusative indicates the immediate object of an active 
transitive verb, in answer to the question "whom?" or " what?" 
e. g. SBaei Ijaft £>u ? Sine gcfcer ; etn defter ; what hast thou ] A 
pen ; a knife. 



ARTICLES. 



§ 3. An article is a word which serves to restrict 
or individualize the meaning of substantives. 

There are in German as in English two articles ; 
the definite ber, bte, ba£, the ; and the indefinite cut, eitte, 
etn, an or a. 

In German both articles are declined, i. e. they indi- 
cate by a change of termination the gender, the num- 
ber, and the case of the substantive to which they be- 
long. 

DECLENSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 





Singular. 




Plural. 




Masc. 


Fern. Neut. 




For all genders. 


Nom. 


ber, 


bte, ba§, 


the. 


bte, the. 


Gen. 


be3, 


ber, be$, 


of the. 


ber, of the. 


Dat. 


bem, 


ber, bem, 


to the. 


ben, to the. 


Ace. 


ben, 


bie, ba$>, 


the. 


bte, the. 




DECLENSION of the indefinite 


ARTICLE. 






Masc. Fern. 


Neut. 






Nom. 


etn, erne, 


etn, 


a, an. 




Gen. 


etne§, etner, 


etneS, 


of a, an. 




Dat. 


etnem, etner, 


exn em, 


to a, an. 




Ace. 


etnen, etne, 


etn, 


a, an.. 






OBSERVATIONS. 





§ 4. Obs. 1. The meaning of substantives without the 
article is expressed in the most general manner. The office 
of the article is to point out either definitely or indefinitely an 
individual of the genus or species denoted by the substantive ; 
e« g. ber 9J?cmn, the man ; etne 95tume, a flower. 



379 

Obs. 2. Hence common nouns only, which under one term 
comprehend many individuals, can, strictly speaking, assume 
the article. The remaining classes of nouns must from the 
nature of their signification commonly reject it ; viz : 1st, 
proper names, which already contain the notion of individuali- 
ty ; as, Goethe, Walter Scott, &c. ; 2d, abstract substantives 
and names of materials, the meaning of which is so general, 
that no individual is distinguished ; as, virtue, water, gold. 

Obs. 3. The article, however, is employed in various rela- 
tions before all classes of substantives, even more frequently 
in German than in English. 

ARTICLE BEFORE PROPER NAMES. 

§ 5. The article is used before proper names in the 
following instances : — 

1st, When the name of a person assumes the signification of 
a common noun. This is the case, when the same name is com- 
mon to several individuals ; as, tie (Stuarts, bte (Satcne, the Stuarts, 
the Catos, or when it is employed to express some quality or 
characteristic ; as, cr if! etn $nxiter 9)(atc, he is a second Plato ; bet 
©afar unferet 3cit, the Csesar of our age. 

2d, If the name of a person is preceded by an adjective ; as, 
ber bcirtge 9)ctru$, ber grc6e Jriebricf), St. Peter, Frederick the Great. 

3d, When the name of an author is put instead of his works ; 
as, id) (efe b e n S>d>a£fpcare, I am reading Shakspeare ; fyaben @te 
ben ?cfjtng ncd) tiict)t ? have you not yet purchased Lessing's 
works 1 

4th, To denote familiarity or inferiority; as, tcb ntaa/S unfc) 
nri(T£ ntcbt gtou&en, fc>a& mid) bet Wlav t>cvtaffcn bat (<Sd)tller), I cannot 
possibly believe that (friend) Max has deserted me ; b e r grig foil 
gefdntunb femmen, let Frederick (servant) make haste to come. In 
this connection the article may oflen be rendered into English by a 
possessive pronoun; e. g. rue ift bet 3Satet? where is your father? 
bte Gutter ift auscjecjangen, my (our) mother has gone out. 

5th, To distinguish the gender of names of countries and places, 
such as are not of the neuter gender ; as, bie <&d)\ve\$, ber SBretS? 
gau tu 

6th, The article serves often simply to point out the case of the 
name ; as, ber Jetfyucj be$ ©Drug, the expedition of Cyrus ; ber Sob 
b e $ ©ocrateS, the death of Socrates. 

ARTICLE BEFORE ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES AND NAMES OF 
MATERIALS. 

§ 6. Before abstract substantives and names of 
materials the article is employed, 



380 

1st, To express the distinction of case, when the noun is of thf 
feminine gender and therefore indeclinable in the singular (§ 30); 
e. g. t>er &cu] t) c r ?Rad)c i)l gefemnU'H, the day of vengeance is 
come; in tc r Jmfrrit hcifo/in ©cbuk, under the sacred protection 
of liberty ; b c t ^)ft(fc beturfen, to stand in need of help. 

2d, When their meaning is restricted to some particular in- 
stance ; as, t>a* gaffer fc>er (sSlbe, the waters of the Elbe; tct 
Jlctp t>c$ 0d)tt(erl, the diligence of the scholar* 

ARTICLE BEFORE COMMON NOUNS. 

§ 7. Common nouns are usually connected either 
with the definite or indefinite article. Its omission, 
however, becomes necessary in the following cases : — 

1st, When the common noun expresses some qualify or condi- 
tion; as, cr tft ^cutfmnnn, JUmig, <Selt>nt gewerfcen, he has become 
a merchant, king, a soldier. 

2d, In titles, superscriptions, &c, as in English ; e. g. Doctor 
5utbcr ; £crr, Jrcm Dtetrtcb, Mr., Mrs. Dietrich; fceutfd) - cngttfcbeS 
S&ovtetbud), German-English Dictionary. 

3d, When the common noun, in connection with a preposition, 
constitutes an adverbial expression, or when several common nouns 
are united by a copulative conjunction and form one complex no- 
tion ; e. g. $u JuSe, ubet 2anb, $u (Sdnffe retfen, to travel on foot, by 
land, by sea ; >Kc^ unt) fetter febnoben, unt> ,5ttc$ unt) gunfen freben 
(^Burger), both horse and horseman were panting, and pebbles 
and sparks were flying ; nut ©ut unt) 33(ut, with property and 
life. 

4th, Common nouns in the plural, denoting several individuals 
in an indeterminate manner, and corresponding to the singular with 
the indefinite article cm, cine, tin, do not admit of the article ; as, id) 
fyabe cinen S8 t i e f erbnften, 1 have received a letter ; plur. id) babe 
93 r i e f e crbalten, I have received letters. $)fert)e ftnt> ntigltdK Sfytere, 
horses are useful animals. 

5th, The omission of the article often gives a partitive significa- 
tion to the substantive, especially, if it be the name of a material 
substance. In this case we supply the English some (the French 
du) ; e. g. gib tljm 23tot), 9#tld), s Iiktn, give him some bread, milk, 
wine, &c. 

IDIOMATIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 

§ 8. In a manner peculiar to the German, the definite ar- 
ticle is often put before a common noun, to indicate that the en- 
tire species is meant ; e. g. b e r Ottenfd) tjl fterbltd), man {all 
men, every man) is mortal. So also before abstract substan- 
tives and names of materials, when their meaning is to be taken 
to its full extent ; e. g. unt> fc> t e Tugenb, fie tjl: feut leerer 



381 

(£cf)atf, and virtue, it is no empty sound ; ba$> Stfen tjt em 50?e^ 
tad, iron (all iron) is a metal. 

The Germans employ the definite article also before the names 
of seasons, months, days, and in many other cases, where the 
English idiom does not admit of it ; e, g. ber 8en$, ber ©ommer, 
ber 2(benb, spring, summer, evening ; b>a§ Sfyrtftentfyum, Christi- 
anity, bte Stye, matrimony, &c. 



THE ARTICLE IN SENTENCES. 

§ 9. When in the same proposition several substantives of 
the same gender and number follow each other, the article is 
expressed with the first only ; but if they differ in gender or in 
number, or are otherwise opposed to each other, it must be 
expressed with each ; e. g. bte QSeraanbten unto Jreunbe bte* 
fe£ SQ^anned finb atte tobt, the relations and friends of this man 
are all dead ; ber better, bte SUhitter unb bte Sftnber finb $u 
$ a life, the father, the mother and the children are at home. 

When a substantive in the genitive case limits the meaning 
of another, the article is always omitted before the limited sub- 
stantive, if the genitive precedes it ; e. g. metne£ 9Sruber$ 
33ud) — baS 35ud) metneS Q3ruber3, my brother's book ; auf fet* 
neS 2eben3 erflem @ange, on the first journey of his life. 

§10. If the definite article is preceded by one of the pre- 
positions an, auf, bet, burd), fur, in, son, r>or, iiber, ju, both are 
frequently contracted into one word. 

The following is a list of the principal contractions thus 
formed : — 

e. g. am Softer, at the window ; 

" ant lifer, to the shore ; 

" aufS je(t>, into the field ; 

" &eitn Stcfcte, near the light ; 

" burd)$ getter, through the fire ; 

" fiirs 93aterlanb, for one's country 

" im $a\x\e, in the house ; 

" \nt SBaffer, into the water ; 

" t>om $imme(, from (the) heaven ; 

" ttcr* 2fngcfid)t, before the face ; 

" itberm (Srbenlebcn, above this earth- 
ly life ; 

" libera SWect, over the sea ; 

" unterm 93aume, under the tree - 

" gum (3\M, fortunately ; 

" $ur Jreube, to the joy. 



llm, 


instead oi 


" art bem, 


ant, 


u 


an bat, 


aufS, 


u 


auf bat, 


bctm, 


a 


bet bem, 


burd)$, 


't 


burcb bat, 


fixtt, 


a 


fiir bat, 


tm, 


u 


in bem, 


tn$, 


cc 


in bat, 


»em, 


u 


sen bem, 


t>er$, 


a 


r»or bat, 


ubetm, 


u 


iiber bem, 


UbcrS, 


c< 


iiber bat, 


unterm, 


u 


unter bem, 


gum, 


u • 


$u bem, 


jur, 


(C 


$u ber, 



382 

SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS. 

§11. A substantive or noun is the name of any 
person or thing. 

Substantives are divided into three principal clas- 
ses : Proper, Common, and Abstract. 

A proper noun is the name of an individual person 
or object ; as, ^etttrid), Seutfcfylcmb, Henry, Germany. 

A common noun is a general term comprehending 
a plurality of individuals or parts, and applicable to 
each of them ; e. g. Qftettfcf), SSaum, ^Pferb, man, tree, 
lorse, &c. 

Among common nouns may also be included names of materials ; 
as, (Stfen, iron ; tylild), milk, and collective nouns, which are singu- 
lar in form, but plural in signification ; as, SSolE, people ; ©ebttcje, 
range of mountains. 

An abstract noun is one which serves to denote 
either a quality, an activity, or mode of being, to which 
the mind attributes an independent existence ; e. g. 
greifyeit, liberty ; Sauf, course ; ©ebacfytni^, memory, &c. 

In German the initial of substantives and words 
used substantively is always a capital letter. 

We shall consider the substantive in a fourfold 
point of view ; namely, as to its Gender, its Number 
its Inflection, and lastly its Government. 



I. GENDER. 

§ 12. The grammatical gender of names of per- 
sons and animals generally corresponds to their natu- 
ral sex, i. e. the names of all male beings, including 
that of the Divinity and other superior beings regard- 
ed as males, are masculine ; those of all females are 
feminine ; e. g. bet Wlann, the man ; ber ©Ott, God ; bet 
©etft, the spirit ; bte ©ottinn, the goddess ; bte Sautter, 
the mother. 

Exceptions. Diminutives in d) c n and (ettt; a», ta$ $ttd'bdf)en, 
the maid ; fcag SDtftanlctn> the mannikin ; also, t>o.S 2Mb, the woman, 
and certain compounds ; as, t>te SOtanngpetfon, the male; to* 3Betb6* 
lmt>, Srauenjimmet, the female, woman. 



383 

Appellations , comprehending an entire species of living 
beings without reference to any distinction of sex, are some- 
times masculine, sometimes feminine, and sometimes neuter, 
e. g. ber ^ftenfcfy, man (homo) ; bte ffiacfytel, the quail ; baS 
spferb, the horse. 

§ 13. With respect to substantives in general, their 
gender, as far as it is reducible to rules, may be deter- 
mined either by their signification, or by their termi- 
nation. 

GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES DISTINGUISHED BY THEIR 
SIGNIFICATION. 

I. Masculines. The name of winds, seasons, months, and 
days are masculine ; also the points of compass ; as, ber SKovb, 
Siib, Oft, 2Beft the north, south, east, west. 

II. Feminines. Most names of rivers are feminine ; e. g 
bte Tfyemfe, Soncw, 2Befer, the Thames, Danube, Weser. Ex 
cept ber 3tyem, Wain, 9?fyone, fftil :c. 

§ 14. III. Neuters. To the neuter gender belong : 

1st, The names of letters, ba$> % 35, S 2C. 

2d, All infinitives and other words, which properly are no 
substantives, but are used as such ; e. g. ba£ ©el) en, £)6ren, 
the seeing, hearing ; ba3 (Bute, ©cfyorte, the good, beautiful ; 
ba§ 2Benrt, ba3 2(ber, the if, the but. 

3d, Names of countries and places ; as, Seutfcfylcinb, $ranf- 
veid), Sefpatg, $tetbutg, Germany, France, Leipzig, Freiburg. 

Except the following : tie itttmm, Crimea ; tie ^aufig, Lusitania; 
bte Sfftotf, Mark ; tie s Pfa($, Palatinate ; tie @d)*vei$, Switzerland ; 
all those ending in e i ; as, tie Sutfet, 2£a(actKt *c./ Turkey, Wala- 
chia ; and all those compounded with o u or g a u ; e. g. bet 33tet$s 
gau, tie 2Betterau it. 

4th, Most collective nouns and names of materials ; as, ba& 
QSolf", the people; 23tefy, cattle; ${etfd), flesh; paav, the hair. 

5th, Names of metals ; as, baS (Stfen, ©db, ©tlber, 3* nn > tne 
iron, gold, silver, tin. 

Except: ter Cobalt, cobalt; tie spfatttta, platina; bet <Sta 1)1, steel ; 
bet ^ombacf, tombac ; ber Bint, zink. 

GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES DISTINGUISHED BY THEIR 
TERMINATION. 

§ 15. I. Masculines. To the masculine gender be- 
long : 



384 

1st, Primary derivatives* of one syllable ; as, ber $Uig, ©cfylcuj, 
<&yvud) f gcuif, gtuf, the flight, beat, sentence, course, river. 

2d, Most derivatives, both primary and secondary, terminating 
in e i, e r, en, t n g, 1 1 n 9 ; e. g. ber ©tpfei, top ; ©cfynabel, 
beak; Summer, sorrow; ganger, hunger; ©arten, garden; 
2Bagen, waggon; faring, herring ; £5i>fitng, courtier; ©unfa 
ttng, favourite. 

To these there are many exceptions : — 

Exc. 1. Substantives, the gender of which is otherwise de- 
termined by their signification; e. g. tic Gutter, mother; Secbtcr, 
daughter; tie 9$efet, £)ter (rivers); tag ©il&er, silver; Sftefftrtg, 
brass. 

j£#c. 2. Most names of animals in c (, and many names of 
things are feminine, e. g. tie 2lmfe(, blackbird ; 3)reffel, thrush ; 
pummel, bumble-bee ; ££ad)tel, quail ; 2fcf)fet, shoulder ; SBucM, boss ; 
(Sicbet, acorn ; (geM, fork ; 9?atel, needle ; (Scbctcbtel, box ; (gd)tnte(, 
shingle; Safe!, table; gtommel, drum ; £Buqel, root, &c. 

§ 16. Exc. 3. Words in e(, of Latin origin, which formerly 
ended in la are feminine ; as, tie $ormcl, formula ; Snfel (insula), 
island, &c. ; but those which originally ended in lum are neuter, 
e. g. tag Qrempet (exemp/wm), the example ; (Sapttel, chapter; £)rci? 
£et (oracuZwm), oracle. So also, tag SSuntet, bundle; SJttttel, means ; 
©icqc(, seal, and others. 

Z£zc. 4. The following in er are feminine : — 

2Ctcr, vein. liefer, pine. 

Tfufter, oyster. stammer, cramp. 

^Matter, blister. JUapper, clapper. 

SButtet, butter. £eber, liver. 

(Sifter, magpie. better, ladder. 

gofer, fibre. SOtafer, speck. 

Jeter, pen. Matter, adder, 

flitter, tinsel. £)tter, viper. 

Setter, torture. Miter, elm. 

£olfter, halter. <Sd)(eutcr, sling, 

hammer, chamber. Rebutter, shoulder, 

belter, wine-press. SSStmper, eye-lash. 

Exc. 5. • The following in e r are neuter : — 
2Clter, age. (Suter, udder. 

(Siter, pus. guter, load. 

• Substantives formed from primitive verbs by a simple change of the 
radical vowel, are called primary derivatives ; as, 5&XU&), breach, from fcre* 
cr>cn, to break ; 3ug, march, from Jtefren, to march. Commonly they add no 
other termination to the root of the verb. But sometimes they assume e X, 
1 1, c n, and also b, e, t, ft. Secondary derivatives are formed either from 
verbs, from adjectives, or from other nouns, by means of certain affixes, 
tuchai et, tx fcett, fett, ung, fefcaft :c. 



385 

gutter, fodder. SCRcffer, knife. 

hotter, l (mifX SDlteDet, bodice. 

®ttter, Jfc™" 5 " duller, pattern, 

staffer, fathom. spdfiet, cushion. 

Soger, couch. SRufccr, oar. 

Rafter, vice. Ufer, bank. 

Buicr, leather. SBetter, weather. 

£ut>er, carrion. S&unfter, wonder. 
Salter, a measure of corn. Sunnier, room. v/ 

Exc. 6. Of those terminating* in en, the following are neuter:— 
fcas $ecfVn, basin ; $tffen, cushion; %aUx\, sheet; happen, escutch- 
eon ; 3etd)en, sign. 

§17. II. Feminines. To the feminine gender belong : 

1st, All substantives having the termination t n it (also writ- 
ten t n) ? which affix is joined to masculine names of persons 
and animals, to form corresponding terms for females ; e. g. 
©ott, ©ottxmt; Some, gorotrm, lion, lioness; £elb, Qtlbixm, 
hero, heroine, &c. 

2d, Primary derivatives in be, e, t, ft; e. g. bte ©cfyfoncje, 
snake ; ftunbe, knowledge ; 23ewunft, reason ; Kunft, art. 
Etc* 1. The following are masculine : — 

Staft, bast. Silent), moon. 

23ebad)t, reflection. 9)?cnat, month. 

S3etrad)t, consideration. 93?cft, must. 

2)acf)t, wick. 3tofi, rust. 

©ten ft, service. ®ci)acr>t, shaft (in mines). 

S)ror)t, wire. ©dbctft, shaft. 

£)unft, vapour. ©dyuft, rascal. 

• £>ur(t, thirst. <§k% pay. 

@rnft, earnestness. ©ttft, tag. 

^crjt, forest. Srejt, comfort. 

§reft, frost. 93ert>ad)t, suspicion. 

©tfefot, yest. SSerluft, loss. 

©erotnnfr, gain. gBcmft, paunch. 

£ed)t, pike. £Btd)t, wight. 

£etbjt, autumn. 28uft, filth. 

93ttft, dung. 3«?tjt, dispute. 

jE.rc. 2. The following are neuter : — t>a§ (SJefpenft, spectre ; ®c» 
ftd)t, face; £aupt, head; jltnb, child; JUetnofc), jewel; Sid)!, light; 
(Stift, (ecclesiastical) foundation. 

§ 18. 8d, Secondary derivatives, formed by the affixes e t, 
e, rjeit, feit, uncj, f dt> a f t, atfy, utl); as, fcte £eucr;elet, 
hypocrisy; ©tdrfe, strength; ftufynfyett, boldness; (gttelfett, 
vanity; gefhmg, fortress; ganfcfcfyaft, landscape; $exmaty/ 
home ; 9(rmutt), poverty. 
17 



386 

Exceptions. Many of those in e are masculine ; as, ber £afe, 
the hare; SRabt, crow; JUfe, cheese, &c, and some are neuter; 
as, baS tfuge, the eye ; (Srbe, inheritance ; (Snbc, end, &c. — 3xcxat\), 
ornament, is masculine, and 5)etfct)aft, seal, is neuter. 

§19. III. Neuters. To the neuter gender belong : — 

1st, All diminutives ending in cfyert and letn; as, ba$> 
aSlitmcfyen, the floweret ; ©bfyndjen, little son ; SSiicrjtem, little 
book ; grduletn, young lady, miss. 

2d, Collective and frequentative substantives formed by the 
prefix <j e ; as, bas ©efinbe, domestics ; ©etbfe, noise ; @e* 
fltrn, constellation ; — fcaS ©eret)e r talk ; ©eldufe, frequent 
walking, &c. 

3d, Most secondary derivatives formed by the affixes f e i, 
fa I, tfyiim, ntg; as, ba£ Ueberblebfel, remainder ; 3?dtfyfel, 
riddle ; Srctngfal, distress ; ©ctjtcffal, fate ; gfyriftentfyum, Chris- 
tianity ; £)er$ogtf)um, dukedom ; 95iinbmg, alliance ; SSetfydlt* 
nt$, relation. 

.Ekrc. 1. Of those in tr)um, three are masculine: — bet 3tt* 
tfyum, error ; 9?etcf)tf)um, riches ; 2Bad)6trjum, growth. Of those in 
fat, Stfibfal, afrliction, is feminine; (Stopfel, stopper, is masculine. 

Exc. 2. The following in n t p are feminine : — 

SBebtcingnip, grievance. (Srtctubntp, permission. 

SSctrilbntp, afrliction. gautntg, putrefaction. 

SBetAtmmevntp, sorrow. gtnjrerntp, darkness. 

SBefor^ntp, apprehension. .ftenntmf}, knowledge. 

SSerocmbntp, condition. 93crbammmS, damnation. 

(Smpfangmg, conception. ££tlbmg, wilderness. 
(Stfparmp, savings. 

GENDER OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 20. Compound substantives generally adopt the gender 
of the second component, which contains the emphatic idea ; 
as, bet Sttrd) l> o f , the church-yard ; ba$ 9?atr; f; a u 3, the town- 
hall ; bte 2Btnb m it H e, the windmill. 

t Exc. 1. Names of places are always neuter, though their prin- 
cipal component may be masculine or feminine ; e. g. (ba$) gret- 
h u r 9 (b t e <8urg), £cmi 6 u t g, aBttten c r 3 (b c r SBcrq), &c. 

Exc. 2. A number of substantives compounded with be* 
Oft u t f) are feminine : — 

tfnnmtf), grace. ©anftmutlj, meekness. 

&emutf), humility. ©d)roermut&, melancholy 

©rofmmtf), generosity. SBe()mut&, sadness, 
fcmamutf), forbearance 



387 



Exc. 3. The following likewise deviate from the general rule: 
<?er 2tb f ct) t u (t i c <Sd)ai) y abhorrence ; tic 9u'un a u 3 c, lamprey ; the 
following compounds of SLfytil, part: — ta§ (Segentfjell, the reverse; 
4btntcvthctf, hind part; JEortcrthctl, fore part ; also, tcr 9JllUwcd), 
Wednesday, which, however, sometimes is tie Sfttttrved). 



GENDER OF FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES. 

§21. Those foreign substantives which have preserved their 
original form, retain also the gender w T hich they have in the lan- 
guage from which they are adopted ; e. g. bet Sector, ©pnfct* 
cu$ ; tie SnntartS, tal SenctKum. 

But those, whose form has become assimilated to German 
words, frequently assume another gender ; e. g. fcer Stttar 
(altare), the altar ; ber deeper (corpus), the body ; ber 3?utrt 
(ruina), the ruin ; ba$ Senfulat (consulatus), the consulship, &c. 

Some substantives have two genders, and are generally also em- 
ployed in different significations. The following list exhibits th« 
most important of them : — 

ta$ 23nmV the ribbon. 

ta$ jailer, the cage. 

tas <Bunt, the bundle. 

bciS (Sfyor, the chorus. 

tag (Srfcnntntp, decision (judicial). 

ta£ (Srfce, the inheritance. 

ta* ©erjalt, the salary. 

tic dkugel, the whip. 

ttc ^jeifce, the heath. 

tic $untc, knowledge. 

t>a$ ^ttcnfcf), the wench. 

fca$ £fte\$, the twig. 

tag (Sd)t(t, sign (of a house). 

tic (Sec, the sea. 

tag (Sttft, charitable foundation 

tag Sfyctf, the share. 

taS &l)or, the door. 

fca£ ^ctticnfi, the merit. 



£)cr ©ant, the volume ; 
£>cr $3auct, the peasant ; 
£)ct Sunt, the alliance ; 
3)er (Sber, the choir ; 
£)ic ©-rfrnntntfj, knowledge 
£)ct @*rbe, the heir ; 
£)ct ®cbcilt, the contents ; 
£)cr ©etfcf, the hostage ; 
JDet £)Cttc, the pagan ; 
£)ct jluntc, the customer : 
£)ct 932enfcf), man ; 
£>cr 5Kci^ rice ; 
£)ct ©d)U&, the shield ; 
£>ct ©ce, the lake ; 
£)ct ©ttft, the peg ; 
3)ct Sfictt, the part ; 
£)cr Sfiet, the fool ; 
£>ct Skrticnfi, earnings ; 



II. NUMBER. 

§ 22 In German, as in English, substantives have 
two numbers, the Singular and the Plural. 

With respect to the termination of the singular no 
definite rules can be given. 



388 

The nominative plural is formed from the nomina- 
tive singular according to one of the following Rules: — 

Rule I. The nominative plural frequently does not 
differ from the nominative singular by any additional 
letter or syllable, especially in masculine and neuter 
substantives ending el, er, en, and diminutives in 
d) e n and I e t n ♦ 

It is then either the same as the singular, or is distinguished 
from it by the modification of its radical vowel ;* e. g. bet @m 
gel, the angel, pi. bte ©rtgel; bet Staffer, emperor, pi. bte 
Staffer; ba$ genjler, window, pi. bte genftet;-— bet 33atet, fa- 
ther, pi. bte 58ater; bev ©fen, stove, pi. bte Oefert; bet 25 vu* 
bex> brother, pi. bte 35riibet. 

There are only two feminine substantives belonging to this 
class: Gutter, mother; Tocfytet, daughter, pi.' aflutter, loi- 
ter. The change of the radical vowel is restricted to mascu- 
line nouns ; of neuters, only Mojtet, monastery, has Stloflet in 
the plural ; — but, ba$> ZSatfev, water, pi. bte 28affet ; ba$ D?it* 
b^v, oar, pi. bte SJubet. 

§ 23. Rule II. In all other cases the nominative 
plural is formed from the nominative singular by an- 
nexing one of the terminations e, er, en (tt); e. g. ber 
gremtb, the friend, pi. bie gxeattb e ; ber Mnahe, the boy 
pi. bte Mtiabcn ; ba3 Surf), the book, pi. bte SSitcf) er* 

Obs. 1. The termination e belongs chiefly to masculine substan* 
tives. It is, however, also added to feminines and neuters ; e. g. 
ber %a§, the day, pi. bte Sage; ber £cpf, the head, pi. bte jlopfe; 
bte £unJT, art, pi. bte &unfte ; ^&$ 3Bort, the word, pi. bte SBotte, 

Obs. 2. The termination e t properly belongs to nouns of the 
neuter gender only. Masculines assume it only by way of excep- j 
tion ; e. g. ba§ SBtlb, the picture, pi. bte SBtlDet ; t)<\$ Jttnb, the 
child, pi. t)te £tnbet ; bet ©ctflt, the spirit, pi. bte ©ciftcr. 

Obs. 3. The termination e n (n) is assumed principally by femi- 
nines, also by masculines, and a few neuters ; e. g. bte ©d)u(c, the 
school, pi. bte ©cbulen ; bte 9laM, the needle, pi. bte 9?abe(n ; bet 
£afe, the hare, pi. bte £afen ; $>a$ £)fjt, the ear, pi. bte £>f)ren. 

§ 24. Obs. 4. Substantives which form their plural in e r 

That part of the substantive which is never affected by the changes of in- 
flection is called its root. When it contains one of the vowels a, 0, U, or the 
diphthong au, they are frequently changed into (i, o, it, cm in the plural and are 
then said to be modified. 



389 

always modify the vowels of the root (a, o, it, cut) ; and those, 
which form their plural in e n, wei^er modify it. With respect 
to plurals in e, the modification always takes place when the 
substantive is feminine, and usually too when it is masculine, 
but rarely when it is neuter. 

Rule III. Masculine and neuter nouns adopted from modern 
languages frequently form their plural in §> ; as, ©eme' 3, SorbS, 
£>(>(&'$ ; so also German words, the termination of which is not 
susceptible of inflection ; as, bte U'$, bte 8'S, bte ^J a p a ' $♦ 

Rule IV. Nouns compounded with 9Lftann usually take 
2 e u t e instead of ID? inner (the regular pi. of 9EWamt) in 
the plural ; e. g. ber Scuif m a n n, the merchant, pi. Slcmf I e it t e ; 
bev £)of m a n n, the courtier, pi. bte £)of 1 e it t e. 

§ ,25. Common nouns alone are by their significa- 
tion entitled to a plural number. 

The following classes of substantives want the plu- 
ral: — 

1st, Proper names, except when they assume the signification 
of common nouns (§ 45) ; as, $arl, 5a eD mt/ JRbm. 

2d, Names of materials, except when different species of the 
same genus are to be denoted ; as, ba£ Stfen, ©tlber; ©olb, 
iron, silver, gold ; — bat bte Srben, the earths (different kinds) ; 
bte -Dftneralroafier, mineral waters. 

3d, Many collectives ; as, ba3 ©eftnbe, the domestics ; ba§ 
93tefy, cattle, dec. 

4th, All infinitives and neuter adjectives used substantively ; 
as, bctS ©etg, white (the colour) ; ba$ £>dgttd)e, the ugly ; ba$ 
(Jtnfommen, the income ; ba$> SBtjfen, knowledge. 

5th, Most abstract substantives, especially such as denote 
qualities, powers or affections of the mind, dec. ; as, ber %U\%, 
diligence ; bte %u§?nk, y° utft ; bte aSewunft, reason ; bte ^wrcf>t> 
fear. Sometimes, however, they become concrete, expressing 
different hinds of the same quality, dec, and then they are em- 
ployed in the plural : as, lugenben, virtues ; ©cfybnfyetten, beau* 
ties. 

§ 26. 6th, Substantives denoting number, measure, weight, 
when preceded by a numeral, are put in the singular, even 
though in other connections they may form a plural ; as, $n>et 
g u g breit, two feet wide ; fed)3 ^ f u n b Gutter, six pounds 
of butter ; em 3tegtment son taufenb SK a n n (not banner, pi.)/ 
a regiment of thousand men. 



390 

» 
Exceptions, Feminine substantives in e, and such as express a 
measure of time; as, greet (Stten (t> i c ©He) Suet)/ two ells of cloth; 
ftinf Sa^re tancj, for five years; moreover, all names of coins; 
as, $mi ©refdben, $roo(f .ftreuger, two groshes, twelve kreuzers,— are 
put in the plural as in English. 

§ 27. Some substantives are employed in the plur- 
al number only : — 



Stynert, ancestors. 
2(eltetn, parents. 
2((pen r alps. 



measles. 



SSeinHeifcer, ) 
ofert, $ 



trousers. 



SSrieffcfyaften, papers. 
StnKmfte, revenue. 
$aftert, Lent. 
$erten, vacation, 
©efdfte, rents, 
©liebmagen, limbs. 
Soften, expenses. 
Ceute, people. 



SRafern, 
3?6tie(n> 
Wo (fen, whey. 
£)jrern, Easter. 
Vftn^ften, Whitsuntide. 
3fdnfe, tricks, 
©portetn, fees. 
Xrdber, husks. 
, drummer, ruins. 
Intppen, troops. 
SBet^nacfyten, Christmas. 
3ettldufte / junctures. 
3tnfen, interest of money. 



§ 28. There are a number of substantives which 
have two forms for the plural, partly as a simple dia- 
lectic variety, but most commonly with different sig- 
nifications : — 



Singular. 

Ser 35 ant, the volume ; 
Sct£ SSartb, the ribbon ; 
£a$ SSanb, the bond ; 
Ste 33cmf, the bench ; 
£)ie 33anf, the bank ; 
Set SBeuter, the peasant ; 
£ct£ 35auer, the cage ; 

Ser Sont, the thorn ; 

Sa§ Dtncj, the thing ; 
£)a3 Dt'ng, little creature 
SaS ©eficfyt, the face ; 
Da3 ©eficfyt, the vision ; 
£)a$ £)orn, the horn ; 



Plural. 

fcte 93dnbe. 
bte 35dnber 4 
tie 23anfee. 
bie SSdnfe. 
tie 33cutfen. 
fete SSauerru 
tie Waiter. 
Somen. 
Sorner. 
bie Singe, 
tie Dinger, 
tie ©eftcfyter* 
tie ©eficfyte. 

Die Corner ; but £> o r n e, dif- 
ferent sorts of horn. 



391 

Ser ?at>en, the shutter ; t>te 2afeem 
Ser Vaben, the shop ; tie Sdben. 

©erOrt, the place; \^ Uv 

Der Scfyxlb, the shield ; bte ©d)t(be. 

Da3 Sdjtlt), the sign; bie ©cfytlber. 

'Da3 ©titcf, the piece ; tie Sti'uf e, 

Da3 Stiief, the fragment ; bxe Stitcfen. 

Ser 'Ifeer, the fool ; fcte Ifyeren. 

Sct3 tbor, the door ; bte Ifyere. 

DaS 28ort, the word ; bte Sorter ; but 2Borte, words. 

in connected discourse. 



III.' INFLECTION. 

§ 29. For the purposes of declension we divide 
German substantives into two classes, which differ es- 
sentially in their mode of inflection ; viz : 1st, Common 
and Abstract Nouns ; 2d, Proper Names. 

DECLENSION OF COMMON AND ABSTRACT NOUNS. 

§ SO. Common and abstract nouns have two prin 
cipal forms of inflection, denominated the earlier and 
the later declensions. The characteristic distinction of 
each is the termination of its genitive singular* which 
in the earlier declension is $ or e g, and in the later 
n or e tu 

All feminine substantives are invariable in the sin- 
gular ; hence their mode of declension is determined 
by the nominative plural. 

The nominative, genitive and accusative plural are 
always alike, and their difference is pointed out by 
the article only. 

The dative plural always assumes n, unless its nom- 
inative already ends in that letter. 



EARLIER DECLENSION 



§ 31. The earlier declension comprises nouns of all 
genders, and may be distinguished by the termination 



392 

of its genitive singular, which (feminine nouns ex 
cepted) is always g or e $♦ 

The nominative plural is either the same as the 
nominative singular, or it assumes one of the termina- 
tions e, e r, e n or n. 

In the plural the radical vowels a, 0, tt, and the diph- 
thong an, are generally modified into a, b, it, du. 

Hence to inflect a word of this declension, not only 
the genitive singular, but also its nominative plural 
must be given ; e. g. ber SSrttber, the brother, gen. be$ 
SSrubertf, nom. pi. bte Sritber ; bte $vud)t, fruit, nom. pi. 
bte grucfyfe; ba3 Mteii>, the garment, gen. beg iEleibeS, 
nom. pi. bte $(etber. 



TABULAR VIEW OF THE TERMINATIONS OF THE EARLIER 
DECLENSION. 





Singular. 




Plural. 






I. II. 


III. 


VK 


Nom. 


given. 


like the sing. 


e. 


er. 


en. n\ 


Gen. 


eS, 1 (en$, n3). 


a 


e. 


er. 


en, it. 


Dat. 


e, or like the nom. 


It. 


en. 


ern. 


en, n. 


Ace. 


like the nom. 


like the nom. 


e. 


er. 


en, *u 



§ 32. PARADIGMS. 

I. a. J)er 93a ter, the father. 
Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ber better, the father ; bte Q3dter, the fathers. 

Gen. beg Waters, of the father ; ber QSdter, of the fathers. 
Dat. bem Sater, to the father ; ben 93dtern, to the fathers. 
Ace. ten 23ater, the father ; bte 93dter, the fathers* 

I. b. J)ie SRutter, the mother. 
Singular. Plural. 

Nom. bte SRutter, the mother; bte SRiitter, the mothers. 
Gen. ber Setter, of the mother ; ber Scatter, of the mothers. 
L)at. bee Gutter, to the mother; ben Wuttevn, to the mothers 
Ace. bte SQiutter, the mother ; bte SWutter, the mothers 



393 

II. a. !Der 93cutm, the tree. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ber 93anm, the tree ; bte 35dume, the trees. 

Gen. be3 95aitme3, of the tree ; ber 33dume, of the trees. 

Dat. bem 93aume, to the tree ; ben 25dumen, to the trees. 

Ace. ben SSaum, the tree ; bte 95dume, the trees. 

II. b. J)te £)anb, the hand. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. bte <£)anb, the hand ; bte £)dnbe, the hands. 

Gen. ber £)anb, of the hand; ber £)dnbe, of the hands. 

Dat. ber *f)anb, to the hand ; ben |)dnben, to the hands. 

Ace. bte £)anb, the hand ; bte £)dnbe, the hands. 

III. a. £)a£ gteb, the song. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ba$ Steb, the song ; bte Cteber, the songs. 

Gen. be£ £tebe$, of the song ; ber Weber, of the songs. 

Dat. bem Stebe, to the song ; Cen Stebern, to the songs. 

Ace. ba3 Steb, the song ; bte £ieber, the songs. 

III. b. Ser ©etjr, the spirit. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ber ©etft the spirit ; bte ©etfter, the spirits. 

Gen. be3 @etjre£, of the spirit; ber ©etfter, of the spirits. 

Dat. bem ©etfte, to the spirit ; ten ©etjrern, to the spirits. 

Ace. ben ©etft, the spirit ; bte ©etfter, the spirits. 

IV. a. 2)er ©trat?l, the ray. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ber ©rral)(, the ray; bte ©trafyfen, the rays. 

Gen. be3 ©traces, of the ray; ber ©trablen, of the rays. 

Dat. bem ©trable, to the ray; ten ©trafylen, to the rays. 

Ace. ten ©trafyl, the ray; bte Straiten, the rays. 

IV. b. 2)a§ 3(u9e, the eye. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ba£ Shtge, the eye ; bte 5(n$en, the eyes. 

Gen. be$ Singed, of the eye ; ber ^lugen, of the eyes. 

Dat. bem Shtcje, to the eye ; ben 5(ugen, to the eyes. 

Ace. ba§> 5Ui<je, the eye ; bte 2(ugett, the eyes, 
17* 



394 

V. £)er Dfame, the name. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ber 9fctme, the name ; bte stamen, the names. 

Gen. be3 9tarnen$,ofthename; ber Stamen, of the names. 

D at. bem Xiamen, to the name; ben 9£amen, to the names. 

Ace. ben Sftamen, the name ; bte Xiamen, the names. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

The laws of euphony alone can decide, whether the termi- 
nation of the genitive singular is to be § or e$, and whether 
the dative is to be like the nominative or to have e. Gener- 
ally, however, nouns ending in b, b, t, jr, cfy, g, f, 3, fefy, p, g 
form their genitive in e 3, and their dative in e 5 those ending 
in ant), at, enb, tcfyt, tg, t ng, Ung, rtdfj, fa I, tfyum 
have s in the genitive, and the dative like the nominative. 

§ 33. Like SBater (I. a.) are inflected all masculine 
and neuter substantives terminating in e I, e t or e it ; 
diminutives in rf) e n and I e i tt ; and neuters in e, which 
have the prefix g e ; as, ©erebe, ©etofe, talk, noise, &c. 
Examples : — 

£)et 2Cpfe(, apple ; ba£ genjfet, window ; 

bet (Snfel, grandchild ; ba$ (SJeroitter, thunderstorm ; 

ber 23oge(, bird ; bet £)egcn, sword ; 

ba$ <Stegc(, seal ; bet ©arten, garden ; 

bet 2(blct, eagle ; ber 2£agen, waggon ; 

ber SBrufcet, brother ; ba$ SSecfen, basin ; 

ber SMetptet, master ; baS 3etd)en, signal. 

SDWbcftcn, girl, maiden ; SBiicbletn, little book ; 

$etlcl)en, violet; S3Utmletn, floweret. 

gutter and £ocf)ter, daughter, are the only feminine substantives 
which retain in the plural the termination of the nominative sin- 
gular. 

§ 34. Like ber SSaum (II. a.) are inflected the follow- 
ing:— 

1st, Masculines and neuters terminating in the affixes cmb, 
at/ icfyt, tg, tng, ttng, ncf); e. g. £eitcmb, saviour; Wonat, 
month ; ftdftg, cage ; £dnptttng, chieftain, &c. 

2d, Many foreign substantives, such as, ber 2lbt, 3((tar, 95u 
fd)of, Sarbutat, ^alafi:; the abbot, alter, bishop, cardinal, pal- 
ace, &c. 



395 

3d, All substantives ending in the affixes tug and fat; 
as, bte gtnftermg, darkness ; ^enntm'g, knowledge ; fca$ ©cfytcf* 
fed, fate ; Srcmgfal, calamity, &c. 

Like bte jpattt) (II. b.) are declined the following fem- 
Lnines : — 

Unoft, anguish. Suft, air. 

TlMftudjt, evasion. £uft, delight. 

2(rt, axe. 93Jad)t, power. 

SBanf, bench. SCRogt), maid-servant. 

S3 taut, bride, SOfau^, mouse. 

SBruft, breast. %lad)t, night, 

•^cmji, fist. Sftafyt, seam, 

grucbt, fruit. 9?otf), distress. 

©an$, goose. $1 up, nut. 

(5kfd)txmt)l, swelling ©cm, sow. 

<§>ruft, tomb. <gd)nur, string. 

&<uit, skin. ©tatt, city. 

iUuft, gulf. 2Bant>, wall. 

^raft, force. SButft, tumour. 

<ftuf), cow. ££utft, sausage. 

,$ unfit, art. 3unft, guild. 
£aue, louse. 

To these are to be added the compounds of the words .ftunffc and 
Sauft, which are never employed separately ; as, bie 3ufammett* 
funft, the meeting ; (Stnf linftc, pi., revenues ; 3ctt(d'ufte, pi., junctures 
(§ 27). 

'Remark. Masculines of this form generally modify the 
radical vowel in the plural ; feminines always ; of neuters only 
the following three:- — $>a§> Gtfyer, the chorus ; ba§> ^log, the 
raft ; ba$ 9?oftr, the reed ; pi. Sfyote, gloge, 9t6i>xe. 

§ 35. Substantives declined like bag Steb (III.) are gen- 
erally of the neuter gender, and masculine only by 
way of exception. They always modify the vowel 
of the root. Examples : — 

2Cmt, office. £amm, lamb. 

SBuct), book. $lc% nest. 

£)orf, village. $la$>, wheel, 

©etb, money. ©ctyefj, castle, 

(grab, grave. 23 elf, nation. 

$raut, herb. SOBeifc, woman. 

So also all nouns ending in t|am; as, 9?dd)tl)um, riches ; £ets 
gcgtfyum, dukedom, and a few foreign words ; as, $)arlament, SRcgU 
nwnt, ©pital. 



396 

The masculines declined like g t e b are as follows : — 95&fe? 
nncfyt, villain; Dorn, thorn; ©eift, spirit (III. b.) ; ©ett, Cod 
\Jetb, body ; 9jj?ann, man (vir) ; Ort, place ; 9tcmb, border ; 
"^Bormttnt), guardian ; 2Balb, wood 5 s iBurm> worm. 

§ 36. Substantives inflected like ber @traf)l (IV.) are 
of the masculine and neuter genders. They are but 
few in number and never modify the radical vowel in 
the plural. They are : — 

1st, Names of persons terminating in o r ; as, Sector, ^ro* 
feffbr, ^aftor, &c. Except : Saftor, (£lectropt)cr, TOatabot, and 
also SSReteor, which have their plural in e. 

2d, Foreign words which still have, or once had the Latin 
termination t ti m> as, ^tub x u m, pi. ©tub i e n, studies ; (Solle* 
gtum, pi. Settegten, lectures ; Slb&erb, pi. Jlbserbten, adverbs ; 
also those ending in tt », as, Srebttttt, ©ubjlantfo, &c. ; those 
terminating in a I or { I have x e n in the plural, as, 3?egal, pi. 
9fegalten; ftofftl, pi. Jofiilten. 

3d, The following masculine substantives : — 

5)ern, thorn. (See § 28.) ©pern, spur, 

gorft, forest. (Stocbd, sting, 

©chatter, god-father. ©ttefct, boot, 

fccrker, laurel. ©traujj, ostrich. 

SDteft, mast. better, cousin. 

Sftcicbfrcir, neighbour. Itntertfyan, subject. 

$)fau, peacock. 3'matl), finery. 
Gfce> sea. 

4th, To these may be added the following foreign 
masculines : — 

Genfut, consul. ^rd'fcct, prefect. 

SDdmon, demon. 9>falm, psalm. 

©icmicmt, diamond. SRulun, ruby. 

$afcm, pheasant. ' ©toot, state. 

Smpcfr, impost. Sbren, throne. 

SCRitffet, muscle. Sractat, treaty, 
spcintcffd, slipper. 

5th, The following neuter words : — 

Uu§c, eye. Snfect, insect. 

JBctt, bed. 5>ronem, pronoun. 

<Snt>e, end. (E'tatut, statute. 

£cmb, shirt. s$ e rb, verb. 

$ 37. Like battle (V.) are inflected the following 



397 

masculines : — ber S3ucF>fta6e r letter ; $eI3, rock ; %viei>e f 
peace ; ginife, spark ; @ebcmfe, thought ; ®laube, faith ; 
£aufe, heap; game, seed; gct)abe y detriment; SBtlle, 
will. These substantives, however, frequently assume 
an n in the nominative ; e. g. ber gmifen, ©ebanfen, 
and then they follow the inflection of the first form 
(Safer). 

Remark. The word £)erj, heart, has en£ in the genitive, 
and retains the e n in the dative singular and in all the cases 
of the plural, thus : — 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. bat £er$, tic £er$en, 

Gen. t>es £>cr$enS, ber .frerjen,. 

Dat. bem &eqen, ben fctxpn, 

Ace. fcaS 6er$; btc Jper$en. 

The word ©chmerg, pain, has either c n $ or e € in the genitive, 
and in the dative e n or e. Nom. ber (Scfymerg, Gen. be? @cl)mcr$en$ 
or @d)nierjc$, Dat. bem S?cbmcr$cn or @cbmer$c ; Nom. pi. btc 
(Scbnieqen. The word ^cbrecf, terror, is also irregular : Nom. ber 
(gebreef or (Scbrecfen, Gen. be? ©cbredfeng or (Scbretfe*, Dat. bem 
^cbrecf or @d)tccfen, Ace. ben @d)recf or (Sd)tecfen ; Nom. pi. bie 
^cfyrecfen. 



LATER DECLENSION. 

§ 38. Substantives of this declension are either 
masculine or feminine. 

Masculines form their genitive in n or ett, and re- 
tain that termination in all the remaining cases sin- 
gular and plural. 

Feminines being indeclinable in the singular, as- 
sume the tt or en in the plural only. 

No nouns of this declension ever modify the radical 
vowels a, 0, if, or the diphthong au in the plural (§ 24). 






TABULAR 


VIEW OF 


THE TERMINATIONS OF THE LATER 






DECLENSION 


. 






Singular. 


Plural. 






Masculine. 


Masc. and Fem. 




Nom. 


given, 


en, n, 




Gen. 


en, n, 


en, n, 




Dat. 


en, n, 


en, n, 




Acu 1 


en, n. 


en, xl 



398 



§ 39. 

I. 

Singular, 
Nom. ber @raf, the count ; 

Gen. be£ ©rafen, of the count; 
Dat. bem ©rafen, to the count ; 
Ace. ben ©rafen, the count; 



PARAD.GMS, 



Ser ©raf, the count. 

Plural. 



bte ©rafen, the counts ; 

ber ©rafen, of the counts ; 

ben ©rafen, to the counts ; 
bte ©rafen, the counts. 



II. X)er @rbe, the heir. 



Singular. 
Nom. ber Srbe, the heir ; 

Gen. be$ Srben, of the heir ; 
Dat. bem Sxben, to the heir ; 
Ace. hen (Srben, the heir ; 



Plural, 

bte ©rben, 
ber Srben, 
ben (Srben, 
bte (£rben, 



the heirs ; 

of the heirs ; 

to the heirs ; 

the heirs. 



Singular. 
Nom. bte gran, ^ne woman ; 
Gen. ber gran, of the woman ; 
Dat. ber gran, to tne woman ; 
Ace. bte gran, tne woman ; 



III. £)te gran, the woman. 

Plural. 



bte granen, the women ; 
ber granen, of the women ; 
hen granen, to the women ; 
bte granen, the women. 



IV. ©te geber, the pen. 



Singular. 

Nom. bte geber, the pen ; 

Gen. ber geber, of the pen ; 

Dat. ber geber, to the pen ; 

Ace. bte geber, the pen ; 



Plural. 

bte gebern, 
ber gebern, 
hen gebern, 
bte gebern, 



the pens 
of the pens ; 
to the pens , 

the pens. 



observations. 



Obs. 1. When the nominative singular ends in e, or in 
one of the unaccented affixes el, e r, a r, the genitive and re- 
maining cases assume n only; as, ber Some, the lion, gen. bed 
Somen 5 bte Sanjel, the pulpit, pi. bte ftangeln; ber 93att* 
er, the farmer, gen. bed 93 ait em ; otherwise en becomes ne- 
cessary; e. g. ber£etb, the hero, gen. bed £efoen; ber ©efefl, 
the companion, gen. bed ©efetten ; ber ^oet, the poet, gen. bed 
^oeten ; bte gran, plur. bte granen. 

Obs. 2. Feminine substantives were formerly declined in 
tho singular number also ; this practice, however, has been 



399 

retained only in certain adverbial expressions, in which the 
substantive is connected with a preposition ; e. g. ctlif (2rbe n, 
on earth; mtt greuben, with joy, joyfully; sen Setten be3 
$6mc}£, from the part of the king ; in ©nabe n, graciously ; 
mtt (Ifyren frerben, to die an honourable death; gu ©cfyanben 
roerben, to be put to shame, &c. ; sometimes en seems to be 
annexed simply for the sake of euphony ; as, fetner $rau e n 
23ater, his wife's father. 

§ 40. To this declension belong the following clas- 
ses of nouns : — 

1st, Masculines of one syllable; as, 33dr, bear; $(erf, spot* 
$iirjr, prince; @raf, count; £elb, hero; £>err (has £errn in 
the gen. and dat. sing., but £) err en in the plur.), master; 
SKenfd), man; SRarr, fool; ^fau, peacock; ^vtn^ prince; 
Hfyov, simpleton. 

2d, Masculines terminating in e unaccented ; e. g. 

2£ffc, the ape. $nappc, squire. 

S3artc, bard. 9?ad)fommc, descendant. 

SBuvgc, surety. Sflcffc, nephew. 

3)rad)C, dragon. g)atr)e, sponsor. 

ficiih, hawk. SKtcfc, giant, 

©cbiitfe, assistant. ®daw, slave, 

©egc, idol. 3eucjc, witness. 
$\vtt, shepherd. 

3d, Names of nations, such as are not derived from 
the name of the country. They generally end also in 
e ; e. g. 

bet -Batcr, the Bavarian. tcr Sfflcmte, the Moor. 

tcr SBobme, the Bohemian. tcr spo(e, the Pole, 

bet 2?ttttc, the Britain. tcr Spmtffe, the Prussian, 

tcr 23u(gar, the Bulgarian. tcr Diuffe, the Russian, 

tcr £)ane, the Dane. tcr (Sacbfe, the Saxon, 

tcr Scutfcbe, the German. tcr (Scbwabc, the Swabian. 

tec Jrcm^ojc, the Frenchman, tcr <Scbnxbc, the Swede, 

tcr ©riccbc, the Greek. tcr Sartcir, the Tartar. 

tcr £effe, the Hessian. tcr Sttrft, the Turk, 

tct Sutc, the Jew. tcr Uncjar, the Hungarian. 

§ 41. 4th, Masculine substantives of foreign origin, termi- 
nating in ant, a r d), at, cnt f if, t ft, e t, 1 1, or, o g, o p b, 
om jc. 5 e. g. ber ^rotefrant, 9)?enatcr), Sanbt'bat, ^rdlat, &tu* 
btnt, ^raftbent, StatboKf, Stfetbcbtfr, Sbrtjr, <J}eer, Stemet, (£re* 
mtt, Sefutt, Sbtct, Ibeelog, ^btlelccj, ^btlofopb, 3(jlronom :c. 

5th, All the feminine nouns in the language, except 



400 

those mentioned above (§ 33 and § 34). They are 
either monosyllables, as SSabti, path ; ^)fltrf)t, duty, or 
polysyllables, chiefly ending in c, el, er, atb, et, enb, 
fyett/tnn, fcfyaft, ung. The following may serve as 
examples : — 

MONOSYLLABLES. 

2frt, kind. 8nat> seed. 

SSura,, citadel. ®d)tacbt / battle, 

glur, plain. (Spur, trace. 

Sagfc, chase. 2 bat, deed, 

gaft, burden. 3al)l, number. 
D-Uat, torment. 

POLYSYLLABLES. 

ULtbtlt, labour. Statu r, nature. 

(Snte, duck. Dbuniacbt, impotence, 

gcrmel, formula. ^ccfic, poetry. 

(Stegi'tife, region. SReligten, religion. 

.jbanNung, action. ^cbiifjcl, plate. 

Sungfer, maiden. SLaube, dove. 

$eru\}tnn, queen. Unberfttat, university. 

Set t> enfcba f t> passion. SBabrhett, truth. 

9tad)nd)t, news. Sunge, tongue. 

FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 42. 1st, With respect to substantives of foreign origin, w» 
have already under each declension, noticed such as have ac 
commodated their termination to the analogy of German words 
There are some, however, which still appear in their original 
form unaltered ; as, ber vO?ebtcu$, the physician ; ber Safii3, the 
case ; $>a$ factum, the fact ; ba$ Tfyema, the theme, &c. These 
are cither indeclinable in the singular ; as, ber SleruS, the 
clergy, gen. be» (StemS, dat. bem gleruS, &c, or they as- 
sume g in the genitive ; as, ba$> factum, Snbimbuum, the fact, 
individual, gen. be$ gactumS, SnbttnbmimS. 

2d, In the plural, foreign nouns either assume ert (§36); 
as, aSerbum, vei 'h? ph Herbert; ©labium, study, pi. ©tubten; 
or they retain in all cases the original termination of the nomi- 
native plural; as, Webtct, SOfaiftct, SafuS, gacta, tbemata. 

3d, Masculine and neuter substantives, adopted from the 
French or English, generally take $ in the genitive singular, 
and retain it in all the cases of the plural ; ber Serb, gen. beS 
ScrbS, pi. bte £orb3 ; ber Sbef, the chieftain, gen. be* ©befS, 
pi. bte (SbefS; ba§> ©erne, the genius, gen. be$ ©erne' 3, pi. bic 
©ente'a, &c. (§ 24. Rule III.) 



401 



DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 

§ 43. Proper nouns are either names of Persons, oi 
names of Countries and Places. 

Names of persons are declined either with or without 
the article. 

I. When preceded by either of the articles (em orber), 
names of persons are not varied in the singular, the 
different cases being sufficiently indicated by the in- 
flection of the article ; as, ber ©d)U(er, gen. be£ Sdnller, 
dat. bent gentler, ace. ben Srfnlter; em i&Ufyer, gen. eine£ 
gutter, dat. emem Sutler, ace. emen Suttjer. 

Exception. If the genitive of the name of a male limiting the 
meaning of another word is connected with an adjective, and placed 
before the governing word, it assumes the termination $ ; as, t)C6 Qte- 
pen 1 a n t ' 5 SBtfrfi*, the works of the great Kant ; t>e6 bcrurjmten 
ID ix r c r * 6 (Mcmatfoe, the paintings of the celebrated Diirer. 

§ 44. II. When not connected with the article, mas- 
culine names ending in 3, £, ftf), r, J, and feminines end- 
ing in e, form their genitive in e it g ; all other names, 
both masculine and feminine, including also diminu- 
tives in cfyen, form their genitive in '3 simply; e. g. 
9Kar, gen. Wax en 3; SSog, gen. %$c$en$; goutfe, gen* 
?omfeng; but Hermann, gen. joermamt'3; Sari, gen. 
@arl '$ ; ftan^cfyen (Jonny), gen. £>dn3d)en $ ; Slbeltyetb, gen. 
2lbelt)etb' £ 

Remark I. In the dative and accusative singular it has been 
customary to annex the termination en. It is better, however, to 
leave those cases like the nominative, and to prefix the article, 
when ambiguity would otherwise arise; e. g. nom. 2 effing/ gen. 
Ccffincfs, dat. (Com) £ef|tng (better than 2e[[ingen), ace. (ten; ^effing. 

Rem. 2. Names of Latin or Greek origin were formerly 
inflected after the manner of Latin nouns ; e. g. nom. *paulu$, 
gen. *Patih', dat. ^cuilo, ace. ^J cmlum ; ^(atom's ©efprdcfye, 
Plato's dialogues ; ©ceromS 9ieben, Cicero's orations, &c. 
Now, however, they follow 7 the analogy of German nouns, and 
the ancient mode of inflection is only retained in a few expres- 
sions, as, SfyrifH ©eburt, &c; e.g. ^(are'S ©efpracfye ; <&u 
cerc'S 3?eben ; $babrit$' gfabVtn or bte ftabeln be3 *JJl)dbru3, the 
fables of Phaedrus ; ber 2Rtid)tt)um be$ SvofitS, the wealth ot 
Croesus. 






402 



PLURAL CF PROPER NAMES. 

§ 45. The plural of proper names is only employed when 
the same name is common to several individuals ; as, bte 
©cfylegel, bte £>ermanne, persons o£ the name of ©cfytegel, £)er* 
mcum ; or when they are converted into common nouns 
(§5.); as, bte SKeutone unferer £eit, the Newtons of our 
age, &c. 

Rules. The inflection of proper names in the plural 
number is not influenced by the article, and the radi- 
cal vowels (a, o, U, an) are never modified. 

When the names are masculine, terminating in a, e, 
i, a I, e 1, t \ f e r, e n or d) e n, the plural remains unaltered. 

All other masculine names of German origin, and 
foreign names ending in a ttt, XI, form their plural by 
adding e to the nom. sing. ; but those ending in 0, add 
ne* Examples : — 



Sing. 




Plur. 


Sing. 




Plur. 


Gotta, 


(bic) 


(Sotta. 


Wfclpfc 


(bte) 


UMp\)t. 


(Sampe, 


n 


(Sampe* 


£>aQebotn, 


// 


&ageborne. 


£an tubal, 


n 


£anntba(. 


£)mt>, 


// 


£)mbc. 


©Jeter, 


n 


9)teter. 


9JMand)tl)on, 


H 


93Wand)tfjcne, 


fRUfteh, 


// 


&6$tf)en. 


Gate, 


tt 


©atone. 



The dative plural always assumes the termination 
U, unless the nominative already ends in that letter ; 
as, ben gutter tt, 9JMctncl)tf)one n, &c, to the Luthers, 
Melanchthons, &c. 

Names of females invariably add e it or n in every 
case of the plural ; as, gfora, pi. gfcta'tt, gittfe, gtrifett, 
§ebtt>tg, pi. ^ebungert. 



§ 46. 


PARADIGMS. 




Masculines. 


Singular. 


Plural. 1 


Nom. Sutler, 
Gen. Sutler's, 
Dat (bem) gutter, 
Ace. (ben) gutter.; 




Nom. (bte) gutter, 
Gen. ber* gutter, 
Dat. (hen) gutfyent, 
Ace. (bte) gutfcer. 



* In the genitive plural the article is necessary to point out the case ($ 5. 6th 



403 



SlNGUXAR. 

Nom. getbmfc, 
Gen. getbmgenS, 
Dat. (bent) Setbm§, 
Ace. (ben) getbntg; 

Singular. 

Nom. Hermann, 

Gen. Hermann's, 

Dat. (bem) Hermann, 

Ace. (ten) Hermann ; 

Singular. 

Nom. ©otfye, 
Gen. ©ot&e'S, 
Dat. (bem) ®6tf)e, 
Ace. (ben) ©otfye; 



Plural. 

Nom. (tie) Setbm^e, 
Gen. ber getbmge, ' 
Dat. (ben) Setbntijen, 
Ace. (bte) £etbntge. 

Plural. 

Nom. (bte) £ermanne 

Gen. ber |)ermanne, 

Dat. (ben) £)ermannen. 

Ace. (bte) |)ermanne. 

Plural. 

Nom. (bte) ©otfye, 

Gen. ber ©otfye, 

Dat. (ben) ©otfyen, 

Ace. (bte) ©otfye* 



Feminines. 



Singular. 

Nom. Sertba, 

Gen. Sert&a'S, 

Dat. (ber) 93ert&a, 

Ace. (bte) SSert&aj 

Singular. 

Nom. ©ertraub, 

Gen. ©ertraub'S, 

Dat. (ber) ©ertraub, 

Ace. (bte) ©ertranb , 

Singular. 

Nom. gmfe, 
Gen. gmfenS, 
Dat. (ber) Sutfe, 
Ace. • (bte) gmfe; 

Singular. 

Nom. Suite, 

Gen. SultenS, 

Dat. (ber) Suite, 

Ace. (bte) Suite; 



Plural. 



Nom. (bte) SSerttya'n, 

Gen. ber 25ertfya'n, 

Dat. (ben) 95ertfya'n, 

Ace. (bte) SBertfya'n. 

Plural. 

Nom. (bte) ©ertrauben, 

Gen. ber ©ertrauben, 

Dat. (ben) ©ertrauben, 

Ace. (bte) ©ertrauben* 

Plural. 

Nom. (bte) gmfen, 
Gen. ber gmfen, 
Dat. (ben) gmfen, 
Ace. (bte) gmfen. 

Plural. 

Nom. (bte) Sitlien, 
Gen. ber Sulten, 
Dat. (ten) Sulten, 
Ace. (bte) 3ulten. 



404 



OBSERVATIONS. 



Obs 1. The termination e n 6 of the genitive singular btdongs 
particularly to feminine names in e. With respect to masculines 
in <v )]/ jcl), r, h the practice of substituting '5, or a simple apostrophe, 
instead of m*, is becoming more frequent ; e. g. £d/)tftg'* ytjilejOi 't)te, 
the philosophy of Leibnitz ; 93?eti(3 JftcfrdTs llmrtffc $u ij§&)tilcr'$ ^tct) 
r>en Dcr (gHo&c, Retzsch's Illustrations to Schiller's Song of the Bell. 

§ 47. Obs. 2. When a family name is preceded by one 
or more christian names, or common nouns without an article, 
the family name alone is inflected ; e. g. 3^rm £)einrid) 
9S offend (or simply aSeg'3) ' Ueberfegungen, John Henry 
Voss's translations; Sbrug 5 r i e b n cf) ' d ^eben, the life of 
King Frederick. 

Obs. 3d, But if the article precedes, in connection with the 
word S^err, or a common noun designating some title or office, 
the proper name is not inflected ; as, t>a$> $ and be£ £)errn SEW u U 
let, the house of Mr. Mulier ; bte Tfyaten bed ft'atferd Sari 
bed ^urtften, the exploits of the Emperor Charles V. ; laO> ©tanb* 
btlb bed gro£en StcfjterS © b t b e, the statue of the great poet 
Goethe. 

NAMES OF COUNTRIES* AND PLACES. 

§ 48. 1. Names of countries, places, rivers, mountains, &c. 
which are of the masculine or feminine gender, are generally ac- 
companied by the article (§ 5), and declined like common nouns ; 
as, He ©cfyroeta, gen. ber < &d)\x>^^, dat. ber ©cfyroeta, ace. bte 
©d)roet$ * bee SJretdgau, gen. bed Sretdgau'd, &c ; ber 3ffyetn, 
gen. bed 9ibetned, &c. ; bte Tbemfe, gen. ber Ibemfe, & c « 

2. Neuter names of countries and places, not terminating 
in d, $ or X/ have the sign d in the genitive and remain unal- 
tered in all the other cases ; e. g. bte Unberfitdten Deutfdf)* 
lanbd, the Universities of Germany ; 9?uglanbd 'libel, the no- 
bility of Russia ; er fommt son Berlin (dat.), he comes from 
Berlin , nacf) ^etpgta, (ace), to Leipzig, &c. 

3. Since names of places which end in d, $, X do not admit 
of an additional d in the genitive, for the sake of euphony, it is 
customary to put them in apposition with the genitive of some 
word like ©tab t, Dor f, $ e ft it n 9 (town, village, fort), or to 
prefix the preposition oon; e. g. bte ©trtroobner ber Stabt 
^artd (or son ^artd) the inhabitants of the city of Paris ; bte 
Cage son lUfams, the situation of Mei*tz 



405 

IV. GOVERNMENT 

§ 49. 1st, When a substantive is the subject of a proposi- 
tion, it is always in the nominative case, and governs the verb 
in number and person. 2Ber retff? £)er 2)ater, ber $mmb 
tmb bte S:bl)ne tetfen. Who travel? The father, the friend, 
and the sons are travelling. 

2d, In the oblique cases, i. e. in the genitive, dative, and 
accusative, nouns are governed either by other nouns, or by 
adjectives, verbs, prepositions, &c. ; e. g. bie \ftlnttev b e 3 . 
£ a life 3, the mother of the house; ber ©trafe wmbig, 
worthy of punishment; e in en 93vtef fcfyretben, to write a 
letter ; cutf b e m 2 a n b e, in the country. We shall here 
only consider the relation which one substantive may sustain 
to another. 

§ 50. Substantives which stand in the relation of equality 
to each other, are put in the same case. They may be thus 
related : — 

1st, When one is added to another, for the sake of explana- 
tion, or is put in apposition with it; e. g. 2Btlf)e(m ber (Sto* 
b e r e r, William, the Conqueror ; 3fyr f ennet tfyn, ten © d) b * 
p f e r fiibner £)eere, ye know him, the creator of bold armies ; 
tfym, metnem SBofyltfyater, to him, my benefactor. 

2d, When one constitutes the predicate to the other ; as, 
fettt QSater tft ftbntg (jercorben, his father has become king; 
er t ft m e t n g ** e u n &/ he is my friend. 

3d, When one is compared with another ; as, ber *Xburm tfi 
fybfyer aU ber 23 a a m, the tower is higher than the tree. 

4th, When several substantives constitute a compound sub- 
ject to one verb; e. g. ©cfybnfyett unb 3ngenb treten tn tfyre 
ttotte $led)U nneber etn, Beauty and Youth are fully reinstated 
to their former rights. 

§ 51. 1st, A substantive which stands in the relation of 
cause, origin, possession, mutual connection, &c., to another, is 
put in the genitive; e. g. ber ©efcmg ber 93b get, the sing- 
ing of birds; ber ©cfybpferber 2Be(t, the creator of the 
world; ba$ £)ait3 be3 StaufmannS, the house of the mer- 
chant; bee ©cfywefter be3 93ater3, the sister of the father. 

2d, The genitive is often employed adverbially to express 
the relation of time, locality or manner; be£ 20?orgen$, be£ 
s$1ittaQ$>, be3 SlbenbS, in the morning, at noon, in the evening ; 
fyteftcjen OrteS, of this place ; §ute$> 5DZut^e^ fetn, to be of good 
cheer ; unserrtcfyteter ©acfye, without accomplishing one's pur- 
pose. 



406 

3d, A substantive which has a partitive signification is fol- 
lowed by a genitive of the whole ; e. g. bte 33aume etneS ©av* 
Un$>, the trees of a garden ; ba$ X)ad) be$ £>atifeS, the roof of 
the house. 

4th, II) however, the partitive substantive points out a num- 
her, measure or weight, the name of the material numbered, 
measured, &c., is more frequently put in apposition with it 
than in the genitive; as, etne 5)?enge S t n b e r, a number of 
children; mtt fiinf ©itjenb Stern, with five dozen of eggs; 
em ^aar ©ttefel, a pair of boots. But when the thing 
measured has an adjective or other declinable word connected 
with it, the genitive is required; as, $roet $lafcf)en fdflttd>en 
2Betne£, two bottles of superior wine; etn ^Pfunb frtfcfyer 
SSntter, a pound of fresh butter. 



ADJECTIVES. 

§ 52. An adjective is a word which limits the 
meaning of substantives. 

Every adjective may generally be employed in two 
different relations, viz : 

1st, The quality expressed by it may be conceived as inde- 
pendent of the subject, and be asserted of it by a formal act 
of judgment ; as, ba$> $au§> tjl grog, the house is large ; bte 
9tofe tfl: rot \), the rose is red. The adjective thus used is 
called predicative, and is never inflected in German. 

2d, The quality expressed by it may be so intimately con- 
nected with the substantive as to form one complex idea with 
it, and then the adjective is termed attributive ; as, ba% $ r D e 
Spau$, the large house ; bte r otf) e 3?ofe, the red rose. 

Remark. The predicative adjective stands usually after the 
verbs f e i n, to be ; n? c r t> c n, to become, and b I c t b e n, to remain ; 
sometimes also after certain transitive verbs ; e. g. tcr Jgrimmcl roar 
b (a u, the sky was blue ; bte 9£cid)t rotrb b u n t e (, the night be- 
comes dark; t>a£ Mdt> Ucibt fctuber, the dress remains clean; 
i I u g mad)cn, to make wise ; $ r ii n fatben, to die green, &c. 

§ 53. Some adjectives can only be employed in the 
predicative sense, as : — 

afcrjolb, disaffected ; fcracf), fallow ; 

cmojt, distressed, afraid ; etnqetcnf, remembering; 

bcmt, ready ; feinb, hostile ; 






407 

gar, done ; not!), needful ; 

gong unfc gcbe, current ; nag, useful ; 

gd)a£, hating-; quer, diagonal, cross ; 

getreft of good cheer ; quttt, free from ; 

gram, bearing a grudge ; tl)etlbaft, partaking of; 

tree, stray ; unya£, indisposed, ill ; 

ftmfc, known; Wttufttg, losing. 
feitv, sorry ; 

§ 54. Others again can only be used as attribu- 
tives : — 

1st, Those terminating in e t n, en, and indicating the material 
of which anything is made; e. g. bet (ct>etne £cmt)fcr)ub, the leather 
glove; bag fcibenc £a(Stud), the silk cravat; — but, t>er .gxmfcfdbur) tft 
pen £ c t> e r, let 9?tng ift son (3 o I $>, the glove is (made) of 
leather, the ring is (made) of gold. 

2d, All superlatives, ordinal numerals, and certain adjectives 
formed from adverbs of time and locality ; e. g. fcer grob'te, ter 
Stwite, t>cr fcrttte K., the tallest, the second, the third, &c. ; — t>otttg, 
f^uttg, fyteftg, geftrig, morgenfc, from bort, there ; fyeute, to-day ; fytcr, 
in this place ; geftetn, yesterday ; motgen, to-morrow. 

3d, Many derivatives ending in ifcf) and Iter), including also 
adjective names of nations; as, fctetufd), thievish ; notbtfd), northern; 
wortltd), literal ; cmfangltd), original ; bcutjcr), German ; frcm$o[tfci), 
French ; engltfd), English, &c. 

We are to consider, 1st, the inflection, 2d, the comparison 
and 3d, the use and government of adjectives. 



I. INFLECTION. 

§ 55. When an adjective is used in the attributive 
relation, certain terminations are added to it, indica- 
tive of the gender, the number, and the case of the sub- 
stantive to which it is united ; e. g. gut e r SOBem, good 
wine ; enter fcfyottett 3S(ume, of a fair flower ; ba$ Hem e 
Surf), the small book. 

All attributive adjectives of every degree of com- 
parison are susceptible of three different modes of in- 
flection, denominated the first, second, and third declen- 
sions. 



408 



fHB FOLLOWING TABLE EXHIBITS THE TERMINATIONS OF THE 
THREE DECLENSIONS. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 



Singular. 

First Declension. Second Declension* Third Declension. 

* . . * . . a : 



Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


Fem. 


c$, en 


C 


ip, en 


C 

en 


e 

en 


e 

en 


er 
en 


e 

en 


em 


et 


em 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


e 


e$ 


en 


e 


e 


en 


e 



Neut. 
Cb 

en 
en 
el 



Plural. 

For all genders. 
1** 2d 3d 
DecL DecL DecU 
en 

en 

en 

en 



Nom. 


e 


en 


Gen. 


et 


en 


Dat. 


en 


en 


Ace. 


e 


en 



Remark. The first declension of adjectives corresponds to the 
earlier declension of substantives, and presents the greatest varie- 
ty of terminations; so also the second possesses the characteris- 
tics of the later declension of substantives (the en in the genitive 
and remaining cases). The third declension is composite, partak- 
ing of the character of both. 



FIRST DECLENSION. 

§ 56. When an adjective is preceded by no other 
limiting word, or by one which is indeclinable, it as- 
sumes the terminations of the definite article* in all. 
its cases singular and plural, and is said to be inflected 
according to the first declension, thus : — 

•With this difference, that in the nom. and ace. neuter singular ti&e *&• 
jentive has e « instead of a «. 



409 



Nom. 



Singular. 

Masc. Fern. 

guter, gute, 



Neut. 

giite$, 



Gen. \ 9«f^ I guter, i 8"**' 
£ giiten, $ y ' I giiten, 



Dat. 
Ace. 



g litem, 
giiten, 



guter, 
gute, 



9 litem, 
guteS ; 



Plural. 

For all genders. 

Nom. $ute, good, 

Gen. guter, of good, 

Dat. gutert, to good, 
Ace, gute, good. 



Nom. retfyer 
Gen rotW 



PARADIGMS. 

I. Masculine 
Singular. 
2Betn, red wine, 

r ffietne^f red wine, 

Dat. retr)em 2Betne, to red wine, 
Ace. rotfyen 2Bem, red wine ; 

II. Feminine. 
Singular. 

Nom. fiige $rucr)t, sweet fruit, 
Gen. fiiger $rucf)t, of sweet fruit, 
Dat. fiiger $rucr)t, to sweet fruit, 
Ace. fiige %vu$)t, sweet fruit; 

III. Neuter. 
Singular. 

Nom. guteS (Sett), good money, 

Gen. $ u * > ®efbe3, of good money, 

Dat. gutem ©elbe, to good money, 
Ace. gute§ ®db, good money ; 



Plural. 

rotfye 2Betne, 

rotter SBetne, 

rotten 2Betnen, 
rotfye SBetrte* 

Plural. 

fiige %vnd)tt r 
fiiger gritd)te, 
fugen grucfyter^ 
fiige griicfyte* 

Plural. 
gute ©elber, 

guter ©elber, 

guten ©etfcern, 
gute @elt>er. 

Obs. 1st. The following are some of the indeclinable words 
which may precede the adjective without affecting its termination • 
c t ro a $, some ; g e n u g, enough ; a ( I e t ( e u of various sorts ; nu!)t, 
more; t) t e {, much; went 9, little; in the plural the numerals 
$ «> e i, tret, &c. e. g. 9 e n u g rotfjer 5Betn, enough red wine ; a V 
{ c r 1 e t ffif?e Srucfyt, a variety of sweet fruit ; tt> e n i 9 gute$ S8rofc, 
little good bread. 

Ofo. 2d* We are to regard e $ as the regular termination of the 
genitive singular masculine and neuter, though e n most always 
takes its place for the sake of euphony, when the noun itself has 
e$ in the genitive; e. g. gut en Seines, fait e n 3Baffer$, of cold war 
tei ; boat e n ($klt>e$, of ready money. 



18 



410 



SECOND DECLENSION. 

§ 57. An adjective belongs to the second declen- 
sion, when it is preceded either by the definite article 
fcet, bte, ba3, by a demonstrative or relative pronoun, or 
an indefinite numeral. It then assumes the termination 
C in the nominative singular for all genders, and in the 
accusative singular feminine and neuter, and the ter- 
mination e tt in all the remaining cases singular and 
plural. 

The pronouns and indefinite numerals are : — 

fctefer, btefe, btefeS, this ; 
jener, jene, jerteS, that, yonder; 
berfelbe, btefetbe, baffelbe, the same ; 
berjentge, btejenige, basjentge, that ; 
tt>e(d)er, roetcfye, roe(d>c^ who, which ; 
fblcfyer, fokf)e, folcfteS, such ; 
ieber, jebe, jebeS, j , 

ieg(td>er, iegtid)^ jegltcfre*, 5 
alter, alle, allege all ; 

etmger, etntge, etntge*, > several- 

etiicger, etfifte, etft$f*, £ some ' several > 
manner, mancfye, mancfyeS, many a, &c. 



§ 58. PARADIGMS. 
Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

N. bet §ute, bte o,ute, ba$ $ute, 
G. be§ Quten, ber $uten, be3 gutert, 
D. bem cjuten, ber guten, tern $uUn, 
A. ben guten, bte Qute, ba$ a,ut£ ; 



Plural. 

For all genders. 

bte $uten f the good, 
ber Quten, of the good, 
ben Quten, to the good, 
bte gnten, the good 



I. Stefer wetfe 9JJann, this wise man. 



Singular. 
Nom. bt'efer wetfe 9D?ann, 
bt'efeS roetfen 5)?anne§, 
btefem metfen 5)canne, 
btefen wetfen Wann ; 

II 



Gen, 
Dat, 
Ace. 



Plural. 

btefe metfen Wanner, 
bt'efer metfen Wanner, 
btefen.wetfen Wannem, 
btefe roetfen Wanner* 

Sebe fcfyime 33(ume, each fair flower. 



Singular. 
Nom jebe jtyotte 23lnme, 
Gen. jeber fd)6nen S3(ume, 
Dat. jeber fcfybnen 23(nme, 
Ace jebe fd>bne 93lumej 



Plural. 

roelcfye fcfyonen 95(ttmen? 
wekfyer fcfybnen 23(nmen? 
roeldjen fcfyonen 23Inmen? 
welcfye (tyonen 93(umen? 



4ii 

III. 3^ ne ^ griitte $e(b, yonder green field. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nom. jerteS grime $etb, 

Gen. jene£ grunen gelbe§, 

Dat. jenem gri'men $elbe, 

Ace. jene£ grime gelt) ; 



jerte griinen $e(ber, 
jener gri'men $elber, 
jenen gnmen $elbew, 
jene gri'men getber* 



So decline : bcvfelbc roffye £Mn, the same red wine ; bte beflfere 
grudbt (pi. gtucbtc), the better fruit ; twldjeg neufte ftleit) (pi. JUetfcct) ? 
which newest garment ? 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1st, According to the usage of many writers the adjective rejects 
the n in the nom. and ace. plural, when it is preceded by one of 
the words e t n t g e, some ; c 1 1 t d) e, m e h r e or m c t) r e r e, seve- 
ral ; m a n * e, villi, many ; a U e, all ; as, ode fletgtge ^cbtUct, all 
diligent scholars ; mete eble SfftenfdKn, many noble men, &c. It is 
not necessary, however, to make this exception to the general rule. 

2d, When the definite article, being preceded by a preposition, 
coalesces with it into one word (§ 10), the inflection of the adjec- 
tive is not thereby altered ; e. g. butd)sgtune getb, through the 
green field ; i m Q v jj e tt £aufe, in the great house. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 

§ 59. An adjective is inflected according to the 
third declension, when it is preceded either by the in- 
definite article, by a personal or possessive pronoun, or by 
the singular of the indefinite numeral i e t Xl r no, none. 
It assumes the terminations of the first declension in 
the nominative singular of all genders (er, e, e$), and in 
the accusative singular feminine and neuter (e, e$) 
and the terminations of the second declension in all 
the remaining cases. 

The pronouns are : personal, id), bu, er, fie, e$, voir, \t)Y, fte, 
[, thou, he, she, it, we, you, they ; possessive, mem, bem, fcttt, 
tmfer, euer, tfo my, thy, his, our, your, her (their). 

PARADIGMS. 
Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fem. Neut For all genders 

Nom. em gutev, erne gute, ettt guteS, feme sitter?, 

Gen. etrteS guten, etner guten, eme§ guten, femer guten, 

Dat. etnem guten, etner guten, etnem guten, fetnen guten, 

Ace. etnen guten, erne gate, ein guteS; feme guten. 



412 



I. Wexn filter 93ruber, my good brother. 
Singular. 



Nom. mem guter 23ruber, 
Gen. metnei guten IBruber^, 
Dat. memern guten Q3ruber, 
Ace. metnen guten -25ruber ; 



Plural. 

metne guten 23riiber, 
metner guten £3ruber, 
memen guten aSritbew, 
metne guten SSriiber* 



II. 3^^ jiingfte ©cfyroefter, her youngest sister. 



Nom, 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



Singular. 
tfcre jimgfre ©cfymejrer, 
tfyrer jimgften ©cfymefter, 
tfyrer jtmgjren ©cfyroefter, 
t'fyre jiingjre ©cfywejter ; 



Plural. 

tfyre jiutgjren ©ofymeftent, 
tfyrer jihtgften Scfyroeftem, 
tfyren jungften (Scfymefrew, 
t^re jiingften ©cfyroejrern. 



III. Unfer grogeS #au3, our large house. 



Singular. 

unfer grogeS £au$, 
unfreS grogen £)cutfe3, 
unferm grogen £>aufe, 
unfer gro§e$ £ati3 ; 



Plural. 

unfre grogen £>dtifer, 
unfrer gregen £>dufer, 
unfern grogen £>dufern, 
unfre grogen £>dufer. 



So decline : hin fcfyonerer lag (gen. tageS), no finer day, 
fetne cmgenefyme 3?etfe (pi. 9?etfen), his pleasant journey ; betn 
guteS 5ltnb (gen. SttnbeS, pi. fttnber), thy good child. 

Remark, The adjective is declined in the same manner when 
it follows one of the personal pronouns id), I ; tm, thou ; rcnr, we ; 
if)r (@te), you ; except in the genitive case, where the definite ar- 
ticle must be supplied ; e. g. id) armer Sffiann, 1 poor man ; gen. 
metner, b e g armen Cannes, of me, the poor man ; dat. mtr or* 
men SOZanne, to me poor man ; ace. mtct) armen 3Jlann, me poor man. 
So also, bu gute gutter, thou good mother ; gen. b e t n e r, b e r gas 
ten Sautter, &c. ; tbr guten £eute, you good people ; dat. eudf) guten 
fceuten ; ace. eucf) guten Seute, &c. 



observations on the three declensions. 

§ 60. Obs. 1st. When adjectives, terminating in e f , er, en, are 
inflected, they frequently drop the c of those terminations for the 
sake of euphony ; as, etn efcter (instead of eb eter) <Sof)tt, a mag- 
nanimous son ; ber ebne (for eb e n e) 3£eg, the smooth road ; bte bits 
t r e (instead of (utt e r e) grucbt, the bitter fruit. Sometimes this e is 
retained^ and that of the syllable of inflection is rejected in its stead, 
especially in the dative case ; as, etn bettrer £immcl, clear sky, gen. 
cme$ fyettren £tmmel$, dat. einem f)eit em (not bett eunor fjett ten) 



413 

pummel, &c. ; ten et e I n, fyett cm £er$en, to the generous, cheerful 
hearts. 

Obs. 2d. The attributive adjective is frequently left 
uninflected like the predicative. This is the case : — 

1st, When it is placed after its substantive, as the predicate of 
an abridged proposition ; as, tie £lippc, f d) r f f unt ft e i (, the cliff, 
rough and steep ; tic SSlicfe, fret unt f e f f e U o S ergeben fid) in uns 
genie^nen 9i oilmen (©cbtller), the eyes, free and. unshackled, roam 
through the measureless abyss of space. 

*2d, In poetry and conversational German, the eg is often dropped 
in the ace. neut. sing, of the first and third declensions ; as, g u t (for 
gutes) s -8retv good bread ; o It (Sifen, old iron ; cin ur alt SBort, an 
ancient saying, &c. 

3d, When the adjective is used adverbially , to limit the meaning 
of another adjective; as, ein gong neue£ $au$, a house entirely 
new ; tie unetroortct frebe 9?ocbttd)t, intelligence cheering be- 
yond expectation ; em n e u eingebuntcneS 23ud), a newly bound 
book. 

If in these cases the adjective is inflected, the sense is entirely al- 
tered : — ctn ganged, neues £ou£, an entire, new house ; tie unernportete, 
fcobe 9f?od)ridt)t, the unexpected, cheering intelligence ; ein neue6,etn* 
gebuntcnes SSud), a new book, bound. 

§ 61. Obs. 3d. If a substantive in the genitive limits the mean- 
ing of another substantive, and is placed before it, so that the lat- 
ter loses its article (§ 9), the adjective connected with the latter 
substantive must be inflected according to the first declension ; e. g. 
fetncS SBaterti lungjt e r '-@to$n> instead of: ter iunojte (Sobn feineS 
£>atcr*v his father's youngest son ; unfte$ £oufe£ propter <S6u(e, in- 
stead of : ter gttftft e n ©d'utc -infers £oufe£, to the greatest pillar 
of our house. 

Obs. 4th. When two or more adjectives are con- 
nected with the same substantive, they all follow the 
same rules of inflection : — 

I. ®uter, rotber, loutrer 2Betn, good, red, pure wine. 
Nom. outer, rotber, (outret 2Sein, 

UrEN " I pten, rctben, (outrcn $ ^ einc *' 
Dat. gutem, rotbem, fouterm £Bctne, 
Ace. guten, rctben, toutern 2Bein. 

11. JDtc reife, fcbb'ne, gute $rucbt, the ripe, fair, good fruit. 

Nom. tie reife, febone, gute 5rud>t, 
Gen. ter reifen, febonen, guten grucfyt, tif 



414 

III. Unfer fd)8tw$, grttneS ($ta$, our fine, green grar- 

Nom. unfer fcfyoncg, gritnes ©ra$, 
Gen. unfree fd)onen, grunen ©rafeS, k. 

With respect to ease I, however, usage is not decidedly estab- 
lished, as the last adjective frequently follows the inflection of the 
1st declension in the nom. sing-, and plur. only, and that of the 
2d declension in all the remaining- cases : tDarme, frtfcfye Switch, warm, 
fresh milk, gen. and dat. warmer, frtfd) en 9D?tld) ; guteS, roetVee JBret), 
good white bread, gen. gute£, rcetpe n probes, dat. gutem, wcip e n 
33tc£>e, pi. gute, roetpe S3ret>e, gen. gutet roetpen £3tot>e, u. 



II. COMPARISON. 



§ 62. In German, as in English, there are two 
modes of comparing adjectives, called the terminational 
and the compound comparisons. 

The former makes the comparative and superlative 
by adding certain terminations to the simple form of 
the positive ; the latter by prefixing to it the adverbs 
of comparison : m e I) V, more ; am m e t jl e tt or fy o d) jt, 
most. 

Rule I. The terminational comparative is formed by ad- 
ding e r, and the terminational superlative by adding ft or e ft 
to the root of the positive ; e. g. frofy, comp. ftof) e r, superl. fra* 
% e|r, glad, glader, gladest ; retd), retd) e r, retcf) ft, rich, richer, 
richest ; fcfyon, fcfyon e r, fcfyon % beautiful, more beautiful, most 
beautiful. 

Rule II. Adjectives, containing the vowels a, D, tl, gener- 
ally modify them in the comparative and superlative degrees ; 
e. g. alt, alter, dltejr, old, older, oldest ; grog, groger, grogt, 
great, greater, greatest. 

§ 63. The vowels of the root, however, are not 
modified in the following instances : — 

1st, In all participles which have become susceptible of com- 
parison, by assuming the signification of adjectives ; as, tafenb, 
mad ; fctycigent), decisive; oerfctyagen, cunning; werworfen, abandoned, 
&c. ; e. g. rafent), comp. rafenfc er, superl. rafent) jr. 

2d, All adjectives containing the diphthong ou; as, taut), 
rough, comp. raubct/ superl. raufjeft; so: qrem, grey; taub, deaf ; 
lout, loud, &c. 

3d, Derivative adjectives terminating in el, et, en, i, or in one 



415 



of the affixes b a t, f a m, fj a f t, t g, t d) t, ( t d) k., e. g. bunfef, dark ; 

ttetfen, dry; rjcigcr, slender; furcbtbcit, formidable; rcitfefam, advisa- 
ble ; be* baft, malicious ; roalbic}, woody ; £tafid)t, grass-like ; tfywtu 
licb/ feasible, &c. 

4th, In the following : 

S3tcig, pale ; flax, clear ; 

bunt, variegated ; £ napp, tight ; 

fofym, lame; 

lo$, loose ; 

matt, wearied ; 

merfcb, brittle ; 

natft, naked; 

pfott, flat; 

plump, clumsy ; 

rof), raw ; 

tunb, round; 



fcmft, gentle ; 
fatt, satisfied ; 
jd)faff , slack ; 
fd)tanf , slender ; 
ftarr, numb ; 
jtotj, proud ; 
ftraff, stiff; 
flu mm, dumb ; 
tcfl, mad ; 
m, full ; 
$af)m, tame. 



fabt, fallow ; 
folfd), false ; 
frob, joyful; 
9 era fee, straight ; 
gefunfc, healthy ; 
Qtatt, smooth ; 
rjobl/hollow; 
belt), kind; 
tat)l, bald ; 
farg, stingy ; 

§ 64. When the adjective ends either in b, t, ft, S, fj, fd) or J, 
the c before the ft of the superlatives becomes essential for the 
sake of euphony. In all other cases it is commonly rejected ; e. 
g. morfeb, brittle, superl. merfcb eft; fte($, proud, superl. jtot$eftK. ; 
but, Heir, clear, superl. !(ar ft ; tapfet, valiant, superl. tapfer ft ; 
fd)u(btg, culpable, superl. fd)u(t)tg ft fft 

Polysyllables terminating in el, c X or en, generally reject 
the e of this termination in the comparative, but resume it again in 
the superlative; e. g. cbel, comp. ct)(e-c ^instead of ebeler), superl. 
eb e I ft ; better, cheerful, comp. bett x e r, superl. F>cit e r ft ; etcjeben, de- 
voted, comp. er^eb n e x, superl. ergeb e n ft. 

§ 65. Comparatives and superlatives are inflected 
like positive adjectives; thus: — 

1. Better wine, 2. fairer flower, 3. greener field. 

N. beffer e r 2£etn, febonet e SBlume, cjtimet e g $elb, 
G. befter c n SBetneS, fd)6nerer 95lume, gruneten gelbeS' ik 

So : ber bejt e 3Betn, the best wine, gen. beg beft e n 8Betne$ JC V fcic 
fcfyonfte SBtume, gen. ber fcfyonft en SBlume *c 







IRREGULAR COMPxlRISON. 




§66. 


The following adjectives are irregular in their com* 


parison :- 








Posit. 


X^OMP. 


Superl. 




9«t, 


beffer, 


beft, good, better, 


best; 


&M&/ 


Softer, 


r/od)fr, high, higher, 


highest; 


nafye, 


ndf)er, 


nacfyft, near, nearer, 


nearest ; 


*ue(, 


mefyr, 


\mW,\ mich > more V 


most. 



416 

Also the adverbs s — 
gent, Keber, am Kebftett, gladly, more gladly, most gladlj , 
(wemg), mtnber, am mmbeften, little, less, least. 

§ 67. There are a number of adjectives, derived from ad- 
verbs of place, which under a comparative form have a posi- 
tive signification, and hence their comparative is wanting : — 





Posit. 


Stjperl. 






fcer, fcte, fcaS augere, 


augerfte, 


outer, 


extreme, uttermost; 


it it 


it fytntere, 


btntettre, 


hind, 


hindermost ; 


.it if 


it tnnete, 


tnnerfte, 


inner, 


innermost ; 


if if 


it mtttlere, 


mtttelfte, 


middle, 


middlemost ; 


tf ft 


it m'ebere, 


nteberfte, 


lower, 


lowermost ; 


it ft 


tf obere, 


obetjre, 


upper, 


uppermost ; 


it it 


ir untete, 


unterjte, 


under, 


undermost ; 


tt it 


tf sorbere, 


sorberfte, 


fore, 


foremost. 



COMPARISON OP ADVERBS. 

§ 63. Adverbs of manner, the form of which is generally 
the sa<ne with that of adjectives, are likewise susceptible of 
compaiison; as, gefcfywtnb, gefcfymtnber, fd)6n, fcfyoner, swiftly, 
more swiftly, beautifully, more beautifully. They express the 
superlative, however, by "prefixing to it am (a contraction for 
an fcem, § 10) ; as, a m gefcfyrotnbften, a m fcfyonjren, most 
swiftly, most beautifully. 

But when no comparison, but simply eminence is to be denoted 
by the superlative, a u f $, a contraction of the preposition auf with 
the accusative of the article (ta£), is prefixed, or gum, a contraction 
of the preposition $u with the dative of the article (fc>em) ; e. g. a u f $ 
fteunbttcbftc, sum (cftonften, most kindly, most beautifully ; er empftng 
mid) auf$ fyof ltd)ite, he received me most courteously. The ad- 
verbial superlative of eminence, which is also called the absolute 
superlative, may likewise be expressed by the simple form of thas 
degree, or by the termination ens; as, giittgft, most kindly ; in. 
tugjt, most cordially ; fyocfyftenS, at the most ; tancjftene, at the longest, 

OBSERVATIONS. 

§ 69. Ohs. 1. The plural of the comparative mefjt, more, is 
mefyte or mcfytere, which is used as an indefinite numeral in 
the sense of the English severaL 

Obs. 2. The two numerals, fcet erfte, the first, fcer (egte, the last, 
though superlatives in sense, give rise to new comparatives, bet 
er ft e r c and t)cr I e $ U r e, which correspond to the English the 
former — the latter. 

Obs. 3. The compound comparatue becomes necessary when 



417 

two adjectives, denoting qualities of different degrees, are predi- 
cated of the same person or thing ; e. g. er tft m e t) t fait al§ warm, 
ne is rather, cold than warm ; t>u bxft m C f) r a,e(er;tt al$ flucj, thou 
art more learned than prudent. 

Obs: 4. The compound superlative becomes necessary when . 
the indefinite article precedes ; e. g. etn f)od)fl cjiaufamer SKenfd), 
a most cruel man ; cine Md)fl Qcfdbrtic^e SKetfe, a most dangerous 
journey. 

Obs. 5. There are a number of particles (adverbs) which are 
frequently placed before adjectives of every degree of comparison 
to render their meaning intensive. They are : — 1st, With the posi- 
tive, d u § e r jit, extremely ; f) o d) ft, highly ; f e fyr, very, &c. 2d, 
With the comparative, Diet, much ; n> c i t or b e t tt> e 1 1 e m, by far ; 
n c d), yet, &c. 3d, With the superlative, bet we it-cm, by far; 
and the prefix all er ; e.g. f e r)r f d) 6 n, very pretty ; we it cjrojkr, 
by far greater ; a 11 e rfd)b'nft, most beautiful of all. 

Obs. 6. In comparisons, a(S corresponds to the English than, 
and rote to the English as ; e. g. <Ste ftnfo alter at 6 id), you are 
older than I ; er ift fo grop w t e feirt SSatet, he is as tall as his 
father. 

III. USE AND GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 

§70. 1. Adjectives of every degree of comparison may 
be employed substantively ; but they even then retain the in- 
flection of adjectives ; e. g. iDer 2Betf e, the wise (man), sage ; 
etn ffietf e r, a sage ; bte ©cfybne, the fair woman ; ba$> ©rfya* 
bene, the sublime. 

2. With respect to adjectives which are used substantively 
in the neuter gender, it is necessary to distinguish : — 

1st, Those which assume no termination, and which designate 
either some abstract quality, or some material named after that 
quality; e. g. t>a$ 9? e d) t, justice; er fprtd)t etn reined £>eutfcr;, 
he speaks pure German ; bag SBlet tt) e i S, white lead ; SBerttnct 
S3 1 a u, Prussian blue, &c. These are inflected like substantives 
of the earlier declension, and are used in the singular only ; as, 
tai 25lau, teg $(au£ &c. 

2d, Those which assume the terminations of the attributive adjec- 
tive and are inflected like it; e. g. bas ®ute, the good (2d decl.) ; 
etwas ®utc£, something good (1st decl.); t>a$ (55rflne, the green; 
etn @an$c$, a whole. 

§ 71. With respect to their signification, adjectives are di- 
vided into two classes, viz: 1st, such as make complete sense 
of themselves without the addition of any other word; as, cjltt, 
good; ctri' g, great &c. 2d, Those which of themselves can- 
not express an entire idea, but require the addition of som§ 
18* 



418 

complemental notion ; as, b e tt> u 1, conscious of; ( o 3, free 
from, &c. The former may be termed absolute, the latter re- 
lative. 

The complement of a relative adjective may either be the 
oblique case (§ 49. 2d.) o/* a substantive (including all words used 
as such), or a verb in the infinitive with $u. 

ADJECTIVES WITH THE INFINITIVE. 

§ 72. Adjectives signifying 'possibility, duty, necessity, easi- 
ness, difficulty, and the like, are followed by an infinitive with 
I u ; as, e£ tfl mtr nidjt mo^lid) g u 9 e fy en, it is not possible 
for me to go ; er t(l genotH^t S « a r b e 1 1 e tt, he is obliged 
to work ; berett 311 f&mpfert, ready to contend. In this connec- 
tion the infinitive, though active in form, is often passive in signi- 
fication ; Uid)t 3ii macfyen, easy to be done; fcfywer su glctuben, 
hard to be believed, &e. 

ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE OBLKIUE CASES OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 73. When relative adjectives are followed by a 
substantive, it is put either in the genitive, the dative 
or the accusative. 

I. The adjectives governing the genitive are :- — 

kburfttg, in want of ; Cunfctcj, acquainted with ; 

fccfltffen, diligent in ; ntacbttg, master of; 

befugt, authorized ; trtufce, tired of; 

fcenctfytQt, in need of; fd)ulbtg, guilty of; 

fcenmpt, conscious of; -tfjeilfoaft, partaker of; 

etnget)en6, remembering ; t)crbad>tig, suspected of; 

fabtg, capable of ; Detlujttq, losing ; 

fcobr happy in; Ml, full of; 

geroarttg, in expectation of; rvutbicj, worthy of. 
gerxnj}, certain of ; 

Examples. (Siner ©pracfte m a cr) t i 9 fetn, to be master of a lan- 
guage ; cineg 9$etbred)cn$ f d) u 1 1) i g / guilty of a crime; bet (Strafe 
tt? ii r b t g, worthy of punishment. 

§ 74. II. The adjectives which govern the dative 
case are : — 

1st, Such as are derived from verbs which govern the dative; 
as, gebetfam, obedient to; fcienjlbat, hound in service to; ttetbun* 
ton obliged to, &c. 



419 



2d. The following :— 

tffynftd), resembling ; 
ancjemeffen, suited to ; 
angcnebm, agreeable ; 
ctnjtofHg, offensive ; 
beFannt, known ; 
frequent, convenient ; 
fcertnijit, known ; 
fcien(tct), serviceable ; 
etgen, own ; 
fremt>, strange ; 
freunNub, friendly ; 
gegenroarttg, present to ; 
gelatiftg, fluent ; 
gem 69, suited to ; 
genetgt, inclined ; 
getvegen, kind ; 
gen;fld)fen, equal to ; 
g(eid), like ; 
gnatug, gracious ; 
rjeUfam, salutary ; 



fielb, kind ; 

lafttg, troublesome ; 

lieb, dear, agreeable ; 

nacfytfyeiltg, hurtful ; 

nafye, near ; 

nu£(tcb, useful ; 

fcpaMtd), injurious ; 

fcbufttg, indebted ; 

treu, true, faithful ; 

iibertegen, superior ; 

unccrge&ltcf), ever memorable to; 

ttetfcacbttg, suspected by; 

tterfcetbltd)/ destructive to ; 

t)erba£t, odious to; 

t>erroantit, related ; 

ttortfyctlfyaft, advantageous ; 

ttut>rtg, loathsome ; 

ttuflfemmen, welcome ; 

Sugetfycm, addicted to.. 



Examples : bet (Ser)n tjt fetnem SSater a fjn 1 1 d), the son resembles 
his father; er tjt fetnem 93erufe ntd)t geroachfcn, he is not equal to 
his calling ; es ift it)m f) e t i f a m, it is salutary to him ; rote Mel bin 
id) Sbnen f d) u t t> 1 g ? how much do I owe you 1 er tjt mir t> e r r) a g t 
he is odious to me, &c. 

III. Adjectives denoting the measure, weight, or worth of a 
thing; also age or duration of time, govern the accusative; 
as, $wo(f spfunt) fd)tt>er, twelve pounds in weight; etnen Jtnget 
b t e i t, of the breadth of a finger ; etnen Sfjatcr tx> e r 1 l), worth a 
crown; er ift $cf)n Safjc alt, he is ten years old; fiinf Sa^re lang, 
for five years, &c. 



NUMERALS. 

§ 75. Numerals are either definite or indefinite ; as, 
t) ter, J e i) tt, four, ten ; t> t e I, a I i e, many, all. 

Definite numerals are divided into two classes : — 
Cardinal and Ordinal. 

Cardinal numerals are such as express simply the number 
of persons or things in answer to the question "how many?" 
fcret, three ; mergtg, forty. 

Ordinal numerals designate the rank of a person or thing in 
a series ; as, ber erfte, the first ; fcer jroolfre, the twelfth. 



420 



Ordinals are formed from cardinals by annexing the termi- 
nation fl: e, when the cardinal ends in $, and the termination 
te in all other cases; as, bet swcmstgjte, merte, the twen- 
tieth, fourth. 

Exceptions. The ordinal of etn, one, is irregular : bet c r (t e 
(instead of bet e i n t e), the first. Instead of bet 3 xv c i t e, the 
second, it was formerly customary to say bet a n b e t e. 

§ 76. The following is a list of cardinal and ordinal 
numerals: — 



Cardinal. 

1. etn, etns, one; 

2. $ooi\, two ; 

3. btet, three; 

4. met, four ; 

5. ffxnf, five : 

6. fed)$, six ; 

7. fteben, seven ; 

8. ctd)t, eight ; 

9. neun, nine; 

10. $ebn, ten; 

11. e(f, eleven; 

12. %w'6lf, twelve, &c. 

13. btet$ef)n ; 

14. metgefyn; 

15. funfte^n; 

16. fed)$ef)n; 

17. fie&cn$el)n or (te^efjn 

18. ad)t$ef)n ; 

19. neuron ; 

20. gwangig ; 

21. etn unb sroan^tcj; 

22. groct tmb $rcan$tc}, K. 

30. btctfncj ; 

31. etn unb bteiptg,K. 
40. met^tg; 

50. ffinfetg? 

60. fed)$tg; 

70. fteben^tg or ftefytg ; 

80. ctd)t$tg ; 

90. neungtg; 

100. tnmbett; 

101. l)unbert unb etnS; 

102. fyunbett unb $nxt ; 
103 fyunbert unb btet, iu 
200 groetfyunbert ; 

300. btetfyunbett ; 



Ordinal. 



bet,bte,ba$ 



etjie, 
jroette, 
btttte, 
mette, 
fftnffc, « 
fcdjfte, " 
ftebente, " 



the first. 
" second. 
" third. 
" fourth. 
" fifth. 
" sixth, 
seventh. 



a&)U, " eighth. 



ninth, 
tenth, 
eleventh, 
twelfth, &c. 



neunte, 

elfte, 

$tt>6ffte, " 
bt et$cf)nte. 

fiinfyefynte. 

fed)sef)nte. 

ftebcn^ef)nte or ftefo$ef)nte» 

ad)t$ebnte. 

neungcfynte. 

^roan^fie. 

etn unb $roan$t$fte. 

greet unb $roan$igjte, *£• 

btetptgfte. 

etn unb btetftgfte it. 

Dter^tgjre. 

filnftiqfie. 

fecftfttgfltc. 

fteben^tgfie or ftefytjjjtfc 

adbtyigfie; 

neun^igjte. 

fyunbertjite. 

^unbett unb etflc. 

fyunbert unb $n>ette, 

fjunbert unb btttte *c. 

$roetf)unbertfie« 

bmfyunbertfte. 



4*1 

Cardinal Ordinal. 

400. trierbunbert; btt, fcu,fcag merf)unbertf!e» 

500. fiinfbimbett; „ „ „ funffanbertfte. 

600. fecbebunbert ; „ „ „ fedjSbunbcrtfte. 

700. ftcbenfyunbert ; „ „ „ ftebenbunbcrtft* 

800. acftfyunbett; „ „ „ acbtbunbertftc. 

900. ncunhunbcrt; „ „ „ neunbunbertjfo 

1000. tcuifcnb ; „ „ „ tcmfenbfte. 

2000. $roettaufenb. 

3000. btettaufenb. 

100,000. bunbctttaufenb. 

1,000,000. etne SDWHen. 

2,000,000. $reei gotfUtonen. 



observations. 

§ 77. Obs. 1. When e t n stands in connection with other 
numerals, it is indeclinable ; as, e i n unb wer$t<j, forty one , 
e t n tcmfenb adjtfmnbert fiinf unb mer$t#, 1845. In other ca- 
ges it is always inflected. This may be done in four different 
ways : — 

• 1st, If the numeral ein, either alone or with an adjective, limits 
the meaning of a substantive, and is not preceded by any other de- 
clinable word, it follows the inflection of the indefinite article ein, 
e i n e, ein, and differs from it only by a greater stress of accentua- 
tion; e. g. ein (guter) 9Jicmn, one (good) man; cine (gute) S rau / 
one (good) woman; ein (cuiteg) .ftinb, one (good) child. 

2d, When it stands entirely alone, either in an absolute sense or 
relating to some substantive understood, it is inflected like an ad- 
jective of the first declension — e t n e t, etne, e t n c£, &c. ; e. g. 
aud) ntd)t (S i n e r wax bet, not one even was there ; (St n e n Don un£ 
rottb %a§ £eo£ treffen, the lot will fall on one of us ; etne meinet 
©cbroeftern, one of my sisters, &c, 

3d, But if it is preceded either by the definite article bet, btc, $>a$, 
or any other word having the characteristic terminations of the ar- 
ticle (§ 57), it is declined like an adjective of the second declen- 
sion ; e. g. bet etne 93?cmn, b.ie cine grau, t>a$ e i n e Jtinb, the 
mis man, one woman, one child, &c. 

4th, The numeral ein follows, finally, the inflection of the third 
declension of adjectives, ivhen it is preceded by a possessive pronoun, 
m ein, b ein, fe i n, &c. ; e. g. mein e i n er SBruber, my one bro- 
ther ; fetrre e i n e ^cbroeftet, his one sister; (Suer e i n e 6 $fetb, your 
one horf-e, &c. 

§ 78. Obs. 2. The numerals $ ro e t and b r e t are in. 
fleeted only when they are not preceded by the article or some 
other declinable word ; thus : — 



492 

Nom. $tt>ct, tret ; 
Gen. §*peter, breter ; 
P lt. jw'/en, btcten ; 
Ace. tfotifbici. 

Examples : cms -3 ro c t e r ebet b t e t e t Scugcn 9}?unb/ from the 
mouth of two or three witnesses ; fage cS bod) \ en e n t> t e t (no 
t) r e i e n) greunben, pray tell those three friends. 

Obs. 3. The remaining cardinal numerals are indeclinable, 
except that they assume e rt in the dative case, when they are 
used substantively ; e. g. mtt © e d) f e n fasten, to ride in a 
coach with six (horses) ; atif alien 93 1 er en frtecfyen, to craw] 
on hand and foot. But, mtt fecfys 9JJann, with six men; mtt 
x> i e r ©6r/nen> with four sons. 

Obs. 4. Instead of $m e t, 6 e t b e, both, is frequently used, and 
is inflected like an adjective in the plural : nom. b et t> e, gen. b e is 
b e v, &c. ; bte b e t b e n, gen. ber 6 e t b e n, &c. ; feine b e t b e n, 
gen. fetner b e t b e n, &c. ; e. g. fctne b e i b e n 93tiibet ftnb franf, 
both his brothers are sick ; bte beiben Jreunbe rocitcn ta, both friends 
were there. The neuter singular, b e t b e $, refers to two differ em 
things, but is never applied to persons. It corresponds to the Eng- 
lish : both the one and the other ; as, r)aben @te 23rob ober 2Betn % 
3d) babe b e t b e& Have you bread or wine ] I have both the one 
and the other. 

§ 79. Obs. 5. Most cardinal numerals are adjectives, 
which, however, like all other adjectives, may be used substan- 
tively. The words #) u rt b e r t and % a u f e tt b are employed 
as collective nouns of the neuter gender, and are inflected as 
such : nom. ba$ §>unbert, gen. be3 ^urtbettS, pi. bte £>unberte ; 
e « g- 3 « & urtberten, by hundreds ; $ u laufewben, by 
thousands. Qin e 5ft t U 1 n is a noun of the feminine gen- 
der, and occurs only in connection with an article. 

Obs. 6. When numerals serve simply to denote cyphers, 
or the abstract notion of number, they are substantives of the 
feminine gender, the word 3 a M being understood ; as, bte 
(3 a *)0 X) r e t, the number three ; bte 93 i e r j t g, the number 
forty. 

Obs. 7. By means of the affixes er and (in Cj, masculine sub- 
stantives of various significations are formed from cardinal num- 
bers ; e. g. etn £) r e t e t, ein @ e d) f e r, coins of three and six 
kreuzers ; etn Tl d) t % t g e r, a man of eighty ; 3 n> e t u n b $ wa n £ t s 
9 e t, wine grown in 1822 ; 3 w i U i n g, twin ; ©rilling/ triplet. 

Obs. 8. Ordinal numerals are regularly declined after the 



423 

manner of adjectives. When used substantively, their initia. 
letter must be a capital, if a person is referred to: as, bte 
Srjlen roerber bte 2e£ten fetn, the first shall be last. 

§ 80. To the preceding classes of numerals may be added 
the following compounds, formed partly from cardinals, partly 
from ordinals, and partly from indefinite numerals : — 

I. COMPOUNDS FORMED FROM CARDINAL AND INDEFINITE 
NUMERALS. 

1st, Distributives ; formed by prefixing the adverb j e ; as, 
j e ft e b e n, by seven ; j e 3 e b n, ten at a time, or as in Eng- 
lish, jwet unb 3 ro e t, two and two. 

2d, Iteratives ; formed by adding the substantive 90? a f, 
time, etnmal, once; fiinfmal, five times; jebe£ma(, each 
time ; melmaf, many times, &c. Sometimes 5J? a I is separat- 
ed and declined like a substantive; as, etn Sifter I, once; $u 
$efyn 93? a I e n, ten times. This is always the case when it is 
preceded by an ordinal : ba£ erfte, gwette Stftal, the first, second 
time. 

3d, Multiplicatives ; formed by annexing the affix f a dt), or 
the obsolete fdlttg, fold; e. g. etnfacf), $roetfacfy, sefynfad), 
simple, twofold, tenfold ; t> t e I f a d), manyfold ; fyurtbertfdU 
ti§, an hundredfold, &c. 

4th, Variatives ; which are indeclinable, and formed 
by adding the obsolete substantive let (meaning kind, 
manner), and inserting er for the sake of euphony; as, ei* 
n e r f e t, of one kind, all the same ; breterlet, of three 
kinds ; memefyettet, melerlet, of various, of many kinds, &c. 

II. COMPOUND NUMERALS FORMED FROM ORDINALS. 

§81. 1st, Dimidiatives ; indeclinable adjectives formed by 
annexing b a I b, half, to the ordinal ; as, brtttefyalb, two 
and a half (literally third-half, meaning two whole and one half 
of a third) ; f it n f t e fy a I b, four and a half, &c. Instead of 
gtt>ette&alb, anbertbatb is used, from the obsolete word ber 
anbere, the second (§ 75. Exc.). 

2d, Ordinal adverbs in e n & ; as, e r ft e rt $, jmettettS, 
jefyttten^ firstly, secondly, tenthly, &c. 

3d, Partitives ; masculine substantives formed by means of 
the affix te t (from Ifyetl, part) ; e. g. ber ©rtttef, 93ter* 
te(, 3 ^ fc n t e 1, $>unbertjtel, the third, fourth, tenth, hun- 
dredth part. 






424 

INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 

§ 82. The indefinite numerals are as follows ,v— 

a tie, all ; m d)13, nothing ; 

gefammt, ) complete, etntqe, 
fammtltcf), S entire ; etltcfye, 



some, 



gang, all, whole ; manege, y ^ ' 

J eber ' ) each * iel/ much ' many ' 

. jebrcebet, > ever ' . mefcr, more ; 

jegltc^er, ) • ' ^ennci, enough ; 

fern, no, no one ; ettt>a§, some, a little, 

OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs. 1. The indefinite numerals serve either to express num. 
ber, as, ettttqe, etltcfye, mcutcfye, jebet or jegltcfyer; oi 
quantity, as, ettva$>, ^ana; or both, as, all, gefammt, et* 
ntgeS, etntge, fetn, o t el, ntel)r, went 9, gertnej. 

Ofo. 2. Those which may indicate quantity and number 
both, are generally inflected only when they imply number; 
e. g. stele SEftertfcfyen, many men ; e t n t 9 e $ebern, severa; 
pens; but stel 2Betn> much wine; mefyr SSrofc, more bread. 

§ 83. INDEFINITE NUMERALS DENOTING NUMBER ONLY. 

1st, 3 e b e r, i c b e, i e t) e ^ (of which jegticber and jcbroeber are 
antiquated forms), "is disjunctive, corresponding" to the English 
each, every ; e. g. {eber (Stanb rjat feine ^efdwetben, every condi- 
tion has its troubles. It is inflected like adjectives, and is often 
preceded by the article etn ; as, etn i e b e r, e t n e { e b e, e i tt 
j e b e 6. 

2d, (£ t n t g e t, e i n i 9 e, c t n t c\ e $, some, a few, when applied 
to number, is used in the plural only, and is synonymous with 
etUd)e. In the singular, however, it- has reference to quantity; 
as, e t n t $ e $ 9^ef)(, some flour ; e t n i g c 3ett, some time. 

3d, 50c a ticket, mancfye, ma tubes, in the singular, answers 
to the English many a ; as, m a n d) e t a(te grcunb, many an old | 
friend ; man d) e foftticf)C @abe, many a precious gift. In the 
plural it is to be rendered by many. 

§ 84. INDEFINITE NUMERALS IMPLYING QUANTITY ONLY. 

1st, (5ttt> Q 6, some, is indeclinable, and usually connected with 
collective nouns or names of materials ; e. g. e t tt) a $ ®c(b, some 
money ; c t tt) a g frtfcbeS Staffer, some fresh water. When, as a 
substantive, it corresponds to something, it is an indefinite pronoun 



!i 






425 

3d, ® a n 3 indicates the completeness of an object and is opposed 
to half, part, &c. ; bet, bte, bag ® a n $ e, the entire, whole ; etn 9 a n* 
jj e $ Sabt, a whole year. It is inflected like adjectives ; but before 
neuter names of places and countries it is always indeclinable ; as, 
9 a n $ Unuxita, Contort, all America, London. 

§ 85. INDEFINITE NUMERALS IMPLYING NUMBER AND 
QUANTITY BOTH. 

1st, U I I c t, a I I e, a ( I e S, all, in the plural implies nwm£er,%id 
in the singular quantity ; e. g. alter SB e t n, all the wine ; a tl e 
D?tld), all the milk ; and often without any termination (§ 81, 

)bs. 2.) ; all btefer SBeitt, all this wine; all t>a£ -&rct>, all the 
bread ; a 1 1 e tie ££cityet, tie fteben (@d)tttet), all the electors, seven 
in number. Its signification does not admit of its being preceded 
by the article, and hence its inflection is not affected when another 
word, declined like the article, precedes ; e. g. meld) e$ a tl eg 
(not a 1 1 e, § 57), all which ; bci b t e f e m a 1 1 e m, in all this, &c. 

The neuter singular sometimes designates number in^the most inde- 
finite manner; e. g. a 1 1 e $ rennet, tetter, fliicfytet, all are running, sa- 
ving, rescuing. When the English all is equivalent to the whole, 
it is rendered by the German 9 a n $ ; as, all the hour, all the day, 
tie 9 a n 3 e @tunbe, ten 9 a n $ e n &ag. 

2d, $ e i n, f et n c, ! et n, no, none, is declined like the indefinite 
article etn, cine, etn, when it stands in connection with a substan- 
tive ; and like an adjective of the first declension, i et n e r, i e t n e, 
f e t n e $, when the substantive is not expressed ; as, f c t tt 9ftenfd), 
no man ; fyaft £)u etn 93ud) ? 3d) r)abc t e t n e $ ; hast thou a book ? I 
have none ; et r)at ! e t n e $teunbe, he has no friends. 

3d, (Sammtltcfyet, fammtltcbe, fammtttd) e$, bet ges 
f a m m t c, t) t e 9 e f a mm t e, b a $ 9 e fa m m t e, are nearly synony- 
mous wkh a 1 1, all, entire, the complete. They are regularly de- 
clined like adjectives ; as, feme fanmu1td)en £&ett\', his complete 
works ; Detne fammtttd)en (gefammten) gteunbe, all thy friends. 

4th, 33 t e I and xv e n t 9, when they imply quantity, or number con- 
sidered as a mass, are invariable (§82. Ofo. 2). 93icl 33tob, tttel(5ktb, 
much bread, much money ; Diet 93?enfcben, a large mass of men. 
But if they refer to a number of individuals or things regarded as 
distinct, they follow the inflection of adjectives : t) t e I e t, t)t e I e, 
t> 1 e I e £, rc> e n 1 9 e t, n> e n t 9 e, roentgen, &c. ; e. g. e$ fonnen fid) 
nut 2B e n i 9 e tegtcten, but few can govern themselves ; id) effe ntcbt 
D t cle grucbt, I do not eat many kinds of fruit. When an article 
or pronoun precedes, Diet and roentg must be inflected, even if they 
refer to quantity ; e. g. bte X> t e I e n £Botte, the many words ; fetn 
vt) e n 1 9 e I GMb, his little money, &c. 

5th, The comparatives m e b t, more, and tt) e n i 9 e t, less, are not 
generally inflected, except m C \)X e t e, the plural of tmf)t, when it 
assumes the signification of several (§ 69). 



426 



§ 86. OBSERVATIONS ON THE USE OF NUMERALS. 

Obs. 1 If numerals stand in connection with substantives 
which express a definite number, measure, or weight, the Ger- 
man idiom requires the substantive to be put into the singular 
(§ 26) ; as, arcolf ^ f il n b, twelve pounds ; $n)et © t ii cf, two 
pieces. 

Obs. 2. Numerals which denote a part of a greater num. 
b# or multitude of objects, are followed by a genitive of the 
whole, or by the dative with the preposition a il '$, from among ; 
a n t e r, among ; v> d n, of ; e. g. fc> r e t f e t n e r Sltnber, three 
of his children; ber erfte oen metrien greunben, the first 
of my friends ; *B t e I e unter tfynen, many among them. 

Obs. 3. When the genitive of the whole is a personal pro- 
noun, it always precedes the numeral ; as, e$ ftnb it n f e r 
3 n> a n 3 1 9, there are twenty of us ; e3 roerben t^rer mcfyt 
©tele fet'tt/ there will not be many of them. 

Obs. 4. When a definite number is to be stated approxi- 
mately, or with uncertainty, the adverbs and prepositions em- 
ployed in German for that purpose are : e t vo a, something 
like ; n n 3 e f a I) r, about ; betnafye, f a ft, almost ; f a it m, 
scarcely ; g e 9 e n, bet, an b t e, nearly, about ; e. g. ba$ 
*Pferb tjt ungefdfyr fyunbert Thaler roertf), the horse is worth 
about a hundred crowns ; er tft b e t n a fy e or an b i e fiinfttg 
Sct^t alt. he is nearly fifty years of age. 

Obs, 5. The word MS (till, to) is used when a number can be 
stated only as fluctuating between two given numbers ; as, oi e t 
bi$ f ft h f taufenb sXftann, /rom four to five thousand men; $tt>an$U} 
6t$ bmfng Scaler, aioi/tf twenty or thirty crowns. 

Obs. 6. The English m^m; arc? is rendered by unb c 1 1 i d> c or 
unb e i n i Q e ; as, bag £au£ tft n c u n $ t g unb e t ( t dj e Jup feed), 
the house is upward of ninety feet high, or in conversational Ger- 
man often, e t It cf) c n e u n $ 1 9. 

Ofo. 7. The English either and neither have no corresponding 
words in German, and are rendered by e i n c r oon b e t b e n, one 
of the two, and feinet »on & e t b e n, none of the two. 

§ 87. Obs. 8. Numerals are sometimes employed ellipti- 
cally without a substantive, when a point of time is expressed ; 
e. g. tft e$ nod) mcfyt $ » o I f ? is it not twelve yet ? (£3 bat ebert 
b r e t ^efcfylagen, it has just struck three. In these cases the 
word Ubr or an ber lifer, o'clock, is to be supplied. In 
the same manner ordinal numerals are used, when the day of 
the month is to be denoted ; e. g. ben ro t e $ t e I ft e tt feaben 



427 

voir ? what day of the month is it 1 2Btr fyabert ben $ w a it * 
* t 9 ft e n (lag be£ SD?enatcO, it is the twentieth. 

When in connection with a date the name of the month is given, 
the preposition of is never expressed in German; as, fcen f u n f t e n 
9)i a t, the fifth 0/ May ; am fcvttten 2C UQ u ft, on the third oj 
August, &c. 



PRONOUNS. 

§ 88. Pronouns are words which serve as the sub- 
stitutes of nouns. 

Pronouns are divided into Personal, Possessive, Be* 
monstrative, Determinative, Relative, and Interrogative. 

I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

§ 89. A personal pronoun is one which simply indicates 
the relation of personality ; i. e. whether the substantive rep- 
resented be the person speaking (t cl), ro t r, I? we), or spoken 
to (b it, i \) r, thou, ye), or spoken of (e t, ft e, e §, ft e, he, she, 
it, they). 

Personal pronouns are declined as follows : — 

FIRST PERSON (FOR ALL GENDERS). 



Singular. 
Nom. tcf), I, 

Gen. -metner (metn), of me, 
Dat. mtr, to me, 

Ace. mtcf), •• me; 



Plural. 

Nom. rotr, we, 
Gen. urtfer, of us, 
Dat. unS, to us, 
Ace. utt3, us. 



second person (for all genders). 
Singular. Plural. 



Nom. bit, thou, 

Gen, betner (betn), of thee, 
Bat. btr, to thee, 

Ace. btcfy, thee; 



Nom. tfyr, ye or you, 

Gen. euer, of you, 

Dat. eucfy, to you, 

Ace. md), . ye or you. 



Masculine. 

Nom. er, he, 

Gen. fetner (fetn), of him, 
Dat. tfym ) ~ * to him, 
Ace. H)x\ I ' lcl >' him ; 



THIRD PERSON. 

Singular. 

Feminine. 

fie, she, 

tfyrer, of her, 

ftei^ her; 



Neuter. 

eS, it, 

fciner (fetn), of it, 
tbm ) a4% to it, 
c$ }<•* it. 



428 
Plural. 

For all genders 

Nom. fie, they ; 

Gen. tfyrer, of them ; 

Dat. tfynen ) c ,* to them ; 
Ace. fie $ ]ia)f them, 

§ 90. OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs. 1. The genitives m e t n e t, b e t n e t, f e i n e t, now gener- 
ally take the place of the earlier forms m e t n, b etn, f e t n, which 
are found only in poetry, and in certain familiar expressions ; as, 
ttcrqt& metn ntcbt, forget me not ; gebenfrj man, remember me. 

Obs, 2, When the prepositions r) a I b e n, xo e g e n, on account 
of, and um — ttntlen, for the sake of, are compounded with the geni- 
tives metn, b c i n, f e t n, t f) r, the syllable e t is inserted for the 
sake of euphony; e. g. metn et?, b et net?, fet n et?, i f) ret s 
f) a { b c n (rocgen), on my, thy, his, her account. The genitives 
u n f c r and euer take t simply : um u n f e r t uo t U e n, for our 
saKe ; c u t e t n) e g e n, on your account 

Dhs. 3. The word fid) (szfo, se) is the reflexive pronoun for the 
gen. and dat. of the third person, both singular and plural. It is 
used in propositions, in which the action of the verb terminates in 
the subject itself, from whence it proceeded. The oblique cases 
of the first and second persons, as well as the gen. of the third 
(fetner, tfyret), do not possess a separate form of the reflexive, and 
hence they are themselves employed in a reflexive sense ; e. g. id) 
febame mid), I am ashamed (lit. I shame myself) ; bit lobeffc t> t d), 
thou praisest thyself. In these instances, however, the indeclina- 
ble word f e I b f! or f e ( b c r is added, whenever emphasis or per- 
spicuity require it ; e. g. fetner f e Xb ft ntd)t febonen, not to spare 
one's self; mtr fetbet, to myself; bid) felbft, thyself. When 
joined to the nominative of the first, second or third persons, felbft 
or felbct is intensive; as, td) fetber tann fie rctten, I myself can 
rescue her ; £)u f e t b ft mupt ttd)ten, thou thyself must be the judge ; 
fcer .ftontg fe(bft etfefyten, the king appeared in person. 

Obs, 4. There is one reciprocal pronoun in German — etnanbet 
(contracted for e i n e r b e n a n b e r n), one another, each other. 
Instead of this, however, the reflexive pronouns are often employed 
in a reciprocal sense in the plural ; as, tint fennen ung or e t n a n? 
b e t, we know each other ; fie ganfen fi d) or m 1 1 e t n a n b e r, they 
are quarrelling with each other. 

§91. Obs, 5. In poetry, and when addressing the Supreme Being, 
their intimate friends or families, the Germans employ the second 
person singular, <Du. In polite conversation, however, they al- 
ways address each other in the third person plural, <S t e, gen. 3 l)s 
r cr, dat. 3 f) n c n, ace. @ i e ; e. g. id) bemfe 3 [) n e n, I thank you ; 
tt>o gerjen @ic f)tn ? where are you going? It is also customary 
for superiors to address their dependants and others of inferior 
rank in the second person plural (3 f) t, (S u d), you, to you), or ii 



429 

the third person singular (<£r, @te, he, she) ; e. g. tt>o$ Fjat ffit $e* 

fcradbt ? what have you brought ] In writing, both the personal 
and possessive pronouns relating to the person addressed, must al- 
ways begin with a capital letter ; e. g. id) tutte ©te (£>tcf), (Suet), 
Sbn) urn Sttr (£)ctn, (£uet) SBud), 1 beg you to give me your book. 

Obs. 6. The neuter pronoun e$> is never used in the genitive 
and dative cases (f c (net, if) m), except when it relates to a per- 
son. When a thing is referred to, the expressions of it, of them, 
to it, with it, are either rendered by the demonstrative pronouns 
t> c f f e n, & tv£ n, or by an adverbial pronoun, b a 3 u, b a m 1 t, 
baron &c. ; e. g. have you much of it? (jofcen @ie t> effen mi ? 
what do you wish with it? n>06 reellen ©te bomtt (see pages 29 
and 142)? 

Ofo. 7. The pronoun ce» has often a very indefinite significa- 
tion, sometimes corresponding to the English " it," sometimes to 
the unaccented " there," but frequently it is expletive, and. cannot 
be rendered at all. It is employed : — 

1st, As the subject of impersonal verbs, or such as appear to be 
used impersonally ; as, e 8 b n n e r t, c $ 6 1 i g t, it thunders, it 
lightens ; e $ f t e u t m i cf), I am glad ; c $ cj i b t Scute, there are 
men. 

2d, It simply stands as the representative of the subject of a 
proposition, when its order Is inverted and the predicate comes 
first ; as, c $ .ffillt fief) b e t- © p c t cf) e t, e $ befynt fief) b o $ £ u $ 
(expletive), the granary is replenished, the house expands ; e $ finb 
ntd)t eben f cf) I e cf) t e banner, £foy are by no means worthless 
men. 

The c of the e$ is often elided; as, bring' 5 tint, bring it to 
me ; er f) 1 ' $ getfton, he has done it. 

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

§ 92. Among personal pronouns are properly included the 
following, which, however, represent the third person only, and 
in the most indefinite manner : — ' 3 e w a rt b, S t n e r, some 
one, some body ; Sebermcttttt, every one, every body ; 
Sfttemantv 5\ e t n e r, no one, nobody ; man, one* they, 
people (corresponding to the French on). To these may be 
added e t m a §, something, and n t cr) 1 3, nothing. 

SSftan, etmaS and md)t$ are indeclinable. Semanb, SWemanb 
and %ebtxmcintl are declined as follows : — 

Nom. Semonb, Sftemcmb, Sebermawt, 

Gen. 



SemanbeS, SRtcmanbe*, S ^ eDennamt *' 
Semanbem, SRtemanbem, $ ^ eDermantt ' 



Dat. 



430 



The declension of (£ t n e r and ft e i n e t has already been 
noticed among the indefinite numerals (§ 77 and § 85), between 
which and the indefinite pronouns it is difficult to fix the line 
of distinction. A few examples may illustrate their inflection 
and use : — #ctft Dtt erne $eber, em 23itd) ? Hast thou a pen, a 
book/ 3d) fyabe etne, etu e§, I have one ; td) babe fetne, 
f e t n e 3, I have none ; e£ tft Siner fcrctugen, some one is 
out of doors ; Reiner wetg atte£, no one knows every thing. 

II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
§ 93. A possessive pronoun is one which repre- 
sents the object to which it relates, as belonging ei- 
ther to the speaker (mine), the person spoken to (thine) 
or the person or thing spoken of (his). 

Possessive pronouns are formed from the genitive of personal 
pronouns. They are : — 

1st Person. 2d Person. 3d Person. 

m e t n, my, mine ; b e i tt, thy,* thine ; f e t n, his, its ; 
u n f e r, our, ours ; euer, your, yours ; x fy r, her, hers, their. 

§ 94. When a possessive pronoun stands in connection 
with a noun, it is called conjunctive, and is declined like the in- 
definite article in the singular, and like the definite article in 
the plural. Thus : — 

Singular. 

Fern. NeuL 

metne, mem, 
metner, metneS, 
memem, 



Masc. 

Nom. mem, 
Gen. memeS, 
Dat memem, 
Ace memen, 



metner, 
metne, 



Nom. 



Gen. 



Dat. 



AlCC. < 



Masc. 

unfer, 

tmfereS, 

urtfreS, 

unferS, 

unferem, 

unfrem, 

ttnferm, 

unfer en, 

unfren, 

unfern, 



metn, 
Singular. 

Fern. 

( unfere, 
I unfre, 

S unferer, 
i imfrer, 

N unferer, 
f unfrer, 

1 unfere, 
J unfre, 



my, 
of my, 
to my, 

my; 



Plural. 

For all genders. 

metne, my, 
metner, of my, 
memen, to my, 



metne, 



my. 



our, 



Neut. 

' unfer, 

tmfereS, 
unfreS, of our, 
unfer$, 
unferem, 
uufrem, to our, 
unferm, 



}., 



nfer, 



our. 



4S1 

Plural. 

For all genders. 

Nom. unfere, itnfre, our, 
Gen. imferer, unfrer, of our, 
Dat. imferen, imfren, to our, 
Ace. unfere, unfre, our. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs. 1. Of the remaining pronouns of this class, eu e r, 3 r our, 
is declined like u n f c r, and the others like m e i n. It will be per- 
ceived that the remark made respecting- euphonic changes in ad- 
jectives ending in e (, e r, en, unaccented (§ 60. Obs. 1st.), is also 
applicable in the case of u nf er* 

Obs. 2. The word e t cj e n, own, is often joined to possessive 
pronouns to make the notion of possession more prominent ; as 
metn etc; tier 9?ocf, my own coat; unfer etgnes .Htnb, our own 
child. 

Obs. 3. It will be perceived, that for the third person singular 
there are two forms of the possessive, viz : f e in, when the gender 
of the possessor is masculine or neuter, and i fyt, when it is femi- 
nine. Each of these again indicates, by means of its terminations, 
the gender of the object possessed, with which possessive pronouns, 
like all other adjectives, must agree in gender, number and case ; 
e. g. f e in (tbr) $dter> f cin e (tbre) Gutter, f ct n (ibr) 23ud), his 
(her) father, his (her) mother, his (her) book. 

Obs. 4. When a possessive pronoun constitutes the predicate 
to a substantive, or to a pronoun denoting a determinate object, it re- 
mains like adjectives, uninflected ; as, fca£ SBucb tft fetn, the book 
is his ; ifteti tji t>er SKubm ? 9?ur 3) e in, nut S) c i n ! Whose is the 
glory ? Thine, only thine ! (§ 52, 1st.) 

Obs. 5. In addressing persons of rank, it was formerly custom- 
ary to use 3 b r instead of the third person feminine 3 b t e, her, 
and also in place of (Su e r, your ; e. g. 3 b t o (now 3 b t c) 50?qe? 
jtat tJte .fi8ni$inn, her Majesty the queen; 3 b v ((S u r e) S^ajcpat 
baben mtr befobten, your Majesty has commanded me. In written 
communications the pronouns (Sure, your, (Seine, his, and (Sehu#, 
to his, are commonly contracted into (5 tx>., © e., and @ r. ; e. g 
<£«>. Dutcbtoudjt, your Highness; <Sr. ^cijeftat, to his Majesty. 

§ 95. Possessive pronouns are called absolute when they 
are not immediately connected with a substantive, but related 
to one already mentioned or understood. 

Absolute possessive pronouns with the article are inflected 
like adjectives of the second declension, and without it, like ad- 
jectives of the first. 

When connected with the article, they frequently change the 
termination e into 1 9 e ] as, ber m e t n e, m e t n i 9 e ; fcer f e t* 
ne, fetntge. 



432 

The following list exhibits the absolute possessive pronouns 
of both declensions in the nominative singular. 

First Declension. Second Declension. 

metner, metne, metned, ber, bte, ba& metne or metntge, mine, 
betner, betne, betned, it it » betne " betmge, thine, 
fetner, fetne, fetned, » it it feme " fetntge, his, 
tfyrer, tfyre, tfyred, it » it tfere " tfynge, hers, j 
unferer, unfere, unfereS, tt it it unfre " unfrtge, ours, 
eurer, eure, eared, it it it eure " eurtge, yours, 
tfyrer, tfyre, tfyred, it it it tyre " tfyrtge, theirs, 
Sfyrer, 3fyre, 3*)^ (in polite conversation) 3fyre or3£)ri* 

ge, yours. 

§ 96. The inflection of possessive pronouns, both absolute and 
onjunctive, may be illustrated by the following examples :•-*- ■ 

I. My brother and his.. 
Singular. 
Nom. metn SSruber unb fetner, ber fetntge ; 
Gen. metne* <8ruberS uffb fetneS, bc£ fetntgen ; 
Dat. meinem SSruber unb fetnem,bem feintgen ; 
Ace. metnen 23ruber unb fetnen, ben feimejen. 

Plural. 
Nom. metne SBrft-ber unb fetne, bte fetntgen ; 
Gen. metner 93rftber unb fetner, ber fetntgen ; 
Dat. metnen SBrubern unb fetnen, ben fetntgen; 
Ace. metne 3Britber unb fetne, bte fetntgen. 

II. Her sister and mine. 

Nom. tftre ©cftrcefter unb metne, bte metntge ; 
Gen. tfyrer ©cfyroeftet unb metner, bet metntgen ; 
Dat. tfyrer <Sd)«>ejtet unb metner, ber metnigen it. 

III. Our house and theirs. 

Nom. unfer $au$ unb tfjreS, baei ir)ttge ; 
Gen. unfreg £aufe$ unb tforeS, be£ tbrtgen ; 
Dat. unferm- £aufe unb ifjrem, bem ttyrtgen *c. 

Examples. 3ft bad %t)x 9?egenftf)trm (masc.), Sfcre Suite 
fem.), 3& r ftfetb (neut.) ? 3a, ed tft m e t n e r, b e r metne, 
ber metntge— metne, bte metne, bte metntge— met* 
n e d, b a d metne, bad metnige; is this your umbrella, 
your ink, your garment ? Yes, it is mine (i. e. my umbrella, my 
ink, my garment). 

Remark. The absolute possessive pronouns are sometimes em- 
ployed substantively, in which case their initial must always be a 



433 

capital letter (§ 11); as, bag g^etntge, £>etntge, ©etntcje, 
cay own (my property), thy own, his own; e. # g. £afce id) ntd)t 
9}?act)t, $u tfjun, was tcb will, nut bem SOletntgen? Is it not lawful 
for me to do what I will with mine own 1 So also in the plural, 
tic 9ft e i n t g c n, 2) e t n t 9 c n, @ c t n i 9 e n, 3 f) r 1 9 e n, my, thy, 
his, their (your)' friends, relatives, family. 

III. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 97. A demonstrative pronoun serves to point out 
the locality of the person or thing with which it is 
connected. 

The German language has three demonstrative pronouns 
viz: btefer, btefe, btefeS, this; jener, jene, jeneS, 
that, and b e r, b t e, b a 3, this, that. 

Stefer and jener are declined like adjectives of the first de 
clension, thus : — 





Singular. 




Plural. 




Masc. Fem. Neut. 




For all genders. 


Nom. 


btefer, btefe, btefeS (bte§), 


this, 


btefe, these, 


Gen. 


bt£fe3, btefer, btefeS, 


of this, 


btefer, of these, 


Dat. 


btefem, btefer, btefem, 


to this, 


btefen, to these, 


Ace, 


btefen, btefe, btefeS (bte3), 


this; 


btefe, these. 



§ 98. The demonstrative pronoun b e r, bte, ba% may 
supply the place of either btefer or jener. When it stands in 
connection with a substantive, or any word used as such, it. is 
inflected like the definite article (§ 3), and differs from it 
only by a stronger accentuation. But when it is used abso- 
lutely, it deviates from the inflection of the article in the gen* 
itive singular, and in the genitive and dative plural, thus :— 

Singular. 

Masc. Fem. Neut. 

Nom. ber, . bte, fea§, this, that ; 

Gen. \ * e £ en ' \ l cmx > \ *¥ tt ' I of this, that ; 
I beg, ( ber, ( beg, $ 

Dat. bem, ber, bem, to this, that; 

Ace. ten, bte, ba$, this, that; 

Plural. 

For all genders. 

Nom. bte, these, those; 

Gen. beren, of these, those; 

Dat. benen, to these, those ; 

Ace. bte, these, those. 



434 

§ 99. OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs. 1. SHefet implies proximity either of space or time to 
the person speaking, and hence it is frequently equivalent to the 
English the latter. 3 e n e r, on the other hand, refers to some- 
thing well-known (the Latin Me), already mentioned, or remote^ 
and hence it is often rendered by the former. 

Obs. 2. The neuter pronouns t> t e $ and b a $ are, like the in- 
definite e£ (§ 91. Obs. 7), often employed to represent the subject 
of a proposition in the most general and indefinite manner, some- 
times even without any distinction of gender or number ; e. g. t>a$ 
if! ctn -grangofc, that is a Frenchman ; t> x t 6 f t n t> mctne (SItern, 
these are my parents ; fc> o $ finfc) SJMfen, those are pinks. 

Ofo. 3. S)e£i is the more ancient form of the genitive singular 
masculine and neuter, now only used in the more elevated style of 
poetry and in composition ; as, t) c p f) a I h, t> c p n> e g e n, on that ac- 
count ; t> e p freue fid) fca$ ©Tbtetcr;, let the earth rejoice in it. 

IV. DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 100. Determinative pronouns serve to make 
prominent the person or object which is the antece- 
dent of a subsequent relative clause. 

They are :— ber, bte, ba$, that ; berjetuge, btejemge, baSjem* 
qe, he, she, it, that person (who) ; berfelbe, btefelbe, baSfelbe, 
the same ; the obsolete felbtger, felbtge, felbtcjeS, the same ; and 
folcfyet, folcfye, folc^e^ (talis), such. 

Set, bxe, baS, when standing with a substantive, is inflected 
like the article (§ 3), and when used absolutely, like the de- 
monstrative pronoun ber, bte, ba$, except that in the genitive 
plural it has berer instead of b even ; e. g. ba% ©cfyttffal 
b e v e r tft tyaxt, bte fid) {elbft 311 ernafyren mcfyt tm ©tanbe ftnb, 
the fate of those is hard, who are not able to support them- 
selves. 

§101. ©Dtcfyer, when used without the article, follows the 
inflection of the first declension of adjectives, but when prece- 
ded by the indefinite article ettt, erne, ettt, it is inflected like an 
adjective of the third declension, thus : — 

Nom. foldfrer, folcfye, fotcfye§, 
Gen. \ ft***' \ fo tyet, \ ?!* rt ' , 

Nom. e(n folder, etne foIdf>e, em folcfyeS/ 
Gen. etaeS folcfyett, etner foldjen, emeS foldjen, &c. 

D e tr j e n { g e and b e r f e I b e are compounds, of which 



435 



Doth components are declined ; ber, fete, bad 
flection of the definite article, and j e n t g e 
of the second declension of adjectives : — 

Singular. 

Fem. Neut. 

btejemge, baSjemge, 

berjemgen, benjentgen, 

berjentgen, bemjemgen, 

btejentge, baSjemge j 



Nom 
Gen, 
Dat, 
Ace. 



Masc. 

berjentge, 
benjentgen, 
bemjemgen, 
benjentgen, 



following the in- 
and f e i b e that 

Plural, 

For all genders. 

Nom. btejentgett/ 

Gen* berjentgen, 

Dat. benjentgen, 

Ace. btejentgen. 



observations. 



§102. 

Obs. 1. Determinative pronouns can always be distinguished 
from demonstratives by the relative clause by which they are gen- 
erally followed. Examples : berjentge, ro e I d) e r t> i e 2B t f s 
f e n f d) a f t e n ( t c b t, roctB fetnc 93?upe auf ctne cmgcnefjme 2Crt gu be* 
nu|en, he who is fond of the sciences, is never at a loss how to 
improve his leisure hours pleasantly; er fyat benfelben $ef)ler 
gemad)t, ro e ( d) e n id) gemad)t ^abe, he has made, the same mistake, 
which I have made ; trcme b e n c n nte, b i e £)tr fd)metd)eln, never put 
confidence in those, who flatter you. 

Obs. 2. The determinative pronouns may be employed either 
adjectively or substantively. iDctjemge serves simply to point out 
emphatically the antecedent without any other modification ; berfetbe 
adds to it the notion of identity, which is often made intensive by 
the particle e b e n ; as, e b e n fcerfelbe, the very same, ©olcber im- 
plies a reference to the kind or constitution of persons or things ; 
e. g. f o I d) e grucftt, such fruit ; e t n f o (d) e r SSoter, such a father. 
When fctcber, in conformity with the English idiom, is followed by 
the indefinite article, it is not inflected, — f old) e i tt 9#ann, such a 
man ; fold) etnem @otjne, to such a son. Sometimes the syllable of 
inflection is likewise dropped, when it is accompanied by an adjec- 
tive ; as, fold) grof'e 2$efd)etbenf)ett, such great modesty. 

Obs. 3. £>er and bcrfctbe often stand simply as the repre- 
sentatives of the personal pronouns e r, ft e, e $, or of the posses- 
sives fctn, tfyr, his, hers, when two persons mentioned in the 
same or in a previous sentence are to be clearly distinguished from 
each other ; e. g. cr femb ten 9Satcr unb beffen <Sobn $u £aufe, he 
found the father and his (i. e. the father's) son at home ; ber Sling* 
ling fcfyrtcb fetnem greunbe iiber bat bet>orftef)cnbe <Sd)tcffal beffelben, 
the young man wrote to his friend concerning his (the friend's) fu- 
ture destiny ; btefer 9)?cmn tfyut alles fiir fetnen SBruber, aber b erf els 
fc e roetjj tf)m fetnen &ani baftir, this man does every thing for his 
brother, but he (the brother) is not grateful for it. 

V. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 103. A relative pronoun is one which serves to 
connect a limiting or explanatory clause to a preceding 



436 

noun, to which it relates, and which is called its ante* 
cedent. 

The German language has four relative pronouns, viz : — ber, 
tie, ba3, and roelcfyer, weldje, tt>eld)e§, who, which ; roer, tt>a£, 
who, what, and the obsolete and indeclinable f o. 

§ 104. ffiekfyet is the only pronoun of this class which may stand 
adjectively in connection with a substantive. It is declined 
like an adjective of the first declension, thus : — 
Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

Nom. roetcfyer, roeldje, welcfyeS, who, which, 

Gen. welcfyeS, roetcfyer, n>eld)e$, whose, of which, 

Dat. roetcfyem, wetcfyer, roelcfyem, to whom, to which, 

Ace. welcfyen, roelcfye, welded, whom, which. 
Plural. 

For all genders. 

Nom. wetcfye, who, which, 
Gen. wddjev, whose, of which, 
Dat. roelcfyett, to whom, to which, 
Ace. welcfye, whom, which. 

The relative ber is inflected like the demonstrative ber, 
Die, bad (§ 98). 

The plural of w e r and w a $ is wanting ; in the singular 
they are thus declined : — 

Masc. and Fem. Neut. 

Nom. roer, who, he who, she who, 

Gen. we £ en ' I whose, of whom, 

Dat. mem, to whom, 
Ace. wen, whom; 

§ 105. observations. 

Ofo. 1. The pronouns roet and w a g never relate to an indi- 
vidual or determinate object, but to such only as are of the most 
general and indefinite character. Hence they are commonly em- 
ployed after the neuter demonstrative bet 6, or the indefinite numer- 
als ctlle*/ all, etroaS, something, mancfyeS, many a (thing), 
Diet, much, tx> c n i cj, little, n t d) t S, nothing ; a. g. t> a S, no a $ td) 
ftabe, §cbe id) £)tt, that which I have, I give thee ; a 1 1 e $, tt> a $ mtr 
tfjeuet ift/ all that is dear to me. But, btefet $ncibe (definite)/ 
»ctd)cr in tie <Sd)u(e gef)t, this boy who goes to school ; bie SKofe, 
ru c I d) e blu()t, the rose which blossoms. 

Ofa. 2. The forms roet/tveffen, roe m, wen relate to persons 
only, of either sex ; rc a 8 and the genitive w e p only to things and 



roaS, which, what, 

n)e£/ of which, of what, 

tt50$u, to which, to what, 
was, which, what. 



437 

abstract terms. £B e fj is also used in the compounds toefiioegetl 
and to e |H) a I b e n, wherefore, on which account. 

Ota. 3. On account of this indefinite signification cf toet and 
to a 6, their antecedent is frequently omitted, and they become equi- 
valent to b e t j e n t cj e to e t cb e t, b i e j e n i g e to e t cb e, 1) a $ i e n u 
g e to e I d) e $, he who, she who, that which ; e. g. to e t ctnfom ftgt 
in fetnet hammer unb fct)iocte, bittte Sbtfaten toeint (SflODaftS), he who 
sits in his lonely chamber, shedding the heavy, bitter tear; to'ai 
fetn muH, gefebebe ! That which must needs be, let it come to pass ! 
Sometimes, however, to give emphasis to the expression, the de- 
terminative bet/ btC/ bci* is added to the main proposition, which 
in this construction always follows the relative clause ; e. g. to e t 
ntcbt arbctten mill, bet fell aud) nid)t effen, Ae w^o is not willing to 
labour, neither shall he eat. 

Ota. 4. The compound relatives whoever, whatever, whosoever, 
&c, are rendered in German by annexing aud) or immet to 
Wit or toa$ ; e. g. to e t aud) (i m m e t), to a $ aud) (tntme t), &c, 

0£s. 5. After personal pronouns of the first and second persons, 
the relative to e t d) e t is never used, but always bet; e. g. i d)/ b e t 
(not toe(d)ct) id) vov £)tr ftef>c, I who am standing before thee ; 3) u, 
icv £>u metn etgenet ^Btubet btft, thou who art mine own brother. 

It will be perceived from these examples, that in German the 
personal pronouns (i d), b u) are repeated after the relative ; when- 
ever this is the case, the verb of the relative clause must agree in 
person with the personal pronoun ; otherwise it is put in the third 
person, and agrees with the relative ; e. g. Unfet Skater, bet £)u b t ft 
in bem vptmmel, our father who art in heaven ; <D w, b e t fo t>tet 
It e f ' t unb fo toentg b e n i t, thou, who readest so much and thinkest 
so little. 

Obs. 6. Instead of to e t d) e $, to e I cf) e t/ pi. to e I d) e t, the gen- 
itives of the relative tocldKt, the Germans regularly substitute b e f s 
[e n, b e t c n, pi. b e t e n ; the genitives of toeldbet being only used 
when the relative is employed adjectively (§ 104); e. g. bet SXttann, 
t> e f f e n (not to c I d) e $) (Sofyn id) fenne, the man whose son I am ac- 
quainted with; bte SciumC/beten (not toeldjet) SBUitbcn abgefatten 
fxnb/ the trees, the blossoms of which have perished. But, teuton, 
to eld) e g $pf)ttofopf)Ctt sprinctpta td) gelefen (jabe, Newton, the Princi- 
pia of which philosopher I have read. 

Obs. 7. The use of the relative f 0/ instead of to e I d) e t and bet, 
is antiquated. It occurs only occasionally in poetry, as, SRoSdjen 
fd)tummert/ f t>ct gutter gteube, f bet @tol$ beg £)otfe$ toat/ Rosetta 
sleeps (in death), who once was the joy of her mother, the pride 
of the place. 

VI. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS, 

§ 106. Interrogative pronouns are employed in 
asking questions. 

They are : — 1st, toe t? was? who? what? which are al 



1 



433 

ways used substantively ; 2d, metier, w e t df) e, wetcfyeS? 
which, what ? used substantively and adjectively both ; and 3d, 
tt>a3 fiir etn, etne, etn? what sort of? 

The plural of roer, tt)Ci£ is wanting ; the singular is declined 
thus : — 

Masc. and Fem. Neut. 

Nom. roer, who? roa$, what? 

Gen. wejfen or roe£, whose ? (roeg), of what ? 

Dat. wem, to whom ? wo^u,* to what ? 

Ace. men, whom? was, what? 

The interrogative roetcfyer is inflected precisely like the re- 
lative (§ 104). 

§ 107. When kwS fiir em stands in immediate connection 
with a substantive, the e t n, which is the only declinable part, 
follows the inflection of the indefinite article in the singular 
number. In the plural the pronoun is simply n> a 3 fur* 

What sort of a tree, a flower, a book ? 
Singular. 

Masc. Fem. Neut. 

Nom. roa$ fiir etn 25anm, erne 23utme, etn SSncfy? 
Gen. roaS fiir etneS SSaumeS, etner SSutme, etneS 93ud)eS? 
Dat. wa3 fiir etnem Sknme, etner 93(ume, etnem 23ud)e? 
Ace. roaS fiir etnen SSaum, etne aSiume, em SBttcf)? 

What sort of trees, flowers, books ? 
Plural. 
Nom. roaS fiir SSdume, SSuimen, 95udf>er ? 

Gen. son wa3 fiir 93aumen, 23utmen, 95iid)ern? 
Dat. waS fiir SSaumen, SShtmen, SSiicfyew? 

Ace. roaS fiir 9Sanme, 93 lumen, 93iid>er ? 

But if the substantive, to which roaS fiir etn relates, is not 
expressed, it is declined in the singular only, like an adjective 
of the first declension, thus : — 

Masc. Fem. Neut. 

Nom. wa§ fiir etner, etne, eme£, 

Gen. roa§ fiir etneS, etner, etneS, 

Dat. roaS fiir etnem, etner, etnem, 

Ace. wa3 fiir etnen, etne, etneS. 

* With respect to the pronominal adverbs, which supply the place of the 
oblique cases of demonstrative, relative and interrogative pronouns, see the 
remarks on Adverbs, below. 



430 

§ 108. OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs. 1. The genitive weffen, and the dative went, are gener- 
ally applicable to persons only, and not to things, except the ab- 
breviated form we p in composition; as, wc$t)a{b, wepwegen, 
wherefore, on what account ; e. g. wef'fyatb Oift £)u gefommcn ? 
wherefore hast thou come? wepwcgen wetnt fie ? why does she 
weep ] 

Obs. 2. The pronouns tt>a^ far cin and weld), the uninflected 
form of wefdbcr, are sometimes used in exclamations of surprise ; 
e. g. SOB a 5 fur e i n SBaum ! What a tree ! <Sef)t, weld) cin 
Sfttenfcb ! Lo, what a man ! 85$ e I d) ®tucf £e$ £tmmel$ Ijab id) weg? 
gefebfeutert ! What heaven-sent fortune I have cast away ! 

Obs. 3. 835 c r and w a $ are employed when inquiry is made 
after a person or thing in the most general and indefinite manner. 
5£c(d)er is more definite, including the notion of the quality or 
condition of the individual object inquired after. It is the correlative 
of feld)cr (§ 102. Obs. 2), and corresponds to the Latin qualis. 805 a $ 
fur etn indicates the species or kind, to which the person or thing 
belongs; e. g. SOBer tjt t>a? (Sin SDiann* 8£a$ fur etner? 
©in .iaufmann au$ Hamburg. 2£etd)er ^aufmann? £err 9?. 
Who is there ] A man. What sort of one 1 A merchant of Ham- 
burg. What merchant ] Mr. N. 8£a$ fjaft £)u? (Sine ©fame. 
ft a 6 .ft r tin c Stume ? (Sine $Kofe. 85$ e I d) e ? £>te tetfje. What 
have you ] A flower. What sort of a flower 1 A rose. Which 
rose 1 The red rose. 

Obs. 4. The cin, of wag fur etn, is omitted before names of ma- 
terials, or before substantives of the plural number. 83$aS flit 
fflBcin ? W^hat kind of wine ! 83$a$ fur Seute ? What sort of 
people? 

Obs. 5. The interrogative w a $ is sometimes .employed in the 
sense of w a r u m ; e .g. 835 a $ betriibft £)u Did) ? Why art thou cast 
town T 2B a ^ weinen ©ie ? Why do you weep ? 



VERBS, 



§ 109. 1st, A verb is a word by which either an ac- 
tivity, sl passivity, or a simple mode of existence is predi- 
cated of a person or thing called its subject ; e. g. id) 
fcfyretbe, I write ; T)U ttrirjl gefefyfaqett, thou art beaten ; 
tic Diofe blufyt, the rose blooms. 

2d, Verbs are divided into two principal classes — 
Transitive and Intransitive. 

3d, Transitive verbs are active verbs, the sense of which is 
not complete without the addition of an object in the accusa* 
five case ; e. g. id) fcfyretbe etnen 93rtef> I am writing a letter. 



440 

§ 110. Intransitive verbs are of two kinds: — 
1st, Neuter verbs , which denote either a quiescent state (sim. 
pie mode of existence) ; as, id) rufye, fi^e, fd)lafe, I am resting, 
sitting, sleeping, or such an activity as does not terminate in 
any object ; e. g. id) laufe, fampfe, gefye, I am running, strug- 
gling, going. 

2d, Those active verbs, the object of which is either in the 
genitive or dative ; e. g. id) fcfyone, x>ergeflTe, ertnnere mid) fei* 
n e r, I spare, forget, remember him ; id) gef)ord)e, traue, fccmfe 
1 fy m, I obey, trust, thank him. 

§ 111. Transitive verbs have two forms, called the 
active and the passive voices. 

If the subject is represented as the agent acting upon an- 
other person or thing {object in the accusative), the verb is said 
to be in the active voice ; e. g. id) r a f e, ttebe, nenne 
tfyn, I love, call, name him. 

B t if the subject of the verb is the object of the action ex- 
pressed by it, the verb is said to be in the passive voice ; e. g. 
id) tvexbe getufen, geltebt, gencmnt, I am called, loved, named. 

§ 112. 1st, Intransitive verbs do, from the nature of their 
signification, not admit of a passive voice, but have the active 
form only ; as, id) retfe, ftefye, I am travelling, standing. 

2d, When, however, the active subject cannot be named, or 
is designedly left indeterminate, intransitive verbs may be used 
impersonally in the third person singular of the passive voice ; 
e. g. e3 wtrfc getattat, gefptelt, gettunfen, there 
is dancing, playing, drinking going on. 

§ 113. The class of intransitive verbs comprehends also 
reflexive verbs. Of these there are two kinds : — 

1st, Such as are employed in the reflexive form only ; as, 
ftd) beftnnen, fid) fefynen, fid) freuen, to reflect, to 
long, to rejoice. 

2d, Such as are formed from transitive verbs by the addition 
of the reflexive pronouns mid), un§, fc> t d), e u d), f! d) (§ 90. 
Obs. 3) ; e. g. er cirgert ft d), he is vexed ; id) (ege m t d), I lie 
down ; fyiite £u Sid)! beware ! from ar^ern, fegett, 
f) U t e n, to vex, to lay down, to guard. 

This form of verbs is of extensive use in German, and cor- 
responds to the deponent verbs in Latin and to the middle voice 
in Greek. 

§ 114. 1st, Impersonal verbs are employed in the third 
person singular only. Their subject is quite indeterminate, and 



441 

is always expressed by the indefinite pronoun e§ (§ 90. Obs. 7), 
as, e 3 regnet, e 3 bonnet t, e 3 bltgt, it rains, it thun- 
ders, it lightens ; e£ fyetgt, it is said ; e£ $ibt icuXe, there are 
men. 

2d, Many verbs have an impersonal form in German, which 
are not used as such in English ; e. g. e$ fyungert mid), I am 
hungry; e§ fciirflet mtd), I am thirsty; e3 fttert mid), I am 
cold ; e$ td^t ficfy mcfyt quX ftn^en, it is not easy to sing, &c. 

§ 115. Of auxiliary verbs there are two classes in Ger- 
man : — 

1st, Auxiliary verbs of tenses, of which there are three : 
^ a b e n, to have ; f e t n, to be ; and tn e x b e n, to become (shall, 
will). 

2d, Auxiliary verbs of mood, not absolutely necessary to the 
conjugation of the verb. They are seven in number : b U r* 
f e n, to be permitted ; f 6 n n e n, to be able (can) ; m o g e n, to 
oe allowed (may) ; m ii f f e n, to be obliged (must) ; f d H e n, to 
be under obligation (ought) ; n> i I e tt, to be willing (to intend) ; 
I a f f e n, to let (permit). 

§ 116. In the conjugation of the German verb, we 
distinguish, as in English, the relations of Number, 
Person, Mood, and Tense. 

§117. Verbs have two numbers, Singular and Plural; 
and three persons, each of which may be distinguished by its 
characteristic termination. 

The following scheme exhibits the terminations of verbs as as- 
sumed by the three persons, singular and plural : — 

Singular. Plural. 



1st Person — e or given, 

2d Person — eft, ft, 

3d Person — e X, t, or like the first person ; 

examples: 
Singular. Plural. 



en, 

et,l> 

etn 



id) reb e, I speak, 

bit lob eft, thou praisest, 

et firielt, he plays; 



»tr lefen, we read, 
tfyr fefc e X, ye see, 
fie fucr; e n, they seek. 



§ 118. German verbs have four moods, viz : — the Indica- 
tive, Subjunctive, Imperative, and the Infinitive ; the significa- 
tion of which in general corresponds to that of moods of the 
19* 



442 

same name in English ; e. g. fie r e b e tt, they speak (in- 
die); id) fyatte gerebet, I should have spoken (subj.) ; 
t e b e © u ! speak thou (imper.) ! 

§ 119. They have, moreover, sia? tenses: — the Present, 
Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect, Simple Future, and Future 
Perfect. Of these the present and imperfect of the indicative 
and subjunctive active are simple tenses ; the remaining ten- 
ses of the active voice, as well as all the tenses of the passive, 
are periphrastic, i. e. formed by means of the perfect partici- 
ple or infinitive, and the auxiliary verbs of tenses (§ 115) ; e. g. 
pres. id) {) b r e, I hear ; imperf id) b b r t e, I heard ; perf tcf) 
babe g e fy 6 r t* I have heard ; pras. passive, id) tt> e r b e g e * 
fy b r t, I am heard, &c. 

§ 120. There are four forms of the infinitive : — the present 
and perfect infinitives active ; as, I o b e tt, to praise ; § elobt 
i) a b e tt, to have praised ; and the present and perfect infinitives 
passive ; e. g. g e t o b t m e r b e tt, to be praised ; g e 1 b t 
tt) o r b e tt f e t tt, to have been praised. The present infinitive 
active always ends in n or e tt, and is often preceded by the pre- 
position 3 u ; as, au belf e tt, to help ; ja tabel n, to blame. 

§ 121. The German verb has three Participles : the 
present, perfect, and future. 

1st, The present participle is formed from the present infini- 
tive, by adding b to it ; as, loben b, bbrett b, praising, hearing. 
It is always active in its signification, and is less extensively 
employed than the English participle in ing. 

2d, The perfect participle generally assumes the prefix g e, 
and ends either in e t or t in regular verbs ; as, g e leb e t, 
praised ; g e (eb e t, lived ; or in e n (n) in irregular verbs ; as, 
g e feb e tt, seen ; g e geff e tt, eaten. When belonging to tran- 
sitive verbs, it has a passive signification (except in the com- 
pound tenses of the active voice), but when formed from in- 
transitive verbs, it is active (§ 112), differing from the present 
participle only in the relation of time. 

3d, The future participle is formed from the infinitive with 
ju, by annexing the letter b ; as, gu lobett, to praise ; 
in (cbettb, to be praised; $u serebrett b, to be venerated, 
verable. Like the Latin participle in dus (amandus, veneran- 
dys), it always has a passive signification, involving at the same 
time the notion of necessity, propriety, or possibility. It is, 
however, employed only as an adjective in the attributive rela- 



. 443 

twn (§52); as, feer ju lob en be ©cfyiifer, the scholar who 
is to be (ought, may, must be) praised. But not: ber ©cfyiiler 
t jf 3 u t o b e n b ; in the latter case the infinitive with ju is used 
instead of the participle : — ber ©cfyiiler tfl i u I b e n, the 
scholar is to be praised, is worthy of praise. 

§ 122. With respect to the perfect participle, it is to be re- 
marked, that it does not assume the prefix q e in the following 
instances : — 

1st, In the verb ro e r b e tt, when, as an auxiliary, it stands 
in connection with another verb ; as, er tft $efragt tt> Q r b e n 
(not geroorben), he has been asked. 

2d, In all German verbs compounded with the inseparable 
and unaccented prefixes be, beun, emp, ent, er, 9 e, set, 
tt e r a b, »erun and 3 e r ; as, belefyrt, entfaltet, 
ertfyetlt, sergeffert, jerrtffen, instructed, unfolded, 
imparted, forgotten, torn ; not q e befefyrt, 9 e entfattet, &c. 

4th, In all verbs derived from foreign languages, which 
have the accented termination trettorteren; e. g. abfol* 
strt, ftubtrt, barbtert, from abfofotren, to absolve; 
ftub i x e n, to study ; barb t e r e n, to shave. 

5th, In verbs compounded with the particles bitrd), fyfnter, 
fiber, urn, unter, soil and roteber, when they are in- 
separable, in which case the accent rests not on the particle, 
but on the verb; e.g. aoUbradjt, fytntergan^en, un* 
terfefyrteben, from ttottbrtngen, to consummate, finish; 
fytntercjefyen, to deceive, and unter fd) ret ben, to sign. 

AUXILIARY VERBS. 

§ 123. To the full conjugation of German verbs, three 
auxiliaries are necessary, and only three, namely, the 
auxiliary verbs of tenses (§ 115) : t) a b e tt, to have ; 
f e i It, to be, and tt> e r b e tt, to become. 

1st, ^ a b c n is used in forming the perfect infinitive (and 
tenses derived from it), the perfect and pluperfect, both indi- 
cative and subjunctive, of all transitive and of many intransitive 
verbs ; as, gettebt f) a b e n , to have loved ; perf id) f)abe geltebt, I 
have loved ; pluperf* tdj f) a 1 1 c gettcbt, 1 had loved ; future perf 
td) roerbe g e 1 1 e b t f) a b c n, I shall hare loved, &c. 

2d, <S c i n serves to form the same tenses of a// verbs in the 
passive voice and of many intransitive verbs in the active ; e. g. . 
per/*, id) bin gettcbt tuorfcen, I toe been loved .; future perf fc>u rottft 
getiebt n>ort)cn few, thou shalt have been loved ; td) bin geretf't* I 
have travelled. 



444 

3d, £8 e r fc) c tt is used in the formation of the future tenses, 
when it corresponds to the English shall or will, and also in the 
formation of all the tenses of the passive voice, when it corresponds 
to the English verb to be ; e.g. id) to e r v e liefcen, I shall love ; 
fcu n> t r ft cjeltebt fyctben, thou wilt have loved ; cr rc i r t) geliebt, he is 
loved, &c. 

§ 124. The simple tenses of the auxiliary verbs are irre- 
gular as in English. The compound tenses are regularly 
formed, as in all other verbs, according to the following 

RULES FOR THE FORMATION OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 

Rule I. ^The perfect tense of any verb is formed by annex- 
ing its perfect participle to the present indicative of either fy a * 
b en or f etn ; id) fyabe gefjabt, cjeliebt, gefun^en, I have had, 
loved, sung; id) bin getnefen, gegcmcjen, gereif t, I have been, 
gone, travelled. 

Rule II. The pluperfect is made by joining the perfect par- 
ticiple of the verb to the imperfect tense of either fy a b e n 01 
fein; as, id) I) ct tte gefyabt, gettebt, gefungen, I had had, 
loved, sung ; id) n) a r gewefen, gegancjen, cjereif't, I had been, 
gone, travelled. 

Rule III. The first or simple future is formed by annexing 
tha present infinvtive of the verb to the present indicative of 
the auxiliary w e r b e n ; as, id) tt) e r b e fyaben, tieben, reifen, 
fein, I shall have, love, travel, be. 

Rule IV. The future perfect is made by joining the perfect 
infinitive of the verb to the present of the auxiliary n) e r fc e n ; 
e. g. id) ro er b e gefyctbt fyaben, geltebt Jjaben, ^eretft fyaben, I 
shall have had, loved, travelled. 

Remark. The corresponding tenses of the subjunctive mood 
are formed in a similar manner. 

§ 125. From these rules it will be seen, that in order to 
form all the .compound tenses of a verb, three principal parts 
must necessarily be given, viz : the present infinitive, the per- 
feci participle, and the perfect infinitive (which also contains 
the auxiliary which the verb employs). 

§ 126. Instead of the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive 

# (td) t)dtte, id) fjdtte gebabt, I might have, I might have had), 

when they are conditional, i. e. when they denote a possibility 

not conceived as really existing, the imperfect subjunctive of 

rccvfccn (id) rci'tvbc), in connection wrti the present and per- 



445 

feet infinitive, is often used ; e. g. id) m ii x t> e b a b e rt r It e 4 

b e tt, I should have, love ; id) roiirbe $et)abt, geltebt bctben, I 
should have had, have loved. 

These compound forms of the verb have commonly had a 
place among the other tenses, under the name of first and 
second conditionals. 

§ 127. PARADIGMS 
TO THE CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 

I. f) a b e n, to have, 

C Pres. Infin. fyctben, to have. 
Principal parts. < Perf. Part, gefeabt, had. 

{ Perf. Infin. gebabt feaben, to have had. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) babe, I have, am having, do id) babe, I may have, be hav- 

have, ing, 

tit baft thou hast, &c. bit babefl:, thou mayst have, &c. 

er (fie, e$) feat, he (she, it) has, er (fie, e3) babe, he (she, it) 

&c. may have, &c. 

Plural. Plural, 

toiv baben, we have, &c. nnt baben, we may have, &c. 

x'br babet (feabt), ye or you ifer fyabet, ye or you may have, 

have, &c. &c. 

fte bctben, they have, &c. fte baben, they may have, <&c. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) batte, I had, was having, id) batte, I might have, be hav- 

did have, ing, 

feu battefl", thou hadst, <kc. bu battefl:, thou mightst have 

&c. 
er batte, he had, &c. er batte, he might have, &c. 

Plural. Plural. 

toit fatten, we had, &c. tmr batten, we might have, &c. 

tfer battet, ye or you had, &c. tbr battet, ye or you might 

have, <&c. 
fte batten, they had, <fec. « fte batten, they might have, &c 



446 

Perfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) babe gebabt, I have had, id) babe cjebabt, I may have 

been having, had, been having, 

tu baft gebabt, thou hast had, bit babeft gebabt, thou mayst 

&c have had, &c. 

er ^at gebabt, he has had, &c. er babe gebabt, he may have 

had, &c. 
Plural. Plural. 

ttnr t>aben gebabt, we have had, rotr baben gebabt, we may have 

&c. had, &c. 

tbrbabet(babt) gebabt, you have tbr feabet ge^abt, you may have 

had, &c. had, &c. 

fie baben gebabt, they have had, fie baben gebabt, they may have 

&c. had, &c. 

Pluperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) batte gebabt, I had had, been id) batte cjebabt, I might have 

having, had, been having, 

bit batteft Qtbabt, thou hadst bit batteft gebabt, thou mightst 

had, &c. have had, &c. 

er batte gebabt, he had had, &c. er batte gebabt, he might have 

had, &c. 
Plural. Plural. 

tt)tr batten gebabt, we had had, tviv batten gebabt, we might 

&c have had, &c. 

tbr bctttet gebabt, you had had, tyv Wtet gebabt, you might 

&c. have had, &c. 

fte fatten gebabt, they had had, fie bitten gebabt, they might 

&c. have had, &c. 

First Future. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) roerbe baben, I shall have, id) werbe baben, I shall have, 

be having, be having, 

bu rctrft baben, thou wilt have, hu roerbejl: fyaben, thou wilt 

&c. have, &c. 

cr rotrb baben, he will have, er roerbe baben, he will have, 

Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
tmr roerben baben, we shall have, &c. 
tbr roerbet baben, you will have, &c. 
fie merbert baben, they will have, &c. 






447 
Future Perfect. 



Singular. 

id) roerbe gebabt baben, I shall 
have had, been having, 

bit tmrfl: gebabt baben, thou wilt 
have had, &c. 

er nnrb gebabt baben, he will 
have had, &c. 



Singular. 

id) roerbe (jebabt baben, I shall 
have had, been having, 

bu werbeft gebabt baben, thou 
wilt have had, &c. 

er werbe gebabt baben, he will 
have had, &c. 



Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 

toiv roerben cjebabt baben, we shall have had, &c. 
tbr roerbet gebabt baben, you will have had, &c. 
fie roerben gebabt baben, they will have had, &c. 

Conditionals. 



First Conditional. 

Singular. 

id) roiirbe baben, I should have, 

bu roiitbeft baben, thou wouldst 

have, 
er noiirbe baben, he would have ; 

Plural. 

nnr roiirben b^^n, we should 

have, 
tbr roiivbet baben, you would 

have, 
fte ttmrben baben, they would 

have* 



Second Conditional. 

Singular. 

id) rottrbe gebabt baben, I should 

have had, 
bu roiirbejl: cjebabt baben, thou 

wouldst have had, 
er ttuirbe gebabt baben, he 

would have had ; 

Plural. 

*mr wiirben gebabt bciben, we 

should have had, 
tbr wiirbet cjebabt fyabm, you 

would have had, 
fie mitrben gebabt baben, they 

would have had. 



Imperative. 
Singular. Plural. 

baben tmr, let us have, 
babetorbabt(tbr), ) have ye, do 
baben ©te, $ ye have, 

baben fie, let them have. 



babe {bu), have (fliou), do thou 

have, 
babe er (fie, e§), let him (her, 

it) have ; 

Infinitives. 

Pres. baben, to have, 

Perf. gebabt baben, tc have had. 



Participles. 

Pres. babenb, having, 
Perf. gebabt, had. 



448 



§ 128. II. (Be in, to be. 

C Pres. Infin. fetn, to be. 
Principal parts. < Perf. Part, gemefen, been. 

( Perf. Infin. gemefen fetn, to have been. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 

Singular. Singular, 

id) but, I am, id) fet, I may be, 

t>u btft, thou art, bu fetefl (fet ft), thou mayst be, 

er (fie, e3) tft, he (she, it) er fet, he may be ; 
is; 

Plural. 
mtr feten (fetn), we may be, 
tfer fetet, you maybe, 
fte feten (fetn), they may be. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. 



Plural, 
tnix ftnb, we are, 
tfyr fetb, you are, 
fte ftnb, they are. 



Singular, 
id) mar, I was, 
t>u mareft (marft), thou wast, 



er mar, he was ; 

Plural. 
mtr maren, we were, 
ii)x maret (mart), you were, 
fte maren, they were. 



I 



id) mare, I might be, 

bu mareft (mdrft), thou mightst 

be, 
er mare, he might be ; 

Plural. 
mtr maren, w r e might be, 
tbr mdret (mart), you might be, 
fte maren, they might be. 

Perfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) but gemefen, I have been, id) fet gemefen, I may have 

been, 
bu btfttjemefen, thou hast been, fc>u fetjl gemefen, thou mayst 

have been, 
er tjt gemefen, he has been ; er fet gemefen, he may have 

been; 
Plural. Plural. 

mtr ftnb gemefen, we have been, mtr feten gemefen, we may have 

been, 
tfyr fetb (jemefen, you have been, tfyr fetet gemefen, you may have 

been, 
fte ftnb cjemefen, they have been, fte feten gemefen, they may have 

been. 



1 



449 

Pluperfect. 
Singular. Singular* 

id) mar gemefen, I had been, id) mdre gemefen, I might hav© 

been, 
bu marft (jemefen, thou hadst bu mdreft^emefen, thou mightst 

been, have been, 

er mar cjemefen, he had been ; er mdre gemefen, he might 

have been ; 

Plural. Plural. 

mtr maren cjemefen, we had mx mdren gemefen, we might 

been, have been, 

ttjr maret gemefen, you had tfyr mdret gemefen, you migk* 

been, have been, 

fte maren gemefen, they had fie mdren gemefen, they might 

been. have been. 

First Future. 
Singular. Singular. 

id) merbe fetn, I shall be, id) merbe fetn, I shall be, 

bit mtrfl: fern, thou wilt be, bu merbefl: fetn, thou wilt be, 

er mtrb fetn, he will be ; er merbe fetn, he will be ; 

Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 

mtr merben fetn, we shall be, 
tfyr merbet fetn, you will be, 
fte merben fetn, they will be. 

Future Perfect. 
Singular. Singular. 

id) merbe gemefen fetn, I shall id) merbe gemefen fetn, 1 shall 

have been, have been, 

bit mtrfl: g em efen fetn, thou wilt bit merbeft gemefen fetn, thou 

have been, wilt have been, 

er mtrb gemefen fetn, he will er merbe gemefen fetn, he will 

have been ; have been ; 

Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
I 
mtr merben gemefen fetn, we shall have been, 
tfyr merbet gemefen fetn, you will have been, 
fte merben gemefen fetn, they will have been. 



450 

Conditionals. 
First Conditional. Second Conditional. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) wiirbe fetn, I should be, id) wiirbe geroefen fettt, I shoula 

have been, 
bu ttmrbeft fetn, thou wouldst bn tmirbefr geroefen fetn, thou 

be, wouldst have been, 

er nnirbe fetn, he would be ; er roiirbe gewefen fetn, he would 

have been ; 

Plural. Plural. 

ttnr roiirben fetn, we should be, toiv ttmrben geroefen fetn, we 

should have been, 

tfyr antrbet fetn, you would be, tfyr witrbet geroefen fetn, you 

would have been, 

fie roiirben fetn, they would be. fte ttmrben geroefen fetn, they 

would have been. 

Imperative. 
Singular. Plural. 

feten tm'r, let us be, 
fet (bit), be thou, do be, fetb (t'^r), ) be ye, 

feten @te, $ do ye be, 
fet er (fie, e$), let him (her, it) feten fte, let them be. 
be ; 

Infinitives. Participles. 

Pres. fetn, to be, Pres. fetenb (roefenb), being, 

Perf. geroefen fetn, to have been. Perf. geroefen, been. 

§ 129. III. ffierben, to become (shall, will). 

(Pres. Infin. roerben, to become* 

Perf. Part. gercorben, become. 

Perf. Infin. geroorben fetn, to have 

L become. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) roerbe, I become, am be- id) roerbe, I may become, bo 

coming, do become, becoming, 

bu rotrft, thou becomest, &c. tu roerbeft, thou mayst be- 
come, &c. 
er rotrb, he becomes, &c. er werbe, he may become, &c 



451 

Plural. Plural. 

ttnr werben, we become, &c. xoix roerben, we may become, 

&c. 
tfyr roerbet, you become, &c. tfyr werbet, you may become, 

&c. 
fte toerben, they become, &c. fie roerbeit, they may become, 

&c. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. Singular, 

id) ttntrbe (roarb), I became, td) ttntrbe, I might become, be 

was becoming, did become, becoming, 

tu nntrbeft (roarbjY), thou be- bu wiirbefl, thou mightst be- 

camest, &c. come, &c. 

er nutrbe (marb), he became, er roiirbe, he might become, 

&c. &c. 

Plural. Plural. 

mv rcurben, we became, &c. *mr ttmrben, we might be 

come, &c. 

tfyr rourbet, you became, &c. tfyr roitrbet, you might be- 
come, &c. 

fte wurbett, they became, &c. fte rourbert, they might be- 
come, &c. 

Perfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) btn geroorben (worben), I id) fet geroorbert (worben), I 
have become, been becom- may have become, been be- 
ing, coming, 

bit btfl: geroorben (worben^thou tn fetft geroorben (roorben), 

hast become, &c. thou mayst have become, 

&c. 

er xft geroorbert (worben), he er fet geworben (roorben), he 

has become, &c. may have become, &c. 

Plural. Plural. 

ton finb geroorben (worben), ttnr feten geworben (roorben), 

we have become, &c. we may have become, &c. 

(fyr fetb gemorben (roorben), ii)V fetet gemerben (roerben), 

you have become, &c. you may have become, &c. 

fte ftnb gercorben (worben), fte feten geworben (roorben), 

they have become, &c. they may have become, &c. 



452 



Pluperfect. 



Singular. 

id) mar gemorben (morben), I 
had become, been becom- 
ing, 

bu marft gemorben (morben), 
thou hadst become, &c. 

er mar gemorben (morben), he 
had become, &c. 

Plural. 

mtr maren gemorben (morben), 
we had become, &c. 

tl>r maret gemorben (morben), 
you had become, &c. 

fie maren gemorben (morben), 
they had become, &c. 

First 

Singular, 
id) merbe merben, I shall be- 
come, be becoming, 
ba mtrft merben, thou wilt be- 
come, &c. 

merben, he will be- 
&c. 



er mtrb 
come, 



Singular. 

id) mare gemorben (morben), I 

might have become, been 

becoming, 
bu mdreft gemorben (morben), 

thou mightst have become, 

&c. 
er mare gemorben (morben), 

he might have become, &c. 

Plural. 

mtr mdren gemorben (morben), 

we might have become, &c. 
ii)x mdret gemorben (morben), 

you might have become, &c. 
fie mdren gemorben (morben), 

they might have become, 

&c. 

Future. 

Singular. 

id) merbe merben, I shall be- 
come, be becoming, 

bit merbefl merben, thou shalt 
become, &c. 

er merbe merben, he shall be- 
come, &c. 



Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
mtr merben merben, we shall become, &c. 
tfyr merbet merben, you will become, &c. 
fie merben merben, they will become, &c. 

Future Perfect. 



Singular. 

id) merbe gemorben (morben) 

fetn, I shall have become, 

been becoming, 
bu mtrfl gemorben (morben) 

fetn, thou wilt have become, 

&c. 
cr mtrb gemorben (morben) fetn, 

he will have become, &c. 



Singular. 

id) merbe gemorben (morben) 

fetn, I shall have become, 

been becoming, 
bit merbefl gemorben (morben) 

fetn, thou wilt have become, 

&c. 
er merbe gemorben (morben) 

fetn, he will have become, 

&c. 



453 



Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
ttur roerben geroorben (roorben) fetn, we shall have become, &c. 
tfyr werbet geroorben (rcerfcen) fetn, you will have become, &c. 
fte roerben geroorben (wcrben) fetn, they will have become, &c. 

Conditional. 



First Conditional. 

Singular. 
id) nntrbe rcerben, I should be- 
come, be becoming, 



bit ttmrbeft roerben, 
wouldst become, &c. 



thou 



er ttmtbe roerben, he would 
become, &c. 

Plural, 
xoix wiirben roerben, we should 
become, &c. 

tfyr wiirbet roerben, you would 
become, &c. 

fie wiirben werben, they would 
become, &c. 



Singular. 



tioerbe (bu), become thou, do 

become, 
roerbe er (fte, e§), let him (her, 

it) become ; 

Infinitives. 
Pres. roerben, to become, 
Perf. geroorben fetn, to have 
become. 



Second Conditional, 
Singular. 

id) nntrbe geroorben (roorben) 
fetn, I should have become, 
been becoming, 

t>u noiirDefr gewerben (roorben) 
fetn, thou wouldst have be- 
come, &c. 

er imirbe geroorben (roorben) 
fetn, he would have become, 
&c. 

Plural. 

ttJtr miirben geroorben (worben) 
fetn, we should have be- 
come, &c. 

tfyr rotirbet gercorben (roorben) 
fetn, you would have be- 
come, &c. 

fte roiirben geroorben (roorben) 
fetn, they would have be- 
come, &c. 

Imperative. 

Plural. 
werben mtr, let us become, 
rcerbet (tfyr), ) become ye, 
werben ©te, $ do become, 
werben fte, let them become. 



Participles. 
Pres. werbenb, becoming, 
Perf. geroorben, become. 



§ 130. It has been remarked (§ 123) that the compound 
tenses of some intransitive verbs are made by means of the 
auxiliary fy a b e n, and of others by means of f e t n* The sig- 



454 

nification of the verb generally decides which auxiliary is to 
be employed. 

§ 131. INTRANSITIVE VERBS WHICH ASSUME THE 

auxiliary I) a ben* 

1st, Impersonal and reflexive verbs; as, e$ fyat geregttet, 
gebonnert, it has rained, thundered ; td) {} a b e mtd) gefreut, 1 
have rejoiced ; er 1) a t ftdf) gedrgert, he has been vexed. 

2d, All the auxiliary verbs of mood (§ 115) ; as, td) t) a b e 
gemu£t, I have been obliged ; er 1) a i tud)t fommen Wnnen, he 
has not been able to come. 

3d, All intransitive verbs which are followed by an object 
in the genitive or dative, or by a preposition ; as, er I) at met* 
ner gebacfyt, he has remembered me ; td) 1) a b e tf)m gebfertt, I 
have served him ; er f) a t tiber £)td) gefpottet, he has derided 
you. 

Except: fcegegnen, to meet; fctgen, to follow, and roctdjcn, to 
yield to, which govern the dative, and take f e t n. 

4th, Verbs denoting a permanent state or such an activity, 
by means of which an impression on the outward senses is 
produced ; e. g. td) fy a b e gelegen, gefcfylafen, geftonbert, ge* 
wobnt, I have lain, slept, stood, lived; er I) at gebraitfet, ge* 
briittt, gebuftet, gegtdngt, gerocfyen, gefd)tenen, geroetnt, he has 
bellowed, roared, exhaled fragrance, glittered, smelled, ap- 
peared, wept, &c. 

§ 132. INTRANSITIVE VERBS WHICH ASSUME THE 
AUXILIARY fettt* 

1st, The verb fetn itself; as, td) but gewefen, I have been ; 
td) war cjeroefert, I had been. 

2d, Verbs which imply motion either in general, or to some 
definite place or object ; moreover, such as denote a transition 
from one state to another, especially verbs compounded with 
the prefixes er, »er, exit, or with the particles an, auf, <uid, 
em, &c. The following list exhibits most of them : — 

ciufroad)cn, to awake ; etftaurtert, to be astonished, and 

augatten, to degenerate ; other compounds with e t ; 

fcegecuten, to meet ; fafyren, to move ; 

fcetften, to burst ; faufen, to become putrefied ; 

fcredjen, to break ; flteqen, to fly ; 

brtngcn, to press ; fUepen, to flow ; 

etUn, to hasten ; \tUun, to freeze ; 

eranmmen, to grow angry ; gefjcn, to go ; 



gclctngm, to get, to arrive ; 
gencfen, to recover ; 
geratfjen, to fall into ; 
gertnnen, to coagulate ; 
gcfcbcljen, to come to pass ; 
ijetfen, to heal ; 
jagon, to run in haste; 

J*** 1 ' U climb; 

fommen, to come ; 
ftiecbcn, to creep ; 
lanfrcn, to land ; 
laufen, to run ; 
(Uictten, to well forth ; 
retfen, to ripen ; 
tetfen, to travel ; 
retten, to ride ; 
renncn, to run ; 
rtnnen, to flow; 
rucfen, to move ; 
fcfteibcn, to part ; 
fcrjtcj^n, to dart forth ; 
fdnffen, to sail ; 
fd)fetd)en, to sneak ; 
fcfyliipfen, to slip ; 



455 

fdjmefyeti/ to melt ; 

fcrjreitm, to stride ; 

fcftroeUen, to swell ; 

fcfyttummen, to swim 

fdbtxrinbcn, to vanish ; 

fecjctn, to sail ; 

fin fen, to sink ; 

fprtepen, to sprout ; 

fpttngen, to leap ; 

fictgen, to rise ; 

fterben, to die ; 

fte£ien, to push ; 

fttanben, to strand ; 

ftraucf)e(n, to trip ; 

ftrckrjcn, to ramble ; 

fttit$en, to plunge ; 

treten, to step ; 

traben, to trot ; 

ttetatmen, to grow poor ; 

Wtwefen, to decay, and many othei 

verbs compounded with *) e r ; 
rocmbern, to wander ; 
wattn, to wade ; 
nxicfyen, to yield ; 
atefyen, to pass. 



§ 133. Some verbs employ fyaben in one signification, and 
fetn in another. With fyaben they generally imply an activity, 
and with fetn a state or condition : — 

(£r hat bctS ftamtn au%ebrannt, he has burnt out the chim- 
ney ; £>a3 fieucv t(t auSgebrcmnt, the fire has done burning ; id) 
fcabe fortgefafyren ju lefen, I have, continued to read ; id) bin 
fortgefafyren, I drove oft; bte 3?ofyte feat geflefien, the pipe has 
leaked ; fca§ SBiaffer tjt geflofifen, the water has flowed ; id) fyabe 
gefroren, I have been cold ; bte Wlild) tjt gefroren, the milk is 
frozen ; id) fyabe mid) miibe gegangen, I have become fatigued with 
walking ; id) bin nacfy £aufe gegemgen, I have gone home ; td) 
l)abe gejagt, I have hunted ; id) bin gejagt, I have run in haste ; 
td) feabe etn ^3ferb gerttten, I have ridden a horse ; id) but au& 
gerttten, I have taken a ride. 



CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 

§ 134. It has already been observed (§ 119) that only 
two tenses of the German verb are simple tenses, namely, the 
present and imperfect of the active voice. Besides these the 
present infinitive active (foabtn, roerben), two participles (pres. 



456 

l^abenb, perf. gebabt), and the imperative mood, are also simple 
forms of the verb. All other parts are periphrastic or com- 
pound, and formed by means of the infinitive or perfect parti- 
ciple, and one of the auxiliary verbs of tenses. 

§ 135. In the compound tenses the auxiliary alone is in- 
fleeted. Hence it follows; that when the inflection of the aux- 
iliaries is known, and the principal parts of any verb are given, 
all the tenses of the same may be easily formed according to 
the rules given above (§ 124). 

§ 136. The inflection of the compound tenses being uniform 
in all German verbs (with this variation only, that some take 
fyaben and others fetn for their auxiliary), all the differences and 
irregularities of conjugation must be sought for in the simple 
forms. 

§ 137. With respect to their simple forms, verbs 
follow two different modes of inflection : — 

1st, Without changing the radical vowel, they form the im- 
perfect simply by adding, the termination e t e or e t to the root ; and 
the perfect participle, by adding the termination e t or t ; e. g 
pres. infin. fob e n, to praise, imperf. tcf) fob t e, perf. part, ge* 
fobet (gefobt). Verbs thus conjugated are usually called 
regular verbs. 

2d, The vowel of the root is changed in the imperfect tense 
and in the perfect participle, which latter then always ends in 
en or tt, and the first and third persons of the imperfect indica- 
tive remain without any termination; e. g. pres. infin. be* 
f el) Un, to command, imperf. td), et befctfyl, I? he com- 
manded, perf. part, b e f o fy i e n ; pres. infin. I e f e n, to read, 
imperf. td) U 8, perf. part, g e I e f e m 

Verbs of this form of conjugation have heretofore passed under 
the name of irregular verbs. As, however, they are very numer- 
ous, comprehending nearly all the primitive verbs of the language, 
this name is now generally discarded, and various attempts have 
been made to reduce them to a number of regular conjugations. 

Note. The classification of the irregular verbs (which name we 
retain for the sake of convenience), and an alphabetical list of them 
will be found below. 

Sixteen verbs are partly regular and irregular, in the forma- 
tion of their simple forms. They will be found in the table 
of irregular verbs below. 



457 



§ 138. The personal terminations of the simple tenses 
are essentially the same in both kinds of verbs, except in the 
first and third persons singular of the imperfect indicative, in 
which irregular verbs assume no termination. The first and 
third persons plural end always in en, and the second person 
plural in e t throughout all the moods and tenses. 

§ 139. When the root of an irregular verb contains one of 
the vowels a, o or u, it is generally modified into a, i>, ii in the 
second and third persons of the present indicative, and also in 
the imperfect subjunctive ; e. g. id) fyalte, bit fyaltft, et fyalt, I hold, 
thou holdest, he holds ; td) fartb, subj. id) fanfce, I found, I might 
find. In like manner the radical e is changed into t or t e in 
the second and third persons of the present indicative, and in 
the singular of the imperative ; e. g. id) cjebe, bit gtbjl, et gtbt, 
gtb bit, I give, thou givest, he gives, give thou ; id) fefye, bu 
ftefyft, er ftefyt, ftet) bit, I see, thou seest, he sees, see thou. 

§ 140. The following table presents a comparative view 
of the terminations of the simple forms of verbs, both regular 
and irregular. 



I 3 . 

*3 i 



I 



1st Pers. 

1 2d Pers. 

3d Pers. 



Present of all Verbs. 

•Indicat. Subjunct. 



e, 

eft, ft, 
et, t 



e, 

eft, 

e. 



2 



Indicat. 

1st Pers. ert,n, 
2d Pers. et, t, 
3d Pers. en,n. 



Subjunct. 

ett, 
et, 
em 



Imperffct of Regular Verbs. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

1st Pers. te, ete, ete, te, 

2d Pers. teft, eteft, eteft, teft, 

3d Pers. te, ete, ete, te, 



Imperat. of Reg. Verbs. 



1st Pers. 
2d Pers. 
3d Pers. 



ten, eten, 
tet, etet, 
ten, eten. 

Participles. 



2d Pers. sing, e, 
1st Pers. pi. en, 
2d Pers. pi. et,t 

Infinitive. 



en, n. 



eten, ten, 
etetf tet, 
eten, ten. 

i Pres. enb, nt>. 
\Perf. g — ett. 

Imperfect of Irregular Verbs. Imperat. of Ir. Verb* 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 



eg 



(3 



si Pers. 

2d Pers. 

3d Pers. 

20 



ft, eft, 



e, 

eft, ft, 
e. 



2d Pers. sing. — , e, 
lstPers.pl. en, 
2d Pers. pi. et, t« 



458 



Imperfect of Irregular Verbs 



J st Pers, 

2d Pers, 
3d Pers, 



Indicative. 

en, 

et,t, 

en* 

Participles. 



Subjunctive. 

en, 

tt,t, 

en. 

Pres. ent>. 
Perf. ge — en* 



Infinitive 

en* 



§ 141. 



REMARKS ON THE TABLE. 



Remark 1. In the present tense, all German verbs are regu- 
larly formed by adding the above terminations to the root of the 
present infinitive. 

Remark 2. In the imperfect of regular verbs, the t and the ct in- 
dicate the tense, and the remaining part of the termination the 
different persons. The imperfect of irregular verbs, on the other 
hand, has terminations for the person only, the tense being suffi- 
ciently distinguished by the change of the radical vowel. 

Remark 3. With respect to the e preceding tbe terminations ft, 
t e, &c, it is to be observed, that it is always retained in the sub- 
junctive mood, but in the indicative it may either be retained or 
omitted, as euphony may require ; e. g. subjunctive, id) (ok, I may 
praise, t>u fob e ft, thou mayst praise, id) lob e t e, I might praise ; 
indicative, tm (obeft or lob ft, thou praisest; id) lobe te or tobte, 1 
was praising. 

Remark 4. Verbs ending et tt or e t tt, reject the c of the termi- 
nation of inflection throughout, before ft, t or n. But in the first 
person of the present indicative, and in the imperative singular, the 
e of the original termination is rejected in its stead ; e. g. fammdtt, 
to collect; pres. indie, id) fommte (instead of famine te), I collect, 
fcu fcmuwlfr, et fammett, thou collectest, he collects, fammte £)u, 
do thou collect ; e6 fcauet t, it lasts, from t>aue r n> &c. The sub- 
junctive, however, either retains the e in both cases, or rejects the 
first only ; e. g. id) tat) e ( e or tat) I e, I may blame, fie tat) e t e n or 
tat) I e tt, they may blame, &c. 

§ 142. The tenses of the passive voice are all periphrastic, 
and are formed by combining the perfect participle of the verb 
with the different moods and tenses of the auxiliary ft) e V b e n ; 
as, pres. indie, id) roerfce g e It e b t> I am loved ; imperf. indie, 
id) nnirfce g e 1 1 e b t, I was loved ; perf. indie, id) btn g e I i e b t 
worben, I nave been loved, &c. In this connection the perfect 
participle of wetbett always loses its prefix g e* (§ 122. 1st.) 



459 



PARADIGMS 

TO THE CONJUGATION OF GERMAN VERBS. 

§ 143. I. TRANSITIVE VERBS. 

2 b e n, to praise, regular. 
Sfi it f e n , to call, irregular. 

{Pres. Itsfin. toben, rufen, 
lMPE RFp Wc icMobte, nef. 
Perf. Part, geiobt, geruferu 
Perf. Infin. gelobt, gerufen fyaben. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 



Singular. 
I praise, call, am praising, 

calling, do praise, call. 
id) lobe, rufe, 

tu tebejt (lobfr), rufeft (rufjt), 
er lobet (lobt), rufet (ruft) ; 

Plural, 
nnr toben, rufen, 
tf)r lobet (lebt), rufet (ruft), 
fte loben, rufen. 

Imperfect 
Singular. 
I praised, called, was prais. 
ing, calling, did praise, call 
id) tobte, rtef, 
bu tobtefl, rtefeft (rtefft), 
er tobte, rtef ; 

Plural, 
mv lobten, rtefen, 
tfyr lobtet, rtefet (rteft), 
fte lobten, rtefen. 



Singular. 
I may praise, call, be prais. 

ing, calling. 
id) lobe, rufe, 
tn tobeft, rufeft, 
er lobe, rufe; 

Plural. 
wtr toben, rufen, 
tfyr lobet, rufet, 
fte toben, rufen. 



Singular. 
I might praise, call, be prais« 
ing, calling, 
td) (obete, rt'efe, 
bit tobeteft, rtefeft, 
er lobete, rtefe; 

Plural. 
rotr lobeten, rtefen, 
tfer lobetet, rtefet, 
fte lobeten, rtefen. 

Perfect. 

I have praised, called, been I may have praised, called* 

praising, calling, &c. been praising, calling, &c* 

Sing, id) fyctbe, bu fyaft, er feat Sing, id) feabe, ^u feabeft, er 

cjelobt, gerufen ; %okz getobt, gerufen ; 



460 

Plur. ttnr fyctben, ifyv tjabt, fie Plur. mtr Robert, tyv fyabet, fie 
fyaben gelobt, gerufen. fcaben gelobt, gerufen. 

Pluperfect. 

I had praised, called, been I might have praised, called, 
praising, calling, &c. been praising, calling, &c. 

Sing. \d) fcatte, bu foatteft, er Siw#. tcr; f)atte, bu fcatteft, er 
fyatte gelobt, gerufen; fcatte gelobt, gerufen; 

Plur. writ fatten, tfyr fyattet, fie PZwr. rotr fatten, tfyr l)dtter, fie 
fatten gelobt, gerufen. fatten gelobt, gerufen. 

First Future. 

I shall praise, call, be prais- I shall praise, call, be prais- 
ing, calling, &c. ing, calling, &c 

Sing, id) roerbe, bu anrft, er Si«^. id) werbe, bu roerbefV 
nnrb loben, rufen; er werbe, loben, rufen; 

Plur. wtr roerben, tfyr rcerbet, Plur. toix tuerben, ifyv werbet, 
fie werben toben, rufen. fie werben loben, rufen* 

Future Perfect. 

I shall have praised, called, I shall have praised, called 
been praising, calling, &c. been praising, calling, &c 

Sing, id) ttjerbe, in wtrft, er Sing, id) werbe, tu merbejT, ex 
tmrb gelobt, gerufen fyaben; roerbe gelobt, gerufen fyaben 5 

Plur. jtnr roerben, tfyr merbet, Plur. rotr werben, tfyr roerbet,. 
fie roerben gelobt, gerufen fya* fie werben getobt, gerufen 
ben. tyabetx. 

Conditionals, 

First Conditional. Second Conditional. 

I should praise, call, be prais- I should have praised, called, 
ing, calling. been praising, calling. 

Sing, id) wurbe, in wurbeft/ Sing, id) wiirbe, bu roiirbef!) 
er roiirbe toben, rufen 5 er wiirbe gelobt, gerufen (a* 

Plur. wtr rourben, tfyr ttmrbet* Plur. wit rourben, ifyx miirbet, 
fie txuirben loben, rufen. fie wiirben gelobt, gerufen 

fyaben. 



461 

Imperative Mood. 
Singular. Plural. 

(oben rotr, let us praise, be 
praising, 
lobe (bit), praise thou, do tobet, lebt (tfyr), ) praise ye, 

praise, (oben Sie, > do ye praise, 

lobe er (fte, e§), let him (her, toben fte, let them praise, 
it) praise, be praising ; 

Singular. Plural. 

rufen imr, let us call, be call- 
ing* 
cufe (bit), call thou, do call, rufer, nift (tfyr), ) call ye, do 

rufen ©te, j ye call, 

cufe er (fte, e£), let him (her, rufen fte, let them call, be 
it) call, be calling ; calling. 

Infinitives. Participles. 

Pres. [cben, rufen, to praise, Pres. lobenb, rufenb, praising 
to call. calling. 

Perf. cjelobr, gerufen fyaben, to Perf. gelobt, gerufen, praised, 
have praised, called. called. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

I am praised, called, &c. I may be praised, called, &c. 

Sing, id) roerbe, bit tmrjt, er Sing, id) uoevbe f bu werbeft, er 
tturb cjeiobr, gerufen $ roerbe gelobt, cjerufen ; 

Plur. nur roerben, tt>r roerbet, Plur. rotr merben, tfyr roerbet, 
fte roerben gelobt, gerufem fte werben ^etobt, geruferu 

Imperfect. 

I was praised, called, &c. I might be praised, called, &c. 

Sing, id) ttmrbe, bit ttntrbeft, Sing, id) roiirbe, bu ttmrbejr, er 
er rourbe gelobt, gerufen; roiirbe gelobt, geutfen; 

Plur. rotr nwrben, xfyr ttntrbet, Plur. rotr ttmrben, tfyr wiirbet, 
i fte wurben gelobt, gerufem fte roiirben gelobt, gerufetn 



462 



Perfect. 

I have been praised, called, I may have been praised, 
&c. 



called, &c. 
Sing, id) fet, bu feteft, er fei 

gelobt, gerufen worben; 
PZwr. mtr feten, tfyr fetet, fie, 

feten gelobt, gerufen roorben. 

Pluperfect. 

I might have been praised, 

called, &c. 
Sing, id) mare, bu mareft, et 

mare gelobt, gerufen morben ; 
PZwr. mtr maren, tfyr maret, 

fie maren gelobt, gerufen 

morben. 
First Future. 
I shall be praised, called, &c. I shall be praised, called, &c. 

Sing, id) merbe, bu merbeft, et 

merbe gelobt, gerufen mer* 

ben; 
PZwr. mtr merben, t^r merbet, 

fie merben gelobt, gerufen 

merben. 



$mg. td) bin, bu btjl, er tft ge* 
lobt, gerufen morben; 

PZwr. mtr ftnb, i\)X fetb, fte 
ftnb gelobt, gerufen morben. 



I had been praised, called, 

&c. 
Swi^ id) mar, bu matft, er mar 

gelobt, gerufen morben 5 
Plur. mtr maren, tfyr maret, fte 

maren gelobt, gerufen mor* 

ben. 



Sing, id) merbe, bu mtrft, er 
mtrb gelobt, gerufen merben; 

Plur. mtr merben, tfyr merbet, 
fie merben gelobt, gerufen 
merben. 

Future Perfect. 

I shall have been praised, I shall have been praised. 



called, &c* 
Sing, id) merbe, bu mtrfl:, er 

mtrb gelobt, gerufen morben 

fetn; 
Plur. mtr merben, tt)r merbet, 

fie merben gelobt, gerufen 

morben fetn. 



called, &c. 
Sing, tcr; merbe, bu merbejT-, et 
* merbe gelobt, gerufen morben 

fetn j : 
Plur. mtr merben, tbr merbet, 

fte merben gelobt, gerufen 

morben fetn. 



Conditionals. 



First Conditional. 

I should be praised, called, 
&c. 

Sing, id) miirbe, bu murbeft, 
er murbe gelobt, gerufen 
merben ; 



Second Conditional. 

I should have been praised, 

called, &c. 
Sing, id) mi'trbe, bu miirbefr, er 

miirbe gelobt, gerufen mor* 

ben fetn ; 






468 

_ • •>• 

^W.*ttnrttmrben, ii)t wiirbet, Plur. mx nmrben, t^r ttmrbet, 

fte wiivben gelobt, gerufen fie roiirben gelobt, gerufen 

roerbeny roorben fetm 

Imperative Mood. 



Singular. 



tt>erbe (hi) gelobt, gerufen, be 
(thou) praised, called, 

roerbe er (fte, e£) gelobt, gent; 
fen, let him (her, it) be 
praised, called ; 

Infinitives. 

Pres. gelobt, gerufen roerben, to 
be praised, called. 

Perf. gelobt, gerufen roorben 
fetrt, to have been praised, 
called. 



Plural. 
merben xoiv gelobt, gerufen, let 

us be praised, called, 
toerbet (tfyr) gelobt, gerufen, ) 
merben ©te gelobt, gerufen, $ 

be ye (you) praised, called, 
rnerben fte gelobt, gerufen, let 

them be praised, called. 



Participles. 

Perf. gelobt, gerufen, praised, 
called. 

Fut. gu lobenb, $u rufenb, to be 
praised, called. 



§ 144. II. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 

© t of) f r e u e n, to rejoice. 
tPres. Infin. ftdf) freuem 

Principal parts. I Jf™ InDIC ;^ £*«*«**♦ * f 
r r J Perf. Part, ftd) gefreuet or gefreuf* 

LPerf. Infin. fid) gefreut fyabem 
INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
I rejoice, am rejoicing? do re- I may rejoice, be rejoicing, 



joice, dec. 
Sing, id) freue mtcf), bu freueft 
(freuft) bid), er freuet (freut) 

ftd) i 
Plur. rotr freuen un£, tfyr freu* 
et (freut) eucf), fte freuen fid). 



dec. 

Sing, id) freue mtd), bu freueft 
btd), er freue ftcf> ; 

Plur. wiv freuen un§, ii)v freu* 
et eitd), fte freuen fid). 



Imperfect. 
I rejoiced, dec, I might rejoice, dec. 

Sing, id) fr eute mtcf), bu freu* Sing, id) freuete mtcf), bu freu* 
tejl btcfy, dec. eteft bid), dec. 



464 

• '• . 
Plur. mx fteuten un§>, tfyr Plur. xoix freueten unS, &c 
freutet end); &c. 

Perfect. 

I have rejoiced, &c. Fmay have rejoiced, &c. 

£mg-. trf) ^abe mtd) gefteut, bu Siw^. td) fyabe mid) gefreut, bu 

fyaft bid) gefreut, <&c. fyabejl btd) gefreut, &c. 

PZwr. nur fyaben un3 gefreut, PZwr. mir fyaben un$ gefreut, 
&c. &c. 

Pluperfect, 
I had rejoiced, &c. I might have rejoiced, &c. 

£iwg. td) fyatte mtd) gefreut, &irc#. td). fydtte tmd) gefreut, 
&c. &c. 

First Future. 
I shall rejoice, &c. I shall rejoice, dec. 

Sing, id) werbe mtd) freuen, Sing, id) roerbe mtd) freuen, 
&u rotrft btc^ &c. bu roerbeft btd) &c. 

Future Perfect. 
I shall have rejoiced, &e. I shall have rejoiced, &c. 

Sing, id) roerbe mid) gefreut Sing, id) werbe mid) gefreut 
fyab tt, bu mtrft btd) &c. fyaben, bu werbeft: &c. 

Conditionals. 
First Conditional. Second Conditional. 

I should rejoice, &c. I should have rejoiced, &c. 

Sing, id) roiirbe mtd) freuen, bu /Stfrag. td) nmrbe mid) gefreut 
toiirbefl; &e. fyctben, bu wiirbefl: dec. 

Imperative Mood. 
rejoice thou, <kc. 

Plur. freuen air un§, 
jSircg. freue btd), freuet (ifyr) end), 

freue er (fie e3) ftdf> ; freuen fie fid). 

Infinitives. Participles. 

Pres. ftd) freuen, to rejoice. ftdf> freuenb, rejoicing. 
Perf. ftd) gefreut fyaben, to ftd) gefreut, rejoiced, 
have rejoiced. 

§ 145. III. INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 

® e fy e n, to go, takes f e t n for its auxiliary. 

Pres. Infin. gel) en, to go. 
Imperf. Indic. id) gtng, I went. 
Perf. Part, gegangen, gone. 
^Perf. Infin. gegangen few, to have gon6. 



Principal parts. 



465 

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

I £,o, ar *i g°i n g? do go, <fec. I may go, be going, &c. 

Sing. tcfygef^bugefyefKgeDft), Sing, id) gefye, bu gefyeft, er 

erget)t; get)e; 

PZwr. wtr gefcert, tfyr gefyet P/wr. wtr gefyen, t't)r gefyet, fie 
(get)t), fie get)en (get)n). get)en. 

Imperfect. 
I went, was going, did go, &c. I might go, be going, &c. 
Sing, id) gtng, bu gtngft, er Sw#. tcfy gtnge, t)u gtngejl, er 

9tng-j gtnge; 

PZwr. mtr gtngen, tt)r gtnget, PZwr. mtr gtngeit, ti)r gtnget, 

fie gtngen. fie gtngen. 

Perfect. 

I have gone, been going, &c. I may ha.ve gone, been going, 

&c. 
Sing, id) bin, bu btjl, er xft ge* £%?•. tcfy fet, bu feteft, er fe{ 

gangen; gegangen; 

Plur. mix finb, tt)r fetb, fie ftnb PZw. wtr feten, tfyr fetet, fte 

gegangen. feten gegangen. 

Pluperfect. 
I had gone, been going, &c. I might have gone, been going, 

&c. 
Sing, id) war, bu marft, er mar £mg. id) ware, bu marefl:, er 

gegangen; mare gegangen; 

Plur. Motr waren, t^r maret, fie PZwr. mtr waren, ti)r mdret, fte 
maren gegangen. mdren gegangen. 

First Future. 
I shall go, be going, &c. I shall go, be going, &c. 

Sing, id) merbe, bu mtrft, er Swig, tcfy werbe, bu merbeft, er 

mivb gefyen ; roerbe gefyen ; 

Plur. voir merben, tt)r merbet, Plur. toix werben, tfyr merbet, 

fte merben gel) em fie merben gefyem 

Future Perfect. 

I shall have gone, been going, I shall have gone, been going, 

&c. &c. 

Sing, id) roerbe, bu tmrjt, er Sing, id) roerbe, bu roerbeft, er 

anrb gegangen fetn; merbe gegangen fern; 

Plur. rotr merben, tk)r roerbet, Plur. mtr roerben, tt)r roerbet, 

fte roerben gegangen fetn. fie merben gegangen fetn. 
20* 



466 



Conditionals. 
First Conditional. Second Conditional. 

I should go, be going, &c. I should have gone, been go- 

ing, &c. 
Sing, id) roiirbe, bti ttmtfcejt, Sing, id) roiirbe, bit rciirbejt, 

er rciirbe gefyen ; er nMkbe gegangen fern ; 

PZwr. imr rourben, ti>r ttnirbet, PZwr. txnr rmtrben, tfyr wtirbet, 

fie miirben gefyen. fie win-ben gegangen fern. 

Imperative Mood. 

Plur. gefyen ttnr, let us go, be 
going, 
Sing, gefye (bu), go thou, do gefyet or gefyt (t», geben ©te, 

go, go ye (you), do go, 

gefye er (fie, es), let him (her, gefyert or gefyn fie, let them go. 
it) go ; • 

Infinitive Mood. Participles* 

Pres. gefyert, to go. Pres. gefyenb, going. 

Perf. gegangen fetn, to have Perf. gegangen, gone, 
gone. 

IV. IMPERSONAL VERBS.* 

§ 146. Impersonal verbs are conjugated like other verbs in 
all the moods and tenses, but only in the third person singular 
(§114). 

They want the passive voice, and generally employ the auxi- 
liary fyab en (§131). 

3? e g n c n, to rain. 
Pres. Ind. e£ regncr, it rains. Subj. eS tegne, it may rain. 

Imperf. Ind. t$ regnetc, it rained. Subj. c£ regnete, it might rain. 
Perf. Ind. eS fyat geregnet, it has Subj. e6 f)abe geregnet, it may have 

rained. rained. 

Pluperf. Ind. e£ Ijcttte geregnet, it Subj. e£ Wtte geregnet, it might 

had rained have rained. 

First Fut. e< wire tegncn, it will Subj. e£ nxtbe tegnen, it will rain. 

rain. 
Future Peif. e$ wtrb geregnet fya? Subj. e$ nxtbe geregnet fyafcen, it 

ben, it will have rained. will have rained. 

Conditionals. 
First Cond. e$ roiitbe tegnen, it Second Cond. e$ nriitfce gftegnet 

would rain. fyaben, it would have rained. 

Imperat. c£ tegne ! let it rain ! 

Pres. Infin. tegnen, to rain. p . ". « < tegnenb, raining, 

Perf. Infin. geregnet feaben, to hav3 ^ artlcl V ies ' } geregnet, rained. 

rained. 

* For exercises on the impersoBdl verbs see Lesson LVI. 



467 

§ 147. Some impersonal verbs have a reflexive form ; as, 

e£ fragt fief), it is a question ; H jfemt fid), it is becoming, &c. 
Others again are active, and are followed by an object in the 
accusative or dative, which may be either a substantive or a 
personal pronoun ; e. g. e3 feungert mid), fcid), tfen, I am, 
thou art, he is hungry ; e§ butjlet, friert, fcfyaufcect m t d), I am 
.thirsty, cold, shuddering ; e$ gelingt mir, I succeed ; e$ grauet 
1 f) m, he dreads. The accusative or dative 4s sometimes placed 
first, and then the e 3 is omitted ; as, m t d) fyungert, m i d) fciir* 
ftet, mir grauet, &c. 

V. COMPOUND VERBS. 

§ 148. 1st, Compound verbs are either separable or inse- 
parable. 

2d, In compounds of the first class, the constituent parts are 
separated, and the first component is placed after the verb, in 
all the simple forms of the verb which are susceptible of in- 
flection, viz : — in the imperative active, and in the present and 
imperfect, both indicative and subjunctive ; e. g. anfangen, to 
begin, pres. indie, id) fange an, I begin, imperf. id) ftng an, I 
begun, imper at. fange Su a n, begin thou. Moreover, in the per- 
fect participle, the augment g e is inserted between the separable 
particle and the verb ; e. g. an^ge^fangen, au^ge^gangen, ab^ge* 
veif't, from anfangen, to commence ; au^gefyen, to go out; ah* 
retfen, to set out on a journey. 

Remark. In subordinate propositions, however, which are in- 
troduced by a conjunction or conjunctive word, such as — a ( g, t) a, in? 
fc> e m, rt> e n n, w e i I, t) a 9, &c, or by a relative pronoun, this separa- 
tion of the component parts does not take place; e. g. a (5 e(>en 
t)ie Serine aufgtng (from cuifgefyen), just as the sun was rising; 
wenn er nut- 'a n t a m e (from anlommen) ! would that he might ar- 
rive ! 3 n t> c m id) am £>aufe oorbetging, as I was passing by the 
house. £)te Sbiirc, t*> c t d) c fid) a u f t i) a t, the door which opened. 

§ 149. In compounds of the second class, the constituent 
parts remain inseparably connected throughout the entire con- 
jugation of the verb, and the perfect participle does not assume 
the augment g e, if the first component is one of those insepa- 
rable particles mentioned above (§ 122) ; but if it is a noun or 
an adjective, the augment is prefixed to the entire compound; 
e. g. id) serltere, I lose, id) uevtor, I lost, part. uerforen, lost. 
But, friifyflmfen, to breakfast (compounded with the adjective 
frttf), early), perf. part, g e fritfyfrM t ; ved)tferttgeit, to justify (from 
red)t,just), perf. part, g c vcd)tfcrttgt, &c. 



468 

§ 150. Verbs compounded with substantives or adjectives 
are generally inseparable, when they so coalesce in sense as 
to form one complex conception ; but when their union is so 
slight, that they may be regarded as distinct words, they are se- 
parable ; e. g. ©tatt ffnbert, to take place ; fyod) acfyten, to 
esteem highly ; lo3 fptecfyen, to acquit ; perf. parts, ©tatt ge* 
funbert, fyocfy geacfytet, lo£ gefprocfyem 

§ 151. When the verb is compounded with a particle (i. 
e. with an adverb, a preposition, or a simple prefix), the accent 
determines to which of the two classes the compound belongs. 
If the particle is accented, the compound is separable ; but if 
the principal accent falls on the verb itself, the compound is in- 
separable. 

A list of inseparable prefixes has already been given above 
(§ 122. 2d). 

§ 152. Verbs compounded with the following adverbs and 
prepositions are separable : — a b, an, a u f> au^ b e i, b a r, 
e i tt, fort, t) e r, t) i rt, and the compounds of bet and fytn • — 
fyerab, fytnetn, &c. ; n a efy, n i e b e r, o b, t> o r, ro e &, $ u, 
3 u r ii (f ♦* 

EXAMPLES. 

anfommen, to arrive, part, cmcjefommen : 



aufftef)en, to rise, 
barbrtncjen, to offer, 
fottfafyten, to continue, 
rocgnxtfen, to throw away, 
^ubrtngcn/ to spend, 



cmfQeftcinben ; 

bargcftracfjt ; 

fortgefafjren ; 

3ugebtacl)t. 



§ 153. Compounds with b u r dj, I) in t e r, ii b e r, tt m, tt n* 
t e r, tt D tt and n) t e b e r are separable, when the accent rests 
on the particle ; they are inseparable, when it rests on the verb 
itself (§ 122. 5th). 

It is frequently the case, that in one and the same compound this 
difference of accentuation has given rise to different significations. 

EXAMPLES. 

butd) b t i n Cj e n (inseparable), to penetrate, part, turd) brungen; 
butd)bttngen (separable), to press through a crowd, part. 

butd) gebnmgen ; 
butd) 1 1 1 f c n (insep.), to travel over, part, buret) t e i f ' t ; 
butd) reifen (sep.), tc travel through, part, butd) gereif't ; 
iibet f ii r) re n (insep. ;, to convince, part, uber f ii r> r t ; 
ii er fufyten (sep.), to convey over, part, ti & e t gefurjrt ; 

* Compare also the table of separable and inseparable verbs on pages 52 
anu Do. 






469 

m.ter batten (insep.), to entertain, part, untcr fatten; 
u n t c r fatten (sep.), to hold under, part, u n t e-r gefjaften ; 
sell i n b e n (in sep.)/ to finish, part, roll e n & e t ; 
X? c Uaktien (sep.), to fill by pouring into, part. do(( gegeffen. 

Remark. Compounds with the preposition it>tt>er (which 
should be carefully distinguished from the adverb tr> t e fc e r) are 
always inseparable, the accent being invariably assumed by the verb 
itself; as, renter I c 3 e n, to confute, part, miter t e a, t ; nneetfteben, to 
withstand^ part, roi^ctftnnbcn. The adverbial prefix mi(j cannot be 
reduced to any definite rule, as the accent does not in all instances 
decide whether it is separable or inseparable. 

§ 154. With respect to the infinitive of compound verbs, 
it is to be remarked, that the particle gu (§ 120) is placed be- 
fore it, if the verb is inseparable; if separable, it is inserted be- 
tween the two components, and constitutes one word with 
them; e.g. a u entroetfyen, to desecrate; gu serfallen, to fall 
into pieces ; but, art^u^fancten, to begin ; tt>ec^$ustt>erfen> to 
throw away ; guriidf^iistretben, to drive back, &c. 

§ 155. Compounds generally follow the conjugation of 
their simple verbs. The following is a specimen of the simple 
forms of a separable compound : — 

31 b r e t f e n , to set out on a journey. 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 
Singular. ^ Singular. 

id) re'tfe ab, t>u retfeft ab, er retfet id) reife <*b, uu reifept ab, er retfet 
(retpt) cuV, al>; 

Plural. Plural. 

ttnr retfen ah tfyr retfet (retf't) ah, rotr retfen ab, tl)r rcifct ab, fie retfen 
fie retfen ab al\ 

Imperfect. 
Singular. Singular. 

Ur, retfte ab,fc>u retf'teft ab,er retf'te id) rctfete ob, t>u retfeteft ab, er rcU 
ab ; fete ab ; 

Plural. Plural. 

ttrir retf'ten flb, ifyr rctftet ab, fte ttrir retferen ab, it)r retfetet ab, fit 
reif'tcn ab. retfeten ab. 

Imperative. 

Singular. Plural. 

reife (tm) ab, rctfe er ab ; retfen ttnr ab, retfet (retf't) tfjr ab, 

retfen fte ab. 



470 

Infinitives. Participles. 

Pres. abretfen or abprctfen. Pres. Part, abretfenb. 

PerfV at>a,etetf't fan/ Perf. Part, abgeretf't. 

SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

I. AGREEMENT. 

§ 156. The verb agrees with its subject nominative in 
number and person. In German the subject cannot be 
. omitted as in the Classical languages, in which the termina- 
tion of the verb is sufficient to indicate the difference of per- 
son and number ; except in the second person of the impera- 
tive singular, when bit, like the English thou, is expressed only 
for the sake of emphasis ; e. g. i d) lefe, I read ; b u rebeft, 
thou speakest ; ber ©turm fyat auScjetobt, the storm has ceased 
to rage ; bte Sfrtaben fptelen, the boys are playing. But, im- 
per at. r e b e ! lefe! read, speak (thou) ! © pt e I e , ■ 5?trtb, ctuf 
ber TOutter ©d)0D$ ! Play, my child, on thy mother's lap ! 
(Schiller.) 

Exception 1. When several verbs constitute a compound predi- 
cate to one subject, it is only expressed with the first. £)u arbetteft 
Met, r i eft t eft after tvemg auS, thou labourest much, but aceomplish- 
est little ; unt) er Wrt'S nut fhmunem £arme, r e i 9 t fid) bluteno (o$, 
prejn fie befttg in bte 2Crme, f-d) rp t n g t ftcb auf fetn SHofj ((Scfyitlet), 
and with mute grief he hears it, tears himself bleeding away, ea- 
gerly folds her to his breast, springs upon his steed. 

Excep. 2. The neuter personal pronoun e 8 and the demonstra- 
tives t> t e 6 and t>a# are followed by a verb in the plural, when 
the substantive after the verb which they represent is plural ; bteg 
ft n b metne ^Btiiber, these are my brothers ; c$ ft n t> cr)rttd)e banner, 
they are honest men. 

Excep. 3. In reciting the multiplication table, the Germans use 
the singular where the plural would seem proper ; pier mat funf i ft 
jtvan^ta,, four times five are twenty, &c. 

Excep. 4. When the subject of a verb is a pronoun of .the first 
or second person, it is sometimes omitted by poetical license; as, 
&abe nun, ad) ! ^biicfepbie, 3nrtfterei unb sjftcbtctn burdjaug fmbtrt, 
I have now, alas ! completely mastered philosophy, the jurist's craft, 
and medicine (Goethe's Faust). 

§ 157. When the verb refers to several subjects equally 
related to it, it must be put in the plural ; as, Dtfacfyt imb lag; 
ftrttten mtt etnanber urn ben QSorgug, night and day were 
contending with each other for the preference. When, how- 
ever, the subjects are connected by disjunctive conjunctions, 
or when they are regarded as one complex notion, the verb is 



471 

in the singular; e. g. webet ber Setter nocf) fetn ©ofyrt t ft ba 
geroefen, neither the father nor his son has been here ; 2)er* 
rati) iinb 2lrgrool)n { a u f cf) t tn alien (Scfen, treason and suspi- 
cion (combined) lurch at every corner; fyter t ft ^pfeffer unb 
2>al$, here is pepper and salt. 

§ 158. After several subjects of different persons, the verb 
in the plural agrees with the first person in preference to the 
second, and with the second in preference to the third ; e. g. id) 
unb Su (row) ftnb SBriiber, I and thou are brothers ; £u unb 
ber 93ater Qfyr) fetb etnanber dfynltct), you and your father 
resemble each other. Sometimes, however, the verb agrees 
with the nearest nominative ; id) barf reben, ntcrjt £)it, / am per- 
mitted to speak, not thou. 

II, TENSES. 

§ 159. It will be perceived from the paradigms, that the 
German verb has no separate forms to express the distinctions 
observed in English between I" praise, and I am praising, do 
praise, I praised, and I ivas praising, did praise, &c, all of 
which are implied in the one form td) lobe, id) lobte (see page 
279). 

§ 160. In German, as in English, the present is often em- 
ployed instead of the imperfect, to give greater animation to 
historical narration (see page 342). 

§ 161. The present is used in place of the future, espe- 
cially if the event is regarded as certain ; as, morgen fommt 
er ttneber, to-morrow he will come again ; fimfttcje JBocfye ret* 
fe id) nad) Sortbon, next week I am going to London ; serlag 
X)id) brauf, id) laffe fecfytenb fyter ba£ 2eben, ober fit tyre fte 
au§> ^ptlfen, depend upon it, I shall either lighting lose my life 
here, or lead them out of Pilsen (Schiller). (See page 342). 

§ 162. So also, on the other hand, the first future is used 
instead of the present, and the future perfect instead of the 
perfect, to give an air of probability to the expression; e.g. 
er rotrb roofyl md)t'&u £)aufe fetn, he is not likely to be at 
home, er rotrb au&gecjawjen f e t n, he has in all probability 
gone out (literally, he will have gone out) ; ©u nnrfr X)id) §& 
ixxt fyaben, you must have made (have probably made) a mis- 
take. 

§ 163. The imperfect, the perfect, and the pluperfect cor- 
respond on the whole to the tenses of the same name in Eng- 



472 

lish, with this exception, that when simply a division of time, 
and not another event is referred to, the Germans sometimes 
employ the perfect, when the English idiom requires the im- 
perfect ; e.g. gejlern ft n b 3bre 33ud)er angefemmen, yes- 
terday you^ books arrived ; er t ft legte 28cd)e g efto r b en, he 
died last week. On the meaning and use of these tenses, and 
on the omission of the auxiliary, see pages 343, 344, and Les- 
son LVII. 

§ 164. , As to the moods of the German verb, the Indica- 
tive, the Subjunctive, as well as the Conditionals and the Im- 
perative, have been treated at large and illustrated with numer- 
ous examples in the former part of the book, so that a further 
analysis of them in this place would be superfluous. On the 
Subjunctive and Conditionals see Lessons XC. and XCL, and 
on the Imperative, page 305. 

Ill, THE INFINITIVE. 

§ 165. Besides serving to form the compound tenses of 
the verb (§ 134), the infinitive mood is used in various other 
relations, either with or without the preposition 31U 

§ 166. All infinitives may be regarded as abstract verbal 
substantives of the neuter gender, and are frequently employed 
as such in every case, generally in connection with the . arti- 
cle ; e. g. ba£ ©t§en tjt tfym fd)ab(td), sitting is injurious to 
him ; td) bm b eS © d) r e t b e n 3 miibe, I am tired of writing ; 
I urn 9? e t f e n btft T)u m'cfyt cjefdn'cft, you are not fit for travel- 
ling. 

§ 167. The infinitive is employed without $u in the follow- 
ing instances : — 

1st, When it stands as the subject of a" proposition ; as, 
Qthen tfl: fettger ate n e b m e n, it is more blessed to give 
than to receive ; fterben tfl: ntd)t£, aber lebert tmb mcf)t feben, 
ba$ tfl: em Unglitcf (Scatter), to die is nothing, but to live and 
not to see, that is a wretched lot indeed. 

2d, In connection with the auxiliary verbs of mood — b it r * 
fen, fonnen, la f fen, m 6 g en, mitf fen, fo lie it, root* 
I en (§ 115. 2d), and in particular expressions, also with baben 
and tbun; e. g. er let fit em £>att3 bauen, he orders, a 
house to be built ; td) barf f p t e i e n, I am permitted to play ; 
Sit f d 1 1 fl: mcfyt ft e b I en, thou shalt not steal ; lag fie gebert, 
let them go ; £)u t> a ft gut r eb en, it is easy for you to speak 
fte tbut x\id)t3> ate roetnett, she does nothing but weep. 



473 

Remark. When the auxiliary faff tit, in the sense of to order, 
is followed by an infinitive, the latter, though active in German, 
must generally be rendered by the passive in English; as, cr lafM 
fin 2$ud) z t n b t n b c n, he orders a book to be bound, &c. 

3d, In connection with the verbs b) e t £ e ft to order ; I) e 1 e n 
and n enne ft to call ; f) e I f e n, to help ; I e $ r e ft to teach ; 
Um C ft to learn, and m a d) e ft to make ; e. g. bjetg tl)n cje* 
Jjen ! tell him to go ! 

4th, When joined to certain verbs denoting an exercise of 
the senses ; as, fob en, to see; J) or en, to hear; fit 1)1 en, 
to feel ; ft n ben, to find; as, id) fefye ttm fommeft lefen, $etd)* 
nen, I see him coming, reading, drawing, &c. ; id) ijovc tfyn 
fin^en, fpceleri, I bear him singing, playing; id) fanb tl)n fcfylafeft 
(teett, I found him sleeping, sitting. In this connection the in- 
finitive has the signification of the present participle. 

5th, The infinitive is employed without 3 a in connection with 
the following verbs: — b let ben, to remain; gel) en, to go; 
f a t) r e it, to ride in a carriage ; r et t e n, to ride on horseback ; 
e. g. bletben Etc figen, keep your seat ; er gefyt betteln, he goes 
a begging ; fie fabren fpasteren, they take an airing, a ride in 
a carriage ; er rettet fpajteren, he takes a ride on horseback. 

§ 168. By an idiom, peculiar to the German, the auxiliary 
verbs of mood — bitrfen, fonnen, mocjen, raiiffen, (often, roctfen, 
lajjen, and also the verbs bet£en, fjelfen, tjoren, fewest) lernen, 
lefyren, assume the form of the infinitive, instead of the perfect 
'participle, when they stand in connection with another infini- 
tive ; e. g. er fyat )id) nid)t riifyren bitrfen (instead of geburft), 
he has not been permitted to stir ; £)u ^dttejl fcmmen f o 1 1 en 
(instead of gefottt), you ought to have come ; 3fyr fyabt bte getnbe 
Srtglanb'S fennen tern en, ye have learnt to know the enemies 
of England. It is now customary, however, regularly to employ 
the participle of the verbs tern en and (efyren instead of the in- 
finitive ; as, er fyat tint fennen 9 e I e r n t, he has become ac- 
quainted with him; id) fyabe tint jeicfynen getefyrt, I have 
taught him drawing. 

THE INFINITIVE WITH JU. 

§ 169. The infinitive with ju is sometimes employed in- 
stead of the simple infinitive, as the subject of a proposition, 
especially wiien in an inverted proposition it comes after its 
predicate; e. g. e3 ge^temt bem -StRanne, tfyatiQ in fetft it 
behoves man to be diligent, &c. 



474 

§ 170. When the infinitive with gu is not the subject of a 
proposition, it is equivalent to a verbal substantive in an 
oblique case, corresponding either to the Latin supine (ama- 
turn, amatu), or to the gerund (amandi — do — dum — do). It is 
thus used :— 

1st, After substantives , especially such as signify an inclina- 
tion or affection of the mind, opportunity, time, S$c. ; as, yiti* 
gung, inclination ; Snifcfylug, resolution ; ©tfer, zeal ; 5)cut{), 
courage ; %u)\ desire ; 3ett, time ; ©elegenbett, opportunity ; 
-erfcatSujt gu ret fen, gu effen, &c, he has a mind to 
travel, to eat, or he is desirous of travelling, of eating, &c. ; e£ 
tft 3ett j u a r b e 1 1 e n, g u f d) ( a f e n, it is time to work, to 
sleep. 

2d, After adjectives — signifying possibility, duty, necessity, 
easiness, difficulty, and the like ; as, mogltd), immogttd), tter* 
pfltd)tet, genotfngr, (etd)t, fcfyrcer, fyart, &c. £)te S3ttrbe tjT fcfyroer 
gu tragen, the burden is hard to be borne ; e3 tft mtr wtmegltd) 
gu Fommen, it is impossible for me to come, &c. 

3d, After verbs, generally as the object to which an activity, 
a desire, or emotion of the mind implied by them, is directed ; 
e. g. fid) freuen, to rejoice ; fid) bemufyert, to strive ; fyoffen, to 
hope ; gebenfen, to intend ; nbtfytgen, gttnngen, to necessitate, 
compel; sergepn, to forget ; serbteten, to forbid, &c. ; e3 freut 
mtd), ©te gu fefyen, I am glad to see you ; er bemiifyte fid), tfyn 
etngufyokn, he strove to overtake him ; id) ratfye Dir, gu fcfywet* 
gen, I advise you to be silent. 

§ 171. 4th, After many verbs which serve to designate the 
time or mode of an action; as, cmfangen, to begin ; auffybren, 
to cease ; fottfafyren, to continue ; etten, to hasten ; pflegeu, to 
be wont ; sermogen, to be able ; braucfyen, to need ; fd)emen,to 
appear; rotfien, to know; e. g. er fdngt an gu fingen, gu tangen, 
he begins to sing, to dance ; er sermag ntcfyt gu fprecfyen, he is 
not able to speak ; £)u fcfyetnfr e3 ntd)t gu ttnffen, you appear not 
to know it, &c. 

5th, The infinitive with gu is sometimes employed as the 
predicate of a proposition in connection with the copula f e t n, 
to express the possibility or necessity of an action. The infin- 
itive, in this connection, though active, has generally a passive 
signification ; as, e§ tft feme $eit gu oerlteren, there is no time 
to be lost ; feitt ©ternbtlb til git fefyen, no star is to be seen; er 
xft mrgenb£- cmgutreffen, he is nowhere to be found. It occurs 
also in the same signification with fyctben ; er t)at fyter mdjtS gtt 
fagen, he has nothing to say here ; voa$ fyafl: Du gu tl)im ? what 



475 

have you to do ? It is Iris construction of the infinitive, which 
has given rise to the fumre participle (§ 121. 3d). 

6th, The infinitive with gu serves sometimes to denote 
the purpose or design of an action or state expressed by a 
previous verb, in which case the particle urn usually is pre- 
fixed to add emphasis to the expression ; e. g. id) f cmme, U m 
Sir SBitcfyer git brirtcjen, I come for the purpose of bringing you 
books ; er gefyt tn bte ©tabt, n m mtt etnem $vettrtbe jufam* 
men $u f cmmert, he goes into town in order to meet a friend. 

IV. PARTICIPLES. 

§ 172. Participles are declined like adjectives, and follow 
the same rules of inflection. ©er Itebenbe 23ater, the 
affectionate father ; etrt geltebteS ^mb, a beloved child. So 
also substantively : — ber ©enefene, one who has recovered from 
sickness ; bte ©terbertbe, the dying woman ; ba£ Q3er(artc$te, 
that which was wished for, &c. 

§ 173. The present and perfect participles are frequently 
used as adverbs of manner ; e. g. ©te fprecfyert fl t e $ e n b, 
you speak fluently ; errotfyenb folgt er tfyren ©puren, 
blushing he follows her steps. This is especially the case 
with perfect participles, in connection with the verb fonimen, 
to come ; fyeutenb f ommt ber ©turm g e fl o g e rt, ber bte glam* 
me braufenb fud)t (©cfytffer)., howling the blast comes flying, 
and roaring seeks the flame ; ev fommf cjetcttifen, gerttten, he 
; comes running, riding, &c. 

§ 174, Participles, like adjectives, serve either to form 

! the predicate of a proposition, or they are joined to a noun in 

an attributive sense .(§ 52); e. g. ber Wlann tft gelefyrt, 

, the man is learned, and ber g e I e fy r t e ?Cftarut, the learned 

j man ; bte $lad)t tjt tterfloffert, the night is past, and bte 

i&etfloffene 9cad)t, the past night; ba§ 2Ba'flfer tfl ft e^ 

b e n b, the water is boiling, and ba$ ft e b e n b e 2Ba(fer, the boil- 

\ ing water ; bte Kcmbfcfyaft tjt e n 1 3 ii df e n b, the landscape is 

J charming, and bte etttgurfenbe 2anbfc^aft, the charming 

landscape. 

The present participle, however, is not generally used in the 

predicative sense, unless it has entirely assumed the signification 

- of an adjective ; thus we cannot say :-— id) tunrufenb,ttebent>, fehcnb, 

!I am calling, loving, seeing; but : — -id) rttfc, Hebe, fef)i\ (§ 159 ) 
§ 175. In connection with another verb, the present par- 
' ticiple, either alone or qualified by other words, frequently 



476 

stands as the abridged form of a subordinate proposition, serv 
ing to express the lime, manner, cause, or condition of the ap 
tion denoted by the verb ; as, bte§ bet mtr t> e n f c n t>, faltcf td) 
etn (time), revolving these things with myself, I fell asleep, in- 
stead of, inbem id) bte^ bet mtr felbfl M>te, &c., whilst , I . waji. 
revolving, &c. ; tym bte §anbe b r it c? c n t>, nai)m er Hbfcjteb 
(manner), shaking his hands he took leave ; fetn «bbllb buU 
bet fie, alletn ba% f orperlofe 2Bort » e r e f> r e n H i. e. we 1 1- ftc 
attcin ba^ forperlofe ffiort aere&rt (cause) Outlier), she tole- 
rates no image, adoring the incorporeal word alone. . 

This construction, however, is not as extensive in German 
as in English, and entirely inadmissible, when the subject ot 
the participle is different from that of the verb, or when in 
English we employ the compound participle. Thus we cannot 
say, the sun being risen, I set out on my journey, but when the 
sun had arisen, &c, a U bte ©onne aufeegangen war, retf te t<*> 
ab ; after having breakfasted, he read his paper, nad)bem ft 
gefriibftiicft batte (after he had breakfasted), lad er fetne &xU 
fdjrtft (see page 279). 

§ 176. In certain expressions only, both the present and 
the perfect participle are used absolutely in the accusative 
case ; e. g. bad 93 lid) f ojler, ben © t n b a n b a b 9 e r e d) n e $ 
$met Abater, the book costs two crowns, exclusive of the bind- 
ing ; fie feiifoet fcinauS tn bte finjtere Dcad)t, bad 3( u 9 e » m 
SBetnengetriibet (©djtller), she sighs out into the murk] 
night, her eyes bedimmed by the gushing tears ; er ttat tn ba$ 
3tmmer, ben $ut auf bem topfe, ben ©tocf tn ber $anb, he en- 
tered the room, with the hat on his head, and cane in his hand. 
In this last example the participle fyabenb, having, may be sup- 
plied, to link the expression to the subject of the proposition. 

§ 177. The perfect participle, when formed from transitive 
verbs, has always a passive signification, and is therefore used ad- 
jectively only by way of exception. When formed from reflexive 
or impersonal verbs,, it is employed neither in an attributive nor in 
a predicative sense, but serves simply to form the compound ten- 
ses ; as, id) babe mid) 9 c f r e u X, 9 e a r 9 c r t, g c f d) m t, I have 
Tejoiced, been vexed, ashamed; e$ fat get eg net, ge fdjnct t, it 
has rained, snowed ; but not, ber qefreute, qefcbqmte SOlcmn; nor, t>er 
SRcmn ift .qefreut, gefdbtfmt, &c. Of intransitive verbs those only, 
wnich take the auxiliary f e i n, may be used in the attributive re- 
lation, as well as in the predicative; e. g. t)a£ £au$ t(i oOgc* 
brannt, the house is burnt down, and t>a£ abqebranntc. &aut>, 
the house which has burnt down ; t>cr ftreunt) i ft angefomm c n, 
the friend has arrived, and t) er Qngcfommcnc grcunfc, the friend 



477 

who has arrived. Some participles have assumed the signification 
of adjectives, and may even be compared. (See § 63. 1st.) 

Note, The government of verbs is treated of at the close of the 
table of irregular verbs below. 



ADVERBS. 

§ 178. An Adverb is a word which limits the 
meaning of verbs, of adjectives, and of other adverbs. 
Adverbs correspond to the questions where ? when ? 
how ? to what degree ? &c. 

EXAMPLES. 

■ SSn o ifl ba$ spferb ? Where is the horse ? 

1 (Sr tft n t r g c n t) g $u ftnbcn. He is nowhere to be found. 

■Rpmtwfl (Sic fj c r e t n ! Walk in ! 

I SB a n n ift ct artgcfrmmen ? When did he arrive 1 

J |Sj if! 9 e ft c r n gcftetben. He died yesterday. 

S$et &nabc fd)rcibt f d) o n, akr cr The boy writes beautifully, but 
lief't f d) ( e d) t. reads -poorly. 

j £)cr &>attr ift fef)t ktuifct. The father is uery sad. 

j iDte £Rofc ift au$nefymenb The rose is exceedingly beauti- 
fd)cn. ful. 

§ J 79. With respect to their signification, adverbs 
may be divided into six classes : — 

1 st, Adverbs of Place. These may either designate rest in a 
place, in answer to the question where ? as, iiberaft, aftentfyak 
ben, every where ; trgenbroo, any where ; mrgenb£, nowhere ; 
fyter, ba, tort, here, there ; rco, where ; allien, without ; tnneri, 
within ; obert, above ; imtert, below ; fyttttert, behind ; sow, be- 
fore ; red)t£, oh the right hand ; (trtf£, on the left hand ; and 
the compounds : brobett (bar*cbert), there above ; bruntert (bar* 
itntert), below ; brau^en, out of doors ; fytemebeny here below ; 
bteffett6, on this side ; jenfett£, on that side ; — or, motion or 
1 direction towards a place, in answer to the question whither ? 
bafyer, along ; fyterfyer, hither ; babtrt, thither ; fyerab, down 
{towards the speaker) ; fytrtab, down {away from the speaker) ; 
bcrgauf, uphill; berg ab, down hill; sorrodrtS, forward; ritcf* 
tbdrt^, backwards ; fytmmelrodrt^, toward heaven, &c. 

2d, Adverbs of Time. These denote either a point or pe* 



478 

riod of time, in answer to the questions when ? how long 
since? by what time ? '-as, bann, then; rocmrt, when; fcamal3/ 
at that time ; mm, jeijt, now ; etttjr, once ; nod), still ; fcfyen, 
berettS, already; »ormal$, fonft, heretofore, formerly; fcafo, 
soon ; funfttg, hereafter ; neultd), jiingft, recently ; anfcmg§, at 
first ; bed 2Rorgen3, bed SlbenbS, in the morning, in the eve* 
ning; gejretn, yesterday; fyeute, to-day; morgen, to-morrow; 
Je, jemald, ever ; me, never, &c. ;— or a duration of time ; as,' 
offejett, at all times ; tmtner, ftetS, always ; lange, long. 

3d, Adverbs of Modality r , which are either affirmative, nega- 
tive, potential, optative, interrogative, or imperative ; as, ja, yes; 
bod), however; fretltd), srcar, though, however ; fiirroabr, roafyr* 
ltd), wivflid), verily, truly, actually, in very deed; ficfyerltd}, 
surely ; — nettt, no ; ntd)t, not ; f etne§roeg§, by no ' means ; — 
mettetd)t, perhaps ; roafyrfcfyetnUd), probably; etwd, tt>ofy(, per- 
haps, indeed; — menu bod), ba£ bod), would that ;— ob, if; etr 
rca, wofyt, perhaps, perchance ; nun, now; benn, then; — bitrd). 
au$, allerbtngS, fd)led)terbtng§, by all means, absolutely, &c. 

4th, Adverbs of Quantity, derived from numerals, and an- 
swering to the questions how much ? how many ? e. g. etroa§, 
somewhat ; gan$, entirely ; genua,, sufficiently ; tnel, much ; 
roemg, little ; tfyetfe, partly ; metjrend, .metftentfyetlS, mostly, for 
the most part; erflend, firstly; ^roettenS, secondly, &c. ; ferner, 
further, moreover; (extend, lastly; ^etmal, twice, &c. ; etn* 
fad), simple ; melfad), many fold, &c. (§ 80.) 

5th, Adverbs of Quality or Manner, which answer to the 
question how? as, glttcfltd), fortunately; fd)i>n, beautifully; 
fd)(ed)t, badly; fletgtg, diligently, &c. ; fo, so, thus; rote, as, 
how; eben fo, just so, &c. Many of this class are originally 
adjectives or participles. 

6th, Adverbs of Intensity ; as, fefyt, very ; gar, quite ; fo* 
gar, even ; augerfr, fyod)ft, ungemetn, extremely, highly, uncom- 
monly; gansttd), solttg, entirely, fully; betnafye, fajr, almost, 
nearly; nut, only; faum, scarcely; t)6d)ften3, at the most; 
roentgjrenS, at least ; wetr, bet roettem, by far, &c. 

§ 180. OBSERVATIONS ON THE ADVERBS. 

Obs. 1. Beginners should carefully mark the distinction be- 
tween the adverbs f) i n and fy e t, for which there are no correspond- 
ing terms in English ; f) t n denotes motion away from, and f) e r 
approximation towards the person speaking. These words have 
given rise to a number of compounds, all of which participate in 
thie original signification. Examples : — ' 



a 



i 



479 



Away from, 


towards 


the speaker. 


binab, 


tyvab, 


down ; 


btnauf, 


rjerauf, 


up ; 


bin an?, 


berau*, 


out; 


6tnehi> 


tyttin, 


in; 


fytnubct, 


fyettfber, 


across. 



So also — b cti) i n, thither, to that place ; b a ■ r) e x, thence, from that 
piace * b e r t b t n, to yonder place ; bottler, from yonder place ; 
to e t) t n, whither ; ro r) e r, whence, &e. 

Obs. 2. To adverbs of intensity may be added the compound 
proportionals \ c — j e, or \ e — b e ft o, or je — u m f o / the — the ; as, 
j e groger, b e ft o beffet, the greater, the better ; { e (anger et (ebt, u m f o 
fd)(cd)tcr rotrb tt, the longer he lives, the worse he becomes. 

Obs. 3. The adverb of place, b a, is derived from the demonstra- 
tive pronoun b e r, and is an abbreviated expression for cm btcfcm Drte, 
in this place. So the adverb roc, the correlative of ba, is derived 
from the relative pronoun roer, and stands instead of an roekbem 
Drte, in which place. Both ba and rue, therefore, are termed pro- 
nominal adverbs. As adverbs of place they are combined with b t n 
and b e 1, and form the compounds babtn, bafjer, ruobtn, roober. 

Obs. 4. Besides serving- as adverbs of place, ba (bar), axid roo 
(roer), are often compounded with prepositions, to supply the place 
of the dative and accusative neuter of the demonstrative b c r, and 
of the relative or interrogative wet, ro e t d) c r . Thus the Ger- 
mans regularly say : — 



instead 



babel, therewith, 
roebei, wherewith, 

.fcanvit, thereby, — 

roouut, whereby, — 

baburd)/ through, by it, — 
rocburd), through, by which, — 

ba fit r, for that, * — 

roefut, for which, — 

baran, thereon, — 

roeran, whereon, — 

baton, thereof, — 

roctcn, whereof, — 
ba$u, thereto, 

rc>e$u, whereto, — 



of bet bem ; 
bet roekbem ; 
nut bem ; 
mtt roetcbem $ 
burd) ba$ ; 
burd) roekbeS ; 
fur ba* ; 
fur roekfyeS ; 
an bem ; 
an roekfyem ; 
t)on bem ; 
»on roelcfyem ; 
$u bem ; 
$u roekr/em. 



Obs. 5. Some adverbs are compared like adjectives. 
Their mode of comparison has already been explained (§ 68). 

Obs. 6. On the position which the negative n i d) t and 
adverbs generally are to occupy in sentences, see Lesson C. 



48G 



PREPOSITIONS. 

§ 181. A preposition is a word which is joined to 
nouns or pronouns, to point out their relation to some 
other word in the sentence. 

§ 182. The following is a list of the German pre- 
positions : — 



an, on, by, near ; . 

*}i„stead; 

auf, on, upon ; 

au$, out, out of; 

aujiet, ) without, on the 

aufkrrjatb, $ outside ; 

ftet, near, with, by ; 

tunnen, within ; 

fctefiett, on this side ; 

buret), through ; 

entgegen, over against ; 

fur, for, in favour of; 

n! n et1/ C Awards, against ; 

rjalben, £>on account of; 

Winter, behind ; 
in, in, into ; 

ienfrit, beyond ; 
Craft, by virtue of; 
langS, along ; 
taut, according to ; 
nut, with ; 

S e &itJ b y meM8of; 

nod)/ after ; 



,\ 



next to ; 



ttad)JT, 

guna'cfyft 
neben, beside ; 
nebft, together with ; 
o&erfyatb, above ; 

fammt, together with \ 
feit, since, from ; 
treg, in spite of; 
iibcr, ") 

urn, about, round ; 

urn — rmtten, for the sake of ; 

uno/ad)tet, notwithstanding ; 



* above, over ; 



t I ntcrf ! nK> / } bel s , ? d W J° f n ; thel0We, 
' > near, not far from ; 



unwett 

unfern, 

ttermege, by virtue of; 

t)0n, from, by, of; 

t)0r, before ; 

tt>af)tenfc>, during ; 

ttK'gen, on account of; 

ttufcet, against ; 

$u, to ; 

gufofqc, in consequence of ; 

guttubet, against ; 

gwufdjen, between, betwixt. 



§ 183. Prepositions require the substantives, with which 
they are connected, to be put either in the Genitive, the Dative, 
or the Accusative. Some few require the dative in one signi- 
fication, and the accusative in another. 

I. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE. 

S 184. The prepositions which govern the genitive case, 
are:— anflatt or ftatt, fyalbert or fyalber, augerfyalb, tmter&alb, 



481 

eberMlv urrterMb, feteffeit, jenfett, fraft, taut, mtttelft or »tt* 
mittelfr, imcjeacfytet, unrcett or unfern, sermoge, roabrenfc, wecjett/ 
urn — rrntten, and ldng$, gufolge, tre§ (see § 188)/ 

EXAMPLBB. 

2f n ft a 1 1 feineg SBatefg, instead of his father; ber GSf)re Fja ( 6e n # 
for the sake of honour ; a u 9 c r I) a I ber (gtatt, without the city ; 
jcnfeft t»cs ©rabe*, beyond the grave; f raft mctneg 2Cmtc£, by 
virtue of my office; taut beg SBriefeS, according to the letter; uns 
w i i t tv£ &ird)hefs, not far from the church-yard ; w a f) r en b beg 
&rieges, during the war ; u m t)C5 Jncbcn* rvU( e n, for the sake of 
peace ; t r o § [emer Sttadjt, in spite of his power. 

II. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE DATIVE ONLY. 

§ 185. Prepositions which govern the dative case alone, 
are : — zi\$>, auger, bet, btnnen, entcjegen, cjecjeniiber, gemdg, mtt, 
nad}, ndcfyjr, gnndd)fr, nebft, fammt, fett, sort, su, sutmber, and ob, 
when it is equivalent to ro e g e n, on account of. 

EXAMPLES. 

(5r femmt ctuS ber £trd)e, he comes from church; aupcr 3)it 
roaren 2Ule ba, all were present except you ; cr roefynt b e i m SSacfct, 
he lives with the baker; btnnen (always refers to time) greet 
SS>ocberi, within two weeks; er cjerjt ibm cntcjcgcn, he goes to 
meet him ; m.it metner gutter, with my mother ; nad) tern £aufe, 
to the house ; n e b ft feinem grcunbe, together with his friend ; f e it * 
bem Sage, since that day ; $ u ber D.uelie, to the spring. 

III. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 

§ 186. " The following prepositions require the accusative 
only : — fcurd), fur, gecjen, ctwe or fenber, urn, and ttuberv 

EXAMPLES. 

<5r retf't b u r d) $ gon$e Sanb, he travels through the entire 
country; turd) tfm bin id) gtudltd), by him I am made happy; et 
bclcbnt mid) fur metne 93tttf)e, he rewards me /or my trouble ; ber 
QSater fercjt f iir feme JUnbcr, the father provides for his children; 
solemn f tir 93?cmn, man by man; id) bctfte ba$ fur <Sd)metd)elet, I re- 
gard this as flattery ; Cj e cj e n ben Strom, against the stream ; g e- 
gen ctnanber, towards each other; obne 3n?etfe(, without doubt; 
fonber ®(etd)en, without an equal; urn ein Whx, at one o'clock; 
um ben .ftomg, about the king; id) raufte c$ urn jroolf Jtreu$cr, I 
bought it for twelve kreuzers ; rot bet feinen greunb, against hi§ 
friend. 

21 



482 



IV, PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING BOTH THE DATIVE AND 
ACCUSATIVE. 

§ 187. The following prepositions are sometimes connect- 
ed with the dative, and sometimes with the accusative :— 
an, auf, Winter, in, neben, liber, unter, sor, and $«nfcf)en. 

With respect to all the prepositions of this class it is to be ob- 
served, that when they imply rest or motion in a place, they are 
followed by the dative, in answer to the question where ? bat when 
they imply a tendency or motion from one place to another, they 
are followed by the accusative, in answer to the question whither? 

EXAMPLES. 

(£t morjnt an bem Sffleete, he lives near the sea ; et gefjt a n b a $ 
ilfer / he goes towards the shore ; er fcfetetbt a n fetnen gteunb, he 
writes to his friend ; a n bet ©range, at the frontiers ; ct atbettet 
auf bem Jelbe, he labours in the field ; a u f bet <Sd)u(e, at school ; 
ct jtefyt auf t>at £anb, he moves into the country ; a u f ben 2Cbenb, 
for the evening ; f) inter bem £aufe, behind the house; et fegt fid) 
r) t n t e t ben Dfen, he takes his seat behind the stove ; et tft i n t>cx 
&abt, he is in the city; id) gcfye in bie @tabt, I am going into the 
city; tnt 3otne, in anger; in bie £anb nefymen, to take into the 
hand; et jlefyt neben nut, he is standing by my side; id) fegte 
mtch neben tf)n, I seated myself by his side ; ttb e t ben (Stetnen, 
above the stars ; u b e t ben glug gefycn, to go across the river ; u n* 
tet ftetem £tmme(, under the open sky; untet fetnen 23ttibetn, 
among his brothers ; t) o r ifym, before him ; et ftellt fid) Dot ten 
©piegel, he takes his position before the looking-glass ; $ n> t f d) e tt 
nut unb ifym, between me and him, &c. 

§ 188. Of those prepositions which govern the genitive 
(§ 184), the following three may also be connected with the 
dative :— I d n cj '3 ; as, (d'na,3 be§ UferS, or IdttgS bem Ufer, along 
the shore ; — $ u f o I g e^ which with the genitive precedes, and 
with the dative follows the noun ; as, gufolge beS 23ertd)te& or 
bem 93ettd)te gufolge, according to the report ; — and t r § ; as, 
ttog fetnem fyerben ©cfyteffate, in spite of his hard fate ; trog bet 
©efafyr, in spite of the danger. 

§ 189. When prepositions precede the definite article, thej 
often coalesce with it into one word, as, t m, for in bem, &c I 
list of these contractions has been given above (§ 10} 



483 

CONJUNCTIONS 

§ 1 90. A conjunction is a word by which two simple 
sentences are united into one compound sentence* 

§ 191. Conjunctions have been variously classified accords 
ing to their different significations. They are : — 

1st, Copulative; wtb, and ; and), also ; foroefyl a IS, as well 
as ; ^ubem, moreover ; augerbem, besides ; roeber — nod), nei- 
ther — nor ; nidjt nur or mdjt attetn — fonbew aud), not only — 
but also ; fewer, furthermore ; gugletcf), at the same time. 

2d, Disjunctive ; entroeber — ober, either — or; e. g. ent* 
roeber grog ober fletn, either large or small. 

3d, Adversative ; aber, attetn, but ; fonbew (used only 
after a negative), but ; bod), jebod), yet ; bemiod), nevertheless ; 
fonft else ; melmefyr, rather ; fytngegen, on the contrary ; nid)t 
foroofyl — al£ tnelmefyr, not so much — as rather. 

4th, Conditional; menu, fo, roo, roe few, if; falB or im 
$att, in case ; voo md)t, if not ; e.g. wenn id) nur etn SOttttel 
roiigte, ten Scfyabert roteber $ut ju maefyen! if I only knew some 
means of repairing the damage ! In German the conjunction 
roenn is often omitted, and then the verb (if the tense is simple) 
or the auxiliary (if the tense is compound) takes the place of 
the conjunction ; ro d r e ft ©u fyier geroefen, metn 33wber rodre 
tiidjt geftcrben, for roenn ©u fyter cjeroefen rodrefr, &c, if 
thou hadst been present, my brother would not have died. 

5th, Concessive ; groar, to be sure, indeed, true ; roxeroofyf, 
obroel)l, obfcfyon, obgletd), roenn gletd), though, although ; e. g. 
e b ro o I) I Ca3 ^Setter fcfyon tfr, fo fann er bod) mcfyt auSgeljw, 
though the weather is fine, he is nevertheless unable to go out. 
Compare also page 296. 

6th, Causal ; benn, for ; ta f roetl, nun, since ; e. g. id) gefye 
mtt ©tr, ro e 1 1 ©u ben recfyten 2Beg nidjt fennfr, I go with you, 
because you do not know the right way ; sorrodrtS mugt ©it, 
benn rinf rodttS fanrtft ©u md)t mefyr, you must go onward, 
for back you can no longer go. 

7th, Illative ; atfo, bawm, therefore ; bafyer, hence ; beg* 
fyalb, begroegen, urn begrottten, on that account; foetid), conse- 
quently ; e. g. er tft franf, f o I g 1 1 cfy mu§ er ju £aufe bletben, 
he is sick, consequently he must remain at home; e§ geftel 
tfym md)t mebr nnter ben SRenfcfyen, befroegen gog er fid) tn bte 
Stnfamf ett guriicf, he was no longer pleased among men, there- 
fore he retired into solitude. • 



484 

8th, Final ; bag, that ; <uif ba£, bamtt, in order that ; um 
3ti, in order to ; voix jTrafen t'fyn, b a m 1 1 er fid) beflfere, we punish 
him in order that he may reform ; etlen @te, bamtt 2>te tttcfyt 
$u fpdt fommen, make haste, lest you come too late. 

9th, Comparative ; a(3, ttne, $kid)\v>ie, as, just as ; fo, so, 
thus; a(3 roemt, ate ob, as when, as if; ojetd) ate ob, just as 
if; er fiircfytete fid), al£ ob er attem mare, he was afraid, as if 
he were alone ; er jrellte fid), aH fcfyh'efe er, he acted as if he 
were asleep. 

10th, Conjunctions expressing a relation of time : — bamate, 
bcmn, at that time, then ; tnbeffett, meanwhile ; sorter, aiwor, 
efyer, before, sooner ; batauf, thereupon ; fyernad), afterward ; 
fettbem, since ; ate, bet, when ; warm, when ; rodfyrenb, whilst ; 
tnbem, tnbefifen, in that, during which time ; bte, until, &c. 

§ 192. For those conjunctions which require the verb to 
be put at the end of the sentence, see page 180. On com- 
pound conjunctions, entweber — ober, &c, see page 332. 



INTERJECTIONS. 

§ 193. Interjections are words or articulate sounds 
expressive of sudden emotion. 

The most important interjections used in German, are : — 

ad) ! alas ! ah ! fjclta ! holla ! 

cf) ! ah ! . fnri ! hurrah ! quick ! 

ouf ! up ! f)ufcf) ! hush ! 

brat) ! bravo ! triad* ! crack ! snap ! 

ti ! why ! eigh ! tetfcet ! alas ! 

frifd) ! brisk ! quick ! of) ! o ! oh ! 

fort! away! pciff! puff! puff! 

©liic! $u ! success to you ! pfut ! fy ! 

fa ! ha ! po$taufcnt> ! 'zounds ! 

Ott)t! S ft! >hush! silence! 

\)Z \ X)i t>ci ! soho ! ho there ! fd>t ! ) 

fjalt ! hold ! topp ! agreed ! 

£etl! hail! fkf)! 7 

Wh! 1 ft^ba!5 lo ' behold! 

iud)t)etfa'Ahusza! hey-day! roef) ! ? . , . 

iuebbe ! 5 otx>d)e!5 Wo! alas! 

f)Uf, £immel! heaven help ! roof)tan ! well then ! 



485 

Remark 1. As interjections express no thought, but simply out- 
breaks of feeling, they neither govern other words, nor are they 
governed by any. 

Rem. 2. They stand in connection with every case, but more 
particularly with the nominative. $rifrf) ! ©efellen, fctt) gut £cmb ! 
Brisk ! my workmen, be at hand ! £) bem &l)0ten gefcfytefjt eS tecfyt ! 
the fool deserves it ! 

Rem. 3. The use of roof)!, rcefye, £et(, is elliptical, fet being 
understood. They always require the dative which depends on 
the omitted verb ; e. g. roe he (fet) tfjm ! wo be to him ! £etl (fet) 
£>it ! hail thou ! The interjections 0, a d), and p f u t are frequent- 
ly put with the genitive ; e. g. pfui bet (Scfycmbe ! for shame ! ad) 
teg C£(enbe5 ! alas, the misery 1 

Note. For the general principles of Construction and a 
recapitulation of the Rules of Syntax, which are scattered 
through the book, see Lesson 103, pages 356 — 363. 



486 

TABLE OF CLASSIFICATION 

OF THE 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Remark. — From this table must be excepted the sixteen irregu 
iar verbs, which in our list form the first class.* 



S3 

09 

£ * 

55 ® 

•5 


Infinitive. 


o 
<£ 



ft 

s 


CD 

ph-e 
P-. 


Infinitive. 


ft 


Past 
Participle. 


I 


e 


a 


e 


©efcen, to see, 


fab, 


gefer)en. 


II 


e 
i 


a 





$elfen, to help, 
<Sinnen, to reflect, 


Mf, 
farm, 


gcr)c(fen. 

gcfcnncn. 


III 


t 


a 


u 


Sttnfen, to drink, 


ttanf, 


gettunfen. 


IV 


a 


ie 


a 


galta, to fall, 


Per, 


gefallctt. 


V 


ei 


tc 
i 


ie 
t 


®d)xtibm, to write, 
SBetpen, to bite, 


fcfyttefc, 


gefcfytte&en. 
getoffen. 


VI 


ff, cm, 

c, i, ie, 

8, ft. 





c 


cSdjicpcn, to shopt, 


f*ofc 


gefd&oflen. 


VII 


a 


u 


a 


<Sd)(aQen, to beat, 


ftffog, 


gefcWagen. 



* The 5th and 6th classes include the greater part of the irregular verbs. 



487 



EXPLANATORY REMARKS. 

I. The first class changes the radical vowel e into a in the 
imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. ©eben, to 
give ; imperfect gab ; past part, gegeben. To this class must 
be added : bitten, to entreat (beg), which changes the radical 
vowel t in the same manner, as : imperfect bat } past part, 
gebeten. 

II. The second class changes the radical vowel e or t into 
a in the imperfect, and in the past participle into p. Ex^ 9!efy* 
men, to take; imperf. nafym ; past part, genommen; gettnnnen, 
to win ; imperf. geroann ; past part, geroonnen. To these must 
be added, gebdren, produce (to give birth to), which has a in- 
stead of t in the root, as : imperf. gebav ; past part, geboren* 

III. The third class changes* the radical vowel { into a in 
the imperfect, and in the past part, into u\ Ex. ©cfyltngen, to 
sling ; imperf. fdjtang, past part, gefcfyuingcn ; except btngen, 
to hire; imperf. bung ; past part, gefcungen; fcfytnben, to flay; 
imperf. fcfyunb ; past part, gefcfyunfcen ; and tfyun, to do ; imperf. 
tfyat; past part, getfyatt. 

IV. The fourth class changes the radical vowel a into te in 
the imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. QaU 
ten, to hold; imperf. fytelt; past part, gefyalten ; except fangen, 
to catch ; imperf. ftng ; past part, gefangen. The following 
conform to the principle of the rule, resuming in the past part, 
the radical vowel or diphthong of the present : foufen, to run; 
imperf. (tef ; past part, gefaufen ; gefyen, to go ; imperf. gtng ; 
past part, gegangen ; betgen, to order ; imperf. fyteg ; past part. 
gel)ei£en; rufen,tocall ; imperf. rtef ; past part, gerufen ; jbfjen, 
to push ; imperf. ftteg ; past part, geftogen. 

V. The fifth class changes the radical vowel et into te in 
the imperf. and in the past part, or before a double consonant 
into u Ex. SBtetben, to remain ; imperf. blteb ; past part. 
gebtteben ; fcbnetfcen, to cut ; imperf. fdjmtt ; past part, ge* 
fcfymtten. 



488 

VI. The sixth class changes the radical vowels : a, au, e, I, 
te, b, ii, into o in the imperf. and past participle. Ex. ©djroa* 
ren, to fester ; imperf. fcfywor ; past part, gefcfyworen ; faugen, 
to suck ; imperf. fog ; past part, gefcgen ; faufen, to drink to 
excess; imperf. foffj past part, gefoffen ; t) eb en, to lift ; imperf. 
t)ob ; past part, gefyoben ; tterrotrren, to embroil (to confuse) ; 
imperf. joerroorr ; past part. serroorren ; bteten, to offer ; imperf. 
bot; past part. geboten; fcfyrooren, to swear; imperf. fcfymor 
fcfywur); past part, gefcfyrooren ; liig en, to lie; imperf. tog i 
past part, gelogen. 

VII. The seventh class changes the radical vowel a into u 
in the imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. 
2Bad}fen, to grow ; imperf. roucfyS ; past part, geroacfyfen ; ftefyen, 
to stand, has ftanb in the imperfect (formerly, however, jlunb)» 
and 'n the past part, geftcmben. 



489 



Xj 


Cd 
ft 


m 






44 


r 




^ 


3d 




s 


ft 




£* 


CD 




X 


— 




a 






H3 


- 




O 


•-* 




s 


sd 




■g 


=5 

be 






03 




XI 


*-" 




<4_ 


CD 




o 


rd 




G3 


xl 




M 






03 


* 




P 


_> 


. 






QQ 






en 


03 


2 


-T5 
O 


c 


ne3 


• rH 


c xi 


^3 


S3 


n 


U 


g X 


v 


*— i 


Cm 


* - 


r *Q 


O 


CD 








i-l 


n 


ft 




m 


C3 


ft 


S-c 

CD 
ft 
jjj 


Ed 

ft 


C3 

M 

CD 


+a 


r> 


(t) 


0Q 

cd 

Ph 


01 


Xh 


Xt 

cd 




CD 


JZj 




Xi 




fl 




ft! 




Ed 




0) 


u 


CD 


> 


— 1 


ft 


cd 


rrl 








O 








Xi 


CD 

XI 




Xi 


CD 




£ 






05 


-5 




-£ -^ 




CD 


63 




> 


-3 




s 


C 




£ -3 




CD 


£ 




X 


-"-» 




GO 


P 




OJ 






Xl 


on 




<*■» 


-o 




be 


M 
03 




id 


> 










a 


M 






cd 




[ti 






■U 


-3 




£ 


hfj 




(J 


13 




O 


N 





ES.5 



si I 



sO I 5 <*> 



a a 



w o 
Pi 



-jTj ^O JO >C> vOiU u C S C V «-±- 

<?3^<^cr3^^<^<3^<^<r3cr:<r3 



re* I 

a a 

3^<53 



"£ £ *; *J . .£* £ .£5 <J ~ *» .2* S^ 



-B-s-a^e^^'e^e^e-s^e^ 



a a 



CO 

fl C3 3 
© — J be 



fc £ 






« c* ^t C Co 



y y C 3 C 



a a 



^> cs 



£5 






^ ** .V 

O a 55 

•** C S 

g 2 s 






a a 



as 



a a 



£1* 






M 



cd 
XJ 



, CD 



CD 






O o 



ft oJ 

® 6 



o cd 

fl <D 



H3 

<D 



g § S o 



o o o o 

+* j-a O *^> +-* 



cd o 

CD 03 
X-£2 

P -o 



O 3 

o -o o 



S3 






-^ c c c C v g 

ncccag 






S -5> 'P. 



C 1 



490 



§^ 



s 



£ 

O 

9 

^3 



© 



jS S3 

•"a G "^ 



IP 



13 

B © 

© 
. CO 

o © 



© 

'r-l 

*d 
o 

i 

■s 

© 
> 

© 
-3 






© 

•a 

s • 

a g 

© .5 

© a 

a * 

8 8 

"5 © 



o § 

05 <B 

s. «* 

I > 

© H 



5h 
© 

© 



3 
O 

r 

o 
o 



© 

~a 



O T3 

1 

© <D 
© 

1 

to 

§ 

to 
© 

© 



Imperative. 

2d person of the 

singular. 


ii l i i 


Past 
Participle. 


a 5* a a *fc 

c* «^ o o -a* 
CJi^O <^> sO O 


Imperfect. 


6 

> 

B 
p 

go 


4i 

toe §c 

<g £ IS c£^ S- *> "?J 

*§"*? *§ ^ ^ 


6 

> 

"etf 
o 


V^ • . a 

. a a "rl en. ? 

3^> «* w ^> r^» 

' *S^ *& *S* *S* 


Present 

of the indicative, 2d and 3d persons of 

the singular. 


•■C5 o 


c 
t 


> 


1 f & 

<d *42 a o 

» n n w w ... 

tn-as o is. s- 

*» « -^ teiptj a 
c g> 3 ^ a> c 

>* w o» ift q£ 



491 






t I 



ill &i i i i if i 





** 
o 






CDcTi 
o o 

u a 


c ♦ ^ ♦ e 5 5 c ^ s 5 








sO sO 








^>sO«,o»OsOs0^o>r>^>NO 


^O 








ft> 


<^ 




o ^* 


d>ri>«^^>0«->«><i->^> , i* 


«> 






CD CT) 


CD 


sO 


^o 


sO ^O 


cncr;<SicJicJ5<S)cn<Si<3)cJ) 


en 








ii 


S3 














SO 


c 














«i §5 




l2- 




♦ # 

cn en 

so so 

€ § 


♦ . £ . * £ ^ & £ 5 


s<3 






i« /-> 








*o :o s« *<3 trs 'd w j-» ?-» *■» 


S4 






sS ^ 


i~ 




^JS 


sO >i£ 


A^^^i/ai)*^* 


^£> 






^H* 


!§ 


w s 


>e^ 


*B ^ *S *S~ *& -6" •6' *§* ^ § 


!? 
















. 




4 












* 






O 




/-A 


S3 




cncb 

o o 

€ § 


♦ ** • S3 

o o a cs xri ci ci j-> j-» :-> 






1 


■^/ „o 


>o 


,,£> 


^> 


s£> sO 


>£)s0i)sO^l^i>^>^>^> 


•.o 




>e^ 


r? w 


'& 


s 


3T.1? 


>e>e-B>e*e>s>e-e>s-^ 


>s 




if 


.♦- .«-» 




•i-» 






*«~ > **~* **■* r* - * -*t **■* •*"* **■* **"* * <-> 






1 
































3 

£3> 


o 
















o 


i 












+5 




« 


'.2 


• 




• 


• 


• • 


• 2 • • • • 


• 


•• 


12 


* 










• sO • • • • ' 




+5 


1 


i5 










. 1 g is 




G3 

I 


i 


ft* 


its. 


• 


. 


. • • 


» »* t. ^ 

• •• a • *? • • j^tti. • 


• 


1 


i 


w 


£» 








o ^ ^ -js 




is 




JO 












i 





a> 

o5 



P3 
^3 



a> 

£ Q 



CO M O 



eg- 



C CD 
i^L CD 



3 

S3- 
n c S 

%» a* c 



CD ^Q 
O O 



CD Ph 



a> 

1 s s 

2*° 5 



2 3 o 






|sss 



S®i 



« V 5> 






m <m ©* 



0* 



8^^ 



£S 



f 

O 



Its "3 
8R 



T3 O 



W (<5) 



493 



Imperative. 

2d person of the 

singular. 


1 If 1 if M 1 f 1 

jo jo 5 S 




♦ ~^ ^ ^— ^- g ^ c g" 
*? §2* §¥ ^^ <2-§ s 2;g 1 

o -i><i> ^ri. C 2 S3 C W WW w 


o 

•2 

© 1 

s 

1—4 


i 

o 
| 


*cj *3 w 'P w «-3 s c S C w w ^3 w 

JO jO/i^jO/3 *> ^> $ ^^ <">*■> ^> 


1 
J 

•3 
2 


yo jojo^^io SS o *-> C «2 o 3 5 


Present 

of the indicative, 2d and 3d persons of 

the singular. 


• • • *jj" <^.l_5 • • • • • 

jo *g_i? * 
"£ **' &§ ^ 

J» }_► <i» w *> 

JO ^^ 

"** « 5 S ^ 

JO JO n> *-> *» 
• JO .£2 JO JO JO 




| 
3 


o p « C .^ » g 5 ^. JO g ^ c g « >§ 
S «2 -^ ** *^g*j ccS 5c "w r O sl w^^ , w" 

|^QQ QV| ©©!©© ©o©^).S© 



493 

"•w . s n s 'S *° 

*rt - • * o o o td 1 ^ 

£ I . I | | !s I £ bb bb & | «§■ | | £-g 

tr ■ ct ' ' ' 3> ' £: © © © ' £ -sr! 



»tt 


§ e 




^ 


&: 


e « 


$-* 


j-* ^ 


o 


«-» <>) 


#•* 










* 


jS 


2 £ 


»-» 


j_> CTl 


o 


«> J<3 



C J- C rZ rZ r* 
r y iJ c c n 









s^i .r: ^0 'O >ri -i; f-l »-* u/ s-> s-> -o 



* 




<3 






B^- 


<s> 


G cs 


•e 


*e*e 



rt 



"^ ri ^ r- ^ rf 



- £ a get ***!&* laMir 



3 =? 






••s 5P-3- 




OD • 






Q 



«a 



•fi ^3 '« »5 or -hT r « CO ■ rT g bJQ S 

#1 din ^ ^^omoo'^'oVh U3 





2 "S ® ^ S « 






^^ S of^^ 
















d s Ssta 




© .2 .^ o a> 


© 


e sam 
verb 
rived i 
ves fr 
es \)ab 
eme; 


M 


rC .2 53 '-3 ^ > 


& 


^jg^ d rf c 


o 


"-* c^ .2 «H •n'TS 

St O _o 53 "S ej 




The use 
This ver 
All the d 
d, transpo 
coachma 



494 











H 










«ki 








4 


A 






cn 










<JS 








9 


• "** 






• 


















cn 


>^ * 






•— \ 




















•S°aJ 


























fi s =» 

£ 9 faO 




** 


ft* J-l 

*cn° 


. 
















O 


^^•9 




v — s 


3 


i 


i | 




1 • S 


. , 




1 


• 1 


s a w 




*5 


*° £ c - 


S3 


1 


1 I 


u 


&°c 


| | 




I 


^ 








*B-v Qi 










' Qj ** 








© 


CN 




CD 


Cft jX 








m 


S 








U 


So 

P* £ 
o3 




B 
ft* 


c S 

ft* S 




B 
a* 


5 c 


B 


B § 
i*±.fBT 






B 

t> 
B 
B 


B g 


Pi 




o 


ft* o 

cn^ 




JO 


<3 -3 


S 5 


B B 


2£ 




a 


cn cn 








ft* ft* 






■o o 






ft* ft* 




^* 








<S3 


CTicn 




cn 


<Jic^ 


03 


cSSi 


enesi 




en 


enen 




- 














/ps 








ft* 

B 










ft* 


ft* 




ft* 






^^ 


ft* • 

ft* K3 
ft* *TT- 

<n<^ 




B 
g 


ft* 

S ♦ ft* 






P 
3 


-*cs 
cn 


»C3 ft* 

cncn 




en 


<X)B 




B B 




cn 


8*5 

B ;o '-1^ 

^enen 


& 1 

p. 

J 




CO 


s 


*s*e 




.H 


*&•>*> 


^e 


SS 


*& v> 




« 


^SS 


































sS> ^> 




jo 


<3^B 
B £ 


• 


C5 O 

B B 






B 
B 

g 


c£*y 






t3 


ft* 


<3 ft* 








^c 


«> «> 








o ci 






hS 


CO 


cn-cn 




C?5 


*&*&} 


<n 


<^)Cf5 


^cn 




cn 


cn<n 








*& 


*&*& 




-e 


>8w 


Jg 


^e^e 


^•w> 




^e 


-e>e 




t 




**** 


.*- .«-* 




*** 


.«-» o 




.^ .»-► 


*** 




** - 


.** .»- 


o 






A B 










en 










s 






















-w 


5 
























lie 


s 






.3 i> 
CO ft> 










ft* 








S 


Pi 






v_x Cft 




• 


• • 




• 






• 


cn . 


t3 




* 


■*- w 




• 


• • 




* UB 






• 


w • 


CO 




-4-» 


^O ft* 


















ft* 


a * a 




ft* 
ft* 

cn 

» 

ft* 


• *^dB 

IS B 

ft* 

IB- cn 
« B 








'Sj 


S 
ft* 
B 
ft* 

S 
JO 


w 

i-» 

ft* 






UB 

& 

B 
ft* 

cn 

B 


"3 




IB- 


s** 


















JO 


^3 




ft* 






• 


• • 


^ 






• 


s : 


■5 




<n 


'?* 








"Sj 


hb s 


^cn 






hb 






S 


B Q 








B 


© B 


3 •»*> 






o 


o 




y=> 


y=> m 








JO 


N 


JO ft* 






M 






o 


PJ 






O 


<D 




o 

4-» 






to 


1 




i 

IS 

> 
'So 
o 

B 
ft* 
!•• 


s 
a 

o 

~° 

.5 o 

5 5" 

oT~ S 

3 £ .25 
-a j& ,o 


B 
O 

o 

s % 
|S B 


«0 o 

«» o o° 

Ox"-* ^ x 
^^ B ^ v B 

Dh ^ B 0) ^ -B ^T.S 


5^ . 

— fe s s 

B H *^ «* 
** St. •* B 
^^ « g 

If p. a 


i 

§ M 

BhO 

^ B 






1 ^* 


o 3f .5* 


-X 




o ^* %* 


02 W > 


ru* ft* 




Q. 


^* 








© 


g,®® 




;© 


k®£) 


©2) 




© 


©© 








1 09 


1-4 O 




if5 


Tp CO. 


0) 


FH «J 


^ r-5 




oi 


to Ul 



495 



I 111 II 



I I 



S « c 



5 <^j 



ire s JS IS- fe- 
es cs c O w o 

«-» o ^> ^> «"-> o 

<*}<?) <?) cn cf) en 



^ cs >S 02 J3 











>-< 


*» 










* 








^o 


sO 






* 




«* 








• *» 


v— / 










*' 5 


<3^cn 






«,£> ** CO. 






4^ 


w-» «-* 5jj 




!§S 


^g-e 


if 


ss 1 


sss 


S*. 


*jr 


s 




S3 


*• 
















•*•* 


but 

2 
V, 






a 

wo 


-•-2 <S5 


** 








02 02 § 


5 

1 


»e«- 


>ee 


**T 


-e^e 


-e-e*e 


>e 


»0 


*R 


*B*S~<*> 


CJ 


.•- .,- 


















.2 



wo 



wo 

.£> 

«-* 

<3 

WO 



is 

"— wo 



s-> 



<£ 


B 






S3 




a 














<U 


«/^ 








•2 


03 


tjn 




farw* 




o 






tf 


bD 




&' u 


+J 


o 


% 




o 


O 



03 



S3 »3'« *S 






S 



*®B 



+* ^ nrt _ ^ 

^^ 111! 3 



s 






• • • • • • 



t^»rS ^ ^^! ^5«>'* 




496 



A 



.£"3 8 



III I 



I I S I 



I I 



*= *> ^ ^* 

AI_i «_ sU-> «_> 

s> *-» «rf ^> 

en en cd en 



c c S - c • «*" 

(3 c C .ti .^ "^ '-> 



*fc£ ~ 5 



^e^es^e 



^ £i: £Len en 

*ss j$j .;2 ££ «S 23 ?2 w 



S JS £ „ 



.*=3 S3 






n c es o 

SU-> SIM «4-> «-* 



8 S 



^e^e^e^B^e^s^B *s 






g|s, 



c 
c 



S3 



U2- 

en 



bo 



• ties, a- 



bo 



J3 
o 
g 

o 









S3 
^3 



o 

o 



■0s<S'§V* 



2 5 



0) 



n j 



^".2- 2 vh «€ 



*Sto5 



fc$ § S(b5 



0J TO .-h .5 KT 



& ee S g g~-g.8 £ 

• — < CJ CJ C* t> «> ^«» • «-> *J -S3 



n3 




bfl 
O 



o 

5 



5> 







c 


# 




, 




3 


2i • 

n e 

O <3 






S 

o 

3 


c s S- s 


P 


$= c 


ft- ft- 


ft 


<r 




«* 










<*) <32 S <J5 


<^i 


<?)<3i 


C«<35 


<J5 


<3J 



497 



i i I -i i I I 



o c s 



*2 ; 5 ~ *o •» SS £*!. t* § 






ncsfi s cc ».ft-5^.o- ft *» « 

^^^^ >& ^"B ^B"B •& ^ *€? *& '5 



cS. 



*<5 ft 

ST** 



1 



3 



c S ft 2 rs c 5- s « ,5 5 *g 

nncsn c • o- ft .S £ M S 

jo >=» .<q .£? .3 io ^o jo {>,psCN§ 

: , — . S«2 <» S 

•><D<1) <U ■*■» o -^ rt - ST? S 

U I A - § § g |8 8 | 

g-fba ° .-a 3-g „- -- . J *s|s 

'i-sl _§ . s " .» s •§ 1 a, •? > 5§ s s 



rrx &-+* CO 05 v-^flv ^5 ° -s v g S*s 









498 





a 






















^ 












































6. 






















>*z b 






















•3 ~ * 






















os ^13 


























HiS* 1 




1 1 




1 


1 


1 1 


MM 


1 


"3 






















CM 




w 


















to O 

e3\C 

Ph 




5- W J-> 




eg 




c 

c 

c 





,0 ,0 


^^ 1 & 


S3 



S3 














«> 





•^ ^> 


* <v 









<sS^ OJ 




<3Sc£> 




en 


<5D 


<Si<Si 


cji crj <S5 


CS5 




' 


si 










S3 
to 

3-* 















p 

'2 


■J <J S3 








c 
c 


«*i- 

^ ^ 






S3 







VI 


*S "B *S 




^e-e 




-s 


c ^ 


'.f 


•gvg- >0'g" 


^e 


s • 

1 






■*■* "~* •*"" 




•— .*— 




**"* 


.«-» 




•^ **?* •*~ > *r* 


**^ 




























6 


<^2 




A<*> 




c 








g 







-3 


5§-~ § 




cs 




C3 




fc: 




s. 









j-» j-> j-» 




>-> fc» 




W 


*w 


1 ^ L 












*e*s^ 




>5~*S~ 




*S" 


« 


1 e 


^0^- ^ >g~ 


*s 


V 




*- **■* •*•* 




.♦- .«-» 




.«-> 




**"' 


.^- .,-. .— .♦* 


•*~ 




g 

1 






















'd 




• • • 




• • 




• 


• 


• 


• • • • 




CO 






















^ eS 






















*> a-; 






















c § 2 






















bo 

» T3 S3 
















itL 


\ 




g«-s 
















» 






&* © a, 
















£S 






•is -5 
















S 


. 




'rS 




. . . 




• • 




• 


• 


' 4il 


• • • • 


• 


1 








• • 






• 


3 


. • . 


• 


s 
















><3 






£ 






































S3 


.. 




c 
















^» 










03 




«*• 1 








1 1 










CD 




CD 09 








x *d 


O 


M 






02 

co 

d © 




•"3 © 

CO »-| 

"1 bob 









O %H 

^ O 


1 

O & 

* s § M 


ft 


© 












d 


13 v .? 




©So 
s ° °° © 





'3 




S « 

-^* T\ r^ 


03 


GO S5 r 


CD 

fax 

hi 

d 

*-( 

w 


c 

S3 

c 


0® 

8?5 


iS CD 

^O ft 

g.S 

«= « DQ 


^ © © 
, - £■ *? S3 

c g S «* ^> 








10 10 8S 




O CO 




d 


^ 


^)0 


«5 i> «o 


tt> 



499 



"J 



bjc^e 









C C C C fi 



p 3 5 5-^cii,5 s5 



*g-^B *6~ ^S" ^S -B 'S' 'S 'B ^ >B *B 



CO 



jB 'J2. -B *B ^BBB'B'^B^^^ *B *B *B 

w B Vw/> B > B *B *B *B *B *B *B *B *B *B *B *S" 



^^ -B *B j§ ? -B" *B 5 Jb *B £ 
e *S*8" *B-B*B-B*B*B*Bj3 j? j? 






j§ £ 



3 






« o ^ 



£ 



55 



o £. 

55 



bD;B 






2 

•= CO 

CD P* 

- ^2 

at?. • 

^ c S o 



2^ 

^ C3 



^"5 S Is 



co .,S .~ ^ 



© 



E)®®1 






(0 

Sr^ g.s £* 

o o2 o o o 

«£ - S C « c 
c <s» ^» '-> • ** 






Jr ^ 



-1 



o3 

*j CQ 

C3 



^•B^-B-B-B 
©©©.©©© 






© o© o 



© -B > 



*S"co *S £ p >B > 



•a cs 

§3 £ 

t;l g. 

a I § * 

* S3 O oo 



© .23 $? es 

. » g ^ 3 

fe fi S « S 

TO S 3J <3D*"-« 

-i' s Sis 'I 

S "73 to "*2 o 

2 c ° s ^ 

^ « g *s ^» 

S3 <i> «> rtj V-* 



«» W M ^ t^ O O »C ^' SO 



*> o 3 



'S ®'S 



S3 



500 



I I I I 



SS'8-«3 

t- so ^ <^> 
•— » o .«-» •♦-► 

£3 H J* S± 






Sn S 



-J S3 Q 

tS28 

c ^> ^-> o 

cncncncri 



?6* 



±3 so «* 5 

.♦-» :o ._» -«-> 
C J-» J-> S-» 



fi* s-> o -"^ 
£3 :o •— l «> 

'22SS 



1 1 



n>3 


CD S3 


n « 


£ £ . J 


o 3 


13 « S3 S 


a a 




jejg; 


CD CT) 


cr»cn cdct) 


c> • 


• 3-» 




e* to • 


5 jo 


.5 « £ . «| 


a a 


£ ai^S 


^rs: 


& >g^-B 



^^SS !§S !§S w ?!f 






S3 



c »-» ^> J-> 



tsai 



a a 



§ iF s^ss sd?ss .*§s s^^sli 



cha • 

!§[ >e«2.a 



£c3.5 



a 



■a 






i£3-^> u 

5S1 



i S3 



GO £ 

3 p 



a - 

^3 4-j» ^ „ 



Oh 






" O O +3 
O ^ ^ -^ _rt 



eg S g.S 

f^» £ CT3>23 
:t3 :<3 "£ ^2 



a 

03 M 

+* o 

J± S3 

S3 ^ 



bJO ~ 

.a- a 

03 J? 
^ 03 






S3 






^^g^aaaS 



•.5j*-5 *P 



a 



a a 



S2 ^ 



(N00 CO 50 Hi 



I 



SOI 





MM 


i 


1 1 1 








if 1 *ff 

51 d=L 




• 
















#" 






c • ~ 




cN 


P 
« 




e *= 


yo 


C |.'~ J 


S3 


** F ~ 




^3 :_» 5-> 






O 1 C3 


,cs; 


»^^E S 


.g. 1 


.a-.p-.p. 




«i±u2:c2i 


,Q- 




tiit 1 SS- 














o 






Ctt 


<S> q?^) <33 


Cfl 


<rs cf) ess 




cr:cri<^ 


<33 




<3i <5i 








^> 






C^i 












c 

c 






*C3 


^ 


ft* 
JO 


c> 


-* • -J 




SC3 

.a: 


^*N 


^i'4 




cr 






*> cr2^ :s 


Co. 


3» 








ssj 




«^- 


^O -^ -3 ;5 


^1 


,a 


so 


c2:l2:.2l. 




Ji£r-£i g_ 


*S 


-e-e-e-g 


•e ' 


1 *€*& 




SSSF 


*e 




^^^N-' 


**■* 




*•*■ 


• r- .,- 






••* 




*** "•"' ^ 














en 












c 






c 




yO 








8 






C5 




c 


* 






C3 






£ 


<— ■ \ 


<3 . 




±2 C C S 


crL 








,g>- 


C3" 
3 




,a 


o ,g ,g ,c? 


*l 


l'~ 


,ft 


,Q.,ft.,p- 




S» 


«§-«■ <S 


*S 


*e*e-e-e 


■e ' 


1 *&*s 




U§ 


!§ 




*e«e>s w 


?•? 


■** "^ ■*■* ■•*■ 


*^* 


**■* • < - > 










.<_► .♦_> ._ 



03 

be 
2 



3 w M 



&r ■" 



02 ^ 23 . 






-s 1 5 gl^H 



•Ss^l 



1 * -a ."§►" -a|«fia 

S ^ rrt -^ Ph Sot ogS'cJ* 

S° +J # o 1 ~ l a- ,F ^... • - » » H 



502 





© 


















»*£. 


XI 


















S» 




















w 


>■ ^ * 








































9J S ^ 


















5-. 

o 


p, s. £3 




















C C, <*> 


>p 




,&a 




I 


1 g I 




S l!& 1 


£ ^o 


"3 


42. 




42-42. 






42. 




•c 5* 


■ £ g* 




















• 


+J "5, 

Pk £ 


2> 




4242. 






&* >i o 

3 O "i-> 

42.42 42. 


42 


♦ s *= 5 
cs c o .^i 

>£^ j_, j_> ^j 


3 2 
.£ tfcr 
























<^i 




CTj CT) 




CS3 


CD CTj <^ 


en 


CD <T} CT, C3") 


en en 




r 







^ 
















03 
O 


£2L 


o 


; 42. 


cJ 


«U 




<i2 


£> ^^.^ 


+2 tfcr 




3 
3 






42. 


5-> 

IS 


SO 

42. 


i<3 .22 's-> 
42-42.42. 


42. 


•-CS ;» *3 .& 
J3 fc. ^ j_> 




3 


02 


*s 




S\§ 




S 


*B*S rS 


^ 


^^g^yffi- 


§:§ 



sm 




















& 




4^ 




















J^ 


















> 


o 

42. 














. 




c3 
o 

a 


c: 
42L 


42 42. 


o 
42. 


42.42.42. 


42. 


s£^ S_» t- W 


<3 






*r 


*e*e 


*e 


-e^e 


-B 


^B 


^e-e-e-e 


^e-B 




[ 




.»-> .,-» 


*♦* 


■•*i •*~* 


•^ 


.«-. 


• , ~' • < ~' •*-* •*-• 


•'- , •*■* 


o 

1 
















4i 


















53 





















p. 




* 


• 


,- 


. 


* 


*2 


V* 


T3 














sO 


J-> 


















^> 


T3 5 


^j» 












M 

^ 


drt 


Preser 

dicative, 2d a 

the singu 


4± 

*-> 

4i 


$-» 
^» 

• 42! 




ox 
•42: 






v42-d£ • 


^ it 

^ iO 

42! •'• 


© 


4l 


42. 




S. 








• .t: 

"S be 




3 


3 




» 






>& » s 




c 


JQ 


yo 




/=> 






.ii jo jo 


JO S 






5 -a 



3 
p^ 



he 
-» »-• 

CD 

O •» 



r^ Bh 
gT3 g 



rt cq H 



00 o Q 



B 
Bh 



W 



q> <i> <^* >M (/) .«_> o 



1 .*S bD 

S If 



„ o o 3 

H3 



C C CD 



? c S e 



® ®® ©^©©©o^^ ^WWlWWMg 



*t ^ irj 



Hh«'l« HO(0 



503 



en ^> 
w en 
"JS *"* 



Mill 









S *$ 






«>* Si j; <5> 



» » » s> 









'»e >s 






13 g g 

3 » » 



o £ 3L to 

.«- *0 ; O 

Tt Vt ^r* ?• 



t«s -e «■ 






c «3 
■£ 






s ? 



.r-» t> .«_» 






~ £ 3 a -a 



*e*s>e >e ^e 



en 



"5 






.3 fe 



o3 

S 
I 



2 



© -§ 



2 ©; 



j-» <w 



w 



*2 5* 
^2 



£ 



o ** 
bJD 03 



*" # © 

g oT 

• ~ ,08 . 



Oh 



08 ' 

Oh 

- a . 

o ^ o 



© 

2 s 

o 






g5 g £ 



* 21 J* ° 



•^ » 21 *? S-*^ wuu en en <32 ci 



2 ° ** 

o ^ 

x xc fare 

"TJS-S 



O 

■8 

03 



»« 






^ 






3 pp 






S? 



504 



St' 



I I I I I I I I . £ ; I 



,2 
'a, 

« ',5 

PL, 2 




c 

en 


$t C g C 2 




S3 


S3 


c *' 




<3 


o 


G O -^ .^ G 


o 




o 


o ~ o 


Ph 


S 


a 


a a a a a 


a 


a 


H 


a a a 




















CD 


CD 


CD CD cD cD cD 


cd 


CD 


CD 


CD CD CD 









<j 




f 








icJ • • 


i« • • . 


o 




# 


Jg t* ^ ,^ /o 


2i v £ 


a t> <j /=> ~c 


c 


. en 


£rs» ^'rrc 


^ £ 


tr cdc ^ 








stJ to -~ .21 3 




.S to -cj & o 

f a a a 


IF 


a 


a 


a a a a a 


S 2 


go 


H 


*g 


>g jg >g- >g~^ 


•e^^-g 


>e^€€ 



a 



toil 

a a a a a 



a 



•7: ^ cdc n 

o . cs o c* o 

a^a a a a 



«-CS 

a 



s<3 

a 



a 

3 



a •§ a 



o 



o 
bo 



3 © +r 



bjo 



s ° 



03 

'§ - 2? & 
£ © £ c 

•2 • fe 

S3 <D v w c v 

£L co c -° 3> c 

*« 03 CD *_, u=L^> 

<3 »h «-0 03 CS o 

SSSSgg 



it* 

+* o 
* ♦* o 



o c o 



-r o 



' o o y ■* 5 
f» y P (D p 



• Si 03 03 

CU' CO -rt 

03 C G CO 

a 



CD^ ^^ ^ 

2 > 



I*. *D l^ «3 US 4f5 : 



<» 



*» 



«Q tD 



.;s .n .s: oc 03 I 
'0 ^6 Ci 



505 





















© _rf C 




















^ ©, 




















C3 C3 «~ 

*-• o r 

63 S-. £ 

©H &H^ 






































CD CD ^ 


.«* 


















OR. 5m S*i 




i 




1 






1 1 


























o t: © 




















r^ OT3 














; 






^9 tr'« 














n 






g ^ £3 ■ 


^ 






n 






. CD 








tin 






j=- 












2 


i 




o 






CD o 














s» 






<u> ^-» 








CD 






en 




CD CD 






























































® •« o 


<^> 












CD 








2 


i 
















CD - c 
{> ?-, cu 


*£T 


1 




sg 






^B^ 






o ^S. 
















&i c %* 


«> 












CD 






8 & 


a 


I 




*P 






O S3, 






cs o 


•ff 


i 




>e 






sg->g- 






© ^-. ^ 


'*-* 






.<-» 






■** •*-* 






> X c 
















.5 CD 


















_Q 


?-i * , 


















*h 


©"«■ h- . 


c£- 


>-• 




, 






, , 




CD 


•« ^^ 


*«* 


."Tli 




* 






• • 






© *J3 fl 


g 


2 














C§ 


J^ 5 




m 












<H 


3 

CO 


^ s - 

os & 3 


SJ 


*£ 












^J 




ja &«' o 


a 


a 












3^ 
fcucfl 


g © ^D 














?-< 


CD 


S^S o 


s 


a 












^J 


> 


/3> 


yo 










t 


1 




■O ■ frH V 


>7T\ 


% 










. # 


C3 


03 


bD © c 
















CD 


f-( T3 o> 


'"5> 

B 


*a 












O 

ce 


P3 


© *£ 


as 
a: 


co 

% 




"" 03 CD 
CD CO 


1 

o 
o 


CO 

o 

09 


CD 


1 CO ». 

L S3 « 


CD 
02 

O 

d 
,9 


% 

CD 


CO 

CO «J 


g 
o 

> 

o 


CD 
CO 

CD 

ce 


CD 

o 

Is 

2 _> 


is 

So 


2^3 

C 03 C 

i @ 


03 

CD 
CO 




o 


^ C CD r- 

$S a'g 

«D CO 


8 

>> 


CO 
o 

s 


C4 ** o 

ale* 8 

1§ > 



22 



506 



OF THE GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 

The subject of the verb is always in the nominative ; the di- 
rect or immediate object is put in the accusative. Ex.: Sari 
fcfyretbt etnert 33rtef, Charles writes a letter. Sari is the sub- 
ject or nominative, etnert 33rief is the immediate object or accu- 
sative. 
I. VERBS WHICH ARE FOLLOWED BY THE NOMINATIVE. 

The following verbs take after them only the nominative ; if 
they have an attribute, it is in like manner put in the nomi- 
native : — 

<& c i n, to be. ©etjji SBtubet war ein proper £etb, his brother was 
a great hero. 

£B e r b e n, to become. (St nmtbe ctn reidber Sftann, he became a 
rich man. 

<B 1 e t b e n, to remain. (St blteb ftetg metn o/tteuet $teunb, he al- 
ways remained my faithful friend. 

£et fieri, to call (be called). Sfletn attcfter 33tubct f)etpt (Sari/ 
my eldest brother is called Charles. 

<S cfy e i n e n, to appear. £)et &a$ fcfeien nur ctne ®tunbe, to6 Satyr 
Ctrl Sag, the day appeared to me an hour, the year a day. 

With some passive verbs, such as genannt merberr, to be 
called, named. Ex. : (£t farm etn btaoet -Sftaim genannt werbert, 
he can (may) be called a good man; cjefcfyoltert roerben, to be 
chided. 

II. VERBS WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE. 

a) The following verbs, besides the direct object in the accu- 
sative, have an indirect object in the genitive : — 

ttnHagen, to accuse. 50fcm Hagte tfyri fc>c$ 3)tebffaf)($ an, they 
accused him of theft. 

*8 e le f) t e n, to instruct. (St rjat mtcf) ctncS SBcffern bctcbtt, he has 
instructed me in. something better (put me right). 

33 e t a u b e n, to deprive, rob. $ftan Fjat if)rt fetneS &$etmb'gen£ ks 
taubt, they have deprived (robbed) him of his fortune. 

23 c f of) u I b 1 9 c n, to charge. 20?an l)at tr)n be£ £od)t)ettatr;$ tie* 
fcfyitfbtqt, they have charged him with high treason. 

<S n 1 1 e b i 9 e n, to exempt, dispense. Sttan f>at tfyn fcineS 2Cmtc$ 
entfegt, they have dismissed him from his office. 

tlcbcrfftrjren, u b e t n> e i f e n, to convict. $ftan fiat tf)tt cb 
neg aSctbred)en$ ubetfitfytt (ubctrmefen), they have convicted him of a 
crime. 

Uebetfjcbeti*, to exempt. Semanbem dnet (Sacfye ubetfjeben, to 
exempt a person from any thing (or trouble). 



• 507 

Ucbct$eugcn, to persuade, convince. <§t \)ai mtd) beffen a 
(ibct^cu^t, he has convinced me of it. 

&> e r ft cb e t n (see Obs. Lesson 64), to assure. 3d) »erficf)ete 
©t'e. mctncr jpcdbacbtung tint) metner £iebe, I assure you of my esteem 
and affection. 

$ etroetfen*, to banish. (Stncn be£ £anbes b ttctroctfen, to 
banish a person from his country. 

9£ it r b t g e n, to honour, estimate. (Sr wtirbtgt mid) fctncS 5Set* 
tremens, he honours me with his confidence. 

b) A considerable number of reflexive verbs require an in- 
direct object in the genitive, as : — 

• © t c(j a n n c r) m c n*, to interest one's self. (St nafym ftd) be$ $tn? 
bos an, he interested himself in (for) the child. 

S t cb 6 e b t en e ti, to avail one's self. 3d) bebtcne nitd) bicfer 
fcboncn ©ek^enfu'tt, I avail myself of this good opportunity. 

S t cb 6 e f Tc t pen* or beflettngen, to apply, attach one's 
self. SBcfTctptge £>kf) bcr Sugenb, attach yourself to virtue. 

S t cb f c t n e $ a m t c g, f e i n e r $ c r b c r u n a begeben*, to 
resign one's office, to desist from, renounce one's claim, pretension. 

(S i cb b c m a cb t i g e n, fi cb b c m e t ft e r n, to possess one's self, 
to make one's self master. ?0?an bemacbttgte fid) $>£$ JDtebcS, they pos- 
sessed themselves of (captured) the thief. 

Sid) e t n c $ SD v t c 6 b e ft n n e n *, to remember a place. 

S t cb b e S 2B c t n e $ c n t b a ( t e n *, to abstain from wine. 

S t cb etnet <SqcI)C entfd)lci gen*, to divest one's self of 
(give up) any thing. 

(Sid) b e r 2( r 111 c n erbarnun*, to take upon one's self the 
cause of the poor. 

@td) etneS 33erfpted)eng (or an fein&etfptedjen) 
erinnern. (Obs. D. Lesson 71), to remember a promise. 

S t cb f c t n i $ 3 c t n c $ c r n? e f) r c n, to check one's anger. 

(Sicb etnet 2Cntrcottgett6ften, to console one's self with 
an answer (await a reply in confidence). 

S t cb f e t n e $ $K e i cb t fj u m S r it r) m e n, to boast of one's riches. 

S i cb ciner f cb t e cb t c n $ a n b ( u n 9 f d) a m e n, to blush 
(feel ashamed) at a bad action. 

Stcb ctncr Sacbe untetfangen* (cber untetftefyen), to 
venture upon (undertake) any thing. 

(Stcb etneS fold) en @Utcf$ ttetmutfycn, to anticipate 
(calculate upon) such good fortune. 

S t cb etnet S ad) e t) e t f e I) e n, to be aware of (prepared for) 
any thing. 

Sic!) etnet (Sad) c tt) e t g e t n, to hesitate upon (refuse) any 
. thing. 

« This verb is used also with SOtt, as : 3>cfj li\X SOtt %fynt ^vettttbfcfmft liber* 
JCUgt, I am convinced of your friendship. 

b This may also take after it the preposition <ttt§, as : Setltattbett <Ut8 bem 
£anbv verv^eifert, to banish a person from his country. 



508 

c) Many verbs are used indifferently with the genitive 01 
accusative ; but with the genitive they mark a sense more gen- 
eral and more absolute than with the accusative, as : — 

2£ d) t c n, esteem. 3d) acbte feinct (ober ifjri), I esteem him. 

$ e b tt r f e n, to be in need. 2Btr bebtivfen 3hrcr (ober Sbn) #iife 
fe, we are in need of your aid. 

" '% n t b e h r e n, to spare, do without. 3d) fcmn fciner (ober tfyn) nid)t 
cntbcbten, I cannot spare (do without) him. 

(S* r w a f) n e n, to mention, make mention. (St eriDcitynte 3ftrer 
(obet @te), he mentioned (made mention of) you. 

© e ni c p e n, to enjoy, CSkmef'e t>c^ £ebens (ober ba^ £eben), en- 
joy life. 

ty f t c 9 c n, to take care. (£*t pffegte feinet (obet fetnc) ©efunbfyett, 
he took care ot his health. 

@d)cn en, to spare (take care of), £ftcm mup fciner {ober tfjn) 
fcfyoncn, they mus* spare him. 

d) The verb fetrt, to be, requires the genitive in the following 
ex\ /essions :— 

(3 e mo () n t f e i n, to be accustomed, (gr tji beffen md)t getuofynt, 
tie is not accustomed to it. 

3) ' t r 93ieinung f e t n, to be of opinion. 

©U t e n Wl u t \) e $, g u t c r Nune f e t n, to have courage, 
to be in a good humour, in spirits. 

£8 i ( I e n $ f e t n, to have the intention. 

£) e g & b e g f e t n, to die, be dead, (gr tft be^ Sobeg, he is 
a dead man. 

©uter £offnung- fein, to be with child. 

Rem. — Verbs always require after them the same case as 
the past participles used adjectively. (See the government of 
adjectives, Lesson 93.) 

e) Verbs referring to time, require in like manner the geni- 
tives, although not followed by a preposition, as :— 

£) c g 9)1 1 g e n g , beg ?( b en b 6 f p 3 i e r e n g e r) e n , to 
take a walk in the morning, in the evening. 

3)eg 9?ad)tg c (bet 9? ch t or bte 9?ad)t f)tnt>utd)) 
atbetten, to w^ork at (all) night. 

3) e g 83 r m 1 1 1 a g g a b t e t [ e n , to depart (start, set out) 
in the morning, forenoon. 

£)eg 9£ad)mtttagg fpagteren tctten, to ride out (on 
horseback) in the afternoon. 

£> e g & a g g (bet ober a m 3! a g e ) a r b e i t e n , to wort 
by day, in the day time. I 

c Custom requires that the word Viadjt, although feminine, takes here an 9 
in the genitve. 



509 

<S o n n t a cj $ unb 93? c n t a §* cj e b t tic ty jt a b, the mail 
leaves on (every) Sunday and Monday. 

93* c t n J r c it n t) £ c m m t ' f e d) 6 111 a I $> c$ 3 a b t $ (0 b e t 
tm Sabre)/ ^cimnl tes 932onat$ (obet tin 93? on at), 
e t n m a I b i e &3 c cb e (accusative), my friend comes six times a 
(in the) year, twice a month, once a week. (See Lessons 31 and 54, 
Obs. £.) 

III. VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 

Besides the direct object in the accusative, verbs often have 
an indirect one, which is put in the dative. Ex. : — 

3 e m a n b e m e t to a $ 3 c b e n, to give something to some- 
body. 

3 e m a n b e m f a 9 e n, tn c ( b c n, f cb r e t b e n, a n t to ts 
ten, to say to, mention to, write to, reply to somebody. 

The verbs which require the dative are : — 

a) Most neuter verbs which do not admit of a direct object 
in the accusative, as : — 

3 e m a n b e m angcfjoten, to belong- to somebody. 

3 e 111 a n b c m a u .6 rc> e i eb e n *, to avoid somebody. 

(55 c f a 1 I c n, to please. (St gefallt iritr fcf)r / he pleases me much. 

3 e 111 a n b c in a, c b c r cb c 11, to obey somebody. 

3 c m a n b e m £3 I c t cb e n *, to resemble somebody. 

b) The following reflexive verbs : — 

© t cb e t 11 b 1 ( b e n, to imagine to one's self. £)u bttbeft Dtt 
etn, you imagine to yourself. 

@ t cb e r q c b e n # , to yield, surrender. (St etcjiOt ftdj bet Stfs 
genb, he yields to virtue. 

© t cb* n S f) c r n (0 b e r ft cb n a b c n), to approach. £T?a'bctn 
fete fid) bem getter, approach the fire. (St naf)et ficb nut, he approaches 
me. 

^ i cb t> t ft e U e n, to represent to one's self, to imagine. 3$ 
(telle nut ret, I represent to myself. 

© i cb to X b nre n, to devote (consecrate, dedicate) oneself. (St 
ttnbmet ftcb ben ©efebciften, he devotes himself to business. 

c) Certain impersonal verbs. See page 158, Obs. A. 

(S $ t ft 111 1 t a n -9 ft, I am afraid. 

(S g f cb e i n t ©it, it appears to you (thee). 

SOS e n n e $ 3f)ttcn b e 1 1 e b t, if you please, like. 

(S £ b a t m 1 1 g C 1 1 a u tn t, I dreamt, &c. 

IV. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE, 
a) All active and transitive verbs are followed by the accu 
sative of the direct object, which in the passive voice becomes 
the subject nominative, as : — 



510 

ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 

3d) f d) ff £ e meinen $ r cunt), 2Q?ctn greunb wtvb son tmv gcfd)a'$k 

I esteem, appreciate my friend. 
3d) ef)ve bie2Gal)rf)ett, I £)te SBabrbctt nntb *>on nut gcc^rt. 

honour the truth. 
(5 1 It c bt b a S $ i n b, he loves £)a$ frtnb rotrb oon ttym gcliebt. 

the child. 

b) Most of those reflexive verbs, which ought to be consid- 
ered as active, expressing an action which terminates in the 
agent himself (see Lesson 70), as : — 

3d) f r c u e mid), I rejoice. 

2) u f d) a m ft £) i d), you are (thou art) ashamed. 

23 e m ft I) e n © i e ft d) n i cr> t, do not trouble yourself. 

c) Certain impersonal verbs. (See page 158, Obs, .A.), as : 

(5 $ b u n g e r t nil d), I am hungry. 
<g $ f 1 1 e 1 1 i b n, he is cold. 

d) The following verbs govern two accusatives, the one of 
the person, and the other of the thing : — 

£ c t £ e n *, to call, be called, order. (Sr F>ctpt mid) ctnen barren, 
he calls me a fool. 2Bcr bat £)td) ba$ gcbeipen ? who ordered you to 
do that? 

91 e n n e n *, to name, call. 3d) ncnne tf)n mctnen gteunb, I call, 
him my friend. 

& cb e ( t e n*, f d) i m p f c n, d to abuse. (St fcfyaft (fd)impftc) 
micb ctnen barren, he called me a fool by way of reproach. 

d It must not be forgotten that the verbs tjetfsett, netttten f^eltett, and fc$tm« 
tyfett have two nominatives in the passive. 






D. Appleton fy Co.'s Educational Publications. 

I. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 

THE FRENCH LANGUAGE, 

With an Appendix, containing the Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and full Paradigms of t 
Regular and Irregular, Auxiliary, Reflective, and Impersonal Verbs. 

By J. L. Jewett. One Volume, 12mo. $1. 
II. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 

THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. 

With an Appendix, containing a brief, but comprehensive Recapitulation of the Rules ai i 

as of all the Verbs, both Regular and Irregular, so as to render their use easy 

and familiar to the most ordinary capacity. 

TOGETHER WITH 

PRACTICAL RULES FOR SPANISH PRONUNCIATION, AND MODEL Of 

SOCIAL AND COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 

Tbe whole designed for young learners and persons who are their own instructors. 

By M. Vilazquez and T. Simonne, Prof, of the Spanish and French Langt* g&k 
One Volume, 12mo. of 560 pages. Price $1 50. 

III. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPE^K 

THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 

Reprinted from the Frankfort edition, to which is added a Systematic Outline of ft different 

Parts of Speech, their Inflection and Use, with full Paradigms, and a 

complete List of the 1/regular Verbs. 

1 By George J. Adler, A.B., Prof, of German in the University of the City ol 
New- York. One Volume, 12mo. $1 50. 

IV. 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 
LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 

THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE. 

With Additions and Corrections by FELIX FORESTI, Prof, of the Italian Language il 
Columbia College, New- York City. One Volume, 12mo. $1 50. 



In separate Volumes, uniform with the Grammars, 

A KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 

Price 75 cents each 



D. Appleton 8f Co.'s Educational Publications. 

French, German, Italian, and Spanish Reading Books, 

i. 

NEW ELEMENTARY FRENCH READER. 

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE FRENCH LANGUAGE: 

Containing Fables, Select Tales, Remarkable Facts, Amusing Anecdotea, 

&c. With a Dictionary of all the Words, translated into English. 

By M. De Fivas, Member of Several Literary Societies. 

One neat volume, iGmo. Price 50 cents. 

II, 
NEW MODERN FRENCH READER. 

MORCEAUX CHOISIES DES AUTEURS MODERNES, 

A LA USAGE DE LA JEUNESSE; 
With a Vocabulary of the New and Difficult Words and Idiomatic Phrases 
adopted in Modern French Literature. By F. Rowan. Edited by 
J. L. Jewett, Editor of Ollendorff's French Grammar. 
One volume, 12mo. 75 cents. 

III. 
NEW DRAMATIC FRENCH READER. 

: CHEFS-D'CEUVRES DRAMATIQUES 

DE LA LANGUE PEANCAISE. 

Mis en Ordre Progressif, et Annotes, pour en faciliter L'Intelligence. Par 

A. G. Collot, Professor de Langues et de Litterature. 

One volume, 12mo, of 520 pages. Price $1. 

IV. 

A PROGRESSIVE GERMAN READER, 

Prepared with reference to Ollendorff's German Grammar, with copious No tea 

and a Vocabulary. By G J. Adler, Professor of the German Language 

and Literature in the University of the City of New- York. 

One neat volume, 12mo. $1. 

V. 

NEW ITALIAN READER. 

CRESTOMAZIA ITALIANA: 

A Collection of Selected Pieces in Italian Prose, designed as a Class Reading- 
Book for Beginners in the Study of the Italian Language. By E. Felix 
Foresti, LL. D., Professor of the Italian Language and Literature in 
Columbia College and in the University of the City of New- York. 
One neat volume, 12mo. Price $1. 

VI. 

A NEAV SPANISH READER. 

Consisting of Passages from the most approved Authors in Prose and Verse 

arranged in Progressive Order ; 

For the use of those who wMi to obtain easily a Practical Knowledge of the Castilian 

Language! with Plain Rules for its Pronunciation, Notes Explanatory of the 

Idioms and Difficult Constructions, and a Copious Vocabulary. 

1B1NO A SEQUEL TO OLLENDORFF'S METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 

THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. 

By MARIANO VELAZQJ EZ DE LA CADENA, 
Editor of OH* , mar . Ohe neat volume, 12tno. Price $1.25 



D. Appleton Sf Co.'s Publications. 



French, German, Spanish, and English Dictionaries. 
A DICTIONARY 

OF THE 

GERMAN AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES, 

Indicating the Accentuation of every German Word, containing several hundred German Sy»»> 

nyms, together wirh a Classification and Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, 

an'.l a List of German Abbreviations. Compiled from the Works of 

Hilpert, Flugel, Greis, Heyse, and others. 

3N TWO PARTS : I. GERMAN AND ENGLISH. II. ENGLISH AND GERMAN. 

By G. J. ADLER, A. M., 

Professor of the German Language and Literature in the University of the City of New- York, 
One large volume, 8vo., of 1400 pages. Price $5. Strongly and neatly bound. 

THE STANDARD PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY 

OF THE 

FRENCH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES. 

IN TWO PARTS : 1. FRENCH AND ENGLISH II. ENGLISH AND FRENCH. 

The First Part comprehending words in common use — Terms connected with Science — 
Terms belonging to the Fine Arts — 4000 Historical Names — 4000 Geographical Names — HOC 
terms lately published, with the pronunciation of every word, according to the French 
Academy and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians ; together with 750 Critical 
Remarks, in which the various methods of pronouncing employed by different authors are inves- 
tigated and compared with each other. 

The Second Part containing a copious Vocabulary of English words and expressions, with 
the Pronunciation according to Walker. 

The whole preceded by a practical and comprehensive System of French Pronunciation. 

By GABRIEL SURENNE, F. A. S. E., 

Fieneh Teacher in Edinburgh ; Corresponding Member of the French Grammatical Society of 
Paris, &c, &c. Reprinted from a duplicate cast of the stereotype plates of the last Edinburgh 
edition. One stout volume, 12mo., of nearly 900 pages. Price $1 50. 

III. 

A DICTIONARY of the ENGLISH LANGUAGE, 

CONTAINING THE PRONUNCIATION, ETYMOLOGY, AND EXPLANATION OF ALL 
WORDS AUTHORIZED BY EMINENT WRITERS ; 
To which are added, a Vocabulary of the Roots of English Words, and an Accented List 
of Greek, Latin, and Scripture Prooer Names. 

By ALEXANDER REID, A. M., 

Rector of the Circus School, Edinburgh. With a Critical Preface, by Henry Reed, Professor 
of English Literature in the University of Pennsylvania, and an Appendix, showing the pro- 
nunciation of nearly 3000 of the most important Geographical Names. One volume, l2mo M 
of nearly 600 pages, bound in leather. Price $1 

IV. 

In preparation, 

A DICTIONARY OF THE 
SPANISH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES. 

IN TWO PARTS: I. SPANISH AND ENGLISH. II. ENGLISH AND SPANISH. 

By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA, 

Editor of Ollendorff's Spanish Grammar, and 

M. SEOANE, M. D. 

In one large 8vo. volume, uniform with Adler's German Lexicon." 



D. Appleton fy Co.'s Educational Publications. 

ARNOLD'S CLASSICAL SERIES. 

I. 

A FIRST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK 

And Practical Grammar. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised and care* 

fully Corrected, by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One vol. 12mo. 75 cts. 

II. 

LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION : 

A Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition. By Thomas K. Arnold, 
A.M. Revised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. l2mo. $1. 

III. 

FIRST GREEK BOOK; 

With Easy Exercises and Vocabulary. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Re- 
vised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. l2mo. 62J cts. 

IV, 
GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION : 
A Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composition. By Thomas K. Ar- 
nold, A.M. Revised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A.M. 
One volume, l2mo. 75 cts. 

V. 

GREEK READING BOOK, 

For the Use of Schools ; containing the substance of the Practical Introduction 

to Greek Construing, and a Treatise on the Greek Particles, by the Rev. 

Thomas K. Arnold, A.M., and also a Copious Selection from Greek 

Authors, with English Notes, Critical and Explanatory, and a 

Lexicon, by J. A. Spencer, A.M. One vol. 12mo. $1 50. 

VI. 
CORNELIUS NEPOS ; 

With Practical Questions and Answers, and an Imitative Exercise on each 

Chapter. By Thomas K. Arnold, A.M. Revised, with Additional 

Notes, by Prof. Johnson, Professor of the Latin Language 

in the University of the City of New- York. 12mo. 

A new, enlarged edition, with Lexicon, Index, etc. $1 00. 

" Arnold's Greek and Latin Series. — The publication of this valuable collection of 
classical school books may be regarded as the presage of better things in respect to the mode of 
teaching and acquiring languages. Heretofore boys have been condemned to the drudgery of going 
over Latin and Greek Grammar without the remotest conception of the value of what they were 
leariting, and everyday becoming more and more disgusted with the dry and unmeaning task ; but 
now, by Mr. Arnold's admirable method — substantially the same with that of Ollendorff — the mo- 
ment they take up the study of Latin or Greek, they begin to learn sentences, to acquire ideas, to see 
how the Romans and Greeks expressed themselves, how their mode of expression differed from ours, 
vnd by degrees they lay up a stock of knowledge which is utterly astonishing to those who have 
dragged on m »nth after month in the old-fashioned, dry, and tedious way of learning languages. 

44 Mr. Arnold, in faot, has had the good sense to adopt the system of nature. A child learns 
his own language by imitating what he hears, and constantly repeating it till it is fastened in 
the memory ; in the same way Mr. A. puts the pupil immediately to work at Exercises in Latin 
and Greek, involving the elementary principles of the language — words are supplied — the mode 
of putting them together is told the pupil — he is shown how the ancients expressed their ideas; 
and then, by repeating these things again and again— iterum iterumque — the docile pupil has 
them indelibly impressed upon his memory and rooted m his understanding. 

"The American Editor is a thorough classical set alar, and has been a practical teacher fof 
yeans in this city. He has devoted the utmost care u a complete revision of Mr. Arnold's works, 
has corrected several errors of inadvertence or on«*iwise, lias rearranged and improved variout 
matters in the early volumes of thq sefieJ, and bis* attended most diligently to the accurate print- 
e w lole We an * 



ing and mechanical executid 



tion of these works in our stfrujcAilrod c )\\efr*. '—Cour. # Enq, 



, r Arnold's Series of Cl^ical. Wo 
mnd. beinu introduced into nerfrlv nil tli 



; anticipate most confidently the speedy adop* 



k» nas attained a circulation almost unparalleled in Eng 
real. Public Schools e nd leading Educational Institution! 



ob 






















^ ^ 




% ? 



I 



x 00 ^. 



V 



» ***** * 












,$ %, 






o> * 






'• fc V 








% <$ 
















^ V* 



X 0o x. 






,% 
















V 












^ 



,-> ^ A 






%- ^ 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 



Treatment Date: Nov. 2006 



^ 



PreservationTechnoiogies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 



1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 













%■ ,#' 









<1% 



o o 



^ V* 



<H 






k v ^ 

















•? V 










x 


















L « oO 








N ^. 














« 
















r J^ 



^ v*^ 



* V 
















m 



M 









mm 

It 

B 

gp 




I 

IIIBrI 

lIHl 

H P 

Mis 







iMti 



